Getting more systematic about style

Also start removing _ANSI_ARGS_; the core's required ANSI C for a while now
Also fix [Bug 1252702]; size_t doesn't mix with Tcl_GetStringFromObj

27 files changed, 15183 insertions, 15057 deletions

diff --git a/ChangeLog b/ChangeLog
index 15c4a91..8fcd3bb 100644
--- a/ChangeLog
+++ b/ChangeLog
@@ -1,3 +1,9 @@
+2005-08-10  Donal K. Fellows  <dkf@users.sf.net>
+
+	* generic/tkFrame.c (CreateFrame) and others: Don't use size_t
+	when working with Tcl_GetStringFromObj because it is not 64-bit
+	clean. [Bug 1252702]
+
 2005-08-04  Vince Darley <vincentdarley@users.sourceforge.net>
 
 	* doc/text.n: Clarify behaviour of tab stops (as per [Bug 1247835])
diff --git a/generic/tkBind.c b/generic/tkBind.c
index c8a5b78..c6df007 100644
--- a/generic/tkBind.c
+++ b/generic/tkBind.c
@@ -1,17 +1,17 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkBind.c --
  *
- *	This file provides procedures that associate Tcl commands
- *	with X events or sequences of X events.
+ *	This file provides functions that associate Tcl commands with X events
+ *	or sequences of X events.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1989-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- *  RCS: @(#) $Id: tkBind.c,v 1.35 2004/08/29 09:27:35 dkf Exp $
+ *  RCS: @(#) $Id: tkBind.c,v 1.36 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkPort.h"
@@ -25,7 +25,6 @@
 #include "tkUnixInt.h"
 #endif
 
-
 /*
  * File structure:
  *
@@ -46,111 +45,109 @@
  * Non-package-specific helpers.
  */
 
-
 /*
- * The following union is used to hold the detail information from an
- * XEvent (including Tk's XVirtualEvent extension).
+ * The following union is used to hold the detail information from an XEvent
+ * (including Tk's XVirtualEvent extension).
  */
+
 typedef union {
-    KeySym	keySym;	    /* KeySym that corresponds to xkey.keycode. */
-    int		button;	    /* Button that was pressed (xbutton.button). */
-    Tk_Uid	name;	    /* Tk_Uid of virtual event. */
-    ClientData	clientData; /* Used when type of Detail is unknown, and to
-			     * ensure that all bytes of Detail are initialized
-			     * when this structure is used in a hash key. */
+    KeySym keySym;		/* KeySym that corresponds to xkey.keycode. */
+    int button;			/* Button that was pressed (xbutton.button). */
+    Tk_Uid name;		/* Tk_Uid of virtual event. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Used when type of Detail is unknown, and to
+				 * ensure that all bytes of Detail are
+				 * initialized when this structure is used in
+				 * a hash key. */
 } Detail;
 
 /*
- * The structure below represents a binding table.  A binding table
- * represents a domain in which event bindings may occur.  It includes
- * a space of objects relative to which events occur (usually windows,
- * but not always), a history of recent events in the domain, and
- * a set of mappings that associate particular Tcl commands with sequences
- * of events in the domain.  Multiple binding tables may exist at once,
- * either because there are multiple applications open, or because there
- * are multiple domains within an application with separate event
- * bindings for each (for example, each canvas widget has a separate
- * binding table for associating events with the items in the canvas).
- *
- * Note: it is probably a bad idea to reduce EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE much
- * below 30.  To see this, consider a triple mouse button click while
- * the Shift key is down (and auto-repeating).  There may be as many
- * as 3 auto-repeat events after each mouse button press or release
- * (see the first large comment block within Tk_BindEvent for more on
- * this), for a total of 20 events to cover the three button presses
- * and two intervening releases.  If you reduce EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE too
- * much, shift multi-clicks will be lost.
- * 
+ * The structure below represents a binding table. A binding table represents
+ * a domain in which event bindings may occur. It includes a space of objects
+ * relative to which events occur (usually windows, but not always), a history
+ * of recent events in the domain, and a set of mappings that associate
+ * particular Tcl commands with sequences of events in the domain. Multiple
+ * binding tables may exist at once, either because there are multiple
+ * applications open, or because there are multiple domains within an
+ * application with separate event bindings for each (for example, each canvas
+ * widget has a separate binding table for associating events with the items
+ * in the canvas).
+ *
+ * Note: it is probably a bad idea to reduce EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE much below 30.
+ * To see this, consider a triple mouse button click while the Shift key is
+ * down (and auto-repeating). There may be as many as 3 auto-repeat events
+ * after each mouse button press or release (see the first large comment block
+ * within Tk_BindEvent for more on this), for a total of 20 events to cover
+ * the three button presses and two intervening releases. If you reduce
+ * EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE too much, shift multi-clicks will be lost.
  */
 
 #define EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE 30
 typedef struct BindingTable {
-    XEvent eventRing[EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE];/* Circular queue of recent events
-					 * (higher indices are for more recent
-					 * events). */
-    Detail detailRing[EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE];/* "Detail" information (keySym,
-					 * button, Tk_Uid, or 0) for each
-					 * entry in eventRing. */
-    int curEvent;			/* Index in eventRing of most recent
-					 * event.  Newer events have higher
-					 * indices. */
-    Tcl_HashTable patternTable;		/* Used to map from an event to a
-					 * list of patterns that may match that
-					 * event.  Keys are PatternTableKey
-					 * structs, values are (PatSeq *). */
-    Tcl_HashTable objectTable;		/* Used to map from an object to a
-					 * list of patterns associated with
-					 * that object.  Keys are ClientData,
-					 * values are (PatSeq *). */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter in which commands are
-					 * executed. */
+    XEvent eventRing[EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE];
+				/* Circular queue of recent events (higher
+				 * indices are for more recent events). */
+    Detail detailRing[EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE];
+				/* "Detail" information (keySym, button,
+				 * Tk_Uid, or 0) for each entry in
+				 * eventRing. */
+    int curEvent;		/* Index in eventRing of most recent event.
+				 * Newer events have higher indices. */
+    Tcl_HashTable patternTable;	/* Used to map from an event to a list of
+				 * patterns that may match that event. Keys
+				 * are PatternTableKey structs, values are
+				 * (PatSeq *). */
+    Tcl_HashTable objectTable;	/* Used to map from an object to a list of
+				 * patterns associated with that object. Keys
+				 * are ClientData, values are (PatSeq *). */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter in which commands are
+				 * executed. */
 } BindingTable;
 
 /*
- * The following structure represents virtual event table.  A virtual event
- * table provides a way to map from platform-specific physical events such
- * as button clicks or key presses to virtual events such as <<Paste>>,
+ * The following structure represents virtual event table. A virtual event
+ * table provides a way to map from platform-specific physical events such as
+ * button clicks or key presses to virtual events such as <<Paste>>,
  * <<Close>>, or <<ScrollWindow>>.
  *
  * A virtual event is usually never part of the event stream, but instead is
- * synthesized inline by matching low-level events.  However, a virtual
- * event may be generated by platform-specific code or by Tcl scripts.  In
- * that case, no lookup of the virtual event will need to be done using
- * this table, because the virtual event is actually in the event stream.
+ * synthesized inline by matching low-level events. However, a virtual event
+ * may be generated by platform-specific code or by Tcl scripts. In that case,
+ * no lookup of the virtual event will need to be done using this table,
+ * because the virtual event is actually in the event stream.
  */
 
 typedef struct VirtualEventTable {
-    Tcl_HashTable patternTable;     /* Used to map from a physical event to
-				     * a list of patterns that may match that
-				     * event.  Keys are PatternTableKey
-				     * structs, values are (PatSeq *). */
-    Tcl_HashTable nameTable;	    /* Used to map a virtual event name to
-				     * the array of physical events that can
-				     * trigger it.  Keys are the Tk_Uid names
-				     * of the virtual events, values are
-				     * PhysicalsOwned structs. */
+    Tcl_HashTable patternTable;	/* Used to map from a physical event to a list
+				 * of patterns that may match that event. Keys
+				 * are PatternTableKey structs, values are
+				 * (PatSeq *). */
+    Tcl_HashTable nameTable;	/* Used to map a virtual event name to the
+				 * array of physical events that can trigger
+				 * it. Keys are the Tk_Uid names of the
+				 * virtual events, values are PhysicalsOwned
+				 * structs. */
 } VirtualEventTable;
 
 /*
- * The following structure is used as a key in a patternTable for both 
- * binding tables and a virtual event tables.
+ * The following structure is used as a key in a patternTable for both binding
+ * tables and a virtual event tables.
  *
- * In a binding table, the object field corresponds to the binding tag
- * for the widget whose bindings are being accessed.
+ * In a binding table, the object field corresponds to the binding tag for the
+ * widget whose bindings are being accessed.
  *
- * In a virtual event table, the object field is always NULL.  Virtual
- * events are a global definiton and are not tied to a particular
- * binding tag.
+ * In a virtual event table, the object field is always NULL. Virtual events
+ * are a global definiton and are not tied to a particular binding tag.
  *
- * The same key is used for both types of pattern tables so that the 
- * helper functions that traverse and match patterns will work for both
- * binding tables and virtual event tables.
+ * The same key is used for both types of pattern tables so that the helper
+ * functions that traverse and match patterns will work for both binding
+ * tables and virtual event tables.
  */
+
 typedef struct PatternTableKey {
     ClientData object;		/* For binding table, identifies the binding
 				 * tag of the object (or class of objects)
-				 * relative to which the event occurred.
-				 * For virtual event table, always NULL. */
+				 * relative to which the event occurred. For
+				 * virtual event table, always NULL. */
     int type;			/* Type of event (from X). */
     Detail detail;		/* Additional information, such as keysym,
 				 * button, Tk_Uid, or 0 if nothing
@@ -164,37 +161,34 @@ typedef struct PatternTableKey {
 
 typedef struct Pattern {
     int eventType;		/* Type of X event, e.g. ButtonPress. */
-    int needMods;		/* Mask of modifiers that must be
-				 * present (0 means no modifiers are
-				 * required). */
-    Detail detail;		/* Additional information that must
-				 * match event.  Normally this is 0,
-				 * meaning no additional information
-				 * must match.  For KeyPress and
-				 * KeyRelease events, a keySym may
-				 * be specified to select a
-				 * particular keystroke (0 means any
-				 * keystrokes).  For button events,
-				 * specifies a particular button (0
-				 * means any buttons are OK).  For virtual
-				 * events, specifies the Tk_Uid of the
+    int needMods;		/* Mask of modifiers that must be present (0
+				 * means no modifiers are required). */
+    Detail detail;		/* Additional information that must match
+				 * event. Normally this is 0, meaning no
+				 * additional information must match. For
+				 * KeyPress and KeyRelease events, a keySym
+				 * may be specified to select a particular
+				 * keystroke (0 means any keystrokes). For
+				 * button events, specifies a particular
+				 * button (0 means any buttons are OK). For
+				 * virtual events, specifies the Tk_Uid of the
 				 * virtual event name (never 0). */
 } Pattern;
 
 /*
  * The following structure defines a pattern sequence, which consists of one
- * or more patterns.  In order to trigger, a pattern sequence must match
- * the most recent X events (first pattern to most recent event, next
- * pattern to next event, and so on).  It is used as the hash value in a
- * patternTable for both binding tables and virtual event tables.
- *
- * In a binding table, it is the sequence of physical events that make up
- * a binding for an object.
- * 
- * In a virtual event table, it is the sequence of physical events that
- * define a virtual event.
- *
- * The same structure is used for both types of pattern tables so that the 
+ * or more patterns. In order to trigger, a pattern sequence must match the
+ * most recent X events (first pattern to most recent event, next pattern to
+ * next event, and so on). It is used as the hash value in a patternTable for
+ * both binding tables and virtual event tables.
+ *
+ * In a binding table, it is the sequence of physical events that make up a
+ * binding for an object.
+ *
+ * In a virtual event table, it is the sequence of physical events that define
+ * a virtual event.
+ *
+ * The same structure is used for both types of pattern tables so that the
  * helper functions that traverse and match patterns will work for both
  * binding tables and virtual event tables.
  */
@@ -202,57 +196,57 @@ typedef struct Pattern {
 typedef struct PatSeq {
     int numPats;		/* Number of patterns in sequence (usually
 				 * 1). */
-    TkBindEvalProc *eventProc;	/* The procedure that will be invoked on
-				 * the clientData when this pattern sequence
+    TkBindEvalProc *eventProc;	/* The function that will be invoked on the
+				 * clientData when this pattern sequence
 				 * matches. */
-    TkBindFreeProc *freeProc;	/* The procedure that will be invoked to
+    TkBindFreeProc *freeProc;	/* The function that will be invoked to
 				 * release the clientData when this pattern
 				 * sequence is freed. */
     ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitray data passed to eventProc and
 				 * freeProc when sequence matches. */
     int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flag values; see below for
 				 * definitions. */
-    int refCount;		/* Number of times that this binding is in
-				 * the midst of executing.  If greater than 1,
-				 * then a recursive invocation is happening.
-				 * Only when this is zero can the binding
-				 * actually be freed. */
-    struct PatSeq *nextSeqPtr;  /* Next in list of all pattern sequences
-				 * that have the same initial pattern.  NULL
-				 * means end of list. */
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;	/* Pointer to hash table entry for the
-				 * initial pattern.  This is the head of the
-				 * list of which nextSeqPtr forms a part. */
-    struct VirtualOwners *voPtr;/* In a binding table, always NULL.  In a
+    int refCount;		/* Number of times that this binding is in the
+				 * midst of executing. If greater than 1, then
+				 * a recursive invocation is happening. Only
+				 * when this is zero can the binding actually
+				 * be freed. */
+    struct PatSeq *nextSeqPtr;	/* Next in list of all pattern sequences that
+				 * have the same initial pattern. NULL means
+				 * end of list. */
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;	/* Pointer to hash table entry for the initial
+				 * pattern. This is the head of the list of
+				 * which nextSeqPtr forms a part. */
+    struct VirtualOwners *voPtr;/* In a binding table, always NULL. In a
 				 * virtual event table, identifies the array
 				 * of virtual events that can be triggered by
 				 * this event. */
-    struct PatSeq *nextObjPtr;  /* In a binding table, next in list of all
+    struct PatSeq *nextObjPtr;	/* In a binding table, next in list of all
 				 * pattern sequences for the same object (NULL
-				 * for end of list).  Needed to implement
-				 * Tk_DeleteAllBindings.  In a virtual event
+				 * for end of list). Needed to implement
+				 * Tk_DeleteAllBindings. In a virtual event
 				 * table, always NULL. */
-    Pattern pats[1];		/* Array of "numPats" patterns.  Only one
+    Pattern pats[1];		/* Array of "numPats" patterns. Only one
 				 * element is declared here but in actuality
-				 * enough space will be allocated for "numPats"
-				 * patterns.  To match, pats[0] must match
-				 * event n, pats[1] must match event n-1, etc.
+				 * enough space will be allocated for
+				 * "numPats" patterns. To match, pats[0] must
+				 * match event n, pats[1] must match event
+				 * n-1, etc.
 				 */
 } PatSeq;
 
 /*
  * Flag values for PatSeq structures:
  *
- * PAT_NEARBY		1 means that all of the events matching
- *			this sequence must occur with nearby X
- *			and Y mouse coordinates and close in time.
- *			This is typically used to restrict multiple
- *			button presses.
+ * PAT_NEARBY		1 means that all of the events matching this sequence
+ *			must occur with nearby X and Y mouse coordinates and
+ *			close in time. This is typically used to restrict
+ *			multiple button presses.
  * MARKED_DELETED	1 means that this binding has been marked as deleted
  *			and removed from the binding table, but its memory
- *			could not be released because it was already queued for
- *			execution.  When the binding is actually about to be
- *			executed, this flag will be checked and the binding
+ *			could not be released because it was already queued
+ *			for execution. When the binding is actually about to
+ *			be executed, this flag will be checked and the binding
  *			skipped if set.
  */
 
@@ -260,52 +254,49 @@ typedef struct PatSeq {
 #define MARKED_DELETED		0x2
 
 /*
- * Constants that define how close together two events must be
- * in milliseconds or pixels to meet the PAT_NEARBY constraint:
+ * Constants that define how close together two events must be in milliseconds
+ * or pixels to meet the PAT_NEARBY constraint:
  */
 
 #define NEARBY_PIXELS		5
 #define NEARBY_MS		500
 
-
 /*
  * The following structure keeps track of all the virtual events that are
- * associated with a particular physical event.  It is pointed to by the
- * voPtr field in a PatSeq in the patternTable of a  virtual event table.
+ * associated with a particular physical event. It is pointed to by the voPtr
+ * field in a PatSeq in the patternTable of a virtual event table.
  */
 
 typedef struct VirtualOwners {
-    int numOwners;		    /* Number of virtual events to trigger. */
-    Tcl_HashEntry *owners[1];	    /* Array of pointers to entries in
-				     * nameTable.  Enough space will
-				     * actually be allocated for numOwners
-				     * hash entries. */
+    int numOwners;		/* Number of virtual events to trigger. */
+    Tcl_HashEntry *owners[1];	/* Array of pointers to entries in nameTable.
+				 * Enough space will actually be allocated for
+				 * numOwners hash entries. */
 } VirtualOwners;
 
 /*
- * The following structure is used in the nameTable of a virtual event
- * table to associate a virtual event with all the physical events that can
- * trigger it.
+ * The following structure is used in the nameTable of a virtual event table
+ * to associate a virtual event with all the physical events that can trigger
+ * it.
  */
 typedef struct PhysicalsOwned {
-    int numOwned;		    /* Number of physical events owned. */
-    PatSeq *patSeqs[1];		    /* Array of pointers to physical event
-				     * patterns.  Enough space will actually
-				     * be allocated to hold numOwned. */
+    int numOwned;		/* Number of physical events owned. */
+    PatSeq *patSeqs[1];		/* Array of pointers to physical event
+				 * patterns. Enough space will actually be
+				 * allocated to hold numOwned. */
 } PhysicalsOwned;
 
 /*
- * One of the following structures exists for each interpreter.  This
- * structure keeps track of the current display and screen in the
- * interpreter, so that a script can be invoked whenever the display/screen
- * changes (the script does things like point tk::Priv at a display-specific
- * structure).
+ * One of the following structures exists for each interpreter. This structure
+ * keeps track of the current display and screen in the interpreter, so that a
+ * script can be invoked whenever the display/screen changes (the script does
+ * things like point tk::Priv at a display-specific structure).
  */
 
 typedef struct {
-    TkDisplay *curDispPtr;	/* Display for last binding command invoked
-				 * in this application. */
-    int curScreenIndex;		/* Index of screen for last binding command. */
+    TkDisplay *curDispPtr;	/* Display for last binding command invoked in
+				 * this application. */
+    int curScreenIndex;		/* Index of screen for last binding command */
     int bindingDepth;		/* Number of active instances of Tk_BindEvent
 				 * in this application. */
 } ScreenInfo;
@@ -313,21 +304,21 @@ typedef struct {
 /*
  * The following structure is used to keep track of all the C bindings that
  * are awaiting invocation and whether the window they refer to has been
- * destroyed.  If the window is destroyed, then all pending callbacks for
- * that window will be cancelled.  The Tcl bindings will still all be
- * invoked, however.  
+ * destroyed. If the window is destroyed, then all pending callbacks for that
+ * window will be cancelled. The Tcl bindings will still all be invoked,
+ * however.
  */
 
 typedef struct PendingBinding {
     struct PendingBinding *nextPtr;
-				/* Next in chain of pending bindings, in
-				 * case a recursive binding evaluation is in
+				/* Next in chain of pending bindings, in case
+				 * a recursive binding evaluation is in
 				 * progress. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window that the following bindings
 				 * depend upon. */
-    int deleted;		/* Set to non-zero by window cleanup code
-				 * if tkwin is deleted. */
-    PatSeq *matchArray[5];	/* Array of pending C bindings.  The actual
+    int deleted;		/* Set to non-zero by window cleanup code if
+				 * tkwin is deleted. */
+    PatSeq *matchArray[5];	/* Array of pending C bindings. The actual
 				 * size of this depends on how many C bindings
 				 * matched the event passed to Tk_BindEvent.
 				 * THIS FIELD MUST BE THE LAST IN THE
@@ -335,8 +326,8 @@ typedef struct PendingBinding {
 } PendingBinding;
 
 /*
- * The following structure keeps track of all the information local to
- * the binding package on a per interpreter basis.
+ * The following structure keeps track of all the information local to the
+ * binding package on a per interpreter basis.
  */
 
 typedef struct BindInfo {
@@ -344,30 +335,29 @@ typedef struct BindInfo {
 				/* The virtual events that exist in this
 				 * interpreter. */
     ScreenInfo screenInfo;	/* Keeps track of the current display and
-				 * screen, so it can be restored after
-				 * a binding has executed. */
+				 * screen, so it can be restored after a
+				 * binding has executed. */
     PendingBinding *pendingList;/* The list of pending C bindings, kept in
 				 * case a C or Tcl binding causes the target
 				 * window to be deleted. */
-    int deleted;		/* 1 the application has been deleted but
-				 * the structure has been preserved. */
+    int deleted;		/* 1 the application has been deleted but the
+				 * structure has been preserved. */
 } BindInfo;
-    
+
 /*
- * In X11R4 and earlier versions, XStringToKeysym is ridiculously
- * slow.  The data structure and hash table below, along with the
- * code that uses them, implement a fast mapping from strings to
- * keysyms.  In X11R5 and later releases XStringToKeysym is plenty
- * fast so this stuff isn't needed.  The #define REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP
- * is normally undefined, so that XStringToKeysym gets used.  It
- * can be set in the Makefile to enable the use of the hash table
- * below.
+ * In X11R4 and earlier versions, XStringToKeysym is ridiculously slow. The
+ * data structure and hash table below, along with the code that uses them,
+ * implement a fast mapping from strings to keysyms. In X11R5 and later
+ * releases XStringToKeysym is plenty fast so this stuff isn't needed. The
+ * #define REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP is normally undefined, so that XStringToKeysym
+ * gets used. It can be set in the Makefile to enable the use of the hash
+ * table below.
  */
 
 #ifdef REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP
 typedef struct {
-    char *name;				/* Name of keysym. */
-    KeySym value;			/* Numeric identifier for keysym. */
+    char *name;			/* Name of keysym. */
+    KeySym value;		/* Numeric identifier for keysym. */
 } KeySymInfo;
 static KeySymInfo keyArray[] = {
 #ifndef lint
@@ -375,8 +365,8 @@ static KeySymInfo keyArray[] = {
 #endif
     {(char *) NULL, 0}
 };
-static Tcl_HashTable keySymTable;	/* keyArray hashed by keysym value. */
-static Tcl_HashTable nameTable;		/* keyArray hashed by keysym name. */
+static Tcl_HashTable keySymTable; /* keyArray hashed by keysym value. */
+static Tcl_HashTable nameTable;	/* keyArray hashed by keysym name. */
 #endif /* REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP */
 
 /*
@@ -388,16 +378,17 @@ static int initialized = 0;
 TCL_DECLARE_MUTEX(bindMutex)
 
 /*
- * A hash table is kept to map from the string names of event
- * modifiers to information about those modifiers.  The structure
- * for storing this information, and the hash table built at
- * initialization time, are defined below.
+ * A hash table is kept to map from the string names of event modifiers to
+ * information about those modifiers. The structure for storing this
+ * information, and the hash table built at initialization time, are defined
+ * below.
  */
 
 typedef struct {
     char *name;			/* Name of modifier. */
-    int mask;			/* Button/modifier mask value,							 * such as Button1Mask. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flags;  see below for
+    int mask;			/* Button/modifier mask value, such as
+				 * Button1Mask. */
+    int flags;			/* Various flags; see below for
 				 * definitions. */
 } ModInfo;
 
@@ -451,32 +442,29 @@ static ModInfo modArray[] = {
     {"Double",		0,		DOUBLE},
     {"Triple",		0,		TRIPLE},
     {"Quadruple",	0,		QUADRUPLE},
-    {"Any",		0,		0},	/* Ignored: historical relic. */
+    {"Any",		0,		0},	/* Ignored: historical relic */
     {NULL,		0,		0}
 };
 static Tcl_HashTable modTable;
 
 /*
- * This module also keeps a hash table mapping from event names
- * to information about those events.  The structure, an array
- * to use to initialize the hash table, and the hash table are
- * all defined below.
+ * This module also keeps a hash table mapping from event names to information
+ * about those events. The structure, an array to use to initialize the hash
+ * table, and the hash table are all defined below.
  */
 
 typedef struct {
     char *name;			/* Name of event. */
-    int type;			/* Event type for X, such as
-				 * ButtonPress. */
-    int eventMask;		/* Mask bits (for XSelectInput)
-				 * for this event type. */
+    int type;			/* Event type for X, such as ButtonPress. */
+    int eventMask;		/* Mask bits (for XSelectInput) for this event
+				 * type. */
 } EventInfo;
 
 /*
- * Note:  some of the masks below are an OR-ed combination of
- * several masks.  This is necessary because X doesn't report
- * up events unless you also ask for down events.  Also, X
- * doesn't report button state in motion events unless you've
- * asked about button events.
+ * Note: some of the masks below are an OR-ed combination of several masks.
+ * This is necessary because X doesn't report up events unless you also ask
+ * for down events. Also, X doesn't report button state in motion events
+ * unless you've asked about button events.
  */
 
 static EventInfo eventArray[] = {
@@ -510,18 +498,18 @@ static EventInfo eventArray[] = {
     {"CirculateRequest", CirculateRequest,	SubstructureRedirectMask},
     {"ConfigureRequest", ConfigureRequest,	SubstructureRedirectMask},
     {"Create",		CreateNotify,		SubstructureNotifyMask},
-    {"MapRequest",	MapRequest,             SubstructureRedirectMask},
+    {"MapRequest",	MapRequest,		SubstructureRedirectMask},
     {"ResizeRequest",	ResizeRequest,		ResizeRedirectMask},
     {(char *) NULL,	0,			0}
 };
 static Tcl_HashTable eventTable;
 
 /*
- * The defines and table below are used to classify events into
- * various groups.  The reason for this is that logically identical
- * fields (e.g. "state") appear at different places in different
- * types of events.  The classification masks can be used to figure
- * out quickly where to extract information from events.
+ * The defines and table below are used to classify events into various
+ * groups. The reason for this is that logically identical fields (e.g.
+ * "state") appear at different places in different types of events. The
+ * classification masks can be used to figure out quickly where to extract
+ * information from events.
  */
 
 #define KEY			0x1
@@ -588,17 +576,16 @@ static int flagArray[TK_LASTEVENT] = {
    /* ClientMessage */		0,
    /* MappingNotify */		0,
    /* VirtualEvent */		VIRTUAL,
-   /* Activate */		ACTIVATE,	    
+   /* Activate */		ACTIVATE,
    /* Deactivate */		ACTIVATE,
    /* MouseWheel */		KEY
 };
 
 /*
- * The following table is used to map between the location where an
- * generated event should be queued and the string used to specify the
- * location.
+ * The following table is used to map between the location where an generated
+ * event should be queued and the string used to specify the location.
  */
- 
+
 static TkStateMap queuePosition[] = {
     {-1,			"now"},
     {TCL_QUEUE_HEAD,		"head"},
@@ -608,10 +595,10 @@ static TkStateMap queuePosition[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * The following tables are used as a two-way map between X's internal
- * numeric values for fields in an XEvent and the strings used in Tcl.  The
- * tables are used both when constructing an XEvent from user input and
- * when providing data from an XEvent to the user.
+ * The following tables are used as a two-way map between X's internal numeric
+ * values for fields in an XEvent and the strings used in Tcl. The tables are
+ * used both when constructing an XEvent from user input and when providing
+ * data from an XEvent to the user.
  */
 
 static TkStateMap notifyMode[] = {
@@ -641,9 +628,9 @@ static TkStateMap circPlace[] = {
 };
 
 static TkStateMap visNotify[] = {
-    {VisibilityUnobscured,	    "VisibilityUnobscured"},
-    {VisibilityPartiallyObscured,   "VisibilityPartiallyObscured"},
-    {VisibilityFullyObscured,	    "VisibilityFullyObscured"},
+    {VisibilityUnobscured,	  "VisibilityUnobscured"},
+    {VisibilityPartiallyObscured, "VisibilityPartiallyObscured"},
+    {VisibilityFullyObscured,	  "VisibilityFullyObscured"},
     {-1, NULL}
 };
 
@@ -664,58 +651,52 @@ static TkStateMap propNotify[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for local procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for local functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ChangeScreen _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *dispName, int screenIndex));
-static int		CreateVirtualEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static void		ChangeScreen(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *dispName,
+			    int screenIndex);
+static int		CreateVirtualEvent(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr, char *virtString,
-			    char *eventString));
-static int		DeleteVirtualEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    char *eventString);
+static int		DeleteVirtualEvent(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr, char *virtString,
-			    char *eventString));
-static void		DeleteVirtualEventTable _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr));
-static void		ExpandPercents _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
-			    CONST char *before, XEvent *eventPtr, KeySym keySym,
-			    Tcl_DString *dsPtr));
-static void		FreeTclBinding _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static PatSeq *		FindSequence _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    char *eventString);
+static void		DeleteVirtualEventTable(VirtualEventTable *vetPtr);
+static void		ExpandPercents(TkWindow *winPtr, CONST char *before,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr,KeySym keySym,Tcl_DString *dsPtr);
+static void		FreeTclBinding(ClientData clientData);
+static PatSeq *		FindSequence(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tcl_HashTable *patternTablePtr, ClientData object,
 			    CONST char *eventString, int create,
-			    int allowVirtual, unsigned long *maskPtr));
-static void		GetAllVirtualEvents _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr));
-static char *		GetField _ANSI_ARGS_((char *p, char *copy, int size));
-static void		GetPatternString _ANSI_ARGS_((PatSeq *psPtr,
-			    Tcl_DString *dsPtr));
-static int		GetVirtualEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr, char *virtString));
-static Tk_Uid		GetVirtualEventUid _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *virtString));
-static int		HandleEventGenerate _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window main, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		InitVirtualEventTable _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr));
-static PatSeq *		MatchPatterns _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr,
+			    int allowVirtual, unsigned long *maskPtr);
+static void		GetAllVirtualEvents(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr);
+static char *		GetField(char *p, char *copy, int size);
+static void		GetPatternString(PatSeq *psPtr, Tcl_DString *dsPtr);
+static int		GetVirtualEvent(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr, char *virtString);
+static Tk_Uid		GetVirtualEventUid(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    char *virtString);
+static int		HandleEventGenerate(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window main,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		InitVirtualEventTable(VirtualEventTable *vetPtr);
+static PatSeq *		MatchPatterns(TkDisplay *dispPtr,
 			    BindingTable *bindPtr, PatSeq *psPtr,
 			    PatSeq *bestPtr, ClientData *objectPtr,
-			    PatSeq **sourcePtrPtr));
-static int		NameToWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window main, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
-			    Tk_Window *tkwinPtr));
-static int		ParseEventDescription _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    PatSeq **sourcePtrPtr);
+static int		NameToWindow(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window main,
+			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, Tk_Window *tkwinPtr);
+static int		ParseEventDescription(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    CONST char **eventStringPtr, Pattern *patPtr,
-			    unsigned long *eventMaskPtr));
-static void		DoWarp _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+			    unsigned long *eventMaskPtr);
+static void		DoWarp(ClientData clientData);
 
 /*
- * The following define is used as a short circuit for the callback
- * procedure to evaluate a TclBinding.  The actual evaluation of the
- * binding is handled inline, because special things have to be done
- * with a Tcl binding before evaluation time.
+ * The following define is used as a short circuit for the callback function
+ * to evaluate a TclBinding. The actual evaluation of the binding is handled
+ * inline, because special things have to be done with a Tcl binding before
+ * evaluation time.
  */
 
 #define EvalTclBinding	((TkBindEvalProc *) 1)
@@ -726,10 +707,9 @@ static void		DoWarp _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
  *
  * TkBindInit --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an application is created.  It
- *	initializes all the structures used by bindings and virtual
- *	events.  It must be called before any other functions in this
- *	file are called.
+ *	This function is called when an application is created. It initializes
+ *	all the structures used by bindings and virtual events. It must be
+ *	called before any other functions in this file are called.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -751,13 +731,12 @@ TkBindInit(mainPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Initialize the static data structures used by the binding package.
-     * They are only initialized once, no matter how many interps are
-     * created.
+     * Initialize the static data structures used by the binding package. They
+     * are only initialized once, no matter how many interps are created.
      */
 
     if (!initialized) {
-        Tcl_MutexLock(&bindMutex);
+	Tcl_MutexLock(&bindMutex);
 	if (!initialized) {
 	    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
 	    ModInfo *modPtr;
@@ -770,28 +749,28 @@ TkBindInit(mainPtr)
 	    Tcl_InitHashTable(&keySymTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
 	    Tcl_InitHashTable(&nameTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
 	    for (kPtr = keyArray; kPtr->name != NULL; kPtr++) {
-	        hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&keySymTable, kPtr->name, &dummy);
+		hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&keySymTable, kPtr->name, &dummy);
 		Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, kPtr->value);
 		hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&nameTable, (char *) kPtr->value,
-		        &dummy);
+			&dummy);
 		Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, kPtr->name);
 	    }
 #endif /* REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP */
 
 	    Tcl_InitHashTable(&modTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
 	    for (modPtr = modArray; modPtr->name != NULL; modPtr++) {
-	        hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&modTable, modPtr->name, &dummy);
+		hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&modTable, modPtr->name, &dummy);
 		Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, modPtr);
 	    }
-    
+
 	    Tcl_InitHashTable(&eventTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
 	    for (eiPtr = eventArray; eiPtr->name != NULL; eiPtr++) {
-	        hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&eventTable, eiPtr->name, &dummy);
+		hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&eventTable, eiPtr->name, &dummy);
 		Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, eiPtr);
 	    }
 	    initialized = 1;
 	}
-        Tcl_MutexUnlock(&bindMutex);
+	Tcl_MutexUnlock(&bindMutex);
     }
 
     mainPtr->bindingTable = Tk_CreateBindingTable(mainPtr->interp);
@@ -813,8 +792,8 @@ TkBindInit(mainPtr)
  *
  * TkBindFree --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an application is deleted.  It
- *	deletes all the structures used by bindings and virtual events.
+ *	This function is called when an application is deleted. It deletes all
+ *	the structures used by bindings and virtual events.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -830,7 +809,7 @@ TkBindFree(mainPtr)
     TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* The newly created application. */
 {
     BindInfo *bindInfoPtr;
-    
+
     Tk_DeleteBindingTable(mainPtr->bindingTable);
     mainPtr->bindingTable = NULL;
 
@@ -849,8 +828,8 @@ TkBindFree(mainPtr)
  *	Set up a new domain in which event bindings may be created.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the new table, which must
- *	be passed to procedures like Tk_CreateBinding.
+ *	The return value is a token for the new table, which must be passed to
+ *	functions like Tk_CreateBinding.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory is allocated for the new table.
@@ -861,7 +840,7 @@ TkBindFree(mainPtr)
 Tk_BindingTable
 Tk_CreateBindingTable(interp)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to associate with the binding
-				 * table:  commands are executed in this
+				 * table: commands are executed in this
 				 * interpreter. */
 {
     BindingTable *bindPtr;
@@ -888,9 +867,8 @@ Tk_CreateBindingTable(interp)
  *
  * Tk_DeleteBindingTable --
  *
- *	Destroy a binding table and free up all its memory.
- *	The caller should not use bindingTable again after
- *	this procedure returns.
+ *	Destroy a binding table and free up all its memory. The caller should
+ *	not use bindingTable again after this function returns.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -903,8 +881,8 @@ Tk_CreateBindingTable(interp)
 
 void
 Tk_DeleteBindingTable(bindingTable)
-    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;	/* Token for the binding table to
-					 * destroy. */
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;
+				/* Token for the binding table to destroy. */
 {
     BindingTable *bindPtr = (BindingTable *) bindingTable;
     PatSeq *psPtr, *nextPtr;
@@ -912,8 +890,7 @@ Tk_DeleteBindingTable(bindingTable)
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
 
     /*
-     * Find and delete all of the patterns associated with the binding
-     * table.
+     * Find and delete all of the patterns associated with the binding table.
      */
 
     for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&bindPtr->patternTable, &search);
@@ -932,8 +909,7 @@ Tk_DeleteBindingTable(bindingTable)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Clean up the rest of the information associated with the
-     * binding table.
+     * Clean up the rest of the information associated with the binding table.
      */
 
     Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&bindPtr->patternTable);
@@ -946,23 +922,21 @@ Tk_DeleteBindingTable(bindingTable)
  *
  * Tk_CreateBinding --
  *
- *	Add a binding to a binding table, so that future calls to
- *	Tk_BindEvent may execute the command in the binding.
+ *	Add a binding to a binding table, so that future calls to Tk_BindEvent
+ *	may execute the command in the binding.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if an error occurred while setting
- *	up the binding.  In this case, an error message will be
- *	left in the interp's result.  If all went well then the return
- *	value is a mask of the event types that must be made
- *	available to Tk_BindEvent in order to properly detect when
- *	this binding triggers.  This value can be used to determine
+ *	The return value is 0 if an error occurred while setting up the
+ *	binding. In this case, an error message will be left in the interp's
+ *	result. If all went well then the return value is a mask of the event
+ *	types that must be made available to Tk_BindEvent in order to properly
+ *	detect when this binding triggers. This value can be used to determine
  *	what events to select for in a window, for example.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	An existing binding on the same event sequence may be
- *	replaced.  
- *	The new binding may cause future calls to Tk_BindEvent to
- *	behave differently than they did previously.
+ *	An existing binding on the same event sequence may be replaced. The
+ *	new binding may cause future calls to Tk_BindEvent to behave
+ *	differently than they did previously.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -980,7 +954,7 @@ Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString, command, append)
 				 * binding triggers. */
     int append;			/* 0 means replace any existing binding for
 				 * eventString; 1 means append to that
-				 * binding.  If the existing binding is for a
+				 * binding. If the existing binding is for a
 				 * callback function and not a Tcl command
 				 * string, the existing binding will always be
 				 * replaced. */
@@ -998,12 +972,11 @@ Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString, command, append)
     if (psPtr->eventProc == NULL) {
 	int new;
 	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
-	
+
 	/*
-	 * This pattern sequence was just created.
-	 * Link the pattern into the list associated with the object, so
-	 * that if the object goes away, these bindings will all
-	 * automatically be deleted.
+	 * This pattern sequence was just created. Link the pattern into the
+	 * list associated with the object, so that if the object goes away,
+	 * these bindings will all automatically be deleted.
 	 */
 
 	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&bindPtr->objectTable, (char *) object,
@@ -1049,23 +1022,22 @@ Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString, command, append)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * TkCreateBindingProcedure --
+ * TkCreateBindingFunction --
  *
  *	Add a C binding to a binding table, so that future calls to
- *	Tk_BindEvent may callback the procedure in the binding.
+ *	Tk_BindEvent may callback the function in the binding.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if an error occurred while setting
- *	up the binding.  In this case, an error message will be
- *	left in the interp's result.  If all went well then the return
- *	value is a mask of the event types that must be made
- *	available to Tk_BindEvent in order to properly detect when
- *	this binding triggers.  This value can be used to determine
+
+ *	The return value is 0 if an error occurred while setting up the
+ *	binding. In this case, an error message will be left in the interp's
+ *	result. If all went well then the return value is a mask of the event
+ *	types that must be made available to Tk_BindEvent in order to properly
+ *	detect when this binding triggers. This value can be used to determine
  *	what events to select for in a window, for example.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Any existing binding on the same event sequence will be
- *	replaced.  
+ *	Any existing binding on the same event sequence will be replaced.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1080,10 +1052,10 @@ TkCreateBindingProcedure(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString,
 				 * associated. */
     CONST char *eventString;	/* String describing event sequence that
 				 * triggers binding. */
-    TkBindEvalProc *eventProc;	/* Procedure to invoke when binding
-				 * triggers.  Must not be NULL. */
-    TkBindFreeProc *freeProc;	/* Procedure to invoke when binding is
-				 * freed.  May be NULL for no procedure. */
+    TkBindEvalProc *eventProc;	/* Function to invoke when binding triggers.
+				 * Must not be NULL. */
+    TkBindFreeProc *freeProc;	/* Function to invoke when binding is freed.
+				 * May be NULL for no function. */
     ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary ClientData to pass to eventProc
 				 * and freeProc. */
 {
@@ -1099,12 +1071,11 @@ TkCreateBindingProcedure(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString,
     if (psPtr->eventProc == NULL) {
 	int new;
 	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
-	
+
 	/*
-	 * This pattern sequence was just created.
-	 * Link the pattern into the list associated with the object, so
-	 * that if the object goes away, these bindings will all
-	 * automatically be deleted.
+	 * This pattern sequence was just created. Link the pattern into the
+	 * list associated with the object, so that if the object goes away,
+	 * these bindings will all automatically be deleted.
 	 */
 
 	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&bindPtr->objectTable, (char *) object,
@@ -1140,24 +1111,25 @@ TkCreateBindingProcedure(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString,
  *	Remove an event binding from a binding table.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The result is a standard Tcl return value.  If an error
- *	occurs then the interp's result will contain an error message.
+ *	The result is a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs then the
+ *	interp's result will contain an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The binding given by object and eventString is removed
- *	from bindingTable.
+ *	The binding given by object and eventString is removed from
+ *	bindingTable.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
 Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;	/* Table in which to delete binding. */
-    ClientData object;			/* Token for object with which binding
-					 * is associated. */
-    CONST char *eventString;		/* String describing event sequence
-					 * that triggers binding. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;
+				/* Table in which to delete binding. */
+    ClientData object;		/* Token for object with which binding is
+				 * associated. */
+    CONST char *eventString;	/* String describing event sequence that
+				 * triggers binding. */
 {
     BindingTable *bindPtr = (BindingTable *) bindingTable;
     PatSeq *psPtr, *prevPtr;
@@ -1172,8 +1144,8 @@ Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Unlink the binding from the list for its object, then from the
-     * list for its pattern.
+     * Unlink the binding from the list for its object, then from the list for
+     * its pattern.
      */
 
     hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&bindPtr->objectTable, (char *) object);
@@ -1231,13 +1203,12 @@ Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
  *	Return the command associated with a given event string.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the command string
- *	associated with eventString for object in the domain
- *	given by bindingTable.  If there is no binding for
- *	eventString, or if eventString is improperly formed,
- *	then NULL is returned and an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result.  The return value is semi-static:  it
- *	will persist until the binding is changed or deleted.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the command string associated with
+ *	eventString for object in the domain given by bindingTable. If there
+ *	is no binding for eventString, or if eventString is improperly formed,
+ *	then NULL is returned and an error message is left in the interp's
+ *	result. The return value is semi-static: it will persist until the
+ *	binding is changed or deleted.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1247,13 +1218,13 @@ Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
 
 CONST char *
 Tk_GetBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;	/* Table in which to look for
-					 * binding. */
-    ClientData object;			/* Token for object with which binding
-					 * is associated. */
-    CONST char *eventString;		/* String describing event sequence
-					 * that triggers binding. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;
+				/* Table in which to look for binding. */
+    ClientData object;		/* Token for object with which binding is
+				 * associated. */
+    CONST char *eventString;	/* String describing event sequence that
+				 * triggers binding. */
 {
     BindingTable *bindPtr = (BindingTable *) bindingTable;
     PatSeq *psPtr;
@@ -1275,14 +1246,14 @@ Tk_GetBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
  *
  * Tk_GetAllBindings --
  *
- *	Return a list of event strings for all the bindings
- *	associated with a given object.
+ *	Return a list of event strings for all the bindings associated with a
+ *	given object.
  *
  * Results:
- *	There is no return value.  The interp's result is modified to
- *	hold a Tcl list with one entry for each binding associated
- *	with object in bindingTable.  Each entry in the list
- *	contains the event string associated with one binding.
+ *	There is no return value. The interp's result is modified to hold a
+ *	Tcl list with one entry for each binding associated with object in
+ *	bindingTable. Each entry in the list contains the event string
+ *	associated with one binding.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1292,12 +1263,10 @@ Tk_GetBinding(interp, bindingTable, object, eventString)
 
 void
 Tk_GetAllBindings(interp, bindingTable, object)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter returning result or
-					 * error. */
-    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;	/* Table in which to look for
-					 * bindings. */
-    ClientData object;			/* Token for object. */
-
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter returning result or error. */
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;
+				/* Table in which to look for bindings. */
+    ClientData object;		/* Token for object. */
 {
     BindingTable *bindPtr = (BindingTable *) bindingTable;
     PatSeq *psPtr;
@@ -1311,11 +1280,11 @@ Tk_GetAllBindings(interp, bindingTable, object)
     Tcl_DStringInit(&ds);
     for (psPtr = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr); psPtr != NULL;
 	    psPtr = psPtr->nextObjPtr) {
-	/* 
-	 * For each binding, output information about each of the
-	 * patterns in its sequence.
+	/*
+	 * For each binding, output information about each of the patterns in
+	 * its sequence.
 	 */
-	 
+
 	Tcl_DStringSetLength(&ds, 0);
 	GetPatternString(psPtr, &ds);
 	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds));
@@ -1328,12 +1297,11 @@ Tk_GetAllBindings(interp, bindingTable, object)
  *
  * Tk_DeleteAllBindings --
  *
- *	Remove all bindings associated with a given object in a
- *	given binding table.
+ *	Remove all bindings associated with a given object in a given binding
+ *	table.
  *
  * Results:
- *	All bindings associated with object are removed from
- *	bindingTable.
+ *	All bindings associated with object are removed from bindingTable.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1343,9 +1311,9 @@ Tk_GetAllBindings(interp, bindingTable, object)
 
 void
 Tk_DeleteAllBindings(bindingTable, object)
-    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;	/* Table in which to delete
-					 * bindings. */
-    ClientData object;			/* Token for object. */
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;
+				/* Table in which to delete bindings. */
+    ClientData object;		/* Token for object. */
 {
     BindingTable *bindPtr = (BindingTable *) bindingTable;
     PatSeq *psPtr, *prevPtr;
@@ -1361,9 +1329,9 @@ Tk_DeleteAllBindings(bindingTable, object)
 	nextPtr  = psPtr->nextObjPtr;
 
 	/*
-	 * Be sure to remove each binding from its hash chain in the
-	 * pattern table.  If this is the last pattern in the chain,
-	 * then delete the hash entry too.
+	 * Be sure to remove each binding from its hash chain in the pattern
+	 * table. If this is the last pattern in the chain, then delete the
+	 * hash entry too.
 	 */
 
 	prevPtr = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(psPtr->hPtr);
@@ -1401,11 +1369,10 @@ Tk_DeleteAllBindings(bindingTable, object)
  *
  * Tk_BindEvent --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process an X event.  The
- *	event is added to those recorded for the binding table.
- *	Then each of the objects at *objectPtr is checked in
- *	order to see if it has a binding that matches the recent
- *	events.  If so, the most specific binding is invoked for
+ *	This function is invoked to process an X event. The event is added to
+ *	those recorded for the binding table. Then each of the objects at
+ *	*objectPtr is checked in order to see if it has a binding that matches
+ *	the recent events. If so, the most specific binding is invoked for
  *	each object.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -1414,32 +1381,32 @@ Tk_DeleteAllBindings(bindingTable, object)
  * Side effects:
  *	Depends on the command associated with the matching binding.
  *
- *	All Tcl bindings scripts for each object are accumulated before
- *	the first binding is evaluated.  If the action of a Tcl binding
- *	is to change or delete a binding, or delete the window associated
- *	with the binding, all the original Tcl binding scripts will still
- *	fire.  Contrast this with C binding procedures.  If a pending C
- *	binding (one that hasn't fired yet, but is queued to be fired for
- *	this window) is deleted, it will not be called, and if it is
- *	changed, then the new binding procedure will be called.  If the
- *	window itself is deleted, no further C binding procedures will be
- *	called for this window.  When both Tcl binding scripts and C binding
- *	procedures are interleaved, the above rules still apply. 
+ *	All Tcl bindings scripts for each object are accumulated before the
+ *	first binding is evaluated. If the action of a Tcl binding is to
+ *	change or delete a binding, or delete the window associated with the
+ *	binding, all the original Tcl binding scripts will still fire.
+ *	Contrast this with C binding functions. If a pending C binding (one
+ *	that hasn't fired yet, but is queued to be fired for this window) is
+ *	deleted, it will not be called, and if it is changed, then the new
+ *	binding function will be called. If the window itself is deleted, no
+ *	further C binding functions will be called for this window. When both
+ *	Tcl binding scripts and C binding functions are interleaved, the above
+ *	rules still apply.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
 Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
-    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;	/* Table in which to look for
-					 * bindings. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* What actually happened. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window on display where event
-					 * occurred (needed in order to
-					 * locate display information). */
-    int numObjects;			/* Number of objects at *objectPtr. */
-    ClientData *objectPtr;		/* Array of one or more objects
-					 * to check for a matching binding. */
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;
+				/* Table in which to look for bindings. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* What actually happened. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window on display where event occurred
+				 * (needed in order to locate display
+				 * information). */
+    int numObjects;		/* Number of objects at *objectPtr. */
+    ClientData *objectPtr;	/* Array of one or more objects to check for a
+				 * matching binding. */
 {
     BindingTable *bindPtr;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr;
@@ -1459,10 +1426,10 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
     TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *)tkwin;
     PatternTableKey key;
     Tk_ClassModalProc *modalProc;
+
     /*
-     * Ignore events on windows that don't have names: these are windows
-     * like wrapper windows that shouldn't be visible to the
-     * application.
+     * Ignore events on windows that don't have names: these are windows like
+     * wrapper windows that shouldn't be visible to the application.
      */
 
     if (winPtr->pathName == NULL) {
@@ -1470,13 +1437,12 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Ignore the event completely if it is an Enter, Leave, FocusIn,
-     * or FocusOut event with detail NotifyInferior.  The reason for
-     * ignoring these events is that we don't want transitions between
-     * a window and its children to visible to bindings on the parent:
-     * this would cause problems for mega-widgets, since the internal
-     * structure of a mega-widget isn't supposed to be visible to
-     * people watching the parent.
+     * Ignore the event completely if it is an Enter, Leave, FocusIn, or
+     * FocusOut event with detail NotifyInferior. The reason for ignoring
+     * these events is that we don't want transitions between a window and its
+     * children to visible to bindings on the parent: this would cause
+     * problems for mega-widgets, since the internal structure of a
+     * mega-widget isn't supposed to be visible to people watching the parent.
      */
 
     if ((eventPtr->type == EnterNotify)  || (eventPtr->type == LeaveNotify)) {
@@ -1495,20 +1461,19 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
     bindInfoPtr = (BindInfo *) winPtr->mainPtr->bindInfo;
 
     /*
-     * Add the new event to the ring of saved events for the
-     * binding table.  Two tricky points:
+     * Add the new event to the ring of saved events for the binding table.
+     * Two tricky points:
      *
-     * 1. Combine consecutive MotionNotify events.  Do this by putting
-     *    the new event *on top* of the previous event.
+     * 1. Combine consecutive MotionNotify events. Do this by putting the new
+     *    event *on top* of the previous event.
      * 2. If a modifier key is held down, it auto-repeats to generate
-     *    continuous KeyPress and KeyRelease events.  These can flush
-     *    the event ring so that valuable information is lost (such
-     *    as repeated button clicks).  To handle this, check for the
-     *    special case of a modifier KeyPress arriving when the previous
-     *    two events are a KeyRelease and KeyPress of the same key.
-     *    If this happens, mark the most recent event (the KeyRelease)
-     *    invalid and put the new event on top of the event before that
-     *    (the KeyPress).
+     *    continuous KeyPress and KeyRelease events. These can flush the event
+     *    ring so that valuable information is lost (such as repeated button
+     *    clicks). To handle this, check for the special case of a modifier
+     *    KeyPress arriving when the previous two events are a KeyRelease and
+     *    KeyPress of the same key. If this happens, mark the most recent
+     *    event (the KeyRelease) invalid and put the new event on top of the
+     *    event before that (the KeyPress).
      */
 
     if ((eventPtr->type == MotionNotify)
@@ -1518,6 +1483,7 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 	 */
     } else if (eventPtr->type == KeyPress) {
 	int i;
+
 	for (i = 0; ; i++) {
 	    if (i >= dispPtr->numModKeyCodes) {
 		goto advanceRingPointer;
@@ -1544,7 +1510,8 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 	bindPtr->eventRing[bindPtr->curEvent].type = -1;
 	bindPtr->curEvent = i;
     } else {
-	advanceRingPointer:
+
+    advanceRingPointer:
 	bindPtr->curEvent++;
 	if (bindPtr->curEvent >= EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE) {
 	    bindPtr->curEvent = 0;
@@ -1581,9 +1548,9 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 
 	veptPtr = &bindInfoPtr->virtualEventTable.patternTable;
 
-        key.object  = NULL;
-	key.type    = ringPtr->type;
-	key.detail  = detail;
+	key.object = NULL;
+	key.type = ringPtr->type;
+	key.detail = detail;
 
 	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(veptPtr, (char *) &key);
 	if (hPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1594,19 +1561,19 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 	    key.detail.clientData = 0;
 	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(veptPtr, (char *) &key);
 	    if (hPtr != NULL) {
-	        vMatchNoDetailList = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+		vMatchNoDetailList = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
 	    }
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Loop over all the binding tags, finding the binding script or
-     * callback for each one.  Append all of the binding scripts, with
-     * %-sequences expanded, to "scripts", with null characters separating
-     * the scripts for each object.  Append all the callbacks to the array
-     * of pending callbacks.  
+     * Loop over all the binding tags, finding the binding script or callback
+     * for each one. Append all of the binding scripts, with %-sequences
+     * expanded, to "scripts", with null characters separating the scripts for
+     * each object. Append all the callbacks to the array of pending
+     * callbacks.
      */
-	       
+
     pendingPtr = &staticPending;
     matchCount = 0;
     matchSpace = sizeof(staticPending.matchArray) / sizeof(PatSeq *);
@@ -1621,10 +1588,10 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 
 	/*
 	 * Match the new event against those recorded in the pattern table,
-	 * saving the longest matching pattern.  For events with details
-	 * (button and key events), look for a binding for the specific
-	 * key or button.  First see if the event matches a physical event
-	 * that the object is interested in, then look for a virtual event.
+	 * saving the longest matching pattern. For events with details
+	 * (button and key events), look for a binding for the specific key or
+	 * button. First see if the event matches a physical event that the
+	 * object is interested in, then look for a virtual event.
 	 */
 
 	key.object = *objectPtr;
@@ -1632,7 +1599,7 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 	key.detail = detail;
 	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&bindPtr->patternTable, (char *) &key);
 	if (hPtr != NULL) {
-	    matchPtr = MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, 
+	    matchPtr = MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr,
 		    (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr), matchPtr, NULL,
 		    &sourcePtr);
 	}
@@ -1644,7 +1611,7 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 
 	/*
 	 * If no match was found, look for a binding for all keys or buttons
-	 * (detail of 0).  Again, first match on a virtual event.
+	 * (detail of 0). Again, first match on a virtual event.
 	 */
 
 	if ((detail.clientData != 0) && (matchPtr == NULL)) {
@@ -1657,12 +1624,12 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 	    }
 
 	    if (vMatchNoDetailList != NULL) {
-	        matchPtr = MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, vMatchNoDetailList,
+		matchPtr = MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, vMatchNoDetailList,
 			matchPtr, objectPtr, &sourcePtr);
 	    }
 
 	}
-    
+
 	if (matchPtr != NULL) {
 	    if (sourcePtr->eventProc == NULL) {
 		Tcl_Panic("Tk_BindEvent: missing command");
@@ -1674,7 +1641,7 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 		if (matchCount >= matchSpace) {
 		    PendingBinding *new;
 		    unsigned int oldSize, newSize;
-		    
+
 		    oldSize = sizeof(staticPending)
 			    - sizeof(staticPending.matchArray)
 			    + matchSpace * sizeof(PatSeq*);
@@ -1693,9 +1660,10 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 		pendingPtr->matchArray[matchCount] = sourcePtr;
 		matchCount++;
 	    }
+
 	    /*
-	     * A "" is added to the scripts string to separate the
-	     * various scripts that should be invoked.
+	     * A "" is added to the scripts string to separate the various
+	     * scripts that should be invoked.
 	     */
 
 	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&scripts, "", 1);
@@ -1706,29 +1674,28 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Now go back through and evaluate the binding for each object,
-     * in order, dealing with "break" and "continue" exceptions
-     * appropriately.
+     * Now go back through and evaluate the binding for each object, in order,
+     * dealing with "break" and "continue" exceptions appropriately.
      *
      * There are two tricks here:
-     * 1. Bindings can be invoked from in the middle of Tcl commands,
-     *    where the interp's result is significant (for example, a widget
-     *    might be deleted because of an error in creating it, so the
-     *    result contains an error message that is eventually going to
-     *    be returned by the creating command).  To preserve the result,
-     *    we save it in a dynamic string.
-     * 2. The binding's action can potentially delete the binding,
-     *    so bindPtr may not point to anything valid once the action
-     *    completes.  Thus we have to save bindPtr->interp in a
-     *    local variable in order to restore the result.
+     * 1. Bindings can be invoked from in the middle of Tcl commands, where
+     *    the interp's result is significant (for example, a widget might be
+     *    deleted because of an error in creating it, so the result contains
+     *    an error message that is eventually going to be returned by the
+     *    creating command). To preserve the result, we save it in a dynamic
+     *    string.
+     * 2. The binding's action can potentially delete the binding, so bindPtr
+     *    may not point to anything valid once the action completes. Thus we
+     *    have to save bindPtr->interp in a local variable in order to restore
+     *    the result.
      */
 
     interp = bindPtr->interp;
     Tcl_DStringInit(&savedResult);
 
     /*
-     * Save information about the current screen, then invoke a script
-     * if the screen has changed.
+     * Save information about the current screen, then invoke a script if the
+     * screen has changed.
      */
 
     Tcl_DStringGetResult(interp, &savedResult);
@@ -1745,9 +1712,8 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
     if (matchCount > 0) {
 	/*
 	 * Remember the list of pending C binding callbacks, so we can mark
-	 * them as deleted and not call them if the act of evaluating a C
-	 * or Tcl binding deletes a C binding callback or even the whole
-	 * window.
+	 * them as deleted and not call them if the act of evaluating a C or
+	 * Tcl binding deletes a C binding callback or even the whole window.
 	 */
 
 	pendingPtr->nextPtr = bindInfoPtr->pendingList;
@@ -1755,11 +1721,11 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 	pendingPtr->deleted = 0;
 	bindInfoPtr->pendingList = pendingPtr;
     }
-    
+
     /*
-     * Save the current value of the TK_DEFER_MODAL flag so we can
-     * restore it at the end of the loop.  Clear the flag so we can
-     * detect any recursive requests for a modal loop.
+     * Save the current value of the TK_DEFER_MODAL flag so we can restore it
+     * at the end of the loop. Clear the flag so we can detect any recursive
+     * requests for a modal loop.
      */
 
     flags = winPtr->flags;
@@ -1770,16 +1736,15 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
     i = 0;
 
     /*
-     * Be carefule when dereferencing screenPtr or bindInfoPtr.  If we
-     * evaluate something that destroys ".", bindInfoPtr would have been
-     * freed, but we can tell that by first checking to see if
-     * winPtr->mainPtr == NULL.
+     * Be carefule when dereferencing screenPtr or bindInfoPtr. If we evaluate
+     * something that destroys ".", bindInfoPtr would have been freed, but we
+     * can tell that by first checking to see if winPtr->mainPtr == NULL.
      */
 
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) bindInfoPtr);
     while (p < end) {
 	int code;
-	
+
 	if (!bindInfoPtr->deleted) {
 	    screenPtr->bindingDepth++;
 	}
@@ -1787,7 +1752,7 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 
 	if (*p == '\0') {
 	    PatSeq *psPtr;
-	    
+
 	    psPtr = pendingPtr->matchArray[i];
 	    i++;
 	    code = TCL_OK;
@@ -1815,7 +1780,7 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 	if (code != TCL_OK) {
 	    if (code == TCL_CONTINUE) {
 		/*
-		 * Do nothing:  just go on to the next command.
+		 * Do nothing: just go on to the next command.
 		 */
 	    } else if (code == TCL_BREAK) {
 		break;
@@ -1829,13 +1794,13 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 
     if (matchCount > 0 && !pendingPtr->deleted) {
 	/*
-	 * Restore the original modal flag value and invoke the modal loop
-	 * if needed.
+	 * Restore the original modal flag value and invoke the modal loop if
+	 * needed.
 	 */
 
 	deferModal = winPtr->flags & TK_DEFER_MODAL;
-	winPtr->flags = (winPtr->flags & (unsigned int) ~TK_DEFER_MODAL) 
-	    | (flags & TK_DEFER_MODAL);
+	winPtr->flags = (winPtr->flags & (unsigned int) ~TK_DEFER_MODAL)
+		| (flags & TK_DEFER_MODAL);
 	if (deferModal) {
 	    modalProc = Tk_GetClassProc(winPtr->classProcsPtr, modalProc);
 	    if (modalProc != NULL) {
@@ -1846,12 +1811,10 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
 
     if (!bindInfoPtr->deleted && (screenPtr->bindingDepth != 0)
 	    && ((oldDispPtr != screenPtr->curDispPtr)
-                    || (oldScreen != screenPtr->curScreenIndex))) {
-
+		    || (oldScreen != screenPtr->curScreenIndex))) {
 	/*
-	 * Some other binding script is currently executing, but its
-	 * screen is no longer current.  Change the current display
-	 * back again.
+	 * Some other binding script is currently executing, but its screen is
+	 * no longer current. Change the current display back again.
 	 */
 
 	screenPtr->curDispPtr = oldDispPtr;
@@ -1864,10 +1827,10 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
     if (matchCount > 0) {
 	if (!bindInfoPtr->deleted) {
 	    /*
-	     * Delete the pending list from the list of pending scripts
-	     * for this window.
+	     * Delete the pending list from the list of pending scripts for
+	     * this window.
 	     */
-	     
+
 	    PendingBinding **curPtrPtr;
 
 	    for (curPtrPtr = &bindInfoPtr->pendingList; ; ) {
@@ -1890,8 +1853,8 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
  *
  * TkBindDeadWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when it is determined that a window is
- *	dead.  It cleans up bind-related information about the window
+ *	This function is invoked when it is determined that a window is dead.
+ *	It cleans up bind-related information about the window
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1901,7 +1864,7 @@ Tk_BindEvent(bindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr)
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 void
 TkBindDeadWindow(winPtr)
     TkWindow *winPtr;		/* The window that is being deleted. */
@@ -1910,11 +1873,13 @@ TkBindDeadWindow(winPtr)
     PendingBinding *curPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Certain special windows like those used for send and clipboard
-     * have no mainPtr.
+     * Certain special windows like those used for send and clipboard have no
+     * mainPtr.
      */
-    if (winPtr->mainPtr == NULL)
-        return;
+
+    if (winPtr->mainPtr == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
 
     bindInfoPtr = (BindInfo *) winPtr->mainPtr->bindInfo;
     curPtr = bindInfoPtr->pendingList;
@@ -1931,33 +1896,34 @@ TkBindDeadWindow(winPtr)
  *
  * MatchPatterns --
  *
- *      Given a list of pattern sequences and a list of recent events,
- *      return the pattern sequence that best matches the event list,
- *	if there is one.
+ *	Given a list of pattern sequences and a list of recent events, return
+ *	the pattern sequence that best matches the event list, if there is
+ *	one.
  *
- *	This procedure is used in two different ways.  In the simplest
- *	use, "object" is NULL and psPtr is a list of pattern sequences,
- *	each of which corresponds to a binding.  In this case, the
- *	procedure finds the pattern sequences that match the event list
- *	and returns the most specific of those, if there is more than one.
+ *	This function is used in two different ways. In the simplest use,
+ *	"object" is NULL and psPtr is a list of pattern sequences, each of
+ *	which corresponds to a binding. In this case, the function finds the
+ *	pattern sequences that match the event list and returns the most
+ *	specific of those, if there is more than one.
  *
- *	In the second case, psPtr is a list of pattern sequences, each
- *	of which corresponds to a definition for a virtual binding.
- *	In order for one of these sequences to "match", it must match
- *	the events (as above) but in addition there must be a binding
- *	for its associated virtual event on the current object.  The
- *	"object" argument indicates which object the binding must be for.
+ *	In the second case, psPtr is a list of pattern sequences, each of
+ *	which corresponds to a definition for a virtual binding. In order for
+ *	one of these sequences to "match", it must match the events (as above)
+ *	but in addition there must be a binding for its associated virtual
+ *	event on the current object. The "object" argument indicates which
+ *	object the binding must be for.
  *
  * Results:
- *      The return value is NULL if bestPtr is NULL and no pattern matches
- *	the recent events from bindPtr.  Otherwise the return value is
- *	the most specific pattern sequence among bestPtr and all those
- *	at psPtr that match the event list and object.  If a pattern
- *	sequence other than bestPtr is returned, then *bestCommandPtr
- *	is filled in with a pointer to the command from the best sequence.
+
+ *	The return value is NULL if bestPtr is NULL and no pattern matches the
+ *	recent events from bindPtr. Otherwise the return value is the most
+ *	specific pattern sequence among bestPtr and all those at psPtr that
+ *	match the event list and object. If a pattern sequence other than
+ *	bestPtr is returned, then *bestCommandPtr is filled in with a pointer
+ *	to the command from the best sequence.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1967,22 +1933,22 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
     BindingTable *bindPtr;	/* Information about binding table, such as
 				 * ring of recent events. */
     PatSeq *psPtr;		/* List of pattern sequences. */
-    PatSeq *bestPtr; 		/* The best match seen so far, from a
-				 * previous call to this procedure.  NULL
-				 * means no prior best match. */
-    ClientData *objectPtr;	/* If NULL, the sequences at psPtr
-				 * correspond to "normal" bindings.  If
-				 * non-NULL, the sequences at psPtr correspond
-				 * to virtual bindings; in order to match each
-				 * sequence must correspond to a virtual
-				 * binding for which a binding exists for
-				 * object in bindPtr. */
+    PatSeq *bestPtr;		/* The best match seen so far, from a previous
+				 * call to this function. NULL means no prior
+				 * best match. */
+    ClientData *objectPtr;	/* If NULL, the sequences at psPtr correspond
+				 * to "normal" bindings. If non-NULL, the
+				 * sequences at psPtr correspond to virtual
+				 * bindings; in order to match each sequence
+				 * must correspond to a virtual binding for
+				 * which a binding exists for object in
+				 * bindPtr. */
     PatSeq **sourcePtrPtr;	/* Filled with the pattern sequence that
 				 * contains the eventProc and clientData
-				 * associated with the best match.  If this
+				 * associated with the best match. If this
 				 * differs from the return value, it is the
 				 * virtual event that most closely matched the
-				 * return value (a physical event).  Not
+				 * return value (a physical event). Not
 				 * modified unless a result other than bestPtr
 				 * is returned. */
 {
@@ -2003,8 +1969,8 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 	int modMask;
 
 	/*
-	 * Iterate over all the patterns in a sequence to be
-	 * sure that they all match.
+	 * Iterate over all the patterns in a sequence to be sure that they
+	 * all match.
 	 */
 
 	eventPtr = &bindPtr->eventRing[bindPtr->curEvent];
@@ -2019,21 +1985,21 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 	    }
 	    if (eventPtr->xany.type != patPtr->eventType) {
 		/*
-		 * Most of the event types are considered superfluous
-		 * in that they are ignored if they occur in the middle
-		 * of a pattern sequence and have mismatching types.  The
-		 * only ones that cannot be ignored are ButtonPress and
-		 * ButtonRelease events (if the next event in the pattern
-		 * is a KeyPress or KeyRelease) and KeyPress and KeyRelease
-		 * events (if the next pattern event is a ButtonPress or
-		 * ButtonRelease).  Here are some tricky cases to consider:
+		 * Most of the event types are considered superfluous in that
+		 * they are ignored if they occur in the middle of a pattern
+		 * sequence and have mismatching types. The only ones that
+		 * cannot be ignored are ButtonPress and ButtonRelease events
+		 * (if the next event in the pattern is a KeyPress or
+		 * KeyRelease) and KeyPress and KeyRelease events (if the next
+		 * pattern event is a ButtonPress or ButtonRelease). Here are
+		 * some tricky cases to consider:
 		 * 1. Double-Button or Double-Key events.
 		 * 2. Double-ButtonRelease or Double-KeyRelease events.
-		 * 3. The arrival of various events like Enter and Leave
-		 *    and FocusIn and GraphicsExpose between two button
-		 *    presses or key presses.
-		 * 4. Modifier keys like Shift and Control shouldn't
-		 *    generate conflicts with button events.
+		 * 3. The arrival of various events like Enter and Leave and
+		 *    FocusIn and GraphicsExpose between two button presses or
+		 *    key presses.
+		 * 4. Modifier keys like Shift and Control shouldn't generate
+		 *    conflicts with button events.
 		 */
 
 		if ((patPtr->eventType == KeyPress)
@@ -2067,27 +2033,25 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 		goto nextEvent;
 	    }
 	    if (eventPtr->xany.type == CreateNotify
-		&& eventPtr->xcreatewindow.parent != window) {
+		    && eventPtr->xcreatewindow.parent != window) {
 		goto nextSequence;
-	    } else 
-	    if (eventPtr->xany.window != window) {
+	    } else if (eventPtr->xany.window != window) {
 		goto nextSequence;
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Note: it's important for the keysym check to go before
-	     * the modifier check, so we can ignore unwanted modifier
-	     * keys before choking on the modifier check.
+	     * Note: it's important for the keysym check to go before the
+	     * modifier check, so we can ignore unwanted modifier keys before
+	     * choking on the modifier check.
 	     */
 
 	    if ((patPtr->detail.clientData != 0)
 		    && (patPtr->detail.clientData != detailPtr->clientData)) {
 		/*
-		 * The detail appears not to match.  However, if the event
-		 * is a KeyPress for a modifier key then just ignore the
-		 * event.  Otherwise event sequences like "aD" never match
-		 * because the shift key goes down between the "a" and the
-		 * "D".
+		 * The detail appears not to match. However, if the event is a
+		 * KeyPress for a modifier key then just ignore the event.
+		 * Otherwise event sequences like "aD" never match because the
+		 * shift key goes down between the "a" and the "D".
 		 */
 
 		if (eventPtr->xany.type == KeyPress) {
@@ -2149,7 +2113,7 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 	    }
 	    patPtr++;
 	    patCount--;
-	    nextEvent:
+	nextEvent:
 	    if (eventPtr == bindPtr->eventRing) {
 		eventPtr = &bindPtr->eventRing[EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE-1];
 		detailPtr = &bindPtr->detailRing[EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE-1];
@@ -2169,9 +2133,9 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 	    PatternTableKey key;
 
 	    /*
-	     * The sequence matches the physical constraints.
-	     * Is this object interested in any of the virtual events
-	     * that correspond to this sequence?  
+	     * The sequence matches the physical constraints. Is this object
+	     * interested in any of the virtual events that correspond to this
+	     * sequence?
 	     */
 
 	    voPtr = psPtr->voPtr;
@@ -2182,9 +2146,9 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 	    key.detail.clientData = 0;
 
 	    for (iVirt = 0; iVirt < voPtr->numOwners; iVirt++) {
-	        Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = voPtr->owners[iVirt];
+		Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = voPtr->owners[iVirt];
 
-	        key.detail.name = (Tk_Uid) Tcl_GetHashKey(hPtr->tablePtr,
+		key.detail.name = (Tk_Uid) Tcl_GetHashKey(hPtr->tablePtr,
 			hPtr);
 		hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&bindPtr->patternTable,
 			(char *) &key);
@@ -2212,14 +2176,15 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 	     * The physical event matches a virtual event's definition, but
 	     * the tag isn't interested in it.
 	     */
+
 	    goto nextSequence;
 	}
-	match:
+    match:
 
 	/*
-	 * This sequence matches.  If we've already got another match,
-	 * pick whichever is most specific.  Detail is most important,
-	 * then needMods.
+	 * This sequence matches. If we've already got another match, pick
+	 * whichever is most specific. Detail is most important, then
+	 * needMods.
 	 */
 
 	if (bestPtr != NULL) {
@@ -2255,28 +2220,27 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 	    /*
 	     * Tie goes to current best pattern.
 	     *
-	     * (1) For virtual vs. virtual, the least recently defined
-	     * virtual wins, because virtuals are examined in order of
-	     * definition.  This order is _not_ guaranteed in the
-	     * documentation.
+	     * (1) For virtual vs. virtual, the least recently defined virtual
+	     * wins, because virtuals are examined in order of definition.
+	     * This order is _not_ guaranteed in the documentation.
 	     *
-	     * (2) For virtual vs. physical, the physical wins because all
-	     * the physicals are examined before the virtuals.  This order
-	     * is guaranteed in the documentation.
+	     * (2) For virtual vs. physical, the physical wins because all the
+	     * physicals are examined before the virtuals. This order is
+	     * guaranteed in the documentation.
 	     *
 	     * (3) For physical vs. physical pattern, the most recently
 	     * defined physical wins, because physicals are examined in
-	     * reverse order of definition.  This order is guaranteed in
-	     * the documentation.
+	     * reverse order of definition. This order is guaranteed in the
+	     * documentation.
 	     */
 
-	    goto nextSequence;	
+	    goto nextSequence;
 	}
-	newBest:
+    newBest:
 	bestPtr = matchPtr;
 	bestSourcePtr = sourcePtr;
 
-	nextSequence:
+    nextSequence:
 	continue;
     }
 
@@ -2290,13 +2254,12 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
  *
  * ExpandPercents --
  *
- *	Given a command and an event, produce a new command
- *	by replacing % constructs in the original command
- *	with information from the X event.
+ *	Given a command and an event, produce a new command by replacing %
+ *	constructs in the original command with information from the X event.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The new expanded command is appended to the dynamic string
- *	given by dsPtr.
+ *	The new expanded command is appended to the dynamic string given by
+ *	dsPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2306,12 +2269,12 @@ MatchPatterns(dispPtr, bindPtr, psPtr, bestPtr, objectPtr, sourcePtrPtr)
 
 static void
 ExpandPercents(winPtr, before, eventPtr, keySym, dsPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window where event occurred:  needed to
-				 * get input context. */
-    CONST char *before;		/* Command containing percent expressions
-				 * to be replaced. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X event containing information to be
-				 * used in % replacements. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window where event occurred: needed to get
+				 * input context. */
+    CONST char *before;		/* Command containing percent expressions to
+				 * be replaced. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X event containing information to be used
+				 * in % replacements. */
     KeySym keySym;		/* KeySym: only relevant for KeyPress and
 				 * KeyRelease events). */
     Tcl_DString *dsPtr;		/* Dynamic string in which to append new
@@ -2332,10 +2295,11 @@ ExpandPercents(winPtr, before, eventPtr, keySym, dsPtr)
     } else {
 	flags = 0;
     }
+
     while (1) {
 	/*
-	 * Find everything up to the next % character and append it
-	 * to the result string.
+	 * Find everything up to the next % character and append it to the
+	 * result string.
 	 */
 
 	for (string = before; (*string != 0) && (*string != '%'); string++) {
@@ -2350,331 +2314,336 @@ ExpandPercents(winPtr, before, eventPtr, keySym, dsPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * There's a percent sequence here.  Process it.
+	 * There's a percent sequence here. Process it.
 	 */
 
 	number = 0;
 	string = "??";
 	switch (before[1]) {
-	    case '#':
-		number = eventPtr->xany.serial;
-		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'a':
-		if (flags & CONFIG) {
-		    TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xconfigure.above);
-		    string = numStorage;
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'b':
-		if (flags & BUTTON) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xbutton.button;
-		    goto doNumber;
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'c':
-		if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xexpose.count;
-		    goto doNumber;
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'd':
-		if (flags & (CROSSING|FOCUS)) {
-		    if (flags & FOCUS) {
-			number = eventPtr->xfocus.detail;
-		    } else {
-			number = eventPtr->xcrossing.detail;
-		    }
-		    string = TkFindStateString(notifyDetail, number);
-		} else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
-		    if (eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.value_mask & CWStackMode) {
-			string = TkFindStateString(configureRequestDetail,
-					eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.detail);
-		    } else {
-			string = "";
-		    }
-		} else if (flags & VIRTUAL) {
-		    XVirtualEvent *vePtr = (XVirtualEvent *) eventPtr;
-
-		    if (vePtr->user_data != NULL) {
-			string = Tcl_GetString(vePtr->user_data);
-		    } else {
-			string = "";
-		    }
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'f':
-		if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcrossing.focus;
-		    goto doNumber;
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'h':
-		if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xexpose.height;
-		} else if (flags & (CONFIG)) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xconfigure.height;
-		} else if (flags & CREATE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.height;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
-		    number =  eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.height;
-		} else if (flags & RESIZEREQ) {
-		    number =  eventPtr->xresizerequest.height;
-		} else {
-		    goto doString;
-		}
-		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'i':
-		if (flags & CREATE) {
-		    TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xcreatewindow.window);
-		} else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
-		    TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.window);
-		} else if (flags & MAPREQ) {
-		    TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xmaprequest.window);
-		} else {
-		    TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xany.window);
-		}
+	case '#':
+	    number = eventPtr->xany.serial;
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'a':
+	    if (flags & CONFIG) {
+		TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xconfigure.above);
 		string = numStorage;
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'k':
-		if (flags & KEY) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xkey.keycode;
-		    goto doNumber;
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'm':
-		if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcrossing.mode;
-		    string = TkFindStateString(notifyMode, number);
-		} else if (flags & FOCUS) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xfocus.mode;
-		    string = TkFindStateString(notifyMode, number);
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'o':
-		if (flags & CREATE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.override_redirect;
-		} else if (flags & MAP) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xmap.override_redirect;
-		} else if (flags & REPARENT) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xreparent.override_redirect;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIG) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xconfigure.override_redirect;
-		} else {
-		    goto doString;
-		}
-		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'p':
-		if (flags & CIRC) {
-		    string = TkFindStateString(circPlace, eventPtr->xcirculate.place);
-		} else if (flags & CIRCREQ) {
-		    string = TkFindStateString(circPlace, eventPtr->xcirculaterequest.place);
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 's':
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xkey.state;
-		} else if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcrossing.state;
-		} else if (flags & PROP) {
-		    string = TkFindStateString(propNotify,
-			    eventPtr->xproperty.state);
-		    goto doString;
-		} else if (flags & VISIBILITY) {
-		    string = TkFindStateString(visNotify,
-			    eventPtr->xvisibility.state);
-		    goto doString;
-		} else {
-		    goto doString;
-		}
-		goto doNumber;
-	    case 't':
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
-		    number = (int) eventPtr->xkey.time;
-		} else if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    number = (int) eventPtr->xcrossing.time;
-		} else if (flags & PROP) {
-		    number = (int) eventPtr->xproperty.time;
-		} else {
-		    goto doString;
-		}
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'b':
+	    if (flags & BUTTON) {
+		number = eventPtr->xbutton.button;
 		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'v':
-		number = eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.value_mask;
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'c':
+	    if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xexpose.count;
 		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'w':
-		if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xexpose.width;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIG) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xconfigure.width;
-		} else if (flags & CREATE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.width;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
-		    number =  eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.width;
-		} else if (flags & RESIZEREQ) {
-		    number =  eventPtr->xresizerequest.width;
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'd':
+	    if (flags & (CROSSING|FOCUS)) {
+		if (flags & FOCUS) {
+		    number = eventPtr->xfocus.detail;
 		} else {
-		    goto doString;
+		    number = eventPtr->xcrossing.detail;
 		}
-		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'x':
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xkey.x;
-		} else if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcrossing.x;
-		} else if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xexpose.x;
-		} else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG|GRAVITY)) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.x;
-		} else if (flags & REPARENT) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xreparent.x;
-		} else if (flags & CREATE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.x;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
-		    number =  eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.x;
+		string = TkFindStateString(notifyDetail, number);
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
+		if (eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.value_mask & CWStackMode) {
+		    string = TkFindStateString(configureRequestDetail,
+			    eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.detail);
 		} else {
-		    goto doString;
+		    string = "";
 		}
-		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'y':
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xkey.y;
-		} else if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xexpose.y;
-		} else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG|GRAVITY)) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.y;
-		} else if (flags & REPARENT) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xreparent.y;
-		} else if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcrossing.y;
-		} else if (flags & CREATE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.y;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.y;
+	    } else if (flags & VIRTUAL) {
+		XVirtualEvent *vePtr = (XVirtualEvent *) eventPtr;
+
+		if (vePtr->user_data != NULL) {
+		    string = Tcl_GetString(vePtr->user_data);
 		} else {
-		    goto doString;
+		    string = "";
 		}
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'f':
+	    if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcrossing.focus;
 		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'A':
-		if (flags & KEY) {
-		    Tcl_DStringFree(&buf);
-		    string = TkpGetString(winPtr, eventPtr, &buf);
-		}
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'h':
+	    if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xexpose.height;
+	    } else if (flags & (CONFIG)) {
+		number = eventPtr->xconfigure.height;
+	    } else if (flags & CREATE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.height;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
+		number =  eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.height;
+	    } else if (flags & RESIZEREQ) {
+		number =  eventPtr->xresizerequest.height;
+	    } else {
 		goto doString;
-	    case 'B':
-		if (flags & CREATE) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.border_width;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.border_width;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIG) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xconfigure.border_width;
-		} else {
-		    goto doString;
-		}
+	    }
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'i':
+	    if (flags & CREATE) {
+		TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xcreatewindow.window);
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
+		TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage,
+			eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.window);
+	    } else if (flags & MAPREQ) {
+		TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xmaprequest.window);
+	    } else {
+		TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xany.window);
+	    }
+	    string = numStorage;
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'k':
+	    if (flags & KEY) {
+		number = eventPtr->xkey.keycode;
 		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'D':
-		/*
-		 * This is used only by the MouseWheel event.
-		 */
-		if (flags & KEY) {
-		    number = eventPtr->xkey.keycode;
-		    goto doNumber;
-		}
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'm':
+	    if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcrossing.mode;
+		string = TkFindStateString(notifyMode, number);
+	    } else if (flags & FOCUS) {
+		number = eventPtr->xfocus.mode;
+		string = TkFindStateString(notifyMode, number);
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'o':
+	    if (flags & CREATE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.override_redirect;
+	    } else if (flags & MAP) {
+		number = eventPtr->xmap.override_redirect;
+	    } else if (flags & REPARENT) {
+		number = eventPtr->xreparent.override_redirect;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIG) {
+		number = eventPtr->xconfigure.override_redirect;
+	    } else {
 		goto doString;
-	    case 'E':
-		number = (int) eventPtr->xany.send_event;
-		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'K':
-		if (flags & KEY) {
-		    char *name;
-
-		    name = TkKeysymToString(keySym);
-		    if (name != NULL) {
-			string = name;
-		    }
-		}
+	    }
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'p':
+	    if (flags & CIRC) {
+		string = TkFindStateString(circPlace,
+			eventPtr->xcirculate.place);
+	    } else if (flags & CIRCREQ) {
+		string = TkFindStateString(circPlace,
+			eventPtr->xcirculaterequest.place);
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 's':
+	    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
+		number = eventPtr->xkey.state;
+	    } else if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcrossing.state;
+	    } else if (flags & PROP) {
+		string = TkFindStateString(propNotify,
+			eventPtr->xproperty.state);
 		goto doString;
-	    case 'N':
-		if (flags & KEY) {
-		    number = (int) keySym;
-		    goto doNumber;
-		}
+	    } else if (flags & VISIBILITY) {
+		string = TkFindStateString(visNotify,
+			eventPtr->xvisibility.state);
 		goto doString;
-	    case 'P':
-		if (flags & PROP) {
-		    string = Tk_GetAtomName((Tk_Window) winPtr, eventPtr->xproperty.atom);
-		}
+	    } else {
 		goto doString;
-	    case 'R':
-		if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
-		    TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xkey.root);
-		    string = numStorage;
-		}
+	    }
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 't':
+	    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
+		number = (int) eventPtr->xkey.time;
+	    } else if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		number = (int) eventPtr->xcrossing.time;
+	    } else if (flags & PROP) {
+		number = (int) eventPtr->xproperty.time;
+	    } else {
 		goto doString;
-            case 'S':
-		if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
-		    TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xkey.subwindow);
-		    string = numStorage;
-		}
+	    }
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'v':
+	    number = eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.value_mask;
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'w':
+	    if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xexpose.width;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIG) {
+		number = eventPtr->xconfigure.width;
+	    } else if (flags & CREATE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.width;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
+		number =  eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.width;
+	    } else if (flags & RESIZEREQ) {
+		number =  eventPtr->xresizerequest.width;
+	    } else {
 		goto doString;
-	    case 'T':
-		number = eventPtr->type;
+	    }
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'x':
+	    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
+		number = eventPtr->xkey.x;
+	    } else if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcrossing.x;
+	    } else if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xexpose.x;
+	    } else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG|GRAVITY)) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.x;
+	    } else if (flags & REPARENT) {
+		number = eventPtr->xreparent.x;
+	    } else if (flags & CREATE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.x;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
+		number =  eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.x;
+	    } else {
+		goto doString;
+	    }
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'y':
+	    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
+		number = eventPtr->xkey.y;
+	    } else if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xexpose.y;
+	    } else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG|GRAVITY)) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.y;
+	    } else if (flags & REPARENT) {
+		number = eventPtr->xreparent.y;
+	    } else if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcrossing.y;
+	    } else if (flags & CREATE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.y;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
+		number = eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.y;
+	    } else {
+		goto doString;
+	    }
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'A':
+	    if (flags & KEY) {
+		Tcl_DStringFree(&buf);
+		string = TkpGetString(winPtr, eventPtr, &buf);
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'B':
+	    if (flags & CREATE) {
+		number = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.border_width;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIGREQ) {
+		number = eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.border_width;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIG) {
+		number = eventPtr->xconfigure.border_width;
+	    } else {
+		goto doString;
+	    }
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'D':
+	    /*
+	     * This is used only by the MouseWheel event.
+	     */
+
+	    if (flags & KEY) {
+		number = eventPtr->xkey.keycode;
+		goto doNumber;
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'E':
+	    number = (int) eventPtr->xany.send_event;
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'K':
+	    if (flags & KEY) {
+		char *name;
+
+		name = TkKeysymToString(keySym);
+		if (name != NULL) {
+		    string = name;
+		}
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'N':
+	    if (flags & KEY) {
+		number = (int) keySym;
 		goto doNumber;
-	    case 'W': {
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'P':
+	    if (flags & PROP) {
+		string = Tk_GetAtomName((Tk_Window) winPtr,
+			eventPtr->xproperty.atom);
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'R':
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
+		TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xkey.root);
+		string = numStorage;
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'S':
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
+		TkpPrintWindowId(numStorage, eventPtr->xkey.subwindow);
+		string = numStorage;
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'T':
+	    number = eventPtr->type;
+	    goto doNumber;
+	case 'W': {
+	    Tk_Window tkwin;
+
+	    tkwin = Tk_IdToWindow(eventPtr->xany.display,
+		    eventPtr->xany.window);
+	    if (tkwin != NULL) {
+		string = Tk_PathName(tkwin);
+	    } else {
+		string = "??";
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	}
+	case 'X':
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
 		Tk_Window tkwin;
+		int x, y;
+		int width, height;
 
+		number = eventPtr->xkey.x_root;
 		tkwin = Tk_IdToWindow(eventPtr->xany.display,
 			eventPtr->xany.window);
 		if (tkwin != NULL) {
-		    string = Tk_PathName(tkwin);
-		} else {
-		    string = "??";
+		    Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
+		    number -= x;
 		}
-		goto doString;
+		goto doNumber;
 	    }
-	    case 'X':
-		if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
-		    Tk_Window tkwin;
-		    int x, y;
-		    int width, height;
-
-		    number = eventPtr->xkey.x_root;
-		    tkwin = Tk_IdToWindow(eventPtr->xany.display,
-			    eventPtr->xany.window);
-		    if (tkwin != NULL) {
-			Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
-			number -= x;
-		    }
-		    goto doNumber;
-		}
-		goto doString;
-	    case 'Y':
-		if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
-		    Tk_Window tkwin;
-		    int x, y;
-		    int width, height;
-
-		    number = eventPtr->xkey.y_root;
-		    tkwin = Tk_IdToWindow(eventPtr->xany.display,
-			    eventPtr->xany.window);
-		    if (tkwin != NULL) {
-			Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
-			number -= y;
-		    }
-		    goto doNumber;
+	    goto doString;
+	case 'Y':
+	    if (flags & KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_CROSSING) {
+		Tk_Window tkwin;
+		int x, y;
+		int width, height;
+
+		number = eventPtr->xkey.y_root;
+		tkwin = Tk_IdToWindow(eventPtr->xany.display,
+			eventPtr->xany.window);
+		if (tkwin != NULL) {
+		    Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, &x, &y, &width, &height);
+		    number -= y;
 		}
-		goto doString;
-	    default:
-		numStorage[0] = before[1];
-		numStorage[1] = '\0';
-		string = numStorage;
-		goto doString;
+		goto doNumber;
+	    }
+	    goto doString;
+	default:
+	    numStorage[0] = before[1];
+	    numStorage[1] = '\0';
+	    string = numStorage;
+	    goto doString;
 	}
 
-	doNumber:
+    doNumber:
 	sprintf(numStorage, "%d", number);
 	string = numStorage;
 
-	doString:
+    doString:
 	spaceNeeded = Tcl_ScanElement(string, &cvtFlags);
 	length = Tcl_DStringLength(dsPtr);
 	Tcl_DStringSetLength(dsPtr, length + spaceNeeded);
@@ -2692,28 +2661,27 @@ ExpandPercents(winPtr, before, eventPtr, keySym, dsPtr)
  *
  * ChangeScreen --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever the current screen changes
- *	in an application.  It invokes a Tcl procedure named
- *	"tk::ScreenChanged", passing it the screen name as argument.
- *	tk::ScreenChanged does things like making the tk::Priv variable
- *	point to an array for the current display.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever the current screen changes in an
+ *	application. It invokes a Tcl function named "tk::ScreenChanged",
+ *	passing it the screen name as argument. tk::ScreenChanged does things
+ *	like making the tk::Priv variable point to an array for the current
+ *	display.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Depends on what tk::ScreenChanged does.  If an error occurs
- *	them bgerror will be invoked.
+ *	Depends on what tk::ScreenChanged does. If an error occurs them
+ *	bgerror will be invoked.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 ChangeScreen(interp, dispName, screenIndex)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter in which to invoke
-					 * command. */
-    char *dispName;			/* Name of new display. */
-    int screenIndex;			/* Index of new screen. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter in which to invoke command. */
+    char *dispName;		/* Name of new display. */
+    int screenIndex;		/* Index of new screen. */
 {
     Tcl_DString cmd;
     int code;
@@ -2738,8 +2706,8 @@ ChangeScreen(interp, dispName, screenIndex)
  *
  * Tk_EventCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "event" Tcl command.
- *	It is used to define and generate events.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "event" Tcl command. It is
+ *	used to define and generate events.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -2783,64 +2751,61 @@ Tk_EventObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case EVENT_ADD: {
-	    int i;
-	    char *name, *event;
-	    
-	    if (objc < 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"virtual sequence ?sequence ...?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
-	    for (i = 3; i < objc; i++) {
-		event = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], NULL);
-		if (CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, name, event) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case EVENT_ADD: {
+	int i;
+	char *name, *event;
+
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "virtual sequence ?sequence ...?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case EVENT_DELETE: {
-	    int i;
-	    char *name, *event;
-	    
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"virtual ?sequence sequence ...?");
+	name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
+	for (i = 3; i < objc; i++) {
+	    event = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], NULL);
+	    if (CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, name, event) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		return DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, name, NULL);
-	    }
-	    for (i = 3; i < objc; i++) {
-		event = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], NULL);
-		if (DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, name, event) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case EVENT_GENERATE: {
-	    if (objc < 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window event ?options?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    return HandleEventGenerate(interp, tkwin, objc - 2, objv + 2);
+	break;
+    }
+    case EVENT_DELETE: {
+	int i;
+	char *name, *event;
+
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "virtual ?sequence sequence ...?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case EVENT_INFO: {
-	    if (objc == 2) {
-		GetAllVirtualEvents(interp, vetPtr);
-		return TCL_OK;
-	    } else if (objc == 3) {	
-		return GetVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr,
-			Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL));
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?virtual?");
+	name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], NULL);
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    return DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, name, NULL);
+	}
+	for (i = 3; i < objc; i++) {
+	    event = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], NULL);
+	    if (DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, name, event) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case EVENT_GENERATE:
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window event ?options?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	return HandleEventGenerate(interp, tkwin, objc - 2, objv + 2);
+    case EVENT_INFO:
+	if (objc == 2) {
+	    GetAllVirtualEvents(interp, vetPtr);
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	} else if (objc == 3) {
+	    return GetVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?virtual?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -2850,8 +2815,8 @@ Tk_EventObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * InitVirtualEventTable --
  *
- *	Given storage for a virtual event table, set up the fields to
- *	prepare a new domain in which virtual events may be defined.
+ *	Given storage for a virtual event table, set up the fields to prepare
+ *	a new domain in which virtual events may be defined.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2864,8 +2829,8 @@ Tk_EventObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 static void
 InitVirtualEventTable(vetPtr)
-    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr;	/* Pointer to virtual event table.  Memory
-				 * is supplied by the caller. */
+    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr;	/* Pointer to virtual event table. Memory is
+				 * supplied by the caller. */
 {
     Tcl_InitHashTable(&vetPtr->patternTable,
 	    sizeof(PatternTableKey) / sizeof(int));
@@ -2877,7 +2842,7 @@ InitVirtualEventTable(vetPtr)
  *
  * DeleteVirtualEventTable --
  *
- *	Delete the contents of a virtual event table.  The caller is
+ *	Delete the contents of a virtual event table. The caller is
  *	responsible for freeing any memory used by the table itself.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -2910,7 +2875,7 @@ DeleteVirtualEventTable(vetPtr)
 
     hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&vetPtr->nameTable, &search);
     for ( ; hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
-        ckfree((char *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr));
+	ckfree((char *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr));
     }
     Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&vetPtr->nameTable);
 }
@@ -2920,19 +2885,17 @@ DeleteVirtualEventTable(vetPtr)
  *
  * CreateVirtualEvent --
  *
- *	Add a new definition for a virtual event.  If the virtual event
- *	is already defined, the new definition augments those that
- *	already exist.
+ *	Add a new definition for a virtual event. If the virtual event is
+ *	already defined, the new definition augments those that already exist.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is TCL_ERROR if an error occured while
- *	creating the virtual binding.  In this case, an error message
- *	will be left in the interp's result.  If all went well then the
- *	return value is TCL_OK.
+ *	The return value is TCL_ERROR if an error occured while creating the
+ *	virtual binding. In this case, an error message will be left in the
+ *	interp's result. If all went well then the return value is TCL_OK.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The virtual event may cause future calls to Tk_BindEvent to
- *	behave differently than they did previously.
+ *	The virtual event may cause future calls to Tk_BindEvent to behave
+ *	differently than they did previously.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -2940,7 +2903,7 @@ DeleteVirtualEventTable(vetPtr)
 static int
 CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr;/* Table in which to augment virtual event. */
+    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr;	/* Table in which to augment virtual event. */
     char *virtString;		/* Name of new virtual event. */
     char *eventString;		/* String describing physical event that
 				 * triggers virtual event. */
@@ -2952,10 +2915,10 @@ CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
     PhysicalsOwned *poPtr;
     VirtualOwners *voPtr;
     Tk_Uid virtUid;
-    
+
     virtUid = GetVirtualEventUid(interp, virtString);
     if (virtUid == NULL) {
-        return TCL_ERROR;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
@@ -2965,7 +2928,7 @@ CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
     psPtr = FindSequence(interp, &vetPtr->patternTable, NULL, eventString,
 	    1, 0, &eventMask);
     if (psPtr == NULL) {
-        return TCL_ERROR;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
@@ -2983,20 +2946,21 @@ CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 	poPtr = (PhysicalsOwned *) ckalloc(sizeof(PhysicalsOwned));
 	poPtr->numOwned = 0;
     } else {
-        /*
+	/*
 	 * See if this virtual event is already defined for this physical
 	 * event and just return if it is.
 	 */
 
 	int i;
+
 	for (i = 0; i < poPtr->numOwned; i++) {
 	    if (poPtr->patSeqs[i] == psPtr) {
-	        return TCL_OK;
+		return TCL_OK;
 	    }
 	}
 	poPtr = (PhysicalsOwned *) ckrealloc((char *) poPtr,
 		sizeof(PhysicalsOwned) + poPtr->numOwned * sizeof(PatSeq *));
-    }	
+    }
     Tcl_SetHashValue(vhPtr, (ClientData) poPtr);
     poPtr->patSeqs[poPtr->numOwned] = psPtr;
     poPtr->numOwned++;
@@ -3007,10 +2971,10 @@ CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 
     voPtr = psPtr->voPtr;
     if (voPtr == NULL) {
-        voPtr = (VirtualOwners *) ckalloc(sizeof(VirtualOwners));
+	voPtr = (VirtualOwners *) ckalloc(sizeof(VirtualOwners));
 	voPtr->numOwners = 0;
     } else {
-        voPtr = (VirtualOwners *) ckrealloc((char *) voPtr,
+	voPtr = (VirtualOwners *) ckrealloc((char *) voPtr,
 		sizeof(VirtualOwners)
 		+ voPtr->numOwners * sizeof(Tcl_HashEntry *));
     }
@@ -3026,20 +2990,20 @@ CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
  *
  * DeleteVirtualEvent --
  *
- *	Remove the definition of a given virtual event.  If the 
- *	event string is NULL, all definitions of the virtual event
- *	will be removed.  Otherwise, just the specified definition
- *	of the virtual event will be removed.
+ *	Remove the definition of a given virtual event. If the event string is
+ *	NULL, all definitions of the virtual event will be removed.
+ *	Otherwise, just the specified definition of the virtual event will be
+ *	removed.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The result is a standard Tcl return value.  If an error
- *	occurs then the interp's result will contain an error message.
- *	It is not an error to attempt to delete a virtual event that
- *	does not exist or a definition that does not exist.
+ *	The result is a standard Tcl return value. If an error occurs then the
+ *	interp's result will contain an error message. It is not an error to
+ *	attempt to delete a virtual event that does not exist or a definition
+ *	that does not exist.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The virtual event given by virtString may be removed from the
- *	virtual event table.  
+ *	The virtual event given by virtString may be removed from the virtual
+ *	event table.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -3047,7 +3011,7 @@ CreateVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 static int
 DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr;/* Table in which to delete event. */
+    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr;	/* Table in which to delete event. */
     char *virtString;		/* String describing event sequence that
 				 * triggers binding. */
     char *eventString;		/* The event sequence that should be deleted,
@@ -3062,12 +3026,12 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 
     virtUid = GetVirtualEventUid(interp, virtString);
     if (virtUid == NULL) {
-        return TCL_ERROR;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
+
     vhPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&vetPtr->nameTable, virtUid);
     if (vhPtr == NULL) {
-        return TCL_OK;
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
     poPtr = (PhysicalsOwned *) Tcl_GetHashValue(vhPtr);
 
@@ -3076,10 +3040,9 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 	unsigned long eventMask;
 
 	/*
-	 * Delete only the specific physical event associated with the
-	 * virtual event.  If the physical event doesn't already exist, or
-	 * the virtual event doesn't own that physical event, return w/o
-	 * doing anything.
+	 * Delete only the specific physical event associated with the virtual
+	 * event. If the physical event doesn't already exist, or the virtual
+	 * event doesn't own that physical event, return w/o doing anything.
 	 */
 
 	eventPSPtr = FindSequence(interp, &vetPtr->patternTable, NULL,
@@ -3087,7 +3050,7 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 	if (eventPSPtr == NULL) {
 	    CONST char *string;
 
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringResult(interp); 
+	    string = Tcl_GetStringResult(interp);
 	    return (string[0] != '\0') ? TCL_ERROR : TCL_OK;
 	}
     }
@@ -3097,7 +3060,7 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 	if ((eventPSPtr == NULL) || (psPtr == eventPSPtr)) {
 	    int iVirt;
 	    VirtualOwners *voPtr;
-	    
+
 	    /*
 	     * Remove association between this physical event and the given
 	     * virtual event that it triggers.
@@ -3115,10 +3078,12 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 	    voPtr->numOwners--;
 	    if (voPtr->numOwners == 0) {
 		/*
-		 * Removed last reference to this physical event, so
-		 * remove it from physical->virtual map.
+		 * Removed last reference to this physical event, so remove it
+		 * from physical->virtual map.
 		 */
+
 		PatSeq *prevPtr = (PatSeq *) Tcl_GetHashValue(psPtr->hPtr);
+
 		if (prevPtr == psPtr) {
 		    if (psPtr->nextSeqPtr == NULL) {
 			Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(psPtr->hPtr);
@@ -3142,23 +3107,23 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 	    } else {
 		/*
 		 * This physical event still triggers some other virtual
-		 * event(s).  Consolidate the list of virtual owners for
-		 * this physical event so it no longer triggers the
-		 * given virtual event.
+		 * event(s). Consolidate the list of virtual owners for this
+		 * physical event so it no longer triggers the given virtual
+		 * event.
 		 */
+
 		voPtr->owners[iVirt] = voPtr->owners[voPtr->numOwners];
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Now delete the virtual event's reference to the physical
-	     * event.
+	     * Now delete the virtual event's reference to the physical event.
 	     */
 
 	    poPtr->numOwned--;
 	    if (eventPSPtr != NULL && poPtr->numOwned != 0) {
-	        /*
-		 * Just deleting this one physical event.  Consolidate list
-		 * of owned physical events and return.
+		/*
+		 * Just deleting this one physical event. Consolidate list of
+		 * owned physical events and return.
 		 */
 
 		poPtr->patSeqs[iPhys] = poPtr->patSeqs[poPtr->numOwned];
@@ -3169,10 +3134,10 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 
     if (poPtr->numOwned == 0) {
 	/*
-	 * All the physical events for this virtual event were deleted,
-	 * either because there was only one associated physical event or
-	 * because the caller was deleting the entire virtual event.  Now
-	 * the virtual event itself should be deleted.
+	 * All the physical events for this virtual event were deleted, either
+	 * because there was only one associated physical event or because the
+	 * caller was deleting the entire virtual event. Now the virtual event
+	 * itself should be deleted.
 	 */
 
 	ckfree((char *) poPtr);
@@ -3186,16 +3151,16 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
  *
  * GetVirtualEvent --
  *
- *	Return the list of physical events that can invoke the
- *	given virtual event.
+ *	Return the list of physical events that can invoke the given virtual
+ *	event.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is TCL_OK and the interp's result is filled with the
  *	string representation of the physical events associated with the
  *	virtual event; if there are no physical events for the given virtual
- *	event, the interp's result is filled with and empty string.  If the
- *	virtual event string is improperly formed, then TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned and an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	event, the interp's result is filled with and empty string. If the
+ *	virtual event string is improperly formed, then TCL_ERROR is returned
+ *	and an error message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3206,7 +3171,7 @@ DeleteVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString, eventString)
 static int
 GetVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for reporting. */
-    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr;/* Table in which to look for event. */
+    VirtualEventTable *vetPtr;	/* Table in which to look for event. */
     char *virtString;		/* String describing virtual event. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *vhPtr;
@@ -3217,12 +3182,12 @@ GetVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString)
 
     virtUid = GetVirtualEventUid(interp, virtString);
     if (virtUid == NULL) {
-        return TCL_ERROR;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     vhPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&vetPtr->nameTable, virtUid);
     if (vhPtr == NULL) {
-        return TCL_OK;
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
     Tcl_DStringInit(&ds);
@@ -3243,13 +3208,12 @@ GetVirtualEvent(interp, vetPtr, virtString)
  *
  * GetAllVirtualEvents --
  *
- *	Return a list that contains the names of all the virtual
- *	event defined.
+ *	Return a list that contains the names of all the virtual event
+ *	defined.
  *
  * Results:
- *	There is no return value.  The interp's result is modified to
- *	hold a Tcl list with one entry for each virtual event in 
- *	nameTable.  
+ *	There is no return value. The interp's result is modified to hold a
+ *	Tcl list with one entry for each virtual event in nameTable.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3270,11 +3234,11 @@ GetAllVirtualEvents(interp, vetPtr)
 
     hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&vetPtr->nameTable, &search);
     for ( ; hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
-	Tcl_DStringSetLength(&ds, 0);	
+	Tcl_DStringSetLength(&ds, 0);
 	Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, "<<", 2);
 	Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, Tcl_GetHashKey(hPtr->tablePtr, hPtr), -1);
 	Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, ">>", 2);
-        Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds));
+	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds));
     }
 
     Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
@@ -3285,36 +3249,36 @@ GetAllVirtualEvents(interp, vetPtr)
  *
  * HandleEventGenerate --
  *
- *	Helper function for the "event generate" command.  Generate and
- *	process an XEvent, constructed from information parsed from the
- *	event description string and its optional arguments.
+ *	Helper function for the "event generate" command. Generate and process
+ *	an XEvent, constructed from information parsed from the event
+ *	description string and its optional arguments.
  *
  *	argv[0] contains name of the target window.
  *	argv[1] contains pattern string for one event (e.g, <Control-v>).
- *	argv[2..argc-1] contains -field/option pairs for specifying
- *		        additional detail in the generated event.
+ *	argv[2..argc-1] contains -field/option pairs for specifying additional
+ *			detail in the generated event.
  *
- *	Either virtual or physical events can be generated this way.
- *	The event description string must contain the specification
- *	for only one event.
+ *	Either virtual or physical events can be generated this way. The event
+ *	description string must contain the specification for only one event.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When constructing the event, 
- *	 event.xany.serial is filled with the current X serial number.
- *	 event.xany.window is filled with the target window.
- *	 event.xany.display is filled with the target window's display.
+ *	When constructing the event,
+ *	    event.xany.serial is filled with the current X serial number.
+ *	    event.xany.window is filled with the target window.
+ *	    event.xany.display is filled with the target window's display.
  *	Any other fields in eventPtr which are not specified by the pattern
  *	string or the optional arguments, are set to 0.
  *
- *	The event may be handled sychronously or asynchronously, depending
- *	on the value specified by the optional "-when" option.  The
- *	default setting is synchronous.
+ *	The event may be handled sychronously or asynchronously, depending on
+ *	the value specified by the optional "-when" option. The default
+ *	setting is synchronous.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static int
 HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for errors return and name lookup. */
@@ -3322,7 +3286,7 @@ HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
     int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
 {
-    XEvent event;    
+    XEvent event;
     CONST char *p;
     char *name, *windowName;
     int count, flags, synch, i, number, warp;
@@ -3366,7 +3330,7 @@ HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
 	char *name;
 
 	name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[0], NULL);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window id \"", name, 		
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window id \"", name,
 		"\" doesn't exist in this application", (char *) NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
@@ -3398,16 +3362,17 @@ HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
     if (windowName[0]) {
 	event.xany.window = Tk_WindowId(tkwin);
     } else {
-	event.xany.window = RootWindow(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin));
+	event.xany.window =
+		RootWindow(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin));
     }
     event.xany.display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
 
     flags = flagArray[event.xany.type];
     if (flags & DESTROY) {
 	/*
-	 * Event DesotryNotify should be generated by destroying 
-	 * the window.
+	 * Event DesotryNotify should be generated by destroying the window.
 	 */
+
 	Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
@@ -3431,8 +3396,8 @@ HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Process the remaining arguments to fill in additional fields
-     * of the event.
+     * Process the remaining arguments to fill in additional fields of the
+     * event.
      */
 
     synch = 1;
@@ -3441,7 +3406,7 @@ HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
     for (i = 2; i < objc; i += 2) {
 	Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, *valuePtr;
 	int index;
-	
+
 	optionPtr = objv[i];
 	valuePtr = objv[i + 1];
 
@@ -3451,10 +3416,10 @@ HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
 	}
 	if (objc & 1) {
 	    /*
-	     * This test occurs after Tcl_GetIndexFromObj() so that
-	     * "event generate <Button> -xyz" will return the error message
-	     * that "-xyz" is a bad option, rather than that the value
-	     * for "-xyz" is missing.
+	     * This test occurs after Tcl_GetIndexFromObj() so that "event
+	     * generate <Button> -xyz" will return the error message that
+	     * "-xyz" is a bad option, rather than that the value for "-xyz"
+	     * is missing.
 	     */
 
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"",
@@ -3464,406 +3429,378 @@ HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	switch ((enum field) index) {
-	    case EVENT_WARP: {
-		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &warp) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (!(flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL))) {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	case EVENT_WARP:
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &warp) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_WHEN: {
-		pos = (Tcl_QueuePosition) TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, 
-			queuePosition, valuePtr);
-		if ((int) pos < -1) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		synch = 0;
-		if ((int) pos == -1) {
-		    synch = 1;
-		}
-		break;
+	    if (!(flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL))) {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_ABOVE: {
-		if (NameToWindow(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & CONFIG) {
-		    event.xconfigure.above = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_WHEN:
+	    pos = (Tcl_QueuePosition) TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr,
+		    queuePosition, valuePtr);
+	    if ((int) pos < -1) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_BORDER: {
-		if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG)) {
-		    event.xcreatewindow.border_width = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    synch = 0;
+	    if ((int) pos == -1) {
+		synch = 1;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_BUTTON: {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & BUTTON) {
-		    event.xbutton.button = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_ABOVE:
+	    if (NameToWindow(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_COUNT: {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    event.xexpose.count = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    if (flags & CONFIG) {
+		event.xconfigure.above = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_DATA:
-		if (flags & VIRTUAL) {
-		    /*
-		     * Do not increment reference count until after
-		     * parsing completes and we know that the event
-		     * generation is really going to happen.
-		     */
-		    userDataObj = valuePtr;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case EVENT_DELTA: {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if ((flags & KEY) && (event.xkey.type == MouseWheelEvent)) {
-		    event.xkey.keycode = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_BORDER:
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp,tkwin,valuePtr,&number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_DETAIL: {
-		number = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, notifyDetail,
-			valuePtr);
-		if (number < 0) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & FOCUS) {
-		    event.xfocus.detail = number;
-		} else if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    event.xcrossing.detail = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG)) {
+		event.xcreatewindow.border_width = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_FOCUS: {
-		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    event.xcrossing.focus = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_BUTTON:
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_HEIGHT: {
-		if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		     event.xexpose.height = number;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIG) {
-		    event.xconfigure.height = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    if (flags & BUTTON) {
+		event.xbutton.button = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_KEYCODE: {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if ((flags & KEY) && (event.xkey.type != MouseWheelEvent)) {
-		    event.xkey.keycode = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_COUNT:
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		event.xexpose.count = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_KEYSYM: {
-		KeySym keysym;
-		char *value;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_DATA:
+	    if (flags & VIRTUAL) {
+		/*
+		 * Do not increment reference count until after parsing
+		 * completes and we know that the event generation is really
+		 * going to happen.
+		 */
 
-		value = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, NULL);
-		keysym = TkStringToKeysym(value);
-		if (keysym == NoSymbol) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown keysym \"", value, "\"",
-			    (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
+		userDataObj = valuePtr;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_DELTA:
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if ((flags & KEY) && (event.xkey.type == MouseWheelEvent)) {
+		event.xkey.keycode = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_DETAIL:
+	    number = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, notifyDetail,
+		    valuePtr);
+	    if (number < 0) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & FOCUS) {
+		event.xfocus.detail = number;
+	    } else if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		event.xcrossing.detail = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_FOCUS:
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		event.xcrossing.focus = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_HEIGHT:
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr,
+		    &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		event.xexpose.height = number;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIG) {
+		event.xconfigure.height = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_KEYCODE:
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if ((flags & KEY) && (event.xkey.type != MouseWheelEvent)) {
+		event.xkey.keycode = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_KEYSYM: {
+	    KeySym keysym;
+	    char *value;
+
+	    value = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, NULL);
+	    keysym = TkStringToKeysym(value);
+	    if (keysym == NoSymbol) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown keysym \"", value, "\"",
+			(char *) NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
 
-		TkpSetKeycodeAndState(tkwin, keysym, &event);
-		if (event.xkey.keycode == 0) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no keycode for keysym \"", value,
-			    "\"", (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (!(flags & KEY) || (event.xkey.type == MouseWheelEvent)) {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    TkpSetKeycodeAndState(tkwin, keysym, &event);
+	    if (event.xkey.keycode == 0) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no keycode for keysym \"", value,
+			"\"", (char *) NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_MODE: {
-		number = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, notifyMode,
-			valuePtr);
-		if (number < 0) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & CROSSING) {
-		    event.xcrossing.mode = number;
-		} else if (flags & FOCUS) {
-		    event.xfocus.mode = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    if (!(flags & KEY) || (event.xkey.type == MouseWheelEvent)) {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_OVERRIDE: {
-		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & CREATE) {
-		    event.xcreatewindow.override_redirect = number;
-		} else if (flags & MAP) {
-		    event.xmap.override_redirect = number;
-		} else if (flags & REPARENT) {
-		    event.xreparent.override_redirect = number;
-		} else if (flags & CONFIG) {
-		    event.xconfigure.override_redirect = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	}
+	case EVENT_MODE:
+	    number = TkFindStateNumObj(interp,optionPtr,notifyMode,valuePtr);
+	    if (number < 0) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_PLACE: {
-		number = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, circPlace,
-			valuePtr);
-		if (number < 0) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & CIRC) {
-		    event.xcirculate.place = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    if (flags & CROSSING) {
+		event.xcrossing.mode = number;
+	    } else if (flags & FOCUS) {
+		event.xfocus.mode = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_ROOT: {
-		if (NameToWindow(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
-		    event.xkey.root = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_OVERRIDE:
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_ROOTX: {
-		if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
-		    event.xkey.x_root = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    if (flags & CREATE) {
+		event.xcreatewindow.override_redirect = number;
+	    } else if (flags & MAP) {
+		event.xmap.override_redirect = number;
+	    } else if (flags & REPARENT) {
+		event.xreparent.override_redirect = number;
+	    } else if (flags & CONFIG) {
+		event.xconfigure.override_redirect = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_ROOTY: {
-		if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
-		    event.xkey.y_root = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_PLACE:
+	    number = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, circPlace, valuePtr);
+	    if (number < 0) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & CIRC) {
+		event.xcirculate.place = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_ROOT:
+	    if (NameToWindow(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
+		event.xkey.root = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_ROOTX:
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp,tkwin,valuePtr,&number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
+		event.xkey.x_root = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_ROOTY:
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp,tkwin,valuePtr,&number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
+		event.xkey.y_root = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_SEND: {
-		CONST char *value;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_SEND: {
+	    CONST char *value;
 
-		value = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, NULL);
-		if (isdigit(UCHAR(value[0]))) {
-		    /*
-		     * Allow arbitrary integer values for the field; they
-		     * are needed by a few of the tests in the Tk test suite.
-		     */
+	    value = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, NULL);
+	    if (isdigit(UCHAR(value[0]))) {
+		/*
+		 * Allow arbitrary integer values for the field; they are
+		 * needed by a few of the tests in the Tk test suite.
+		 */
 
-		    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number)
-			    != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		} else {
-		    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number)
-			    != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		}
-		event.xany.send_event = number;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case EVENT_SERIAL: {
 		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		event.xany.serial = number;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case EVENT_STATE: {
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
-		    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number)
-			    != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
-			event.xkey.state = number;
-		    } else {
-			event.xcrossing.state = number;
-		    }
-		} else if (flags & VISIBILITY) {
-		    number = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, visNotify,
-			    valuePtr);
-		    if (number < 0) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    event.xvisibility.state = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case EVENT_SUBWINDOW: {
-		if (NameToWindow(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
+	    } else {
+		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp,valuePtr,&number) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
-		    event.xkey.subwindow = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_TIME: {
+	    event.xany.send_event = number;
+	    break;
+	}
+	case EVENT_SERIAL:
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    event.xany.serial = number;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_STATE:
+	    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
 		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
-		    event.xkey.time = (Time) number;
-		} else if (flags & PROP) {
-		    event.xproperty.time = (Time) number;
+		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL)) {
+		    event.xkey.state = number;
 		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
+		    event.xcrossing.state = number;
 		}
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case EVENT_WIDTH: {
-		if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &number)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
+	    } else if (flags & VISIBILITY) {
+		number = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, visNotify,
+			valuePtr);
+		if (number < 0) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    event.xexpose.width = number;
-		} else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG)) {
-		    event.xcreatewindow.width = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+		event.xvisibility.state = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_WINDOW: {
-		if (NameToWindow(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & (CREATE|UNMAP|MAP|REPARENT|CONFIG
-			|GRAVITY|CIRC)) {
-		    event.xcreatewindow.window = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_SUBWINDOW:
+	    if (NameToWindow(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_X: {
-		if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &number)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {	
-		    event.xkey.x = number;
-		    /*
-		     * Only modify rootx as well if it hasn't been changed.
-		     */
-		    if (event.xkey.x_root == -1) {
-			int rootX, rootY;
+	    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
+		event.xkey.subwindow = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_TIME:
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
+		event.xkey.time = (Time) number;
+	    } else if (flags & PROP) {
+		event.xproperty.time = (Time) number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_WIDTH:
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp,tkwin,valuePtr,&number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		event.xexpose.width = number;
+	    } else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG)) {
+		event.xcreatewindow.width = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_WINDOW:
+	    if (NameToWindow(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &tkwin2) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & (CREATE|UNMAP|MAP|REPARENT|CONFIG|GRAVITY|CIRC)) {
+		event.xcreatewindow.window = Tk_WindowId(tkwin2);
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_X:
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp,tkwin,valuePtr,&number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
+		event.xkey.x = number;
 
-			Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, &rootX, &rootY);
-			event.xkey.x_root = rootX + number;
-		    }
-		} else if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    event.xexpose.x = number;
-		} else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG|GRAVITY)) { 
-		    event.xcreatewindow.x = number;
-		} else if (flags & REPARENT) {		
-		    event.xreparent.x = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
+		/*
+		 * Only modify rootx as well if it hasn't been changed.
+		 */
+
+		if (event.xkey.x_root == -1) {
+		    int rootX, rootY;
+
+		    Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, &rootX, &rootY);
+		    event.xkey.x_root = rootX + number;
 		}
-		break;
+	    } else if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		event.xexpose.x = number;
+	    } else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG|GRAVITY)) {
+		event.xcreatewindow.x = number;
+	    } else if (flags & REPARENT) {
+		event.xreparent.x = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
-	    case EVENT_Y: {
-		if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &number)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
-		    event.xkey.y = number;
-		    /*
-		     * Only modify rooty as well if it hasn't been changed.
-		     */
-		    if (event.xkey.y_root == -1) {
-			int rootX, rootY;
+	    break;
+	case EVENT_Y:
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp,tkwin,valuePtr,&number) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (flags & (KEY_BUTTON_MOTION_VIRTUAL|CROSSING)) {
+		event.xkey.y = number;
 
-			Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, &rootX, &rootY);
-			event.xkey.y_root = rootY + number;
-		    }
-		} else if (flags & EXPOSE) {
-		    event.xexpose.y = number;
-		} else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG|GRAVITY)) {
-		    event.xcreatewindow.y = number;
-		} else if (flags & REPARENT) {
-		    event.xreparent.y = number;
-		} else {
-		    goto badopt;
+		/*
+		 * Only modify rooty as well if it hasn't been changed.
+		 */
+
+		if (event.xkey.y_root == -1) {
+		    int rootX, rootY;
+
+		    Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, &rootX, &rootY);
+		    event.xkey.y_root = rootY + number;
 		}
-		break;
+	    } else if (flags & EXPOSE) {
+		event.xexpose.y = number;
+	    } else if (flags & (CREATE|CONFIG|GRAVITY)) {
+		event.xcreatewindow.y = number;
+	    } else if (flags & REPARENT) {
+		event.xreparent.y = number;
+	    } else {
+		goto badopt;
 	    }
+	    break;
 	}
 	continue;
-	
-	badopt:
+
+    badopt:
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, name, " event doesn't accept \"",
 		Tcl_GetStringFromObj(optionPtr, NULL), "\" option", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -3872,23 +3809,31 @@ HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
 	XVirtualEvent *vePtr = (XVirtualEvent *) &event;
 
 	/*
-	 * Must be virtual event to set that variable to non-NULL.
-	 * Now we want to install the object into the event.  Note
-	 * that we must incr the refcount before firing it into the
-	 * low-level event subsystem; the refcount will be decremented
-	 * once the event has been processed.
+	 * Must be virtual event to set that variable to non-NULL. Now we want
+	 * to install the object into the event. Note that we must incr the
+	 * refcount before firing it into the low-level event subsystem; the
+	 * refcount will be decremented once the event has been processed.
 	 */
+
 	vePtr->user_data = userDataObj;
 	Tcl_IncrRefCount(userDataObj);
     }
+
+    /*
+     * Now we have constructed the event, inject it into the event handling
+     * code.
+     */
+
     if (synch != 0) {
 	Tk_HandleEvent(&event);
     } else {
 	Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event, pos);
     }
+
     /*
-     * We only allow warping if the window is mapped
+     * We only allow warping if the window is mapped.
      */
+
     if ((warp != 0) && Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) {
 	TkDisplay *dispPtr;
 	dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(event.xmotion.display);
@@ -3902,8 +3847,8 @@ HandleEventGenerate(interp, mainWin, objc, objv)
     }
     Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
     return TCL_OK;
-		
 }
+
 static int
 NameToWindow(interp, mainWin, objPtr, tkwinPtr)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for error return and name lookup. */
@@ -3925,7 +3870,7 @@ NameToWindow(interp, mainWin, objPtr, tkwinPtr)
     } else {
 	/*
 	 * Check for the winPtr being valid, even if it looks ok to
-	 * TkpScanWindowId.  [Bug #411307]
+	 * TkpScanWindowId. [Bug #411307]
 	 */
 
 	if ((TkpScanWindowId(NULL, name, &id) != TCL_OK) ||
@@ -3961,7 +3906,7 @@ DoWarp(clientData)
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = (TkDisplay *) clientData;
 
     XWarpPointer(dispPtr->display, (Window) None, (Window) dispPtr->warpWindow,
-                     0, 0, 0, 0, (int) dispPtr->warpX, (int) dispPtr->warpY);
+	    0, 0, 0, 0, (int) dispPtr->warpX, (int) dispPtr->warpY);
     XForceScreenSaver(dispPtr->display, ScreenSaverReset);
     dispPtr->flags &= ~TK_DISPLAY_IN_WARP;
 }
@@ -3971,20 +3916,21 @@ DoWarp(clientData)
  *
  * GetVirtualEventUid --
  *
- *	Determine if the given string is in the proper format for a
- *	virtual event.
+ *	Determine if the given string is in the proper format for a virtual
+ *	event.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is NULL if the virtual event string was
- *	not in the proper format.  In this case, an error message
- *	will be left in the interp's result.  Otherwise the return
- *	value is a Tk_Uid that represents the virtual event.
+ *	The return value is NULL if the virtual event string was not in the
+ *	proper format. In this case, an error message will be left in the
+ *	interp's result. Otherwise the return value is a Tk_Uid that
+ *	represents the virtual event.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static Tk_Uid
 GetVirtualEventUid(interp, virtString)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;
@@ -3997,9 +3943,9 @@ GetVirtualEventUid(interp, virtString)
 
     if (length < 5 || virtString[0] != '<' || virtString[1] != '<' ||
 	    virtString[length - 2] != '>' || virtString[length - 1] != '>') {
-        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "virtual event \"", virtString,
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "virtual event \"", virtString,
 		"\" is badly formed", (char *) NULL);
-        return NULL;
+	return NULL;
     }
     virtString[length - 2] = '\0';
     uid = Tk_GetUid(virtString + 2);
@@ -4007,27 +3953,24 @@ GetVirtualEventUid(interp, virtString)
 
     return uid;
 }
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * FindSequence --
  *
- *	Find the entry in the pattern table that corresponds to a
- *	particular pattern string, and return a pointer to that
- *	entry.
+ *	Find the entry in the pattern table that corresponds to a particular
+ *	pattern string, and return a pointer to that entry.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is normally a pointer to the PatSeq
- *	in patternTable that corresponds to eventString.  If an error
- *	was found while parsing eventString, or if "create" is 0 and
- *	no pattern sequence previously existed, then NULL is returned
- *	and the interp's result contains a message describing the problem.
- *	If no pattern sequence previously existed for eventString, then
- *	a new one is created with a NULL command field.  In a successful
- *	return, *maskPtr is filled in with a mask of the event types
- *	on which the pattern sequence depends.
+ *	The return value is normally a pointer to the PatSeq in patternTable
+ *	that corresponds to eventString. If an error was found while parsing
+ *	eventString, or if "create" is 0 and no pattern sequence previously
+ *	existed, then NULL is returned and the interp's result contains a
+ *	message describing the problem. If no pattern sequence previously
+ *	existed for eventString, then a new one is created with a NULL command
+ *	field. In a successful return, *maskPtr is filled in with a mask of
+ *	the event types on which the pattern sequence depends.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	A new pattern sequence may be allocated.
@@ -4038,26 +3981,22 @@ GetVirtualEventUid(interp, virtString)
 static PatSeq *
 FindSequence(interp, patternTablePtr, object, eventString, create,
 	allowVirtual, maskPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error
-				 * reporting. */
-    Tcl_HashTable *patternTablePtr; /* Table to use for lookup. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    Tcl_HashTable *patternTablePtr;
+				/* Table to use for lookup. */
     ClientData object;		/* For binding table, token for object with
-				 * which binding is associated.
-				 * For virtual event table, NULL. */
-    CONST char *eventString;	/* String description of pattern to
-				 * match on.  See user documentation
-				 * for details. */
-    int create;			/* 0 means don't create the entry if
-				 * it doesn't already exist.   Non-zero
-				 * means create. */
-    int allowVirtual;		/* 0 means that virtual events are not
-				 * allowed in the sequence.  Non-zero
-				 * otherwise. */
-    unsigned long *maskPtr;	/* *maskPtr is filled in with the event
-				 * types on which this pattern sequence
-				 * depends. */
+				 * which binding is associated. For virtual
+				 * event table, NULL. */
+    CONST char *eventString;	/* String description of pattern to match on.
+				 * See user documentation for details. */
+    int create;			/* 0 means don't create the entry if it
+				 * doesn't already exist. Non-zero means
+				 * create. */
+    int allowVirtual;		/* 0 means that virtual events are not allowed
+				 * in the sequence. Non-zero otherwise. */
+    unsigned long *maskPtr;	/* *maskPtr is filled in with the event types
+				 * on which this pattern sequence depends. */
 {
-
     Pattern pats[EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE];
     int numPats, virtualFound;
     CONST char *p;
@@ -4071,10 +4010,9 @@ FindSequence(interp, patternTablePtr, object, eventString, create,
 
     /*
      *-------------------------------------------------------------
-     * Step 1: parse the pattern string to produce an array
-     * of Patterns.  The array is generated backwards, so
-     * that the lowest-indexed pattern corresponds to the last
-     * event that must occur.
+     * Step 1: parse the pattern string to produce an array of Patterns. The
+     * array is generated backwards, so that the lowest-indexed pattern
+     * corresponds to the last event that must occur.
      *-------------------------------------------------------------
      */
 
@@ -4099,7 +4037,7 @@ FindSequence(interp, patternTablePtr, object, eventString, create,
 
 	if (eventMask & VirtualEventMask) {
 	    if (allowVirtual == 0) {
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, 
+		Tcl_SetResult(interp,
 			"virtual event not allowed in definition of another virtual event",
 			TCL_STATIC);
 		return NULL;
@@ -4121,8 +4059,8 @@ FindSequence(interp, patternTablePtr, object, eventString, create,
 
     /*
      *-------------------------------------------------------------
-     * Step 2: find the sequence in the binding table if it exists,
-     * and add a new sequence to the table if it doesn't.
+     * Step 2: find the sequence in the binding table if it exists, and add a
+     * new sequence to the table if it doesn't.
      *-------------------------------------------------------------
      */
 
@@ -4135,7 +4073,7 @@ FindSequence(interp, patternTablePtr, object, eventString, create,
 		TCL_STATIC);
 	return NULL;
     }
-    
+
     patPtr = &pats[EVENT_BUFFER_SIZE-numPats];
     memset(&key, 0, sizeof(key));
     key.object = object;
@@ -4158,14 +4096,15 @@ FindSequence(interp, patternTablePtr, object, eventString, create,
 	if (new) {
 	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hPtr);
 	}
+
 	/*
-	 * No binding exists for the sequence, so return an empty error.
-	 * This is a special error that the caller will check for in order
-	 * to silently ignore this case.  This is a hack that maintains
-	 * backward compatibility for Tk_GetBinding but the various "bind"
-	 * commands silently ignore missing bindings.
+	 * No binding exists for the sequence, so return an empty error. This
+	 * is a special error that the caller will check for in order to
+	 * silently ignore this case. This is a hack that maintains backward
+	 * compatibility for Tk_GetBinding but the various "bind" commands
+	 * silently ignore missing bindings.
 	 */
-	
+
 	return NULL;
     }
     psPtr = (PatSeq *) ckalloc((unsigned) (sizeof(PatSeq)
@@ -4184,7 +4123,7 @@ FindSequence(interp, patternTablePtr, object, eventString, create,
 
     memcpy((VOID *) psPtr->pats, (VOID *) patPtr, sequenceSize);
 
-    done:
+  done:
     *maskPtr = eventMask;
     return psPtr;
 }
@@ -4194,34 +4133,31 @@ FindSequence(interp, patternTablePtr, object, eventString, create,
  *
  * ParseEventDescription --
  *
- *	Fill Pattern buffer with information about event from
- *	event string.
+ *	Fill Pattern buffer with information about event from event string.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Leaves error message in interp and returns 0 if there was an
- *	error due to a badly formed event string.  Returns 1 if proper
- *	event was specified, 2 if Double modifier was used in event
- *	string, or 3 if Triple was used.
+ *	Leaves error message in interp and returns 0 if there was an error due
+ *	to a badly formed event string. Returns 1 if proper event was
+ *	specified, 2 if Double modifier was used in event string, or 3 if
+ *	Triple was used.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	On exit, eventStringPtr points to rest of event string (after the
- *	closing '>', so that this procedure can be called repeatedly to
- *	parse all the events in the entire sequence.
+ *	closing '>', so that this function can be called repeatedly to parse
+ *	all the events in the entire sequence.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
-	eventMaskPtr)
+ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr, eventMaskPtr)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* For error messages. */
-    CONST char **eventStringPtr;/* On input, holds a pointer to start of
-				 * event string.  On exit, gets pointer to
-				 * rest of string after parsed event. */
+    CONST char **eventStringPtr;/* On input, holds a pointer to start of event
+				 * string. On exit, gets pointer to rest of
+				 * string after parsed event. */
     Pattern *patPtr;		/* Filled with the pattern parsed from the
 				 * event string. */
     unsigned long *eventMaskPtr;/* Filled with event mask of matched event. */
-				 
 {
     char *p;
     unsigned long eventMask;
@@ -4240,7 +4176,7 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
 
     eventMask = 0;
     count = 1;
-    
+
     /*
      * Handle simple ASCII characters.
      */
@@ -4258,7 +4194,7 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
 		patPtr->detail.keySym = *p;
 	    } else {
 		char buf[64];
-		
+
 		sprintf(buf, "bad ASCII character 0x%x", (unsigned char) *p);
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 		count = 0;
@@ -4270,8 +4206,8 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
     }
 
     /*
-     * A fancier event description.  This can be either a virtual event
-     * or a physical event.
+     * A fancier event description. This can be either a virtual event or a
+     * physical event.
      *
      * A virtual event description consists of:
      *
@@ -4282,30 +4218,29 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
      * A physical event description consists of:
      *
      * 1. open angle bracket.
-     * 2. any number of modifiers, each followed by spaces
-     *    or dashes.
+     * 2. any number of modifiers, each followed by spaces or dashes.
      * 3. an optional event name.
-     * 4. an option button or keysym name.  Either this or
-     *    item 3 *must* be present;  if both are present
-     *    then they are separated by spaces or dashes.
+     * 4. an option button or keysym name. Either this or item 3 *must* be
+     *	  present; if both are present then they are separated by spaces or
+     *	  dashes.
      * 5. a close angle bracket.
      */
 
     p++;
     if (*p == '<') {
 	/*
-	 * This is a virtual event: soak up all the characters up to
-	 * the next '>'.
+	 * This is a virtual event: soak up all the characters up to the next
+	 * '>'.
 	 */
 
-	char *field = p + 1;	    
+	char *field = p + 1;
 	p = strchr(field, '>');
 	if (p == field) {
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "virtual event \"<<>>\" is badly formed",
 		    TCL_STATIC);
 	    count = 0;
 	    goto done;
-	}	    
+	}
 	if ((p == NULL) || (p[1] != '>')) {
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "missing \">\" in virtual binding",
 		    TCL_STATIC);
@@ -4328,9 +4263,10 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
 	if (*p == '>') {
 	    /*
 	     * This solves the problem of, e.g., <Control-M> being
-	     * misinterpreted as Control + Meta + missing keysym
-	     * instead of Control + KeyPress + M.
+	     * misinterpreted as Control + Meta + missing keysym instead of
+	     * Control + KeyPress + M.
 	     */
+
 	     break;
 	}
 	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&modTable, field);
@@ -4378,7 +4314,8 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
 	    }
 	    patPtr->detail.button = (*field - '0');
 	} else {
-	    getKeysym:
+
+	getKeysym:
 	    patPtr->detail.keySym = TkStringToKeysym(field);
 	    if (patPtr->detail.keySym == NoSymbol) {
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad event type or keysym \"",
@@ -4423,10 +4360,10 @@ ParseEventDescription(interp, eventStringPtr, patPtr,
     }
     p++;
 
-end:
+  end:
     *eventStringPtr += (p - Tcl_DStringValue(&copy));
     *eventMaskPtr |= eventMask;
-done:
+  done:
     Tcl_DStringFree(&copy);
     return count;
 }
@@ -4436,17 +4373,15 @@ done:
  *
  * GetField --
  *
- *	Used to parse pattern descriptions.  Copies up to
- *	size characters from p to copy, stopping at end of
- *	string, space, "-", ">", or whenever size is
- *	exceeded.
+ *	Used to parse pattern descriptions. Copies up to size characters from
+ *	p to copy, stopping at end of string, space, "-", ">", or whenever
+ *	size is exceeded.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the character just
- *	after the last one copied (usually "-" or space or
- *	">", but could be anything if size was exceeded).
- *	Also places NULL-terminated string (up to size
- *	character, including NULL), at copy.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the character just after the last one
+ *	copied (usually "-" or space or ">", but could be anything if size was
+ *	exceeded). Also places NULL-terminated string (up to size character,
+ *	including NULL), at copy.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4456,10 +4391,9 @@ done:
 
 static char *
 GetField(p, copy, size)
-    char *p;		/* Pointer to part of pattern. */
-    char *copy;	/* Place to copy field. */
-    int size;			/* Maximum number of characters to
-				 * copy. */
+    char *p;			/* Pointer to part of pattern. */
+    char *copy;			/* Place to copy field. */
+    int size;			/* Maximum number of characters to copy. */
 {
     while ((*p != '\0') && !isspace(UCHAR(*p)) && (*p != '>')
 	    && (*p != '-') && (size > 1)) {
@@ -4477,18 +4411,19 @@ GetField(p, copy, size)
  *
  * GetPatternString --
  *
- *	Produce a string version of the given event, for displaying to
- *	the user.  
+ *	Produce a string version of the given event, for displaying to the
+ *	user.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The string is left in dsPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	It is the caller's responsibility to initialize the DString before
- *	and to free it after calling this procedure.
+ *	It is the caller's responsibility to initialize the DString before and
+ *	to free it after calling this function.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static void
 GetPatternString(psPtr, dsPtr)
     PatSeq *psPtr;
@@ -4513,7 +4448,7 @@ GetPatternString(psPtr, dsPtr)
 	 */
 
 	if ((patPtr->eventType == KeyPress)
-		&& ((psPtr->flags & PAT_NEARBY) == 0) 
+		&& ((psPtr->flags & PAT_NEARBY) == 0)
 		&& (patPtr->needMods == 0)
 		&& (patPtr->detail.keySym < 128)
 		&& isprint(UCHAR(patPtr->detail.keySym))
@@ -4537,9 +4472,9 @@ GetPatternString(psPtr, dsPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * It's a more general event specification.  First check
-	 * for "Double", "Triple", "Quadruple", then modifiers,
-	 * then event type, then keysym or button detail.
+	 * It's a more general event specification. First check for "Double",
+	 * "Triple", "Quadruple", then modifiers, then event type, then keysym
+	 * or button detail.
 	 */
 
 	Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, "<", 1);
@@ -4605,8 +4540,8 @@ GetPatternString(psPtr, dsPtr)
  *
  * EvalTclBinding --
  *
- *	The procedure that is invoked by Tk_BindEvent when a Tcl binding
- *	is fired.  
+ *	The function that is invoked by Tk_BindEvent when a Tcl binding is
+ *	fired.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result code, the result of globally evaluating the
@@ -4630,12 +4565,11 @@ FreeTclBinding(clientData)
  *
  * TkStringToKeysym --
  *
- *	This procedure finds the keysym associated with a given keysym
- *	name.
+ *	This function finds the keysym associated with a given keysym name.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the keysym that corresponds to name, or
- *	NoSymbol if there is no such keysym.
+ *	The return value is the keysym that corresponds to name, or NoSymbol
+ *	if there is no such keysym.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4670,12 +4604,11 @@ TkStringToKeysym(name)
  *
  * TkKeysymToString --
  *
- *	This procedure finds the keysym name associated with a given
- *	keysym.
+ *	This function finds the keysym name associated with a given keysym.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to a static string containing
- *	the name of the given keysym, or NULL if there is no known name.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to a static string containing the name
+ *	of the given keysym, or NULL if there is no known name.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4703,13 +4636,13 @@ TkKeysymToString(keysym)
  *
  * TkCopyAndGlobalEval --
  *
- *	This procedure makes a copy of a script then calls Tcl_GlobalEval
- *	to evaluate it.  It's used in situations where the execution of
- *	a command may cause the original command string to be reallocated.
+ *	This function makes a copy of a script then calls Tcl_GlobalEval to
+ *	evaluate it. It's used in situations where the execution of a command
+ *	may cause the original command string to be reallocated.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns the result of evaluating script, including both a standard
- *	Tcl completion code and a string in the interp's result.
+ *	Returns the result of evaluating script, including both a standard Tcl
+ *	completion code and a string in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4719,9 +4652,8 @@ TkKeysymToString(keysym)
 
 int
 TkCopyAndGlobalEval(interp, script)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter in which to evaluate
-					 * script. */
-    char *script;			/* Script to evaluate. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter in which to evaluate script. */
+    char *script;		/* Script to evaluate. */
 {
     Tcl_DString buffer;
     int code;
@@ -4738,13 +4670,13 @@ TkCopyAndGlobalEval(interp, script)
  *
  * TkpGetBindingXEvent --
  *
- *	This procedure returns the XEvent associated with the
- *	currently executing binding. This procedure can only
- *	be invoked while a binding is executing.
+ *	This function returns the XEvent associated with the currently
+ *	executing binding. This function can only be invoked while a binding
+ *	is executing.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a pointer to the XEvent that caused the
- *	current binding code to be run.
+ *	Returns a pointer to the XEvent that caused the current binding code
+ *	to be run.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4754,9 +4686,17 @@ TkCopyAndGlobalEval(interp, script)
 
 XEvent *
 TkpGetBindingXEvent(interp)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter. */
 {
    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_MainWindow(interp);
    BindingTable *bindPtr = (BindingTable *) winPtr->mainPtr->bindingTable;
    return &(bindPtr->eventRing[bindPtr->curEvent]);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkCanvLine.c b/generic/tkCanvLine.c
index 8017829..a219b63 100644
--- a/generic/tkCanvLine.c
+++ b/generic/tkCanvLine.c
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
  * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
  * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkCanvLine.c,v 1.15 2004/06/08 20:28:19 dgp Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkCanvLine.c,v 1.16 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include <stdio.h>
@@ -1722,11 +1722,11 @@ GetLineIndex(interp, canvas, itemPtr, obj, indexPtr)
     int *indexPtr;		/* Where to store converted index. */
 {
     LineItem *linePtr = (LineItem *) itemPtr;
-    size_t length;
-    char *string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(obj, (int *) &length);
+    int length;
+    char *string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(obj, &length);
 
     if (string[0] == 'e') {
-	if (strncmp(string, "end", length) == 0) {
+	if (strncmp(string, "end", (unsigned) length) == 0) {
 	    *indexPtr = 2*linePtr->numPoints;
 	} else {
 	    badIndex:
diff --git a/generic/tkCanvPoly.c b/generic/tkCanvPoly.c
index 3291300..060044e 100644
--- a/generic/tkCanvPoly.c
+++ b/generic/tkCanvPoly.c
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
  * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
  * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkCanvPoly.c,v 1.12 2004/01/13 02:06:00 davygrvy Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkCanvPoly.c,v 1.13 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include <stdio.h>
@@ -1662,11 +1662,11 @@ GetPolygonIndex(interp, canvas, itemPtr, obj, indexPtr)
     int *indexPtr;		/* Where to store converted index. */
 {
     PolygonItem *polyPtr = (PolygonItem *) itemPtr;
-    size_t length;
-    char *string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(obj, (int *) &length);
+    int length;
+    char *string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(obj, &length);
 
     if (string[0] == 'e') {
-	if (strncmp(string, "end", length) == 0) {
+	if (strncmp(string, "end", (unsigned)length) == 0) {
 	    *indexPtr = 2*(polyPtr->numPoints - polyPtr->autoClosed);
 	} else {
 	    badIndex:
diff --git a/generic/tkCanvText.c b/generic/tkCanvText.c
index 5122fff..8cd3a4e 100644
--- a/generic/tkCanvText.c
+++ b/generic/tkCanvText.c
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
  * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
  * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkCanvText.c,v 1.17 2004/06/08 20:25:04 mdejong Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkCanvText.c,v 1.18 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include <stdio.h>
@@ -1247,28 +1247,28 @@ GetTextIndex(interp, canvas, itemPtr, obj, indexPtr)
 				 * index. */
 {
     TextItem *textPtr = (TextItem *) itemPtr;
-    size_t length;
+    int length;
     int c;
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) canvas;
     Tk_CanvasTextInfo *textInfoPtr = textPtr->textInfoPtr;
-    char *string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(obj, (int *) &length);
+    char *string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(obj, &length);
 
     c = string[0];
-    length = strlen(string);
 
-    if ((c == 'e') && (strncmp(string, "end", length) == 0)) {
+    if ((c == 'e') && (strncmp(string, "end", (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
 	*indexPtr = textPtr->numChars;
-    } else if ((c == 'i') && (strncmp(string, "insert", length) == 0)) {
+    } else if ((c == 'i')
+	    && (strncmp(string, "insert", (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
 	*indexPtr = textPtr->insertPos;
-    } else if ((c == 's') && (strncmp(string, "sel.first", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 5)) {
+    } else if ((c == 's') && (length >= 5)
+	    && (strncmp(string, "sel.first", (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
 	if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr != itemPtr) {
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "selection isn't in item", TCL_STATIC);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	*indexPtr = textInfoPtr->selectFirst;
-    } else if ((c == 's') && (strncmp(string, "sel.last", length) == 0)
-	    && (length >= 5)) {
+    } else if ((c == 's') && (length >= 5)
+	    && (strncmp(string, "sel.last", (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
 	if (textInfoPtr->selItemPtr != itemPtr) {
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, "selection isn't in item", TCL_STATIC);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
diff --git a/generic/tkCanvas.c b/generic/tkCanvas.c
index 876c545..f5b3333 100644
--- a/generic/tkCanvas.c
+++ b/generic/tkCanvas.c
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
  * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
  * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkCanvas.c,v 1.35 2005/06/01 19:44:45 dgp Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkCanvas.c,v 1.36 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 /* #define USE_OLD_TAG_SEARCH 1 */
@@ -556,7 +556,6 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Argument objects. */
 {
     TkCanvas *canvasPtr = (TkCanvas *) clientData;
-    unsigned int length;
     int c, result;
     Tk_Item *itemPtr = NULL;		/* Initialization needed only to
 					 * prevent compiler warning. */
@@ -945,18 +944,19 @@ CanvasWidgetCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	int isNew = 0;
 	Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr;
 	char *arg;
+	int length;
 
 	if (objc < 3) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "type coords ?arg arg ...?");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-	arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], (int *) &length);
+	arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], &length);
 	c = arg[0];
 	Tcl_MutexLock(&typeListMutex);
 	for (typePtr = typeList; typePtr != NULL; typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if ((c == typePtr->name[0])
-		    && (strncmp(arg, typePtr->name, length) == 0)) {
+		    && (strncmp(arg, typePtr->name, (unsigned)length) == 0)) {
 		if (matchPtr != NULL) {
 		    Tcl_MutexUnlock(&typeListMutex);
 		badType:
diff --git a/generic/tkConfig.c b/generic/tkConfig.c
index 3cef314..f74ae7a 100644
--- a/generic/tkConfig.c
+++ b/generic/tkConfig.c
@@ -1,15 +1,15 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkConfig.c --
  *
- *	This file contains procedures that manage configuration options
- *	for widgets and other things.
+ *	This file contains functions that manage configuration options for
+ *	widgets and other things.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1997-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkConfig.c,v 1.19 2004/01/13 02:06:00 davygrvy Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkConfig.c,v 1.20 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 /*
@@ -31,115 +31,111 @@
 #include "tkFont.h"
 
 /*
- * The following definition is an AssocData key used to keep track of
- * all of the option tables that have been created for an interpreter.
+ * The following definition is an AssocData key used to keep track of all of
+ * the option tables that have been created for an interpreter.
  */
 
 #define OPTION_HASH_KEY "TkOptionTable"
 
 /*
- * The following two structures are used along with Tk_OptionSpec
- * structures to manage configuration options.  Tk_OptionSpec is
- * static templates that are compiled into the code of a widget
- * or other object manager.  However, to look up options efficiently
- * we need to supplement the static information with additional
- * dynamic information, and this dynamic information may be different
- * for each application.  Thus we create structures of the following
- * two types to hold all of the dynamic information; this is done
- * by Tk_CreateOptionTable.
- * 
- * One of the following structures corresponds to each Tk_OptionSpec.
- * These structures exist as arrays inside TkOptionTable structures.
+ * The following two structures are used along with Tk_OptionSpec structures
+ * to manage configuration options. Tk_OptionSpec is static templates that are
+ * compiled into the code of a widget or other object manager. However, to
+ * look up options efficiently we need to supplement the static information
+ * with additional dynamic information, and this dynamic information may be
+ * different for each application. Thus we create structures of the following
+ * two types to hold all of the dynamic information; this is done by
+ * Tk_CreateOptionTable.
+ *
+ * One of the following structures corresponds to each Tk_OptionSpec. These
+ * structures exist as arrays inside TkOptionTable structures.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkOption {
-    CONST Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;	/* The original spec from the template
-					 * passed to Tk_CreateOptionTable.*/
-    Tk_Uid dbNameUID;		 	/* The Uid form of the option database 
-					 * name. */
-    Tk_Uid dbClassUID;			/* The Uid form of the option database
-					 * class name. */
-    Tcl_Obj *defaultPtr;		/* Default value for this option. */
+    CONST Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;
+				/* The original spec from the template passed
+				 * to Tk_CreateOptionTable.*/
+    Tk_Uid dbNameUID;	 	/* The Uid form of the option database
+				 * name. */
+    Tk_Uid dbClassUID;		/* The Uid form of the option database class
+				 * name. */
+    Tcl_Obj *defaultPtr;	/* Default value for this option. */
     union {
-	Tcl_Obj *monoColorPtr;		/* For color and border options, this
-					 * is an alternate default value to
-					 * use on monochrome displays. */
-	struct TkOption *synonymPtr;	/* For synonym options, this points to
-					 * the master entry. */
-	struct Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom;  /* For TK_OPTION_CUSTOM. */
+	Tcl_Obj *monoColorPtr;	/* For color and border options, this is an
+				 * alternate default value to use on
+				 * monochrome displays. */
+	struct TkOption *synonymPtr;
+				/* For synonym options, this points to the
+				 * master entry. */
+	struct Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom;
+				/* For TK_OPTION_CUSTOM. */
     } extra;
-    int flags;				/* Miscellaneous flag values; see
-					 * below for definitions. */
+    int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flag values; see below for
+				 * definitions. */
 } Option;
 
 /*
  * Flag bits defined for Option structures:
  *
- * OPTION_NEEDS_FREEING -	1 means that FreeResources must be
- *				invoke to free resources associated with
- *				the option when it is no longer needed.
+ * OPTION_NEEDS_FREEING -	1 means that FreeResources must be invoked to
+ *				free resources associated with the option when
+ *				it is no longer needed.
  */
 
 #define OPTION_NEEDS_FREEING		1
 
 /*
- * One of the following exists for each Tk_OptionSpec array that has
- * been passed to Tk_CreateOptionTable.
+ * One of the following exists for each Tk_OptionSpec array that has been
+ * passed to Tk_CreateOptionTable.
  */
 
 typedef struct OptionTable {
-    int refCount;			/* Counts the number of uses of this
-					 * table (the number of times
-					 * Tk_CreateOptionTable has returned
-					 * it).  This can be greater than 1 if
-					 * it is shared along several option
-					 * table  chains, or if the same table
-					 * is used for multiple purposes. */
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;	/* Hash table entry that refers to this
-					 * table; used to delete the entry. */
-    struct OptionTable *nextPtr;	/* If templatePtr was part of a chain
-					 * of templates, this points to the
-					 * table corresponding to the next
-					 * template in the chain. */
-    int numOptions;			/* The number of items in the options
-					 * array below. */
-    Option options[1];			/* Information about the individual
-					 * options in the table.  This must be
-					 * the last field in the structure:
-					 * the actual size of the array will
-					 * be numOptions, not 1. */
+    int refCount;		/* Counts the number of uses of this table
+				 * (the number of times Tk_CreateOptionTable
+				 * has returned it). This can be greater than
+				 * 1 if it is shared along several option
+				 * table chains, or if the same table is used
+				 * for multiple purposes. */
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;/* Hash table entry that refers to this table;
+				 * used to delete the entry. */
+    struct OptionTable *nextPtr;/* If templatePtr was part of a chain of
+				 * templates, this points to the table
+				 * corresponding to the next template in the
+				 * chain. */
+    int numOptions;		/* The number of items in the options array
+				 * below. */
+    Option options[1];		/* Information about the individual options in
+				 * the table. This must be the last field in
+				 * the structure: the actual size of the array
+				 * will be numOptions, not 1. */
 } OptionTable;
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static int		DoObjConfig _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *recordPtr, Option *optionPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *valuePtr, Tk_Window tkwin, 
-			    Tk_SavedOption *savePtr));
-static void		DestroyOptionHashTable _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static void		FreeResources _ANSI_ARGS_((Option *optionPtr, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, char *internalPtr,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-static Tcl_Obj *	GetConfigList _ANSI_ARGS_((char *recordPtr,
-			    Option *optionPtr, Tk_Window tkwin));
-static Tcl_Obj *	GetObjectForOption _ANSI_ARGS_((char *recordPtr,
-			    Option *optionPtr, Tk_Window tkwin));
-static Option *		GetOption _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *name,
-			    OptionTable *tablePtr));
-static Option *		GetOptionFromObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, OptionTable *tablePtr));
-static int		ObjectIsEmpty _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static int		SetOptionFromAny _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+static int		DoObjConfig(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *recordPtr,
+			    Option *optionPtr, Tcl_Obj *valuePtr,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_SavedOption *savePtr);
+static void		DestroyOptionHashTable(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static void		FreeResources(Option *optionPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
+			    char *internalPtr, Tk_Window tkwin);
+static Tcl_Obj *	GetConfigList(char *recordPtr,
+			    Option *optionPtr, Tk_Window tkwin);
+static Tcl_Obj *	GetObjectForOption(char *recordPtr,
+			    Option *optionPtr, Tk_Window tkwin);
+static Option *		GetOption(CONST char *name, OptionTable *tablePtr);
+static Option *		GetOptionFromObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, OptionTable *tablePtr);
+static int		ObjectIsEmpty(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static int		SetOptionFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
 
 /*
- * The structure below defines an object type that is used to cache the
- * result of looking up an option name.  If an object has this type, then
- * its internalPtr1 field points to the OptionTable in which it was looked up,
- * and the internalPtr2 field points to the entry that matched.
+ * The structure below defines an object type that is used to cache the result
+ * of looking up an option name. If an object has this type, then its
+ * internalPtr1 field points to the OptionTable in which it was looked up, and
+ * the internalPtr2 field points to the entry that matched.
  */
 
 Tcl_ObjType tkOptionObjType = {
@@ -155,12 +151,12 @@ Tcl_ObjType tkOptionObjType = {
  *
  * Tk_CreateOptionTable --
  *
- *	Given a template for configuration options, this procedure
- *	creates a table that may be used to look up options efficiently.
+ *	Given a template for configuration options, this function creates a
+ *	table that may be used to look up options efficiently.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a token to a structure that can be passed to procedures
- *	such as Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, and Tk_FreeConfigOptions.
+ *	Returns a token to a structure that can be passed to functions such as
+ *	Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, and Tk_FreeConfigOptions.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Storage is allocated.
@@ -170,11 +166,11 @@ Tcl_ObjType tkOptionObjType = {
 
 Tk_OptionTable
 Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter associated with the
-					 * application in which this table
-					 * will be used. */
-    CONST Tk_OptionSpec *templatePtr;	/* Static information about the
-					 * configuration options. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with the application
+				 * in which this table will be used. */
+    CONST Tk_OptionSpec *templatePtr;
+				/* Static information about the configuration
+				 * options. */
 {
     Tcl_HashTable *hashTablePtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;
@@ -185,13 +181,13 @@ Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
     int numOptions, i;
 
     /*
-     * We use an AssocData value in the interpreter to keep a hash
-     * table of all the option tables we've created for this application.
-     * This is used for two purposes.  First, it allows us to share the
-     * tables (e.g. in several chains) and second, we use the deletion
-     * callback for the AssocData to delete all the option tables when
-     * the interpreter is deleted.  The code below finds the hash table
-     * or creates a new one if it doesn't already exist.
+     * We use an AssocData value in the interpreter to keep a hash table of
+     * all the option tables we've created for this application. This is used
+     * for two purposes. First, it allows us to share the tables (e.g. in
+     * several chains) and second, we use the deletion callback for the
+     * AssocData to delete all the option tables when the interpreter is
+     * deleted. The code below finds the hash table or creates a new one if it
+     * doesn't already exist.
      */
 
     hashTablePtr = (Tcl_HashTable *) Tcl_GetAssocData(interp, OPTION_HASH_KEY,
@@ -204,8 +200,8 @@ Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * See if a table has already been created for this template.  If
-     * so, just reuse the existing table.
+     * See if a table has already been created for this template. If so, just
+     * reuse the existing table.
      */
 
     hashEntryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(hashTablePtr, (char *) templatePtr,
@@ -217,8 +213,8 @@ Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Count the number of options in the template, then create the
-     * table structure.
+     * Count the number of options in the template, then create the table
+     * structure.
      */
 
     numOptions = 0;
@@ -247,9 +243,8 @@ Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
 
 	if (specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_SYNONYM) {
 	    /*
-	     * This is a synonym option; find the master option that it
-	     * refers to and create a pointer from the synonym to the
-	     * master.
+	     * This is a synonym option; find the master option that it refers
+	     * to and create a pointer from the synonym to the master.
 	     */
 
 	    for (specPtr2 = templatePtr, i = 0; ; specPtr2++, i++) {
@@ -267,12 +262,10 @@ Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
 		optionPtr->dbNameUID = Tk_GetUid(specPtr->dbName);
 	    }
 	    if (specPtr->dbClass != NULL) {
-		optionPtr->dbClassUID = 
-			Tk_GetUid(specPtr->dbClass);
+		optionPtr->dbClassUID = Tk_GetUid(specPtr->dbClass);
 	    }
 	    if (specPtr->defValue != NULL) {
-		optionPtr->defaultPtr =
-			Tcl_NewStringObj(specPtr->defValue, -1);
+		optionPtr->defaultPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(specPtr->defValue,-1);
 		Tcl_IncrRefCount(optionPtr->defaultPtr);
 	    }
 	    if (((specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_COLOR)
@@ -288,7 +281,7 @@ Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
 		 * Get the custom parsing, etc., functions.
 		 */
 		optionPtr->extra.custom =
-		    (Tk_ObjCustomOption *)specPtr->clientData;
+			(Tk_ObjCustomOption *) specPtr->clientData;
 	    }
 	}
 	if (((specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_STRING)
@@ -306,9 +299,9 @@ Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
     Tcl_SetHashValue(hashEntryPtr, tablePtr);
 
     /*
-     * Finally, check to see if this template chains to another template
-     * with additional options.  If so, call ourselves recursively to
-     * create the next table(s).
+     * Finally, check to see if this template chains to another template with
+     * additional options. If so, call ourselves recursively to create the
+     * next table(s).
      */
 
     if (specPtr->clientData != NULL) {
@@ -324,22 +317,22 @@ Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, templatePtr)
  *
  * Tk_DeleteOptionTable --
  *
- *	Called to release resources used by an option table when 
- *	the table is no longer needed.
+ *	Called to release resources used by an option table when the table is
+ *	no longer needed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The option table and associated resources (such as additional
- *	option tables chained off it) are destroyed.
+ *	The option table and associated resources (such as additional option
+ *	tables chained off it) are destroyed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
 Tk_DeleteOptionTable(optionTable)
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;		/* The option table to delete. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* The option table to delete. */
 {
     OptionTable *tablePtr = (OptionTable *) optionTable;
     Option *optionPtr;
@@ -374,17 +367,17 @@ Tk_DeleteOptionTable(optionTable)
  *
  * DestroyOptionHashTable --
  *
- *	This procedure is the deletion callback associated with the
- *	AssocData entry created by Tk_CreateOptionTable.  It is
- *	invoked when an interpreter is deleted, and deletes all of
- *	the option tables associated with that interpreter.
+ *	This function is the deletion callback associated with the AssocData
+ *	entry created by Tk_CreateOptionTable. It is invoked when an
+ *	interpreter is deleted, and deletes all of the option tables
+ *	associated with that interpreter.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The option hash table is destroyed along with all of the
- *	OptionTable structures that it refers to.
+ *	The option hash table is destroyed along with all of the OptionTable
+ *	structures that it refers to.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -406,13 +399,12 @@ DestroyOptionHashTable(clientData, interp)
 
 	/*
 	 * The following statements do two tricky things:
-	 * 1. They ensure that the option table is deleted, even if
-	 *    there are outstanding references to it.
-	 * 2. They ensure that Tk_DeleteOptionTable doesn't delete
-	 *    other tables chained from this one; we'll do it when
-	 *    we come across the hash table entry for the chained
-	 *    table (in fact, the chained table may already have
-	 *    been deleted).
+	 * 1. They ensure that the option table is deleted, even if there are
+	 *    outstanding references to it.
+	 * 2. They ensure that Tk_DeleteOptionTable doesn't delete other
+	 *    tables chained from this one; we'll do it when we come across
+	 *    the hash table entry for the chained table (in fact, the chained
+	 *    table may already have been deleted).
 	 */
 
 	tablePtr->refCount = 1;
@@ -428,16 +420,16 @@ DestroyOptionHashTable(clientData, interp)
  *
  * Tk_InitOptions --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when an object such as a widget
- *	is created.  It supplies an initial value for each configuration
- *	option (the value may come from the option database, a system
- *	default, or the default in the option table).
+ *	This function is invoked when an object such as a widget is created.
+ *	It supplies an initial value for each configuration option (the value
+ *	may come from the option database, a system default, or the default in
+ *	the option table).
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is TCL_OK if the procedure completed
- *	successfully, and TCL_ERROR if one of the initial values was
- *	bogus.  If an error occurs and interp isn't NULL, then an
- *	error message will be left in its result.
+ *	The return value is TCL_OK if the function completed successfully, and
+ *	TCL_ERROR if one of the initial values was bogus. If an error occurs
+ *	and interp isn't NULL, then an error message will be left in its
+ *	result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Fields of recordPtr are filled in with initial values.
@@ -447,20 +439,20 @@ DestroyOptionHashTable(clientData, interp)
 
 int
 Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting.    NULL
-				 * means don't leave an error message. */
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Pointer to the record to configure.
-				 * Note: the caller should have properly
-				 * initialized the record with NULL
-				 * pointers for each option value. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* The token which matches the config
-				 * specs for the widget in question. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. NULL means
+				 * don't leave an error message. */
+    char *recordPtr;		/* Pointer to the record to configure. Note:
+				 * the caller should have properly initialized
+				 * the record with NULL pointers for each
+				 * option value. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* The token which matches the config specs
+				 * for the widget in question. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Certain options types (such as
-				 * TK_OPTION_COLOR) need fields out
-				 * of the window they are used in to
-				 * be able to calculate their values.
-				 * Not needed unless one of these
-				 * options is in the configSpecs record. */
+				 * TK_OPTION_COLOR) need fields out of the
+				 * window they are used in to be able to
+				 * calculate their values. Not needed unless
+				 * one of these options is in the configSpecs
+				 * record. */
 {
     OptionTable *tablePtr = (OptionTable *) optionTable;
     Option *optionPtr;
@@ -473,8 +465,8 @@ Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
 
     /*
      * If this table chains to other tables, handle their initialization
-     * first.  That way, if both tables refer to the same field of the
-     * record, the value in the first table will win.
+     * first. That way, if both tables refer to the same field of the record,
+     * the value in the first table will win.
      */
 
     if (tablePtr->nextPtr != NULL) {
@@ -491,11 +483,11 @@ Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
 
     for (optionPtr = tablePtr->options, count = tablePtr->numOptions;
 	    count > 0; optionPtr++, count--) {
-
 	/*
 	 * If we specify TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT, then the user has
 	 * processed and set a default for this already.
 	 */
+
 	if ((optionPtr->specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_SYNONYM) ||
 		(optionPtr->specPtr->flags & TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT)) {
 	    continue;
@@ -504,12 +496,12 @@ Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
 
 	/*
 	 * We look in three places for the initial value, using the first
-	 * non-NULL value that we find.  First, check the option database.
+	 * non-NULL value that we find. First, check the option database.
 	 */
 
 	valuePtr = NULL;
 	if (optionPtr->dbNameUID != NULL) {
-	    value = Tk_GetOption(tkwin, optionPtr->dbNameUID, 
+	    value = Tk_GetOption(tkwin, optionPtr->dbNameUID,
 		    optionPtr->dbClassUID);
 	    if (value != NULL) {
 		valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(value, -1);
@@ -520,6 +512,7 @@ Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
 	/*
 	 * Second, check for a system-specific default value.
 	 */
+
 	if ((valuePtr == NULL)
 		&& (optionPtr->dbNameUID != NULL)) {
 	    valuePtr = TkpGetSystemDefault(tkwin, optionPtr->dbNameUID,
@@ -530,16 +523,16 @@ Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Third and last, use the default value supplied by the option
-	 * table.  In the case of color objects, we pick one of two
-	 * values depending on whether the screen is mono or color.
+	 * Third and last, use the default value supplied by the option table.
+	 * In the case of color objects, we pick one of two values depending
+	 * on whether the screen is mono or color.
 	 */
 
 	if (valuePtr == NULL) {
-	    if ((tkwin != NULL) 
+	    if ((tkwin != NULL)
 		    && ((optionPtr->specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_COLOR)
 		    || (optionPtr->specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_BORDER))
-		    && (Tk_Depth(tkwin) <= 1) 
+		    && (Tk_Depth(tkwin) <= 1)
 		    && (optionPtr->extra.monoColorPtr != NULL)) {
 		valuePtr = optionPtr->extra.monoColorPtr;
 	    } else {
@@ -556,25 +549,26 @@ Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
 	 * referenced here, and will be properly free'd when finished,
 	 * regardless of what DoObjConfig does.
 	 */
+
 	Tcl_IncrRefCount(valuePtr);
-	
+
 	if (DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, valuePtr, tkwin,
 		(Tk_SavedOption *) NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 	    if (interp != NULL) {
 		char msg[200];
-    
+
 		switch (source) {
-		    case OPTION_DATABASE:
-			sprintf(msg, "\n    (database entry for \"%.50s\")",
-				optionPtr->specPtr->optionName);
-			break;
-		    case SYSTEM_DEFAULT:
-			sprintf(msg, "\n    (system default for \"%.50s\")",
-				optionPtr->specPtr->optionName);
-			break;
-		    case TABLE_DEFAULT:
-			sprintf(msg, "\n    (default value for \"%.50s\")",
-				optionPtr->specPtr->optionName);
+		case OPTION_DATABASE:
+		    sprintf(msg, "\n    (database entry for \"%.50s\")",
+			    optionPtr->specPtr->optionName);
+		    break;
+		case SYSTEM_DEFAULT:
+		    sprintf(msg, "\n    (system default for \"%.50s\")",
+			    optionPtr->specPtr->optionName);
+		    break;
+		case TABLE_DEFAULT:
+		    sprintf(msg, "\n    (default value for \"%.50s\")",
+			    optionPtr->specPtr->optionName);
 		}
 		if (tkwin != NULL) {
 		    sprintf(msg + strlen(msg) - 1, " in widget \"%.50s\")",
@@ -595,39 +589,37 @@ Tk_InitOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
  *
  * DoObjConfig --
  *
- *	This procedure applies a new value for a configuration option
- *	to the record being configured.
+ *	This function applies a new value for a configuration option to the
+ *	record being configured.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is TCL_OK if the procedure completed
- *	successfully.  If an error occurred then TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned and an error message is left in interp's result, if
- *	interp isn't NULL.  In addition, if oldValuePtrPtr isn't
- *	NULL then it *oldValuePtrPtr is filled in with a pointer
- *	to the option's old value.
+ *	The return value is TCL_OK if the function completed successfully. If
+ *	an error occurred then TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is
+ *	left in interp's result, if interp isn't NULL. In addition, if
+ *	oldValuePtrPtr isn't NULL then it *oldValuePtrPtr is filled in with a
+ *	pointer to the option's old value.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	RecordPtr gets modified to hold the new value in the form of
- *	a Tcl_Obj, an internal representation, or both.  The old
- *	value is freed if oldValuePtrPtr is NULL.
+ *	RecordPtr gets modified to hold the new value in the form of a
+ *	Tcl_Obj, an internal representation, or both. The old value is freed
+ *	if oldValuePtrPtr is NULL.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
 DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, valuePtr, tkwin, savedOptionPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting.  If
-				 * NULL, then no message is left if an error
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL,
+				 * then no message is left if an error
 				 * occurs. */
-    char *recordPtr;		/* The record to modify to hold the new
-				 * option value. */
-    Option *optionPtr;		/* Pointer to information about the
-				 * option. */
+    char *recordPtr;		/* The record to modify to hold the new option
+				 * value. */
+    Option *optionPtr;		/* Pointer to information about the option. */
     Tcl_Obj *valuePtr;		/* New value for option. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which option will be used (needed
 				 * to allocate resources for some options).
-				 * May be NULL if the option doesn't
-				 * require window-related resources. */
+				 * May be NULL if the option doesn't require
+				 * window-related resources. */
     Tk_SavedOption *savedOptionPtr;
 				/* If NULL, the old value for the option will
 				 * be freed. If non-NULL, the old value will
@@ -636,13 +628,14 @@ DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, valuePtr, tkwin, savedOptionPtr)
 				 * free the old value). */
 {
     Tcl_Obj **slotPtrPtr, *oldPtr;
-    char *internalPtr;		/* Points to location in record where
-				 * internal representation of value should
-				 * be stored, or NULL. */
+    char *internalPtr;		/* Points to location in record where internal
+				 * representation of value should be stored,
+				 * or NULL. */
     char *oldInternalPtr;	/* Points to location in which to save old
 				 * internal representation of value. */
-    Tk_SavedOption internal;	/* Used to save the old internal representation
-				 * of the value if savedOptionPtr is NULL. */
+    Tk_SavedOption internal;	/* Used to save the old internal
+				 * representation of the value if
+				 * savedOptionPtr is NULL. */
     CONST Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;
     int nullOK;
 
@@ -660,8 +653,8 @@ DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, valuePtr, tkwin, savedOptionPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Apply the new value in a type-specific way.  Also remember the
-     * old object and internal forms, if they exist.
+     * Apply the new value in a type-specific way. Also remember the old
+     * object and internal forms, if they exist.
      */
 
     if (specPtr->internalOffset >= 0) {
@@ -678,296 +671,293 @@ DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, valuePtr, tkwin, savedOptionPtr)
     }
     nullOK = (optionPtr->specPtr->flags & TK_OPTION_NULL_OK);
     switch (optionPtr->specPtr->type) {
-	case TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN: {
-	    int new;
+    case TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN: {
+	int newBool;
 
-	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &new)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
-		*((int *) internalPtr) = new;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &newBool) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_INT: {
-	    int new;
-	    
-	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &new) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
-		*((int *) internalPtr) = new;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
+	    *((int *) internalPtr) = newBool;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_DOUBLE: {
-	    double new;
-	    
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		new = 0;
-	    } else {
-		if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &new) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_INT: {
+	int newInt;
 
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((double *) oldInternalPtr) = *((double *) internalPtr);
-		*((double *) internalPtr) = new;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &newInt) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_STRING: {
-	    char *new, *value;
-	    int length;
-
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		if (valuePtr != NULL) {
-		    value = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, &length);
-		    new = ckalloc((unsigned) (length + 1));
-		    strcpy(new, value);
-		} else {
-		    new = NULL;
-		}
-		*((char **) oldInternalPtr) = *((char **) internalPtr);
-		*((char **) internalPtr) = new;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
+	    *((int *) internalPtr) = newInt;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE: {
-	    int new;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_DOUBLE: {
+	double newDbl;
 
-	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, valuePtr,
-		    (CONST char **) optionPtr->specPtr->clientData,
-		    optionPtr->specPtr->optionName+1, 0, &new) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newDbl = 0;
+	} else {
+	    if (Tcl_GetDoubleFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &newDbl) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
-		*((int *) internalPtr) = new;
-	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_COLOR: {
-	    XColor *newPtr;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		newPtr = NULL;
-	    } else {
-		newPtr = Tk_AllocColorFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
-		if (newPtr == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((XColor **) oldInternalPtr) = *((XColor **) internalPtr);
-		*((XColor **) internalPtr) = newPtr;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((double *) oldInternalPtr) = *((double *) internalPtr);
+	    *((double *) internalPtr) = newDbl;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_FONT: {
-	    Tk_Font new;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_STRING: {
+	char *newStr, *value;
+	int length;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		new = NULL;
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	}
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    if (valuePtr != NULL) {
+		value = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, &length);
+		newStr = ckalloc((unsigned) (length + 1));
+		strcpy(newStr, value);
 	    } else {
-		new = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
-		if (new == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((Tk_Font *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Font *) internalPtr);
-		*((Tk_Font *) internalPtr) = new;
+		newStr = NULL;
 	    }
-	    break;
+	    *((char **) oldInternalPtr) = *((char **) internalPtr);
+	    *((char **) internalPtr) = newStr;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_STYLE: {
-	    Tk_Style new;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE: {
+	int newValue;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		new = NULL;
-	    } else {
-		new = Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(interp, valuePtr);
-		if (new == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((Tk_Style *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Style *) internalPtr);
-		*((Tk_Style *) internalPtr) = new;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, valuePtr,
+		(CONST char **) optionPtr->specPtr->clientData,
+		optionPtr->specPtr->optionName+1, 0, &newValue) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_BITMAP: {
-	    Pixmap new;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
+	    *((int *) internalPtr) = newValue;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_COLOR: {
+	XColor *newPtr;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		new = None;
-	    } else {
-		new = Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
-		if (new == None) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((Pixmap *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Pixmap *) internalPtr);
-		*((Pixmap *) internalPtr) = new;
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newPtr = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    newPtr = Tk_AllocColorFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
+	    if (newPtr == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_BORDER: {
-	    Tk_3DBorder new;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((XColor **) oldInternalPtr) = *((XColor **) internalPtr);
+	    *((XColor **) internalPtr) = newPtr;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_FONT: {
+	Tk_Font newFont;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		new = NULL;
-	    } else {
-		new = Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
-		if (new == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((Tk_3DBorder *) oldInternalPtr) =
-			*((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr);
-		*((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr) = new;
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newFont = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    newFont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
+	    if (newFont == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_RELIEF: {
-	    int new;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((Tk_Font *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Font *) internalPtr);
+	    *((Tk_Font *) internalPtr) = newFont;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_STYLE: {
+	Tk_Style newStyle;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		new = TK_RELIEF_NULL;
-	    } else {
-		if (Tk_GetReliefFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &new) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
-		*((int *) internalPtr) = new;
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newStyle = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    newStyle = Tk_AllocStyleFromObj(interp, valuePtr);
+	    if (newStyle == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_CURSOR: {
-	    Tk_Cursor new;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((Tk_Style *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Style *) internalPtr);
+	    *((Tk_Style *) internalPtr) = newStyle;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_BITMAP: {
+	Pixmap newBitmap;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		new = None;
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-	    } else {
-		new = Tk_AllocCursorFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
-		if (new == None) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((Tk_Cursor *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr);
-		*((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr) = new;
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newBitmap = None;
+	} else {
+	    newBitmap = Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
+	    if (newBitmap == None) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    Tk_DefineCursor(tkwin, new);
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY: {
-	    Tk_Justify new;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((Pixmap *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Pixmap *) internalPtr);
+	    *((Pixmap *) internalPtr) = newBitmap;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_BORDER: {
+	Tk_3DBorder newBorder;
 
-	    if (Tk_GetJustifyFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &new) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newBorder = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    newBorder = Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
+	    if (newBorder == NULL) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((Tk_Justify *) oldInternalPtr)
-			= *((Tk_Justify *) internalPtr);
-		*((Tk_Justify *) internalPtr) = new;
-	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_ANCHOR: {
-	    Tk_Anchor new;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((Tk_3DBorder *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr);
+	    *((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr) = newBorder;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_RELIEF: {
+	int newRelief;
 
-	    if (Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &new) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newRelief = TK_RELIEF_NULL;
+	} else {
+	    if (Tk_GetReliefFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &newRelief) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((Tk_Anchor *) oldInternalPtr)
-			= *((Tk_Anchor *) internalPtr);
-		*((Tk_Anchor *) internalPtr) = new;
-	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_PIXELS: {
-	    int new;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
+	    *((int *) internalPtr) = newRelief;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_CURSOR: {
+	Tk_Cursor newCursor;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		new = 0;
-	    } else {
-		if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr,
-			&new) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
-		*((int *) internalPtr) = new;
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    newCursor = None;
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    newCursor = Tk_AllocCursorFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr);
+	    if (newCursor == None) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_WINDOW: {
-	    Tk_Window new;
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((Tk_Cursor *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr);
+	    *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr) = newCursor;
+	}
+	Tk_DefineCursor(tkwin, newCursor);
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY: {
+	Tk_Justify newJustify;
 
-	    if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
-		valuePtr = NULL;
-		new = None;
-	    } else {
-		if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr, &new)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (internalPtr != NULL) {
-		*((Tk_Window *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Window *) internalPtr);
-		*((Tk_Window *) internalPtr) = new;
+	if (Tk_GetJustifyFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &newJustify) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((Tk_Justify *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Justify *) internalPtr);
+	    *((Tk_Justify *) internalPtr) = newJustify;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_ANCHOR: {
+	Tk_Anchor newAnchor;
+
+	if (Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &newAnchor) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((Tk_Anchor *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Anchor *) internalPtr);
+	    *((Tk_Anchor *) internalPtr) = newAnchor;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_PIXELS: {
+	int newPixels;
+
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newPixels = 0;
+	} else {
+	    if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr,
+		    &newPixels) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
-	    Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
-	    if (custom->setProc(custom->clientData, interp, tkwin,
-		    &valuePtr, recordPtr, optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset,
-		    (char *)oldInternalPtr,
-		    optionPtr->specPtr->flags) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((int *) oldInternalPtr) = *((int *) internalPtr);
+	    *((int *) internalPtr) = newPixels;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_WINDOW: {
+	Tk_Window newWin;
+
+	if (nullOK && ObjectIsEmpty(valuePtr)) {
+	    valuePtr = NULL;
+	    newWin = None;
+	} else {
+	    if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, valuePtr,
+		    &newWin) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	    
-	default: {
-	    char buf[40+TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	    sprintf(buf, "bad config table: unknown type %d",
-		    optionPtr->specPtr->type);
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	if (internalPtr != NULL) {
+	    *((Tk_Window *) oldInternalPtr) = *((Tk_Window *) internalPtr);
+	    *((Tk_Window *) internalPtr) = newWin;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
+	Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
+
+	if (custom->setProc(custom->clientData, interp, tkwin,
+		&valuePtr, recordPtr, optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset,
+		(char *)oldInternalPtr, optionPtr->specPtr->flags) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    {
+	char buf[40+TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+
+    default:
+	sprintf(buf, "bad config table: unknown type %d",
+		optionPtr->specPtr->type);
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
     }
 
     /*
-     * Release resources associated with the old value, if we're not
-     * returning it to the caller, then install the new object value into
-     * the record.
+     * Release resources associated with the old value, if we're not returning
+     * it to the caller, then install the new object value into the record.
      */
 
     if (savedOptionPtr == NULL) {
@@ -992,12 +982,11 @@ DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, valuePtr, tkwin, savedOptionPtr)
  *
  * ObjectIsEmpty --
  *
- *	This procedure tests whether the string value of an object is
- *	empty.
+ *	This function tests whether the string value of an object is empty.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1 if the string value of objPtr has length
- *	zero, and 0 otherwise.
+ *	The return value is 1 if the string value of objPtr has length zero,
+ *	and 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1007,7 +996,7 @@ DoObjConfig(interp, recordPtr, optionPtr, valuePtr, tkwin, savedOptionPtr)
 
 static int
 ObjectIsEmpty(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object to test.  May be NULL. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object to test. May be NULL. */
 {
     int length;
 
@@ -1026,15 +1015,14 @@ ObjectIsEmpty(objPtr)
  *
  * GetOption --
  *
- *	This procedure searches through a chained option table to find
- *	the entry for a particular option name.
+ *	This function searches through a chained option table to find the
+ *	entry for a particular option name.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the matching entry, or NULL
- *	if no matching entry could be found.
- *	Note: if the matching entry is a synonym then this procedure
- *	returns a pointer to the synonym entry, *not* the "real" entry
- *	that the synonym refers to.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the matching entry, or NULL if no
+ *	matching entry could be found. Note: if the matching entry is a
+ *	synonym then this function returns a pointer to the synonym entry,
+ *	*not* the "real" entry that the synonym refers to.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1044,8 +1032,8 @@ ObjectIsEmpty(objPtr)
 
 static Option *
 GetOption(name, tablePtr)
-    CONST char *name;		/* String balue to be looked up in the
-				 * option table. */
+    CONST char *name;		/* String balue to be looked up in the option
+				 * table. */
     OptionTable *tablePtr;	/* Table in which to look up name. */
 {
     Option *bestPtr, *optionPtr;
@@ -1054,14 +1042,13 @@ GetOption(name, tablePtr)
     int count;
 
     /*
-     * Search through all of the option tables in the chain to find the
-     * best match.  Some tricky aspects:
+     * Search through all of the option tables in the chain to find the best
+     * match. Some tricky aspects:
      *
      * 1. We have to accept unique abbreviations.
-     * 2. The same name could appear in different tables in the chain.
-     *    If this happens, we use the entry from the first table. We
-     *    have to be careful to distinguish this case from an ambiguous
-     *    abbreviation.
+     * 2. The same name could appear in different tables in the chain. If this
+     *    happens, we use the entry from the first table. We have to be
+     *    careful to distinguish this case from an ambiguous abbreviation.
      */
 
     bestPtr = NULL;
@@ -1073,40 +1060,38 @@ GetOption(name, tablePtr)
 		    *p1 == *p2; p1++, p2++) {
 		if (*p1 == 0) {
 		    /*
-		     * This is an exact match.  We're done.
+		     * This is an exact match. We're done.
 		     */
 
-		    bestPtr = optionPtr;
-		    goto done;
+		    return optionPtr;
 		}
 	    }
 	    if (*p1 == 0) {
 		/*
-		 * The name is an abbreviation for this option.  Keep
-		 * to make sure that the abbreviation only matches one
-		 * option name.  If we've already found a match in the
-		 * past, then it is an error unless the full names for
-		 * the two options are identical; in this case, the first
-		 * option overrides the second.
+		 * The name is an abbreviation for this option. Keep to make
+		 * sure that the abbreviation only matches one option name.
+		 * If we've already found a match in the past, then it is an
+		 * error unless the full names for the two options are
+		 * identical; in this case, the first option overrides the
+		 * second.
 		 */
 
 		if (bestPtr == NULL) {
 		    bestPtr = optionPtr;
-		} else {
-		    if (strcmp(bestPtr->specPtr->optionName,
-			    optionPtr->specPtr->optionName) != 0) {
-			goto error;
-		    }
+		} else if (strcmp(bestPtr->specPtr->optionName,
+			optionPtr->specPtr->optionName) != 0) {
+		    return NULL;
 		}
 	    }
 	}
     }
 
-    done:
-    return bestPtr;
+    /*
+     * Return whatever we have found, which could be NULL if nothing
+     * matched. The multiple-matching case is handled above.
+     */
 
-    error:
-    return NULL;
+    return bestPtr;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1114,32 +1099,30 @@ GetOption(name, tablePtr)
  *
  * GetOptionFromObj --
  *
- *      This procedure searches through a chained option table to find
- *      the entry for a particular option name.
+ *	This function searches through a chained option table to find the
+ *	entry for a particular option name.
  *
  * Results:
- *      The return value is a pointer to the matching entry, or NULL
- *      if no matching entry could be found.  If NULL is returned and
- *      interp is not NULL than an error message is left in its result.
- *      Note: if the matching entry is a synonym then this procedure
- *      returns a pointer to the synonym entry, *not* the "real" entry
- *      that the synonym refers to.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the matching entry, or NULL if no
+ *	matching entry could be found. If NULL is returned and interp is not
+ *	NULL than an error message is left in its result. Note: if the
+ *	matching entry is a synonym then this function returns a pointer to
+ *	the synonym entry, *not* the "real" entry that the synonym refers to.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      Information about the matching entry is cached in the object
- *      containing the name, so that future lookups can proceed more
- *      quickly.
+ *	Information about the matching entry is cached in the object
+ *	containing the name, so that future lookups can proceed more quickly.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static Option *
 GetOptionFromObj(interp, objPtr, tablePtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;         /* Used only for error reporting; if NULL
-                                 * no message is left after an error. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;            /* Object whose string value is to be
-                                 * looked up in the option table. */
-    OptionTable *tablePtr;      /* Table in which to look up objPtr. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used only for error reporting; if NULL no
+				 * message is left after an error. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object whose string value is to be looked
+				 * up in the option table. */
+    OptionTable *tablePtr;	/* Table in which to look up objPtr. */
 {
     Option *bestPtr;
     char *name;
@@ -1149,16 +1132,16 @@ GetOptionFromObj(interp, objPtr, tablePtr)
      */
 
     if (objPtr->typePtr == &tkOptionObjType) {
-        if (objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 == (VOID *) tablePtr) {
-            return (Option *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2;
-        }
+	if (objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 == (VOID *) tablePtr) {
+	    return (Option *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2;
+	}
     }
 
     /*
      * The answer isn't cached.
      */
 
-    name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, (int *) NULL);
+    name = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
     bestPtr = GetOption(name, tablePtr);
     if (bestPtr == NULL) {
 	goto error;
@@ -1173,10 +1156,9 @@ GetOptionFromObj(interp, objPtr, tablePtr)
     objPtr->typePtr = &tkOptionObjType;
     return bestPtr;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     if (interp != NULL) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown option \"", name,
-		"\"", (char *) NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown option \"",name,"\"", (char *) NULL);
     }
     return NULL;
 }
@@ -1186,29 +1168,28 @@ GetOptionFromObj(interp, objPtr, tablePtr)
  *
  * TkGetOptionSpec --
  *
- *      This procedure searches through a chained option table to find
- *      the option spec for a particular option name.
+ *	This function searches through a chained option table to find the
+ *	option spec for a particular option name.
  *
  * Results:
- *      The return value is a pointer to the option spec of the matching
- *      entry, or NULL if no matching entry could be found.
- *      Note: if the matching entry is a synonym then this procedure
- *      returns a pointer to the option spec of the synonym entry, *not*
- *      the "real" entry that the synonym refers to.
- *      Note: this call is primarily used by the style management code
- *      (tkStyle.c) to look up an element's option spec into a widget's
- *      option table.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the option spec of the matching
+ *	entry, or NULL if no matching entry could be found. Note: if the
+ *	matching entry is a synonym then this function returns a pointer to
+ *	the option spec of the synonym entry, *not* the "real" entry that the
+ *	synonym refers to. Note: this call is primarily used by the style
+ *	management code (tkStyle.c) to look up an element's option spec into a
+ *	widget's option table.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 CONST Tk_OptionSpec *
 TkGetOptionSpec(name, optionTable)
-    CONST char *name;			/* String value to be looked up. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;		/* Table in which to look up name. */
+    CONST char *name;		/* String value to be looked up. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Table in which to look up name. */
 {
     Option *optionPtr;
 
@@ -1224,14 +1205,14 @@ TkGetOptionSpec(name, optionTable)
  *
  * SetOptionFromAny --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to convert a Tcl object to option
- *	internal form. However, this doesn't make sense (need to have a
- *	table of options in order to do the conversion) so the
- *	procedure always generates an error.
+ *	This function is called to convert a Tcl object to option internal
+ *	form. However, this doesn't make sense (need to have a table of
+ *	options in order to do the conversion) so the function always
+ *	generates an error.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is always TCL_ERROR, and an error message is
- *	left in interp's result if interp isn't NULL. 
+ *	The return value is always TCL_ERROR, and an error message is left in
+ *	interp's result if interp isn't NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1255,24 +1236,23 @@ SetOptionFromAny(interp, objPtr)
  *
  * Tk_SetOptions --
  *
- *	Process one or more name-value pairs for configuration options
- *	and fill in fields of a record with new values.
+ *	Process one or more name-value pairs for configuration options and
+ *	fill in fields of a record with new values.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If all goes well then TCL_OK is returned and the old values of
- *	any modified objects are saved in *savePtr, if it isn't NULL (the
- *	caller must eventually call Tk_RestoreSavedOptions or
- *	Tk_FreeSavedOptions to free the contents of *savePtr).  In
- *	addition, if maskPtr isn't NULL then *maskPtr is filled in with
- *	the OR of the typeMask bits from all modified options.  If an
- *	error occurs then TCL_ERROR is returned and a message 
- *	is left in interp's result unless interp is NULL; nothing is
+ *	If all goes well then TCL_OK is returned and the old values of any
+ *	modified objects are saved in *savePtr, if it isn't NULL (the caller
+ *	must eventually call Tk_RestoreSavedOptions or Tk_FreeSavedOptions to
+ *	free the contents of *savePtr). In addition, if maskPtr isn't NULL
+ *	then *maskPtr is filled in with the OR of the typeMask bits from all
+ *	modified options. If an error occurs then TCL_ERROR is returned and a
+ *	message is left in interp's result unless interp is NULL; nothing is
  *	saved in *savePtr or *maskPtr in this case.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The fields of recordPtr get filled in with object pointers
- *	from objc/objv.  Old information in widgRec's fields gets 
- * 	recycled.  Information may be left at *savePtr.
+ *	The fields of recordPtr get filled in with object pointers from
+ *	objc/objv. Old information in widgRec's fields gets recycled.
+ *	Information may be left at *savePtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1280,28 +1260,24 @@ SetOptionFromAny(interp, objPtr)
 int
 Tk_SetOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc, objv, tkwin, savePtr,
 	maskPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for error reporting.
-					 * If NULL, then no error message is
-					 * returned.*/
-    char *recordPtr;	    		/* The record to configure. */
-    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;		/* Describes valid options. */
-    int objc;				/* The number of elements in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Contains one or more name-value
-					 * pairs. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window associated with the thing
-					 * being configured; needed for some
-					 * options (such as colors). */
-    Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr;		/* If non-NULL, the old values of
-					 * modified options are saved here
-					 * so that they can be restored
-					 * after an error. */
-    int *maskPtr;			/* It non-NULL, this word is modified
-					 * on a successful return to hold the
-					 * bit-wise OR of the typeMask fields
-					 * of all options that were modified
-					 * by this call.  Used by the caller
-					 * to figure out which options
-					 * actually changed. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL,
+				 * then no error message is returned.*/
+    char *recordPtr;	    	/* The record to configure. */
+    Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Describes valid options. */
+    int objc;			/* The number of elements in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Contains one or more name-value pairs. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window associated with the thing being
+				 * configured; needed for some options (such
+				 * as colors). */
+    Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr;	/* If non-NULL, the old values of modified
+				 * options are saved here so that they can be
+				 * restored after an error. */
+    int *maskPtr;		/* It non-NULL, this word is modified on a
+				 * successful return to hold the bit-wise OR
+				 * of the typeMask fields of all options that
+				 * were modified by this call. Used by the
+				 * caller to figure out which options actually
+				 * changed. */
 {
     OptionTable *tablePtr = (OptionTable *) optionTable;
     Option *optionPtr;
@@ -1317,8 +1293,8 @@ Tk_SetOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc, objv, tkwin, savePtr,
     lastSavePtr = savePtr;
 
     /*
-     * Scan through all of the arguments, processing those
-     * that match entries in the option table.
+     * Scan through all of the arguments, processing those that match entries
+     * in the option table.
      */
 
     mask = 0;
@@ -1342,12 +1318,11 @@ Tk_SetOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc, objv, tkwin, savePtr,
 	if ((savePtr != NULL)
 		&& (lastSavePtr->numItems >= TK_NUM_SAVED_OPTIONS)) {
 	    /*
-	     * We've run out of space for saving old option values.  Allocate
+	     * We've run out of space for saving old option values. Allocate
 	     * more space.
 	     */
 
-	    newSavePtr = (Tk_SavedOptions *) ckalloc(sizeof(
-		    Tk_SavedOptions));
+	    newSavePtr = (Tk_SavedOptions *) ckalloc(sizeof(Tk_SavedOptions));
 	    newSavePtr->recordPtr = recordPtr;
 	    newSavePtr->tkwin = tkwin;
 	    newSavePtr->numItems = 0;
@@ -1375,7 +1350,7 @@ Tk_SetOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc, objv, tkwin, savePtr,
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     if (savePtr != NULL) {
 	Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(savePtr);
     }
@@ -1387,38 +1362,38 @@ Tk_SetOptions(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc, objv, tkwin, savePtr,
  *
  * Tk_RestoreSavedOptions --
  *
- *	This procedure undoes the effect of a previous call to
- *	Tk_SetOptions by restoring all of the options to their value
- *	before the call to Tk_SetOptions.
+ *	This function undoes the effect of a previous call to Tk_SetOptions by
+ *	restoring all of the options to their value before the call to
+ *	Tk_SetOptions.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The configutation record is restored and all the information
- *	stored in savePtr is freed.
+ *	The configutation record is restored and all the information stored in
+ *	savePtr is freed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
 Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(savePtr)
-    Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr;	/* Holds saved option information; must
-				 * have been passed to Tk_SetOptions. */
+    Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr;	/* Holds saved option information; must have
+				 * been passed to Tk_SetOptions. */
 {
     int i;
     Option *optionPtr;
     Tcl_Obj *newPtr;		/* New object value of option, which we
-				 * replace with old value and free.  Taken
-				 * from record. */
+				 * replace with old value and free. Taken from
+				 * record. */
     char *internalPtr;		/* Points to internal value of option in
 				 * record. */
     CONST Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Be sure to restore the options in the opposite order they were
-     * set.  This is important because it's possible that the same
-     * option name was used twice in a single call to Tk_SetOptions.
+     * Be sure to restore the options in the opposite order they were set.
+     * This is important because it's possible that the same option name was
+     * used twice in a single call to Tk_SetOptions.
      */
 
     if (savePtr->nextPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1431,8 +1406,8 @@ Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(savePtr)
 	specPtr = optionPtr->specPtr;
 
 	/*
-	 * First free the new value of the option, which is currently
-	 * in the record.
+	 * First free the new value of the option, which is currently in the
+	 * record.
 	 */
 
 	if (specPtr->objOffset >= 0) {
@@ -1462,100 +1437,83 @@ Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(savePtr)
 	}
 	if (specPtr->internalOffset >= 0) {
 	    switch (specPtr->type) {
-		case TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN: {
-		    *((int *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((int *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_INT: {
-		    *((int *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((int *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_DOUBLE: {
-		    *((double *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((double *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_STRING: {
-		    *((char **) internalPtr)
-			    = *((char **) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE: {
-		    *((int *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((int *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_COLOR: {
-		    *((XColor **) internalPtr)
-			    = *((XColor **) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_FONT: {
-		    *((Tk_Font *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((Tk_Font *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_STYLE: {
-		    *((Tk_Style *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((Tk_Style *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_BITMAP: {
-		    *((Pixmap *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((Pixmap *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_BORDER: {
-		    *((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((Tk_3DBorder *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_RELIEF: {
-		    *((int *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((int *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_CURSOR: {
-		    *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((Tk_Cursor *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    Tk_DefineCursor(savePtr->tkwin,
-			    *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr));
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY: {
-		    *((Tk_Justify *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((Tk_Justify *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_ANCHOR: {
-		    *((Tk_Anchor *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((Tk_Anchor *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_PIXELS: {
-		    *((int *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((int *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_WINDOW: {
-		    *((Tk_Window *) internalPtr)
-			    = *((Tk_Window *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    break;
-		}
-		case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
-		    Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
-		    if (custom->restoreProc != NULL) {
-			custom->restoreProc(custom->clientData, savePtr->tkwin,
-				internalPtr,
-				(char *)&savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
-		    }
-		    break;
-		}
-		default: {
-		    Tcl_Panic("bad option type in Tk_RestoreSavedOptions");
+	    case TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN:
+		*((int *) internalPtr) =
+			*((int *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_INT:
+		*((int *) internalPtr) =
+			*((int *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_DOUBLE:
+		*((double *) internalPtr) =
+			*((double *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_STRING:
+		*((char **) internalPtr) =
+			*((char **) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE:
+		*((int *) internalPtr) =
+			*((int *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_COLOR:
+		*((XColor **) internalPtr) =
+			*((XColor **) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_FONT:
+		*((Tk_Font *) internalPtr) =
+			*((Tk_Font *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_STYLE:
+		*((Tk_Style *) internalPtr) =
+			*((Tk_Style *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_BITMAP:
+		*((Pixmap *) internalPtr) =
+			*((Pixmap *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_BORDER:
+		*((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr) =
+			*((Tk_3DBorder *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_RELIEF:
+		*((int *) internalPtr) =
+			*((int *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_CURSOR:
+		*((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr) =
+			*((Tk_Cursor *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
+		Tk_DefineCursor(savePtr->tkwin, *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr));
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY:
+		*((Tk_Justify *) internalPtr) =
+			*((Tk_Justify *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_ANCHOR:
+		*((Tk_Anchor *) internalPtr) =
+			*((Tk_Anchor *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_PIXELS:
+		*((int *) internalPtr) =
+			*((int *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_WINDOW:
+		*((Tk_Window *) internalPtr) =
+			*((Tk_Window *) &savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
+		break;
+	    case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
+		Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
+
+		if (custom->restoreProc != NULL) {
+		    custom->restoreProc(custom->clientData,
+			    savePtr->tkwin, internalPtr,
+			    (char *)&savePtr->items[i].internalForm);
 		}
+		break;
+	    }
+	    default:
+		Tcl_Panic("bad option type in Tk_RestoreSavedOptions");
 	    }
 	}
     }
@@ -1567,8 +1525,8 @@ Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(savePtr)
  *
  * Tk_FreeSavedOptions --
  *
- *	Free all of the saved configuration option values from a
- *	previous call to Tk_SetOptions.
+ *	Free all of the saved configuration option values from a previous call
+ *	to Tk_SetOptions.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1581,8 +1539,8 @@ Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(savePtr)
 
 void
 Tk_FreeSavedOptions(savePtr)
-    Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr;	/* Contains options saved in a previous
-				 * call to Tk_SetOptions. */
+    Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr;	/* Contains options saved in a previous call
+				 * to Tk_SetOptions. */
 {
     int count;
     Tk_SavedOption *savedOptionPtr;
@@ -1615,8 +1573,8 @@ Tk_FreeSavedOptions(savePtr)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	All of the Tcl_Obj's in recordPtr that are controlled by
- *	configuration options in optionTable are freed.
+ *	All of the Tcl_Obj's in recordPtr that are controlled by configuration
+ *	options in optionTable are freed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1624,8 +1582,8 @@ Tk_FreeSavedOptions(savePtr)
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 void
 Tk_FreeConfigOptions(recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Record whose fields contain current
-				 * values for options. */
+    char *recordPtr;		/* Record whose fields contain current values
+				 * for options. */
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Describes legal options. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window associated with recordPtr; needed
 				 * for freeing some options. */
@@ -1633,7 +1591,7 @@ Tk_FreeConfigOptions(recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
     OptionTable *tablePtr;
     Option *optionPtr;
     int count;
-    Tcl_Obj **oldPtrPtr, *oldPtr; 
+    Tcl_Obj **oldPtrPtr, *oldPtr;
     char *oldInternalPtr;
     CONST Tk_OptionSpec *specPtr;
 
@@ -1672,14 +1630,14 @@ Tk_FreeConfigOptions(recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin)
  *
  * FreeResources --
  *
- *	Free system resources associated with a configuration option,
- *	such as colors or fonts.
+ *	Free system resources associated with a configuration option, such as
+ *	colors or fonts.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Any system resources associated with objPtr are released.  However,
+ *	Any system resources associated with objPtr are released. However,
  *	objPtr itself is not freed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -1692,7 +1650,7 @@ FreeResources(optionPtr, objPtr, internalPtr, tkwin)
 				 * as an object. */
     char *internalPtr;		/* A pointer to an internal representation for
 				 * the option's value, such as an int or
-				 * (XColor *).  Only valid if
+				 * (XColor *). Only valid if
 				 * optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset >= 0. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window in which this option is used. */
 {
@@ -1700,86 +1658,85 @@ FreeResources(optionPtr, objPtr, internalPtr, tkwin)
 
     /*
      * If there exists an internal form for the value, use it to free
-     * resources (also zero out the internal form).  If there is no
-     * internal form, then use the object form.
+     * resources (also zero out the internal form). If there is no internal
+     * form, then use the object form.
      */
 
     internalFormExists = optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset >= 0;
     switch (optionPtr->specPtr->type) {
-	case TK_OPTION_STRING:
-	    if (internalFormExists) {
-		if (*((char **) internalPtr) != NULL) {
-		    ckfree(*((char **) internalPtr));
-		    *((char **) internalPtr) = NULL;
-		}
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TK_OPTION_COLOR:
-	    if (internalFormExists) {
-		if (*((XColor **) internalPtr) != NULL) {
-		    Tk_FreeColor(*((XColor **) internalPtr));
-		    *((XColor **) internalPtr) = NULL;
-		}
-	    } else if (objPtr != NULL) {
-		Tk_FreeColorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TK_OPTION_FONT:
-	    if (internalFormExists) {
-		Tk_FreeFont(*((Tk_Font *) internalPtr));
-		*((Tk_Font *) internalPtr) = NULL;
-	    } else if (objPtr != NULL) {
-		Tk_FreeFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TK_OPTION_STYLE:
-	    if (internalFormExists) {
-		Tk_FreeStyle(*((Tk_Style *) internalPtr));
-		*((Tk_Style *) internalPtr) = NULL;
-	    } else if (objPtr != NULL) {
-		Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TK_OPTION_BITMAP:
-	    if (internalFormExists) {
-		if (*((Pixmap *) internalPtr) != None) {
-		    Tk_FreeBitmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), *((Pixmap *) internalPtr));
-		    *((Pixmap *) internalPtr) = None;
-		}
-	    } else if (objPtr != NULL) {
-		Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TK_OPTION_BORDER:
-	    if (internalFormExists) {
-		if (*((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr) != NULL) {
-		    Tk_Free3DBorder(*((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr));
-		    *((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr) = NULL;
-		}
-	    } else if (objPtr != NULL) {
-		Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TK_OPTION_CURSOR:
-	    if (internalFormExists) {
-		if (*((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr) != None) {
-		    Tk_FreeCursor(Tk_Display(tkwin),
-			    *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr));
-		    *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr) = None;
-		}
-	    } else if (objPtr != NULL) {
-		Tk_FreeCursorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
-	    Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
-	    if (internalFormExists && custom->freeProc != NULL) {
-		custom->freeProc(custom->clientData, tkwin, internalPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	default:
-	    break;
+    case TK_OPTION_STRING:
+	if (internalFormExists) {
+	    if (*((char **) internalPtr) != NULL) {
+		ckfree(*((char **) internalPtr));
+		*((char **) internalPtr) = NULL;
+	    }
+	}
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_COLOR:
+	if (internalFormExists) {
+	    if (*((XColor **) internalPtr) != NULL) {
+		Tk_FreeColor(*((XColor **) internalPtr));
+		*((XColor **) internalPtr) = NULL;
+	    }
+	} else if (objPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tk_FreeColorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_FONT:
+	if (internalFormExists) {
+	    Tk_FreeFont(*((Tk_Font *) internalPtr));
+	    *((Tk_Font *) internalPtr) = NULL;
+	} else if (objPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tk_FreeFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_STYLE:
+	if (internalFormExists) {
+	    Tk_FreeStyle(*((Tk_Style *) internalPtr));
+	    *((Tk_Style *) internalPtr) = NULL;
+	} else if (objPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tk_FreeStyleFromObj(objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_BITMAP:
+	if (internalFormExists) {
+	    if (*((Pixmap *) internalPtr) != None) {
+		Tk_FreeBitmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), *((Pixmap *) internalPtr));
+		*((Pixmap *) internalPtr) = None;
+	    }
+	} else if (objPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_BORDER:
+	if (internalFormExists) {
+	    if (*((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr) != NULL) {
+		Tk_Free3DBorder(*((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr));
+		*((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr) = NULL;
+	    }
+	} else if (objPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_CURSOR:
+	if (internalFormExists) {
+	    if (*((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr) != None) {
+		Tk_FreeCursor(Tk_Display(tkwin), *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr));
+		*((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr) = None;
+	    }
+	} else if (objPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tk_FreeCursorFromObj(tkwin, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
+	Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
+	if (internalFormExists && custom->freeProc != NULL) {
+	    custom->freeProc(custom->clientData, tkwin, internalPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    default:
+	break;
     }
 }
 
@@ -1788,23 +1745,21 @@ FreeResources(optionPtr, objPtr, internalPtr, tkwin)
  *
  * Tk_GetOptionInfo --
  *
- *	Returns a list object containing complete information about
- *	either a single option or all the configuration options in a
- *	table.
+ *	Returns a list object containing complete information about either a
+ *	single option or all the configuration options in a table.
  *
  * Results:
- *	This procedure normally returns a pointer to an object.
- *	If namePtr isn't NULL, then the result object is a list with
- *	five elements: the option's name, its database name, database
- *	class, default value, and current value.  If the option is a
- *	synonym then the list will contain only two values: the option
- *	name and the name of the option it refers to.  If namePtr is
- *	NULL, then information is returned for every option in the
- *	option table: the result will have one sub-list (in the form
- *	described above) for each option in the table.  If an error
- *	occurs (e.g. because namePtr isn't valid) then NULL is returned
- *	and an error message will be left in interp's result unless
- *	interp is NULL.
+
+ *	This function normally returns a pointer to an object. If namePtr
+ *	isn't NULL, then the result object is a list with five elements: the
+ *	option's name, its database name, database class, default value, and
+ *	current value. If the option is a synonym then the list will contain
+ *	only two values: the option name and the name of the option it refers
+ *	to. If namePtr is NULL, then information is returned for every option
+ *	in the option table: the result will have one sub-list (in the form
+ *	described above) for each option in the table. If an error occurs
+ *	(e.g. because namePtr isn't valid) then NULL is returned and an error
+ *	message will be left in interp's result unless interp is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1814,17 +1769,17 @@ FreeResources(optionPtr, objPtr, internalPtr, tkwin)
 
 Tcl_Obj *
 Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting.  If	
-				 * NULL, then no error message is created. */
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Record whose fields contain current
-				 * values for options. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL,
+				 * then no error message is created. */
+    char *recordPtr;		/* Record whose fields contain current values
+				 * for options. */
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Describes all the legal options. */
-    Tcl_Obj *namePtr;		/* If non-NULL, the string value selects
-				 * a single option whose info is to be
-				 * returned.  Otherwise info is returned for
-				 * all options in optionTable. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window associated with recordPtr; needed
-				 * to compute correct default value for some
+    Tcl_Obj *namePtr;		/* If non-NULL, the string value selects a
+				 * single option whose info is to be returned.
+				 * Otherwise info is returned for all options
+				 * in optionTable. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window associated with recordPtr; needed to
+				 * compute correct default value for some
 				 * options. */
 {
     Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
@@ -1833,8 +1788,8 @@ Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
     int count;
 
     /*
-     * If information is only wanted for a single configuration
-     * spec, then handle that one spec specially.
+     * If information is only wanted for a single configuration spec, then
+     * handle that one spec specially.
      */
 
     if (namePtr != NULL) {
@@ -1849,8 +1804,8 @@ Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Loop through all the specs, creating a big list with all
-     * their information.
+     * Loop through all the specs, creating a big list with all their
+     * information.
      */
 
     resultPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **) NULL);
@@ -1869,12 +1824,12 @@ Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
  *
  * GetConfigList --
  *
- *	Create a valid Tcl list holding the configuration information
- *	for a single configuration option.
+ *	Create a valid Tcl list holding the configuration information for a
+ *	single configuration option.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A Tcl list, dynamically allocated.  The caller is expected to
- *	arrange for this list to be freed eventually.
+ *	A Tcl list, dynamically allocated. The caller is expected to arrange
+ *	for this list to be freed eventually.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory is allocated.
@@ -1884,8 +1839,8 @@ Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
 
 static Tcl_Obj *
 GetConfigList(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Pointer to record holding current
-				 * values of configuration options. */
+    char *recordPtr;		/* Pointer to record holding current values of
+				 * configuration options. */
     Option *optionPtr;		/* Pointer to information describing a
 				 * particular option. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window corresponding to recordPtr. */
@@ -1893,7 +1848,7 @@ GetConfigList(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
     Tcl_Obj *listPtr, *elementPtr;
 
     listPtr = Tcl_NewListObj(0, (Tcl_Obj **) NULL);
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, listPtr, 
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, listPtr,
 	    Tcl_NewStringObj(optionPtr->specPtr->optionName, -1));
 
     if (optionPtr->specPtr->type == TK_OPTION_SYNONYM) {
@@ -1946,14 +1901,13 @@ GetConfigList(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
  *
  * GetObjectForOption --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to create an object that contains the
- *	value for an option.  It is invoked by GetConfigList and
- *	Tk_GetOptionValue when only the internal form of an option is
- *	stored in the record.
+ *	This function is called to create an object that contains the value
+ *	for an option. It is invoked by GetConfigList and Tk_GetOptionValue
+ *	when only the internal form of an option is stored in the record.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to a Tcl object.  The caller
- *	must call Tcl_IncrRefCount on this object to preserve it.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to a Tcl object. The caller must call
+ *	Tcl_IncrRefCount on this object to preserve it.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1963,11 +1917,11 @@ GetConfigList(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
 
 static Tcl_Obj *
 GetObjectForOption(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Pointer to record holding current
-				 * values of configuration options. */
-    Option *optionPtr;		/* Pointer to information describing an
-				 * option whose internal value is stored
-				 * in *recordPtr. */
+    char *recordPtr;		/* Pointer to record holding current values of
+				 * configuration options. */
+    Option *optionPtr;		/* Pointer to information describing an option
+				 * whose internal value is stored in
+				 * *recordPtr. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window corresponding to recordPtr. */
 {
     Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
@@ -1977,107 +1931,103 @@ GetObjectForOption(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
     internalPtr = recordPtr + optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset;
     objPtr = NULL;
     switch (optionPtr->specPtr->type) {
-	case TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN: {
-	    objPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(*((int *) internalPtr));
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_INT: {
-	    objPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(*((int *) internalPtr));
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_DOUBLE: {
-	    objPtr = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(*((double *) internalPtr));
-	    break;
+    case TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(*((int *) internalPtr));
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_INT:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(*((int *) internalPtr));
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_DOUBLE:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(*((double *) internalPtr));
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_STRING:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(*((char **) internalPtr), -1);
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(((char **) optionPtr->specPtr->clientData)[
+		*((int *) internalPtr)], -1);
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_COLOR: {
+	XColor *colorPtr = *((XColor **) internalPtr);
+
+	if (colorPtr != NULL) {
+	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfColor(colorPtr), -1);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_FONT: {
+	Tk_Font tkfont = *((Tk_Font *) internalPtr);
+
+	if (tkfont != NULL) {
+	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfFont(tkfont), -1);
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_STRING: {
-	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(*((char **) internalPtr), -1);
-	    break;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_STYLE: {
+	Tk_Style style = *((Tk_Style *) internalPtr);
+
+	if (style != NULL) {
+	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfStyle(style), -1);
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE: {
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_BITMAP: {
+	Pixmap pixmap = *((Pixmap *) internalPtr);
+
+	if (pixmap != None) {
 	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
-		    ((char **) optionPtr->specPtr->clientData)[
-		    *((int *) internalPtr)], -1);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_COLOR: { 
-	    XColor *colorPtr = *((XColor **) internalPtr);
-	    if (colorPtr != NULL) {
-		objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfColor(colorPtr), -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_FONT: {
-	    Tk_Font tkfont = *((Tk_Font *) internalPtr);
-	    if (tkfont != NULL) {
-		objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfFont(tkfont), -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_STYLE: {
-	    Tk_Style style = *((Tk_Style *) internalPtr);
-	    if (style != NULL) {
-		objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfStyle(style), -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_BITMAP: {
-	    Pixmap pixmap = *((Pixmap *) internalPtr);
-	    if (pixmap != None) {
-		objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfBitmap(Tk_Display(tkwin),
-			pixmap), -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_BORDER: {
-	    Tk_3DBorder border = *((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr);
-	    if (border != NULL) {
-		objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOf3DBorder(border), -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_RELIEF: {
-	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfRelief(
-		    *((int *) internalPtr)), -1);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_CURSOR: {
-	    Tk_Cursor cursor = *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr);
-	    if (cursor != None) {
-		objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
-			Tk_NameOfCursor(Tk_Display(tkwin), cursor), -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
+		    Tk_NameOfBitmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), pixmap), -1);
 	}
-	case TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY: {
-	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfJustify(
-		    *((Tk_Justify *) internalPtr)), -1);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_ANCHOR: {
-	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfAnchor(
-		    *((Tk_Anchor *) internalPtr)), -1);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_PIXELS: {
-	    objPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(*((int *) internalPtr));
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_WINDOW: {
-	    Tk_Window tkwin = *((Tk_Window *) internalPtr);
-	    if (tkwin != NULL) {
-		objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(tkwin), -1);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
-	    Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
-	    objPtr = custom->getProc(custom->clientData, tkwin, recordPtr,
-		    optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset);
-	    break;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_BORDER: {
+	Tk_3DBorder border = *((Tk_3DBorder *) internalPtr);
+
+	if (border != NULL) {
+	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOf3DBorder(border), -1);
 	}
-	default: {
-	    Tcl_Panic("bad option type in GetObjectForOption");
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_RELIEF:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfRelief(*((int *) internalPtr)), -1);
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_CURSOR: {
+	Tk_Cursor cursor = *((Tk_Cursor *) internalPtr);
+
+	if (cursor != None) {
+	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(
+		    Tk_NameOfCursor(Tk_Display(tkwin), cursor), -1);
 	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfJustify(
+		*((Tk_Justify *) internalPtr)), -1);
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_ANCHOR:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_NameOfAnchor(
+		*((Tk_Anchor *) internalPtr)), -1);
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_PIXELS:
+	objPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(*((int *) internalPtr));
+	break;
+    case TK_OPTION_WINDOW: {
+	Tk_Window tkwin = *((Tk_Window *) internalPtr);
+
+	if (tkwin != NULL) {
+	    objPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(tkwin), -1);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TK_OPTION_CUSTOM: {
+	Tk_ObjCustomOption *custom = optionPtr->extra.custom;
+
+	objPtr = custom->getProc(custom->clientData, tkwin, recordPtr,
+		optionPtr->specPtr->internalOffset);
+	break;
+    }
+    default:
+	Tcl_Panic("bad option type in GetObjectForOption");
     }
     if (objPtr == NULL) {
 	objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
@@ -2090,14 +2040,13 @@ GetObjectForOption(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
  *
  * Tk_GetOptionValue --
  *
- *	This procedure returns the current value of a configuration
- *	option.
+ *	This function returns the current value of a configuration option.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the object holding the current value of
- *	the option given by namePtr.  If no such option exists, then
- *	the return value is NULL and an error message is left in
- *	interp's result (if interp isn't NULL).
+ *	The return value is the object holding the current value of the option
+ *	given by namePtr. If no such option exists, then the return value is
+ *	NULL and an error message is left in interp's result (if interp isn't
+ *	NULL).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2107,14 +2056,14 @@ GetObjectForOption(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin)
 
 Tcl_Obj *
 Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting.  If
-				 * NULL then no messages are provided for
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. If NULL
+				 * then no messages are provided for
 				 * errors. */
-    char *recordPtr;		/* Record whose fields contain current
-				 * values for options. */
+    char *recordPtr;		/* Record whose fields contain current values
+				 * for options. */
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Describes legal options. */
-    Tcl_Obj *namePtr;		/* Gives the command-line name for the
-				 * option whose value is to be returned. */
+    Tcl_Obj *namePtr;		/* Gives the command-line name for the option
+				 * whose value is to be returned. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window corresponding to recordPtr. */
 {
     OptionTable *tablePtr = (OptionTable *) optionTable;
@@ -2129,16 +2078,16 @@ Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
 	optionPtr = optionPtr->extra.synonymPtr;
     }
     if (optionPtr->specPtr->objOffset >= 0) {
-	resultPtr = *((Tcl_Obj **) (recordPtr + optionPtr->specPtr->objOffset));
+	resultPtr = *((Tcl_Obj **) (recordPtr+optionPtr->specPtr->objOffset));
 	if (resultPtr == NULL) {
 	    /*
 	     * This option has a null value and is represented by a null
-	     * object pointer.  We can't return the null pointer, since that
-	     * would indicate an error.  Instead, return a new empty object.
+	     * object pointer. We can't return the null pointer, since that
+	     * would indicate an error. Instead, return a new empty object.
 	     */
-    
+
 	    resultPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
-	} 
+	}
     } else {
 	resultPtr = GetObjectForOption(recordPtr, optionPtr, tkwin);
     }
@@ -2150,19 +2099,17 @@ Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
  *
  * TkDebugConfig --
  *
- *	This is a debugging procedure that returns information about
- *	one of the configuration tables that currently exists for an
- *	interpreter.
+ *	This is a debugging function that returns information about one of the
+ *	configuration tables that currently exists for an interpreter.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If the specified table exists in the given interpreter, then a
- *	list is returned describing the table and any other tables that
- *	it chains to: for each table there will be three list elements
- *	giving the reference count for the table, the number of elements
- *	in the table, and the command-line name for the first option
- *	in the table.  If the table doesn't exist in the interpreter
- *	then an empty object is returned.  The reference count for the
- *	returned object is 0.
+ *	If the specified table exists in the given interpreter, then a list is
+ *	returned describing the table and any other tables that it chains to:
+ *	for each table there will be three list elements giving the reference
+ *	count for the table, the number of elements in the table, and the
+ *	command-line name for the first option in the table. If the table
+ *	doesn't exist in the interpreter then an empty object is returned.
+ *	The reference count for the returned object is 0.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2172,11 +2119,11 @@ Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin)
 
 Tcl_Obj *
 TkDebugConfig(interp, table)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter in which the table is
-					 * defined. */
-    Tk_OptionTable table;		/* Table about which information is to
-					 * be returned.  May not necessarily
-					 * exist in the interpreter anymore. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter in which the table is
+				 * defined. */
+    Tk_OptionTable table;	/* Table about which information is to be
+				 * returned. May not necessarily exist in the
+				 * interpreter anymore. */
 {
     OptionTable *tablePtr = (OptionTable *) table;
     Tcl_HashTable *hashTablePtr;
@@ -2192,8 +2139,8 @@ TkDebugConfig(interp, table)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Scan all the tables for this interpreter to make sure that the
-     * one we want still is valid.
+     * Scan all the tables for this interpreter to make sure that the one we
+     * want still is valid.
      */
 
     for (hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(hashTablePtr, &search);
@@ -2207,11 +2154,18 @@ TkDebugConfig(interp, table)
 			Tcl_NewIntObj(tablePtr->numOptions));
 		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, objPtr,
 			Tcl_NewStringObj(
-				tablePtr->options[0].specPtr->optionName,
-			-1));
+				tablePtr->options[0].specPtr->optionName, -1));
 	    }
 	    break;
 	}
     }
     return objPtr;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkEntry.c b/generic/tkEntry.c
index f1c2885..ab628e9 100644
--- a/generic/tkEntry.c
+++ b/generic/tkEntry.c
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-/* 
- * Entry.c --
+/*
+ * tkEntry.c --
  *
  *	This module implements entry and spinbox widgets for the Tk toolkit.
- *	An entry displays a string and allows the string to be edited.
- *	A spinbox expands on the entry by adding up/down buttons that control
+ *	An entry displays a string and allows the string to be edited. A
+ *	spinbox expands on the entry by adding up/down buttons that control
  *	the value of the entry widget.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
@@ -11,28 +11,28 @@
  * Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions.
  * Copyright (c) 2002 ActiveState Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkEntry.c,v 1.37 2005/03/24 15:25:52 dgp Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkEntry.c,v 1.38 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "default.h"
 #include "tkEntry.h"
 
-
 /*
- * The following macro defines how many extra pixels to leave on each
- * side of the text in the entry.
+ * The following macro defines how many extra pixels to leave on each side of
+ * the text in the entry.
  */
 
 #define XPAD 1
 #define YPAD 1
 
 /*
- * A comparison function for double values.  For Spinboxes.
+ * A comparison function for double values. For Spinboxes.
  */
+
 #define MIN_DBL_VAL		1E-9
 #define DOUBLES_EQ(d1, d2)	(fabs((d1) - (d2)) < MIN_DBL_VAL)
 
@@ -72,55 +72,55 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec entryOptSpec[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
 	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
-	DEF_ENTRY_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, borderWidth), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, borderWidth),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
 	DEF_ENTRY_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, cursor),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-disabledbackground", "disabledBackground",
-	 "DisabledBackground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_COLOR, -1,
-	 Tk_Offset(Entry, disabledBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
-	 (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_MONO, 0},
+	"DisabledBackground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, disabledBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
+	(ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground",
-	 "DisabledForeground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_FG, -1,
-	 Tk_Offset(Entry, dfgColorPtr), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	"DisabledForeground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_FG, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, dfgColorPtr), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-exportselection", "exportSelection",
-        "ExportSelection", DEF_ENTRY_EXPORT_SELECTION, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(Entry, exportSelection), 0, 0, 0},
+	"ExportSelection", DEF_ENTRY_EXPORT_SELECTION, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, exportSelection), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", (char *) NULL,
 	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
 	DEF_ENTRY_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
-	DEF_ENTRY_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, fgColorPtr), 0, 
-        0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, fgColorPtr), 0,
+	0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
 	"HighlightBackground", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_BG,
-	-1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightBgColorPtr), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	-1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightBgColorPtr),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
 	DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightColorPtr),
 	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
-	"HighlightThickness", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1, 
+	"HighlightThickness", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1,
 	Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-insertbackground", "insertBackground", "Foreground",
 	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BG,
-	-1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorder), 
-        0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth", 
-        "BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_COLOR, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorderWidth), 0, 
-        (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_MONO, 0},
+	-1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorder),
+	0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth",
+	"BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorderWidth), 0,
+	(ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertofftime", "insertOffTime", "OffTime",
-        DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_OFF_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOffTime), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_OFF_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOffTime),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertontime", "insertOnTime", "OnTime",
-        DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_ON_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOnTime), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_ON_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOnTime),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertwidth", "insertWidth", "InsertWidth",
-	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertWidth), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertWidth),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-invalidcommand", "invalidCommand", "InvalidCommand",
 	DEF_ENTRY_INVALIDCMD, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, invalidCmd),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
@@ -129,40 +129,40 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec entryOptSpec[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
 	DEF_ENTRY_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, justify), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-readonlybackground", "readonlyBackground",
-	 "ReadonlyBackground", DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_COLOR, -1,
-	 Tk_Offset(Entry, readonlyBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
-	 (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_MONO, 0},
+	"ReadonlyBackground", DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, readonlyBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
+	(ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
-	DEF_ENTRY_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, relief), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, relief),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground",
-        DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorder),
-        0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", 
-        "BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_COLOR, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorderWidth), 
-        0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_MONO, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorder),
+	0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_MONO, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth",
+	"BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorderWidth),
+	0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background",
 	DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, selFgColorPtr),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-show", "show", "Show",
-        DEF_ENTRY_SHOW, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, showChar), 
-        TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_SHOW, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, showChar),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
-	DEF_ENTRY_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, state), 
-        0, (ClientData) stateStrings, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, state),
+	0, (ClientData) stateStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
-	DEF_ENTRY_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, takeFocus), 
-        TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, takeFocus),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
 	DEF_ENTRY_TEXT_VARIABLE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, textVarName),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-validate", "validate", "Validate",
-       DEF_ENTRY_VALIDATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validate),
-       0, (ClientData) validateStrings, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_VALIDATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validate),
+	0, (ClientData) validateStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-validatecommand", "validateCommand", "ValidateCommand",
-       (char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validateCmd),
-       TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validateCmd),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-vcmd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
 	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-validatecommand", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width",
@@ -203,8 +203,8 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec sbOptSpec[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
 	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
-	DEF_ENTRY_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, borderWidth), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, borderWidth),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-buttonbackground", "Button.background", "Background",
 	DEF_BUTTON_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, buttonBorder),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_BUTTON_BG_MONO, 0},
@@ -213,10 +213,10 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec sbOptSpec[] = {
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-buttondownrelief", "Button.relief", "Relief",
 	DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, bdRelief),
-        0, 0, 0},
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-buttonuprelief", "Button.relief", "Relief",
 	DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, buRelief),
-        0, 0, 0},
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-command", "command", "Command",
 	DEF_SPINBOX_CMD, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, command),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
@@ -224,22 +224,22 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec sbOptSpec[] = {
 	DEF_ENTRY_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, cursor),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-disabledbackground", "disabledBackground",
-	 "DisabledBackground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_COLOR, -1,
-	 Tk_Offset(Entry, disabledBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
-	 (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_MONO, 0},
+	"DisabledBackground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, disabledBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
+	(ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_BG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-disabledforeground", "disabledForeground",
-	 "DisabledForeground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_FG, -1,
-	 Tk_Offset(Entry, dfgColorPtr), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	"DisabledForeground", DEF_ENTRY_DISABLED_FG, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, dfgColorPtr), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-exportselection", "exportSelection",
-        "ExportSelection", DEF_ENTRY_EXPORT_SELECTION, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(Entry, exportSelection), 0, 0, 0},
+	"ExportSelection", DEF_ENTRY_EXPORT_SELECTION, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, exportSelection), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", (char *) NULL,
 	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
 	DEF_ENTRY_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, tkfont), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
-	DEF_ENTRY_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, fgColorPtr), 0, 
-        0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, fgColorPtr), 0,
+	0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-format", "format", "Format",
 	DEF_SPINBOX_FORMAT, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, reqFormat),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
@@ -247,32 +247,32 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec sbOptSpec[] = {
 	DEF_SPINBOX_FROM, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, fromValue), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
 	"HighlightBackground", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_BG,
-	-1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightBgColorPtr), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	-1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightBgColorPtr),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
 	DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightColorPtr),
 	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
-	"HighlightThickness", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1, 
+	"HighlightThickness", DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1,
 	Tk_Offset(Entry, highlightWidth), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-increment", "increment", "Increment",
 	DEF_SPINBOX_INCREMENT, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, increment), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-insertbackground", "insertBackground", "Foreground",
-	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorder), 
-        0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth", 
-        "BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_COLOR, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorderWidth), 0, 
-        (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_MONO, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BG, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorder),
+	0, 0, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth",
+	"BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, insertBorderWidth), 0,
+	(ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertofftime", "insertOffTime", "OffTime",
-        DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_OFF_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOffTime), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_OFF_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOffTime),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertontime", "insertOnTime", "OnTime",
-        DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_ON_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOnTime), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_ON_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertOnTime),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertwidth", "insertWidth", "InsertWidth",
-	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertWidth), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, insertWidth),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-invalidcommand", "invalidCommand", "InvalidCommand",
 	DEF_ENTRY_INVALIDCMD, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, invalidCmd),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
@@ -281,48 +281,48 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec sbOptSpec[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, "-justify", "justify", "Justify",
 	DEF_ENTRY_JUSTIFY, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, justify), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
-	DEF_ENTRY_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, relief), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, relief),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-readonlybackground", "readonlyBackground",
-	 "ReadonlyBackground", DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_COLOR, -1,
-	 Tk_Offset(Entry, readonlyBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
-	 (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_MONO, 0},
+	"ReadonlyBackground", DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, readonlyBorder), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
+	(ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_READONLY_BG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatdelay", "repeatDelay", "RepeatDelay",
-        DEF_SPINBOX_REPEAT_DELAY, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, repeatDelay), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_SPINBOX_REPEAT_DELAY, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, repeatDelay),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-repeatinterval", "repeatInterval", "RepeatInterval",
-        DEF_SPINBOX_REPEAT_INTERVAL, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, repeatInterval), 
-        0, 0, 0},
+	DEF_SPINBOX_REPEAT_INTERVAL, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, repeatInterval),
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground",
-        DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorder),
-        0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", 
-        "BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_COLOR, -1, 
-        Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorderWidth), 
-        0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_MONO, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorder),
+	0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_MONO, 0},
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth",
+	"BorderWidth", DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(Entry, selBorderWidth),
+	0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background",
 	DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, selFgColorPtr),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
-	DEF_ENTRY_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, state), 
-        0, (ClientData) stateStrings, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, state),
+	0, (ClientData) stateStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
-	DEF_ENTRY_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, takeFocus), 
-        TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, takeFocus),
+	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-textvariable", "textVariable", "Variable",
 	DEF_ENTRY_TEXT_VARIABLE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, textVarName),
 	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, "-to", "to", "To",
 	DEF_SPINBOX_TO, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, toValue), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-validate", "validate", "Validate",
-       DEF_ENTRY_VALIDATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validate),
-       0, (ClientData) validateStrings, 0},
+	DEF_ENTRY_VALIDATE, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validate),
+	0, (ClientData) validateStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-validatecommand", "validateCommand", "ValidateCommand",
-       (char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validateCmd),
-       TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Entry, validateCmd),
+	TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-values", "values", "Values",
-	 DEF_SPINBOX_VALUES, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, valueStr),
-	 TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	DEF_SPINBOX_VALUES, -1, Tk_Offset(Spinbox, valueStr),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-vcmd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
 	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-validatecommand", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width",
@@ -337,19 +337,19 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec sbOptSpec[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * The following tables define the entry widget commands (and sub-
- * commands) and map the indexes into the string tables into 
- * enumerated types used to dispatch the entry widget command.
+ * The following tables define the entry widget commands (and sub-commands)
+ * and map the indexes into the string tables into enumerated types used to
+ * dispatch the entry widget command.
  */
 
 static CONST char *entryCmdNames[] = {
-    "bbox", "cget", "configure", "delete", "get", "icursor", "index", 
+    "bbox", "cget", "configure", "delete", "get", "icursor", "index",
     "insert", "scan", "selection", "validate", "xview", (char *) NULL
 };
 
 enum entryCmd {
-    COMMAND_BBOX, COMMAND_CGET, COMMAND_CONFIGURE, COMMAND_DELETE, 
-    COMMAND_GET, COMMAND_ICURSOR, COMMAND_INDEX, COMMAND_INSERT, 
+    COMMAND_BBOX, COMMAND_CGET, COMMAND_CONFIGURE, COMMAND_DELETE,
+    COMMAND_GET, COMMAND_ICURSOR, COMMAND_INDEX, COMMAND_INSERT,
     COMMAND_SCAN, COMMAND_SELECTION, COMMAND_VALIDATE, COMMAND_XVIEW
 };
 
@@ -363,9 +363,9 @@ enum selCmd {
 };
 
 /*
- * The following tables define the spinbox widget commands (and sub-
- * commands) and map the indexes into the string tables into 
- * enumerated types used to dispatch the spinbox widget command.
+ * The following tables define the spinbox widget commands (and sub-commands)
+ * and map the indexes into the string tables into enumerated types used to
+ * dispatch the spinbox widget command.
  */
 
 static CONST char *sbCmdNames[] = {
@@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ static CONST char *sbCmdNames[] = {
 };
 
 enum sbCmd {
-    SB_CMD_BBOX, SB_CMD_CGET, SB_CMD_CONFIGURE, SB_CMD_DELETE, 
+    SB_CMD_BBOX, SB_CMD_CGET, SB_CMD_CONFIGURE, SB_CMD_DELETE,
     SB_CMD_GET, SB_CMD_ICURSOR, SB_CMD_IDENTIFY, SB_CMD_INDEX,
     SB_CMD_INSERT, SB_CMD_INVOKE, SB_CMD_SCAN, SB_CMD_SELECTION,
     SB_CMD_SET, SB_CMD_VALIDATE, SB_CMD_XVIEW
@@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ static CONST char *sbSelCmdNames[] = {
 };
 
 enum sbselCmd {
-    SB_SEL_ADJUST, SB_SEL_CLEAR, SB_SEL_ELEMENT, SB_SEL_FROM, 
+    SB_SEL_ADJUST, SB_SEL_CLEAR, SB_SEL_ELEMENT, SB_SEL_FROM,
     SB_SEL_PRESENT, SB_SEL_RANGE, SB_SEL_TO
 };
 
@@ -395,91 +395,80 @@ enum sbselCmd {
  * Extra for selection of elements
  */
 
-/* 
- * This is the string array  corresponding to the enum in selelement.
- * If you modify them, you must modify the strings here.
+/*
+ * This is the string array corresponding to the enum in selelement. If you
+ * modify them, you must modify the strings here.
  */
- 
+
 static CONST char *selElementNames[] = {
     "none", "buttondown", "buttonup", (char *) NULL, "entry"
 };
+
 /*
- * Flags for GetEntryIndex procedure:
+ * Flags for GetEntryIndex function:
  */
 
 #define ZERO_OK			1
 #define LAST_PLUS_ONE_OK	2
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static int		ConfigureEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Entry *entryPtr, int objc, 
-                            Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags));
-static void		DeleteChars _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr, int index,
-			    int count));
-static void		DestroyEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
-static void		DisplayEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		EntryBlinkProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		EntryCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		EntryComputeGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr));
-static void		EntryEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		EntryFocusProc _ANSI_ARGS_ ((Entry *entryPtr,
-			    int gotFocus));
-static int		EntryFetchSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes));
-static void		EntryLostSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		EventuallyRedraw _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr));
-static void		EntryScanTo _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr, int y));
-static void		EntrySetValue _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr,
-			    CONST char *value));
-static void		EntrySelectTo _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    Entry *entryPtr, int index));
-static char *		EntryTextVarProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+static int		ConfigureEntry(Tcl_Interp *interp, Entry *entryPtr,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags);
+static void		DeleteChars(Entry *entryPtr, int index, int count);
+static void		DestroyEntry(char *memPtr);
+static void		DisplayEntry(ClientData clientData);
+static void		EntryBlinkProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		EntryCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		EntryComputeGeometry(Entry *entryPtr);
+static void		EntryEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		EntryFocusProc(Entry *entryPtr, int gotFocus);
+static int		EntryFetchSelection(ClientData clientData, int offset,
+			    char *buffer, int maxBytes);
+static void		EntryLostSelection(ClientData clientData);
+static void		EventuallyRedraw(Entry *entryPtr);
+static void		EntryScanTo(Entry *entryPtr, int y);
+static void		EntrySetValue(Entry *entryPtr, CONST char *value);
+static void		EntrySelectTo(Entry *entryPtr, int index);
+static char *		EntryTextVarProc(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *name1,
-			    CONST char *name2, int flags));
-static void		EntryUpdateScrollbar _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr));
-static int		EntryValidate _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr,
-			    char *cmd));
-static int		EntryValidateChange _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr,
+			    CONST char *name2, int flags);
+static void		EntryUpdateScrollbar(Entry *entryPtr);
+static int		EntryValidate(Entry *entryPtr, char *cmd);
+static int		EntryValidateChange(Entry *entryPtr, char *change,
+			    CONST char *new, int index, int type);
+static void		ExpandPercents(Entry *entryPtr, CONST char *before,
 			    char *change, CONST char *new, int index,
-			    int type));
-static void		ExpandPercents _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr,
-			    CONST char *before, char *change, CONST char *new,
-			    int index, int type, Tcl_DString *dsPtr));
-static void		EntryValueChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr,
-			    CONST char *newValue));
-static void		EntryVisibleRange _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr,
-			    double *firstPtr, double *lastPtr));
-static int		EntryWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		EntryWorldChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData instanceData));
-static int		GetEntryIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Entry *entryPtr, char *string, int *indexPtr));
-static void		InsertChars _ANSI_ARGS_((Entry *entryPtr, int index,
-			    char *string));
+			    int type, Tcl_DString *dsPtr);
+static void		EntryValueChanged(Entry *entryPtr,
+			    CONST char *newValue);
+static void		EntryVisibleRange(Entry *entryPtr,
+			    double *firstPtr, double *lastPtr);
+static int		EntryWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		EntryWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData);
+static int		GetEntryIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, Entry *entryPtr,
+			    char *string, int *indexPtr);
+static void		InsertChars(Entry *entryPtr, int index, char *string);
 
 /*
  * These forward declarations are the spinbox specific ones:
  */
 
-static int		SpinboxWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		GetSpinboxElement _ANSI_ARGS_((Spinbox *sbPtr,
-			    int x, int y));
-static int		SpinboxInvoke _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Spinbox *sbPtr, int element));
-static int		ComputeFormat _ANSI_ARGS_((Spinbox *sbPtr));
+static int		SpinboxWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GetSpinboxElement(Spinbox *sbPtr, int x, int y);
+static int		SpinboxInvoke(Tcl_Interp *interp, Spinbox *sbPtr,
+			    int element);
+static int		ComputeFormat(Spinbox *sbPtr);
 
 /*
- * The structure below defines widget class behavior by means of procedures
+ * The structure below defines widget class behavior by means of functions
  * that can be invoked from generic window code.
  */
 
@@ -494,9 +483,8 @@ static Tk_ClassProcs entryClass = {
  *
  * Tk_EntryObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "entry" Tcl
- *	command.  See the user documentation for details on what
- *	it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "entry" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -512,7 +500,7 @@ Tk_EntryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
     int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];      /* Argument objects. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     register Entry *entryPtr;
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
@@ -525,23 +513,23 @@ Tk_EntryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
-            Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), (char *) NULL);
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the option table for this widget class.  If it has already
-     * been created, Tk will return the cached value.
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, Tk will return the cached value.
      */
 
     optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, entryOptSpec);
 
     /*
-     * Initialize the fields of the structure that won't be initialized
-     * by ConfigureEntry, or that ConfigureEntry requires to be
-     * initialized already (e.g. resource pointers).  Only the non-NULL/0
-     * data must be initialized as memset covers the rest.
+     * Initialize the fields of the structure that won't be initialized by
+     * ConfigureEntry, or that ConfigureEntry requires to be initialized
+     * already (e.g. resource pointers). Only the non-NULL/0 data must be
+     * initialized as memset covers the rest.
      */
 
     entryPtr			= (Entry *) ckalloc(sizeof(Entry));
@@ -605,9 +593,9 @@ Tk_EntryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * EntryWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a widget managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -634,9 +622,9 @@ EntryWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    /* 
-     * Parse the widget command by looking up the second token in
-     * the list of valid command names. 
+    /*
+     * Parse the widget command by looking up the second token in the list of
+     * valid command names.
      */
 
     result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], entryCmdNames,
@@ -647,398 +635,379 @@ EntryWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) entryPtr);
     switch ((enum entryCmd) cmdIndex) {
-        case COMMAND_BBOX: {
-	    int index, x, y, width, height;
-	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
+    case COMMAND_BBOX: {
+	int index, x, y, width, height;
+	char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
 
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                    &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
-	    }
-	    if ((index == entryPtr->numChars) && (index > 0)) {
-	        index--;
-	    }
-	    Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, index, &x, &y, 
-                    &width, &height);
-	    sprintf(buf, "%d %d %d %d", x + entryPtr->layoutX,
-		    y + entryPtr->layoutY, width, height);
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-	    break;
-	} 
-	
-        case COMMAND_CGET: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    
-	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
-		    entryPtr->optionTable, objv[2], entryPtr->tkwin);
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if ((index == entryPtr->numChars) && (index > 0)) {
+	    index--;
+	}
+	Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, index, &x, &y, &width, &height);
+	sprintf(buf, "%d %d %d %d", x + entryPtr->layoutX,
+		y + entryPtr->layoutY, width, height);
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case COMMAND_CGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
+		entryPtr->optionTable, objv[2], entryPtr->tkwin);
+	if (objPtr == NULL) {
+	    goto error;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+
+    case COMMAND_CONFIGURE:
+	if (objc <= 3) {
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
+		    entryPtr->optionTable,
+		    (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
+		    entryPtr->tkwin);
 	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		 goto error;
+		goto error;
 	    } else {
 		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0);
 	}
+	break;
 
-        case COMMAND_CONFIGURE: {
-	    if (objc <= 3) {
-		objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
-			entryPtr->optionTable,
-			(objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-			entryPtr->tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    goto error;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		}
-	    } else {
-		result = ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0);
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case COMMAND_DELETE: {
+	int first, last;
+
+	if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "firstIndex ?lastIndex?");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&first) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    last = first + 1;
+	} else if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+		&last) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
 	}
+	if ((last >= first) && (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL)) {
+	    DeleteChars(entryPtr, first, last - first);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-        case COMMAND_DELETE: {
-	    int first, last;
+    case COMMAND_GET:
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, (char *) NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), entryPtr->string, -1);
+	break;
 
-	    if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "firstIndex ?lastIndex?");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                    &first) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-	        last = first + 1;
-	    } else {
-	        if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), 
-                        &last) != TCL_OK) {
-		    goto error;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if ((last >= first) && (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL)) {
-	        DeleteChars(entryPtr, first, last - first);
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case COMMAND_ICURSOR:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pos");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&entryPtr->insertPos) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
 	}
+	EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
+	break;
 
-        case COMMAND_GET: {
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, (char *) NULL);
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), entryPtr->string, -1);
-	    break;
+    case COMMAND_INDEX: {
+	int index;
+
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "string");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
 	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
+	break;
+    }
 
-        case COMMAND_ICURSOR: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pos");
+    case COMMAND_INSERT: {
+	int index;
+
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index text");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) {
+	    InsertChars(entryPtr, index, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case COMMAND_SCAN: {
+	int x;
+	char *minorCmd;
+
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "mark|dragto x");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	minorCmd = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	if (minorCmd[0] == 'm'
+		&& (strncmp(minorCmd, "mark", strlen(minorCmd)) == 0)) {
+	    entryPtr->scanMarkX = x;
+	    entryPtr->scanMarkIndex = entryPtr->leftIndex;
+	} else if ((minorCmd[0] == 'd')
+		&& (strncmp(minorCmd, "dragto", strlen(minorCmd)) == 0)) {
+	    EntryScanTo(entryPtr, x);
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad scan option \"",
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "\": must be mark or dragto",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case COMMAND_SELECTION: {
+	int index, index2;
+
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?index?");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Parse the selection sub-command, using the command table
+	 * "selCmdNames" defined above.
+	 */
+
+	result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], selCmdNames,
+		"selection option", 0, &selIndex);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Disabled entries don't allow the selection to be modified, but
+	 * 'selection present' must return a boolean.
+	 */
+
+	if ((entryPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED)
+		&& (selIndex != SELECTION_PRESENT)) {
+	    goto done;
+	}
+
+	switch (selIndex) {
+	case SELECTION_ADJUST:
+	    if (objc != 4) {
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-                    &entryPtr->insertPos) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
+		goto error;
 	    }
-	    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
+	    if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
+		int half1, half2;
+
+		half1 = (entryPtr->selectFirst + entryPtr->selectLast)/2;
+		half2 = (entryPtr->selectFirst + entryPtr->selectLast + 1)/2;
+		if (index < half1) {
+		    entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectLast;
+		} else if (index > half2) {
+		    entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectFirst;
+		} else {
+		    /*
+		     * We're at about the halfway point in the selection; just
+		     * keep the existing anchor.
+		     */
+		}
+	    }
+	    EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
 	    break;
-	}
-	
-        case COMMAND_INDEX: {
-	    int index;
 
+	case SELECTION_CLEAR:
 	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "string");
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, (char *) NULL);
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                    &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
+	    if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
+		entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
+		entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
+		EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
 	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
-	    break;
-	}
-
-        case COMMAND_INSERT: {
-	    int index;
+	    goto done;
 
+	case SELECTION_FROM:
 	    if (objc != 4) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index text");
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                    &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) {
-	        InsertChars(entryPtr, index, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
+		goto error;
 	    }
+	    entryPtr->selectAnchor = index;
 	    break;
-	}
 
-        case COMMAND_SCAN: {
-	    int x;
-	    char *minorCmd;
+	case SELECTION_PRESENT:
+	    if (objc != 3) {
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, (char *) NULL);
+		goto error;
+	    }
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+		    Tcl_NewBooleanObj((entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0)));
+	    goto done;
 
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "mark|dragto x");
+	case SELECTION_RANGE:
+	    if (objc != 5) {
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "start end");
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+		    &index) != TCL_OK) {
+		goto error;
 	    }
-
-	    minorCmd = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-	    if (minorCmd[0] == 'm' 
-                    && (strncmp(minorCmd, "mark", strlen(minorCmd)) == 0)) {
-	        entryPtr->scanMarkX = x;
-		entryPtr->scanMarkIndex = entryPtr->leftIndex;
-	    } else if ((minorCmd[0] == 'd')
-		&& (strncmp(minorCmd, "dragto", strlen(minorCmd)) == 0)) {
-	        EntryScanTo(entryPtr, x);
-	    } else {
-	        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad scan option \"", 
-                        Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "\": must be mark or dragto", 
-                        (char *) NULL);
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]),
+		    &index2) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
+	    if (index >= index2) {
+		entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
+		entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
+	    } else {
+		entryPtr->selectFirst = index;
+		entryPtr->selectLast = index2;
+	    }
+	    if (!(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)
+		    && (entryPtr->exportSelection)) {
+		Tk_OwnSelection(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY,
+			EntryLostSelection, (ClientData) entryPtr);
+		entryPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
+	    }
+	    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
 	    break;
-	}
-	    
-	case COMMAND_SELECTION: {
-	    int index, index2;
 
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?index?");
+	case SELECTION_TO:
+	    if (objc != 4) {
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    
-	    /* 
-	     * Parse the selection sub-command, using the command
-	     * table "selCmdNames" defined above.
-	     */
-	    
-	    result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], selCmdNames,
-		    "selection option", 0, &selIndex);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
+	    EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
+	    break;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-	    /*
-	     * Disabled entries don't allow the selection to be modified,
-	     * but 'selection present' must return a boolean.
-	     */
-
-	    if ((entryPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED)
-		    && (selIndex != SELECTION_PRESENT)) {
-		goto done;
-	    }
-
-	    switch (selIndex) {
-	        case SELECTION_ADJUST: {
-		    if (objc != 4) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
-		        int half1, half2;
-		
-			half1 = (entryPtr->selectFirst 
-			        + entryPtr->selectLast)/2;
-			half2 = (entryPtr->selectFirst 
-				+ entryPtr->selectLast + 1)/2;
-			if (index < half1) {
-			    entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectLast;
-			} else if (index > half2) {
-			    entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectFirst;
-			} else {
-			  /*
-			   * We're at about the halfway point in the 
-			   * selection; just keep the existing anchor.
-			   */
-			}
-		    }
-		    EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
-		    break;
-		}
-
-	        case SELECTION_CLEAR: {
-		    if (objc != 3) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, (char *) NULL);
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
-		        entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
-			entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
-			EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-		    }
-		    goto done;
-		}
-
-	        case SELECTION_FROM: {
-		    if (objc != 4) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    entryPtr->selectAnchor = index;
-		    break;
-		}
+    case COMMAND_VALIDATE: {
+	int code;
 
-	        case SELECTION_PRESENT: {
-		    if (objc != 3) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, (char *) NULL);
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
-			    Tcl_NewBooleanObj((entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0)));
-		    goto done;
-		}
-
-	        case SELECTION_RANGE: {
-		    if (objc != 5) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "start end");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[4]),& index2) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (index >= index2) {
-		        entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
-			entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
-		    } else {
-		        entryPtr->selectFirst = index;
-			entryPtr->selectLast = index2;
-		    }
-		    if (!(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)
-			    && (entryPtr->exportSelection)) {
-		        Tk_OwnSelection(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, 
-			        EntryLostSelection, (ClientData) entryPtr);
-			entryPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
-		    }
-		    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-		    break;
-		}
-		
-	        case SELECTION_TO: {
-		    if (objc != 4) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
-		    break;
-		}
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, (char *) NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	selIndex = entryPtr->validate;
+	entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_ALL;
+	code = EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, (char *) NULL, entryPtr->string,
+		-1, VALIDATE_FORCED);
+	if (entryPtr->validate != VALIDATE_NONE) {
+	    entryPtr->validate = selIndex;
 	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj((code == TCL_OK)));
+	break;
+    }
 
-        case COMMAND_VALIDATE: {
-	    int code;
+    case COMMAND_XVIEW: {
+	int index;
+
+	if (objc == 2) {
+	    double first, last;
+	    char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2];
 
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, (char *) NULL);
+	    EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, &first, &last);
+	    sprintf(buf, "%g %g", first, last);
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	    goto done;
+	} else if (objc == 3) {
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		    &index) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    selIndex = entryPtr->validate;
-	    entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_ALL;
-	    code = EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, (char *) NULL,
-				       entryPtr->string, -1, VALIDATE_FORCED);
-	    if (entryPtr->validate != VALIDATE_NONE) {
-		entryPtr->validate = selIndex;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj((code == TCL_OK)));
-	    break;
-	}
+	} else {
+	    double fraction;
+	    int count;
 
-        case COMMAND_XVIEW: {
-	    int index;
-
-	    if (objc == 2) {
-	        double first, last;
-		char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2];
-	    
-		EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, &first, &last);
-		sprintf(buf, "%g %g", first, last);
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-		goto done;
-	    } else if (objc == 3) {
-	        if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                        &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		    goto error;
-		}
-	    } else {
-	        double fraction;
-		int count;
-
-		index = entryPtr->leftIndex;
-		switch (Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction, 
-                        &count)) {
-		    case TK_SCROLL_ERROR: {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO: {
-		        index = (int) ((fraction * entryPtr->numChars) + 0.5);
-			break;
-		    }
-		    case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: {
-		        int charsPerPage;
-		    
-			charsPerPage = ((Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin)
-    			        - 2 * entryPtr->inset) 
-                                / entryPtr->avgWidth) - 2;
-			if (charsPerPage < 1) {
-			    charsPerPage = 1;
-			}
-			index += count * charsPerPage;
-			break;
-		    }
-		    case TK_SCROLL_UNITS: {
-		        index += count;
-			break;
-		    }
+	    index = entryPtr->leftIndex;
+	    switch (Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction,
+		    &count)) {
+	    case TK_SCROLL_ERROR:
+		goto error;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
+		index = (int) ((fraction * entryPtr->numChars) + 0.5);
+		break;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: {
+		int charsPerPage;
+
+		charsPerPage = ((Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin)
+			- 2 * entryPtr->inset) / entryPtr->avgWidth) - 2;
+		if (charsPerPage < 1) {
+		    charsPerPage = 1;
 		}
+		index += count * charsPerPage;
+		break;
 	    }
-	    if (index >= entryPtr->numChars) {
-	        index = entryPtr->numChars - 1;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
+		index += count;
+		break;
 	    }
-	    if (index < 0) {
-	        index = 0;
-	    }
-	    entryPtr->leftIndex = index;
-	    entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
-	    EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
-	    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-	    break;
 	}
+	if (index >= entryPtr->numChars) {
+	    index = entryPtr->numChars - 1;
+	}
+	if (index < 0) {
+	    index = 0;
+	}
+	entryPtr->leftIndex = index;
+	entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
+	EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
+	EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
+	break;
+    }
     }
 
-    done:
+  done:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) entryPtr);
     return result;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) entryPtr);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -1048,9 +1017,9 @@ EntryWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * DestroyEntry --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of an entry at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).
+ *	This function is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release to clean
+ *	up the internal structure of an entry at a safe time (when no-one is
+ *	using it anymore).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1068,9 +1037,8 @@ DestroyEntry(memPtr)
     Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) memPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then
-     * let Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related
-     * stuff.
+     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling, then let
+     * Tk_FreeOptions handle all the standard option-related stuff.
      */
 
     ckfree((char *)entryPtr->string);
@@ -1115,18 +1083,17 @@ DestroyEntry(memPtr)
  *
  * ConfigureEntry --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an argv/argc list, plus
- *	the Tk option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure)
- *	an entry widget.
+ *	This function is called to process an argv/argc list, plus the Tk
+ *	option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure) an entry
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width,
- *	etc. get set for entryPtr;  old resources get freed,
- *	if there were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors, border width, etc. get set
+ *	for entryPtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1143,15 +1110,16 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     Tk_SavedOptions savedOptions;
     Tk_3DBorder border;
     Tcl_Obj *errorResult = NULL;
-    Spinbox *sbPtr = (Spinbox *) entryPtr;	/* Only used when this widget
-						 * is of type TK_SPINBOX */
-    char *oldValues = NULL;		/* lint initialization */
-    char *oldFormat = NULL;		/* lint initialization */
+    Spinbox *sbPtr = (Spinbox *) entryPtr;
+				/* Only used when this widget is of type
+				 * TK_SPINBOX */
+    char *oldValues = NULL;	/* lint initialization */
+    char *oldFormat = NULL;	/* lint initialization */
     int error;
-    int oldExport = 0;			/* lint initialization */
-    int valuesChanged = 0;		/* lint initialization */
-    double oldFrom = 0.0;		/* lint initialization */
-    double oldTo = 0.0;			/* lint initialization */
+    int oldExport = 0;		/* lint initialization */
+    int valuesChanged = 0;	/* lint initialization */
+    double oldFrom = 0.0;	/* lint initialization */
+    double oldTo = 0.0;		/* lint initialization */
 
     /*
      * Eliminate any existing trace on a variable monitored by the entry.
@@ -1159,16 +1127,17 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 
     if ((entryPtr->textVarName != NULL)
 	    && (entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_VAR_TRACED)) {
-	Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, entryPtr->textVarName, 
+	Tcl_UntraceVar(interp, entryPtr->textVarName,
 		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY|TCL_TRACE_WRITES|TCL_TRACE_UNSETS,
 		EntryTextVarProc, (ClientData) entryPtr);
 	entryPtr->flags &= ~ENTRY_VAR_TRACED;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Store old values that we need to effect certain behavior if
-     * they change value
+     * Store old values that we need to effect certain behavior if they change
+     * value.
      */
+
     oldExport		= entryPtr->exportSelection;
     if (entryPtr->type == TK_SPINBOX) {
 	oldValues	= sbPtr->valueStr;
@@ -1235,6 +1204,7 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 		 * calculate the minimum space we'll need for the values as
 		 * strings.
 		 */
+
 		int min, max;
 		size_t formatLen, formatSpace = TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE;
 		char fbuf[4], *fmt = sbPtr->reqFormat;
@@ -1261,16 +1231,19 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 		    formatSpace = TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE;
 		}
 		sbPtr->formatBuf = ckrealloc(sbPtr->formatBuf, formatSpace);
+
 		/*
-		 * We perturb the value of oldFrom to allow us to go into
-		 * the branch below that will reformat the displayed value.
+		 * We perturb the value of oldFrom to allow us to go into the
+		 * branch below that will reformat the displayed value.
 		 */
+
 		oldFrom = sbPtr->fromValue - 1;
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * See if we have to rearrange our listObj data
+	     * See if we have to rearrange our listObj data.
 	     */
+
 	    if (oldValues != sbPtr->valueStr) {
 		if (sbPtr->listObj != NULL) {
 		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(sbPtr->listObj);
@@ -1296,13 +1269,14 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Restart the cursor timing sequence in case the on-time or 
-	 * off-time just changed.  Set validate temporarily to none,
-	 * so the configure doesn't cause it to be triggered.
+	 * Restart the cursor timing sequence in case the on-time or off-time
+	 * just changed. Set validate temporarily to none, so the configure
+	 * doesn't cause it to be triggered.
 	 */
 
 	if (entryPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) {
 	    int validate = entryPtr->validate;
+
 	    entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_NONE;
 	    EntryFocusProc(entryPtr, 1);
 	    entryPtr->validate = validate;
@@ -1313,8 +1287,8 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	 */
 
 	if (entryPtr->exportSelection && (!oldExport)
-	        && (entryPtr->selectFirst != -1)
-	        && !(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)) {
+		&& (entryPtr->selectFirst != -1)
+		&& !(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)) {
 	    Tk_OwnSelection(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, EntryLostSelection,
 		    (ClientData) entryPtr);
 	    entryPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
@@ -1326,12 +1300,12 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	 */
 
 	Tk_SetInternalBorder(entryPtr->tkwin,
-	        entryPtr->borderWidth + entryPtr->highlightWidth);
+		entryPtr->borderWidth + entryPtr->highlightWidth);
 	if (entryPtr->highlightWidth <= 0) {
 	    entryPtr->highlightWidth = 0;
 	}
-	entryPtr->inset = entryPtr->highlightWidth 
-	        + entryPtr->borderWidth + XPAD;
+	entryPtr->inset = entryPtr->highlightWidth
+		+ entryPtr->borderWidth + XPAD;
 	break;
     }
     if (!error) {
@@ -1361,9 +1335,10 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
 
 	    /*
-	     * No check for error return, because there shouldn't be one
-	     * given the check for valid list above
+	     * No check for error return, because there shouldn't be one given
+	     * the check for valid list above.
 	     */
+
 	    Tcl_ListObjIndex(interp, sbPtr->listObj, 0, &objPtr);
 	    EntryValueChanged(entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objPtr));
 	} else if ((sbPtr->valueStr == NULL)
@@ -1372,10 +1347,11 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 			|| !DOUBLES_EQ(sbPtr->toValue, oldTo))) {
 	    /*
 	     * If the valueStr is empty and -from && -to are specified, check
-	     * to see if the current string is within the range.  If not,
-	     * it will be constrained to the nearest edge.  If the current
-	     * string isn't a double value, we set it to -from.
+	     * to see if the current string is within the range. If not, it
+	     * will be constrained to the nearest edge. If the current string
+	     * isn't a double value, we set it to -from.
 	     */
+
 	    int code;
 	    double dvalue;
 
@@ -1395,8 +1371,8 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Set up a trace on the variable's value after we've possibly
-     * constrained the value according to new -from/-to values.
+     * Set up a trace on the variable's value after we've possibly constrained
+     * the value according to new -from/-to values.
      */
 
     if ((entryPtr->textVarName != NULL)
@@ -1409,11 +1385,11 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 
     EntryWorldChanged((ClientData) entryPtr);
     if (error) {
-        Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, errorResult);
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(errorResult);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     } else {
-        return TCL_OK;
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
 }
 
@@ -1422,19 +1398,19 @@ ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * EntryWorldChanged --
  *
- *      This procedure is called when the world has changed in some
- *      way and the widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts
- *	and determine its new geometry.
+ *	This function is called when the world has changed in some way and the
+ *	widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts and determine its
+ *	new geometry.
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      Entry will be relayed out and redisplayed.
+ *	Entry will be relayed out and redisplayed.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 static void
 EntryWorldChanged(instanceData)
     ClientData instanceData;	/* Information about widget. */
@@ -1463,27 +1439,27 @@ EntryWorldChanged(instanceData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Default background and foreground are from the normal state.
-     * In a disabled state, both of those may be overridden; in the readonly
-     * state, the background may be overridden.
+     * Default background and foreground are from the normal state. In a
+     * disabled state, both of those may be overridden; in the readonly state,
+     * the background may be overridden.
      */
 
     border	= entryPtr->normalBorder;
     colorPtr	= entryPtr->fgColorPtr;
     switch (entryPtr->state) {
-	case STATE_DISABLED:
-	    if (entryPtr->disabledBorder != NULL) {
-		border = entryPtr->disabledBorder;
-	    }
-	    if (entryPtr->dfgColorPtr != NULL) {
-		colorPtr = entryPtr->dfgColorPtr;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case STATE_READONLY:
-	    if (entryPtr->readonlyBorder != NULL) {
-		border = entryPtr->readonlyBorder;
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case STATE_DISABLED:
+	if (entryPtr->disabledBorder != NULL) {
+	    border = entryPtr->disabledBorder;
+	}
+	if (entryPtr->dfgColorPtr != NULL) {
+	    colorPtr = entryPtr->dfgColorPtr;
+	}
+	break;
+    case STATE_READONLY:
+	if (entryPtr->readonlyBorder != NULL) {
+	    border = entryPtr->readonlyBorder;
+	}
+	break;
     }
 
     Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(entryPtr->tkwin, border);
@@ -1507,8 +1483,7 @@ EntryWorldChanged(instanceData)
     entryPtr->selTextGC = gc;
 
     /*
-     * Recompute the window's geometry and arrange for it to be
-     * redisplayed.
+     * Recompute the window's geometry and arrange for it to be redisplayed.
      */
 
     EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
@@ -1516,18 +1491,17 @@ EntryWorldChanged(instanceData)
     EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
 }
 
-#ifndef MAC_OSX_TK 
+#ifndef MAC_OSX_TK
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkpDrawEntryBorderAndFocus --
  *
- *	This procedure redraws the border of an entry widget.
- *      It overrides the generic border drawing code if the 
- *      entry widget parameters are such that the native widget
- *      drawing is a good fit.
- *      This version just returns o, so platforms that don't
- *      do special native drawing don't have to implement it.
+ *	This function redraws the border of an entry widget. It overrides the
+ *	generic border drawing code if the entry widget parameters are such
+ *	that the native widget drawing is a good fit. This version just
+ *	returns 0, so platforms that don't do special native drawing don't
+ *	have to implement it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	1 if it has drawn the border, 0 if not.
@@ -1546,19 +1520,17 @@ TkpDrawEntryBorderAndFocus(entryPtr, pixmap, isSpinbox)
 {
     return 0;
 }
-
-
+
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkpDrawSpinboxButtons --
  *
- *	This procedure redraws the buttons of an spinbox widget.
- *      It overrides the generic button drawing code if the 
- *      spinbox widget parameters are such that the native widget
- *      drawing is a good fit.
- *      This version just returns 0, so platforms that don't
- *      do special native drawing don't have to implement it.
+ *	This function redraws the buttons of an spinbox widget. It overrides
+ *	the generic button drawing code if the spinbox widget parameters are
+ *	such that the native widget drawing is a good fit. This version just
+ *	returns 0, so platforms that don't do special native drawing don't
+ *	have to implement it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	1 if it has drawn the border, 0 if not.
@@ -1571,19 +1543,19 @@ TkpDrawEntryBorderAndFocus(entryPtr, pixmap, isSpinbox)
 
 int
 TkpDrawSpinboxButtons(sbPtr, pixmap)
-    Spinbox *sbPtr; 
+    Spinbox *sbPtr;
     Pixmap pixmap;
 {
     return 0;
 }
 #endif /* Not MAC_OSX_TK */
-
+
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * DisplayEntry --
  *
- *	This procedure redraws the contents of an entry window.
+ *	This function redraws the contents of an entry window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1620,9 +1592,9 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
     if (entryPtr->flags & UPDATE_SCROLLBAR) {
 	entryPtr->flags &= ~UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
 
-        /*
-	 * Preserve/Release because updating the scrollbar can have
-	 * the side-effect of destroying or unmapping the entry widget.
+	/*
+	 * Preserve/Release because updating the scrollbar can have the
+	 * side-effect of destroying or unmapping the entry widget.
 	 */
 
 	Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) entryPtr);
@@ -1636,26 +1608,26 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * In order to avoid screen flashes, this procedure redraws the
-     * textual area of the entry into off-screen memory, then copies
-     * it back on-screen in a single operation.  This means there's
-     * no point in time where the on-screen image has been cleared.
+     * In order to avoid screen flashes, this function redraws the textual
+     * area of the entry into off-screen memory, then copies it back on-screen
+     * in a single operation. This means there's no point in time where the
+     * on-screen image has been cleared.
      */
 
     pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(entryPtr->display, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
 	    Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), Tk_Depth(tkwin));
 
     /*
-     * Compute x-coordinate of the pixel just after last visible
-     * one, plus vertical position of baseline of text.
+     * Compute x-coordinate of the pixel just after last visible one, plus
+     * vertical position of baseline of text.
      */
 
     xBound = Tk_Width(tkwin) - entryPtr->inset - entryPtr->xWidth;
     baseY = (Tk_Height(tkwin) + fm.ascent - fm.descent) / 2;
 
     /*
-     * On Windows and Mac, we need to hide the selection whenever we
-     * don't have the focus.
+     * On Windows and Mac, we need to hide the selection whenever we don't
+     * have the focus.
      */
 
 #ifdef ALWAYS_SHOW_SELECTION
@@ -1665,9 +1637,9 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
 #endif
 
     /*
-     * Draw the background in three layers.  From bottom to top the
-     * layers are:  normal background, selection background, and
-     * insertion cursor background.
+     * Draw the background in three layers. From bottom to top the layers are:
+     * normal background, selection background, and insertion cursor
+     * background.
      */
 
     if ((entryPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED) &&
@@ -1701,16 +1673,16 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
 		    (selEndX - selStartX) + 2*entryPtr->selBorderWidth,
 		    (fm.ascent + fm.descent) + 2*entryPtr->selBorderWidth,
 		    entryPtr->selBorderWidth, TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
-	} 
+	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Draw a special background for the insertion cursor, overriding
-     * even the selection background.  As a special hack to keep the
-     * cursor visible when the insertion cursor color is the same as
-     * the color for selected text (e.g., on mono displays), write
-     * background in the cursor area (instead of nothing) when the
-     * cursor isn't on.  Otherwise the selection would hide the cursor.
+     * Draw a special background for the insertion cursor, overriding even the
+     * selection background. As a special hack to keep the cursor visible when
+     * the insertion cursor color is the same as the color for selected text
+     * (e.g., on mono displays), write background in the cursor area (instead
+     * of nothing) when the cursor isn't on. Otherwise the selection would
+     * hide the cursor.
      */
 
     if ((entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) && (entryPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS)) {
@@ -1720,25 +1692,22 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
 	cursorX -= (entryPtr->insertWidth)/2;
 	Tk_SetCaretPos(entryPtr->tkwin, cursorX, baseY - fm.ascent,
 		fm.ascent + fm.descent);
-	if (entryPtr->insertPos >= entryPtr->leftIndex) {
-	    if (cursorX < xBound) {
-		if (entryPtr->flags & CURSOR_ON) {
-		    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, entryPtr->insertBorder,
-			    cursorX, baseY - fm.ascent, entryPtr->insertWidth,
-			    fm.ascent + fm.descent,
-			    entryPtr->insertBorderWidth,
-			    TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
-		} else if (entryPtr->insertBorder == entryPtr->selBorder) {
-		    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border,
-			    cursorX, baseY - fm.ascent, entryPtr->insertWidth,
-			    fm.ascent + fm.descent, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
-		}
+	if (entryPtr->insertPos >= entryPtr->leftIndex && cursorX < xBound) {
+	    if (entryPtr->flags & CURSOR_ON) {
+		Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, entryPtr->insertBorder,
+			cursorX, baseY - fm.ascent, entryPtr->insertWidth,
+			fm.ascent + fm.descent, entryPtr->insertBorderWidth,
+			TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+	    } else if (entryPtr->insertBorder == entryPtr->selBorder) {
+		Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, cursorX,
+			baseY - fm.ascent, entryPtr->insertWidth,
+			fm.ascent + fm.descent, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
 	    }
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Draw the text in two pieces:  first the unselected portion, then the
+     * Draw the text in two pieces: first the unselected portion, then the
      * selected portion on top of it.
      */
 
@@ -1768,17 +1737,18 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
 	/*
 	 * Draw the spin button controls.
 	 */
-        if (TkpDrawSpinboxButtons(sbPtr, pixmap) == 0) {
-            xWidth = entryPtr->xWidth;
-            pad    = XPAD + 1;
-            inset  = entryPtr->inset - XPAD;
-            startx = Tk_Width(tkwin) - (xWidth + inset);
-            height = (Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*inset)/2;
+
+	if (TkpDrawSpinboxButtons(sbPtr, pixmap) == 0) {
+	    xWidth = entryPtr->xWidth;
+	    pad = XPAD + 1;
+	    inset = entryPtr->inset - XPAD;
+	    startx = Tk_Width(tkwin) - (xWidth + inset);
+	    height = (Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*inset)/2;
 #if 0
-            Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, sbPtr->buttonBorder,
-                    startx, inset, xWidth, height, 1, sbPtr->buRelief);
-            Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, sbPtr->buttonBorder,
-                    startx, inset+height, xWidth, height, 1, sbPtr->bdRelief);
+	    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, sbPtr->buttonBorder,
+		    startx, inset, xWidth, height, 1, sbPtr->buRelief);
+	    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, sbPtr->buttonBorder,
+		    startx, inset+height, xWidth, height, 1, sbPtr->bdRelief);
 #else
 	    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, sbPtr->buttonBorder,
 		    startx, inset, xWidth, height, 1,
@@ -1789,89 +1759,96 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
 		    (sbPtr->selElement == SEL_BUTTONDOWN) ?
 		    TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN : TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
 #endif
-    
-            xWidth -= 2*pad;
-            /*
-             * Only draw the triangles if we have enough display space
-             */
-            if ((xWidth > 1)) {
-                XPoint points[3];
-                int starty, space, offset;
-
-                space = height - 2*pad;
-                /*
-                 * Ensure width of triangle is odd to guarantee a sharp tip
-                 */
-                if (!(xWidth % 2)) {
-                    xWidth++;
-                }
-                tHeight = (xWidth + 1) / 2;
-                if (tHeight > space) {
-                    tHeight = space;
-                }
-                space   = (space - tHeight) / 2;
-                startx += pad;
-                starty  = inset + height - pad - space;
-                offset  = (sbPtr->selElement == SEL_BUTTONUP);
-                /*
-                 * The points are slightly different for the up and down arrows
-                 * because (for *.x), we need to account for a bug in the way
-                 * XFillPolygon draws triangles, and we want to shift
-                 * the arrows differently when allowing for depressed behavior.
-                 */
-                points[0].x = startx + offset;
-                points[0].y = starty + (offset ? 0 : -1);
-                points[1].x = startx + xWidth/2 + offset;
-                points[1].y = starty - tHeight + (offset ? 0 : -1);
-                points[2].x = startx + xWidth + offset;
-                points[2].y = points[0].y;
-                XFillPolygon(entryPtr->display, pixmap, entryPtr->textGC,
-                        points, 3, Convex, CoordModeOrigin);
-
-                starty = inset + height + pad + space;
-                offset = (sbPtr->selElement == SEL_BUTTONDOWN);
-                points[0].x = startx + 1 + offset;
-                points[0].y = starty + (offset ? 1 : 0);
-                points[1].x = startx + xWidth/2 + offset;
-                points[1].y = starty + tHeight + (offset ? 0 : -1);
-                points[2].x = startx - 1 + xWidth + offset;
-                points[2].y = points[0].y;
-                XFillPolygon(entryPtr->display, pixmap, entryPtr->textGC,
-                        points, 3, Convex, CoordModeOrigin);
-            }
-        }
+
+	    xWidth -= 2*pad;
+
+	    /*
+	     * Only draw the triangles if we have enough display space
+	     */
+
+	    if ((xWidth > 1)) {
+		XPoint points[3];
+		int starty, space, offset;
+
+		space = height - 2*pad;
+
+		/*
+		 * Ensure width of triangle is odd to guarantee a sharp tip
+		 */
+
+		if (!(xWidth % 2)) {
+		    xWidth++;
+		}
+		tHeight = (xWidth + 1) / 2;
+		if (tHeight > space) {
+		    tHeight = space;
+		}
+		space	= (space - tHeight) / 2;
+		startx += pad;
+		starty	= inset + height - pad - space;
+		offset	= (sbPtr->selElement == SEL_BUTTONUP);
+
+		/*
+		 * The points are slightly different for the up and down
+		 * arrows because (for *.x), we need to account for a bug in
+		 * the way XFillPolygon draws triangles, and we want to shift
+		 * the arrows differently when allowing for depressed
+		 * behavior.
+		 */
+
+		points[0].x = startx + offset;
+		points[0].y = starty + (offset ? 0 : -1);
+		points[1].x = startx + xWidth/2 + offset;
+		points[1].y = starty - tHeight + (offset ? 0 : -1);
+		points[2].x = startx + xWidth + offset;
+		points[2].y = points[0].y;
+		XFillPolygon(entryPtr->display, pixmap, entryPtr->textGC,
+			points, 3, Convex, CoordModeOrigin);
+
+		starty = inset + height + pad + space;
+		offset = (sbPtr->selElement == SEL_BUTTONDOWN);
+		points[0].x = startx + 1 + offset;
+		points[0].y = starty + (offset ? 1 : 0);
+		points[1].x = startx + xWidth/2 + offset;
+		points[1].y = starty + tHeight + (offset ? 0 : -1);
+		points[2].x = startx - 1 + xWidth + offset;
+		points[2].y = points[0].y;
+		XFillPolygon(entryPtr->display, pixmap, entryPtr->textGC,
+			points, 3, Convex, CoordModeOrigin);
+	    }
+	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Draw the border and focus highlight last, so they will overwrite
-     * any text that extends past the viewable part of the window.
+     * Draw the border and focus highlight last, so they will overwrite any
+     * text that extends past the viewable part of the window.
      */
 
-    if (!TkpDrawEntryBorderAndFocus(entryPtr, pixmap, 
-            (entryPtr->type == TK_SPINBOX))) {
-        xBound = entryPtr->highlightWidth;
-        if (entryPtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) {
+    if (!TkpDrawEntryBorderAndFocus(entryPtr, pixmap,
+	    (entryPtr->type == TK_SPINBOX))) {
+	xBound = entryPtr->highlightWidth;
+	if (entryPtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) {
 	    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, xBound, xBound,
-                    Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * xBound,
+		    Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2 * xBound,
 		    Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2 * xBound,
 		    entryPtr->borderWidth, entryPtr->relief);
-        }
-        if (xBound > 0) {
+	}
+	if (xBound > 0) {
 	    GC fgGC, bgGC;
 
 	    bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(entryPtr->highlightBgColorPtr, pixmap);
 	    if (entryPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) {
-	        fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(entryPtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap);
-	        TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, xBound, pixmap);
+		fgGC = Tk_GCForColor(entryPtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap);
+		TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, fgGC, bgGC, xBound, pixmap);
 	    } else {
-	        TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, bgGC, bgGC, xBound, pixmap);
+		TkpDrawHighlightBorder(tkwin, bgGC, bgGC, xBound, pixmap);
 	    }
-        }
+	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Everything's been redisplayed;  now copy the pixmap onto the screen
-     * and free up the pixmap.
+     * Everything's been redisplayed; now copy the pixmap onto the screen and
+     * free up the pixmap.
      */
 
     XCopyArea(entryPtr->display, pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin), entryPtr->textGC,
@@ -1886,17 +1863,17 @@ DisplayEntry(clientData)
  *
  * EntryComputeGeometry --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to recompute information about where
- *	in its window an entry's string will be displayed.  It also
- *	computes the requested size for the window.
+ *	This function is invoked to recompute information about where in its
+ *	window an entry's string will be displayed. It also computes the
+ *	requested size for the window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The leftX and tabOrigin fields are recomputed for entryPtr,
- *	and leftIndex may be adjusted.  Tk_GeometryRequest is called
- *	to register the desired dimensions for the window.
+ *	The leftX and tabOrigin fields are recomputed for entryPtr, and
+ *	leftIndex may be adjusted. Tk_GeometryRequest is called to register
+ *	the desired dimensions for the window.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1917,8 +1894,8 @@ EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If we're displaying a special character instead of the value of
-     * the entry, recompute the displayString.
+     * If we're displaying a special character instead of the value of the
+     * entry, recompute the displayString.
      */
 
     if (entryPtr->showChar != NULL) {
@@ -1927,10 +1904,10 @@ EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr)
 	int size;
 
 	/*
-	 * Normalize the special character so we can safely duplicate it
-	 * in the display string.  If we didn't do this, then two malformed
-	 * characters might end up looking like one valid UTF character in
-	 * the resulting string.
+	 * Normalize the special character so we can safely duplicate it in
+	 * the display string. If we didn't do this, then two malformed
+	 * characters might end up looking like one valid UTF character in the
+	 * resulting string.
 	 */
 
 	Tcl_UtfToUniChar(entryPtr->showChar, &ch);
@@ -1954,21 +1931,21 @@ EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr)
     entryPtr->layoutY = (Tk_Height(entryPtr->tkwin) - height) / 2;
 
     /*
-     * Recompute where the leftmost character on the display will
-     * be drawn (entryPtr->leftX) and adjust leftIndex if necessary
-     * so that we don't let characters hang off the edge of the
-     * window unless the entire window is full.
+     * Recompute where the leftmost character on the display will be drawn
+     * (entryPtr->leftX) and adjust leftIndex if necessary so that we don't
+     * let characters hang off the edge of the window unless the entire window
+     * is full.
      */
 
     overflow = totalLength -
-	(Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin) - 2*entryPtr->inset - entryPtr->xWidth);
+	    (Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin) - 2*entryPtr->inset - entryPtr->xWidth);
     if (overflow <= 0) {
 	entryPtr->leftIndex = 0;
 	if (entryPtr->justify == TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT) {
 	    entryPtr->leftX = entryPtr->inset;
 	} else if (entryPtr->justify == TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT) {
 	    entryPtr->leftX = Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin) - entryPtr->inset
-		- entryPtr->xWidth - totalLength;
+		    - entryPtr->xWidth - totalLength;
 	} else {
 	    entryPtr->leftX = (Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin)
 		    - entryPtr->xWidth - totalLength)/2;
@@ -1976,10 +1953,10 @@ EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr)
 	entryPtr->layoutX = entryPtr->leftX;
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * The whole string can't fit in the window.  Compute the
-	 * maximum number of characters that may be off-screen to
-	 * the left without leaving empty space on the right of the
-	 * window, then don't let leftIndex be any greater than that.
+	 * The whole string can't fit in the window. Compute the maximum
+	 * number of characters that may be off-screen to the left without
+	 * leaving empty space on the right of the window, then don't let
+	 * leftIndex be any greater than that.
 	 */
 
 	maxOffScreen = Tk_PointToChar(entryPtr->textLayout, overflow, 0);
@@ -2028,8 +2005,8 @@ EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	New information gets added to entryPtr;  it will be redisplayed
- *	soon, but not necessarily immediately.
+ *	New information gets added to entryPtr; it will be redisplayed soon,
+ *	but not necessarily immediately.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -2037,8 +2014,8 @@ EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr)
 static void
 InsertChars(entryPtr, index, value)
     Entry *entryPtr;		/* Entry that is to get the new elements. */
-    int index;			/* Add the new elements before this
-				 * character index. */
+    int index;			/* Add the new elements before this character
+				 * index. */
     char *value;		/* New characters to add (NULL-terminated
 				 * string). */
 {
@@ -2060,9 +2037,9 @@ InsertChars(entryPtr, index, value)
     strcpy(new + byteIndex + byteCount, string + byteIndex);
 
     if ((entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_KEY ||
-	 entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_ALL) &&
-	EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, value, new, index,
-			    VALIDATE_INSERT) != TCL_OK) {
+	    entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_ALL) &&
+	    EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, value, new, index,
+		    VALIDATE_INSERT) != TCL_OK) {
 	ckfree(new);
 	return;
     }
@@ -2071,13 +2048,12 @@ InsertChars(entryPtr, index, value)
     entryPtr->string = new;
 
     /*
-     * The following construction is used because inserting improperly
-     * formed UTF-8 sequences between other improperly formed UTF-8
-     * sequences could result in actually forming valid UTF-8 sequences;
-     * the number of characters added may not be Tcl_NumUtfChars(string, -1),
-     * because of context.  The actual number of characters added is how
-     * many characters are in the string now minus the number that
-     * used to be there.
+     * The following construction is used because inserting improperly formed
+     * UTF-8 sequences between other improperly formed UTF-8 sequences could
+     * result in actually forming valid UTF-8 sequences; the number of
+     * characters added may not be Tcl_NumUtfChars(string, -1), because of
+     * context. The actual number of characters added is how many characters
+     * are in the string now minus the number that used to be there.
      */
 
     oldChars = entryPtr->numChars;
@@ -2091,11 +2067,11 @@ InsertChars(entryPtr, index, value)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Inserting characters invalidates all indexes into the string.
-     * Touch up the indexes so that they still refer to the same
-     * characters (at new positions).  When updating the selection
-     * end-points, don't include the new text in the selection unless
-     * it was completely surrounded by the selection.
+     * Inserting characters invalidates all indexes into the string. Touch up
+     * the indexes so that they still refer to the same characters (at new
+     * positions). When updating the selection end-points, don't include the
+     * new text in the selection unless it was completely surrounded by the
+     * selection.
      */
 
     if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= index) {
@@ -2104,8 +2080,7 @@ InsertChars(entryPtr, index, value)
     if (entryPtr->selectLast > index) {
 	entryPtr->selectLast += charsAdded;
     }
-    if ((entryPtr->selectAnchor > index)
-	    || (entryPtr->selectFirst >= index)) {
+    if ((entryPtr->selectAnchor > index) || (entryPtr->selectFirst >= index)) {
 	entryPtr->selectAnchor += charsAdded;
     }
     if (entryPtr->leftIndex > index) {
@@ -2153,7 +2128,7 @@ DeleteChars(entryPtr, index, count)
 
     string = entryPtr->string;
     byteIndex = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string, index) - string;
-    byteCount = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string + byteIndex, count) - (string + byteIndex);
+    byteCount = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string + byteIndex, count) - (string+byteIndex);
 
     newByteCount = entryPtr->numBytes + 1 - byteCount;
     new = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) newByteCount);
@@ -2165,9 +2140,9 @@ DeleteChars(entryPtr, index, count)
     todelete[byteCount] = '\0';
 
     if ((entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_KEY ||
-	 entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_ALL) &&
-	EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, todelete, new, index,
-			    VALIDATE_DELETE) != TCL_OK) {
+	    entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_ALL) &&
+	    EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, todelete, new, index,
+		    VALIDATE_DELETE) != TCL_OK) {
 	ckfree(new);
 	ckfree(todelete);
 	return;
@@ -2186,8 +2161,8 @@ DeleteChars(entryPtr, index, count)
 
     /*
      * Deleting characters results in the remaining characters being
-     * renumbered.  Update the various indexes into the string to reflect
-     * this change.
+     * renumbered. Update the various indexes into the string to reflect this
+     * change.
      */
 
     if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= index) {
@@ -2237,10 +2212,9 @@ DeleteChars(entryPtr, index, count)
  *
  * EntryValueChanged --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when characters are inserted into
- *	an entry or deleted from it.  It updates the entry's associated
- *	variable, if there is one, and does other bookkeeping such
- *	as arranging for redisplay.
+ *	This function is invoked when characters are inserted into an entry or
+ *	deleted from it. It updates the entry's associated variable, if there
+ *	is one, and does other bookkeeping such as arranging for redisplay.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2254,8 +2228,8 @@ DeleteChars(entryPtr, index, count)
 static void
 EntryValueChanged(entryPtr, newValue)
     Entry *entryPtr;		/* Entry whose value just changed. */
-    CONST char *newValue;	/* If this value is not NULL, we first
-				 * force the value of the entry to this */
+    CONST char *newValue;	/* If this value is not NULL, we first force
+				 * the value of the entry to this. */
 {
     if (newValue != NULL) {
 	EntrySetValue(entryPtr, newValue);
@@ -2271,10 +2245,10 @@ EntryValueChanged(entryPtr, newValue)
     if ((newValue != NULL) && (strcmp(newValue, entryPtr->string) != 0)) {
 	/*
 	 * The value of the variable is different than what we asked for.
-	 * This means that a trace on the variable modified it.  In this
-	 * case our trace procedure wasn't invoked since the modification
-	 * came while a trace was already active on the variable.  So,
-	 * update our value to reflect the variable's latest value.
+	 * This means that a trace on the variable modified it. In this case
+	 * our trace function wasn't invoked since the modification came while
+	 * a trace was already active on the variable. So, update our value to
+	 * reflect the variable's latest value.
 	 */
 
 	EntrySetValue(entryPtr, newValue);
@@ -2294,19 +2268,19 @@ EntryValueChanged(entryPtr, newValue)
  *
  * EntrySetValue --
  *
- *	Replace the contents of a text entry with a given value.  This
- *	procedure is invoked when updating the entry from the entry's
- *	associated variable.
+ *	Replace the contents of a text entry with a given value. This function
+ *	is invoked when updating the entry from the entry's associated
+ *	variable.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The string displayed in the entry will change.  The selection,
- *	insertion point, and view may have to be adjusted to keep them
- *	within the bounds of the new string.  Note: this procedure does
- *	*not* update the entry's associated variable, since that could
- *	result in an infinite loop.
+ *	The string displayed in the entry will change. The selection,
+ *	insertion point, and view may have to be adjusted to keep them within
+ *	the bounds of the new string. Note: this function does *not* update
+ *	the entry's associated variable, since that could result in an
+ *	infinite loop.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -2328,11 +2302,13 @@ EntrySetValue(entryPtr, value)
 	entryPtr->flags |= VALIDATE_ABORT;
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * If we validate, we create a copy of the value, as it may
-	 * point to volatile memory, like the value of the -textvar
-	 * which may get freed during validation
+	 * If we validate, we create a copy of the value, as it may point to
+	 * volatile memory, like the value of the -textvar which may get freed
+	 * during validation
 	 */
+
 	char *tmp = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (valueLen + 1));
+
 	strcpy(tmp, value);
 	value = tmp;
 	malloced = 1;
@@ -2341,10 +2317,12 @@ EntrySetValue(entryPtr, value)
 	(void) EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, (char *) NULL, value, -1,
 		VALIDATE_FORCED);
 	entryPtr->flags &= ~VALIDATE_VAR;
+
 	/*
 	 * If VALIDATE_ABORT has been set, then this operation should be
 	 * aborted because the validatecommand did something else instead
 	 */
+
 	if (entryPtr->flags & VALIDATE_ABORT) {
 	    entryPtr->flags &= ~VALIDATE_ABORT;
 	    ckfree((char *)value);
@@ -2359,6 +2337,7 @@ EntrySetValue(entryPtr, value)
 	entryPtr->string = value;
     } else {
 	char *tmp = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (valueLen + 1));
+
 	strcpy(tmp, value);
 	entryPtr->string = tmp;
     }
@@ -2399,15 +2378,15 @@ EntrySetValue(entryPtr, value)
  *
  * EntryEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various
- *	events on entries.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher for various events on
+ *	entries.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up.
+ *	When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -2446,34 +2425,33 @@ EntryEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
     }
 
     switch (eventPtr->type) {
-	case Expose:
-	    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-	    entryPtr->flags |= BORDER_NEEDED;
-	    break;
-	case DestroyNotify:
-	    if (!(entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_DELETED)) {
-		entryPtr->flags |= (ENTRY_DELETED | VALIDATE_ABORT);
-		Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(entryPtr->interp,
-			entryPtr->widgetCmd);
-		if (entryPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
-		    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayEntry, clientData);
-		}
-		Tcl_EventuallyFree(clientData, DestroyEntry);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case ConfigureNotify:
-	    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) entryPtr);
-	    entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
-	    EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
-	    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-	    Tcl_Release((ClientData) entryPtr);
-	    break;
-	case FocusIn:
-	case FocusOut:
-	    if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) {
-		EntryFocusProc(entryPtr, (eventPtr->type == FocusIn));
+    case Expose:
+	EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
+	entryPtr->flags |= BORDER_NEEDED;
+	break;
+    case DestroyNotify:
+	if (!(entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_DELETED)) {
+	    entryPtr->flags |= (ENTRY_DELETED | VALIDATE_ABORT);
+	    Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(entryPtr->interp, entryPtr->widgetCmd);
+	    if (entryPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
+		Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayEntry, clientData);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	    Tcl_EventuallyFree(clientData, DestroyEntry);
+	}
+	break;
+    case ConfigureNotify:
+	Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) entryPtr);
+	entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
+	EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
+	EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
+	Tcl_Release((ClientData) entryPtr);
+	break;
+    case FocusIn:
+    case FocusOut:
+	if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail != NotifyInferior) {
+	    EntryFocusProc(entryPtr, (eventPtr->type == FocusIn));
+	}
+	break;
     }
 }
 
@@ -2482,9 +2460,9 @@ EntryEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * EntryCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This function is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2502,14 +2480,14 @@ EntryCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
     Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin
-     * is NULL) or because the command was deleted, and then this procedure
-     * destroys the widget.
+     * This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
+     * because the command was deleted, and then this function destroys the
+     * widget.
      */
 
     if (!(entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_DELETED)) {
-        Tk_DestroyWindow(entryPtr->tkwin);
+	Tk_DestroyWindow(entryPtr->tkwin);
     }
 }
 
@@ -2518,15 +2496,14 @@ EntryCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * GetEntryIndex --
  *
- *	Parse an index into an entry and return either its value
- *	or an error.
+ *	Parse an index into an entry and return either its value or an error.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result.  If all went well, then *indexPtr is
- *	filled in with the character index (into entryPtr) corresponding to
- *	string.  The index value is guaranteed to lie between 0 and
- *	the number of characters in the string, inclusive.  If an
- *	error occurs then an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result. If all went well, then *indexPtr is filled in
+ *	with the character index (into entryPtr) corresponding to string. The
+ *	index value is guaranteed to lie between 0 and the number of
+ *	characters in the string, inclusive. If an error occurs then an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2551,7 +2528,7 @@ GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	if (strncmp(string, "anchor", length) == 0) {
 	    *indexPtr = entryPtr->selectAnchor;
 	} else {
-	    badIndex:
+	badIndex:
 
 	    /*
 	     * Some of the paths here leave messages in the interp's result,
@@ -2613,10 +2590,10 @@ GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, string, indexPtr)
 		x - entryPtr->layoutX, 0);
 
 	/*
-	 * Special trick:  if the x-position was off-screen to the right,
-	 * round the index up to refer to the character just after the
-	 * last visible one on the screen.  This is needed to enable the
-	 * last character to be selected, for example.
+	 * Special trick: if the x-position was off-screen to the right, round
+	 * the index up to refer to the character just after the last visible
+	 * one on the screen. This is needed to enable the last character to
+	 * be selected, for example.
 	 */
 
 	if (roundUp && (*indexPtr < entryPtr->numChars)) {
@@ -2630,7 +2607,7 @@ GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	    *indexPtr = 0;
 	} else if (*indexPtr > entryPtr->numChars) {
 	    *indexPtr = entryPtr->numChars;
-	} 
+	}
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -2640,8 +2617,8 @@ GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, string, indexPtr)
  *
  * EntryScanTo --
  *
- *	Given a y-coordinate (presumably of the curent mouse location)
- *	drag the view in the window to implement the scan operation.
+ *	Given a y-coordinate (presumably of the curent mouse location) drag
+ *	the view in the window to implement the scan operation.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2660,14 +2637,14 @@ EntryScanTo(entryPtr, x)
     int newLeftIndex;
 
     /*
-     * Compute new leftIndex for entry by amplifying the difference
-     * between the current position and the place where the scan
-     * started (the "mark" position).  If we run off the left or right
-     * side of the entry, then reset the mark point so that the current
-     * position continues to correspond to the edge of the window.
-     * This means that the picture will start dragging as soon as the
-     * mouse reverses direction (without this reset, might have to slide
-     * mouse a long ways back before the picture starts moving again).
+     * Compute new leftIndex for entry by amplifying the difference between
+     * the current position and the place where the scan started (the "mark"
+     * position). If we run off the left or right side of the entry, then
+     * reset the mark point so that the current position continues to
+     * correspond to the edge of the window. This means that the picture will
+     * start dragging as soon as the mouse reverses direction (without this
+     * reset, might have to slide mouse a long ways back before the picture
+     * starts moving again).
      */
 
     newLeftIndex = entryPtr->scanMarkIndex
@@ -2679,7 +2656,7 @@ EntryScanTo(entryPtr, x)
     if (newLeftIndex < 0) {
 	newLeftIndex = entryPtr->scanMarkIndex = 0;
 	entryPtr->scanMarkX = x;
-    } 
+    }
 
     if (newLeftIndex != entryPtr->leftIndex) {
 	entryPtr->leftIndex = newLeftIndex;
@@ -2698,8 +2675,8 @@ EntryScanTo(entryPtr, x)
  *
  * EntrySelectTo --
  *
- *	Modify the selection by moving its un-anchored end.  This could
- *	make the selection either larger or smaller.
+ *	Modify the selection by moving its un-anchored end. This could make
+ *	the selection either larger or smaller.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2759,15 +2736,15 @@ EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index)
  *
  * EntryFetchSelection --
  *
- *	This procedure is called back by Tk when the selection is
- *	requested by someone.  It returns part or all of the selection
- *	in a buffer provided by the caller.
+ *	This function is called back by Tk when the selection is requested by
+ *	someone. It returns part or all of the selection in a buffer provided
+ *	by the caller.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the number of non-NULL bytes stored
- *	at buffer.  Buffer is filled (or partially filled) with a
- *	NULL-terminated string containing part or all of the selection,
- *	as given by offset and maxBytes.
+ *	The return value is the number of non-NULL bytes stored at buffer.
+ *	Buffer is filled (or partially filled) with a NULL-terminated string
+ *	containing part or all of the selection, as given by offset and
+ *	maxBytes.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2781,8 +2758,8 @@ EntryFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
     int offset;			/* Byte offset within selection of first
 				 * character to be returned. */
     char *buffer;		/* Location in which to place selection. */
-    int maxBytes;		/* Maximum number of bytes to place at
-				 * buffer, not including terminating NULL
+    int maxBytes;		/* Maximum number of bytes to place at buffer,
+				 * not including terminating NULL
 				 * character. */
 {
     Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) clientData;
@@ -2814,15 +2791,15 @@ EntryFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  *
  * EntryLostSelection --
  *
- *	This procedure is called back by Tk when the selection is
- *	grabbed away from an entry widget.
+ *	This function is called back by Tk when the selection is grabbed away
+ *	from an entry widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The existing selection is unhighlighted, and the window is
- *	marked as not containing a selection.
+ *	The existing selection is unhighlighted, and the window is marked as
+ *	not containing a selection.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -2836,9 +2813,9 @@ EntryLostSelection(clientData)
     entryPtr->flags &= ~GOT_SELECTION;
 
     /*
-     * On Windows and Mac systems, we want to remember the selection
-     * for the next time the focus enters the window.  On Unix, we need
-     * to clear the selection since it is always visible.
+     * On Windows and Mac systems, we want to remember the selection for the
+     * next time the focus enters the window. On Unix, we need to clear the
+     * selection since it is always visible.
      */
 
 #ifdef ALWAYS_SHOW_SELECTION
@@ -2861,10 +2838,10 @@ EntryLostSelection(clientData)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Information gets redisplayed.  Right now we don't do selective
- *	redisplays:  the whole window will be redrawn.  This doesn't
- *	seem to hurt performance noticeably, but if it does then this
- *	could be changed.
+ *	Information gets redisplayed. Right now we don't do selective
+ *	redisplays: the whole window will be redrawn. This doesn't seem to
+ *	hurt performance noticeably, but if it does then this could be
+ *	changed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -2878,9 +2855,9 @@ EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Right now we don't do selective redisplays:  the whole window
-     * will be redrawn.  This doesn't seem to hurt performance noticeably,
-     * but if it does then this could be changed.
+     * Right now we don't do selective redisplays: the whole window will be
+     * redrawn. This doesn't seem to hurt performance noticeably, but if it
+     * does then this could be changed.
      */
 
     if (!(entryPtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
@@ -2894,13 +2871,12 @@ EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr)
  *
  * EntryVisibleRange --
  *
- *	Return information about the range of the entry that is
- *	currently visible.
+ *	Return information about the range of the entry that is currently
+ *	visible.
  *
  * Results:
- *	*firstPtr and *lastPtr are modified to hold fractions between
- *	0 and 1 identifying the range of characters visible in the
- *	entry.
+ *	*firstPtr and *lastPtr are modified to hold fractions between 0 and 1
+ *	identifying the range of characters visible in the entry.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2911,8 +2887,8 @@ EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr)
 static void
 EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, firstPtr, lastPtr)
     Entry *entryPtr;		/* Information about widget. */
-    double *firstPtr;		/* Return position of first visible
-				 * character in widget. */
+    double *firstPtr;		/* Return position of first visible character
+				 * in widget. */
     double *lastPtr;		/* Return position of char just after last
 				 * visible one. */
 {
@@ -2944,10 +2920,10 @@ EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, firstPtr, lastPtr)
  *
  * EntryUpdateScrollbar --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever information has changed in
- *	an entry in a way that would invalidate a scrollbar display.
- *	If there is an associated scrollbar, then this procedure updates
- *	it by invoking a Tcl command.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever information has changed in an entry
+ *	in a way that would invalidate a scrollbar display. If there is an
+ *	associated scrollbar, then this function updates it by invoking a Tcl
+ *	command.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2993,15 +2969,15 @@ EntryUpdateScrollbar(entryPtr)
  *
  * EntryBlinkProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called as a timer handler to blink the
- *	insertion cursor off and on.
+ *	This function is called as a timer handler to blink the insertion
+ *	cursor off and on.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The cursor gets turned on or off, redisplay gets invoked,
- *	and this procedure reschedules itself.
+ *	The cursor gets turned on or off, redisplay gets invoked, and this
+ *	function reschedules itself.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -3034,9 +3010,9 @@ EntryBlinkProc(clientData)
  *
  * EntryFocusProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called whenever the entry gets or loses the
- *	input focus.  It's also called whenever the window is reconfigured
- *	while it has the focus.
+ *	This function is called whenever the entry gets or loses the input
+ *	focus. It's also called whenever the window is reconfigured while it
+ *	has the focus.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -3085,15 +3061,14 @@ EntryFocusProc(entryPtr, gotFocus)
  *
  * EntryTextVarProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when someone changes the variable
- *	whose contents are to be displayed in an entry.
+ *	This function is invoked when someone changes the variable whose
+ *	contents are to be displayed in an entry.
  *
  * Results:
  *	NULL is always returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The text displayed in the entry will change to match the
- *	variable.
+ *	The text displayed in the entry will change to match the variable.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -3118,8 +3093,8 @@ EntryTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless
-     * the whole interpreter is going away.
+     * If the variable is unset, then immediately recreate it unless the whole
+     * interpreter is going away.
      */
 
     if (flags & TCL_TRACE_UNSETS) {
@@ -3135,10 +3110,9 @@ EntryTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Update the entry's text with the value of the variable, unless
-     * the entry already has that value (this happens when the variable
-     * changes value because we changed it because someone typed in
-     * the entry).
+     * Update the entry's text with the value of the variable, unless the
+     * entry already has that value (this happens when the variable changes
+     * value because we changed it because someone typed in the entry).
      */
 
     value = Tcl_GetVar(interp, entryPtr->textVarName, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
@@ -3154,17 +3128,17 @@ EntryTextVarProc(clientData, interp, name1, name2, flags)
  *
  * EntryValidate --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when any character is added or
- *	removed from the entry widget, or a focus has trigerred validation.
+ *	This function is invoked when any character is added or removed from
+ *	the entry widget, or a focus has trigerred validation.
  *
  * Results:
- *	TCL_OK if the validatecommand passes the new string.
- *      TCL_BREAK if the vcmd executed OK, but rejects the string.
- *      TCL_ERROR if an error occurred while executing the vcmd
- *      or a valid Tcl_Bool is not returned.
+
+ *	TCL_OK if the validatecommand passes the new string. TCL_BREAK if the
+ *	vcmd executed OK, but rejects the string. TCL_ERROR if an error
+ *	occurred while executing the vcmd or a valid Tcl_Bool is not returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      An error condition may arise
+ *	An error condition may arise
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -3181,9 +3155,10 @@ EntryValidate(entryPtr, cmd)
     code = Tcl_EvalEx(interp, cmd, -1, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL | TCL_EVAL_DIRECT);
 
     /*
-     * We accept TCL_OK and TCL_RETURN as valid return codes from the
-     * command callback.
+     * We accept TCL_OK and TCL_RETURN as valid return codes from the command
+     * callback.
      */
+
     if (code != TCL_OK && code != TCL_RETURN) {
 	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n\t(in validation command executed by ");
 	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin));
@@ -3195,8 +3170,9 @@ EntryValidate(entryPtr, cmd)
     /*
      * The command callback should return an acceptable Tcl boolean.
      */
+
     if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-			      &bool) != TCL_OK) {
+	    &bool) != TCL_OK) {
 	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
 		 "\nvalid boolean not returned by validation command");
 	Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
@@ -3213,17 +3189,16 @@ EntryValidate(entryPtr, cmd)
  *
  * EntryValidateChange --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when any character is added or
- *	removed from the entry widget, or a focus has trigerred validation.
+ *	This function is invoked when any character is added or removed from
+ *	the entry widget, or a focus has trigerred validation.
  *
  * Results:
- *	TCL_OK if the validatecommand accepts the new string,
- *      TCL_ERROR if any problems occured with validatecommand.
+ *	TCL_OK if the validatecommand accepts the new string, TCL_ERROR if any
+ *	problems occured with validatecommand.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      The insertion/deletion may be aborted, and the
- *      validatecommand might turn itself off (if an error
- *      or loop condition arises).
+ *	The insertion/deletion may be aborted, and the validatecommand might
+ *	turn itself off (if an error or loop condition arises).
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -3233,25 +3208,26 @@ EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, change, new, index, type)
      register Entry *entryPtr;	/* Entry that needs validation. */
      char *change;		/* Characters to be added/deleted
 				 * (NULL-terminated string). */
-     CONST char *new;           /* Potential new value of entry string */
-     int index;                 /* index of insert/delete, -1 otherwise */
-     int type;                  /* forced, delete, insert,
-				 * focusin or focusout */
+     CONST char *new;		/* Potential new value of entry string */
+     int index;			/* index of insert/delete, -1 otherwise */
+     int type;			/* forced, delete, insert, focusin or
+				 * focusout */
 {
     int code, varValidate = (entryPtr->flags & VALIDATE_VAR);
     char *p;
     Tcl_DString script;
-    
+
     if (entryPtr->validateCmd == NULL ||
 	entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_NONE) {
 	return (varValidate ? TCL_ERROR : TCL_OK);
     }
 
     /*
-     * If we're already validating, then we're hitting a loop condition
-     * Return and set validate to 0 to disallow further validations
-     * and prevent current validation from finishing
+     * If we're already validating, then we're hitting a loop condition Return
+     * and set validate to 0 to disallow further validations and prevent
+     * current validation from finishing
      */
+
     if (entryPtr->flags & VALIDATING) {
 	entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_NONE;
 	return (varValidate ? TCL_ERROR : TCL_OK);
@@ -3273,10 +3249,10 @@ EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, change, new, index, type)
     Tcl_DStringFree(&script);
 
     /*
-     * If e->validate has become VALIDATE_NONE during the validation, or
-     * we now have VALIDATE_VAR set (from EntrySetValue) and didn't before,
-     * it means that a loop condition almost occured.  Do not allow
-     * this validation result to finish.
+     * If e->validate has become VALIDATE_NONE during the validation, or we
+     * now have VALIDATE_VAR set (from EntrySetValue) and didn't before, it
+     * means that a loop condition almost occured. Do not allow this
+     * validation result to finish.
      */
 
     if (entryPtr->validate == VALIDATE_NONE
@@ -3285,8 +3261,8 @@ EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, change, new, index, type)
     }
 
     /*
-     * It's possible that the user deleted the entry during validation.
-     * In that case, abort future validation and return an error.
+     * It's possible that the user deleted the entry during validation. In
+     * that case, abort future validation and return an error.
      */
 
     if (entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_DELETED) {
@@ -3295,20 +3271,19 @@ EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, change, new, index, type)
 
     /*
      * If validate will return ERROR, then disallow further validations
-     * Otherwise, if it didn't accept the new string (returned TCL_BREAK)
-     * then eval the invalidCmd (if it's set)
+     * Otherwise, if it didn't accept the new string (returned TCL_BREAK) then
+     * eval the invalidCmd (if it's set)
      */
 
     if (code == TCL_ERROR) {
 	entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_NONE;
     } else if (code == TCL_BREAK) {
 	/*
-	 * If we were doing forced validation (like via a variable
-	 * trace) and the command returned 0, the we turn off validation
-	 * because we assume that textvariables have precedence in
-	 * managing the value.  We also don't call the invcmd, as it
-	 * may want to do entry manipulation which the setting of the
-	 * var will later wipe anyway.
+	 * If we were doing forced validation (like via a variable trace) and
+	 * the command returned 0, the we turn off validation because we
+	 * assume that textvariables have precedence in managing the value.
+	 * We also don't call the invcmd, as it may want to do entry
+	 * manipulation which the setting of the var will later wipe anyway.
 	 */
 
 	if (varValidate) {
@@ -3316,13 +3291,13 @@ EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, change, new, index, type)
 	} else if (entryPtr->invalidCmd != NULL) {
 	    Tcl_DStringInit(&script);
 	    ExpandPercents(entryPtr, entryPtr->invalidCmd,
-			   change, new, index, type, &script);
+		    change, new, index, type, &script);
 	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&script, "", 1);
 	    p = Tcl_DStringValue(&script);
 	    if (Tcl_EvalEx(entryPtr->interp, p, -1,
 		    TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL | TCL_EVAL_DIRECT) != TCL_OK) {
 		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(entryPtr->interp,
-				 "\n\t(in invalidcommand executed by entry)");
+			"\n\t(in invalidcommand executed by entry)");
 		Tcl_BackgroundError(entryPtr->interp);
 		code = TCL_ERROR;
 		entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_NONE;
@@ -3330,8 +3305,9 @@ EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, change, new, index, type)
 	    Tcl_DStringFree(&script);
 
 	    /*
-	     * It's possible that the user deleted the entry during validation.
-	     * In that case, abort future validation and return an error.
+	     * It's possible that the user deleted the entry during
+	     * validation. In that case, abort future validation and return an
+	     * error.
 	     */
 
 	    if (entryPtr->flags & ENTRY_DELETED) {
@@ -3350,13 +3326,12 @@ EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, change, new, index, type)
  *
  * ExpandPercents --
  *
- *	Given a command and an event, produce a new command
- *	by replacing % constructs in the original command
- *	with information from the X event.
+ *	Given a command and an event, produce a new command by replacing %
+ *	constructs in the original command with information from the X event.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The new expanded command is appended to the dynamic string
- *	given by dsPtr.
+ *	The new expanded command is appended to the dynamic string given by
+ *	dsPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3368,8 +3343,8 @@ static void
 ExpandPercents(entryPtr, before, change, new, index, type, dsPtr)
      register Entry *entryPtr;	/* Entry that needs validation. */
      register CONST char *before;
-				/* Command containing percent
-				 * expressions to be replaced. */
+				/* Command containing percent expressions to
+				 * be replaced. */
      char *change;		/* Characters to added/deleted
 				 * (NULL-terminated string). */
      CONST char *new;		/* Potential new value of entry string */
@@ -3390,12 +3365,16 @@ ExpandPercents(entryPtr, before, change, new, index, type, dsPtr)
 	    break;
 	}
 	/*
-	 * Find everything up to the next % character and append it
-	 * to the result string.
+	 * Find everything up to the next % character and append it to the
+	 * result string.
 	 */
 
 	string = before;
-	/* No need to convert '%', as it is in ascii range */
+
+	/*
+	 * No need to convert '%', as it is in ascii range.
+	 */
+
 	string = Tcl_UtfFindFirst(before, '%');
 	if (string == (char *) NULL) {
 	    Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, before, -1);
@@ -3406,7 +3385,7 @@ ExpandPercents(entryPtr, before, change, new, index, type, dsPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * There's a percent sequence here.  Process it.
+	 * There's a percent sequence here. Process it.
 	 */
 
 	before++; /* skip over % */
@@ -3419,80 +3398,82 @@ ExpandPercents(entryPtr, before, change, new, index, type, dsPtr)
 	    /*
 	     * -command %-substitution
 	     */
+
 	    switch (ch) {
-		case 's': /* Current string value of spinbox */
-		    string = entryPtr->string;
-		    break;
-		case 'd': /* direction, up or down */
-		    string = change;
-		    break;
-		case 'W': /* widget name */
-		    string = Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin);
-		    break;
-		default:
-		    length = Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, numStorage);
-		    numStorage[length] = '\0';
-		    string = numStorage;
-		    break;
+	    case 's':		/* Current string value of spinbox */
+		string = entryPtr->string;
+		break;
+	    case 'd':		/* direction, up or down */
+		string = change;
+		break;
+	    case 'W':		/* widget name */
+		string = Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin);
+		break;
+	    default:
+		length = Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, numStorage);
+		numStorage[length] = '\0';
+		string = numStorage;
+		break;
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    /*
 	     * -validatecommand / -invalidcommand %-substitution
 	     */
+
 	    switch (ch) {
-		case 'd': /* Type of call that caused validation */
-		    switch (type) {
-			case VALIDATE_INSERT:
-			    number = 1;
-			    break;
-			case VALIDATE_DELETE:
-			    number = 0;
-			    break;
-			default:
-			    number = -1;
-			    break;
-		    }
-		    sprintf(numStorage, "%d", number);
-		    string = numStorage;
-		    break;
-		case 'i': /* index of insert/delete */
-		    sprintf(numStorage, "%d", index);
-		    string = numStorage;
-		    break;
-		case 'P': /* 'Peeked' new value of the string */
-		    string = new;
+	    case 'd':		/* Type of call that caused validation */
+		switch (type) {
+		case VALIDATE_INSERT:
+		    number = 1;
 		    break;
-		case 's': /* Current string value of spinbox */
-		    string = entryPtr->string;
+		case VALIDATE_DELETE:
+		    number = 0;
 		    break;
-		case 'S': /* string to be inserted/deleted, if any */
-		    string = change;
-		    break;
-		case 'v': /* type of validation currently set */
-		    string = validateStrings[entryPtr->validate];
+		default:
+		    number = -1;
 		    break;
-		case 'V': /* type of validation in effect */
-		    switch (type) {
-			case VALIDATE_INSERT:
-			case VALIDATE_DELETE:
-			    string = validateStrings[VALIDATE_KEY];
-			    break;
-			case VALIDATE_FORCED:
-			    string = "forced";
-			    break;
-			default:
-			    string = validateStrings[type];
-			    break;
-		    }
+		}
+		sprintf(numStorage, "%d", number);
+		string = numStorage;
+		break;
+	    case 'i':		/* index of insert/delete */
+		sprintf(numStorage, "%d", index);
+		string = numStorage;
+		break;
+	    case 'P':		/* 'Peeked' new value of the string */
+		string = new;
+		break;
+	    case 's':		/* Current string value of spinbox */
+		string = entryPtr->string;
+		break;
+	    case 'S':		/* string to be inserted/deleted, if any */
+		string = change;
+		break;
+	    case 'v':		/* type of validation currently set */
+		string = validateStrings[entryPtr->validate];
+		break;
+	    case 'V':		/* type of validation in effect */
+		switch (type) {
+		case VALIDATE_INSERT:
+		case VALIDATE_DELETE:
+		    string = validateStrings[VALIDATE_KEY];
 		    break;
-		case 'W': /* widget name */
-		    string = Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin);
+		case VALIDATE_FORCED:
+		    string = "forced";
 		    break;
 		default:
-		    length = Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, numStorage);
-		    numStorage[length] = '\0';
-		    string = numStorage;
+		    string = validateStrings[type];
 		    break;
+		}
+		break;
+	    case 'W': /* widget name */
+		string = Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin);
+		break;
+	    default:
+		length = Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, numStorage);
+		numStorage[length] = '\0';
+		string = numStorage;
+		break;
 	    }
 	}
 
@@ -3511,9 +3492,8 @@ ExpandPercents(entryPtr, before, change, new, index, type, dsPtr)
  *
  * Tk_SpinboxObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "spinbox" Tcl
- *	command.  See the user documentation for details on what
- *	it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "spinbox" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3529,7 +3509,7 @@ Tk_SpinboxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     ClientData clientData;	/* NULL. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
     int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];      /* Argument objects. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     register Entry *entryPtr;
     register Spinbox *sbPtr;
@@ -3543,23 +3523,23 @@ Tk_SpinboxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     tkwin = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
-            Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), (char *) NULL);
+	    Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), (char *) NULL);
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the option table for this widget class.  If it has already
-     * been created, Tk will return the cached value.
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, Tk will return the cached value.
      */
 
     optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, sbOptSpec);
 
     /*
-     * Initialize the fields of the structure that won't be initialized
-     * by ConfigureEntry, or that ConfigureEntry requires to be
-     * initialized already (e.g. resource pointers).  Only the non-NULL/0
-     * data must be initialized as memset covers the rest.
+     * Initialize the fields of the structure that won't be initialized by
+     * ConfigureEntry, or that ConfigureEntry requires to be initialized
+     * already (e.g. resource pointers). Only the non-NULL/0 data must be
+     * initialized as memset covers the rest.
      */
 
     sbPtr			= (Spinbox *) ckalloc(sizeof(Spinbox));
@@ -3628,7 +3608,7 @@ Tk_SpinboxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     if (ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0) != TCL_OK) {
 	goto error;
     }
-    
+
     Tcl_SetResult(interp, Tk_PathName(entryPtr->tkwin), TCL_STATIC);
     return TCL_OK;
 
@@ -3642,9 +3622,9 @@ Tk_SpinboxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * SpinboxWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a widget managed by this module.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a widget managed by this module. See the user documentation for
+ *	details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3673,8 +3653,8 @@ SpinboxWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Parse the widget command by looking up the second token in
-     * the list of valid command names. 
+     * Parse the widget command by looking up the second token in the list of
+     * valid command names.
      */
 
     result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], sbCmdNames,
@@ -3685,471 +3665,452 @@ SpinboxWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) entryPtr);
     switch ((enum sbCmd) cmdIndex) {
-        case SB_CMD_BBOX: {
-	    int index, x, y, width, height;
-	    char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
+    case SB_CMD_BBOX: {
+	int index, x, y, width, height;
+	char buf[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
 
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                    &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
-	    }
-	    if ((index == entryPtr->numChars) && (index > 0)) {
-	        index--;
-	    }
-	    Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, index, &x, &y, 
-                    &width, &height);
-	    sprintf(buf, "%d %d %d %d", x + entryPtr->layoutX,
-		    y + entryPtr->layoutY, width, height);
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-	    break;
-	} 
-	
-        case SB_CMD_CGET: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    
-	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
-		    entryPtr->optionTable, objv[2], entryPtr->tkwin);
-	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		 goto error;
-	    } else {
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
 	}
+	if ((index == entryPtr->numChars) && (index > 0)) {
+	    index--;
+	}
+	Tk_CharBbox(entryPtr->textLayout, index, &x, &y,
+		&width, &height);
+	sprintf(buf, "%d %d %d %d", x + entryPtr->layoutX,
+		y + entryPtr->layoutY, width, height);
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	break;
+    }
 
-        case SB_CMD_CONFIGURE: {
-	    if (objc <= 3) {
-		objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
-			entryPtr->optionTable,
-			(objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-			entryPtr->tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    goto error;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		}
-	    } else {
-		result = ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0);
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case SB_CMD_CGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+	    goto error;
 	}
 
-        case SB_CMD_DELETE: {
-	    int first, last;
+	objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
+		entryPtr->optionTable, objv[2], entryPtr->tkwin);
+	if (objPtr == NULL) {
+	    goto error;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
 
-	    if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "firstIndex ?lastIndex?");
+    case SB_CMD_CONFIGURE:
+	if (objc <= 3) {
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) entryPtr,
+		    entryPtr->optionTable,
+		    (objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
+		    entryPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
 		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                    &first) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-	        last = first + 1;
 	    } else {
-	        if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), 
-                        &last) != TCL_OK) {
-		    goto error;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if ((last >= first) && (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL)) {
-	        DeleteChars(entryPtr, first, last - first);
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigureEntry(interp, entryPtr, objc-2, objv+2, 0);
 	}
+	break;
 
-        case SB_CMD_GET: {
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, (char *) NULL);
+    case SB_CMD_DELETE: {
+	int first, last;
+
+	if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "firstIndex ?lastIndex?");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&first) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    last = first + 1;
+	} else {
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+		    &last) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), entryPtr->string, -1);
-	    break;
 	}
+	if ((last >= first) && (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL)) {
+	    DeleteChars(entryPtr, first, last - first);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-        case SB_CMD_ICURSOR: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pos");
+    case SB_CMD_GET:
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, (char *) NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), entryPtr->string, -1);
+	break;
+
+    case SB_CMD_ICURSOR:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pos");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&entryPtr->insertPos) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
+	break;
+
+    case SB_CMD_IDENTIFY: {
+	int x, y, elem;
+
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "x y");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK) ||
+		(Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	elem = GetSpinboxElement(sbPtr, x, y);
+	if (elem != SEL_NONE) {
+	    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
+		    selElementNames[elem], -1);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case SB_CMD_INDEX: {
+	int index;
+
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "string");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case SB_CMD_INSERT: {
+	int index;
+
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index text");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) {
+	    InsertChars(entryPtr, index, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case SB_CMD_INVOKE:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "elemName");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2],
+		selElementNames, "element", 0, &cmdIndex);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (entryPtr->state != STATE_DISABLED) {
+	    if (SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, cmdIndex) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-                    &entryPtr->insertPos) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
-	    }
-	    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-	    break;
 	}
-	
-        case SB_CMD_IDENTIFY: {
-	    int x, y, elem;
+	break;
+
+    case SB_CMD_SCAN: {
+	int x;
+	char *minorCmd;
+
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "mark|dragto x");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
 
+	minorCmd = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	if (minorCmd[0] == 'm'
+		&& (strncmp(minorCmd, "mark", strlen(minorCmd)) == 0)) {
+	    entryPtr->scanMarkX = x;
+	    entryPtr->scanMarkIndex = entryPtr->leftIndex;
+	} else if ((minorCmd[0] == 'd')
+		&& (strncmp(minorCmd, "dragto", strlen(minorCmd)) == 0)) {
+	    EntryScanTo(entryPtr, x);
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad scan option \"",
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "\": must be mark or dragto",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case SB_CMD_SELECTION: {
+	int index, index2;
+
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?index?");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Parse the selection sub-command, using the command table
+	 * "sbSelCmdNames" defined above.
+	 */
+
+	result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], sbSelCmdNames,
+		"selection option", 0, &selIndex);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Disabled entries don't allow the selection to be modified, but
+	 * 'selection present' must return a boolean.
+	 */
+
+	if ((entryPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED)
+		&& (selIndex != SB_SEL_PRESENT)) {
+	    goto done;
+	}
+
+	switch (selIndex) {
+	case SB_SEL_ADJUST:
 	    if (objc != 4) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "x y");
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &x) != TCL_OK) ||
-		    (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &y) != TCL_OK)) {
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    elem = GetSpinboxElement(sbPtr, x, y);
-	    if (elem != SEL_NONE) {
-		Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-			selElementNames[elem], -1);
+	    if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
+		int half1, half2;
+
+		half1 = (entryPtr->selectFirst + entryPtr->selectLast)/2;
+		half2 = (entryPtr->selectFirst + entryPtr->selectLast + 1)/2;
+		if (index < half1) {
+		    entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectLast;
+		} else if (index > half2) {
+		    entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectFirst;
+		} else {
+		    /*
+		     * We're at about the halfway point in the selection; just
+		     * keep the existing anchor.
+		     */
+		}
 	    }
+	    EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
 	    break;
-	}
-	
-        case SB_CMD_INDEX: {
-	    int index;
 
+	case SB_SEL_CLEAR:
 	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "string");
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, (char *) NULL);
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                    &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
+	    if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
+		entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
+		entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
+		EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
 	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(index));
-	    break;
-	}
-
-        case SB_CMD_INSERT: {
-	    int index;
+	    goto done;
 
+	case SB_SEL_FROM:
 	    if (objc != 4) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index text");
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                    &index) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (entryPtr->state == STATE_NORMAL) {
-	        InsertChars(entryPtr, index, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
+		goto error;
 	    }
+	    entryPtr->selectAnchor = index;
 	    break;
-	}
 
-        case SB_CMD_INVOKE: {
+	case SB_SEL_PRESENT:
 	    if (objc != 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "elemName");
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, (char *) NULL);
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2],
-		    selElementNames, "element", 0, &cmdIndex);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+		    Tcl_NewBooleanObj((entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0)));
+	    goto done;
+
+	case SB_SEL_RANGE:
+	    if (objc != 5) {
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "start end");
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (entryPtr->state != STATE_DISABLED) {
-		if (SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, cmdIndex) != TCL_OK) {
-		    goto error;
-		}
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-
-        case SB_CMD_SCAN: {
-	    int x;
-	    char *minorCmd;
-
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "mark|dragto x");
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[3], &x) != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[4]),& index2) != TCL_OK) {
+		goto error;
 	    }
-
-	    minorCmd = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-	    if (minorCmd[0] == 'm' 
-                    && (strncmp(minorCmd, "mark", strlen(minorCmd)) == 0)) {
-	        entryPtr->scanMarkX = x;
-		entryPtr->scanMarkIndex = entryPtr->leftIndex;
-	    } else if ((minorCmd[0] == 'd')
-		&& (strncmp(minorCmd, "dragto", strlen(minorCmd)) == 0)) {
-	        EntryScanTo(entryPtr, x);
+	    if (index >= index2) {
+		entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
+		entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
 	    } else {
-	        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad scan option \"", 
-                        Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), "\": must be mark or dragto", 
-                        (char *) NULL);
-		goto error;
+		entryPtr->selectFirst = index;
+		entryPtr->selectLast = index2;
+	    }
+	    if (!(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)
+		    && (entryPtr->exportSelection)) {
+		Tk_OwnSelection(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY,
+			EntryLostSelection, (ClientData) entryPtr);
+		entryPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
 	    }
+	    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
 	    break;
-	}
-
-	case SB_CMD_SELECTION: {
-	    int index, index2;
 
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?index?");
+	case SB_SEL_TO:
+	    if (objc != 4) {
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
 		goto error;
 	    }
-
-	    /* 
-	     * Parse the selection sub-command, using the command
-	     * table "sbSelCmdNames" defined above.
-	     */
-	    
-	    result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], sbSelCmdNames,
-                    "selection option", 0, &selIndex);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-	        goto error;
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
+		goto error;
 	    }
+	    EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
+	    break;
 
-	    /*
-	     * Disabled entries don't allow the selection to be modified,
-	     * but 'selection present' must return a boolean.
-	     */
-
-	    if ((entryPtr->state == STATE_DISABLED)
-		    && (selIndex != SB_SEL_PRESENT)) {
-		goto done;
+	case SB_SEL_ELEMENT:
+	    if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
+		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "?elemName?");
+		goto error;
 	    }
+	    if (objc == 3) {
+		Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
+			selElementNames[sbPtr->selElement], -1);
+	    } else {
+		int lastElement = sbPtr->selElement;
 
-	    switch (selIndex) {
-	        case SB_SEL_ADJUST: {
-		    if (objc != 4) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
-		        int half1, half2;
-		
-			half1 = (entryPtr->selectFirst 
-			        + entryPtr->selectLast)/2;
-			half2 = (entryPtr->selectFirst 
-				+ entryPtr->selectLast + 1)/2;
-			if (index < half1) {
-			    entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectLast;
-			} else if (index > half2) {
-			    entryPtr->selectAnchor = entryPtr->selectFirst;
-			} else {
-			  /*
-			   * We're at about the halfway point in the 
-			   * selection; just keep the existing anchor.
-			   */
-			}
-		    }
-		    EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
-		    break;
-		}
-
-	        case SB_SEL_CLEAR: {
-		    if (objc != 3) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, (char *) NULL);
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0) {
-		        entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
-			entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
-			EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-		    }
-		    goto done;
-		}
-
-	        case SB_SEL_FROM: {
-		    if (objc != 4) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    entryPtr->selectAnchor = index;
-		    break;
-		}
-
-	        case SB_SEL_PRESENT: {
-		    if (objc != 3) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, (char *) NULL);
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
-			    Tcl_NewBooleanObj((entryPtr->selectFirst >= 0)));
-		    goto done;
+		result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[3], selElementNames,
+			"selection element", 0, &(sbPtr->selElement));
+		if (result != TCL_OK) {
+		    goto error;
 		}
-
-	        case SB_SEL_RANGE: {
-		    if (objc != 5) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "start end");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[4]),& index2) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (index >= index2) {
-		        entryPtr->selectFirst = -1;
-			entryPtr->selectLast = -1;
-		    } else {
-		        entryPtr->selectFirst = index;
-			entryPtr->selectLast = index2;
-		    }
-		    if (!(entryPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)
-			    && (entryPtr->exportSelection)) {
-		        Tk_OwnSelection(entryPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, 
-			        EntryLostSelection, (ClientData) entryPtr);
-			entryPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
-		    }
+		if (lastElement != sbPtr->selElement) {
 		    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-		    break;
-		}
-		
-	        case SB_SEL_TO: {
-		    if (objc != 4) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, 
-                            Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    EntrySelectTo(entryPtr, index);
-		    break;
-		}
-
-	        case SB_SEL_ELEMENT: {
-		    if ((objc < 3) || (objc > 4)) {
-		        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "?elemName?");
-			goto error;
-		    }
-		    if (objc == 3) {
-			Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-				selElementNames[sbPtr->selElement], -1);
-		    } else {
-			int lastElement = sbPtr->selElement;
-
-			result = Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[3],
-				selElementNames, "selection element", 0,
-				&(sbPtr->selElement));
-			if (result != TCL_OK) {
-			    goto error;
-			}
-			if (lastElement != sbPtr->selElement) {
-			    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-			}
-		    }
-		    break;
 		}
 	    }
 	    break;
 	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-        case SB_CMD_SET: {
-	    if (objc > 3) {
-	        Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?string?");
-		goto error;
-	    }
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		EntryValueChanged(entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), entryPtr->string, -1);
-	    break;
+    case SB_CMD_SET:
+	if (objc > 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?string?");
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    EntryValueChanged(entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]));
 	}
+	Tcl_SetStringObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), entryPtr->string, -1);
+	break;
 
-        case SB_CMD_VALIDATE: {
-	    int code;
+    case SB_CMD_VALIDATE: {
+	int code;
 
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, (char *) NULL);
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, (char *) NULL);
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	selIndex = entryPtr->validate;
+	entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_ALL;
+	code = EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, (char *) NULL, entryPtr->string,
+		-1, VALIDATE_FORCED);
+	if (entryPtr->validate != VALIDATE_NONE) {
+	    entryPtr->validate = selIndex;
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj((code == TCL_OK)));
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case SB_CMD_XVIEW: {
+	int index;
+
+	if (objc == 2) {
+	    double first, last;
+	    char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2];
+
+	    EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, &first, &last);
+	    sprintf(buf, "%g %g", first, last);
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
+	    goto done;
+	} else if (objc == 3) {
+	    if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		    &index) != TCL_OK) {
 		goto error;
 	    }
-	    selIndex = entryPtr->validate;
-	    entryPtr->validate = VALIDATE_ALL;
-	    code = EntryValidateChange(entryPtr, (char *) NULL,
-		    entryPtr->string, -1, VALIDATE_FORCED);
-	    if (entryPtr->validate != VALIDATE_NONE) {
-		entryPtr->validate = selIndex;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj((code == TCL_OK)));
-	    break;
-	}
+	} else {
+	    double fraction;
+	    int count;
 
-        case SB_CMD_XVIEW: {
-	    int index;
-
-	    if (objc == 2) {
-	        double first, last;
-		char buf[TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE * 2];
-	    
-		EntryVisibleRange(entryPtr, &first, &last);
-		sprintf(buf, "%g %g", first, last);
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-		goto done;
-	    } else if (objc == 3) {
-	        if (GetEntryIndex(interp, entryPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), 
-                        &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		    goto error;
-		}
-	    } else {
-	        double fraction;
-		int count;
-
-		index = entryPtr->leftIndex;
-		switch (Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction, 
-                        &count)) {
-		    case TK_SCROLL_ERROR: {
-		        goto error;
-		    }
-		    case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO: {
-		        index = (int) ((fraction * entryPtr->numChars) + 0.5);
-			break;
-		    }
-		    case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: {
-		        int charsPerPage;
-		    
-			charsPerPage = ((Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin)
-    			        - 2 * entryPtr->inset - entryPtr->xWidth) 
-                                / entryPtr->avgWidth) - 2;
-			if (charsPerPage < 1) {
-			    charsPerPage = 1;
-			}
-			index += count * charsPerPage;
-			break;
-		    }
-		    case TK_SCROLL_UNITS: {
-		        index += count;
-			break;
-		    }
+	    index = entryPtr->leftIndex;
+	    switch (Tk_GetScrollInfoObj(interp, objc, objv, &fraction,
+		    &count)) {
+	    case TK_SCROLL_ERROR:
+		goto error;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_MOVETO:
+		index = (int) ((fraction * entryPtr->numChars) + 0.5);
+		break;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_PAGES: {
+		int charsPerPage;
+
+		charsPerPage = ((Tk_Width(entryPtr->tkwin)
+			- 2 * entryPtr->inset - entryPtr->xWidth)
+			/ entryPtr->avgWidth) - 2;
+		if (charsPerPage < 1) {
+		    charsPerPage = 1;
 		}
+		index += count * charsPerPage;
+		break;
 	    }
-	    if (index >= entryPtr->numChars) {
-	        index = entryPtr->numChars - 1;
-	    }
-	    if (index < 0) {
-	        index = 0;
+	    case TK_SCROLL_UNITS:
+		index += count;
+		break;
 	    }
-	    entryPtr->leftIndex = index;
-	    entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
-	    EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
-	    EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
-	    break;
 	}
+	if (index >= entryPtr->numChars) {
+	    index = entryPtr->numChars - 1;
+	}
+	if (index < 0) {
+	    index = 0;
+	}
+	entryPtr->leftIndex = index;
+	entryPtr->flags |= UPDATE_SCROLLBAR;
+	EntryComputeGeometry(entryPtr);
+	EventuallyRedraw(entryPtr);
+	break;
+    }
     }
 
-    done:
+  done:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) entryPtr);
     return result;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) entryPtr);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -4199,25 +4160,25 @@ GetSpinboxElement(sbPtr, x, y)
  *
  * SpinboxInvoke --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when the invoke method for the
- *	widget is called.
+ *	This function is invoked when the invoke method for the widget is
+ *	called.
  *
  * Results:
  *	TCL_OK.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      An background error condition may arise when invoking the
- *	callback.  The widget value may change.
+ *	An background error condition may arise when invoking the callback.
+ *	The widget value may change.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
 SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, element)
-    register Tcl_Interp *interp;	/* Current interpreter. */
-    register Spinbox *sbPtr;		/* Spinbox to invoke. */
-    int element;			/* element to invoke, either the "up"
-					 * or "down" button. */
+    register Tcl_Interp *interp;/* Current interpreter. */
+    register Spinbox *sbPtr;	/* Spinbox to invoke. */
+    int element;		/* Element to invoke, either the "up" or
+				 * "down" button. */
 {
     Entry *entryPtr = (Entry *) sbPtr;
     char *type;
@@ -4225,16 +4186,16 @@ SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, element)
     Tcl_DString script;
 
     switch (element) {
-	case SEL_BUTTONUP:
-	    type = "up";
-	    up = 1;
-	    break;
-	case SEL_BUTTONDOWN:
-	    type = "down";
-	    up = 0;
-	    break;
-	default:
-	    return TCL_OK;
+    case SEL_BUTTONUP:
+	type = "up";
+	up = 1;
+	break;
+    case SEL_BUTTONDOWN:
+	type = "down";
+	up = 0;
+	break;
+    default:
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
     if (fabs(sbPtr->increment) > MIN_DBL_VAL) {
@@ -4244,11 +4205,11 @@ SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, element)
 	    Tcl_ListObjIndex(interp, sbPtr->listObj, sbPtr->eIndex, &objPtr);
 	    if (strcmp(Tcl_GetString(objPtr), entryPtr->string)) {
 		/*
-		 * Somehow the string changed from what we expected,
-		 * so let's do a search on the list to see if the current
-		 * value is there.  If not, move to the first element of
-		 * the list.
+		 * Somehow the string changed from what we expected, so let's
+		 * do a search on the list to see if the current value is
+		 * there. If not, move to the first element of the list.
 		 */
+
 		int i, listc, elemLen, length = entryPtr->numChars;
 		char *bytes;
 		Tcl_Obj **listv;
@@ -4288,43 +4249,44 @@ SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, element)
 
 	    if (Tcl_GetDouble(NULL, entryPtr->string, &dvalue) != TCL_OK) {
 		/*
-		 * If the string is empty, or isn't a valid double value,
-		 * just use the -from value
+		 * If the string is empty, or isn't a valid double value, just
+		 * use the -from value
 		 */
+
 		dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
-	    } else {
-		if (up) {
-		    dvalue += sbPtr->increment;
-		    if (dvalue > sbPtr->toValue) {
-			if (sbPtr->wrap) {
-			    dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
-			} else {
-			    dvalue = sbPtr->toValue;
-			}
-		    } else if (dvalue < sbPtr->fromValue) {
-			/*
-			 * It's possible that when pressing up, we are
-			 * still less than the fromValue, because the
-			 * user may have manipulated the value by hand.
-			 */
+	    } else if (up) {
+		dvalue += sbPtr->increment;
+		if (dvalue > sbPtr->toValue) {
+		    if (sbPtr->wrap) {
 			dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
+		    } else {
+			dvalue = sbPtr->toValue;
 		    }
-		} else {
-		    dvalue -= sbPtr->increment;
-		    if (dvalue < sbPtr->fromValue) {
-			if (sbPtr->wrap) {
-			    dvalue = sbPtr->toValue;
-			} else {
-			    dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
-			}
-		    } else if (dvalue > sbPtr->toValue) {
-			/*
-			 * It's possible that when pressing down, we are
-			 * still greater than the toValue, because the
-			 * user may have manipulated the value by hand.
-			 */
+		} else if (dvalue < sbPtr->fromValue) {
+		    /*
+		     * It's possible that when pressing up, we are still less
+		     * than the fromValue, because the user may have
+		     * manipulated the value by hand.
+		     */
+
+		    dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
+		}
+	    } else {
+		dvalue -= sbPtr->increment;
+		if (dvalue < sbPtr->fromValue) {
+		    if (sbPtr->wrap) {
 			dvalue = sbPtr->toValue;
+		    } else {
+			dvalue = sbPtr->fromValue;
 		    }
+		} else if (dvalue > sbPtr->toValue) {
+		    /*
+		     * It's possible that when pressing down, we are still
+		     * greater than the toValue, because the user may have
+		     * manipulated the value by hand.
+		     */
+
+		    dvalue = sbPtr->toValue;
 		}
 	    }
 	    sprintf(sbPtr->formatBuf, sbPtr->valueFormat, dvalue);
@@ -4345,9 +4307,11 @@ SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, element)
 	if (code != TCL_OK) {
 	    Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n\t(in command executed by spinbox)");
 	    Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+
 	    /*
 	     * Yes, it's an error, but a bg one, so we return OK
 	     */
+
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
 
@@ -4362,9 +4326,9 @@ SpinboxInvoke(interp, sbPtr, element)
  *
  * ComputeFormat --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to recompute the "format" fields
- *	of a spinbox's widget record, which determines how the value
- *	of the dial is converted to a string.
+ *	This function is invoked to recompute the "format" fields of a
+ *	spinbox's widget record, which determines how the value of the dial is
+ *	converted to a string.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Tcl result code.
@@ -4383,8 +4347,8 @@ ComputeFormat(sbPtr)
     int eDigits, fDigits;
 
     /*
-     * Compute the displacement from the decimal of the most significant
-     * digit required for any number in the dial's range.
+     * Compute the displacement from the decimal of the most significant digit
+     * required for any number in the dial's range.
      */
 
     if (sbPtr->reqFormat) {
@@ -4406,6 +4370,7 @@ ComputeFormat(sbPtr)
 	/*
 	 * A increment was specified, so use it.
 	 */
+
 	leastSigDigit = (int) floor(log10(sbPtr->increment));
     } else {
 	leastSigDigit = 0;
@@ -4416,13 +4381,13 @@ ComputeFormat(sbPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Compute the number of characters required using "e" format and
-     * "f" format, and then choose whichever one takes fewer characters.
+     * Compute the number of characters required using "e" format and "f"
+     * format, and then choose whichever one takes fewer characters.
      */
 
     eDigits = numDigits + 4;
     if (numDigits > 1) {
-	eDigits++;			/* Decimal point. */
+	eDigits++;		/* Decimal point. */
     }
     afterDecimal = numDigits - mostSigDigit - 1;
     if (afterDecimal < 0) {
@@ -4430,10 +4395,10 @@ ComputeFormat(sbPtr)
     }
     fDigits = (mostSigDigit >= 0) ? mostSigDigit + afterDecimal : afterDecimal;
     if (afterDecimal > 0) {
-	fDigits++;			/* Decimal point. */
+	fDigits++;		/* Decimal point. */
     }
     if (mostSigDigit < 0) {
-	fDigits++;			/* Zero to left of decimal point. */
+	fDigits++;		/* Zero to left of decimal point. */
     }
     if (fDigits <= eDigits) {
 	sprintf(sbPtr->digitFormat, "%%.%df", afterDecimal);
@@ -4443,3 +4408,11 @@ ComputeFormat(sbPtr)
     sbPtr->valueFormat = sbPtr->digitFormat;
     return TCL_OK;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkFocus.c b/generic/tkFocus.c
index 967cd1c..982644e 100644
--- a/generic/tkFocus.c
+++ b/generic/tkFocus.c
@@ -1,25 +1,23 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkFocus.c --
  *
- *	This file contains procedures that manage the input
- *	focus for Tk.
+ *	This file contains functions that manage the input focus for Tk.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkFocus.c,v 1.11 2004/01/13 02:06:00 davygrvy Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkFocus.c,v 1.12 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkPort.h"
 
-
 /*
- * For each top-level window that has ever received the focus, there
- * is a record of the following type:
+ * For each top-level window that has ever received the focus, there is a
+ * record of the following type:
  */
 
 typedef struct TkToplevelFocusInfo {
@@ -33,19 +31,17 @@ typedef struct TkToplevelFocusInfo {
 } ToplevelFocusInfo;
 
 /*
- * One of the following structures exists for each display used by
- * each application.  These are linked together from the TkMainInfo
- * structure.  These structures are needed because it isn't
- * sufficient to store a single piece of focus information in each
- * display or in each application: we need the cross-product.
- * There needs to be separate information for each display, because
- * it's possible to have multiple focus windows active simultaneously
- * on different displays.  There also needs to be separate information
- * for each application, because of embedding: if an embedded
- * application has the focus, its container application also has
- * the focus.  Thus we keep a list of structures for each application:
- * the same display can appear in structures for several applications
- * at once.
+ * One of the following structures exists for each display used by each
+ * application. These are linked together from the TkMainInfo structure.
+ * These structures are needed because it isn't sufficient to store a single
+ * piece of focus information in each display or in each application: we need
+ * the cross-product. There needs to be separate information for each display,
+ * because it's possible to have multiple focus windows active simultaneously
+ * on different displays. There also needs to be separate information for each
+ * application, because of embedding: if an embedded application has the
+ * focus, its container application also has the focus. Thus we keep a list of
+ * structures for each application: the same display can appear in structures
+ * for several applications at once.
  */
 
 typedef struct TkDisplayFocusInfo {
@@ -60,34 +56,40 @@ typedef struct TkDisplayFocusInfo {
 				 * supposed to receive the X input focus as
 				 * soon as it is mapped (needed to handle the
 				 * fact that X won't allow the focus on an
-				 * unmapped window).  NULL means no delayed
+				 * unmapped window). NULL means no delayed
 				 * focus op in progress for this display. */
-    int forceFocus;		/* Associated with focusOnMapPtr:  non-zero
+    int forceFocus;		/* Associated with focusOnMapPtr: non-zero
 				 * means claim the focus even if some other
 				 * application currently has it. */
     unsigned long focusSerial;	/* Serial number of last request this
 				 * application made to change the focus on
-				 * this display.  Used to identify stale
-				 * focus notifications coming from the
-				 * X server. */
+				 * this display. Used to identify stale focus
+				 * notifications coming from the X server. */
     struct TkDisplayFocusInfo *nextPtr;
-				/* Next in list of all display focus
-				 * records for a given application. */
+				/* Next in list of all display focus records
+				 * for a given application. */
 } DisplayFocusInfo;
 
 /*
- * The following magic value is stored in the "send_event" field of
- * FocusIn and FocusOut events that are generated in this file.  This
- * allows us to separate "real" events coming from the server from
- * those that we generated.
+ * The following magic value is stored in the "send_event" field of FocusIn
+ * and FocusOut events that are generated in this file. This allows us to
+ * separate "real" events coming from the server from those that we generated.
  */
 
-#define GENERATED_EVENT_MAGIC ((Bool) 0x547321ac)
+#define GENERATED_EVENT_MAGIC	((Bool) 0x547321ac)
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Debugging support...
  */
 
+#define DEBUG(dispPtr, arguments) \
+    if ((dispPtr)->focusDebug) { \
+	printf arguments; \
+    }
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined in this file:
+ */
 
 static DisplayFocusInfo *FindDisplayFocusInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr,
 			    TkDisplay *dispPtr));
@@ -101,8 +103,8 @@ static void		GenerateFocusEvents _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *sourcePtr,
  *
  * Tk_FocusObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "focus" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "focus" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -115,8 +117,7 @@ static void		GenerateFocusEvents _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *sourcePtr,
 
 int
 Tk_FocusObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
     int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
@@ -144,17 +145,17 @@ Tk_FocusObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If invoked with a single argument beginning with "." then focus
-     * on that window.
+     * If invoked with a single argument beginning with "." then focus on that
+     * window.
      */
 
     if (objc == 2) {
-	windowName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[1], (int *) NULL);
+	windowName = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
 
 	/*
 	 * The empty string case exists for backwards compatibility.
 	 */
-	
+
 	if (windowName[0] == '\0') {
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
@@ -170,6 +171,10 @@ Tk_FocusObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
     }
 
+    /*
+     * We have a subcommand to parse and act upon.
+     */
+
     if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], focusOptions, "option", 0,
 	    &index) != TCL_OK) {
     	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -179,63 +184,58 @@ Tk_FocusObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     switch (index) {
-        case 0: {        /* -displayof */
-	    windowName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], (int *) NULL);
-	    newPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, windowName, tkwin);
-	    if (newPtr == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    newPtr = TkGetFocusWin(newPtr);
-	    if (newPtr != NULL) {
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, newPtr->pathName, TCL_STATIC);
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case 0:			/* -displayof */
+	windowName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	newPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, windowName, tkwin);
+	if (newPtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-        case 1: {        /* -force */
-	    windowName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], (int *) NULL);
+	newPtr = TkGetFocusWin(newPtr);
+	if (newPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, newPtr->pathName, TCL_STATIC);
+	}
+	break;
+    case 1:			/* -force */
+	windowName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
 
-	    /*
-	     * The empty string case exists for backwards compatibility.
-	     */
-	
-	    if (windowName[0] == '\0') {
-		return TCL_OK;
-	    }
-	    newPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, windowName, tkwin);
-	    if (newPtr == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    TkSetFocusWin(newPtr, 1);
-	    break;
+	/*
+	 * The empty string case exists for backwards compatibility.
+	 */
+
+	if (windowName[0] == '\0') {
+	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
-        case 2: {        /* -lastfor */
-	    windowName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], (int *) NULL);
-	    newPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, windowName, tkwin);
-	    if (newPtr == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+	newPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, windowName, tkwin);
+	if (newPtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	TkSetFocusWin(newPtr, 1);
+	break;
+    case 2:			/* -lastfor */
+	windowName = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	newPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, windowName, tkwin);
+	if (newPtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	for (topLevelPtr = newPtr; topLevelPtr != NULL;
+		topLevelPtr = topLevelPtr->parentPtr)  {
+	    if (!(topLevelPtr->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY)) {
+		continue;
 	    }
-	    for (topLevelPtr = newPtr; topLevelPtr != NULL;
-		    topLevelPtr = topLevelPtr->parentPtr)  {
-		if (topLevelPtr->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) {
-		    for (tlFocusPtr = newPtr->mainPtr->tlFocusPtr;
-			    tlFocusPtr != NULL;
-			    tlFocusPtr = tlFocusPtr->nextPtr) {
-		        if (tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr == topLevelPtr) {
-			    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
-				    tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr->pathName,
-				    TCL_STATIC);
-			    return TCL_OK;
-			}
-		    }
-		    Tcl_SetResult(interp, topLevelPtr->pathName, TCL_STATIC);
+	    for (tlFocusPtr = newPtr->mainPtr->tlFocusPtr; tlFocusPtr != NULL;
+		    tlFocusPtr = tlFocusPtr->nextPtr) {
+		if (tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr == topLevelPtr) {
+		    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+			    tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr->pathName, TCL_STATIC);
 		    return TCL_OK;
 		}
 	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	default: {
-	    Tcl_Panic("bad const entries to focusOptions in focus command");
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, topLevelPtr->pathName, TCL_STATIC);
+	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
+	break;
+    default:
+	Tcl_Panic("bad const entries to focusOptions in focus command");
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -245,13 +245,13 @@ Tk_FocusObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkFocusFilterEvent --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk_HandleEvent when it encounters
- *	a FocusIn, FocusOut, Enter, or Leave event.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk_HandleEvent when it encounters a
+ *	FocusIn, FocusOut, Enter, or Leave event.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A return value of 1 means that Tk_HandleEvent should process
- *	the event normally (i.e. event handlers should be invoked).
- *	A return value of 0 means that this event should be ignored.
+ *	A return value of 1 means that Tk_HandleEvent should process the event
+ *	normally (i.e. event handlers should be invoked). A return value of 0
+ *	means that this event should be ignored.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Additional events may be generated, and the focus may switch.
@@ -266,21 +266,19 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
 				 * event. */
 {
     /*
-     * Design notes: the window manager and X server work together to
-     * transfer the focus among top-level windows.  This procedure takes
-     * care of transferring the focus from a top-level or wrapper window
-     * to the actual window within that top-level that has the focus. 
-     * We do this by synthesizing X events to move the focus around. 
-     * None of the FocusIn and FocusOut events generated by X are ever
-     * used outside of this procedure;  only the synthesized events get
-     * through to the rest of the application.  At one point (e.g.
-     * Tk4.0b1) Tk used to call X to move the focus from a top-level to
-     * one of its descendants, then just pass through the events
-     * generated by X. This approach didn't work very well, for a
-     * variety of reasons. For example, if X generates the events they
-     * go at the back of the event queue, which could cause problems if
-     * other things have already happened, such as moving the focus to
-     * yet another window.
+     * Design notes: the window manager and X server work together to transfer
+     * the focus among top-level windows. This function takes care of
+     * transferring the focus from a top-level or wrapper window to the actual
+     * window within that top-level that has the focus. We do this by
+     * synthesizing X events to move the focus around. None of the FocusIn and
+     * FocusOut events generated by X are ever used outside of this function;
+     * only the synthesized events get through to the rest of the application.
+     * At one point (e.g. Tk4.0b1) Tk used to call X to move the focus from a
+     * top-level to one of its descendants, then just pass through the events
+     * generated by X. This approach didn't work very well, for a variety of
+     * reasons. For example, if X generates the events they go at the back of
+     * the event queue, which could cause problems if other things have
+     * already happened, such as moving the focus to yet another window.
      */
 
     ToplevelFocusInfo *tlFocusPtr;
@@ -290,8 +288,8 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     int retValue, delta;
 
     /*
-     * If this was a generated event, just turn off the generated
-     * flag and pass the event through to Tk bindings.
+     * If this was a generated event, just turn off the generated flag and
+     * pass the event through to Tk bindings.
      */
 
     if (eventPtr->xfocus.send_event == GENERATED_EVENT_MAGIC) {
@@ -300,11 +298,11 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Check for special events generated by embedded applications to
-     * request the input focus.  If this is one of those events, make
-     * the change in focus and return without any additional processing
-     * of the event (note: the "detail" field of the event indicates
-     * whether to claim the focus even if we don't already have it).
+     * Check for special events generated by embedded applications to request
+     * the input focus. If this is one of those events, make the change in
+     * focus and return without any additional processing of the event (note:
+     * the "detail" field of the event indicates whether to claim the focus
+     * even if we don't already have it).
      */
 
     if ((eventPtr->xfocus.mode == EMBEDDED_APP_WANTS_FOCUS)
@@ -314,10 +312,9 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * This was not a generated event.  We'll return 1 (so that the
-     * event will be processed) if it's an Enter or Leave event, and
-     * 0 (so that the event won't be processed) if it's a FocusIn or
-     * FocusOut event.
+     * This was not a generated event. We'll return 1 (so that the event will
+     * be processed) if it's an Enter or Leave event, and 0 (so that the event
+     * won't be processed) if it's a FocusIn or FocusOut event.
      */
 
     retValue = 0;
@@ -325,26 +322,26 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn) {
 	/*
 	 * Skip FocusIn events that cause confusion
-	 * NotifyVirtual and NotifyNonlinearVirtual - Virtual events occur
-	 *	on windows in between the origin and destination of the
-	 *	focus change.  For FocusIn we may see this when focus
-	 *	goes into an embedded child.  We don't care about this,
-	 *	although we may end up getting a NotifyPointer later.
-	 * NotifyInferior - focus is coming to us from an embedded child.
-	 *	When focus is on an embeded focus, we still think we have
-	 *	the focus, too, so this message doesn't change our state.
-	 * NotifyPointerRoot - should never happen because this is sent
-	 *	to the root window.
+	 * NotifyVirtual and NotifyNonlinearVirtual - Virtual events occur on
+	 *	windows in between the origin and destination of the focus
+	 *	change. For FocusIn we may see this when focus goes into an
+	 *	embedded child. We don't care about this, although we may end
+	 *	up getting a NotifyPointer later.
+	 * NotifyInferior - focus is coming to us from an embedded child. When
+	 *	focus is on an embeded focus, we still think we have the
+	 *	focus, too, so this message doesn't change our state.
+	 * NotifyPointerRoot - should never happen because this is sent to the
+	 *	root window.
 	 *
 	 * Interesting FocusIn events are
 	 * NotifyAncestor - focus is coming from our parent, probably the root.
 	 * NotifyNonlinear - focus is coming from a different branch, probably
 	 *	another toplevel.
-	 * NotifyPointer - implicit focus because of the mouse position.
-	 *	This is	only interesting on toplevels, when it means that the
-	 *	focus has been set to the root window but the mouse is over
-	 *	this toplevel.  We take the focus implicitly (probably no
-	 *	window manager)
+	 * NotifyPointer - implicit focus because of the mouse position. This
+	 *	is only interesting on toplevels, when it means that the focus
+	 *	has been set to the root window but the mouse is over this
+	 *	toplevel. We take the focus implicitly (probably no window
+	 *	manager)
 	 */
 
 	if ((eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyVirtual)
@@ -357,12 +354,12 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
 	/*
 	 * Skip FocusOut events that cause confusion.
 	 * NotifyPointer - the pointer is in us or a child, and we are losing
-	 *	focus because of an XSetInputFocus.  Other focus events
-	 *	will set our state properly.
-	 * NotifyPointerRoot - should never happen because this is sent
-	 *	to the root window.
-	 * NotifyInferior - focus leaving us for an embedded child.  We
-	 *	retain a notion of focus when an embedded child has focus.
+	 *	focus because of an XSetInputFocus. Other focus events will
+	 *	set our state properly.
+	 * NotifyPointerRoot - should never happen because this is sent to the
+	 *	root window.
+	 * NotifyInferior - focus leaving us for an embedded child. We retain
+	 *	a notion of focus when an embedded child has focus.
 	 *
 	 * Interesting events are:
 	 * NotifyAncestor - focus is going to root.
@@ -394,8 +391,8 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If there is a grab in effect and this window is outside the
-     * grabbed tree, then ignore the event.
+     * If there is a grab in effect and this window is outside the grabbed
+     * tree, then ignore the event.
      */
 
     if (TkGrabState(winPtr) == TK_GRAB_EXCLUDED)  {
@@ -403,16 +400,15 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * It is possible that there were outstanding FocusIn and FocusOut
-     * events on their way to us at the time the focus was changed
-     * internally with the "focus" command.  If so, these events could
-     * potentially cause us to lose the focus (switch it to the window
-     * of the last FocusIn event) even though the focus change occurred
-     * after those events.  The following code detects this and ignores
-     * the stale events.
+     * It is possible that there were outstanding FocusIn and FocusOut events
+     * on their way to us at the time the focus was changed internally with
+     * the "focus" command. If so, these events could potentially cause us to
+     * lose the focus (switch it to the window of the last FocusIn event) even
+     * though the focus change occurred after those events. The following code
+     * detects this and ignores the stale events.
      *
-     * Note: the focusSerial is only generated by TkpChangeFocus,
-     * whereas in Tk 4.2 there was always a nop marker generated.
+     * Note: the focusSerial is only generated by TkpChangeFocus, whereas in
+     * Tk 4.2 there was always a nop marker generated.
      */
 
     delta = eventPtr->xfocus.serial - displayFocusPtr->focusSerial;
@@ -442,6 +438,7 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     /*
      * Ignore event if newFocus window is already dead!
      */
+
     if (newFocusPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD) {
 	return retValue;
     }
@@ -453,7 +450,7 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
 
 	/*
 	 * NotifyPointer gets set when the focus has been set to the root
-	 * window but we have the pointer.  We'll treat this like an implicit
+	 * window but we have the pointer. We'll treat this like an implicit
 	 * focus in event so that upon Leave events we release focus.
 	 */
 
@@ -468,9 +465,9 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
 	GenerateFocusEvents(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr, (TkWindow *) NULL);
 
 	/*
-	 * Reset dispPtr->focusPtr, but only if it currently is the same
-	 * as this application's focusWinPtr: this check is needed to
-	 * handle embedded applications in the same process.
+	 * Reset dispPtr->focusPtr, but only if it currently is the same as
+	 * this application's focusWinPtr: this check is needed to handle
+	 * embedded applications in the same process.
 	 */
 
 	if (dispPtr->focusPtr == displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr) {
@@ -480,25 +477,22 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     } else if (eventPtr->type == EnterNotify) {
 	/*
 	 * If there is no window manager, or if the window manager isn't
-	 * moving the focus around (e.g. the disgusting "NoTitleFocus"
-	 * option has been selected in twm), then we won't get FocusIn
-	 * or FocusOut events.  Instead, the "focus" field will be set
-	 * in an Enter event to indicate that we've already got the focus
-	 * when the mouse enters the window (even though we didn't get
-	 * a FocusIn event).  Watch for this and grab the focus when it
-	 * happens.  Note: if this is an embedded application then don't
-	 * accept the focus implicitly like this;  the container
-	 * application will give us the focus explicitly if it wants us
-	 * to have it.
+	 * moving the focus around (e.g. the disgusting "NoTitleFocus" option
+	 * has been selected in twm), then we won't get FocusIn or FocusOut
+	 * events. Instead, the "focus" field will be set in an Enter event to
+	 * indicate that we've already got the focus when the mouse enters the
+	 * window (even though we didn't get a FocusIn event). Watch for this
+	 * and grab the focus when it happens. Note: if this is an embedded
+	 * application then don't accept the focus implicitly like this; the
+	 * container application will give us the focus explicitly if it wants
+	 * us to have it.
 	 */
 
 	if (eventPtr->xcrossing.focus &&
-                (displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr == NULL)
+		(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr == NULL)
 		&& !(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)) {
-	    if (dispPtr->focusDebug) {
-		printf("Focussed implicitly on %s\n",
-			newFocusPtr->pathName);
-	    }
+	    DEBUG(dispPtr,
+		    ("Focussed implicitly on %s\n", newFocusPtr->pathName));
 
 	    GenerateFocusEvents(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr, newFocusPtr);
 	    displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = newFocusPtr;
@@ -509,20 +503,18 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
 	/*
 	 * If the pointer just left a window for which we automatically
 	 * claimed the focus on enter, move the focus back to the root
-	 * window, where it was before we claimed it above.  Note:
+	 * window, where it was before we claimed it above. Note:
 	 * dispPtr->implicitWinPtr may not be the same as
-	 * displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr (e.g. because the "focus"
-	 * command was used to redirect the focus after it arrived at
-	 * dispPtr->implicitWinPtr)!!  In addition, we generate events
+	 * displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr (e.g. because the "focus" command
+	 * was used to redirect the focus after it arrived at
+	 * dispPtr->implicitWinPtr)!! In addition, we generate events
 	 * because the window manager won't give us a FocusOut event when
-	 * we focus on the root. 
+	 * we focus on the root.
 	 */
 
 	if ((dispPtr->implicitWinPtr != NULL)
 		&& !(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)) {
-	    if (dispPtr->focusDebug) {
-		printf("Defocussed implicit Async\n");
-	    }
+	    DEBUG(dispPtr, ("Defocussed implicit Async\n"));
 	    GenerateFocusEvents(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr,
 		    (TkWindow *) NULL);
 	    XSetInputFocus(dispPtr->display, PointerRoot, RevertToPointerRoot,
@@ -539,8 +531,8 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
  *
  * TkSetFocusWin --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to change the focus window for a
- *	given display in a given application.
+ *	This function is invoked to change the focus window for a given
+ *	display in a given application.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -554,11 +546,11 @@ TkFocusFilterEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
 
 void
 TkSetFocusWin(winPtr, force)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that is to be the new focus for
-				 * its display and application. */
-    int force;			/* If non-zero, set the X focus to this
-				 * window even if the application doesn't
-				 * currently have the X focus. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that is to be the new focus for its
+				 * display and application. */
+    int force;			/* If non-zero, set the X focus to this window
+				 * even if the application doesn't currently
+				 * have the X focus. */
 {
     ToplevelFocusInfo *tlFocusPtr;
     DisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr;
@@ -568,9 +560,9 @@ TkSetFocusWin(winPtr, force)
     displayFocusPtr = FindDisplayFocusInfo(winPtr->mainPtr, winPtr->dispPtr);
 
     /*
-     * If force is set, we should make sure we grab the focus regardless
-     * of the current focus window since under Windows, we may need to
-     * take control away from another application.
+     * If force is set, we should make sure we grab the focus regardless of
+     * the current focus window since under Windows, we may need to take
+     * control away from another application.
      */
 
     if (winPtr == displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr && !force) {
@@ -578,18 +570,19 @@ TkSetFocusWin(winPtr, force)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find the top-level window for winPtr, then find (or create)
-     * a record for the top-level.  Also see whether winPtr and all its
-     * ancestors are mapped.
+     * Find the top-level window for winPtr, then find (or create) a record
+     * for the top-level. Also see whether winPtr and all its ancestors are
+     * mapped.
      */
 
     allMapped = 1;
     for (topLevelPtr = winPtr; ; topLevelPtr = topLevelPtr->parentPtr)  {
 	if (topLevelPtr == NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * The window is being deleted.  No point in worrying about
-	     * giving it the focus.
+	     * The window is being deleted. No point in worrying about giving
+	     * it the focus.
 	     */
+
 	    return;
 	}
 	if (!(topLevelPtr->flags & TK_MAPPED)) {
@@ -601,11 +594,11 @@ TkSetFocusWin(winPtr, force)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the new focus window isn't mapped, then we can't focus on it
-     * (X will generate an error, for example).  Instead, create an
-     * event handler that will set the focus to this window once it gets
-     * mapped.  At the same time, delete any old handler that might be
-     * around;  it's no longer relevant.
+     * If the new focus window isn't mapped, then we can't focus on it (X will
+     * generate an error, for example). Instead, create an event handler that
+     * will set the focus to this window once it gets mapped. At the same
+     * time, delete any old handler that might be around; it's no longer
+     * relevant.
      */
 
     if (displayFocusPtr->focusOnMapPtr != NULL) {
@@ -639,16 +632,15 @@ TkSetFocusWin(winPtr, force)
     tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = winPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Reset the window system's focus window and generate focus events,
-     * with two special cases:
+     * Reset the window system's focus window and generate focus events, with
+     * two special cases:
      *
-     * 1. If the application is embedded and doesn't currently have the
-     *    focus, don't set the focus directly.  Instead, see if the
-     *    embedding code can claim the focus from the enclosing
-     *    container.
-     * 2. Otherwise, if the application doesn't currently have the
-     *    focus, don't change the window system's focus unless it was
-     *    already in this application or "force" was specified.
+     * 1. If the application is embedded and doesn't currently have the focus,
+     *    don't set the focus directly. Instead, see if the embedding code can
+     *    claim the focus from the enclosing container.
+     * 2. Otherwise, if the application doesn't currently have the focus,
+     *    don't change the window system's focus unless it was already in this
+     *    application or "force" was specified.
      */
 
     if ((topLevelPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)
@@ -656,12 +648,11 @@ TkSetFocusWin(winPtr, force)
 	TkpClaimFocus(topLevelPtr, force);
     } else if ((displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr != NULL) || force) {
 	/*
-	 * Generate events to shift focus between Tk windows.
-	 * We do this regardless of what TkpChangeFocus does with
-	 * the real X focus so that Tk widgets track focus commands
-	 * when there is no window manager.  GenerateFocusEvents will
-	 * set up a serial number marker so we discard focus events
-	 * that are triggered by the ChangeFocus.
+	 * Generate events to shift focus between Tk windows. We do this
+	 * regardless of what TkpChangeFocus does with the real X focus so
+	 * that Tk widgets track focus commands when there is no window
+	 * manager. GenerateFocusEvents will set up a serial number marker so
+	 * we discard focus events that are triggered by the ChangeFocus.
 	 */
 
 	serial = TkpChangeFocus(TkpGetWrapperWindow(topLevelPtr), force);
@@ -679,13 +670,13 @@ TkSetFocusWin(winPtr, force)
  *
  * TkGetFocusWin --
  *
- *	Given a window, this procedure returns the current focus
- *	window for its application and display.
+ *	Given a window, this function returns the current focus window for its
+ *	application and display.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the window that currently
- *	has the input focus for the specified application and
- *	display, or NULL if none.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the window that currently has the
+ *	input focus for the specified application and display, or NULL if
+ *	none.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -695,8 +686,8 @@ TkSetFocusWin(winPtr, force)
 
 TkWindow *
 TkGetFocusWin(winPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that selects an application
-				 * and a display. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that selects an application and a
+				 * display. */
 {
     DisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr;
 
@@ -713,16 +704,16 @@ TkGetFocusWin(winPtr)
  *
  * TkFocusKeyEvent --
  *
- *	Given a window and a key press or release event that arrived for
- *	the window, use information about the keyboard focus to compute
- *	which window should really get the event.  In addition, update
- *	the event to refer to its new window.
+ *	Given a window and a key press or release event that arrived for the
+ *	window, use information about the keyboard focus to compute which
+ *	window should really get the event. In addition, update the event to
+ *	refer to its new window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the window that has the input
- *	focus in winPtr's application, or NULL if winPtr's application
- *	doesn't have the input focus.  If a non-NULL value is returned,
- *	eventPtr will be updated to refer properly to the focus window.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the window that has the input focus
+ *	in winPtr's application, or NULL if winPtr's application doesn't have
+ *	the input focus. If a non-NULL value is returned, eventPtr will be
+ *	updated to refer properly to the focus window.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -732,10 +723,10 @@ TkGetFocusWin(winPtr)
 
 TkWindow *
 TkFocusKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that selects an application
-				 * and a display. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X event to redirect (should be KeyPress
-				 * or KeyRelease). */
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that selects an application and a
+				 * display. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X event to redirect (should be KeyPress or
+				 * KeyRelease). */
 {
     DisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr;
     TkWindow *focusWinPtr;
@@ -762,9 +753,9 @@ TkFocusKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
 
     if ((focusWinPtr != NULL) && (focusWinPtr->mainPtr == winPtr->mainPtr)) {
 	/*
-	 * Map the x and y coordinates to make sense in the context of
-	 * the focus window, if possible (make both -1 if the map-from
-	 * and map-to windows don't share the same screen).
+	 * Map the x and y coordinates to make sense in the context of the
+	 * focus window, if possible (make both -1 if the map-from and map-to
+	 * windows don't share the same screen).
 	 */
 
 	if ((focusWinPtr->display != winPtr->display)
@@ -783,9 +774,9 @@ TkFocusKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The event doesn't belong to us.  Perhaps, due to embedding, it
-     * really belongs to someone else.  Give the embedding code a chance
-     * to redirect the event.
+     * The event doesn't belong to us. Perhaps, due to embedding, it really
+     * belongs to someone else. Give the embedding code a chance to redirect
+     * the event.
      */
 
     TkpRedirectKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr);
@@ -797,9 +788,8 @@ TkFocusKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
  *
  * TkFocusDeadWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when it is determined that
- *	a window is dead.  It cleans up focus-related information
- *	about the window.
+ *	This function is invoked when it is determined that a window is dead.
+ *	It cleans up focus-related information about the window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -812,24 +802,25 @@ TkFocusKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
 
 void
 TkFocusDeadWindow(winPtr)
-    register TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Information about the window
-					 * that is being deleted. */
+    register TkWindow *winPtr;	/* Information about the window that is being
+				 * deleted. */
 {
     ToplevelFocusInfo *tlFocusPtr, *prevPtr;
     DisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Certain special windows like those used for send and clipboard
-     * have no mainPtr.
+     * Certain special windows like those used for send and clipboard have no
+     * mainPtr.
      */
 
-    if (winPtr->mainPtr == NULL)
-        return;
+    if (winPtr->mainPtr == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
 
     /*
-     * Search for focus records that refer to this window either as
-     * the top-level window or the current focus window.
+     * Search for focus records that refer to this window either as the
+     * top-level window or the current focus window.
      */
 
     displayFocusPtr = FindDisplayFocusInfo(winPtr->mainPtr, winPtr->dispPtr);
@@ -838,16 +829,14 @@ TkFocusDeadWindow(winPtr)
 	    prevPtr = tlFocusPtr, tlFocusPtr = tlFocusPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (winPtr == tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr) {
 	    /*
-	     * The top-level window is the one being deleted: free
-	     * the focus record and release the focus back to PointerRoot
-	     * if we acquired it implicitly.
+	     * The top-level window is the one being deleted: free the focus
+	     * record and release the focus back to PointerRoot if we acquired
+	     * it implicitly.
 	     */
 
 	    if (dispPtr->implicitWinPtr == winPtr) {
-		if (dispPtr->focusDebug) {
-		    printf("releasing focus to root after %s died\n",
-			    tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr->pathName);
-		}
+		DEBUG(dispPtr, ("releasing focus to root after %s died\n",
+			tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr->pathName));
 		dispPtr->implicitWinPtr = NULL;
 		displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = NULL;
 		dispPtr->focusPtr = NULL;
@@ -865,18 +854,15 @@ TkFocusDeadWindow(winPtr)
 	    break;
 	} else if (winPtr == tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr) {
 	    /*
-	     * The deleted window had the focus for its top-level:
-	     * move the focus to the top-level itself.
+	     * The deleted window had the focus for its top-level: move the
+	     * focus to the top-level itself.
 	     */
 
 	    tlFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr;
 	    if ((displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr == winPtr)
 		    && !(tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD)) {
-		if (dispPtr->focusDebug) {
-		    printf("forwarding focus to %s after %s died\n",
-			    tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr->pathName,
-			    winPtr->pathName);
-		}
+		DEBUG(dispPtr, ("forwarding focus to %s after %s died\n",
+			tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr->pathName, winPtr->pathName));
 		GenerateFocusEvents(displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr,
 			tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr);
 		displayFocusPtr->focusWinPtr = tlFocusPtr->topLevelPtr;
@@ -896,8 +882,8 @@ TkFocusDeadWindow(winPtr)
  *
  * GenerateFocusEvents --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to create FocusIn and FocusOut events to
- *	move the input focus from one window to another.
+ *	This function is called to create FocusIn and FocusOut events to move
+ *	the input focus from one window to another.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -910,8 +896,8 @@ TkFocusDeadWindow(winPtr)
 
 static void
 GenerateFocusEvents(sourcePtr, destPtr)
-    TkWindow *sourcePtr;	/* Window that used to have the focus (may
-				 * be NULL). */
+    TkWindow *sourcePtr;	/* Window that used to have the focus (may be
+				 * NULL). */
     TkWindow *destPtr;		/* New window to have the focus (may be
 				 * NULL). */
 
@@ -940,18 +926,18 @@ GenerateFocusEvents(sourcePtr, destPtr)
  *
  * FocusMapProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called as an event handler for VisibilityNotify
- *	events, if a window receives the focus at a time when its
- *	toplevel isn't mapped.  The procedure is needed because X
- *	won't allow the focus to be set to an unmapped window;  we
- *	detect when the toplevel is mapped and set the focus to it then.
+ *	This function is called as an event handler for VisibilityNotify
+ *	events, if a window receives the focus at a time when its toplevel
+ *	isn't mapped. The function is needed because X won't allow the focus
+ *	to be set to an unmapped window; we detect when the toplevel is mapped
+ *	and set the focus to it then.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If this is a map event, the focus gets set to the toplevel
- *	given by clientData.
+ *	If this is a map event, the focus gets set to the toplevel given by
+ *	clientData.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -967,10 +953,8 @@ FocusMapProc(clientData, eventPtr)
     if (eventPtr->type == VisibilityNotify) {
 	displayFocusPtr = FindDisplayFocusInfo(winPtr->mainPtr,
 		winPtr->dispPtr);
-	if (winPtr->dispPtr->focusDebug) {
-	    printf("auto-focussing on %s, force %d\n", winPtr->pathName,
-		    displayFocusPtr->forceFocus);
-	}
+	DEBUG(winPtr->dispPtr, ("auto-focussing on %s, force %d\n",
+		winPtr->pathName, displayFocusPtr->forceFocus));
 	Tk_DeleteEventHandler((Tk_Window) winPtr, VisibilityChangeMask,
 		FocusMapProc, clientData);
 	displayFocusPtr->focusOnMapPtr = NULL;
@@ -983,9 +967,9 @@ FocusMapProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * FindDisplayFocusInfo --
  *
- *	Given an application and a display, this procedure locate the
- *	focus record for that combination.  If no such record exists,
- *	it creates a new record and initializes it.
+ *	Given an application and a display, this function locate the focus
+ *	record for that combination. If no such record exists, it creates a
+ *	new record and initializes it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a pointer to the record.
@@ -1014,7 +998,7 @@ FindDisplayFocusInfo(mainPtr, dispPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The record doesn't exist yet.  Make a new one.
+     * The record doesn't exist yet. Make a new one.
      */
 
     displayFocusPtr = (DisplayFocusInfo *) ckalloc(sizeof(DisplayFocusInfo));
@@ -1049,17 +1033,24 @@ TkFocusFree(mainPtr)
     TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* Record that identifies a particular
 				 * application. */
 {
-    DisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr;
-    ToplevelFocusInfo *tlFocusPtr;
-
     while (mainPtr->displayFocusPtr != NULL) {
-	displayFocusPtr          = mainPtr->displayFocusPtr;
+	DisplayFocusInfo *displayFocusPtr = mainPtr->displayFocusPtr;
+
 	mainPtr->displayFocusPtr = mainPtr->displayFocusPtr->nextPtr;
 	ckfree((char *) displayFocusPtr);
     }
     while (mainPtr->tlFocusPtr != NULL) {
-	tlFocusPtr          = mainPtr->tlFocusPtr;
+	ToplevelFocusInfo *tlFocusPtr = mainPtr->tlFocusPtr;
+
 	mainPtr->tlFocusPtr = mainPtr->tlFocusPtr->nextPtr;
 	ckfree((char *) tlFocusPtr);
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkFont.c b/generic/tkFont.c
index 8274cfe..8574ff0 100644
--- a/generic/tkFont.c
+++ b/generic/tkFont.c
@@ -1,17 +1,16 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkFont.c --
  *
- *	This file maintains a database of fonts for the Tk toolkit.
- *	It also provides several utility procedures for measuring and
- *	displaying text.
+ *	This file maintains a database of fonts for the Tk toolkit. It also
+ *	provides several utility functions for measuring and displaying text.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkFont.c,v 1.22 2004/01/13 02:06:00 davygrvy Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkFont.c,v 1.23 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkPort.h"
@@ -19,28 +18,28 @@
 #include "tkFont.h"
 
 /*
- * The following structure is used to keep track of all the fonts that
- * exist in the current application.  It must be stored in the
- * TkMainInfo for the application.
+ * The following structure is used to keep track of all the fonts that exist
+ * in the current application. It must be stored in the TkMainInfo for the
+ * application.
  */
- 
+
 typedef struct TkFontInfo {
-    Tcl_HashTable fontCache;	/* Map a string to an existing Tk_Font.
-				 * Keys are string font names, values are
-				 * TkFont pointers. */
+    Tcl_HashTable fontCache;	/* Map a string to an existing Tk_Font. Keys
+				 * are string font names, values are TkFont
+				 * pointers. */
     Tcl_HashTable namedTable;	/* Map a name to a set of attributes for a
 				 * font, used when constructing a Tk_Font from
-				 * a named font description.  Keys are
-				 * strings, values are NamedFont pointers. */
+				 * a named font description. Keys are strings,
+				 * values are NamedFont pointers. */
     TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* Application that owns this structure. */
     int updatePending;		/* Non-zero when a World Changed event has
-				 * already been queued to handle a change to
-				 * a named font. */
+				 * already been queued to handle a change to a
+				 * named font. */
 } TkFontInfo;
 
 /*
  * The following data structure is used to keep track of the font attributes
- * for each named font that has been defined.  The named font is only deleted
+ * for each named font that has been defined. The named font is only deleted
  * when the last reference to it goes away.
  */
 
@@ -50,21 +49,20 @@ typedef struct NamedFont {
 				 * last reference goes away. */
     TkFontAttributes fa;	/* Desired attributes for named font. */
 } NamedFont;
-    
+
 /*
- * The following two structures are used to keep track of string
- * measurement information when using the text layout facilities.
+ * The following two structures are used to keep track of string measurement
+ * information when using the text layout facilities.
  *
  * A LayoutChunk represents a contiguous range of text that can be measured
- * and displayed by low-level text calls.  In general, chunks will be
- * delimited by newlines and tabs.  Low-level, platform-specific things
- * like kerning and non-integer character widths may occur between the
- * characters in a single chunk, but not between characters in different
- * chunks.
- *
- * A TextLayout is a collection of LayoutChunks.  It can be displayed with
- * respect to any origin.  It is the implementation of the Tk_TextLayout
- * opaque token.
+ * and displayed by low-level text calls. In general, chunks will be delimited
+ * by newlines and tabs. Low-level, platform-specific things like kerning and
+ * non-integer character widths may occur between the characters in a single
+ * chunk, but not between characters in different chunks.
+ *
+ * A TextLayout is a collection of LayoutChunks. It can be displayed with
+ * respect to any origin. It is the implementation of the Tk_TextLayout opaque
+ * token.
  */
 
 typedef struct LayoutChunk {
@@ -74,19 +72,19 @@ typedef struct LayoutChunk {
     int numBytes;		/* The number of bytes in this chunk. */
     int numChars;		/* The number of characters in this chunk. */
     int numDisplayChars;	/* The number of characters to display when
-				 * this chunk is displayed.  Can be less than
+				 * this chunk is displayed. Can be less than
 				 * numChars if extra space characters were
-				 * absorbed by the end of the chunk.  This
-				 * will be < 0 if this is a chunk that is
-				 * holding a tab or newline. */
+				 * absorbed by the end of the chunk. This will
+				 * be < 0 if this is a chunk that is holding a
+				 * tab or newline. */
     int x, y;			/* The origin of the first character in this
 				 * chunk with respect to the upper-left hand
 				 * corner of the TextLayout. */
-    int totalWidth;		/* Width in pixels of this chunk.  Used
-				 * when hit testing the invisible spaces at
-				 * the end of a chunk. */
+    int totalWidth;		/* Width in pixels of this chunk. Used when
+				 * hit testing the invisible spaces at the end
+				 * of a chunk. */
     int displayWidth;		/* Width in pixels of the displayable
-				 * characters in this chunk.  Can be less than
+				 * characters in this chunk. Can be less than
 				 * width if extra space characters were
 				 * absorbed by the end of the chunk. */
 } LayoutChunk;
@@ -94,20 +92,20 @@ typedef struct LayoutChunk {
 typedef struct TextLayout {
     Tk_Font tkfont;		/* The font used when laying out the text. */
     CONST char *string;		/* The string that was layed out. */
-    int width;			/* The maximum width of all lines in the
-				 * text layout. */
-    int numChunks;		/* Number of chunks actually used in
-				 * following array. */
-    LayoutChunk chunks[1];	/* Array of chunks.  The actual size will
-				 * be maxChunks.  THIS FIELD MUST BE THE LAST
-				 * IN THE STRUCTURE. */
+    int width;			/* The maximum width of all lines in the text
+				 * layout. */
+    int numChunks;		/* Number of chunks actually used in following
+				 * array. */
+    LayoutChunk chunks[1];	/* Array of chunks. The actual size will be
+				 * maxChunks. THIS FIELD MUST BE THE LAST IN
+				 * THE STRUCTURE. */
 } TextLayout;
 
 /*
  * The following structures are used as two-way maps between the values for
- * the fields in the TkFontAttributes structure and the strings used in
- * Tcl, when parsing both option-value format and style-list format font
- * name strings.
+ * the fields in the TkFontAttributes structure and the strings used in Tcl,
+ * when parsing both option-value format and style-list format font name
+ * strings.
  */
 
 static TkStateMap weightMap[] = {
@@ -146,7 +144,7 @@ static TkStateMap xlfdWeightMap[] = {
     {TK_FW_BOLD,	"demi"},
     {TK_FW_BOLD,	"demibold"},
     {TK_FW_NORMAL,	NULL}		/* Assume anything else is "normal". */
-}; 
+};
 
 static TkStateMap xlfdSlantMap[] = {
     {TK_FS_ROMAN,	"r"},
@@ -164,8 +162,8 @@ static TkStateMap xlfdSetwidthMap[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * The following structure and defines specify the valid builtin options 
- * when configuring a set of font attributes.
+ * The following structure and defines specify the valid builtin options when
+ * configuring a set of font attributes.
  */
 
 static CONST char *fontOpt[] = {
@@ -187,10 +185,10 @@ static CONST char *fontOpt[] = {
 #define FONT_NUMFIELDS	6
 
 /*
- * Hardcoded font aliases.  These are used to describe (mostly) identical
- * fonts whose names differ from platform to platform.  If the
- * user-supplied font name matches any of the names in one of the alias
- * lists, the other names in the alias list are also automatically tried.
+ * Hardcoded font aliases. These are used to describe (mostly) identical fonts
+ * whose names differ from platform to platform. If the user-supplied font
+ * name matches any of the names in one of the alias lists, the other names in
+ * the alias list are also automatically tried.
  */
 
 static char *timesAliases[] = {
@@ -228,7 +226,7 @@ static char *gothicAliases[] = {
 				/* Windows (MS goshikku). */
     "\344\270\270\343\202\264\343\202\267\343\203\203\343\202\257\342\210\222\357\274\255",
 				/* Mac (goshikku-M). */
-    NULL    
+    NULL
 };
 
 static char *dingbatsAliases[] = {
@@ -247,43 +245,46 @@ static char **fontAliases[] = {
     gothicAliases,
     dingbatsAliases,
     NULL
-};  
+};
 
 /*
- * Hardcoded font classes.  If the character cannot be found in the base 
- * font, the classes are examined in order to see if some other similar 
- * font should be examined also.  
+ * Hardcoded font classes. If the character cannot be found in the base font,
+ * the classes are examined in order to see if some other similar font should
+ * be examined also.
  */
 
 static char *systemClass[] = {
-    "fixed",				/* Unix. */
-					/* Windows. */
-    "chicago", "osaka", "sistemny",	/* Mac. */
+    "fixed",			/* Unix. */
+				/* Windows. */
+    "chicago", "osaka", "sistemny",
+				/* Mac. */
     NULL
 };
 
 static char *serifClass[] = {
-    "times", "palatino", "mincho",	/* All platforms. */
-    "song ti",				/* Unix. */
-    "ms serif", "simplified arabic", 	/* Windows. */
-    "latinski",				/* Mac. */
+    "times", "palatino", "mincho",
+				/* All platforms. */
+    "song ti",			/* Unix. */
+    "ms serif", "simplified arabic",
+				/* Windows. */
+    "latinski",			/* Mac. */
     NULL
 };
 
 static char *sansClass[] = {
-    "helvetica", "gothic",		/* All platforms. */
-					/* Unix. */
+    "helvetica", "gothic",	/* All platforms. */
+				/* Unix. */
     "ms sans serif", "traditional arabic",
-					/* Windows. */
-    "bastion",				/* Mac. */
+				/* Windows. */
+    "bastion",			/* Mac. */
     NULL
 };
 
 static char *monoClass[] = {
-    "courier", "gothic",		/* All platforms. */
-    "fangsong ti",			/* Unix. */
-    "simplified arabic fixed",		/* Windows. */
-    "monaco", "pryamoy",		/* Mac. */
+    "courier", "gothic",	/* All platforms. */
+    "fangsong ti",		/* Unix. */
+    "simplified arabic fixed",	/* Windows. */
+    "monaco", "pryamoy",	/* Mac. */
     NULL
 };
 
@@ -301,9 +302,9 @@ static char **fontFallbacks[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Global fallbacks.  If the character could not be found in the preferred
- * fallback list, this list is examined.  If the character still cannot be
- * found, all font families in the system are examined. 
+ * Global fallbacks. If the character could not be found in the preferred
+ * fallback list, this list is examined. If the character still cannot be
+ * found, all font families in the system are examined.
  */
 
 static char *globalFontClass[] = {
@@ -316,43 +317,37 @@ static char *globalFontClass[] = {
 };
 
 #define GetFontAttributes(tkfont) \
-		((CONST TkFontAttributes *) &((TkFont *) (tkfont))->fa)
+	((CONST TkFontAttributes *) &((TkFont *) (tkfont))->fa)
 
 #define GetFontMetrics(tkfont)    \
-		((CONST TkFontMetrics *) &((TkFont *) (tkfont))->fm)
+	((CONST TkFontMetrics *) &((TkFont *) (tkfont))->fm)
 
 
-static int		ConfigAttributesObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+static int		ConfigAttributesObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tk_Window tkwin, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
-			    TkFontAttributes *faPtr));
-static int		CreateNamedFont _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name,
-			    TkFontAttributes *faPtr));
-static void		DupFontObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr));
-static int		FieldSpecified _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *field));
-static void		FreeFontObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static int		GetAttributeInfoObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static LayoutChunk *	NewChunk _ANSI_ARGS_((TextLayout **layoutPtrPtr,
-			    int *maxPtr, CONST char *start, int numChars,
-			    int curX, int newX, int y));
-static int		ParseFontNameObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr,
-			    TkFontAttributes *faPtr));
-static void		RecomputeWidgets _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
-static int		SetFontFromAny _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static void		TheWorldHasChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		UpdateDependentFonts _ANSI_ARGS_((TkFontInfo *fiPtr,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr));
+			    TkFontAttributes *faPtr);
+static int		CreateNamedFont(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    CONST char *name, TkFontAttributes *faPtr);
+static void		DupFontObjProc(Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr, Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr);
+static int		FieldSpecified(CONST char *field);
+static void		FreeFontObjProc(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static int		GetAttributeInfoObj(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static LayoutChunk *	NewChunk(TextLayout **layoutPtrPtr, int *maxPtr,
+			    CONST char *start, int numChars, int curX,
+			    int newX, int y);
+static int		ParseFontNameObj(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, TkFontAttributes *faPtr);
+static void		RecomputeWidgets(TkWindow *winPtr);
+static int		SetFontFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static void		TheWorldHasChanged(ClientData clientData);
+static void		UpdateDependentFonts(TkFontInfo *fiPtr,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr);
 
 /*
  * The following structure defines the implementation of the "font" Tcl
- * object, used for drawing. The internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 field of
- * each font object points to the TkFont structure for the font, or
- * NULL.
+ * object, used for drawing. The internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 field of each
+ * font object points to the TkFont structure for the font, or NULL.
  */
 
 Tcl_ObjType tkFontObjType = {
@@ -369,13 +364,13 @@ Tcl_ObjType tkFontObjType = {
  *
  * TkFontPkgInit --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an application is created.  It
- *	initializes all the structures that are used by the font
- *	package on a per application basis.
+ *	This function is called when an application is created. It initializes
+ *	all the structures that are used by the font package on a per
+ *	application basis.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Stores a token in the mainPtr to hold information needed by this 
- *	package on a per application basis. 
+ *	Stores a token in the mainPtr to hold information needed by this
+ *	package on a per application basis.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory allocated.
@@ -403,9 +398,9 @@ TkFontPkgInit(mainPtr)
  *
  * TkFontPkgFree --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an application is deleted.  It
- *	deletes all the structures that were used by the font package
- *	for this application.
+ *	This function is called when an application is deleted. It deletes all
+ *	the structures that were used by the font package for this
+ *	application.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -432,14 +427,16 @@ TkFontPkgFree(mainPtr)
 	    searchPtr != NULL;
 	    searchPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 	fontsLeft++;
-	fprintf(stderr, "Font %s still in cache.\n", 
+	fprintf(stderr, "Font %s still in cache.\n",
 		Tcl_GetHashKey(&fiPtr->fontCache, searchPtr));
     }
+
 #ifdef PURIFY
     if (fontsLeft) {
 	Tcl_Panic("TkFontPkgFree: all fonts should have been freed already");
     }
 #endif
+
     Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&fiPtr->fontCache);
 
     hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, &search);
@@ -457,10 +454,10 @@ TkFontPkgFree(mainPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_FontObjCmd -- 
+ * Tk_FontObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is implemented to process the "font" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is implemented to process the "font" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -504,259 +501,256 @@ Tk_FontObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case FONT_ACTUAL: {
-	    int skip, result;
-	    Tk_Font tkfont;
-	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
-	    CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr;
-
-	    skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin);
-	    if (skip < 0) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if ((objc < 3) || (objc - skip > 4)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"font ?-displayof window? ?option?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]);
-	    if (tkfont == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    objc -= skip;
-	    objv += skip;
-	    faPtr = GetFontAttributes(tkfont);
+    case FONT_ACTUAL: {
+	int skip, result;
+	Tk_Font tkfont;
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+	CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr;
+
+	skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin);
+	if (skip < 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if ((objc < 3) || (objc - skip > 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "font ?-displayof window? ?option?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]);
+	if (tkfont == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	objc -= skip;
+	objv += skip;
+	faPtr = GetFontAttributes(tkfont);
+	objPtr = NULL;
+	if (objc > 3) {
+	    objPtr = objv[3];
+	}
+	result = GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr);
+	Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
+	return result;
+    }
+    case FONT_CONFIGURE: {
+	int result;
+	char *string;
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+	NamedFont *nfPtr;
+	Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
+
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fontname ?options?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, string);
+	nfPtr = NULL;		/* lint. */
+	if (namedHashPtr != NULL) {
+	    nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr);
+	}
+	if ((namedHashPtr == NULL) || (nfPtr->deletePending != 0)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "named font \"", string,
+		    "\" doesn't exist", NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (objc == 3) {
 	    objPtr = NULL;
-	    if (objc > 3) {
-		objPtr = objv[3];
-	    }
-	    result = GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr);
-	    Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
+	} else if (objc == 4) {
+	    objPtr = objv[3];
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc - 3, objv + 3,
+		    &nfPtr->fa);
+	    UpdateDependentFonts(fiPtr, tkwin, namedHashPtr);
 	    return result;
 	}
-	case FONT_CONFIGURE: {
-	    int result;
-	    char *string;
-	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
-	    NamedFont *nfPtr;
-	    Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
-
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fontname ?options?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-	    namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, string);
-	    nfPtr = NULL;		/* lint. */
-	    if (namedHashPtr != NULL) {
-		nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr);
-	    }
-	    if ((namedHashPtr == NULL) || (nfPtr->deletePending != 0)) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "named font \"", string,
-			"\" doesn't exist", NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		objPtr = NULL;
-	    } else if (objc == 4) {
-		objPtr = objv[3];
-	    } else {
-		result = ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc - 3,
-			objv + 3, &nfPtr->fa);
-		UpdateDependentFonts(fiPtr, tkwin, namedHashPtr);
-		return result;
-	    }
-	    return GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, &nfPtr->fa, objPtr);
-	}
-	case FONT_CREATE: {
-	    int skip, i;
-	    char *name;
-	    char buf[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	    TkFontAttributes fa;
-	    Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
+	return GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, &nfPtr->fa, objPtr);
+    }
+    case FONT_CREATE: {
+	int skip, i;
+	char *name;
+	char buf[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+	TkFontAttributes fa;
+	Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
 
-	    skip = 3;
-	    if (objc < 3) {
+	skip = 3;
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    name = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    name = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	    if (name[0] == '-') {
 		name = NULL;
-	    } else {
-		name = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-		if (name[0] == '-') {
-		    name = NULL;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (name == NULL) {
-		/*
-		 * No font name specified.  Generate one of the form "fontX".
-		 */
-
-		for (i = 1; ; i++) {
-		    sprintf(buf, "font%d", i);
-		    namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, buf);
-		    if (namedHashPtr == NULL) {
-			break;
-		    }
-		}
-		name = buf;
-		skip = 2;
 	    }
-	    TkInitFontAttributes(&fa);
-	    if (ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc - skip, objv + skip,
-		    &fa) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (CreateNamedFont(interp, tkwin, name, &fa) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, name, NULL);
-	    break;
 	}
-	case FONT_DELETE: {
-	    int i;
-	    char *string;
-	    NamedFont *nfPtr;
-	    Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
-
+	if (name == NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * Delete the named font.  If there are still widgets using this
-	     * font, then it isn't deleted right away.
+	     * No font name specified. Generate one of the form "fontX".
 	     */
 
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fontname ?fontname ...?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
-		string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
-		namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, string);
+	    for (i = 1; ; i++) {
+		sprintf(buf, "font%d", i);
+		namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, buf);
 		if (namedHashPtr == NULL) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "named font \"", string,
-			    "\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr);
-		if (nfPtr->refCount != 0) {
-		    nfPtr->deletePending = 1;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(namedHashPtr);
-		    ckfree((char *) nfPtr);
+		    break;
 		}
 	    }
-	    break;
+	    name = buf;
+	    skip = 2;
+	}
+	TkInitFontAttributes(&fa);
+	if (ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc - skip, objv + skip,
+		&fa) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case FONT_FAMILIES: {
-	    int skip;
+	if (CreateNamedFont(interp, tkwin, name, &fa) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, name, NULL);
+	break;
+    }
+    case FONT_DELETE: {
+	int i;
+	char *string;
+	NamedFont *nfPtr;
+	Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
 
-	    skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
-	    if (skip < 0) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (objc - skip != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    TkpGetFontFamilies(interp, tkwin);
-	    break;
+	/*
+	 * Delete the named font. If there are still widgets using this font,
+	 * then it isn't deleted right away.
+	 */
+
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fontname ?fontname ...?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case FONT_MEASURE: {
-	    char *string;
-	    Tk_Font tkfont;
-	    int length, skip;
-	    Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
-	    
-	    skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin);
-	    if (skip < 0) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (objc - skip != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"font ?-displayof window? text");
+	for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
+	    string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	    namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, string);
+	    if (namedHashPtr == NULL) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "named font \"", string,
+			"\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]);
-	    if (tkfont == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr);
+	    if (nfPtr->refCount != 0) {
+		nfPtr->deletePending = 1;
+	    } else {
+		Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(namedHashPtr);
+		ckfree((char *) nfPtr);
 	    }
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3 + skip], &length);
-	    resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, string, length));
-	    Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
-	    break;
 	}
-	case FONT_METRICS: {
-	    Tk_Font tkfont;
-	    int skip, index, i;
-	    CONST TkFontMetrics *fmPtr;
-	    static CONST char *switches[] = {
-		"-ascent", "-descent", "-linespace", "-fixed", NULL
-	    };
+	break;
+    }
+    case FONT_FAMILIES: {
+	int skip;
 
-	    skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin);
-	    if (skip < 0) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if ((objc < 3) || ((objc - skip) > 4)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
-			"font ?-displayof window? ?option?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]);
-	    if (tkfont == NULL) {
+	skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin);
+	if (skip < 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (objc - skip != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	TkpGetFontFamilies(interp, tkwin);
+	break;
+    }
+    case FONT_MEASURE: {
+	char *string;
+	Tk_Font tkfont;
+	int length, skip;
+	Tcl_Obj *resultPtr;
+
+	skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin);
+	if (skip < 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (objc - skip != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "font ?-displayof window? text");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]);
+	if (tkfont == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3 + skip], &length);
+	resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+	Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, string, length));
+	Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
+	break;
+    }
+    case FONT_METRICS: {
+	Tk_Font tkfont;
+	int skip, index, i;
+	CONST TkFontMetrics *fmPtr;
+	static CONST char *switches[] = {
+	    "-ascent", "-descent", "-linespace", "-fixed", NULL
+	};
+
+	skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin);
+	if (skip < 0) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if ((objc < 3) || ((objc - skip) > 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "font ?-displayof window? ?option?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]);
+	if (tkfont == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	objc -= skip;
+	objv += skip;
+	fmPtr = GetFontMetrics(tkfont);
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
+
+	    sprintf(buf, "-ascent %d -descent %d -linespace %d -fixed %d",
+		    fmPtr->ascent, fmPtr->descent,
+		    fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent, fmPtr->fixed);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, NULL);
+	} else {
+	    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[3], switches, "metric", 0,
+		    &index) != TCL_OK) {
+		Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    objc -= skip;
-	    objv += skip;
-	    fmPtr = GetFontMetrics(tkfont);
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4];
-
-		sprintf(buf, "-ascent %d -descent %d -linespace %d -fixed %d",
-			fmPtr->ascent, fmPtr->descent,
-			fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent,
-			fmPtr->fixed);
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, NULL);
-	    } else {
-		if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[3], switches,
-			"metric", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
-		    Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		i = 0;			/* Needed only to prevent compiler
-					 * warning. */
-		switch (index) {
-		    case 0: i = fmPtr->ascent;			break;
-		    case 1: i = fmPtr->descent;			break;
-		    case 2: i = fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent;	break;
-		    case 3: i = fmPtr->fixed;			break;
-		}
-		Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), i);
+	    i = 0;		/* Needed only to prevent compiler warning. */
+	    switch (index) {
+	    case 0: i = fmPtr->ascent;			break;
+	    case 1: i = fmPtr->descent;			break;
+	    case 2: i = fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent;	break;
+	    case 3: i = fmPtr->fixed;			break;
 	    }
-	    Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
-	    break;
+	    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), i);
 	}
-	case FONT_NAMES: {
-	    char *string;
-	    NamedFont *nfPtr;
-	    Tcl_HashSearch search;
-	    Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
-	    Tcl_Obj *strPtr, *resultPtr;
-	    
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "names");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
-	    namedHashPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, &search);
-	    while (namedHashPtr != NULL) {
-		nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr);
-		if (nfPtr->deletePending == 0) {
-		    string = Tcl_GetHashKey(&fiPtr->namedTable, namedHashPtr);
-		    strPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(string, -1);
-		    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, strPtr);
-		}
-		namedHashPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+	Tk_FreeFont(tkfont);
+	break;
+    }
+    case FONT_NAMES: {
+	char *string;
+	NamedFont *nfPtr;
+	Tcl_HashSearch search;
+	Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
+	Tcl_Obj *strPtr, *resultPtr;
+
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "names");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp);
+	namedHashPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, &search);
+	while (namedHashPtr != NULL) {
+	    nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr);
+	    if (nfPtr->deletePending == 0) {
+		string = Tcl_GetHashKey(&fiPtr->namedTable, namedHashPtr);
+		strPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(string, -1);
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, strPtr);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	    namedHashPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
 	}
+	break;
+    }
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -766,10 +760,10 @@ Tk_FontObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * UpdateDependentFonts, TheWorldHasChanged, RecomputeWidgets --
  *
- *	Called when the attributes of a named font changes.  Updates all
- *	the instantiated fonts that depend on that named font and then
- *	uses the brute force approach and prepares every widget to
- *	recompute its geometry.
+ *	Called when the attributes of a named font changes. Updates all the
+ *	instantiated fonts that depend on that named font and then uses the
+ *	brute force approach and prepares every widget to recompute its
+ *	geometry.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -794,8 +788,8 @@ UpdateDependentFonts(fiPtr, tkwin, namedHashPtr)
     nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr);
     if (nfPtr->refCount == 0) {
 	/*
-	 * Well nobody's using this named font, so don't have to tell
-	 * any widgets to recompute themselves.
+	 * Well nobody's using this named font, so don't have to tell any
+	 * widgets to recompute themselves.
 	 */
 
 	return;
@@ -842,22 +836,23 @@ RecomputeWidgets(winPtr)
     /*
      * Notify all the descendants of this window that the world has changed.
      *
-     * This could be done recursively or iteratively.  The recursive version
-     * is easier to implement and understand, and typically, windows with a
-     * -font option will be leaf nodes in the widget heirarchy (buttons,
-     * labels, etc.), so the recursion depth will be shallow.
+     * This could be done recursively or iteratively. The recursive version is
+     * easier to implement and understand, and typically, windows with a -font
+     * option will be leaf nodes in the widget heirarchy (buttons, labels,
+     * etc.), so the recursion depth will be shallow.
      *
-     * However, the additional overhead of the recursive calls may become
-     * a performance problem if typical usage alters such that -font'ed widgets
-     * appear high in the heirarchy, causing deep recursion.  This could happen
+     * However, the additional overhead of the recursive calls may become a
+     * performance problem if typical usage alters such that -font'ed widgets
+     * appear high in the heirarchy, causing deep recursion. This could happen
      * with text widgets, or more likely with the (not yet existant) labeled
-     * frame widget.  With these widgets it is possible, even likely, that a
+     * frame widget. With these widgets it is possible, even likely, that a
      * -font'ed widget (text or labeled frame) will not be a leaf node, but
-     * will instead have many descendants.  If this is ever found to cause
-     * a performance problem, it may be worth investigating an iterative
-     * version of the code below.
+     * will instead have many descendants. If this is ever found to cause a
+     * performance problem, it may be worth investigating an iterative version
+     * of the code below.
      */
-    for (winPtr = winPtr->childList; winPtr != NULL; winPtr = winPtr->nextPtr) {
+
+    for (winPtr=winPtr->childList ; winPtr!=NULL ; winPtr=winPtr->nextPtr) {
 	RecomputeWidgets(winPtr);
     }
 }
@@ -867,21 +862,21 @@ RecomputeWidgets(winPtr)
  *
  * CreateNamedFont --
  *
- *	Create the specified named font with the given attributes in the
- *	named font table associated with the interp.  
+ *	Create the specified named font with the given attributes in the named
+ *	font table associated with the interp.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns TCL_OK if the font was successfully created, or TCL_ERROR
- *	if the named font already existed.  If TCL_ERROR is returned, an
- *	error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	Returns TCL_OK if the font was successfully created, or TCL_ERROR if
+ *	the named font already existed. If TCL_ERROR is returned, an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Assume there used to exist a named font by the specified name, and
  *	that the named font had been deleted, but there were still some
- *	widgets using the named font at the time it was deleted.  If a
- *	new named font is created with the same name, all those widgets
- *	that were using the old named font will be redisplayed using
- *	the new named font's attributes.
+ *	widgets using the named font at the time it was deleted. If a new
+ *	named font is created with the same name, all those widgets that were
+ *	using the old named font will be redisplayed using the new named
+ *	font's attributes.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -896,12 +891,12 @@ CreateNamedFont(interp, tkwin, name, faPtr)
     TkFontInfo *fiPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;
     int new;
-    NamedFont *nfPtr;    
+    NamedFont *nfPtr;
 
     fiPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr;
 
     namedHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, name, &new);
-		    
+
     if (new == 0) {
 	nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr);
 	if (nfPtr->deletePending == 0) {
@@ -912,9 +907,9 @@ CreateNamedFont(interp, tkwin, name, faPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Recreating a named font with the same name as a previous
-	 * named font.  Some widgets were still using that named
-	 * font, so they need to get redisplayed.
+	 * Recreating a named font with the same name as a previous named
+	 * font. Some widgets were still using that named font, so they need
+	 * to get redisplayed.
 	 */
 
 	nfPtr->fa = *faPtr;
@@ -927,7 +922,7 @@ CreateNamedFont(interp, tkwin, name, faPtr)
     nfPtr->deletePending = 0;
     Tcl_SetHashValue(namedHashPtr, nfPtr);
     nfPtr->fa = *faPtr;
-    nfPtr->refCount = 0;	
+    nfPtr->refCount = 0;
     nfPtr->deletePending = 0;
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -935,21 +930,21 @@ CreateNamedFont(interp, tkwin, name, faPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_GetFont -- 
+ * Tk_GetFont --
  *
  *	Given a string description of a font, map the description to a
  *	corresponding Tk_Font that represents the font.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is token for the font, or NULL if an error
- *	prevented the font from being created.  If NULL is returned, an
- *	error message will be left in the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is token for the font, or NULL if an error prevented
+ *	the font from being created. If NULL is returned, an error message
+ *	will be left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The font is added to an internal database with a reference
- *	count.  For each call to this procedure, there should eventually
- *	be a call to Tk_FreeFont() or Tk_FreeFontFromObj() so that the
- *	database is cleaned up when fonts aren't in use anymore.
+ *	The font is added to an internal database with a reference count. For
+ *	each call to this function, there should eventually be a call to
+ *	Tk_FreeFont() or Tk_FreeFontFromObj() so that the database is cleaned
+ *	up when fonts aren't in use anymore.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -961,34 +956,34 @@ Tk_GetFont(interp, tkwin, string)
     CONST char *string;		/* String describing font, as: named font,
 				 * native format, or parseable string. */
 {
-    Tk_Font tkfont; 
+    Tk_Font tkfont;
     Tcl_Obj *strPtr;
 
     strPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj((char *) string, -1);
     Tcl_IncrRefCount(strPtr);
     tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, strPtr);
-    Tcl_DecrRefCount(strPtr);	
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(strPtr);
     return tkfont;
 }
 
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_AllocFontFromObj -- 
+ * Tk_AllocFontFromObj --
  *
  *	Given a string description of a font, map the description to a
  *	corresponding Tk_Font that represents the font.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is token for the font, or NULL if an error
- *	prevented the font from being created.  If NULL is returned, an
- *	error message will be left in interp's result object.
+ *	The return value is token for the font, or NULL if an error prevented
+ *	the font from being created. If NULL is returned, an error message
+ *	will be left in interp's result object.
  *
  * Side effects:
- * 	The font is added to an internal database with a reference
- *	count.  For each call to this procedure, there should eventually
- *	be a call to Tk_FreeFont() or Tk_FreeFontFromObj() so that the
- *	database is cleaned up when fonts aren't in use anymore.
+ *	The font is added to an internal database with a reference count. For
+ *	each call to this function, there should eventually be a call to
+ *	Tk_FreeFont() or Tk_FreeFontFromObj() so that the database is cleaned
+ *	up when fonts aren't in use anymore.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1016,8 +1011,8 @@ Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
     if (oldFontPtr != NULL) {
 	if (oldFontPtr->resourceRefCount == 0) {
 	    /*
-	     * This is a stale reference: it refers to a TkFont that's
-	     * no longer in use.  Clear the reference.
+	     * This is a stale reference: it refers to a TkFont that's no
+	     * longer in use. Clear the reference.
 	     */
 
 	    FreeFontObjProc(objPtr);
@@ -1029,8 +1024,8 @@ Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Next, search the list of fonts that have the name we want, to see
-     * if one of them is for the right screen.
+     * Next, search the list of fonts that have the name we want, to see if
+     * one of them is for the right screen.
      */
 
     new = 0;
@@ -1053,7 +1048,7 @@ Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The desired font isn't in the table.  Make a new one.
+     * The desired font isn't in the table. Make a new one.
      */
 
     namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable,
@@ -1121,7 +1116,7 @@ Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
      * Get information used for drawing underlines in generic code on a
      * non-underlined font.
      */
-    
+
     descent = fontPtr->fm.descent;
     fontPtr->underlinePos = descent / 2;
     fontPtr->underlineHeight = TkFontGetPixels(tkwin, fontPtr->fa.size) / 10;
@@ -1130,9 +1125,9 @@ Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
     }
     if (fontPtr->underlinePos + fontPtr->underlineHeight > descent) {
 	/*
-	 * If this set of values would cause the bottom of the underline
-	 * bar to stick below the descent of the font, jack the underline
-	 * up a bit higher.
+	 * If this set of values would cause the bottom of the underline bar
+	 * to stick below the descent of the font, jack the underline up a bit
+	 * higher.
 	 */
 
 	fontPtr->underlineHeight = descent - fontPtr->underlinePos;
@@ -1141,7 +1136,7 @@ Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
 	    fontPtr->underlineHeight = 1;
 	}
     }
-    
+
     objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) fontPtr;
     return (Tk_Font) fontPtr;
 }
@@ -1151,16 +1146,16 @@ Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetFontFromObj --
  *
- *	Find the font that corresponds to a given object.  The font must
- *	have already been created by Tk_GetFont or Tk_AllocFontFromObj.
+ *	Find the font that corresponds to a given object. The font must have
+ *	already been created by Tk_GetFont or Tk_AllocFontFromObj.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the font that matches objPtr
- *	and is suitable for use in tkwin.
+ *	The return value is a token for the font that matches objPtr and is
+ *	suitable for use in tkwin.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the object is not already a font ref, the conversion will free
- *	any old internal representation. 
+ *	If the object is not already a font ref, the conversion will free any
+ *	old internal representation.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1173,7 +1168,7 @@ Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
     TkFontInfo *fiPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr;
     TkFont *fontPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr;
- 
+
     if (objPtr->typePtr != &tkFontObjType) {
 	SetFontFromAny((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, objPtr);
     }
@@ -1183,8 +1178,8 @@ Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
     if (fontPtr != NULL) {
 	if (fontPtr->resourceRefCount == 0) {
 	    /*
-	     * This is a stale reference: it refers to a TkFont that's
-	     * no longer in use.  Clear the reference.
+	     * This is a stale reference: it refers to a TkFont that's no
+	     * longer in use. Clear the reference.
 	     */
 
 	    FreeFontObjProc(objPtr);
@@ -1195,8 +1190,8 @@ Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Next, search the list of fonts that have the name we want, to see
-     * if one of them is for the right screen.
+     * Next, search the list of fonts that have the name we want, to see if
+     * one of them is for the right screen.
      */
 
     if (fontPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1225,15 +1220,15 @@ Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
  *
  * SetFontFromAny --
  *
- *	Convert the internal representation of a Tcl object to the
- *	font internal form.
+ *	Convert the internal representation of a Tcl object to the font
+ *	internal form.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Always returns TCL_OK.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The object is left with its typePtr pointing to tkFontObjType.
- *	The TkFont pointer is NULL.
+ *	The object is left with its typePtr pointing to tkFontObjType. The
+ *	TkFont pointer is NULL.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1246,7 +1241,7 @@ SetFontFromAny(interp, objPtr)
     Tcl_ObjType *typePtr;
 
     /*
-     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one. 
+     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one.
      */
 
     Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
@@ -1268,10 +1263,10 @@ SetFontFromAny(interp, objPtr)
  *	Given a font, return a textual string identifying it.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the description that was passed to
- *	Tk_GetFont() to create the font.  The storage for the returned
- *	string is only guaranteed to persist until the font is deleted.
- *	The caller should not modify this string.
+ *	The return value is the description that was passed to Tk_GetFont() to
+ *	create the font. The storage for the returned string is only
+ *	guaranteed to persist until the font is deleted. The caller should not
+ *	modify this string.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1292,7 +1287,7 @@ Tk_NameOfFont(tkfont)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_FreeFont -- 
+ * Tk_FreeFont --
  *
  *	Called to release a font allocated by Tk_GetFont().
  *
@@ -1300,8 +1295,8 @@ Tk_NameOfFont(tkfont)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The reference count associated with font is decremented, and
- *	only deallocated when no one is using it.
+ *	The reference count associated with font is decremented, and only
+ *	deallocated when no one is using it.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1323,9 +1318,8 @@ Tk_FreeFont(tkfont)
     }
     if (fontPtr->namedHashPtr != NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * This font derived from a named font.  Reduce the reference
-	 * count on the named font and free it if no-one else is
-	 * using it.
+	 * This font derived from a named font. Reduce the reference count on
+	 * the named font and free it if no-one else is using it.
 	 */
 
 	nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(fontPtr->namedHashPtr);
@@ -1359,7 +1353,7 @@ Tk_FreeFont(tkfont)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * Tk_FreeFontFromObj -- 
+ * Tk_FreeFontFromObj --
  *
  *	Called to release a font inside a Tcl_Obj *. Decrements the refCount
  *	of the font and removes it from the hash tables if necessary.
@@ -1368,16 +1362,16 @@ Tk_FreeFont(tkfont)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The reference count associated with font is decremented, and
- *	only deallocated when no one is using it.
+ *	The reference count associated with font is decremented, and only
+ *	deallocated when no one is using it.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
 Tk_FreeFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window this font lives in. Needed
-				 * for the screen value. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window this font lives in. Needed for
+				 * the screen value. */
     Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The Tcl_Obj * to be freed. */
 {
     Tk_FreeFont(Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr));
@@ -1386,19 +1380,18 @@ Tk_FreeFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * FreeFontObjProc -- 
+ * FreeFontObjProc --
  *
- *	This proc is called to release an object reference to a font.
- *	Called when the object's internal rep is released or when
- *	the cached fontPtr needs to be changed.
+ *	This proc is called to release an object reference to a font. Called
+ *	when the object's internal rep is released or when the cached fontPtr
+ *	needs to be changed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The object reference count is decremented. When both it
- *	and the hash ref count go to zero, the font's resources
- *	are released.
+ *	The object reference count is decremented. When both it and the hash
+ *	ref count go to zero, the font's resources are released.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1421,17 +1414,17 @@ FreeFontObjProc(objPtr)
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * DupFontObjProc -- 
+ * DupFontObjProc --
  *
- *	When a cached font object is duplicated, this is called to
- *	update the internal reps.
+ *	When a cached font object is duplicated, this is called to update the
+ *	internal reps.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The font's objRefCount is incremented and the internal rep
- *	of the copy is set to point to it.
+ *	The font's objRefCount is incremented and the internal rep of the copy
+ *	is set to point to it.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1442,7 +1435,7 @@ DupFontObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
     Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr;		/* The object we are copying to. */
 {
     TkFont *fontPtr = (TkFont *) srcObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1;
-    
+
     dupObjPtr->typePtr = srcObjPtr->typePtr;
     dupObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) fontPtr;
 
@@ -1456,10 +1449,10 @@ DupFontObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr)
  *
  * Tk_FontId --
  *
- *	Given a font, return an opaque handle that should be selected
- *	into the XGCValues structure in order to get the constructed
- *	gc to use this font.  This procedure would go away if the
- *	XGCValues structure were replaced with a TkGCValues structure.
+ *	Given a font, return an opaque handle that should be selected into the
+ *	XGCValues structure in order to get the constructed gc to use this
+ *	font. This function would go away if the XGCValues structure were
+ *	replaced with a TkGCValues structure.
  *
  * Results:
  *	As above.
@@ -1485,26 +1478,27 @@ Tk_FontId(tkfont)
  *
  * Tk_GetFontMetrics --
  *
- *	Returns overall ascent and descent metrics for the given font.
- *	These values can be used to space multiple lines of text and
- *	to align the baselines of text in different fonts.
+ *	Returns overall ascent and descent metrics for the given font. These
+ *	values can be used to space multiple lines of text and to align the
+ *	baselines of text in different fonts.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If *heightPtr is non-NULL, it is filled with the overall height
- *	of the font, which is the sum of the ascent and descent.
- *	If *ascentPtr or *descentPtr is non-NULL, they are filled with
- *	the ascent and/or descent information for the font.
+ *	If *heightPtr is non-NULL, it is filled with the overall height of the
+ *	font, which is the sum of the ascent and descent. If *ascentPtr or
+ *	*descentPtr is non-NULL, they are filled with the ascent and/or
+ *	descent information for the font.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 void
 Tk_GetFontMetrics(tkfont, fmPtr)
     Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font in which metrics are calculated. */
-    Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* Pointer to structure in which font
-				 * metrics for tkfont will be stored. */
+    Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* Pointer to structure in which font metrics
+				 * for tkfont will be stored. */
 {
     TkFont *fontPtr;
 
@@ -1519,25 +1513,24 @@ Tk_GetFontMetrics(tkfont, fmPtr)
  *
  * Tk_PostscriptFontName --
  *
- *	Given a Tk_Font, return the name of the corresponding Postscript
- *	font.
+ *	Given a Tk_Font, return the name of the corresponding Postscript font.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the pointsize of the given Tk_Font.
- *	The name of the Postscript font is appended to dsPtr.
+ *	The return value is the pointsize of the given Tk_Font. The name of
+ *	the Postscript font is appended to dsPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the font does not exist on the printer, the print job will
- *	fail at print time.  Given a "reasonable" Postscript printer,
- *	the following Tk_Font font families should print correctly:
+ *	If the font does not exist on the printer, the print job will fail at
+ *	print time. Given a "reasonable" Postscript printer, the following
+ *	Tk_Font font families should print correctly:
  *
  *	    Avant Garde, Arial, Bookman, Courier, Courier New, Geneva,
  *	    Helvetica, Monaco, New Century Schoolbook, New York,
  *	    Palatino, Symbol, Times, Times New Roman, Zapf Chancery,
  *	    and Zapf Dingbats.
  *
- *	Any other Tk_Font font families may not print correctly
- *	because the computed Postscript font name may be incorrect.
+ *	Any other Tk_Font font families may not print correctly because the
+ *	computed Postscript font name may be incorrect.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1558,9 +1551,9 @@ Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, dsPtr)
     fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont;
 
     /*
-     * Convert the case-insensitive Tk_Font family name to the
-     * case-sensitive Postscript family name.  Take out any spaces and
-     * capitalize the first letter of each word.
+     * Convert the case-insensitive Tk_Font family name to the case-sensitive
+     * Postscript family name. Take out any spaces and capitalize the first
+     * letter of each word.
      */
 
     family = fontPtr->fa.family;
@@ -1588,8 +1581,8 @@ Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, dsPtr)
 	/*
 	 * Inline, capitalize the first letter of each word, lowercase the
 	 * rest of the letters in each word, and then take out the spaces
-	 * between the words.  This may make the DString shorter, which is
-	 * safe to do.
+	 * between the words. This may make the DString shorter, which is safe
+	 * to do.
 	 */
 
 	Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, family, -1);
@@ -1606,7 +1599,7 @@ Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, dsPtr)
 		ch = Tcl_UniCharToUpper(ch);
 		upper = 0;
 	    } else {
-	        ch = Tcl_UniCharToLower(ch);
+		ch = Tcl_UniCharToLower(ch);
 	    }
 	    dest += Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, dest);
 	}
@@ -1670,7 +1663,7 @@ Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, dsPtr)
      */
 
     if ((slantString == NULL) && (weightString == NULL)) {
-	if ((strcmp(family, "Times") == 0) 
+	if ((strcmp(family, "Times") == 0)
 		|| (strcmp(family, "NewCenturySchlbk") == 0)
 		|| (strcmp(family, "Palatino") == 0)) {
 	    Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, "-Roman", -1);
@@ -1694,8 +1687,8 @@ Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, dsPtr)
  * Tk_TextWidth --
  *
  *	A wrapper function for the more complicated interface of
- *	Tk_MeasureChars.  Computes how much space the given
- *	simple string needs.
+ *	Tk_MeasureChars. Computes how much space the given simple string
+ *	needs.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is the width (in pixels) of the given string.
@@ -1710,8 +1703,8 @@ int
 Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, string, numBytes)
     Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font in which text will be measured. */
     CONST char *string;		/* String whose width will be computed. */
-    int numBytes;		/* Number of bytes to consider from
-				 * string, or < 0 for strlen(). */
+    int numBytes;		/* Number of bytes to consider from string, or
+				 * < 0 for strlen(). */
 {
     int width;
 
@@ -1727,13 +1720,13 @@ Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, string, numBytes)
  *
  * Tk_UnderlineChars --
  *
- *	This procedure draws an underline for a given range of characters
- *	in a given string.  It doesn't draw the characters (which are
- *	assumed to have been displayed previously); it just draws the
- *	underline.  This procedure would mainly be used to quickly
- *	underline a few characters without having to construct an
- *	underlined font.  To produce properly underlined text, the
- *	appropriate underlined font should be constructed and used. 
+ *	This function draws an underline for a given range of characters in a
+ *	given string. It doesn't draw the characters (which are assumed to
+ *	have been displayed previously); it just draws the underline. This
+ *	function would mainly be used to quickly underline a few characters
+ *	without having to construct an underlined font. To produce properly
+ *	underlined text, the appropriate underlined font should be constructed
+ *	and used.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1751,8 +1744,8 @@ Tk_UnderlineChars(display, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, x, y, firstByte,
     Drawable drawable;		/* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */
     GC gc;			/* Graphics context for actually drawing
 				 * line. */
-    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font used in GC;  must have been allocated
-				 * by Tk_GetFont().  Used for character
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font used in GC; must have been allocated
+				 * by Tk_GetFont(). Used for character
 				 * dimensions, etc. */
     CONST char *string;		/* String containing characters to be
 				 * underlined or overstruck. */
@@ -1766,7 +1759,7 @@ Tk_UnderlineChars(display, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, x, y, firstByte,
     int startX, endX;
 
     fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont;
-    
+
     Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, string, firstByte, -1, 0, &startX);
     Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, string, lastByte, -1, 0, &endX);
 
@@ -1780,29 +1773,26 @@ Tk_UnderlineChars(display, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, x, y, firstByte,
  *
  * Tk_ComputeTextLayout --
  *
- *	Computes the amount of screen space needed to display a
- *	multi-line, justified string of text.  Records all the
- *	measurements that were done to determine to size and
- *	positioning of the individual lines of text; this information
- *	can be used by the Tk_DrawTextLayout() procedure to
+ *	Computes the amount of screen space needed to display a multi-line,
+ *	justified string of text. Records all the measurements that were done
+ *	to determine to size and positioning of the individual lines of text;
+ *	this information can be used by the Tk_DrawTextLayout() function to
  *	display the text quickly (without remeasuring it).
  *
- *	This procedure is useful for simple widgets that want to
- *	display single-font, multi-line text and want Tk to handle the
- *	details.
+ *	This function is useful for simple widgets that want to display
+ *	single-font, multi-line text and want Tk to handle the details.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a Tk_TextLayout token that holds the
- *	measurement information for the given string.  The token is
- *	only valid for the given string.  If the string is freed,
- *	the token is no longer valid and must also be freed.  To free
- *	the token, call Tk_FreeTextLayout().
+ *	The return value is a Tk_TextLayout token that holds the measurement
+ *	information for the given string. The token is only valid for the
+ *	given string. If the string is freed, the token is no longer valid and
+ *	must also be freed. To free the token, call Tk_FreeTextLayout().
  *
- *	The dimensions of the screen area needed to display the text
- *	are stored in *widthPtr and *heightPtr.
+ *	The dimensions of the screen area needed to display the text are
+ *	stored in *widthPtr and *heightPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Memory is allocated to hold the measurement information.  
+ *	Memory is allocated to hold the measurement information.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1815,15 +1805,15 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 				 * computed. */
     int numChars;		/* Number of characters to consider from
 				 * string, or < 0 for strlen(). */
-    int wrapLength;		/* Longest permissible line length, in
-				 * pixels.  <= 0 means no automatic wrapping:
-				 * just let lines get as long as needed. */
+    int wrapLength;		/* Longest permissible line length, in pixels.
+				 * <= 0 means no automatic wrapping: just let
+				 * lines get as long as needed. */
     Tk_Justify justify;		/* How to justify lines. */
-    int flags;			/* Flag bits OR-ed together.
-				 * TK_IGNORE_TABS means that tab characters
-				 * should not be expanded.  TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES
-				 * means that newline characters should not
-				 * cause a line break. */
+    int flags;			/* Flag bits OR-ed together. TK_IGNORE_TABS
+				 * means that tab characters should not be
+				 * expanded. TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES means that
+				 * newline characters should not cause a line
+				 * break. */
     int *widthPtr;		/* Filled with width of string. */
     int *heightPtr;		/* Filled with height of string. */
 {
@@ -1839,7 +1829,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
     int curLine, layoutHeight;
 
     Tcl_DStringInit(&lineBuffer);
-    
+
     fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont;
     if ((fontPtr == NULL) || (string == NULL)) {
 	if (widthPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1883,7 +1873,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
     special = string;
 
     flags &= TK_IGNORE_TABS | TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES;
-    flags |= TK_WHOLE_WORDS | TK_AT_LEAST_ONE;	    
+    flags |= TK_WHOLE_WORDS | TK_AT_LEAST_ONE;
     for (start = string; start < end; ) {
 	if (start >= special) {
 	    /*
@@ -1891,7 +1881,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	     *
 	     * INTL: Note that it is safe to increment by byte, because we are
 	     * looking for 7-bit characters that will appear unchanged in
-	     * UTF-8.  At some point we may need to support the full Unicode
+	     * UTF-8. At some point we may need to support the full Unicode
 	     * whitespace set.
 	     */
 
@@ -1911,7 +1901,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 
 	/*
 	 * Special points at the next special character (or the end of the
-	 * string).  Process characters between start and special.
+	 * string). Process characters between start and special.
 	 */
 
 	chunkPtr = NULL;
@@ -1923,7 +1913,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	    if (bytesThisChunk > 0) {
 		chunkPtr = NewChunk(&layoutPtr, &maxChunks, start,
 			bytesThisChunk, curX, newX, baseline);
-			
+
 		start += bytesThisChunk;
 		curX = newX;
 	    }
@@ -1954,7 +1944,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 		    flags &= ~TK_AT_LEAST_ONE;
 		    continue;
 		}
-	    } else {	
+	    } else {
 		NewChunk(&layoutPtr, &maxChunks, start, 1, curX, curX,
 			baseline)->numDisplayChars = -1;
 		start++;
@@ -1963,9 +1953,9 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * No more characters are going to go on this line, either because
-	 * no more characters can fit or there are no more characters left.
-	 * Consume all extra spaces at end of line.  
+	 * No more characters are going to go on this line, either because no
+	 * more characters can fit or there are no more characters left.
+	 * Consume all extra spaces at end of line.
 	 */
 
 	while ((start < end) && isspace(UCHAR(*start))) { /* INTL: ISO space */
@@ -1985,9 +1975,9 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	    CONST char *end;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Append all the extra spaces on this line to the end of the
-	     * last text chunk.  This is a little tricky because we are
-	     * switching back and forth between characters and bytes.
+	     * Append all the extra spaces on this line to the end of the last
+	     * text chunk. This is a little tricky because we are switching
+	     * back and forth between characters and bytes.
 	     */
 
 	    end = chunkPtr->start + chunkPtr->numBytes;
@@ -2001,7 +1991,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	    }
 	}
 
-        wrapLine: 
+    wrapLine:
 	flags |= TK_AT_LEAST_ONE;
 
 	/*
@@ -2014,8 +2004,8 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Remember width of this line, so that all chunks on this line
-	 * can be centered or right justified, if necessary.
+	 * Remember width of this line, so that all chunks on this line can be
+	 * centered or right justified, if necessary.
 	 */
 
 	Tcl_DStringAppend(&lineBuffer, (char *) &curX, sizeof(curX));
@@ -2025,9 +2015,8 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
     }
 
     /*
-     * If last line ends with a newline, then we need to make a 0 width
-     * chunk on the next line.  Otherwise "Hello" and "Hello\n" are the
-     * same height.
+     * If last line ends with a newline, then we need to make a 0 width chunk
+     * on the next line. Otherwise "Hello" and "Hello\n" are the same height.
      */
 
     if ((layoutPtr->numChunks > 0) && ((flags & TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES) == 0)) {
@@ -2038,7 +2027,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&lineBuffer, (char *) &curX, sizeof(curX));
 	    baseline += height;
 	}
-    }	    
+    }
 
     layoutPtr->width = maxWidth;
     layoutHeight = baseline - fmPtr->ascent;
@@ -2046,9 +2035,9 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	layoutHeight = height;
 
 	/*
-	 * This fake chunk is used by the other procedures so that they can
-	 * pretend that there is a chunk with no chars in it, which makes
-	 * the coding simpler.
+	 * This fake chunk is used by the other functions so that they can
+	 * pretend that there is a chunk with no chars in it, which makes the
+	 * coding simpler.
 	 */
 
 	layoutPtr->numChunks = 1;
@@ -2065,7 +2054,7 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
 	 * Using maximum line length, shift all the chunks so that the lines
 	 * are all justified correctly.
 	 */
-    
+
 	curLine = 0;
 	chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks;
 	y = chunkPtr->y;
@@ -2103,8 +2092,8 @@ Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags,
  *
  * Tk_FreeTextLayout --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to release the storage associated with
- *	a Tk_TextLayout when it is no longer needed.
+ *	This function is called to release the storage associated with a
+ *	Tk_TextLayout when it is no longer needed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2135,9 +2124,8 @@ Tk_FreeTextLayout(textLayout)
  *	Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to display a
  *	multi-line, justified string of text.
  *
- *	This procedure is useful for simple widgets that need to
- *	display single-font, multi-line text and want Tk to handle
- *	the details.
+ *	This function is useful for simple widgets that need to display
+ *	single-font, multi-line text and want Tk to handle the details.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2153,16 +2141,16 @@ Tk_DrawTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, firstChar, lastChar)
     Display *display;		/* Display on which to draw. */
     Drawable drawable;		/* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */
     GC gc;			/* Graphics context to use for drawing text. */
-    Tk_TextLayout layout;	/* Layout information, from a previous call
-				 * to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
+    Tk_TextLayout layout;	/* Layout information, from a previous call to
+				 * Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
     int x, y;			/* Upper-left hand corner of rectangle in
 				 * which to draw (pixels). */
     int firstChar;		/* The index of the first character to draw
-				 * from the given text item.  0 specfies the
+				 * from the given text item. 0 specfies the
 				 * beginning. */
-    int lastChar;		/* The index just after the last character
-				 * to draw from the given text item.  A number
-				 * < 0 means to draw all characters. */
+    int lastChar;		/* The index just after the last character to
+				 * draw from the given text item. A number < 0
+				 * means to draw all characters. */
 {
     TextLayout *layoutPtr;
     int i, numDisplayChars, drawX;
@@ -2213,15 +2201,14 @@ Tk_DrawTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, firstChar, lastChar)
  *
  * Tk_UnderlineTextLayout --
  *
- *	Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to display an
- *	underline below an individual character.  This procedure does
- *	not draw the text, just the underline.
+ *	Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to display an underline
+ *	below an individual character. This function does not draw the text,
+ *	just the underline.
  *
- *	This procedure is useful for simple widgets that need to
- *	display single-font, multi-line text with an individual
- *	character underlined and want Tk to handle the details.
- *	To display larger amounts of underlined text, construct
- *	and use an underlined font.
+ *	This function is useful for simple widgets that need to display
+ *	single-font, multi-line text with an individual character underlined
+ *	and want Tk to handle the details. To display larger amounts of
+ *	underlined text, construct and use an underlined font.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2237,12 +2224,12 @@ Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, underline)
     Display *display;		/* Display on which to draw. */
     Drawable drawable;		/* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */
     GC gc;			/* Graphics context to use for drawing text. */
-    Tk_TextLayout layout;	/* Layout information, from a previous call
-				 * to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
+    Tk_TextLayout layout;	/* Layout information, from a previous call to
+				 * Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
     int x, y;			/* Upper-left hand corner of rectangle in
 				 * which to draw (pixels). */
-    int underline;		/* Index of the single character to
-				 * underline, or -1 for no underline. */
+    int underline;		/* Index of the single character to underline,
+				 * or -1 for no underline. */
 {
     TextLayout *layoutPtr;
     TkFont *fontPtr;
@@ -2253,7 +2240,7 @@ Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, underline)
 	layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout;
 	fontPtr = (TkFont *) layoutPtr->tkfont;
 
-	XFillRectangle(display, drawable, gc, x + xx, 
+	XFillRectangle(display, drawable, gc, x + xx,
 		y + yy + fontPtr->fm.ascent + fontPtr->underlinePos,
 		(unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) fontPtr->underlineHeight);
     }
@@ -2265,25 +2252,25 @@ Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, underline)
  * Tk_PointToChar --
  *
  *	Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to determine the
- *	character closest to the given point.  The point must be
- *	specified with respect to the upper-left hand corner of the
- *	text layout, which is considered to be located at (0, 0).
+ *	character closest to the given point. The point must be specified with
+ *	respect to the upper-left hand corner of the text layout, which is
+ *	considered to be located at (0, 0).
  *
- *	Any point whose y-value is less that 0 will be considered closest
- *	to the first character in the text layout; any point whose y-value
- *	is greater than the height of the text layout will be considered
- *	closest to the last character in the text layout.
+ *	Any point whose y-value is less that 0 will be considered closest to
+ *	the first character in the text layout; any point whose y-value is
+ *	greater than the height of the text layout will be considered closest
+ *	to the last character in the text layout.
  *
- *	Any point whose x-value is less than 0 will be considered closest
- *	to the first character on that line; any point whose x-value is
- *	greater than the width of the text layout will be considered
- *	closest to the last character on that line.
+ *	Any point whose x-value is less than 0 will be considered closest to
+ *	the first character on that line; any point whose x-value is greater
+ *	than the width of the text layout will be considered closest to the
+ *	last character on that line.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the index of the character that was
- *	closest to the point.  Given a text layout with no characters,
- *	the value 0 will always be returned, referring to a hypothetical
- *	zero-width placeholder character.
+ *	The return value is the index of the character that was closest to the
+ *	point. Given a text layout with no characters, the value 0 will always
+ *	be returned, referring to a hypothetical zero-width placeholder
+ *	character.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2293,11 +2280,11 @@ Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, underline)
 
 int
 Tk_PointToChar(layout, x, y)
-    Tk_TextLayout layout;	/* Layout information, from a previous call
-				 * to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
-    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of point to check, with
-				 * respect to the upper-left corner of the
-				 * text layout. */
+    Tk_TextLayout layout;	/* Layout information, from a previous call to
+				 * Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
+    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of point to check, with respect
+				 * to the upper-left corner of the text
+				 * layout. */
 {
     TextLayout *layoutPtr;
     LayoutChunk *chunkPtr, *lastPtr;
@@ -2306,8 +2293,8 @@ Tk_PointToChar(layout, x, y)
 
     if (y < 0) {
 	/*
-	 * Point lies above any line in this layout.  Return the index of
-	 * the first char.
+	 * Point lies above any line in this layout. Return the index of the
+	 * first char.
 	 */
 
 	return 0;
@@ -2326,26 +2313,26 @@ Tk_PointToChar(layout, x, y)
 	if (y < baseline + fontPtr->fm.descent) {
 	    if (x < chunkPtr->x) {
 		/*
-		 * Point is to the left of all chunks on this line.  Return
-		 * the index of the first character on this line.
+		 * Point is to the left of all chunks on this line. Return the
+		 * index of the first character on this line.
 		 */
 
 		return numChars;
 	    }
 	    if (x >= layoutPtr->width) {
 		/*
-		 * If point lies off right side of the text layout, return
-		 * the last char in the last chunk on this line.  Without
-		 * this, it might return the index of the first char that
-		 * was located outside of the text layout.
+		 * If point lies off right side of the text layout, return the
+		 * last char in the last chunk on this line. Without this, it
+		 * might return the index of the first char that was located
+		 * outside of the text layout.
 		 */
 
 		x = INT_MAX;
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Examine all chunks on this line to see which one contains
-	     * the specified point.
+	     * Examine all chunks on this line to see which one contains the
+	     * specified point.
 	     */
 
 	    lastPtr = chunkPtr;
@@ -2376,7 +2363,7 @@ Tk_PointToChar(layout, x, y)
 
 	    /*
 	     * Point is to the right of all chars in all the chunks on this
-	     * line.  Return the index just past the last char in the last
+	     * line. Return the index just past the last char in the last
 	     * chunk on this line.
 	     */
 
@@ -2392,8 +2379,8 @@ Tk_PointToChar(layout, x, y)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Point lies below any line in this text layout.  Return the index
-     * just past the last char.
+     * Point lies below any line in this text layout. Return the index just
+     * past the last char.
      */
 
     return (lastPtr->start + lastPtr->numChars) - layoutPtr->string;
@@ -2404,29 +2391,28 @@ Tk_PointToChar(layout, x, y)
  *
  * Tk_CharBbox --
  *
- *	Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to return the
- *	bounding box for the character specified by index.  
+ *	Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to return the bounding
+ *	box for the character specified by index.
  *
- *	The width of the bounding box is the advance width of the
- *	character, and does not include and left- or right-bearing.
- *	Any character that extends partially outside of the
- *	text layout is considered to be truncated at the edge.  Any
- *	character which is located completely outside of the text
- *	layout is considered to be zero-width and pegged against
- *	the edge.
+ *	The width of the bounding box is the advance width of the character,
+ *	and does not include and left- or right-bearing. Any character that
+ *	extends partially outside of the text layout is considered to be
+ *	truncated at the edge. Any character which is located completely
+ *	outside of the text layout is considered to be zero-width and pegged
+ *	against the edge.
  *
  *	The height of the bounding box is the line height for this font,
- *	extending from the top of the ascent to the bottom of the
- *	descent.  Information about the actual height of the individual
- *	letter is not available.
+ *	extending from the top of the ascent to the bottom of the descent.
+ *	Information about the actual height of the individual letter is not
+ *	available.
+ *
+ *	A text layout that contains no characters is considered to contain a
+ *	single zero-width placeholder character.
  *
- *	A text layout that contains no characters is considered to
- *	contain a single zero-width placeholder character.
- * 
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the index did not specify a character
- *	in the text layout, or non-zero otherwise.  In that case,
- *	*bbox is filled with the bounding box of the character.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the index did not specify a character in the
+ *	text layout, or non-zero otherwise. In that case, *bbox is filled with
+ *	the bounding box of the character.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2500,12 +2486,13 @@ Tk_CharBbox(layout, index, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Ensure that the bbox lies within the text layout.  This forces all
-     * chars that extend off the right edge of the text layout to have
-     * truncated widths, and all chars that are completely off the right
-     * edge of the text layout to peg to the edge and have 0 width.
+     * Ensure that the bbox lies within the text layout. This forces all chars
+     * that extend off the right edge of the text layout to have truncated
+     * widths, and all chars that are completely off the right edge of the
+     * text layout to peg to the edge and have 0 width.
      */
-    check:
+
+  check:
     if (yPtr != NULL) {
 	*yPtr = chunkPtr->y - fontPtr->fm.ascent;
     }
@@ -2534,16 +2521,15 @@ Tk_CharBbox(layout, index, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
  *
  * Tk_DistanceToTextLayout --
  *
- *	Computes the distance in pixels from the given point to the
- *	given text layout.  Non-displaying space characters that occur
- *	at the end of individual lines in the text layout are ignored
- *	for hit detection purposes.
+ *	Computes the distance in pixels from the given point to the given text
+ *	layout. Non-displaying space characters that occur at the end of
+ *	individual lines in the text layout are ignored for hit detection
+ *	purposes.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the point (x, y) is inside the text
- *	layout.  If the point isn't inside the text layout then the
- *	return value is the distance in pixels from the point to the
- *	text item.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the point (x, y) is inside the text layout.
+ *	If the point isn't inside the text layout then the return value is the
+ *	distance in pixels from the point to the text item.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2568,14 +2554,14 @@ Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(layout, x, y)
     fontPtr = (TkFont *) layoutPtr->tkfont;
     ascent = fontPtr->fm.ascent;
     descent = fontPtr->fm.descent;
-    
+
     minDist = 0;
     chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks;
     for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) {
 	if (chunkPtr->start[0] == '\n') {
 	    /*
-	     * Newline characters are not counted when computing distance
-	     * (but tab characters would still be considered).
+	     * Newline characters are not counted when computing distance (but
+	     * tab characters would still be considered).
 	     */
 
 	    chunkPtr++;
@@ -2619,15 +2605,15 @@ Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(layout, x, y)
  *
  * Tk_IntersectTextLayout --
  *
- *	Determines whether a text layout lies entirely inside,
- *	entirely outside, or overlaps a given rectangle.  Non-displaying
- *	space characters that occur at the end of individual lines in
- *	the text layout are ignored for intersection calculations.
+ *	Determines whether a text layout lies entirely inside, entirely
+ *	outside, or overlaps a given rectangle. Non-displaying space
+ *	characters that occur at the end of individual lines in the text
+ *	layout are ignored for intersection calculations.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is -1 if the text layout is entirely outside of
- *	the rectangle, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside
- *	of the rectangle.
+ *	The return value is -1 if the text layout is entirely outside of the
+ *	rectangle, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside of the
+ *	rectangle.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2637,13 +2623,13 @@ Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(layout, x, y)
 
 int
 Tk_IntersectTextLayout(layout, x, y, width, height)
-    Tk_TextLayout layout;	/* Layout information, from a previous call
-				 * to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
+    Tk_TextLayout layout;	/* Layout information, from a previous call to
+				 * Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
     int x, y;			/* Upper-left hand corner, in pixels, of
 				 * rectangular area to compare with text
-				 * layout.  Coordinates are with respect to
-				 * the upper-left hand corner of the text
-				 * layout itself. */
+				 * layout. Coordinates are with respect to the
+				 * upper-left hand corner of the text layout
+				 * itself. */
     int width, height;		/* The width and height of the above
 				 * rectangular area, in pixels. */
 {
@@ -2655,11 +2641,11 @@ Tk_IntersectTextLayout(layout, x, y, width, height)
 
     /*
      * Scan the chunks one at a time, seeing whether each is entirely in,
-     * entirely out, or overlapping the rectangle.  If an overlap is
-     * detected, return immediately; otherwise wait until all chunks have
-     * been processed and see if they were all inside or all outside.
+     * entirely out, or overlapping the rectangle. If an overlap is detected,
+     * return immediately; otherwise wait until all chunks have been processed
+     * and see if they were all inside or all outside.
      */
-    
+
     layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout;
     chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks;
     fontPtr = (TkFont *) layoutPtr->tkfont;
@@ -2710,34 +2696,32 @@ Tk_IntersectTextLayout(layout, x, y, width, height)
  *
  * Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript --
  *
- *	Outputs the contents of a text layout in Postscript format.
- *	The set of lines in the text layout will be rendered by the user
- *	supplied Postscript function.  The function should be of the form:
+ *	Outputs the contents of a text layout in Postscript format. The set of
+ *	lines in the text layout will be rendered by the user supplied
+ *	Postscript function. The function should be of the form:
  *
  *	    justify x y string  function  --
  *
  *	Justify is -1, 0, or 1, depending on whether the following string
- *	should be left, center, or right justified, x and y is the
- *	location for the origin of the string, string is the sequence
- *	of characters to be printed, and function is the name of the
- *	caller-provided function; the function should leave nothing
- *	on the stack.
- *
- *	The meaning of the origin of the string (x and y) depends on
- *	the justification.  For left justification, x is where the
- *	left edge of the string should appear.  For center justification,
- *	x is where the center of the string should appear.  And for right
- *	justification, x is where the right edge of the string should
- *	appear.  This behavior is necessary because, for example, right
- *	justified text on the screen is justified with screen metrics.
- *	The same string needs to be justified with printer metrics on
- *	the printer to appear in the correct place with respect to other
- *	similarly justified strings.  In all circumstances, y is the
- *	location of the baseline for the string.
+ *	should be left, center, or right justified, x and y is the location
+ *	for the origin of the string, string is the sequence of characters to
+ *	be printed, and function is the name of the caller-provided function;
+ *	the function should leave nothing on the stack.
+ *
+ *	The meaning of the origin of the string (x and y) depends on the
+ *	justification. For left justification, x is where the left edge of the
+ *	string should appear. For center justification, x is where the center
+ *	of the string should appear. And for right justification, x is where
+ *	the right edge of the string should appear. This behavior is necessary
+ *	because, for example, right justified text on the screen is justified
+ *	with screen metrics. The same string needs to be justified with
+ *	printer metrics on the printer to appear in the correct place with
+ *	respect to other similarly justified strings. In all circumstances, y
+ *	is the location of the baseline for the string.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The interp's result is modified to hold the Postscript code that
- *	will render the text layout.
+ *	The interp's result is modified to hold the Postscript code that will
+ *	render the text layout.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2786,23 +2770,24 @@ Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript(interp, layout)
 	    p = chunkPtr->start;
 	    for (j = 0; j < chunkPtr->numDisplayChars; j++) {
 		/*
-		 * INTL: For now we just treat the characters as binary
-		 * data and display the lower byte.  Eventually this should
-		 * be revised to handle international postscript fonts.
+		 * INTL: For now we just treat the characters as binary data
+		 * and display the lower byte. Eventually this should be
+		 * revised to handle international postscript fonts.
 		 */
-		last_p=p;
-		p +=(charsize= Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p,&ch));
-		Tcl_UtfToExternal(interp,NULL,last_p,charsize,0,NULL,one_char,4,
-			NULL,&bytecount,NULL); 
-                if (bytecount == 1) {
+
+		last_p = p;
+		p += (charsize = Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p,&ch));
+		Tcl_UtfToExternal(interp, NULL, last_p, charsize, 0, NULL,
+			one_char, 4, NULL, &bytecount, NULL);
+		if (bytecount == 1) {
 		    c = UCHAR(one_char[0]);
 		    /* c = UCHAR( ch & 0xFF) */;
 		    if ((c == '(') || (c == ')') || (c == '\\') || (c < 0x20)
 			    || (c >= UCHAR(0x7f))) {
 			/*
-			 * Tricky point:  the "03" is necessary in the sprintf
+			 * Tricky point: the "03" is necessary in the sprintf
 			 * below, so that a full three digits of octal are
-			 * always generated.  Without the "03", a number
+			 * always generated. Without the "03", a number
 			 * following this sequence could be interpreted by
 			 * Postscript as part of this sequence.
 			 */
@@ -2813,20 +2798,24 @@ Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript(interp, layout)
 			buf[used++] = c;
 		    }
 		} else {
-		    /* This character doesn't belong to system character set.
-		     * So, we must use full glyph name */
+		    /*
+		     * This character doesn't belong to system character set.
+		     * So, we must use full glyph name.
+		     */
 		    sprintf(uindex,"%04X",ch); /* endianness? */
-		    if ((glyphname = Tcl_GetVar2( interp , "::tk::psglyphs",uindex,0))) {
-			if (used > 0 && buf [used-1] == '(') 
+		    if ((glyphname = Tcl_GetVar2(interp , "::tk::psglyphs",uindex,0))) {
+			if (used > 0 && buf [used-1] == '(') {
 			    --used;
-			else
+			} else {
 			    buf[used++] = ')';
+			}
 			buf[used++] = '/';
-			while( (*glyphname) && (used < (MAXUSE+27))) 
+			while ((*glyphname) && (used < (MAXUSE+27))) {
 			    buf[used++] = *glyphname++ ;
+			}
 			buf[used++] = '(';
 		    }
-		    
+
 		}
 		if (used >= MAXUSE) {
 		    buf[used] = '\0';
@@ -2837,10 +2826,10 @@ Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript(interp, layout)
 	}
 	if (used >= MAXUSE) {
 	    /*
-	     * If there are a whole bunch of returns or tabs in a row,
-	     * then buf[] could get filled up.
+	     * If there are a whole bunch of returns or tabs in a row, then
+	     * buf[] could get filled up.
 	     */
-	     
+
 	    buf[used] = '\0';
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, (char *) NULL);
 	    used = 0;
@@ -2863,15 +2852,14 @@ Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript(interp, layout)
  *	initialized font attributes structure.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If TCL_ERROR is returned, an
- *	error message will be left in interp's result object.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If TCL_ERROR is returned, an error
+ *	message will be left in interp's result object.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The fields of the font attributes structure get filled in with
- *	information from argc/argv.  If an error occurs while parsing,
- *	the font attributes structure will contain all modifications
- *	specified in the command line options up to the point of the
- *	error.
+ *	information from argc/argv. If an error occurs while parsing, the font
+ *	attributes structure will contain all modifications specified in the
+ *	command line options up to the point of the error.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -2882,14 +2870,14 @@ ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc, objv, faPtr)
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For display on which font will be used. */
     int objc;			/* Number of elements in argv. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Command line options. */
-    TkFontAttributes *faPtr;	/* Font attributes structure whose fields
-				 * are to be modified.  Structure must already
-				 * be properly initialized. */
+    TkFontAttributes *faPtr;	/* Font attributes structure whose fields are
+				 * to be modified. Structure must already be
+				 * properly initialized. */
 {
     int i, n, index;
     Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, *valuePtr;
     char *value;
-    
+
     for (i = 0; i < objc; i += 2) {
 	optionPtr = objv[i];
 	valuePtr = objv[i + 1];
@@ -2900,10 +2888,9 @@ ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc, objv, faPtr)
 	}
 	if ((i+2 >= objc) && (objc & 1)) {
 	    /*
-	     * This test occurs after Tcl_GetIndexFromObj() so that
-	     * "font create xyz -xyz" will return the error message
-	     * that "-xyz" is a bad option, rather than that the value
-	     * for "-xyz" is missing.
+	     * This test occurs after Tcl_GetIndexFromObj() so that "font
+	     * create xyz -xyz" will return the error message that "-xyz" is a
+	     * bad option, rather than that the value for "-xyz" is missing.
 	     */
 
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"",
@@ -2913,48 +2900,42 @@ ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc, objv, faPtr)
 	}
 
 	switch (index) {
-	    case FONT_FAMILY: {
-		value = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr);
-		faPtr->family = Tk_GetUid(value);
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case FONT_SIZE: {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		faPtr->size = n;
-		break;
+	case FONT_FAMILY:
+	    value = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr);
+	    faPtr->family = Tk_GetUid(value);
+	    break;
+	case FONT_SIZE:
+	    if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case FONT_WEIGHT: {
-		n = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, weightMap, valuePtr);
-		if (n == TK_FW_UNKNOWN) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		faPtr->weight = n;
-		break;
+	    faPtr->size = n;
+	    break;
+	case FONT_WEIGHT:
+	    n = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, weightMap, valuePtr);
+	    if (n == TK_FW_UNKNOWN) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case FONT_SLANT: {
-		n = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, slantMap, valuePtr);
-		if (n == TK_FS_UNKNOWN) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		faPtr->slant = n;
-		break;
+	    faPtr->weight = n;
+	    break;
+	case FONT_SLANT:
+	    n = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, slantMap, valuePtr);
+	    if (n == TK_FS_UNKNOWN) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case FONT_UNDERLINE: {
-		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		faPtr->underline = n;
-		break;
+	    faPtr->slant = n;
+	    break;
+	case FONT_UNDERLINE:
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case FONT_OVERSTRIKE: {
-		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		faPtr->overstrike = n;
-		break;
+	    faPtr->underline = n;
+	    break;
+	case FONT_OVERSTRIKE:
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
+	    faPtr->overstrike = n;
+	    break;
 	}
     }
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -2968,14 +2949,13 @@ ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc, objv, faPtr)
  *	Return information about the font attributes as a Tcl list.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is TCL_OK if the objPtr was non-NULL and
- *	specified a valid font attribute, TCL_ERROR otherwise.  If TCL_OK
- *	is returned, the interp's result object is modified to hold a
- *	description of either the current value of a single option, or a
- *	list of all options and their current values for the given font
- *	attributes.  If TCL_ERROR is returned, the interp's result is
- *	set to an error message describing that the objPtr did not refer
- *	to a valid option.
+ *	The return value is TCL_OK if the objPtr was non-NULL and specified a
+ *	valid font attribute, TCL_ERROR otherwise. If TCL_OK is returned, the
+ *	interp's result object is modified to hold a description of either the
+ *	current value of a single option, or a list of all options and their
+ *	current values for the given font attributes. If TCL_ERROR is
+ *	returned, the interp's result is set to an error message describing
+ *	that the objPtr did not refer to a valid option.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2985,12 +2965,12 @@ ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc, objv, faPtr)
 
 static int
 GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		  	/* Interp to hold result. */
-    CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr;	/* The font attributes to inspect. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		  	/* If non-NULL, indicates the single
-					 * option whose value is to be
-					 * returned. Otherwise information is
-					 * returned for all options. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp to hold result. */
+    CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr;
+				/* The font attributes to inspect. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* If non-NULL, indicates the single option
+				 * whose value is to be returned. Otherwise
+				 * information is returned for all options. */
 {
     int i, index, start, end;
     CONST char *str;
@@ -3012,32 +2992,32 @@ GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr)
     valuePtr = NULL;
     for (i = start; i < end; i++) {
 	switch (i) {
-	    case FONT_FAMILY:
-		str = faPtr->family;
-		valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, ((str == NULL) ? 0 : -1));
-		break;
+	case FONT_FAMILY:
+	    str = faPtr->family;
+	    valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, ((str == NULL) ? 0 : -1));
+	    break;
 
-	    case FONT_SIZE:
-		valuePtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(faPtr->size);
-		break;
+	case FONT_SIZE:
+	    valuePtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(faPtr->size);
+	    break;
 
-	    case FONT_WEIGHT:
-		str = TkFindStateString(weightMap, faPtr->weight);
-		valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, -1);
-		break;
-	
-	    case FONT_SLANT:
-		str = TkFindStateString(slantMap, faPtr->slant);
-		valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, -1);
-		break;
+	case FONT_WEIGHT:
+	    str = TkFindStateString(weightMap, faPtr->weight);
+	    valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, -1);
+	    break;
 
-	    case FONT_UNDERLINE:
-		valuePtr = Tcl_NewBooleanObj(faPtr->underline);
-		break;
+	case FONT_SLANT:
+	    str = TkFindStateString(slantMap, faPtr->slant);
+	    valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, -1);
+	    break;
 
-	    case FONT_OVERSTRIKE:
-		valuePtr = Tcl_NewBooleanObj(faPtr->overstrike);
-		break;
+	case FONT_UNDERLINE:
+	    valuePtr = Tcl_NewBooleanObj(faPtr->underline);
+	    break;
+
+	case FONT_OVERSTRIKE:
+	    valuePtr = Tcl_NewBooleanObj(faPtr->overstrike);
+	    break;
 	}
 	if (objPtr != NULL) {
 	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, valuePtr);
@@ -3055,8 +3035,8 @@ GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr)
  *
  * ParseFontNameObj --
  *
- *	Converts a object into a set of font attributes that can be used
- *	to construct a font.
+ *	Converts a object into a set of font attributes that can be used to
+ *	construct a font.
  *
  *	The string rep of the object can be one of the following forms:
  *		XLFD (see X documentation)
@@ -3064,10 +3044,10 @@ GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr)
  *		"-option value [-option value ...]"
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is TCL_ERROR if the object was syntactically
- *	invalid.  In that case an error message is left in interp's
- *	result object.  Otherwise, fills the font attribute buffer with
- *	the values parsed from the string and returns TCL_OK;
+ *	The return value is TCL_ERROR if the object was syntactically invalid.
+ *	In that case an error message is left in interp's result object.
+ *	Otherwise, fills the font attribute buffer with the values parsed from
+ *	the string and returns TCL_OK;
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3077,12 +3057,12 @@ GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr)
 
 static int
 ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for error return.  Must not be
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp for error return. Must not be
 				 * NULL. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For display on which font is used. */
     Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Parseable font description object. */
     TkFontAttributes *faPtr;	/* Filled with attributes parsed from font
-				 * name.  Any attributes that were not
+				 * name. Any attributes that were not
 				 * specified in font name are filled with
 				 * default values. */
 {
@@ -3090,7 +3070,7 @@ ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr)
     int objc, result, i, n;
     Tcl_Obj **objv;
     char *string;
-    
+
     TkInitFontAttributes(faPtr);
 
     string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr);
@@ -3099,7 +3079,7 @@ ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr)
 	 * This may be an XLFD or an "-option value" string.
 	 *
 	 * If the string begins with "-*" or a "-foundry-family-*" pattern,
-	 * then consider it an XLFD.  
+	 * then consider it an XLFD.
 	 */
 
 	if (string[1] == '*') {
@@ -3117,16 +3097,16 @@ ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr)
 
 	return ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc, objv, faPtr);
     }
-    
+
     if (*string == '*') {
 	/*
-	 * This is appears to be an XLFD.  Under Unix, all valid XLFDs were
-	 * already handled by TkpGetNativeFont.  If we are here, either we
-	 * have something that initially looks like an XLFD but isn't or we
-	 * have encountered an XLFD on Windows or Mac.
+	 * This is appears to be an XLFD. Under Unix, all valid XLFDs were
+	 * already handled by TkpGetNativeFont. If we are here, either we have
+	 * something that initially looks like an XLFD but isn't or we have
+	 * encountered an XLFD on Windows or Mac.
 	 */
 
-	xlfd:
+    xlfd:
 	result = TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, NULL);
 	if (result == TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_OK;
@@ -3134,8 +3114,8 @@ ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Wasn't an XLFD or "-option value" string.  Try it as a
-     * "font size style" list.
+     * Wasn't an XLFD or "-option value" string. Try it as a "font size style"
+     * list.
      */
 
     if ((Tcl_ListObjGetElements(NULL, objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK)
@@ -3198,9 +3178,8 @@ ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr)
  *
  * NewChunk --
  *
- *	Helper function for Tk_ComputeTextLayout().  Encapsulates a
- *	measured set of characters in a chunk that can be quickly
- *	drawn.
+ *	Helper function for Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). Encapsulates a measured
+ *	set of characters in a chunk that can be quickly drawn.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A pointer to the new chunk in the text layout.
@@ -3208,13 +3187,13 @@ ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr)
  * Side effects:
  *	The text layout is reallocated to hold more chunks as necessary.
  *
- *	Currently, Tk_ComputeTextLayout() stores contiguous ranges of
- *	"normal" characters in a chunk, along with individual tab
- *	and newline chars in their own chunks.  All characters in the
- *	text layout are accounted for.
+ *	Currently, Tk_ComputeTextLayout() stores contiguous ranges of "normal"
+ *	characters in a chunk, along with individual tab and newline chars in
+ *	their own chunks. All characters in the text layout are accounted for.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static LayoutChunk *
 NewChunk(layoutPtrPtr, maxPtr, start, numBytes, curX, newX, y)
     TextLayout **layoutPtrPtr;
@@ -3229,7 +3208,7 @@ NewChunk(layoutPtrPtr, maxPtr, start, numBytes, curX, newX, y)
     LayoutChunk *chunkPtr;
     int maxChunks, numChars;
     size_t s;
-    
+
     layoutPtr = *layoutPtrPtr;
     maxChunks = *maxPtr;
     if (layoutPtr->numChunks == maxChunks) {
@@ -3264,8 +3243,8 @@ NewChunk(layoutPtrPtr, maxPtr, start, numBytes, curX, newX, y)
  *
  * Results:
  *	Return value is TCL_ERROR if string was not a fully specified XLFD.
- *	Otherwise, fills font attribute buffer with the values parsed
- *	from the XLFD and returns TCL_OK.  
+ *	Otherwise, fills font attribute buffer with the values parsed from the
+ *	XLFD and returns TCL_OK.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3277,13 +3256,13 @@ int
 TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr)
     CONST char *string;		/* Parseable font description string. */
     TkFontAttributes *faPtr;	/* Filled with attributes parsed from font
-				 * name.  Any attributes that were not
+				 * name. Any attributes that were not
 				 * specified in font name are filled with
 				 * default values. */
     TkXLFDAttributes *xaPtr;	/* Filled with X-specific attributes parsed
-				 * from font name.  Any attributes that were
+				 * from font name. Any attributes that were
 				 * not specified in font name are filled with
-				 * default values.  May be NULL if such
+				 * default values. May be NULL if such
 				 * information is not desired. */
 {
     char *src;
@@ -3292,7 +3271,7 @@ TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr)
     char *field[XLFD_NUMFIELDS + 2];
     Tcl_DString ds;
     TkXLFDAttributes xa;
-    
+
     if (xaPtr == NULL) {
 	xaPtr = &xa;
     }
@@ -3331,13 +3310,13 @@ TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr)
 
     /*
      * An XLFD of the form -adobe-times-medium-r-*-12-*-* is pretty common,
-     * but it is (strictly) malformed, because the first * is eliding both
-     * the Setwidth and the Addstyle fields.  If the Addstyle field is a
-     * number, then assume the above incorrect form was used and shift all
-     * the rest of the fields right by one, so the number gets interpreted
-     * as a pixelsize.  This fix is so that we don't get a million reports
-     * that "it works under X (as a native font name), but gives a syntax
-     * error under Windows (as a parsed set of attributes)".
+     * but it is (strictly) malformed, because the first * is eliding both the
+     * Setwidth and the Addstyle fields. If the Addstyle field is a number,
+     * then assume the above incorrect form was used and shift all the rest of
+     * the fields right by one, so the number gets interpreted as a pixelsize.
+     * This fix is so that we don't get a million reports that "it works under
+     * X (as a native font name), but gives a syntax error under Windows (as a
+     * parsed set of attributes)".
      */
 
     if ((i > XLFD_ADD_STYLE) && (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_ADD_STYLE]))) {
@@ -3387,8 +3366,8 @@ TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr)
     /* XLFD_ADD_STYLE ignored. */
 
     /*
-     * Pointsize in tenths of a point, but treat it as tenths of a pixel
-     * for historical compatibility.
+     * Pointsize in tenths of a point, but treat it as tenths of a pixel for
+     * historical compatibility.
      */
 
     faPtr->size = 12;
@@ -3415,7 +3394,7 @@ TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Pixel height of font.  If specified, overrides pointsize.
+     * Pixel height of font. If specified, overrides pointsize.
      */
 
     if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_PIXEL_SIZE])) {
@@ -3425,9 +3404,9 @@ TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr)
 	     *
 	     *	    [ N1 N2 N3 N4 ]
 	     *
-	     * where N1 is the pixel size, and where N2, N3, and N4 
-	     * are some additional numbers that I don't know
-	     * the purpose of, so I ignore them.
+	     * where N1 is the pixel size, and where N2, N3, and N4 are some
+	     * additional numbers that I don't know the purpose of, so I
+	     * ignore them.
 	     */
 
 	    faPtr->size = atoi(field[XLFD_PIXEL_SIZE] + 1);
@@ -3461,12 +3440,12 @@ TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr)
  *
  * FieldSpecified --
  *
- *	Helper function for TkParseXLFD().  Determines if a field in the
- *	XLFD was set to a non-null, non-don't-care value.
+ *	Helper function for TkParseXLFD(). Determines if a field in the XLFD
+ *	was set to a non-null, non-don't-care value.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the field in the XLFD was not set and
- *	should be ignored, non-zero otherwise.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the field in the XLFD was not set and should
+ *	be ignored, non-zero otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3476,10 +3455,11 @@ TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr)
 
 static int
 FieldSpecified(field)
-    CONST char *field;	/* The field of the XLFD to check.  Strictly
-			 * speaking, only when the string is "*" does it mean
-			 * don't-care.  However, an unspecified or question
-			 * mark is also interpreted as don't-care. */
+    CONST char *field;		/* The field of the XLFD to check. Strictly
+				 * speaking, only when the string is "*" does
+				 * it mean don't-care. However, an unspecified
+				 * or question mark is also interpreted as
+				 * don't-care. */
 {
     char ch;
 
@@ -3506,7 +3486,7 @@ FieldSpecified(field)
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 int
 TkFontGetPixels(tkwin, size)
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For point->pixel conversion factor. */
@@ -3540,7 +3520,7 @@ TkFontGetPixels(tkwin, size)
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 int
 TkFontGetPoints(tkwin, size)
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For pixel->point conversion factor. */
@@ -3563,24 +3543,24 @@ TkFontGetPoints(tkwin, size)
  *
  * TkFontGetAliasList --
  *
- *	Given a font name, find the list of all aliases for that font
- *	name.  One of the names in this list will probably be the name
- *	that this platform expects when asking for the font.
+ *	Given a font name, find the list of all aliases for that font name.
+ *	One of the names in this list will probably be the name that this
+ *	platform expects when asking for the font.
  *
  * Results:
- *	As above.  The return value is NULL if the font name has no 
- *	aliases.
+
+ *	As above. The return value is NULL if the font name has no aliases.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-	
+
 char **
 TkFontGetAliasList(faceName)
     CONST char *faceName;	/* Font name to test for aliases. */
-{   
+{
     int i, j;
 
     for (i = 0; fontAliases[i] != NULL; i++) {
@@ -3598,9 +3578,8 @@ TkFontGetAliasList(faceName)
  *
  * TkFontGetFallbacks --
  *
- *	Get the list of font fallbacks that the platform-specific code
- *	can use to try to find the closest matching font the name 
- *	requested.
+ *	Get the list of font fallbacks that the platform-specific code can use
+ *	to try to find the closest matching font the name requested.
  *
  * Results:
  *	As above.
@@ -3610,7 +3589,7 @@ TkFontGetAliasList(faceName)
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-	
+
 char ***
 TkFontGetFallbacks()
 {
@@ -3635,7 +3614,7 @@ TkFontGetFallbacks()
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-	
+
 char **
 TkFontGetGlobalClass()
 {
@@ -3647,8 +3626,8 @@ TkFontGetGlobalClass()
  *
  * TkFontGetSymbolClass --
  *
- *	Get the list of fonts that are symbolic; used if the operating 
- *	system cannot apriori identify symbolic fonts on its own.
+ *	Get the list of fonts that are symbolic; used if the operating system
+ *	cannot apriori identify symbolic fonts on its own.
  *
  * Results:
  *	As above.
@@ -3658,7 +3637,7 @@ TkFontGetGlobalClass()
  *
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-	
+
 char **
 TkFontGetSymbolClass()
 {
@@ -3670,13 +3649,12 @@ TkFontGetSymbolClass()
  *
  * TkDebugFont --
  *
- *	This procedure returns debugging information about a font.
+ *	This function returns debugging information about a font.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a list with one sublist for each TkFont
- *	corresponding to "name".  Each sublist has two elements that
- *	contain the resourceRefCount and objRefCount fields from the
- *	TkFont structure.
+ *	corresponding to "name". Each sublist has two elements that contain
+ *	the resourceRefCount and objRefCount fields from the TkFont structure.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3686,8 +3664,8 @@ TkFontGetSymbolClass()
 
 Tcl_Obj *
 TkDebugFont(tkwin, name)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window in which the font will be
-				 * used (not currently used). */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window in which the font will be used
+				 * (not currently used). */
     char *name;			/* Name of the desired color. */
 {
     TkFont *fontPtr;
@@ -3707,7 +3685,7 @@ TkDebugFont(tkwin, name)
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
 		    Tcl_NewIntObj(fontPtr->resourceRefCount));
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
-		    Tcl_NewIntObj(fontPtr->objRefCount)); 
+		    Tcl_NewIntObj(fontPtr->objRefCount));
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, objPtr);
 	}
     }
@@ -3719,13 +3697,13 @@ TkDebugFont(tkwin, name)
  *
  * TkFontGetFirstTextLayout --
  *
- *	This procedure returns the first chunk of a Tk_TextLayout,
- *	i.e. until the first font change on the first line (or the
- *	whole first line if there is no such font change).
+ *	This function returns the first chunk of a Tk_TextLayout, i.e. until
+ *	the first font change on the first line (or the whole first line if
+ *	there is no such font change).
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the byte length of the chunk, the chunk
- *	itself is copied into dst and its Tk_Font into font.
+ *	The return value is the byte length of the chunk, the chunk itself is
+ *	copied into dst and its Tk_Font into font.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3735,21 +3713,20 @@ TkDebugFont(tkwin, name)
 
 int
 TkFontGetFirstTextLayout(
-    Tk_TextLayout layout,	/* Layout information, from a previous call
-				 * to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
-    Tk_Font * font,
-    char    * dst)
+    Tk_TextLayout layout,	/* Layout information, from a previous call to
+				 * Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */
+    Tk_Font *font,
+    char *dst)
 {
     TextLayout  *layoutPtr;
     LayoutChunk *chunkPtr;
     int numBytesInChunk;
 
     layoutPtr = (TextLayout *)layout;
-    if ((layoutPtr==NULL)
-            || (layoutPtr->numChunks==0)
-            || (layoutPtr->chunks->numDisplayChars <= 0)) {
-        dst[0] = '\0';
-        return 0;
+    if ((layoutPtr==NULL) || (layoutPtr->numChunks==0)
+	    || (layoutPtr->chunks->numDisplayChars <= 0)) {
+	dst[0] = '\0';
+	return 0;
     }
     chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks;
     numBytesInChunk = chunkPtr->numBytes;
@@ -3757,3 +3734,11 @@ TkFontGetFirstTextLayout(
     *font = layoutPtr->tkfont;
     return numBytesInChunk;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkFrame.c b/generic/tkFrame.c
index f116f6c..4cdee7e 100644
--- a/generic/tkFrame.c
+++ b/generic/tkFrame.c
@@ -1,18 +1,17 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkFrame.c --
  *
  *	This module implements "frame", "labelframe" and "toplevel" widgets
- *      for the Tk toolkit.  Frames are windows with a background color
- *	and possibly a 3-D effect, but not much else in the way of
- *	attributes.
+ *	for the Tk toolkit. Frames are windows with a background color and
+ *	possibly a 3-D effect, but not much else in the way of attributes.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkFrame.c,v 1.21 2005/08/09 07:39:17 das Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkFrame.c,v 1.22 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "default.h"
@@ -33,29 +32,29 @@ enum FrameType {
  */
 
 typedef struct {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the frame.  NULL
-				 * means that the window has been destroyed
-				 * but the data structures haven't yet been
-				 * cleaned up. */
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget.  Used, among
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that embodies the frame. NULL means
+				 * that the window has been destroyed but the
+				 * data structures haven't yet been cleaned
+				 * up. */
+    Display *display;		/* Display containing widget. Used, among
 				 * other things, so that resources can be
 				 * freed even after tkwin has gone away. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with widget.  Used
-				 * to delete widget command. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with widget. Used to
+				 * delete widget command. */
     Tcl_Command widgetCmd;	/* Token for frame's widget command. */
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;	/* Table that defines configuration options
 				 * available for this widget. */
     char *className;		/* Class name for widget (from configuration
-				 * option).  Malloc-ed. */
+				 * option). Malloc-ed. */
     enum FrameType type;	/* Type of widget, such as TYPE_FRAME. */
-    char *screenName;		/* Screen on which widget is created.  Non-null
-				 * only for top-levels.  Malloc-ed, may be
+    char *screenName;		/* Screen on which widget is created. Non-null
+				 * only for top-levels. Malloc-ed, may be
 				 * NULL. */
     char *visualName;		/* Textual description of visual for window,
-				 * from -visual option.  Malloc-ed, may be
+				 * from -visual option. Malloc-ed, may be
 				 * NULL. */
     char *colormapName;		/* Textual description of colormap for window,
-				 * from -colormap option.  Malloc-ed, may be
+				 * from -colormap option. Malloc-ed, may be
 				 * NULL. */
     char *menuName;		/* Textual description of menu to use for
 				 * menubar. Malloc-ed, may be NULL. */
@@ -63,32 +62,32 @@ typedef struct {
 				 * allocated for this window, which must be
 				 * freed when the window is deleted. */
     Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Structure used to draw 3-D border and
-				 * background.  NULL means no background
-				 * or border. */
+				 * background. NULL means no background or
+				 * border. */
     int borderWidth;		/* Width of 3-D border (if any). */
     int relief;			/* 3-d effect: TK_RELIEF_RAISED etc. */
-    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw
-				 * around widget when it has the focus.
-				 * 0 means don't draw a highlight. */
+    int highlightWidth;		/* Width in pixels of highlight to draw around
+				 * widget when it has the focus. 0 means don't
+				 * draw a highlight. */
     XColor *highlightBgColorPtr;
-				/* Color for drawing traversal highlight
-				 * area when highlight is off. */
+				/* Color for drawing traversal highlight area
+				 * when highlight is off. */
     XColor *highlightColorPtr;	/* Color for drawing traversal highlight. */
-    int width;			/* Width to request for window.  <= 0 means
+    int width;			/* Width to request for window. <= 0 means
 				 * don't request any size. */
-    int height;			/* Height to request for window.  <= 0 means
+    int height;			/* Height to request for window. <= 0 means
 				 * don't request any size. */
     Tk_Cursor cursor;		/* Current cursor for window, or None. */
-    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option;  not used in
-				 * the C code, but used by keyboard traversal
-				 * scripts.  Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
+    char *takeFocus;		/* Value of -takefocus option; not used in the
+				 * C code, but used by keyboard traversal
+				 * scripts. Malloc'ed, but may be NULL. */
     int isContainer;		/* 1 means this window is a container, 0 means
 				 * that it isn't. */
     char *useThis;		/* If the window is embedded, this points to
 				 * the name of the window in which it is
-				 * embedded (malloc'ed).  For non-embedded
+				 * embedded (malloc'ed). For non-embedded
 				 * windows this is NULL. */
-    int flags;			/* Various flags;  see below for
+    int flags;			/* Various flags; see below for
 				 * definitions. */
     Tcl_Obj *padXPtr;		/* Value of -padx option: specifies how many
 				 * pixels of extra space to leave on left and
@@ -101,46 +100,41 @@ typedef struct {
 } Frame;
 
 /*
- * A data structure of the following type is kept for each labelframe
- * widget managed by this file:
+ * A data structure of the following type is kept for each labelframe widget
+ * managed by this file:
  */
 
 typedef struct {
     Frame frame;		/* A pointer to the generic frame structure.
 				 * This must be the first element of the
 				 * Labelframe. */
-
     /*
      * Labelframe specific configuration settings.
      */
-
     Tcl_Obj *textPtr;		/* Value of -text option: specifies text to
 				 * display in button. */
-    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Value of -font option: specifies font
-				 * to use for display text. */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Value of -font option: specifies font to
+				 * use for display text. */
     XColor *textColorPtr;	/* Value of -fg option: specifies foreground
 				 * color in normal mode. */
     int labelAnchor;		/* Value of -labelanchor option: specifies
 				 * where to place the label. */
-    Tk_Window labelWin;		/* Value of -labelwidget option: Window to
-                                 * use as label for the frame. */
-
+    Tk_Window labelWin;		/* Value of -labelwidget option: Window to use
+				 * as label for the frame. */
     /*
      * Labelframe specific fields for use with configuration settings above.
      */
-
     GC textGC;			/* GC for drawing text in normal mode. */
     Tk_TextLayout textLayout;	/* Stored text layout information. */
     XRectangle labelBox;	/* The label's actual size and position. */
     int labelReqWidth;		/* The label's requested width. */
     int labelReqHeight;		/* The label's requested height. */
     int labelTextX, labelTextY;	/* Position of the text to be drawn. */
-
 } Labelframe;
 
 /*
- * The following macros define how many extra pixels to leave
- * around a label's text.
+ * The following macros define how many extra pixels to leave around a label's
+ * text.
  */
 
 #define LABELSPACING 1
@@ -149,20 +143,19 @@ typedef struct {
 /*
  * Flag bits for frames:
  *
- * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler
- *				has already been queued to redraw
- *				this window.
- * GOT_FOCUS:			Non-zero means this widget currently
- *				has the input focus.
+ * REDRAW_PENDING:		Non-zero means a DoWhenIdle handler has
+ *				already been queued to redraw this window.
+ * GOT_FOCUS:			Non-zero means this widget currently has the
+ *				input focus.
  */
 
 #define REDRAW_PENDING		1
 #define GOT_FOCUS		4
 
 /*
- * The following enum is used to define a type for the -labelanchor option
- * of the Labelframe widget.  These values are used as indices into the 
- * string table below.
+ * The following enum is used to define a type for the -labelanchor option of
+ * the Labelframe widget. These values are used as indices into the string
+ * table below.
  */
 
 enum labelanchor {
@@ -178,8 +171,8 @@ static char *labelAnchorStrings[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Information used for parsing configuration options.  There are
- * one common table used by all and one table for each widget class.
+ * Information used for parsing configuration options. There are one common
+ * table used by all and one table for each widget class.
  */
 
 static Tk_OptionSpec commonOptSpec[] = {
@@ -233,7 +226,7 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec frameOptSpec[] = {
 	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
 	DEF_FRAME_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, borderWidth),
-        0, 0, 0},
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-class", "class", "Class",
 	DEF_FRAME_CLASS, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, className),
 	0, 0, 0},
@@ -249,7 +242,7 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec toplevelOptSpec[] = {
 	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
 	DEF_FRAME_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, borderWidth),
-        0, 0, 0},
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-class", "class", "Class",
 	DEF_TOPLEVEL_CLASS, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, className),
 	0, 0, 0},
@@ -274,7 +267,7 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec labelframeOptSpec[] = {
 	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
 	DEF_LABELFRAME_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, borderWidth),
-        0, 0, 0},
+	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-class", "class", "Class",
 	DEF_LABELFRAME_CLASS, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, className),
 	0, 0, 0},
@@ -286,10 +279,10 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec labelframeOptSpec[] = {
 	DEF_LABELFRAME_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(Labelframe, textColorPtr), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-labelanchor", "labelAnchor", "LabelAnchor",
 	DEF_LABELFRAME_LABELANCHOR, -1, Tk_Offset(Labelframe, labelAnchor),
-        0, (ClientData) labelAnchorStrings, 0},
+	0, (ClientData) labelAnchorStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_WINDOW, "-labelwidget", "labelWidget", "LabelWidget",
-        (char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Labelframe, labelWin),
-        TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(Labelframe, labelWin),
+	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
 	DEF_LABELFRAME_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(Frame, relief),
 	0, 0, 0},
@@ -318,37 +311,36 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec *optionSpecs[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ComputeFrameGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((Frame *framePtr));
-static int		ConfigureFrame _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Frame *framePtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		CreateFrame _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[],
-			    enum FrameType type, char *appName));
-static void		DestroyFrame _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
-static void		DestroyFramePartly _ANSI_ARGS_((Frame *framePtr));
-static void		DisplayFrame _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		FrameCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		FrameEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		FrameLostSlaveProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void		FrameRequestProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void		FrameStructureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr));
-static int		FrameWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		FrameWorldChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData instanceData));
-static void		MapFrame _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+static void		ComputeFrameGeometry(Frame *framePtr);
+static int		ConfigureFrame(Tcl_Interp *interp, Frame *framePtr,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		CreateFrame(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST argv[],
+			    enum FrameType type, char *appName);
+static void		DestroyFrame(char *memPtr);
+static void		DestroyFramePartly(Frame *framePtr);
+static void		DisplayFrame(ClientData clientData);
+static void		FrameCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		FrameEventProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		FrameLostSlaveProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		FrameRequestProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		FrameStructureProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		FrameWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		FrameWorldChanged(ClientData instanceData);
+static void		MapFrame(ClientData clientData);
 
 /*
- * The structure below defines frame class behavior by means of procedures
- * that can be invoked from generic window code.
+ * The structure below defines frame class behavior by means of functions that
+ * can be invoked from generic window code.
  */
 
 static Tk_ClassProcs frameClass = {
@@ -362,9 +354,9 @@ static Tk_ClassProcs frameClass = {
  */
 
 static Tk_GeomMgr frameGeomType = {
-    "labelframe",			/* name */
-    FrameRequestProc,			/* requestProc */
-    FrameLostSlaveProc			/* lostSlaveProc */
+    "labelframe",		/* name */
+    FrameRequestProc,		/* requestProc */
+    FrameLostSlaveProc		/* lostSlaveProc */
 };
 
 
@@ -373,16 +365,16 @@ static Tk_GeomMgr frameGeomType = {
  *
  * Tk_FrameObjCmd, Tk_ToplevelObjCmd, Tk_LabelframeObjCmd --
  *
- *	These procedures are invoked to process the "frame",
- *      "toplevel" and "labelframe" Tcl commands.  See the user
- *      documentation for details on what they do.
+ *	These functions are invoked to process the "frame", "toplevel" and
+ *	"labelframe" Tcl commands. See the user documentation for details on
+ *	what they do.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	See the user documentation.  These procedures are just wrappers;
- *	they call CreateFrame to do all of the real work.
+ *	See the user documentation. These functions are just wrappers; they
+ *	call CreateFrame to do all of the real work.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -425,10 +417,10 @@ Tk_LabelframeObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkCreateFrame --
  *
- *	This procedure is the old command procedure for the "frame"
- *      and "toplevel" commands.  Now it is used directly by Tk_Init to
- *      create a new main window.  See the user documentation for the
- *      "frame" and "toplevel" commands for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is the old command function for the "frame" and
+ *	"toplevel" commands. Now it is used directly by Tk_Init to create a
+ *	new main window. See the user documentation for the "frame" and
+ *	"toplevel" commands for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -449,11 +441,12 @@ TkCreateFrame(clientData, interp, argc, argv, toplevel, appName)
 				 * zero means create a frame. */
     char *appName;		/* Should only be non-NULL if there is no main
 				 * window associated with the interpreter.
-				 * Gives the base name to use for the
-				 * new application. */
+				 * Gives the base name to use for the new
+				 * application. */
 {
     int result, i;
     Tcl_Obj **objv = (Tcl_Obj **) ckalloc((argc+1) * sizeof(Tcl_Obj **));
+
     for (i=0; i<argc; i++) {
 	objv[i] = Tcl_NewStringObj(argv[i], -1);
 	Tcl_IncrRefCount(objv[i]);
@@ -476,17 +469,16 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
     enum FrameType type;	/* What widget type to create. */
     char *appName;		/* Should only be non-NULL if there are no
-				 * Main window associated with the interpreter.
-				 * Gives the base name to use for the
-				 * new application. */
+				 * Main window associated with the
+				 * interpreter. Gives the base name to use for
+				 * the new application. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin;
     Frame *framePtr;
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
     Tk_Window new;
     CONST char *className, *screenName, *visualName, *colormapName, *arg, *useOption;
-    int i, c, depth;
-    size_t length;
+    int i, c, length, depth;
     unsigned int mask;
     Colormap colormap;
     Visual *visual;
@@ -497,58 +489,57 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the option table for this widget class.  If it has already
-     * been created, the cached pointer will be returned.
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, the cached pointer will be returned.
      */
 
     optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs[type]);
 
     /*
-     * Pre-process the argument list.  Scan through it to find any
-     * "-class", "-screen", "-visual", and "-colormap" options.  These
-     * arguments need to be processed specially, before the window
-     * is configured using the usual Tk mechanisms.
+     * Pre-process the argument list. Scan through it to find any "-class",
+     * "-screen", "-visual", and "-colormap" options. These arguments need to
+     * be processed specially, before the window is configured using the usual
+     * Tk mechanisms.
      */
 
     className = colormapName = screenName = visualName = useOption = NULL;
     colormap = None;
     for (i = 2; i < objc; i += 2) {
-	arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], (int *) &length);
+	arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
 	if (length < 2) {
 	    continue;
 	}
 	c = arg[1];
-	if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(arg, "-class", length) == 0)
-		&& (length >= 3)) {
+	if ((c == 'c') && (length >= 3)
+		&& (strncmp(arg, "-class", (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
 	    className = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]);
 	} else if ((c == 'c')
-		&& (strncmp(arg, "-colormap", length) == 0)) {
+		&& (strncmp(arg, "-colormap", (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
 	    colormapName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]);
 	} else if ((c == 's') && (type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL)
-		&& (strncmp(arg, "-screen", length) == 0)) {
+		&& (strncmp(arg, "-screen", (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
 	    screenName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]);
 	} else if ((c == 'u') && (type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL)
-		&& (strncmp(arg, "-use", length) == 0)) {
+		&& (strncmp(arg, "-use", (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
 	    useOption = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]);
 	} else if ((c == 'v')
-		&& (strncmp(arg, "-visual", length) == 0)) {
+		&& (strncmp(arg, "-visual", (unsigned) length) == 0)) {
 	    visualName = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]);
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the window, and deal with the special options -use,
-     * -classname, -colormap, -screenname, and -visual.  These options
-     * must be handle before calling ConfigureFrame below, and they must
-     * also be processed in a particular order, for the following
-     * reasons:
-     * 1. Must set the window's class before calling ConfigureFrame,
-     *    so that unspecified options are looked up in the option
-     *    database using the correct class.
-     * 2. Must set visual information before calling ConfigureFrame
-     *    so that colors are allocated in a proper colormap.
+     * Create the window, and deal with the special options -use, -classname,
+     * -colormap, -screenname, and -visual. These options must be handle
+     * before calling ConfigureFrame below, and they must also be processed in
+     * a particular order, for the following reasons:
+     * 1. Must set the window's class before calling ConfigureFrame, so that
+     *	  unspecified options are looked up in the option database using the
+     *	  correct class.
+     * 2. Must set visual information before calling ConfigureFrame so that
+     *	  colors are allocated in a proper colormap.
      * 3. Must call TkpUseWindow before setting non-default visual
-     *    information, since TkpUseWindow changes the defaults.
+     *	  information, since TkpUseWindow changes the defaults.
      */
 
     if (screenName == NULL) {
@@ -556,9 +547,8 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Main window associated with interpreter.
-     * If we're called by Tk_Init to create a
-     * new application, then this is NULL.
+     * Main window associated with interpreter. If we're called by Tk_Init to
+     * create a new application, then this is NULL.
      */
 
     tkwin = Tk_MainWindow(interp);
@@ -567,8 +557,8 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
 		screenName);
     } else if (appName == NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * This occurs when someone tried to create a frame/toplevel
-	 * while we are being destroyed.  Let an error be thrown.
+	 * This occurs when someone tried to create a frame/toplevel while we
+	 * are being destroyed. Let an error be thrown.
 	 */
 
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unable to create widget \"",
@@ -576,7 +566,7 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
 	new = NULL;
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * We were called from Tk_Init;  create a new application.
+	 * We were called from Tk_Init; create a new application.
 	 */
 
 	new = TkCreateMainWindow(interp, screenName, appName);
@@ -625,9 +615,9 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
     }
 
     /*
-     * For top-level windows, provide an initial geometry request of
-     * 200x200,  just so the window looks nicer on the screen if it
-     * doesn't request a size for itself.
+     * For top-level windows, provide an initial geometry request of 200x200,
+     * just so the window looks nicer on the screen if it doesn't request a
+     * size for itself.
      */
 
     if (type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL) {
@@ -635,9 +625,9 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the widget record, process configuration options, and
-     * create event handlers.  Then fill in a few additional fields
-     * in the widget record from the special options.
+     * Create the widget record, process configuration options, and create
+     * event handlers. Then fill in a few additional fields in the widget
+     * record from the special options.
      */
 
     if (type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
@@ -668,11 +658,12 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
     /*
      * Store backreference to frame widget in window structure.
      */
+
     Tk_SetClassProcs(new, &frameClass, (ClientData) framePtr);
 
     mask = ExposureMask | StructureNotifyMask | FocusChangeMask;
     if (type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL) {
-        mask |= ActivateMask;
+	mask |= ActivateMask;
     }
     Tk_CreateEventHandler(new, mask, FrameEventProc, (ClientData) framePtr);
     if ((Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) framePtr, optionTable, new)
@@ -695,7 +686,7 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
     Tcl_SetResult(interp, Tk_PathName(new), TCL_STATIC);
     return TCL_OK;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     if (new != NULL) {
 	Tk_DestroyWindow(new);
     }
@@ -707,9 +698,9 @@ CreateFrame(clientData, interp, objc, objv, type, appName)
  *
  * FrameWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a frame widget.  See the user
- *	documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a frame widget. See the user documentation for details on what it
+ *	does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -735,8 +726,7 @@ FrameWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     };
     register Frame *framePtr = (Frame *) clientData;
     int result = TCL_OK, index;
-    size_t length;
-    int c, i;
+    int c, i, length;
     Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
 
     if (objc < 2) {
@@ -749,23 +739,22 @@ FrameWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) framePtr);
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-      case FRAME_CGET: {
+    case FRAME_CGET:
 	if (objc != 3) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
 	}
-        objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) framePtr,
+	objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) framePtr,
 		framePtr->optionTable, objv[2], framePtr->tkwin);
-        if (objPtr == NULL) {
+	if (objPtr == NULL) {
 	    result = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto done;
-        } else {
+	} else {
 	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-        }
+	}
 	break;
-      }
-      case FRAME_CONFIGURE: {
+    case FRAME_CONFIGURE:
 	if (objc <= 3) {
 	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) framePtr,
 		    framePtr->optionTable,
@@ -779,33 +768,32 @@ FrameWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    /*
-	     * Don't allow the options -class, -colormap, -container,
-	     * -newcmap, -screen, -use, or -visual to be changed.
+	     * Don't allow the options -class, -colormap, -container, -screen,
+	     * -use, or -visual to be changed.
 	     */
 
 	    for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
-		char *arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], (int *) &length);
+		char *arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
 		if (length < 2) {
 		    continue;
 		}
 		c = arg[1];
-		if (((c == 'c') && (strncmp(arg, "-class", length) == 0)
-			&& (length >= 2))
-			|| ((c == 'c')
-			&& (strncmp(arg, "-colormap", length) == 0)
-			&& (length >= 3))
-			|| ((c == 'c')
-			&& (strncmp(arg, "-container", length) == 0)
-			&& (length >= 3))
-			|| ((c == 's') && (framePtr->type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL)
-			&& (strncmp(arg, "-screen", length) == 0))
-			|| ((c == 'u') && (framePtr->type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL)
-			&& (strncmp(arg, "-use", length) == 0))
-			|| ((c == 'v')
-			&& (strncmp(arg, "-visual", length) == 0))) {
-		    if(c == 'u') {
-			CONST char*string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]);
-			if(TCL_OK != TkpUseWindow(interp, framePtr->tkwin, string)) {
+		if (((c == 'c') && (length >= 2)
+			&& (strncmp(arg, "-class", (unsigned)length) == 0))
+		    || ((c == 'c') && (length >= 3)
+			&& (strncmp(arg, "-colormap", (unsigned)length) == 0))
+		    || ((c == 'c') && (length >= 3)
+			&& (strncmp(arg, "-container", (unsigned)length) == 0))
+		    || ((c == 's') && (framePtr->type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL)
+			&& (strncmp(arg, "-screen", (unsigned)length) == 0))
+		    || ((c == 'u') && (framePtr->type == TYPE_TOPLEVEL)
+			&& (strncmp(arg, "-use", (unsigned)length) == 0))
+		    || ((c == 'v')
+			&& (strncmp(arg, "-visual", (unsigned)length) == 0))) {
+		    if (c == 'u') {
+			CONST char *string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]);
+			if (TkpUseWindow(interp, framePtr->tkwin,
+				string) != TCL_OK) {
 			    result = TCL_ERROR;
 			    goto done;
 			}
@@ -820,10 +808,9 @@ FrameWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    result = ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc-2, objv+2);
 	}
 	break;
-      }
     }
 
-    done:
+  done:
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) framePtr);
     return result;
 }
@@ -833,9 +820,9 @@ FrameWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * DestroyFrame --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a frame at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).
+ *	This function is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release to clean
+ *	up the internal structure of a frame at a safe time (when no-one is
+ *	using it anymore).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -870,10 +857,9 @@ DestroyFrame(memPtr)
  *
  * DestroyFramePartly --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to clean up everything that needs
- *      tkwin to be defined when deleted.  During the destruction
- *      process tkwin is always set to NULL and this procedure must
- *      be called before that happens.
+ *	This function is invoked to clean up everything that needs tkwin to be
+ *	defined when deleted. During the destruction process tkwin is always
+ *	set to NULL and this function must be called before that happens.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -903,7 +889,7 @@ DestroyFramePartly(framePtr)
     }
 
     Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) framePtr, framePtr->optionTable,
-            framePtr->tkwin);
+	    framePtr->tkwin);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -911,18 +897,17 @@ DestroyFramePartly(framePtr)
  *
  * ConfigureFrame --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an objv/objc list, plus
- *	the Tk option database, in order to configure (or
- *	reconfigure) a frame widget.
+ *	This function is called to process an objv/objc list, plus the Tk
+ *	option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure) a frame
+ *	widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as text string, colors, font,
- *	etc. get set for framePtr;  old resources get freed, if there
- *	were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as text string, colors, font, etc. get
+ *	set for framePtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -930,8 +915,8 @@ DestroyFramePartly(framePtr)
 static int
 ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc, objv)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    register Frame *framePtr;	/* Information about widget;  may or may
-				 * not already have values for some fields. */
+    register Frame *framePtr;	/* Information about widget; may or may not
+				 * already have values for some fields. */
     int objc;			/* Number of valid entries in objv. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments. */
 {
@@ -943,7 +928,7 @@ ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc, objv)
     /*
      * Need the old menubar name for the menu code to delete it.
      */
-    
+
     if (framePtr->menuName == NULL) {
     	oldMenuName = NULL;
     } else {
@@ -998,8 +983,8 @@ ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If a -labelwidget is specified, check that it is valid and set
-     * up geometry management for it.
+     * If a -labelwidget is specified, check that it is valid and set up
+     * geometry management for it.
      */
 
     if (framePtr->type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
@@ -1016,10 +1001,9 @@ ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc, objv)
 		Tk_Window ancestor, parent, sibling = NULL;
 
 		/*
-		 * Make sure that the frame is either the parent of the
-		 * window used as label or a descendant of that
-		 * parent.  Also, don't allow a top-level window to be
-		 * managed inside the frame.
+		 * Make sure that the frame is either the parent of the window
+		 * used as label or a descendant of that parent. Also, don't
+		 * allow a top-level window to be managed inside the frame.
 		 */
 
 		parent = Tk_Parent(labelframePtr->labelWin);
@@ -1051,9 +1035,8 @@ ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc, objv)
 			(ClientData) framePtr);
 
 		/*
-		 * If the frame is not parent to the label, make
-		 * sure the label is above its sibling in the stacking
-		 * order.
+		 * If the frame is not parent to the label, make sure the
+		 * label is above its sibling in the stacking order.
 		 */
 
 		if (sibling != NULL) {
@@ -1073,19 +1056,19 @@ ConfigureFrame(interp, framePtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * FrameWorldChanged --
  *
- *      This procedure is called when the world has changed in some
- *      way and the widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts
- *	and determine its new geometry.
+ *	This function is called when the world has changed in some way and the
+ *	widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts and determine its
+ *	new geometry.
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      Frame will be relayed out and redisplayed.
+ *	Frame will be relayed out and redisplayed.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 static void
 FrameWorldChanged(instanceData)
     ClientData instanceData;	/* Information about widget. */
@@ -1107,8 +1090,8 @@ FrameWorldChanged(instanceData)
 
     if (framePtr->type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
 	/*
-	 * The textGC is needed even in the labelWin case, so it's
-	 * always created for a labelframe.
+	 * The textGC is needed even in the labelWin case, so it's always
+	 * created for a labelframe.
 	 */
 
 	gcValues.font = Tk_FontId(labelframePtr->tkfont);
@@ -1124,7 +1107,7 @@ FrameWorldChanged(instanceData)
 	/*
 	 * Calculate label size.
 	 */
-	
+
 	labelframePtr->labelReqWidth = labelframePtr->labelReqHeight = 0;
 
 	if (anyTextLabel) {
@@ -1140,13 +1123,13 @@ FrameWorldChanged(instanceData)
 	    labelframePtr->labelReqHeight = Tk_ReqHeight(labelframePtr->labelWin);
 	}
 
-	/* 
-	 * Make sure label size is at least as big as the border.
-	 * This simplifies later calculations and gives a better
-	 * appearance with thick borders.
+	/*
+	 * Make sure label size is at least as big as the border. This
+	 * simplifies later calculations and gives a better appearance with
+	 * thick borders.
 	 */
-     
-	if ((labelframePtr->labelAnchor >= LABELANCHOR_N) && 
+
+	if ((labelframePtr->labelAnchor >= LABELANCHOR_N) &&
 		(labelframePtr->labelAnchor <= LABELANCHOR_SW)) {
 	    if (labelframePtr->labelReqHeight < framePtr->borderWidth) {
 		labelframePtr->labelReqHeight = framePtr->borderWidth;
@@ -1162,34 +1145,34 @@ FrameWorldChanged(instanceData)
      * Calculate individual border widths.
      */
 
-    bWidthBottom = bWidthTop = bWidthRight = bWidthLeft = 
-            framePtr->borderWidth + framePtr->highlightWidth;
+    bWidthBottom = bWidthTop = bWidthRight = bWidthLeft =
+	    framePtr->borderWidth + framePtr->highlightWidth;
 
     bWidthLeft   += framePtr->padX;
     bWidthRight  += framePtr->padX;
     bWidthTop    += framePtr->padY;
     bWidthBottom += framePtr->padY;
-    
+
     if (anyTextLabel || anyWindowLabel) {
 	switch (labelframePtr->labelAnchor) {
-	  case LABELANCHOR_E:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_EN:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_ES:
+	case LABELANCHOR_E:
+	case LABELANCHOR_EN:
+	case LABELANCHOR_ES:
 	    bWidthRight += labelframePtr->labelReqWidth -
 		    framePtr->borderWidth;
 	    break;
-	  case LABELANCHOR_N:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_NE:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_NW:
+	case LABELANCHOR_N:
+	case LABELANCHOR_NE:
+	case LABELANCHOR_NW:
 	    bWidthTop += labelframePtr->labelReqHeight - framePtr->borderWidth;
 	    break;
-	  case LABELANCHOR_S:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_SE:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_SW:
+	case LABELANCHOR_S:
+	case LABELANCHOR_SE:
+	case LABELANCHOR_SW:
 	    bWidthBottom += labelframePtr->labelReqHeight -
 		    framePtr->borderWidth;
 	    break;
-	  default:
+	default:
 	    bWidthLeft += labelframePtr->labelReqWidth - framePtr->borderWidth;
 	    break;
 	}
@@ -1208,11 +1191,12 @@ FrameWorldChanged(instanceData)
 	int minwidth = labelframePtr->labelReqWidth;
 	int minheight = labelframePtr->labelReqHeight;
 	int padding = framePtr->highlightWidth;
+
 	if (framePtr->borderWidth > 0) {
 	    padding += framePtr->borderWidth + LABELMARGIN;
 	}
 	padding *= 2;
-	if ((labelframePtr->labelAnchor >= LABELANCHOR_N) && 
+	if ((labelframePtr->labelAnchor >= LABELANCHOR_N) &&
 		(labelframePtr->labelAnchor <= LABELANCHOR_SW)) {
 	    minwidth += padding;
 	    minheight += framePtr->borderWidth + framePtr->highlightWidth;
@@ -1240,9 +1224,9 @@ FrameWorldChanged(instanceData)
  *
  * ComputeFrameGeometry --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to compute various geometrical
- *	information for a frame, such as where various things get
- *	displayed.  It's called when the window is reconfigured.
+ *	This function is called to compute various geometrical information for
+ *	a frame, such as where various things get displayed. It's called when
+ *	the window is reconfigured.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1267,12 +1251,13 @@ ComputeFrameGeometry(framePtr)
      */
 
     if (framePtr->type != TYPE_LABELFRAME) return;
-    if ((labelframePtr->textPtr == NULL) &&
-	    (labelframePtr->labelWin == NULL))  return;
+    if (labelframePtr->textPtr == NULL && labelframePtr->labelWin == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
 
     tkwin = framePtr->tkwin;
 
-    /* 
+    /*
      * Calculate the available size for the label
      */
 
@@ -1281,15 +1266,15 @@ ComputeFrameGeometry(framePtr)
 
     padding = framePtr->highlightWidth;
     if (framePtr->borderWidth > 0) {
-        padding += framePtr->borderWidth + LABELMARGIN;
+	padding += framePtr->borderWidth + LABELMARGIN;
     }
     padding *= 2;
 
     maxHeight = Tk_Height(tkwin);
     maxWidth  = Tk_Width(tkwin);
 
-    if ((labelframePtr->labelAnchor >= LABELANCHOR_N) && 
-            (labelframePtr->labelAnchor <= LABELANCHOR_SW)) {
+    if ((labelframePtr->labelAnchor >= LABELANCHOR_N) &&
+	    (labelframePtr->labelAnchor <= LABELANCHOR_SW)) {
 	maxWidth -= padding;
 	if (maxWidth < 1) maxWidth = 1;
     } else {
@@ -1304,9 +1289,9 @@ ComputeFrameGeometry(framePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Calculate label and text position.
-     * The text's position is based on the requested size (= the text's
-     * real size) to get proper alignment if the text does not fit.
+     * Calculate label and text position. The text's position is based on the
+     * requested size (= the text's real size) to get proper alignment if the
+     * text does not fit.
      */
 
     otherWidth   = Tk_Width(tkwin)  - labelframePtr->labelBox.width;
@@ -1316,64 +1301,64 @@ ComputeFrameGeometry(framePtr)
     padding = framePtr->highlightWidth;
 
     switch (labelframePtr->labelAnchor) {
-      case LABELANCHOR_E:
-      case LABELANCHOR_EN:
-      case LABELANCHOR_ES:
-        labelframePtr->labelTextX = otherWidthT - padding;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.x = otherWidth - padding;
-        break;
-      case LABELANCHOR_N:
-      case LABELANCHOR_NE:
-      case LABELANCHOR_NW:
-        labelframePtr->labelTextY = padding;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.y = padding;
-        break;
-      case LABELANCHOR_S:
-      case LABELANCHOR_SE:
-      case LABELANCHOR_SW:
-        labelframePtr->labelTextY = otherHeightT - padding;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.y = otherHeight - padding;
-        break;
-      default:
-        labelframePtr->labelTextX = padding;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.x = padding;
-        break;
+    case LABELANCHOR_E:
+    case LABELANCHOR_EN:
+    case LABELANCHOR_ES:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextX = otherWidthT - padding;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.x = otherWidth - padding;
+	break;
+    case LABELANCHOR_N:
+    case LABELANCHOR_NE:
+    case LABELANCHOR_NW:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextY = padding;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.y = padding;
+	break;
+    case LABELANCHOR_S:
+    case LABELANCHOR_SE:
+    case LABELANCHOR_SW:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextY = otherHeightT - padding;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.y = otherHeight - padding;
+	break;
+    default:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextX = padding;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.x = padding;
+	break;
     }
 
     if (framePtr->borderWidth > 0) {
-        padding += framePtr->borderWidth + LABELMARGIN;
+	padding += framePtr->borderWidth + LABELMARGIN;
     }
 
     switch (labelframePtr->labelAnchor) {
-      case LABELANCHOR_NW:
-      case LABELANCHOR_SW:
-        labelframePtr->labelTextX = padding;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.x = padding;
-        break;
-      case LABELANCHOR_N:
-      case LABELANCHOR_S:	
-        labelframePtr->labelTextX = otherWidthT / 2;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.x = otherWidth / 2;
-        break;
-      case LABELANCHOR_NE:
-      case LABELANCHOR_SE:
-        labelframePtr->labelTextX = otherWidthT - padding;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.x = otherWidth - padding;
-        break;
-      case LABELANCHOR_EN:
-      case LABELANCHOR_WN:
-        labelframePtr->labelTextY = padding;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.y = padding;
-        break;
-      case LABELANCHOR_E:
-      case LABELANCHOR_W:
-        labelframePtr->labelTextY = otherHeightT / 2;
-        labelframePtr->labelBox.y = otherHeight / 2;
-        break;
-      default:
+    case LABELANCHOR_NW:
+    case LABELANCHOR_SW:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextX = padding;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.x = padding;
+	break;
+    case LABELANCHOR_N:
+    case LABELANCHOR_S:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextX = otherWidthT / 2;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.x = otherWidth / 2;
+	break;
+    case LABELANCHOR_NE:
+    case LABELANCHOR_SE:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextX = otherWidthT - padding;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.x = otherWidth - padding;
+	break;
+    case LABELANCHOR_EN:
+    case LABELANCHOR_WN:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextY = padding;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.y = padding;
+	break;
+    case LABELANCHOR_E:
+    case LABELANCHOR_W:
+	labelframePtr->labelTextY = otherHeightT / 2;
+	labelframePtr->labelBox.y = otherHeight / 2;
+	break;
+    default:
 	labelframePtr->labelTextY = otherHeightT - padding;
 	labelframePtr->labelBox.y = otherHeight - padding;
-        break;
+	break;
     }
 }
 
@@ -1382,14 +1367,13 @@ ComputeFrameGeometry(framePtr)
  *
  * DisplayFrame --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to display a frame widget.
+ *	This function is invoked to display a frame widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Commands are output to X to display the frame in its
- *	current mode.
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the frame in its current mode.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1416,8 +1400,8 @@ DisplayFrame(clientData)
     hlWidth = framePtr->highlightWidth;
 
     if (hlWidth != 0) {
-        GC fgGC, bgGC;
-        
+	GC fgGC, bgGC;
+
 	bgGC = Tk_GCForColor(framePtr->highlightBgColorPtr,
 		Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
 	if (framePtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) {
@@ -1439,11 +1423,11 @@ DisplayFrame(clientData)
 
     if (framePtr->type != TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
 	/*
-	 * Pass to platform specific draw function.  In general, it just
-	 * draws a simple rectangle, but it may "theme" the background.
+	 * Pass to platform specific draw function. In general, it just draws
+	 * a simple rectangle, but it may "theme" the background.
 	 */
 
-	noLabel:
+    noLabel:
 	TkpDrawFrame(tkwin, framePtr->border, hlWidth,
 		framePtr->borderWidth, framePtr->relief);
     } else {
@@ -1455,16 +1439,16 @@ DisplayFrame(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * In order to avoid screen flashes, this procedure redraws the
-	 * frame into off-screen memory, then copies it back on-screen 
-	 * in a single operation.  This means there's no point in time 
-	 * where the on-screen image has been cleared.
+	 * In order to avoid screen flashes, this function redraws the frame
+	 * into off-screen memory, then copies it back on-screen in a single
+	 * operation. This means there's no point in time where the on-screen
+	 * image has been cleared.
 	 */
 
 	pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(framePtr->display, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
 		Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), Tk_Depth(tkwin));
-	
-	/* 
+
+	/*
 	 * Clear the pixmap.
 	 */
 
@@ -1480,61 +1464,56 @@ DisplayFrame(clientData)
 	bdY2 = Tk_Height(tkwin) - hlWidth;
 
 	switch (labelframePtr->labelAnchor) {
-	  case LABELANCHOR_E:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_EN:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_ES:
-	    bdX2 -= (labelframePtr->labelBox.width - framePtr->borderWidth)
-		    / 2;
+	case LABELANCHOR_E:
+	case LABELANCHOR_EN:
+	case LABELANCHOR_ES:
+	    bdX2 -= (labelframePtr->labelBox.width-framePtr->borderWidth) / 2;
 	    break;
-	  case LABELANCHOR_N:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_NE:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_NW:
-	    /* 
-	     * Since the glyphs of the text tend to be in the lower part
-             * we favor a lower border position by rounding up.
+	case LABELANCHOR_N:
+	case LABELANCHOR_NE:
+	case LABELANCHOR_NW:
+	    /*
+	     * Since the glyphs of the text tend to be in the lower part we
+	     * favor a lower border position by rounding up.
 	     */
 
-	    bdY1 += (labelframePtr->labelBox.height - framePtr->borderWidth +1)
-		    / 2;
+	    bdY1 += (labelframePtr->labelBox.height-framePtr->borderWidth+1)/2;
 	    break;
-	  case LABELANCHOR_S:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_SE:
-	  case LABELANCHOR_SW:
-	    bdY2 -= (labelframePtr->labelBox.height - framePtr->borderWidth)
-		    / 2;
+	case LABELANCHOR_S:
+	case LABELANCHOR_SE:
+	case LABELANCHOR_SW:
+	    bdY2 -= (labelframePtr->labelBox.height-framePtr->borderWidth) / 2;
 	    break;
-	  default:
-	    bdX1 += (labelframePtr->labelBox.width - framePtr->borderWidth)
-		    / 2;
+	default:
+	    bdX1 += (labelframePtr->labelBox.width-framePtr->borderWidth) / 2;
 	    break;
 	}
 
-	/* 
-         * Draw border
-         */
+	/*
+	 * Draw border
+	 */
 
 	Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, framePtr->border, bdX1, bdY1,
 		bdX2 - bdX1, bdY2 - bdY1, framePtr->borderWidth,
 		framePtr->relief);
 
-        if (labelframePtr->labelWin == NULL) {
-            /* 
-             * Clear behind the label
-             */
-
-            Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap,
-                    framePtr->border, labelframePtr->labelBox.x,
-                    labelframePtr->labelBox.y, labelframePtr->labelBox.width,
-                    labelframePtr->labelBox.height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
-
-            /*
-             * Draw label.
-	     * If there is not room for the entire label, use clipping to
-	     * get a nice appearance.
-             */
-	    
+	if (labelframePtr->labelWin == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * Clear behind the label
+	     */
+
+	    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap,
+		    framePtr->border, labelframePtr->labelBox.x,
+		    labelframePtr->labelBox.y, labelframePtr->labelBox.width,
+		    labelframePtr->labelBox.height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+
+	    /*
+	     * Draw label. If there is not room for the entire label, use
+	     * clipping to get a nice appearance.
+	     */
+
 	    if ((labelframePtr->labelBox.width < labelframePtr->labelReqWidth)
-		    || (labelframePtr->labelBox.height < 
+		    || (labelframePtr->labelBox.height <
 			    labelframePtr->labelReqHeight)) {
 		clipRegion = TkCreateRegion();
 		TkUnionRectWithRegion(&labelframePtr->labelBox, clipRegion,
@@ -1543,37 +1522,37 @@ DisplayFrame(clientData)
 			clipRegion);
 	    }
 
-            Tk_DrawTextLayout(framePtr->display, pixmap,
-                    labelframePtr->textGC, labelframePtr->textLayout,
-                    labelframePtr->labelTextX + LABELSPACING,
-                    labelframePtr->labelTextY + LABELSPACING, 0, -1);
+	    Tk_DrawTextLayout(framePtr->display, pixmap,
+		    labelframePtr->textGC, labelframePtr->textLayout,
+		    labelframePtr->labelTextX + LABELSPACING,
+		    labelframePtr->labelTextY + LABELSPACING, 0, -1);
 
 	    if (clipRegion != NULL) {
 		XSetClipMask(framePtr->display, labelframePtr->textGC, None);
 		TkDestroyRegion(clipRegion);
 	    }
-        } else {
+	} else {
 	    /*
 	     * Reposition and map the window (but in different ways depending
 	     * on whether the frame is the window's parent).
 	     */
-            
+
 	    if (framePtr->tkwin == Tk_Parent(labelframePtr->labelWin)) {
 		if ((labelframePtr->labelBox.x != Tk_X(labelframePtr->labelWin))
 			|| (labelframePtr->labelBox.y !=
 				Tk_Y(labelframePtr->labelWin))
-			|| (labelframePtr->labelBox.width != 
+			|| (labelframePtr->labelBox.width !=
 				Tk_Width(labelframePtr->labelWin))
-			|| (labelframePtr->labelBox.height != 
+			|| (labelframePtr->labelBox.height !=
 				Tk_Height(labelframePtr->labelWin))) {
 		    Tk_MoveResizeWindow(labelframePtr->labelWin,
-			    labelframePtr->labelBox.x, labelframePtr->labelBox.y, 
+			    labelframePtr->labelBox.x, labelframePtr->labelBox.y,
 			    labelframePtr->labelBox.width,
 			    labelframePtr->labelBox.height);
 		}
 		Tk_MapWindow(labelframePtr->labelWin);
 	    } else {
-		Tk_MaintainGeometry(labelframePtr->labelWin, framePtr->tkwin, 
+		Tk_MaintainGeometry(labelframePtr->labelWin, framePtr->tkwin,
 			labelframePtr->labelBox.x, labelframePtr->labelBox.y,
 			labelframePtr->labelBox.width,
 			labelframePtr->labelBox.height);
@@ -1582,7 +1561,7 @@ DisplayFrame(clientData)
 
 
 	/*
-	 * Everything's been redisplayed;  now copy the pixmap onto the screen
+	 * Everything's been redisplayed; now copy the pixmap onto the screen
 	 * and free up the pixmap.
 	 */
 
@@ -1601,16 +1580,16 @@ DisplayFrame(clientData)
  *
  * FrameEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher on
- *	structure changes to a frame.  For frames with 3D
- *	borders, this procedure is also invoked for exposures.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher on structure changes to
+ *	a frame. For frames with 3D borders, this function is also invoked for
+ *	exposures.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up.
+ *	When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1635,15 +1614,14 @@ FrameEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	    framePtr->menuName = NULL;
 	}
 	if (framePtr->tkwin != NULL) {
-
 	    /*
-	     * If this window is a container, then this event could be
-	     * coming from the embedded application, in which case
-	     * Tk_DestroyWindow hasn't been called yet.  When Tk_DestroyWindow
-	     * is called later, then another destroy event will be generated.
-	     * We need to be sure we ignore the second event, since the frame
-	     * could be gone by then.  To do so, delete the event handler
-	     * explicitly (normally it's done implicitly by Tk_DestroyWindow).
+	     * If this window is a container, then this event could be coming
+	     * from the embedded application, in which case Tk_DestroyWindow
+	     * hasn't been called yet. When Tk_DestroyWindow is called later,
+	     * then another destroy event will be generated. We need to be
+	     * sure we ignore the second event, since the frame could be gone
+	     * by then. To do so, delete the event handler explicitly
+	     * (normally it's done implicitly by Tk_DestroyWindow).
 	     */
 
 	    /*
@@ -1651,13 +1629,13 @@ FrameEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	     * DestroyFrame, we must free all options now.
 	     */
 
-            DestroyFramePartly(framePtr);
+	    DestroyFramePartly(framePtr);
 
 	    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(framePtr->tkwin,
 		    ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
 		    FrameEventProc, (ClientData) framePtr);
 	    framePtr->tkwin = NULL;
-            Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(framePtr->interp, framePtr->widgetCmd);
+	    Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(framePtr->interp, framePtr->widgetCmd);
 	}
 	if (framePtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING) {
 	    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(DisplayFrame, (ClientData) framePtr);
@@ -1684,7 +1662,7 @@ FrameEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
     }
     return;
 
-    redraw:
+  redraw:
     if ((framePtr->tkwin != NULL) && !(framePtr->flags & REDRAW_PENDING)) {
 	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisplayFrame, (ClientData) framePtr);
 	framePtr->flags |= REDRAW_PENDING;
@@ -1696,9 +1674,9 @@ FrameEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * FrameCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This function is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1724,19 +1702,19 @@ FrameCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin
-     * is NULL) or because the command was deleted, and then this procedure
-     * destroys the widget.
+     * This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted (in which case tkwin is NULL) or
+     * because the command was deleted, and then this function destroys the
+     * widget.
      */
 
     if (tkwin != NULL) {
-	/* 
-	 * Some options need tkwin to be freed, so we free them here,
-	 * before setting tkwin to NULL.
+	/*
+	 * Some options need tkwin to be freed, so we free them here, before
+	 * setting tkwin to NULL.
 	 */
 
-        DestroyFramePartly(framePtr);
+	DestroyFramePartly(framePtr);
 
 	framePtr->tkwin = NULL;
 	Tk_DestroyWindow(tkwin);
@@ -1748,8 +1726,8 @@ FrameCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * MapFrame --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked as a when-idle handler to map a
- *	newly-created top-level frame.
+ *	This function is invoked as a when-idle handler to map a newly-created
+ *	top-level frame.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1767,10 +1745,10 @@ MapFrame(clientData)
     Frame *framePtr = (Frame *) clientData;
 
     /*
-     * Wait for all other background events to be processed before
-     * mapping window.  This ensures that the window's correct geometry
-     * will have been determined before it is first mapped, so that the
-     * window manager doesn't get a false idea of its desired geometry.
+     * Wait for all other background events to be processed before mapping
+     * window. This ensures that the window's correct geometry will have been
+     * determined before it is first mapped, so that the window manager
+     * doesn't get a false idea of its desired geometry.
      */
 
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) framePtr);
@@ -1780,8 +1758,8 @@ MapFrame(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * After each event, make sure that the window still exists
-	 * and quit if the window has been destroyed.
+	 * After each event, make sure that the window still exists and quit
+	 * if the window has been destroyed.
 	 */
 
 	if (framePtr->tkwin == NULL) {
@@ -1798,17 +1776,16 @@ MapFrame(clientData)
  *
  * TkInstallFrameMenu --
  *
- *	This function is needed when a Windows HWND is created
- *	and a menubar has been set to the window with a system
- *	menu. It notifies the menu package so that the system
- *	menu can be rebuilt.
+ *	This function is needed when a Windows HWND is created and a menubar
+ *	has been set to the window with a system menu. It notifies the menu
+ *	package so that the system menu can be rebuilt.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The system menu (if any) is created for the menubar
- *	associated with this frame.
+ *	The system menu (if any) is created for the menubar associated with
+ *	this frame.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1825,7 +1802,7 @@ TkInstallFrameMenu(tkwin)
 	if (framePtr == NULL) {
 	    Tcl_Panic("TkInstallFrameMenu couldn't get frame pointer");
 	}
-	TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate(winPtr->mainPtr->interp, 
+	TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate(winPtr->mainPtr->interp,
 		framePtr->menuName);
     }
 }
@@ -1835,17 +1812,15 @@ TkInstallFrameMenu(tkwin)
  *
  * FrameStructureProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever StructureNotify events
- *	occur for a window that's managed as label for the frame.
- *	This procudure's only purpose is to clean up when windows
- *	are deleted.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever StructureNotify events occur for a
+ *	window that's managed as label for the frame. This procudure's only
+ *	purpose is to clean up when windows are deleted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The window is disassociated from the frame when it is
- *	deleted.
+ *	The window is disassociated from the frame when it is deleted.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1859,8 +1834,8 @@ FrameStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 
     if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
 	/*
-	 * This should only happen in a labelframe but it doesn't
-	 * hurt to be careful.
+	 * This should only happen in a labelframe but it doesn't hurt to be
+	 * careful.
 	 */
 
 	if (labelframePtr->frame.type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
@@ -1875,24 +1850,23 @@ FrameStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * FrameRequestProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever a window that's associated
- *	with a frame changes its requested dimensions.
+ *	This function is invoked whenever a window that's associated with a
+ *	frame changes its requested dimensions.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The size and location on the screen of the window may change.
- *	depending on the options specified for the frame.
+ *	The size and location on the screen of the window may change depending
+ *	on the options specified for the frame.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 FrameRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to record for frame. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window that changed its desired
-					 * size. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to record for frame. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that changed its desired size. */
 {
     Frame *framePtr = (Frame *) clientData;
 
@@ -1904,8 +1878,8 @@ FrameRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * FrameLostSlaveProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry
- *	claims control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry claims
+ *	control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1918,18 +1892,18 @@ FrameRequestProc(clientData, tkwin)
 
 static void
 FrameLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Frame structure for slave window that
-				 * was stolen away. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Frame structure for slave window that was
+				 * stolen away. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
 {
     Frame *framePtr = (Frame *) clientData;
     Labelframe *labelframePtr = (Labelframe *) clientData;
 
     /*
-     * This should only happen in a labelframe but it doesn't
-     * hurt to be careful.
+     * This should only happen in a labelframe but it doesn't hurt to be
+     * careful.
      */
-    
+
     if (labelframePtr->frame.type == TYPE_LABELFRAME) {
 	Tk_DeleteEventHandler(labelframePtr->labelWin, StructureNotifyMask,
 		FrameStructureProc, (ClientData) labelframePtr);
@@ -1947,15 +1921,14 @@ FrameLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * TkToplevelWindowFromCommandToken --
  *
- *	If the given command name to the command for a toplevel window
- *	in the given interpreter, return the tkwin for that toplevel
- *	window.  Note that this lookup can't be done using the
- *	standard tkwin internal table because the command might have
- *	been renamed.
+ *	If the given command name to the command for a toplevel window in the
+ *	given interpreter, return the tkwin for that toplevel window. Note
+ *	that this lookup can't be done using the standard tkwin internal table
+ *	because the command might have been renamed.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A Tk_Window token, or NULL if the name does not refer to a
- *	toplevel window.
+ *	A Tk_Window token, or NULL if the name does not refer to a toplevel
+ *	window.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1983,3 +1956,11 @@ TkToplevelWindowForCommand(interp, cmdName)
     }
     return framePtr->tkwin;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkGrid.c b/generic/tkGrid.c
index 6e43869..cd4df5c 100644
--- a/generic/tkGrid.c
+++ b/generic/tkGrid.c
@@ -5,10 +5,10 @@
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkGrid.c,v 1.37 2005/04/04 08:53:00 dkf Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkGrid.c,v 1.38 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
@@ -22,17 +22,17 @@
 #endif
 #define MAX(x,y)	((x) > (y) ? (x) : (y))
 
-#define COLUMN	(1)		/* working on column offsets */
-#define ROW	(2)		/* working on row offsets */
+#define COLUMN		(1)	/* working on column offsets */
+#define ROW		(2)	/* working on row offsets */
 
 #define CHECK_ONLY	(1)	/* check max slot constraint */
 #define CHECK_SPACE	(2)	/* alloc more space, don't change max */
 
 /*
- * Pre-allocate enough row and column slots for "typical" sized tables
- * this value should be chosen so by the time the extra malloc's are
- * required, the layout calculations overwehlm them. [A "slot" contains
- * information for either a row or column, depending upon the context.]
+ * Pre-allocate enough row and column slots for "typical" sized tables this
+ * value should be chosen so by the time the extra malloc's are required, the
+ * layout calculations overwehlm them. [A "slot" contains information for
+ * either a row or column, depending upon the context.]
  */
 
 #define TYPICAL_SIZE	25  /* (arbitrary guess) */
@@ -45,9 +45,9 @@
 #define UNIFORM_PREALLOC 10
 
 /*
- * Data structures are allocated dynamically to support arbitrary sized tables.
- * However, the space is proportional to the highest numbered slot with
- * some non-default property.  This limit is used to head off mistakes and
+ * Data structures are allocated dynamically to support arbitrary sized
+ * tables. However, the space is proportional to the highest numbered slot
+ * with some non-default property. This limit is used to head off mistakes and
  * denial of service attacks by limiting the amount of storage required.
  */
 
@@ -68,8 +68,8 @@
 #define GRID_DEFAULT_ANCHOR TK_ANCHOR_NW
 
 /*
- *  Structure to hold information for grid masters.  A slot is either
- *  a row or column.
+ *  Structure to hold information for grid masters. A slot is either a row or
+ *  column.
  */
 
 typedef struct SlotInfo {
@@ -80,51 +80,49 @@ typedef struct SlotInfo {
 				 * this slot doesn't resize. Extra space in
 				 * the layout is given distributed among slots
 				 * inproportion to their weights. */
-    int pad;			/* Extra padding, in pixels, required for
-				 * this slot.  This amount is "added" to the
-				 * largest slave in the slot. */
+    int pad;			/* Extra padding, in pixels, required for this
+				 * slot. This amount is "added" to the largest
+				 * slave in the slot. */
     Tk_Uid uniform;		/* Value of -uniform option. It is used to
 				 * group slots that should have the same
 				 * size. */
     int offset;			/* This is a cached value used for
-				 * introspection.  It is the pixel
-				 * offset of the right or bottom edge
-				 * of this slot from the beginning of the
-				 * layout. */
+				 * introspection. It is the pixel offset of
+				 * the right or bottom edge of this slot from
+				 * the beginning of the layout. */
     int temp;			/* This is a temporary value used for
-				 * calculating adjusted weights when
-				 * shrinking the layout below its
-				 * nominal size. */
+				 * calculating adjusted weights when shrinking
+				 * the layout below its nominal size. */
 } SlotInfo;
 
 /*
- * Structure to hold information during layout calculations.  There
- * is one of these for each slot, an array for each of the rows or columns.
+ * Structure to hold information during layout calculations. There is one of
+ * these for each slot, an array for each of the rows or columns.
  */
 
 typedef struct GridLayout {
-    struct Gridder *binNextPtr;	/* The next slave window in this bin.
-    				 * Each bin contains a list of all
-    				 * slaves whose spans are >1 and whose
-    				 * right edges fall in this slot. */
-    int minSize;		/* Minimum size needed for this slot,
-    				 * in pixels.  This is the space required
-    				 * to hold any slaves contained entirely
-    				 * in this slot, adjusted for any slot
-    				 * constrants, such as size or padding. */
+    struct Gridder *binNextPtr;	/* The next slave window in this bin. Each bin
+    				 * contains a list of all slaves whose spans
+    				 * are >1 and whose right edges fall in this
+    				 * slot. */
+    int minSize;		/* Minimum size needed for this slot, in
+    				 * pixels. This is the space required to hold
+    				 * any slaves contained entirely in this slot,
+    				 * adjusted for any slot constrants, such as
+    				 * size or padding. */
     int pad;			/* Padding needed for this slot */
     int weight;			/* Slot weight, controls resizing. */
     Tk_Uid uniform;		/* Value of -uniform option. It is used to
 				 * group slots that should have the same
 				 * size. */
-    int minOffset;		/* The minimum offset, in pixels, from
-    				 * the beginning of the layout to the
-    				 * right/bottom edge of the slot calculated
-    				 * from top/left to bottom/right. */
-    int maxOffset;		/* The maximum offset, in pixels, from
-    				 * the beginning of the layout to the
-    				 * right-or-bottom edge of the slot calculated
-    				 * from bottom-or-right to top-or-left. */
+    int minOffset;		/* The minimum offset, in pixels, from the
+    				 * beginning of the layout to the bottom/right
+    				 * edge of the slot calculated from top/left
+    				 * to bottom/right. */
+    int maxOffset;		/* The maximum offset, in pixels, from the
+    				 * beginning of the layout to the bottom/right
+    				 * edge of the slot calculated from
+    				 * bottom/right to top/left. */
 } GridLayout;
 
 /*
@@ -140,83 +138,83 @@ typedef struct {
     				 * column constraints. */
     int rowEnd;			/* The last row occupied by any slave. */
     int rowMax;			/* The number of rows with constraints. */
-    int rowSpace;		/* The number of slots currently allocated
-    				 * for row constraints. */
+    int rowSpace;		/* The number of slots currently allocated for
+    				 * row constraints. */
     int startX;			/* Pixel offset of this layout within its
     				 * master. */
     int startY;			/* Pixel offset of this layout within its
     				 * master. */
-    Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* Value of anchor option: specifies where
-				 * a grid without weight should be placed. */
+    Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* Value of anchor option: specifies where a
+				 * grid without weight should be placed. */
 } GridMaster;
 
 /*
- * For each window that the grid cares about (either because
- * the window is managed by the grid or because the window
- * has slaves that are managed by the grid), there is a
- * structure of the following type:
+ * For each window that the grid cares about (either because the window is
+ * managed by the grid or because the window has slaves that are managed by
+ * the grid), there is a structure of the following type:
  */
 
 typedef struct Gridder {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk token for window.  NULL means that
-				 * the window has been deleted, but the
-				 * gridder hasn't had a chance to clean up
-				 * yet because the structure is still in
-				 * use. */
-    struct Gridder *masterPtr;	/* Master window within which this window
-				 * is managed (NULL means this window
-				 * isn't managed by the gridder). */
-    struct Gridder *nextPtr;	/* Next window managed within same
-				 * master.  List order doesn't matter. */
-    struct Gridder *slavePtr;	/* First in list of slaves managed
-				 * inside this window (NULL means
-				 * no grid slaves). */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk token for window. NULL means that the
+				 * window has been deleted, but the gridder
+				 * hasn't had a chance to clean up yet because
+				 * the structure is still in use. */
+    struct Gridder *masterPtr;	/* Master window within which this window is
+				 * managed (NULL means this window isn't
+				 * managed by the gridder). */
+    struct Gridder *nextPtr;	/* Next window managed within same master.
+				 * List order doesn't matter. */
+    struct Gridder *slavePtr;	/* First in list of slaves managed inside this
+				 * window (NULL means no grid slaves). */
     GridMaster *masterDataPtr;	/* Additional data for geometry master. */
-    int column, row;		/* Location in the grid (starting
-				 * from zero). */
+    int column, row;		/* Location in the grid (starting from
+				 * zero). */
     int numCols, numRows;	/* Number of columns or rows this slave spans.
 				 * Should be at least 1. */
     int padX, padY;		/* Total additional pixels to leave around the
-				 * window.  Some is of this space is on each
-				 * side.  This is space *outside* the window:
+				 * window. Some is of this space is on each
+				 * side. This is space *outside* the window:
 				 * we'll allocate extra space in frame but
 				 * won't enlarge window). */
-    int padLeft, padTop;	/* The part of padX or padY to use on the
-				 * left or top of the widget, respectively.
-				 * By default, this is half of padX or padY. */
+    int padLeft, padTop;	/* The part of padX or padY to use on the left
+				 * or top of the widget, respectively. By
+				 * default, this is half of padX or padY. */
     int iPadX, iPadY;		/* Total extra pixels to allocate inside the
 				 * window (half this amount will appear on
 				 * each side). */
     int sticky;			/* which sides of its cavity this window
 				 * sticks to. See below for definitions */
-    int doubleBw;		/* Twice the window's last known border
-				 * width.  If this changes, the window
-				 * must be re-arranged within its master. */
-    int *abortPtr;		/* If non-NULL, it means that there is a nested
-				 * call to ArrangeGrid already working on
-				 * this window.  *abortPtr may be set to 1 to
-				 * abort that nested call.  This happens, for
-				 * example, if tkwin or any of its slaves
+    int doubleBw;		/* Twice the window's last known border width.
+				 * If this changes, the window must be
+				 * re-arranged within its master. */
+    int *abortPtr;		/* If non-NULL, it means that there is a
+				 * nested call to ArrangeGrid already working
+				 * on this window. *abortPtr may be set to 1
+				 * to abort that nested call. This happens,
+				 * for example, if tkwin or any of its slaves
 				 * is deleted. */
-    int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flags;  see below
-				 * for definitions. */
+    int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flags; see below for
+				 * definitions. */
 
     /*
      * These fields are used temporarily for layout calculations only.
      */
 
     struct Gridder *binNextPtr;	/* Link to next span>1 slave in this bin. */
-    int size;			/* Nominal size (width or height) in pixels
-    				 * of the slave.  This includes the padding. */
+    int size;			/* Nominal size (width or height) in pixels of
+    				 * the slave. This includes the padding. */
 } Gridder;
 
-/* Flag values for "sticky"ness  The 16 combinations subsume the packer's
+/*
+ * Flag values for "sticky"ness. The 16 combinations subsume the packer's
  * notion of anchor and fill.
  *
- * STICK_NORTH  	This window sticks to the top of its cavity.
- * STICK_EAST		This window sticks to the right edge of its cavity.
- * STICK_SOUTH		This window sticks to the bottom of its cavity.
- * STICK_WEST		This window sticks to the left edge of its cavity.
+ * STICK_NORTH			This window sticks to the top of its cavity.
+ * STICK_EAST			This window sticks to the right edge of its
+ *				cavity.
+ * STICK_SOUTH			This window sticks to the bottom of its cavity.
+ * STICK_WEST			This window sticks to the left edge of its
+ *				cavity.
  */
 
 #define STICK_NORTH		1
@@ -237,14 +235,13 @@ typedef struct UniformGroup {
 /*
  * Flag values for Grid structures:
  *
- * REQUESTED_RELAYOUT:		1 means a Tcl_DoWhenIdle request
- *				has already been made to re-arrange
- *				all the slaves of this window.
- *
- * DONT_PROPAGATE:		1 means don't set this window's requested
- *				size.  0 means if this window is a master
- *				then Tk will set its requested size to fit
- *				the needs of its slaves.
+ * REQUESTED_RELAYOUT		1 means a Tcl_DoWhenIdle request has already
+ *				been made to re-arrange all the slaves of this
+ *				window.
+ * DONT_PROPAGATE		1 means don't set this window's requested
+ *				size. 0 means if this window is a master then
+ *				Tk will set its requested size to fit the
+ *				needs of its slaves.
  */
 
 #define REQUESTED_RELAYOUT	1
@@ -254,50 +251,53 @@ typedef struct UniformGroup {
  * Prototypes for procedures used only in this file:
  */
 
-static void	AdjustForSticky _ANSI_ARGS_((Gridder *slavePtr, int *xPtr,
-		    int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
-static int	AdjustOffsets _ANSI_ARGS_((int width,
-			int elements, SlotInfo *slotPtr));
-static void	ArrangeGrid _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static int	CheckSlotData _ANSI_ARGS_((Gridder *masterPtr, int slot,
-			int slotType, int checkOnly));
-static int	ConfigureSlaves _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			Tk_Window tkwin, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void	DestroyGrid _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
-static Gridder *GetGrid _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
-static int	GridAnchorCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int	GridBboxCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int	GridForgetRemoveCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int	GridInfoCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int	GridLocationCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int	GridPropagateCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int	GridRowColumnConfigureCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int	GridSizeCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int	GridSlavesCommand _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void	GridStructureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void	GridLostSlaveProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void	GridReqProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void 	InitMasterData _ANSI_ARGS_((Gridder *masterPtr));
-static Tcl_Obj *NewPairObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp*, int, int));
-static Tcl_Obj *NewQuadObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp*, int, int, int, int));
-static int	ResolveConstraints _ANSI_ARGS_((Gridder *gridPtr,
-			int rowOrColumn, int maxOffset));
-static void	SetGridSize _ANSI_ARGS_((Gridder *gridPtr));
-static void	StickyToString _ANSI_ARGS_((int flags, char *result));
-static int	StringToSticky _ANSI_ARGS_((char *string));
-static void	Unlink _ANSI_ARGS_((Gridder *gridPtr));
+static void		AdjustForSticky(Gridder *slavePtr, int *xPtr,
+			    int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+static int		AdjustOffsets(int width, int elements,
+			    SlotInfo *slotPtr);
+static void		ArrangeGrid(ClientData clientData);
+static int		CheckSlotData(Gridder *masterPtr, int slot,
+			    int slotType, int checkOnly);
+static int		ConfigureSlaves(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		DestroyGrid(char *memPtr);
+static Gridder *	GetGrid(Tk_Window tkwin);
+static int		GridAnchorCommand(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GridBboxCommand(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GridForgetRemoveCommand(Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GridInfoCommand(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GridLocationCommand(Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GridPropagateCommand(Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GridRowColumnConfigureCommand(Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GridSizeCommand(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		GridSlavesCommand(Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		GridStructureProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		GridLostSlaveProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		GridReqProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		InitMasterData(Gridder *masterPtr);
+static Tcl_Obj *	NewPairObj(int, int);
+static Tcl_Obj *	NewQuadObj(int, int, int, int);
+static int		ResolveConstraints(Gridder *gridPtr, int rowOrColumn,
+			    int maxOffset);
+static void		SetGridSize(Gridder *gridPtr);
+static void		StickyToString(int flags, char *result);
+static int		StringToSticky(char *string);
+static void		Unlink(Gridder *gridPtr);
 
 static Tk_GeomMgr gridMgrType = {
     "grid",			/* name */
@@ -310,8 +310,8 @@ static Tk_GeomMgr gridMgrType = {
  *
  * Tk_GridCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "grid" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This procedure is invoked to process the "grid" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -324,8 +324,7 @@ static Tk_GeomMgr gridMgrType = {
 
 int
 Tk_GridObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
     int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
@@ -367,7 +366,8 @@ Tk_GridObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	return GridBboxCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv);
     case GRID_CONFIGURE:
 	return ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc-2, objv+2);
-    case GRID_FORGET: case GRID_REMOVE:
+    case GRID_FORGET:
+    case GRID_REMOVE:
 	return GridForgetRemoveCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv);
     case GRID_INFO:
 	return GridInfoCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv);
@@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ Tk_GridObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * GridAnchorCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the [grid anchor] subcommand.  See the user
+ *	Implementation of the [grid anchor] subcommand. See the user
  *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ GridBboxCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 
     gridPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr;
     if (gridPtr == NULL) {
-	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewQuadObj(interp, 0, 0, 0, 0));
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewQuadObj(0, 0, 0, 0));
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
@@ -541,7 +541,7 @@ GridBboxCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
     endY = MAX(gridPtr->rowEnd, gridPtr->rowMax);
 
     if ((endX == 0) || (endY == 0)) {
-	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewQuadObj(interp, 0, 0, 0, 0));
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewQuadObj(0, 0, 0, 0));
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
     if (objc == 3) {
@@ -590,7 +590,7 @@ GridBboxCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 	height = gridPtr->rowPtr[row2].offset - y;
     }
 
-    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewQuadObj(interp,
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewQuadObj(
 	    x + gridPtr->startX, y + gridPtr->startY, width, height));
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -600,8 +600,8 @@ GridBboxCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * GridForgetRemoveCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the [grid forget]/[grid remove] subcommands.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what these do.
+ *	Implementation of the [grid forget]/[grid remove] subcommands. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what these do.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
@@ -673,7 +673,7 @@ GridForgetRemoveCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * GridInfoCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the [grid info] subcommand.  See the user
+ *	Implementation of the [grid info] subcommand. See the user
  *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -729,7 +729,7 @@ GridInfoCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * GridLocationCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the [grid location] subcommand.  See the user
+ *	Implementation of the [grid location] subcommand. See the user
  *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -752,8 +752,8 @@ GridLocationCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
     Gridder *masterPtr;		/* master grid record */
     GridMaster *gridPtr;	/* pointer to grid data */
     register SlotInfo *slotPtr;
-    int x, y;		/* Offset in pixels, from edge of master. */
-    int i, j;		/* Corresponding column and row indeces. */
+    int x, y;			/* Offset in pixels, from edge of master. */
+    int i, j;			/* Corresponding column and row indeces. */
     int endX, endY;		/* end of grid */
 
     if (objc != 5) {
@@ -774,15 +774,15 @@ GridLocationCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 
     masterPtr = GetGrid(master);
     if (masterPtr->masterDataPtr == NULL) {
-	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(interp, -1, -1));
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(-1, -1));
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
     gridPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Update any pending requests.  This is not always the
-     * steady state value, as more configure events could be in
-     * the pipeline, but its as close as its easy to get.
+     * Update any pending requests. This is not always the steady state value,
+     * as more configure events could be in the pipeline, but its as close as
+     * its easy to get.
      */
 
     while (masterPtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT) {
@@ -813,7 +813,7 @@ GridLocationCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
     }
 
-    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(interp, i, j));
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(i, j));
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
@@ -822,7 +822,7 @@ GridLocationCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * GridPropagateCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the [grid propagate] subcommand.  See the user
+ *	Implementation of the [grid propagate] subcommand. See the user
  *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -863,7 +863,9 @@ GridPropagateCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    /* Only request a relayout if the propagation bit changes */
+    /*
+     * Only request a relayout if the propagation bit changes.
+     */
 
     old = !(masterPtr->flags & DONT_PROPAGATE);
     if (propagate != old) {
@@ -895,8 +897,7 @@ GridPropagateCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  * GridRowColumnConfigureCommand --
  *
  *	Implementation of the [grid rowconfigure] and [grid columnconfigure]
- *	subcommands.  See the user documentation for details on what these
- *	do.
+ *	subcommands. See the user documentation for details on what these do.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
@@ -971,8 +972,8 @@ GridRowColumnConfigureCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Return all of the options for this row or column.  If the
-	 * request is out of range, return all 0's.
+	 * Return all of the options for this row or column. If the request is
+	 * out of range, return all 0's.
 	 */
 
 	if (objc == 4) {
@@ -1005,8 +1006,8 @@ GridRowColumnConfigureCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If only one option is given, with no value, the
-	 * current value is returned.
+	 * If only one option is given, with no value, the current value is
+	 * returned.
 	 */
 
 	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[4], optionStrings,
@@ -1045,7 +1046,10 @@ GridRowColumnConfigureCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 	    allSlaves = 1;
 	} else if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, lObjv[j], &slave)
 		== TCL_OK) {
-	    /* Is it gridded in this master? */
+	    /*
+	     * Is it gridded in this master?
+	     */
+
 	    slavePtr = GetGrid(slave);
 	    if (slavePtr->masterPtr != masterPtr) {
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
@@ -1067,6 +1071,7 @@ GridRowColumnConfigureCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
 	/*
 	 * The outer loop is only to handle "all".
 	 */
+
 	do {
 	    if (slavePtr != NULL) {
 		first = (slotType == COLUMN) ?
@@ -1146,8 +1151,8 @@ GridRowColumnConfigureCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * We changed a property, re-arrange the table,
-     * and check for constraint shrinkage.
+     * We changed a property, re-arrange the table, and check for constraint
+     * shrinkage.
      */
 
     if (slotType == ROW) {
@@ -1183,7 +1188,7 @@ GridRowColumnConfigureCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * GridSizeCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the [grid size] subcommand.  See the user
+ *	Implementation of the [grid size] subcommand. See the user
  *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -1219,11 +1224,11 @@ GridSizeCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
     if (masterPtr->masterDataPtr != NULL) {
 	SetGridSize(masterPtr);
 	gridPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr;
-	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(interp,
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(
 		MAX(gridPtr->columnEnd, gridPtr->columnMax),
 		MAX(gridPtr->rowEnd, gridPtr->rowMax)));
     } else {
-	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(interp, 0, 0));
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, NewPairObj(0, 0));
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -1233,15 +1238,15 @@ GridSizeCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * GridSlavesCommand --
  *
- *	Implementation of the [grid slaves] subcommand.  See the user
+ *	Implementation of the [grid slaves] subcommand. See the user
  *	documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Places a list of slaves of the specified window in the
- *	interpreter's result field.
+ *	Places a list of slaves of the specified window in the interpreter's
+ *	result field.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1319,15 +1324,15 @@ GridSlavesCommand(tkwin, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * GridReqProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk_GeometryRequest for
- *	windows managed by the grid.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by Tk_GeometryRequest for windows managed by
+ *	the grid.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Arranges for tkwin, and all its managed siblings, to
- *	be re-arranged at the next idle point.
+ *	Arranges for tkwin, and all its managed siblings, to be re-arranged at
+ *	the next idle point.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1354,8 +1359,8 @@ GridReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * GridLostSlaveProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry
- *	claims control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry claims
+ *	control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1368,8 +1373,8 @@ GridReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
 
 static void
 GridLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Grid structure for slave window that
-				 * was stolen away. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Grid structure for slave window that was
+				 * stolen away. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
 {
     register Gridder *slavePtr = (Gridder *) clientData;
@@ -1386,11 +1391,11 @@ GridLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * AdjustOffsets --
  *
- *	This procedure adjusts the size of the layout to fit in the
- *	space provided.  If it needs more space, the extra is added
- *	according to the weights.  If it needs less, the space is removed
- *	according to the weights, but at no time does the size drop below
- *	the minsize specified for that slot.
+ *	This procedure adjusts the size of the layout to fit in the space
+ *	provided. If it needs more space, the extra is added according to the
+ *	weights. If it needs less, the space is removed according to the
+ *	weights, but at no time does the size drop below the minsize specified
+ *	for that slot.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The size used by the layout.
@@ -1412,8 +1417,8 @@ AdjustOffsets(size, slots, slotPtr)
     int totalWeight;		/* Sum of the weights for all the slots. */
     int weight;			/* Sum of the weights so far. */
     int minSize;		/* Minimum possible layout size. */
-    int newDiff;		/* The most pixels that can be added on
-    				 * the current pass. */
+    int newDiff;		/* The most pixels that can be added on the
+    				 * current pass. */
 
     diff = size - slotPtr[slots-1].offset;
 
@@ -1439,7 +1444,7 @@ AdjustOffsets(size, slots, slotPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Add extra space according to the slot weights.  This is done
+     * Add extra space according to the slot weights. This is done
      * cumulatively to prevent round-off error accumulation.
      */
 
@@ -1453,9 +1458,9 @@ AdjustOffsets(size, slots, slotPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The layout must shrink below its requested size.  Compute the
-     * minimum possible size by looking at the slot minSizes.
-     * Store each slot's minimum size in temp.
+     * The layout must shrink below its requested size. Compute the minimum
+     * possible size by looking at the slot minSizes. Store each slot's
+     * minimum size in temp.
      */
 
     minSize = 0;
@@ -1471,8 +1476,8 @@ AdjustOffsets(size, slots, slotPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the requested size is less than the minimum required size,
-     * set the slot sizes to their minimum values.
+     * If the requested size is less than the minimum required size, set the
+     * slot sizes to their minimum values.
      */
 
     if (size <= minSize) {
@@ -1485,8 +1490,8 @@ AdjustOffsets(size, slots, slotPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Remove space from slots according to their weights.  The weights
-     * get renormalized anytime a slot shrinks to its minimum size.
+     * Remove space from slots according to their weights. The weights get
+     * renormalized anytime a slot shrinks to its minimum size.
      */
 
     while (diff < 0) {
@@ -1515,9 +1520,9 @@ AdjustOffsets(size, slots, slotPtr)
 
 	newDiff = diff;
 	for (slot = 0; slot < slots; slot++) {
-	    int current;		/* current size of this slot */
-	    int maxDiff;		/* max diff that would cause
-	    				 * this slot to equal its minsize */
+	    int current;	/* Current size of this slot. */
+	    int maxDiff;	/* Maximum diff that would cause this slot to
+	    			 * equal its minsize. */
 	    if (slotPtr[slot].temp == 0) {
 	    	continue;
 	    }
@@ -1549,12 +1554,12 @@ AdjustOffsets(size, slots, slotPtr)
  *
  * AdjustForSticky --
  *
- *	This procedure adjusts the size of a slave in its cavity based
- *	on its "sticky" flags.
+ *	This procedure adjusts the size of a slave in its cavity based on its
+ *	"sticky" flags.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The input x, y, width, and height are changed to represent the
- *	desired coordinates of the slave.
+ *	The input x, y, width, and height are changed to represent the desired
+ *	coordinates of the slave.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1608,10 +1613,10 @@ AdjustForSticky(slavePtr, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
  *
  * ArrangeGrid --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked (using the Tcl_DoWhenIdle mechanism)
- *	to re-layout a set of windows managed by the grid.  It is
- *	invoked at idle time so that a series of grid requests can be
- *	merged into a single layout operation.
+ *	This procedure is invoked (using the Tcl_DoWhenIdle mechanism) to
+ *	re-layout a set of windows managed by the grid. It is invoked at idle
+ *	time so that a series of grid requests can be merged into a single
+ *	layout operation.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1631,17 +1636,17 @@ ArrangeGrid(clientData)
     register Gridder *slavePtr;
     GridMaster *slotPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr;
     int abort;
-    int width, height;		/* requested size of layout, in pixels */
-    int realWidth, realHeight;	/* actual size layout should take-up */
+    int width, height;		/* Requested size of layout, in pixels. */
+    int realWidth, realHeight;	/* Actual size layout should take-up. */
     int usedX, usedY;
 
     masterPtr->flags &= ~REQUESTED_RELAYOUT;
 
     /*
-     * If the master has no slaves anymore, then don't do anything
-     * at all:  just leave the master's size as-is.  Otherwise there is
-     * no way to "relinquish" control over the master so another geometry
-     * manager can take over.
+     * If the master has no slaves anymore, then don't do anything at all:
+     * just leave the master's size as-is. Otherwise there is no way to
+     * "relinquish" control over the master so another geometry manager can
+     * take over.
      */
 
     if (masterPtr->slavePtr == NULL) {
@@ -1653,9 +1658,9 @@ ArrangeGrid(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Abort any nested call to ArrangeGrid for this window, since
-     * we'll do everything necessary here, and set up so this call
-     * can be aborted if necessary.
+     * Abort any nested call to ArrangeGrid for this window, since we'll do
+     * everything necessary here, and set up so this call can be aborted if
+     * necessary.
      */
 
     if (masterPtr->abortPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1699,9 +1704,9 @@ ArrangeGrid(clientData)
 
     /*
      * If the currently requested layout size doesn't match the master's
-     * window size, then adjust the slot offsets according to the
-     * weights.  If all of the weights are zero, place the layout according
-     * to the anchor value.
+     * window size, then adjust the slot offsets according to the weights. If
+     * all of the weights are zero, place the layout according to the anchor
+     * value.
      */
 
     realWidth = Tk_Width(masterPtr->tkwin) -
@@ -1718,15 +1723,14 @@ ArrangeGrid(clientData)
 	    0, 0, usedX, usedY, &slotPtr->startX, &slotPtr->startY);
 
     /*
-     * Now adjust the actual size of the slave to its cavity by
-     * computing the cavity size, and adjusting the widget according
-     * to its stickyness.
+     * Now adjust the actual size of the slave to its cavity by computing the
+     * cavity size, and adjusting the widget according to its stickyness.
      */
 
     for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL && !abort;
 	    slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
-	int x, y;			/* top left coordinate */
-	int width, height;		/* slot or slave size */
+	int x, y;			/* Top left coordinate */
+	int width, height;		/* Slot or slave size */
 	int col = slavePtr->column;
 	int row = slavePtr->row;
 
@@ -1742,9 +1746,9 @@ ArrangeGrid(clientData)
 	AdjustForSticky(slavePtr, &x, &y, &width, &height);
 
 	/*
-	 * Now put the window in the proper spot.  (This was taken directly
-	 * from tkPack.c.)  If the slave is a child of the master, then
-	 * do this here.  Otherwise let Tk_MaintainGeometry do the work.
+	 * Now put the window in the proper spot. (This was taken directly
+	 * from tkPack.c.) If the slave is a child of the master, then do this
+	 * here. Otherwise let Tk_MaintainGeometry do the work.
 	 */
 
 	if (masterPtr->tkwin == Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin)) {
@@ -1762,8 +1766,8 @@ ArrangeGrid(clientData)
 		}
 
 		/*
-		 * Don't map the slave if the master isn't mapped: wait
-		 * until the master gets mapped later.
+		 * Don't map the slave if the master isn't mapped: wait until
+		 * the master gets mapped later.
 		 */
 
 		if (Tk_IsMapped(masterPtr->tkwin)) {
@@ -1790,9 +1794,9 @@ ArrangeGrid(clientData)
  *
  * ResolveConstraints --
  *
- *	Resolve all of the column and row boundaries.  Most of
- *	the calculations are identical for rows and columns, so this procedure
- *	is called twice, once for rows, and again for columns.
+ *	Resolve all of the column and row boundaries. Most of the calculations
+ *	are identical for rows and columns, so this procedure is called twice,
+ *	once for rows, and again for columns.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The offset (in pixels) from the left/top edge of this layout is
@@ -1809,16 +1813,16 @@ static int
 ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
     Gridder *masterPtr;		/* The geometry master for this grid. */
     int slotType;		/* Either ROW or COLUMN. */
-    int maxOffset;		/* The actual maximum size of this layout
-				 * in pixels,  or 0 (not currently used). */
+    int maxOffset;		/* The actual maximum size of this layout in
+				 * pixels, or 0 (not currently used). */
 {
     register SlotInfo *slotPtr;	/* Pointer to row/col constraints. */
     register Gridder *slavePtr;	/* List of slave windows in this grid. */
     int constraintCount;	/* Count of rows or columns that have
 				 * constraints. */
     int slotCount;		/* Last occupied row or column. */
-    int gridCount;		/* The larger of slotCount and constraintCount.
-				 */
+    int gridCount;		/* The larger of slotCount and
+				 * constraintCount. */
     GridLayout *layoutPtr;	/* Temporary layout structure. */
     int requiredSize;		/* The natural size of the grid (pixels).
 				 * This is the minimum size needed to
@@ -1837,14 +1841,14 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
     UniformGroup *uniformGroupPtr;
 				/* Uniform groups data. */
     int uniformGroups;		/* Number of currently used uniform groups. */
-    int uniformGroupsAlloced;	/* Size of allocated space for uniform groups.
-				 */
+    int uniformGroupsAlloced;	/* Size of allocated space for uniform
+				 * groups. */
     int weight, minSize;
     int prevGrow, accWeight, grow;
 
     /*
-     * For typical sized tables, we'll use stack space for the layout data
-     * to avoid the overhead of a malloc and free for every layout.
+     * For typical sized tables, we'll use stack space for the layout data to
+     * avoid the overhead of a malloc and free for every layout.
      */
 
     GridLayout layoutData[TYPICAL_SIZE + 1];
@@ -1852,11 +1856,11 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
     if (slotType == COLUMN) {
 	constraintCount = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnMax;
 	slotCount = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnEnd;
-	slotPtr  = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnPtr;
+	slotPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnPtr;
     } else {
 	constraintCount = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowMax;
 	slotCount = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowEnd;
-	slotPtr  = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowPtr;
+	slotPtr = masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowPtr;
     }
 
     /*
@@ -1871,11 +1875,12 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Allocate an extra layout slot to represent the left/top edge of
-     * the 0th slot to make it easier to calculate slot widths from
-     * offsets without special case code.
-     * Initialize the "dummy" slot to the left/top of the table.
-     * This slot avoids special casing the first slot.
+     * Allocate an extra layout slot to represent the left/top edge of the 0th
+     * slot to make it easier to calculate slot widths from offsets without
+     * special case code.
+     *
+     * Initialize the "dummy" slot to the left/top of the table. This slot
+     * avoids special casing the first slot.
      */
 
     layoutPtr->minOffset = 0;
@@ -1884,8 +1889,8 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 
     /*
      * Step 1.
-     * Copy the slot constraints into the layout structure,
-     * and initialize the rest of the fields.
+     * Copy the slot constraints into the layout structure, and initialize the
+     * rest of the fields.
      */
 
     for (slot=0; slot < constraintCount; slot++) {
@@ -1905,52 +1910,55 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 
     /*
      * Step 2.
-     * Slaves with a span of 1 are used to determine the minimum size of
-     * each slot.  Slaves whose span is two or more slots don't
-     * contribute to the minimum size of each slot directly, but can cause
-     * slots to grow if their size exceeds the the sizes of the slots they
-     * span.
+     * Slaves with a span of 1 are used to determine the minimum size of each
+     * slot. Slaves whose span is two or more slots don't contribute to the
+     * minimum size of each slot directly, but can cause slots to grow if
+     * their size exceeds the the sizes of the slots they span.
      *
-     * Bin all slaves whose spans are > 1 by their right edges.  This
-     * allows the computation on minimum and maximum possible layout
-     * sizes at each slot boundary, without the need to re-sort the slaves.
+     * Bin all slaves whose spans are > 1 by their right edges. This allows
+     * the computation on minimum and maximum possible layout sizes at each
+     * slot boundary, without the need to re-sort the slaves.
      */
 
     switch (slotType) {
-	case COLUMN:
-	    for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
-		    slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
-		int rightEdge = slavePtr->column + slavePtr->numCols - 1;
-		slavePtr->size = Tk_ReqWidth(slavePtr->tkwin) +
-			slavePtr->padX + slavePtr->iPadX + slavePtr->doubleBw;
-		if (slavePtr->numCols > 1) {
-		    slavePtr->binNextPtr = layoutPtr[rightEdge].binNextPtr;
-		    layoutPtr[rightEdge].binNextPtr = slavePtr;
-		} else {
-		    int size = slavePtr->size + layoutPtr[rightEdge].pad;
-		    if (size > layoutPtr[rightEdge].minSize) {
-			layoutPtr[rightEdge].minSize = size;
-		    }
+    case COLUMN:
+	for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
+		slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    int rightEdge = slavePtr->column + slavePtr->numCols - 1;
+
+	    slavePtr->size = Tk_ReqWidth(slavePtr->tkwin) + slavePtr->padX
+		    + slavePtr->iPadX + slavePtr->doubleBw;
+	    if (slavePtr->numCols > 1) {
+		slavePtr->binNextPtr = layoutPtr[rightEdge].binNextPtr;
+		layoutPtr[rightEdge].binNextPtr = slavePtr;
+	    } else {
+		int size = slavePtr->size + layoutPtr[rightEdge].pad;
+
+		if (size > layoutPtr[rightEdge].minSize) {
+		    layoutPtr[rightEdge].minSize = size;
 		}
 	    }
-	    break;
-	case ROW:
-	    for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
-		    slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
-		int rightEdge = slavePtr->row + slavePtr->numRows - 1;
-		slavePtr->size = Tk_ReqHeight(slavePtr->tkwin) +
-			slavePtr->padY + slavePtr->iPadY + slavePtr->doubleBw;
-		if (slavePtr->numRows > 1) {
-		    slavePtr->binNextPtr = layoutPtr[rightEdge].binNextPtr;
-		    layoutPtr[rightEdge].binNextPtr = slavePtr;
-		} else {
-		    int size = slavePtr->size + layoutPtr[rightEdge].pad;
-		    if (size > layoutPtr[rightEdge].minSize) {
-			layoutPtr[rightEdge].minSize = size;
-		    }
+	}
+	break;
+    case ROW:
+	for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
+		slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    int rightEdge = slavePtr->row + slavePtr->numRows - 1;
+
+	    slavePtr->size = Tk_ReqHeight(slavePtr->tkwin) + slavePtr->padY
+		    + slavePtr->iPadY + slavePtr->doubleBw;
+	    if (slavePtr->numRows > 1) {
+		slavePtr->binNextPtr = layoutPtr[rightEdge].binNextPtr;
+		layoutPtr[rightEdge].binNextPtr = slavePtr;
+	    } else {
+		int size = slavePtr->size + layoutPtr[rightEdge].pad;
+
+		if (size > layoutPtr[rightEdge].minSize) {
+		    layoutPtr[rightEdge].minSize = size;
 		}
 	    }
-	    break;
+	}
+	break;
     }
 
     /*
@@ -1983,13 +1991,14 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 			    * sizeof(UniformGroup);
 		    size_t newSize = (uniformGroupsAlloced + UNIFORM_PREALLOC)
 			    * sizeof(UniformGroup);
-		    UniformGroup *new = (UniformGroup *) ckalloc(newSize);
-		    UniformGroup *old = uniformGroupPtr;
-		    memcpy((VOID *) new, (VOID *) old, oldSize);
-		    if (old != uniformPre) {
-			ckfree((char *) old);
+		    UniformGroup *newUG = (UniformGroup *) ckalloc(newSize);
+		    UniformGroup *oldUG = uniformGroupPtr;
+
+		    memcpy((VOID *) newUG, (VOID *) oldUG, oldSize);
+		    if (oldUG != uniformPre) {
+			ckfree((char *) oldUG);
 		    }
-		    uniformGroupPtr = new;
+		    uniformGroupPtr = newUG;
 		    uniformGroupsAlloced += UNIFORM_PREALLOC;
 		}
 		uniformGroups++;
@@ -2032,8 +2041,8 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 
     /*
      * Step 3.
-     * Determine the minimum slot offsets going from left to right
-     * that would fit all of the slaves.  This determines the minimum
+     * Determine the minimum slot offsets going from left to right that would
+     * fit all of the slaves. This determines the minimum
      */
 
     for (offset=0,slot=0; slot < gridCount; slot++) {
@@ -2043,6 +2052,7 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 	    int span = (slotType == COLUMN) ?
 		    slavePtr->numCols : slavePtr->numRows;
 	    int required = slavePtr->size + layoutPtr[slot - span].minOffset;
+
 	    if (required > layoutPtr[slot].minOffset) {
 		layoutPtr[slot].minOffset = required;
 	    }
@@ -2052,8 +2062,8 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 
     /*
      * At this point, we know the minimum required size of the entire layout.
-     * It might be prudent to stop here if our "master" will resize itself
-     * to this size.
+     * It might be prudent to stop here if our "master" will resize itself to
+     * this size.
      */
 
     requiredSize = offset;
@@ -2063,10 +2073,10 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 
     /*
      * Step 4.
-     * Determine the minimum slot offsets going from right to left,
-     * bounding the pixel range of each slot boundary.
-     * Pre-fill all of the right offsets with the actual size of the table;
-     * they will be reduced as required.
+     * Determine the minimum slot offsets going from right to left, bounding
+     * the pixel range of each slot boundary. Pre-fill all of the right
+     * offsets with the actual size of the table; they will be reduced as
+     * required.
      */
 
     for (slot=0; slot < gridCount; slot++) {
@@ -2079,6 +2089,7 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 		    slavePtr->numCols : slavePtr->numRows;
 	    int require = offset - slavePtr->size;
 	    int startSlot  = slot - span;
+
 	    if (startSlot >=0 && require < layoutPtr[startSlot].maxOffset) {
 		layoutPtr[startSlot].maxOffset = require;
 	    }
@@ -2094,30 +2105,29 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 
     /*
      * Step 5.
-     * At this point, each slot boundary has a range of values that
-     * will satisfy the overall layout size.
-     * Make repeated passes over the layout structure looking for
-     * spans of slot boundaries where the minOffsets are less than
-     * the maxOffsets, and adjust the offsets according to the slot
-     * weights.  At each pass, at least one slot boundary will have
-     * its range of possible values fixed at a single value.
+     * At this point, each slot boundary has a range of values that will
+     * satisfy the overall layout size. Make repeated passes over the layout
+     * structure looking for spans of slot boundaries where the minOffsets are
+     * less than the maxOffsets, and adjust the offsets according to the slot
+     * weights. At each pass, at least one slot boundary will have its range
+     * of possible values fixed at a single value.
      */
 
     for (start = 0; start < gridCount;) {
-	int totalWeight = 0;	/* Sum of the weights for all of the
-				 * slots in this span. */
-	int need = 0;		/* The minimum space needed to layout
-				 * this span. */
-	int have;		/* The actual amount of space that will
-				 * be taken up by this span. */
-	int weight;		/* Cumulative weights of the columns in
+	int totalWeight = 0;	/* Sum of the weights for all of the slots in
 				 * this span. */
+	int need = 0;		/* The minimum space needed to layout this
+				 * span. */
+	int have;		/* The actual amount of space that will be
+				 * taken up by this span. */
+	int weight;		/* Cumulative weights of the columns in this
+				 * span. */
 	int noWeights = 0;	/* True if the span has no weights. */
 
 	/*
-	 * Find a span by identifying ranges of slots whose edges are
-	 * already constrained at fixed offsets, but whose internal
-	 * slot boundaries have a range of possible positions.
+	 * Find a span by identifying ranges of slots whose edges are already
+	 * constrained at fixed offsets, but whose internal slot boundaries
+	 * have a range of possible positions.
 	 */
 
 	if (layoutPtr[start].minOffset == layoutPtr[start].maxOffset) {
@@ -2132,9 +2142,8 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * We found a span.  Compute the total weight, minumum space required,
-	 * for this span, and the actual amount of space the span should
-	 * use.
+	 * We found a span. Compute the total weight, minumum space required,
+	 * for this span, and the actual amount of space the span should use.
 	 */
 
 	for (slot = start; slot <= end; slot++) {
@@ -2144,8 +2153,8 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 	have = layoutPtr[end].maxOffset - layoutPtr[start-1].minOffset;
 
 	/*
-	 * If all the weights in the span are zero, then distribute the
-	 * extra space evenly.
+	 * If all the weights in the span are zero, then distribute the extra
+	 * space evenly.
 	 */
 
 	if (totalWeight == 0) {
@@ -2155,19 +2164,20 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 
 	/*
 	 * It might not be possible to give the span all of the space
-	 * available on this pass without violating the size constraints
-	 * of one or more of the internal slot boundaries.
-	 * Try to determine the maximum amount of space that when added to
-	 * the entire span, would cause a slot boundary to have its possible
-	 * range reduced to one value, and reduce the amount of extra
-	 * space allocated on this pass accordingly.
+	 * available on this pass without violating the size constraints of
+	 * one or more of the internal slot boundaries. Try to determine the
+	 * maximum amount of space that when added to the entire span, would
+	 * cause a slot boundary to have its possible range reduced to one
+	 * value, and reduce the amount of extra space allocated on this pass
+	 * accordingly.
 	 *
-	 * The calculation is done cumulatively to avoid accumulating
-	 * roundoff errors.
+	 * The calculation is done cumulatively to avoid accumulating roundoff
+	 * errors.
 	 */
 
 	do {
 	    int prevMinOffset = layoutPtr[start - 1].minOffset;
+
 	    prevGrow = 0;
 	    accWeight = 0;
 	    for (slot = start; slot <= end; slot++) {
@@ -2180,10 +2190,11 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 			((prevMinOffset + layoutPtr[slot].minSize + grow)
 			> layoutPtr[slot].maxOffset)) {
 		    int newHave;
+
 		    /*
-		     * There is not enough room to grow that much.
-		     * Calculate how much this slot can grow and how much
-		     * "have" that corresponds to.
+		     * There is not enough room to grow that much. Calculate
+		     * how much this slot can grow and how much "have" that
+		     * corresponds to.
 		     */
 
 		    grow = layoutPtr[slot].maxOffset -
@@ -2191,36 +2202,43 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 		    newHave = grow * totalWeight / weight;
 		    if (newHave > totalWeight) {
 			/*
-			 * By distributing multiples of totalWeight
-			 * we minimize rounding errors since they will
-			 * only happen in the last loop(s).
+			 * By distributing multiples of totalWeight we
+			 * minimize rounding errors since they will only
+			 * happen in the last loop(s).
 			 */
 
 			newHave = newHave / totalWeight * totalWeight;
 		    }
 		    if (newHave <= 0) {
 			/*
-			 * We can end up with a "have" of 0 here if
-			 * the previous slots have taken all the space.
-			 * In that case we cannot guess an appropriate
-			 * "have" so we just try some lower "have" that
-			 * is >= 1, to make sure this terminates.
+			 * We can end up with a "have" of 0 here if the
+			 * previous slots have taken all the space. In that
+			 * case we cannot guess an appropriate "have" so we
+			 * just try some lower "have" that is >= 1, to make
+			 * sure this terminates.
 			 */
 
 			newHave = (have - need) - 1;
 			if (newHave > (3 * totalWeight)) {
-			    /* Go down 25% for large values */
+			    /*
+			     * Go down 25% for large values.
+			     */
 			    newHave = newHave * 3 / 4;
 			}
+
 			if (newHave > totalWeight) {
-			    /* Round down to a multiple of totalWeight. */
+			    /*
+			     * Round down to a multiple of totalWeight.
+			     */
 			    newHave = newHave / totalWeight * totalWeight;
 			}
+
 			if (newHave <= 0) {
 			    newHave = 1;
 			}
 		    }
 		    have = newHave + need;
+
 		    /*
 		     * Restart loop to check if the new "have" will fit.
 		     */
@@ -2232,14 +2250,15 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 		    prevMinOffset = layoutPtr[slot].minOffset;
 		}
 	    }
+
 	    /*
 	     * Quit the outer loop if the inner loop ran all the way.
 	     */
 	} while (slot <= end);
 
 	/*
-	 * Now distribute the extra space among the slots by
-	 * adjusting the minSizes and minOffsets.
+	 * Now distribute the extra space among the slots by adjusting the
+	 * minSizes and minOffsets.
 	 */
 
 	prevGrow = 0;
@@ -2257,13 +2276,16 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Having pushed the top/left boundaries of the slots to
-	 * take up extra space, the bottom/right space is recalculated
-	 * to propagate the new space allocation.
+	 * Having pushed the top/left boundaries of the slots to take up extra
+	 * space, the bottom/right space is recalculated to propagate the new
+	 * space allocation.
 	 */
 
 	for (slot = end; slot > start; slot--) {
-	    /* maxOffset may not go up */
+	    /*
+	     * maxOffset may not go up.
+	     */
+
 	    if ((layoutPtr[slot].maxOffset-layoutPtr[slot].minSize)
 		    < layoutPtr[slot-1].maxOffset) {
 		layoutPtr[slot-1].maxOffset =
@@ -2274,8 +2296,8 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
 
     /*
      * Step 6.
-     * All of the space has been apportioned; copy the
-     * layout information back into the master.
+     * All of the space has been apportioned; copy the layout information back
+     * into the master.
      */
 
     for (slot=0; slot < gridCount; slot++) {
@@ -2294,24 +2316,24 @@ ResolveConstraints(masterPtr, slotType, maxOffset)
  *
  * GetGrid --
  *
- *	This internal procedure is used to locate a Grid structure for
- *	a given window, creating one if one doesn't exist already.
+ *	This internal procedure is used to locate a Grid structure for a given
+ *	window, creating one if one doesn't exist already.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the Grid structure
- *	corresponding to tkwin.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the Grid structure corresponding to
+ *	tkwin.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new grid structure may be created.  If so, then a callback
- *	is set up to clean things up when the window is deleted.
+ *	A new grid structure may be created. If so, then a callback is set up
+ *	to clean things up when the window is deleted.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static Gridder *
 GetGrid(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window for which
-				 * grid structure is desired. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window for which grid structure
+				 * is desired. */
 {
     register Gridder *gridPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
@@ -2324,8 +2346,8 @@ GetGrid(tkwin)
     }
 
     /*
-     * See if there's already grid for this window.  If not,
-     * then create a new one.
+     * See if there's already grid for this window. If not, then create a new
+     * one.
      */
 
     hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->gridHashTable, (char *) tkwin, &new);
@@ -2368,25 +2390,24 @@ GetGrid(tkwin)
  *
  * SetGridSize --
  *
- *	This internal procedure sets the size of the grid occupied
- *	by slaves.
+ *	This internal procedure sets the size of the grid occupied by slaves.
  *
  * Results:
- *	none
+ *	None
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The width and height arguments are filled in the master data structure.
- *	Additional space is allocated for the constraints to accomodate
- *	the offsets.
+ *	The width and height arguments are filled in the master data
+ *	structure. Additional space is allocated for the constraints to
+ *	accomodate the offsets.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 SetGridSize(masterPtr)
-    Gridder *masterPtr;			/* The geometry master for this grid. */
+    Gridder *masterPtr;		/* The geometry master for this grid. */
 {
-    register Gridder *slavePtr;		/* Current slave window. */
+    register Gridder *slavePtr;	/* Current slave window. */
     int maxX = 0, maxY = 0;
 
     for (slavePtr = masterPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
@@ -2405,30 +2426,30 @@ SetGridSize(masterPtr)
  *
  * CheckSlotData --
  *
- *	This internal procedure is used to manage the storage for
- *	row and column (slot) constraints.
+ *	This internal procedure is used to manage the storage for row and
+ *	column (slot) constraints.
  *
  * Results:
  *	TRUE if the index is OK, False otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new master grid structure may be created.  If so, then
- *	it is initialized.  In addition, additional storage for
- *	a row or column constraints may be allocated, and the constraint
- *	maximums are adjusted.
+ *	A new master grid structure may be created. If so, then it is
+ *	initialized. In addition, additional storage for a row or column
+ *	constraints may be allocated, and the constraint maximums are
+ *	adjusted.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
 CheckSlotData(masterPtr, slot, slotType, checkOnly)
-    Gridder *masterPtr;	/* the geometry master for this grid */
-    int slot;		/* which slot to look at */
-    int slotType;	/* ROW or COLUMN */
-    int checkOnly;	/* don't allocate new space if true */
+    Gridder *masterPtr;		/* The geometry master for this grid. */
+    int slot;			/* Which slot to look at. */
+    int slotType;		/* ROW or COLUMN. */
+    int checkOnly;		/* Don't allocate new space if true. */
 {
-    int numSlot;	/* number of slots already allocated (Space) */
-    int end;		/* last used constraint */
+    int numSlot;		/* Number of slots already allocated (Space) */
+    int end;			/* Last used constraint. */
 
     /*
      * If slot is out of bounds, return immediately.
@@ -2444,8 +2465,8 @@ CheckSlotData(masterPtr, slot, slotType, checkOnly)
 
     /*
      * If we need to allocate more space, allocate a little extra to avoid
-     * repeated re-alloc's for large tables.  We need enough space to
-     * hold all of the offsets as well.
+     * repeated re-alloc's for large tables. We need enough space to hold all
+     * of the offsets as well.
      */
 
     InitMasterData(masterPtr);
@@ -2457,22 +2478,23 @@ CheckSlotData(masterPtr, slot, slotType, checkOnly)
     	numSlot = (slotType == ROW) ? masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowSpace
 		: masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnSpace;
     	if (slot >= numSlot) {
-	    int newNumSlot = slot + PREALLOC ;
+	    int newNumSlot = slot + PREALLOC;
 	    size_t oldSize = numSlot * sizeof(SlotInfo);
 	    size_t newSize = newNumSlot * sizeof(SlotInfo);
-	    SlotInfo *new = (SlotInfo *) ckalloc(newSize);
-	    SlotInfo *old = (slotType == ROW) ?
-		    masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowPtr :
-		    masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnPtr;
-	    memcpy((VOID *) new, (VOID *) old, oldSize );
-	    memset((VOID *) (new+numSlot), 0, newSize - oldSize );
-	    ckfree((char *) old);
+	    SlotInfo *newSI = (SlotInfo *) ckalloc(newSize);
+	    SlotInfo *oldSI = (slotType == ROW)
+		    ? masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowPtr
+		    : masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnPtr;
+
+	    memcpy((VOID *) newSI, (VOID *) oldSI, oldSize);
+	    memset((VOID *) (newSI+numSlot), 0, newSize - oldSize);
+	    ckfree((char *) oldSI);
 	    if (slotType == ROW) {
-	 	masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowPtr = new ;
-	    	masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowSpace = newNumSlot ;
+	 	masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowPtr = newSI;
+	    	masterPtr->masterDataPtr->rowSpace = newNumSlot;
 	    } else {
-	    	masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnPtr = new;
-	    	masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnSpace = newNumSlot ;
+	    	masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnPtr = newSI;
+	    	masterPtr->masterDataPtr->columnSpace = newNumSlotSI;
 	    }
 	}
 	if (slot >= end && checkOnly != CHECK_SPACE) {
@@ -2491,16 +2513,15 @@ CheckSlotData(masterPtr, slot, slotType, checkOnly)
  *
  * InitMasterData --
  *
- *	This internal procedure is used to allocate and initialize
- *	the data for a geometry master, if the data
- *	doesn't exist already.
+ *	This internal procedure is used to allocate and initialize the data
+ *	for a geometry master, if the data doesn't exist already.
  *
  * Results:
  *	none
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new master grid structure may be created.  If so, then
- *	it is initialized.
+ *	A new master grid structure may be created. If so, then it is
+ *	initialized.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -2590,11 +2611,11 @@ Unlink(slavePtr)
  *
  * DestroyGrid --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a grid at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).   Cleaning up the grid involves
- *	freeing the main structure for all windows. and the master structure
- *	for geometry managers.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release to
+ *	clean up the internal structure of a grid at a safe time (when no-one
+ *	is using it anymore). Cleaning up the grid involves freeing the main
+ *	structure for all windows and the master structure for geometry
+ *	managers.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2628,25 +2649,24 @@ DestroyGrid(memPtr)
  *
  * GridStructureProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher in response
- *	to StructureNotify events.
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher in response to
+ *	StructureNotify events.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	If a window was just deleted, clean up all its grid-related
- *	information.  If it was just resized, re-configure its slaves, if
- *	any.
+ *	information. If it was just resized, re-configure its slaves, if any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 GridStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Our information about window
-					 * referred to by eventPtr. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Describes what just happened. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Our information about window referred to by
+				 * eventPtr. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Describes what just happened. */
 {
     register Gridder *gridPtr = (Gridder *) clientData;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) gridPtr->tkwin)->dispPtr;
@@ -2657,8 +2677,8 @@ GridStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	    gridPtr->flags |= REQUESTED_RELAYOUT;
 	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ArrangeGrid, (ClientData) gridPtr);
 	}
-	if ((gridPtr->masterPtr != NULL)
-		&& (gridPtr->doubleBw != 2*Tk_Changes(gridPtr->tkwin)->border_width)) {
+	if ((gridPtr->masterPtr != NULL) &&
+		(gridPtr->doubleBw != 2*Tk_Changes(gridPtr->tkwin)->border_width)) {
 	    if (!(gridPtr->masterPtr->flags & REQUESTED_RELAYOUT)) {
 		gridPtr->doubleBw = 2*Tk_Changes(gridPtr->tkwin)->border_width;
 		gridPtr->masterPtr->flags |= REQUESTED_RELAYOUT;
@@ -2706,15 +2726,14 @@ GridStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * ConfigureSlaves --
  *
- *	This implements the guts of the "grid configure" command.  Given
- *	a list of slaves and configuration options, it arranges for the
- *	grid to manage the slaves and sets the specified options.
- *	arguments consist of windows or window shortcuts followed by
- *	"-option value" pairs.
+ *	This implements the guts of the "grid configure" command. Given a list
+ *	of slaves and configuration options, it arranges for the grid to
+ *	manage the slaves and sets the specified options. Arguments consist
+ *	of windows or window shortcuts followed by "-option value" pairs.
  *
  * Results:
- *	TCL_OK is returned if all went well.  Otherwise, TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned and the interp's result is set to contain an error message.
+ *	TCL_OK is returned if all went well. Otherwise, TCL_ERROR is returned
+ *	and the interp's result is set to contain an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Slave windows get taken over by the grid.
@@ -2726,27 +2745,25 @@ static int
 ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Any window in application containing
-				 * slaves.  Used to look up slave names. */
+				 * slaves. Used to look up slave names. */
     int objc;			/* Number of elements in argv. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects: contains one or more
-				 * window names followed by any number
-				 * of "option value" pairs.  Caller must
-				 * make sure that there is at least one
-				 * window name. */
+				 * window names followed by any number of
+				 * "option value" pairs. Caller must make sure
+				 * that there is at least one window name. */
 {
     Gridder *masterPtr = NULL;
     Gridder *slavePtr;
     Tk_Window other, slave, parent, ancestor;
     int i, j, tmp;
-    int length;
     int numWindows;
     int width;
     int defaultRow = -1;
-    int defaultColumn = 0;	/* default column number */
-    int defaultColumnSpan = 1;	/* default number of columns */
-    char *lastWindow;		/* use this window to base current
-				 * Row/col on */
-    int numSkip;		/* number of 'x' found */
+    int defaultColumn = 0;	/* Default column number */
+    int defaultColumnSpan = 1;	/* Default number of columns */
+    char *lastWindow;		/* Use this window to base current row/col
+				 * on */
+    int numSkip;		/* Number of 'x' found */
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
 	"-column", "-columnspan", "-in", "-ipadx", "-ipady",
 	"-padx", "-pady", "-row", "-rowspan", "-sticky", (char *) NULL
@@ -2756,7 +2773,7 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	CONF_PADX, CONF_PADY, CONF_ROW, CONF_ROWSPAN, CONF_STICKY };
     int index;
     char *string;
-    char firstChar, prevChar;
+    char firstChar;
     int positionGiven;
 
     /*
@@ -2765,8 +2782,10 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 
     firstChar = 0;
     for (numWindows=0, i=0; i < objc; i++) {
-	prevChar = firstChar;
-	string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], (int *) &length);
+	int length;
+	char prevChar = firstChar;
+
+	string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
     	firstChar = string[0];
 
 	if (firstChar == '.') {
@@ -2774,6 +2793,7 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	     * Check that windows are valid, and locate the first slave's
 	     * parent window (default for -in).
 	     */
+
 	    if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i], &slave) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
@@ -2828,12 +2848,11 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Go through all options looking for -in and -row, which are needed to
-     * be found first to handle the special case where ^ is used on a row
-     * without windows names, but with an -in option.
-     * Since all options are checked here, we do not need to handle the
-     * error case again later.
-     */ 
+     * Go through all options looking for -in and -row, which are needed to be
+     * found first to handle the special case where ^ is used on a row without
+     * windows names, but with an -in option. Since all options are checked
+     * here, we do not need to handle the error case again later.
+     */
 
     for (i = numWindows; i < objc; i += 2) {
 	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], optionStrings, "option", 0,
@@ -2860,7 +2879,10 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	}
     }
 
-    /* If no -row is given, use the first unoccupied row of the master. */
+    /*
+     * If no -row is given, use the first unoccupied row of the master.
+     */
+
     if (defaultRow < 0) {
 	if (masterPtr != NULL && masterPtr->masterDataPtr != NULL) {
 	    SetGridSize(masterPtr);
@@ -2871,14 +2893,13 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Iterate over all of the slave windows and short-cuts, parsing
-     * options for each slave.  It's a bit wasteful to re-parse the
-     * options for each slave, but things get too messy if we try to
-     * parse the arguments just once at the beginning.  For example,
-     * if a slave already is managed we want to just change a few
-     * existing values without resetting everything.  If there are
-     * multiple windows, the -in option only gets processed for the
-     * first window.
+     * Iterate over all of the slave windows and short-cuts, parsing options
+     * for each slave. It's a bit wasteful to re-parse the options for each
+     * slave, but things get too messy if we try to parse the arguments just
+     * once at the beginning. For example, if a slave already is managed we
+     * want to just change a few existing values without resetting everything.
+     * If there are multiple windows, the -in option only gets processed for
+     * the first window.
      */
 
     positionGiven = 0;
@@ -2887,8 +2908,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
     	firstChar = string[0];
 
 	/*
-	 * '^' and 'x' cause us to skip a column.  '-' is processed
-	 * as part of its preceeding slave.
+	 * '^' and 'x' cause us to skip a column. '-' is processed as part of
+	 * its preceeding slave.
 	 */
 
 	if ((firstChar == REL_VERT) || (firstChar == REL_SKIP)) {
@@ -2922,43 +2943,44 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	 * The following statement is taken from tkPack.c:
 	 *
 	 * "If the slave isn't currently managed, reset all of its
-	 * configuration information to default values (there could
-	 * be old values left from a previous packer)."
+	 * configuration information to default values (there could be old
+	 * values left from a previous packer)."
 	 *
-	 * I [D.S.] disagree with this statement. If a slave is disabled (using
-	 * "forget") and then re-enabled, I submit that 90% of the time the
-	 * programmer will want it to retain its old configuration information.
-	 * If the programmer doesn't want this behavior, then the
+	 * I [D.S.] disagree with this statement. If a slave is disabled
+	 * (using "forget") and then re-enabled, I submit that 90% of the time
+	 * the programmer will want it to retain its old configuration
+	 * information. If the programmer doesn't want this behavior, then the
 	 * defaults can be reestablished by hand, without having to worry
 	 * about keeping track of the old state.
 	 */
 
 	for (i = numWindows; i < objc; i += 2) {
-	    Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], optionStrings, "option", 0, 
+	    Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], optionStrings, "option", 0,
 		    &index);
-	    if (index == CONF_COLUMN) {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK ||
-			tmp < 0) {
-		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    switch ((enum options) index) {
+	    case CONF_COLUMN:
+		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK
+			|| tmp < 0) {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad column value \"",
 			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
 			    "\": must be a non-negative integer", (char *)NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		slavePtr->column = tmp;
-	    } else if (index == CONF_COLUMNSPAN) {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK ||
-			tmp <= 0) {
-		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		break;
+	    case CONF_COLUMNSPAN:
+		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK
+			|| tmp <= 0) {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad columnspan value \"",
 			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
 			    "\": must be a positive integer", (char *)NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		slavePtr->numCols = tmp;
-	    } else if (index == CONF_IN) {
-		if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other) !=
-			TCL_OK) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_IN:
+		if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1],
+			&other) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		if (other == slave) {
@@ -2969,10 +2991,23 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 		positionGiven = 1;
 		masterPtr = GetGrid(other);
 		InitMasterData(masterPtr);
-	    } else if (index == CONF_IPADX) {
-		if ((Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, slave, objv[i+1], &tmp)
-			!= TCL_OK) || (tmp < 0)) {
-		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		break;
+	    case CONF_STICKY: {
+		int sticky = StringToSticky(Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]));
+
+		if (sticky == -1) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad stickyness value \"",
+			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
+			    "\": must be a string containing n, e, s, and/or w",
+			    (char *)NULL);
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		slavePtr->sticky = sticky;
+		break;
+	    }
+	    case CONF_IPADX:
+		if ((Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, slave, objv[i+1],
+			&tmp) != TCL_OK) || (tmp < 0)) {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad ipadx value \"",
 			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
 			    "\": must be positive screen distance",
@@ -2980,10 +3015,10 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		slavePtr->iPadX = tmp*2;
-	    } else if (index == CONF_IPADY) {
-		if ((Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, slave, objv[i+1], &tmp)
-			!= TCL_OK) || (tmp < 0)) {
-		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		break;
+	    case CONF_IPADY:
+		if ((Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(NULL, slave, objv[i+1],
+			&tmp) != TCL_OK) || (tmp < 0)) {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad ipady value \"",
 			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
 			    "\": must be positive screen distance",
@@ -2991,52 +3026,46 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		slavePtr->iPadY = tmp*2;
-	    } else if (index == CONF_PADX) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_PADX:
 		if (TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1],
 			&slavePtr->padLeft, &slavePtr->padX) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_PADY) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_PADY:
 		if (TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1],
 			&slavePtr->padTop, &slavePtr->padY) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_ROW) {
-		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK
+		break;
+	    case CONF_ROW:
+		if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK
 			|| tmp < 0) {
-		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad row value \"",
 			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
-			    "\": must be a non-negative integer", (char *)NULL);
+			    "\": must be a non-negative integer",
+			    (char *) NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		slavePtr->row = tmp;
-	    } else if (index == CONF_ROWSPAN) {
-		if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK)
+		break;
+	    case CONF_ROWSPAN:
+		if ((Tcl_GetIntFromObj(NULL, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK)
 			|| tmp <= 0) {
-		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad rowspan value \"",
 			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
-			    "\": must be a positive integer", (char *)NULL);
+			    "\": must be a positive integer", (char *) NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		slavePtr->numRows = tmp;
-	    } else if (index == CONF_STICKY) {
-		int sticky = StringToSticky(Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]));
-		if (sticky == -1) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad stickyness value \"",
-			    Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]),
-			    "\": must be a string containing n, e, s, and/or w",
-			    (char *)NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		slavePtr->sticky = sticky;
+		break;
 	    }
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If no position was specified via -in and the slave is
-	 * already packed, then leave it in its current location.
+	 * If no position was specified via -in and the slave is already
+	 * packed, then leave it in its current location.
 	 */
 
     	if (!positionGiven && (slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL)) {
@@ -3045,8 +3074,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
     	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If the same -in window is passed in again, then just
-	 * leave it in its current location.
+	 * If the same -in window is passed in again, then just leave it in
+	 * its current location.
 	 */
 
 	if (positionGiven && (masterPtr == slavePtr->masterPtr)) {
@@ -3054,7 +3083,7 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Make sure we have a geometry master.  We look at:
+	 * Make sure we have a geometry master. We look at:
 	 *  1)   the -in flag
 	 *  2)   the parent of the first slave.
 	 */
@@ -3078,9 +3107,9 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Make sure that the slave's parent is either the master or
-	 * an ancestor of the master, and that the master and slave
-	 * aren't the same.
+	 * Make sure that the slave's parent is either the master or an
+	 * ancestor of the master, and that the master and slave aren't the
+	 * same.
 	 */
 
 	for (ancestor = masterPtr->tkwin; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
@@ -3125,11 +3154,10 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	defaultColumnSpan = 1;
 
 	/*
-	 * Arrange for the master to be re-arranged at the first
-	 * idle moment.
+	 * Arrange for the master to be re-arranged at the first idle moment.
 	 */
 
-	scheduleLayout:
+    scheduleLayout:
 	if (masterPtr->abortPtr != NULL) {
 	    *masterPtr->abortPtr = 1;
 	}
@@ -3139,7 +3167,9 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	}
     }
 
-    /* Now look for all the "^"'s. */
+    /*
+     * Now look for all the "^"'s.
+     */
 
     lastWindow = NULL;
     numSkip = 0;
@@ -3168,9 +3198,13 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
-	/* Count the number of consecutive ^'s starting from this position */
+	/*
+	 * Count the number of consecutive ^'s starting from this position.
+	 */
+
 	for (width = 1; width + j < numWindows; width++) {
 	    char *string = Tcl_GetString(objv[j+width]);
+
 	    if (*string != REL_VERT) {
 		break;
 	    }
@@ -3229,8 +3263,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
  *
  * StickyToString
  *
- *	Converts the internal boolean combination of "sticky" bits onto
- *	a TCL list element containing zero or mor of n, s, e, or w.
+ *	Converts the internal boolean combination of "sticky" bits onto a Tcl
+ *	list element containing zero or more of n, s, e, or w.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A string is placed into the "result" pointer.
@@ -3243,8 +3277,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 
 static void
 StickyToString(flags, result)
-    int flags;		/* the sticky flags */
-    char *result;	/* where to put the result */
+    int flags;			/* The sticky flags. */
+    char *result;		/* Where to put the result. */
 {
     int count = 0;
     if (flags&STICK_NORTH) {
@@ -3271,12 +3305,12 @@ StickyToString(flags, result)
  *
  * StringToSticky --
  *
- *	Converts an ascii string representing a widgets stickyness
- *	into the boolean result.
+ *	Converts an ascii string representing a widgets stickyness into the
+ *	boolean result.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The boolean combination of the "sticky" bits is retuned.  If an
- *	error occurs, such as an invalid character, -1 is returned instead.
+ *	The boolean combination of the "sticky" bits is retuned. If an error
+ *	occurs, such as an invalid character, -1 is returned instead.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	none
@@ -3293,12 +3327,22 @@ StringToSticky(string)
 
     while ((c = *string++) != '\0') {
 	switch (c) {
-	    case 'n': case 'N': sticky |= STICK_NORTH; break;
-	    case 'e': case 'E': sticky |= STICK_EAST;  break;
-	    case 's': case 'S': sticky |= STICK_SOUTH; break;
-	    case 'w': case 'W': sticky |= STICK_WEST;  break;
-	    case ' ': case ',': case '\t': case '\r': case '\n': break;
-	    default: return -1;
+	case 'n': case 'N':
+	    sticky |= STICK_NORTH;
+	    break;
+	case 'e': case 'E':
+	    sticky |= STICK_EAST;
+	    break;
+	case 's': case 'S':
+	    sticky |= STICK_SOUTH;
+	    break;
+	case 'w': case 'W':
+	    sticky |= STICK_WEST;
+	    break;
+	case ' ': case ',': case '\t': case '\r': case '\n':
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    return -1;
 	}
     }
     return sticky;
@@ -3321,14 +3365,14 @@ StringToSticky(string)
  */
 
 static Tcl_Obj *
-NewPairObj(interp, val1, val2)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+NewPairObj(val1, val2)
     int val1, val2;
 {
-    Tcl_Obj *res = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res, Tcl_NewIntObj(val1));
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res, Tcl_NewIntObj(val2));
-    return res;
+    Tcl_Obj *ary[2];
+
+    ary[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val1);
+    ary[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val2);
+    return Tcl_NewListObj(2, ary);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -3348,14 +3392,22 @@ NewPairObj(interp, val1, val2)
  */
 
 static Tcl_Obj *
-NewQuadObj(interp, val1, val2, val3, val4)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+NewQuadObj(val1, val2, val3, val4)
     int val1, val2, val3, val4;
 {
-    Tcl_Obj *res = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res, Tcl_NewIntObj(val1));
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res, Tcl_NewIntObj(val2));
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res, Tcl_NewIntObj(val3));
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, res, Tcl_NewIntObj(val4));
-    return res;
+    Tcl_Obj *ary[4];
+
+    ary[0] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val1);
+    ary[1] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val2);
+    ary[2] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val3);
+    ary[3] = Tcl_NewIntObj(val4);
+    return Tcl_NewListObj(4, ary);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkImage.c b/generic/tkImage.c
index 476662b..570d39f 100644
--- a/generic/tkImage.c
+++ b/generic/tkImage.c
@@ -1,17 +1,16 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkImage.c --
  *
- *	This module implements the image protocol, which allows lots
- *	of different kinds of images to be used in lots of different
- *	widgets.
+ *	This module implements the image protocol, which allows lots of
+ *	different kinds of images to be used in lots of different widgets.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkImage.c,v 1.22 2003/09/17 23:45:35 dgp Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkImage.c,v 1.23 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
@@ -27,96 +26,93 @@ typedef struct Image {
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window passed to Tk_GetImage (needed to
 				 * "re-get" the image later if the manager
 				 * changes). */
-    Display *display;		/* Display for tkwin.  Needed because when
-				 * the image is eventually freed tkwin may
-				 * not exist anymore. */
+    Display *display;		/* Display for tkwin. Needed because when the
+				 * image is eventually freed tkwin may not
+				 * exist anymore. */
     struct ImageMaster *masterPtr;
 				/* Master for this image (identifiers image
 				 * manager, for example). */
-    ClientData instanceData;
-				/* One word argument to pass to image manager
+    ClientData instanceData;	/* One word argument to pass to image manager
 				 * when dealing with this image instance. */
     Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc;
 				/* Code in widget to call when image changes
 				 * in a way that affects redisplay. */
-    ClientData widgetClientData;
-				/* Argument to pass to changeProc. */
+    ClientData widgetClientData;/* Argument to pass to changeProc. */
     struct Image *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of all image instances
 				 * associated with the same name. */
-
 } Image;
 
 /*
- * For each image master there is one of the following structures,
- * which represents a name in the image table and all of the images
- * instantiated from it.  Entries in mainPtr->imageTable point to
- * these structures.
+ * For each image master there is one of the following structures, which
+ * represents a name in the image table and all of the images instantiated
+ * from it. Entries in mainPtr->imageTable point to these structures.
  */
 
 typedef struct ImageMaster {
-    Tk_ImageType *typePtr;	/* Information about image type.  NULL means
-				 * that no image manager owns this image:  the
+    Tk_ImageType *typePtr;	/* Information about image type. NULL means
+				 * that no image manager owns this image: the
 				 * image was deleted. */
-    ClientData masterData;	/* One-word argument to pass to image mgr
-				 * when dealing with the master, as opposed
-				 * to instances. */
+    ClientData masterData;	/* One-word argument to pass to image mgr when
+				 * dealing with the master, as opposed to
+				 * instances. */
     int width, height;		/* Last known dimensions for image. */
-    Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr;	/* Pointer to hash table containing image
-				 * (the imageTable field in some TkMainInfo
+    Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr;	/* Pointer to hash table containing image (the
+				 * imageTable field in some TkMainInfo
 				 * structure). */
-    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;	/* Hash entry in mainPtr->imageTable for
-				 * this structure (used to delete the hash
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;	/* Hash entry in mainPtr->imageTable for this
+				 * structure (used to delete the hash
 				 * entry). */
     Image *instancePtr;		/* Pointer to first in list of instances
 				 * derived from this name. */
     int deleted;		/* Flag set when image is being deleted. */
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Main window of interpreter (used to
-				 * detect when the world is falling apart.) */
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Main window of interpreter (used to detect
+				 * when the world is falling apart.) */
 } ImageMaster;
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    Tk_ImageType *imageTypeList;/* First in a list of all known image 
-				 * types. */  
-    Tk_ImageType *oldImageTypeList;/* First in a list of all known old-style image 
-				 * types. */  
-} ThreadSpecificData;           
+    Tk_ImageType *imageTypeList;/* First in a list of all known image
+				 * types. */
+    Tk_ImageType *oldImageTypeList;
+				/* First in a list of all known old-style
+				 * image types. */
+} ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for local procedures:
+ * Prototypes for local functions:
  */
 
-static void	DeleteImage _ANSI_ARGS_((ImageMaster *masterPtr));
-static void	EventuallyDeleteImage _ANSI_ARGS_((ImageMaster *masterPtr,
-				int forgetImageHashNow));
+static void		DeleteImage(ImageMaster *masterPtr);
+static void		EventuallyDeleteImage(ImageMaster *masterPtr,
+			    int forgetImageHashNow);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_CreateOldImageType, Tk_CreateImageType --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by an image manager to tell Tk about
- *	a new kind of image and the procedures that manage the new type.
- *	The procedure is typically invoked during Tcl_AppInit.
+ *	This function is invoked by an image manager to tell Tk about a new
+ *	kind of image and the functions that manage the new type. The function
+ *	is typically invoked during Tcl_AppInit.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The new image type is entered into a table used in the "image
- *	create" command.
+ *	The new image type is entered into a table used in the "image create"
+ *	command.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
 Tk_CreateOldImageType(typePtr)
-    Tk_ImageType *typePtr;	/* Structure describing the type.  All of
-				 * the fields except "nextPtr" must be filled
-				 * in by caller.  Must not have been passed
-				 * to Tk_CreateImageType previously. */
+    Tk_ImageType *typePtr;	/* Structure describing the type. All of the
+				 * fields except "nextPtr" must be filled in
+				 * by caller. Must not have been passed to
+				 * Tk_CreateImageType previously. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     typePtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList;
@@ -125,12 +121,12 @@ Tk_CreateOldImageType(typePtr)
 
 void
 Tk_CreateImageType(typePtr)
-    Tk_ImageType *typePtr;	/* Structure describing the type.  All of
-				 * the fields except "nextPtr" must be filled
-				 * in by caller.  Must not have been passed
-				 * to Tk_CreateImageType previously. */
+    Tk_ImageType *typePtr;	/* Structure describing the type. All of the
+				 * fields except "nextPtr" must be filled in
+				 * by caller. Must not have been passed to
+				 * Tk_CreateImageType previously. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     typePtr->nextPtr = tsdPtr->imageTypeList;
@@ -142,8 +138,8 @@ Tk_CreateImageType(typePtr)
  *
  * Tk_ImageObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "image" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "image" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -163,7 +159,7 @@ Tk_ImageObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 {
     static CONST char *imageOptions[] = {
 	"create", "delete", "height", "inuse", "names", "type", "types",
-	    "width", (char *) NULL
+	"width", (char *) NULL
     };
     enum options {
 	IMAGE_CREATE, IMAGE_DELETE, IMAGE_HEIGHT, IMAGE_INUSE, IMAGE_NAMES,
@@ -178,7 +174,8 @@ Tk_ImageObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     Tcl_HashSearch search;
     char idString[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE], *name;
     TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    CONST char *arg;
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (objc < 2) {
@@ -191,302 +188,254 @@ Tk_ImageObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case IMAGE_CREATE: {
-	    char *arg;
-	    Tcl_Obj **args;
-	    int oldimage = 0;
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "type ?name? ?options?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+    case IMAGE_CREATE: {
+	Tcl_Obj **args;
+	int oldimage = 0;
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "type ?name? ?options?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-	    /*
-	     * Look up the image type.
-	     */
+	/*
+	 * Look up the image type.
+	 */
 
-	    arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-	    for (typePtr = tsdPtr->imageTypeList; typePtr != NULL;
-		 typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
+	arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	for (typePtr = tsdPtr->imageTypeList; typePtr != NULL;
+		typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if ((*arg == typePtr->name[0])
+		    && (strcmp(arg, typePtr->name) == 0)) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+	if (typePtr == NULL) {
+	    oldimage = 1;
+	    for (typePtr = tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList; typePtr != NULL;
+		    typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
 		if ((*arg == typePtr->name[0])
 			&& (strcmp(arg, typePtr->name) == 0)) {
 		    break;
 		}
 	    }
-	    if (typePtr == NULL) {
-		oldimage = 1;
-		for (typePtr = tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList; typePtr != NULL;
-		     typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
-		    if ((*arg == typePtr->name[0])
-			    && (strcmp(arg, typePtr->name) == 0)) {
-			break;
-		    }
-		}
-	    }
-	    if (typePtr == NULL) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image type \"", arg,
-			"\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+	}
+	if (typePtr == NULL) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image type \"", arg, "\" doesn't exist",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-	    /*
-	     * Figure out a name to use for the new image.
-	     */
+	/*
+	 * Figure out a name to use for the new image.
+	 */
 
-	    if ((objc == 3) || (*(arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[3])) == '-')) {
-                Tcl_CmdInfo dummy;
-                do {
-		    dispPtr->imageId++;
-		    sprintf(idString, "image%d", dispPtr->imageId);
-		    name = idString;
-                } while (Tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp, name, &dummy) != 0);
-		firstOption = 3;
-	    } else {
-		TkWindow *topWin;
-
-		name = arg;
-		firstOption = 4;
-		/*
-		 * Need to check if the _command_ that we are about to
-		 * create is the name of the current master widget
-		 * command (normally "." but could have been renamed)
-		 * and fail in that case before a really nasty and
-		 * hard to stop crash happens.
-		 */
-		topWin = (TkWindow *) TkToplevelWindowForCommand(interp, name);
-		if (topWin != NULL && winPtr->mainPtr->winPtr == topWin) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "images may not be named the ",
-			    "same as the main window", (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
+	if ((objc == 3) || (*(arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[3])) == '-')) {
+	    Tcl_CmdInfo dummy;
+	    do {
+		dispPtr->imageId++;
+		sprintf(idString, "image%d", dispPtr->imageId);
+		name = idString;
+	    } while (Tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp, name, &dummy) != 0);
+	    firstOption = 3;
+	} else {
+	    TkWindow *topWin;
+
+	    name = arg;
+	    firstOption = 4;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Create the data structure for the new image.
+	     * Need to check if the _command_ that we are about to create is
+	     * the name of the current master widget command (normally "." but
+	     * could have been renamed) and fail in that case before a really
+	     * nasty and hard to stop crash happens.
 	     */
 
-	    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable,
-		    name, &new);
-	    if (new) {
-		masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) ckalloc(sizeof(ImageMaster));
-		masterPtr->typePtr = NULL;
-		masterPtr->masterData = NULL;
-		masterPtr->width = masterPtr->height = 1;
-		masterPtr->tablePtr = &winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable;
-		masterPtr->hPtr = hPtr;
-		masterPtr->instancePtr = NULL;
-		masterPtr->deleted = 0;
-		masterPtr->winPtr = winPtr->mainPtr->winPtr;
-		Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) masterPtr->winPtr);
-		Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, masterPtr);
-	    } else {
-		/*
-		 * An image already exists by this name.  Disconnect the
-		 * instances from the master.
-		 */
-
-		masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-		if (masterPtr->typePtr != NULL) {
-		    for (imagePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; imagePtr != NULL;
-			 imagePtr = imagePtr->nextPtr) {
-			(*masterPtr->typePtr->freeProc)(
-			    imagePtr->instanceData, imagePtr->display);
-			(*imagePtr->changeProc)(imagePtr->widgetClientData,
-				0, 0, masterPtr->width, masterPtr->height,
-				masterPtr->width, masterPtr->height);
-		    }
-		    (*masterPtr->typePtr->deleteProc)(masterPtr->masterData);
-		    masterPtr->typePtr = NULL;
-		}
-		masterPtr->deleted = 0;
+	    topWin = (TkWindow *) TkToplevelWindowForCommand(interp, name);
+	    if (topWin != NULL && winPtr->mainPtr->winPtr == topWin) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "images may not be named the ",
+			"same as the main window", (char *) NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
+	}
 
+	/*
+	 * Create the data structure for the new image.
+	 */
+
+	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, name, &new);
+	if (new) {
+	    masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) ckalloc(sizeof(ImageMaster));
+	    masterPtr->typePtr = NULL;
+	    masterPtr->masterData = NULL;
+	    masterPtr->width = masterPtr->height = 1;
+	    masterPtr->tablePtr = &winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable;
+	    masterPtr->hPtr = hPtr;
+	    masterPtr->instancePtr = NULL;
+	    masterPtr->deleted = 0;
+	    masterPtr->winPtr = winPtr->mainPtr->winPtr;
+	    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) masterPtr->winPtr);
+	    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, masterPtr);
+	} else {
 	    /*
-	     * Call the image type manager so that it can perform its own
-	     * initialization, then re-"get" for any existing instances of
-	     * the image.
+	     * An image already exists by this name. Disconnect the instances
+	     * from the master.
 	     */
 
-	    objv += firstOption;
-	    objc -= firstOption;
-	    args = (Tcl_Obj **) objv;
-	    if (oldimage) {
-		int i;
-		args = (Tcl_Obj **) ckalloc((objc+1) * sizeof(char *));
-		for (i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
-		    args[i] = (Tcl_Obj *) Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
+	    masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	    if (masterPtr->typePtr != NULL) {
+		for (imagePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; imagePtr != NULL;
+			imagePtr = imagePtr->nextPtr) {
+		    (*masterPtr->typePtr->freeProc)(imagePtr->instanceData,
+			    imagePtr->display);
+		    (*imagePtr->changeProc)(imagePtr->widgetClientData,
+			    0, 0, masterPtr->width, masterPtr->height,
+			    masterPtr->width, masterPtr->height);
 		}
-		args[objc] = NULL;
+		(*masterPtr->typePtr->deleteProc)(masterPtr->masterData);
+		masterPtr->typePtr = NULL;
 	    }
-	    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) masterPtr);
-	    if ((*typePtr->createProc)(interp, name, objc,
-		    args, typePtr, (Tk_ImageMaster) masterPtr,
-		    &masterPtr->masterData) != TCL_OK) {
-		EventuallyDeleteImage(masterPtr, 0);
-		Tcl_Release((ClientData) masterPtr);
-		if (oldimage) {
-		    ckfree((char *) args);
-		}
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    masterPtr->deleted = 0;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Call the image type manager so that it can perform its own
+	 * initialization, then re-"get" for any existing instances of the
+	 * image.
+	 */
+
+	objv += firstOption;
+	objc -= firstOption;
+	args = (Tcl_Obj **) objv;
+	if (oldimage) {
+	    int i;
+
+	    args = (Tcl_Obj **) ckalloc((objc+1) * sizeof(char *));
+	    for (i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
+		args[i] = (Tcl_Obj *) Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
 	    }
+	    args[objc] = NULL;
+	}
+	Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) masterPtr);
+	if ((*typePtr->createProc)(interp, name, objc, args, typePtr,
+		(Tk_ImageMaster)masterPtr, &masterPtr->masterData) != TCL_OK) {
+	    EventuallyDeleteImage(masterPtr, 0);
 	    Tcl_Release((ClientData) masterPtr);
 	    if (oldimage) {
 		ckfree((char *) args);
 	    }
-	    masterPtr->typePtr = typePtr;
-	    for (imagePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; imagePtr != NULL;
-		 imagePtr = imagePtr->nextPtr) {
-		imagePtr->instanceData = (*typePtr->getProc)(
-		    imagePtr->tkwin, masterPtr->masterData);
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetResult(interp,
-		    Tcl_GetHashKey(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, hPtr),
-		    TCL_STATIC);
-	    break;
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case IMAGE_DELETE: {
-	    for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
-		char *arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
-		hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, arg);
-		if (hPtr == NULL) {
-		  deleteAlreadyDeleted:
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image \"", arg,
-			    "\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-		if (masterPtr->deleted) {
-		    goto deleteAlreadyDeleted;
-		}
-		DeleteImage(masterPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	Tcl_Release((ClientData) masterPtr);
+	if (oldimage) {
+	    ckfree((char *) args);
 	}
-	case IMAGE_HEIGHT: {	
-	    char *arg;
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "name");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	masterPtr->typePtr = typePtr;
+	for (imagePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; imagePtr != NULL;
+		imagePtr = imagePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    imagePtr->instanceData = (*typePtr->getProc)(imagePtr->tkwin,
+		    masterPtr->masterData);
+	}
+	Tcl_SetResult(interp,
+		Tcl_GetHashKey(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, hPtr),
+		TCL_STATIC);
+	break;
+    }
+    case IMAGE_DELETE:
+	for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) {
+	    arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]);
 	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, arg);
 	    if (hPtr == NULL) {
-	      heightAlreadyDeleted:
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image \"", arg,
-			"\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+		goto alreadyDeleted;
 	    }
 	    masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
 	    if (masterPtr->deleted) {
-		goto heightAlreadyDeleted;
+		goto alreadyDeleted;
 	    }
-	    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), masterPtr->height);
-	    break;
+	    DeleteImage(masterPtr);
 	}
-
-	case IMAGE_INUSE: {
-	    int count = 0;
-	    char *arg;
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "name");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, arg);
-	    if (hPtr == NULL) {
-	      inuseAlreadyDeleted:
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image \"", arg,
-			"\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
+	break;
+    case IMAGE_NAMES:
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, &search);
+	for ( ; hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 	    masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
 	    if (masterPtr->deleted) {
-		goto inuseAlreadyDeleted;
+		continue;
 	    }
-	    if (masterPtr->typePtr != NULL && masterPtr->instancePtr != NULL) {
-		count = 1;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetBooleanObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), count);
-	    break;
+	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tcl_GetHashKey(
+		    &winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, hPtr));
+	}
+	break;
+    case IMAGE_TYPES:
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	for (typePtr = tsdPtr->imageTypeList; typePtr != NULL;
+		typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, typePtr->name);
+	}
+	for (typePtr = tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList; typePtr != NULL;
+		typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, typePtr->name);
 	}
+	break;
 
-	case IMAGE_NAMES: {
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, &search);
-	    for ( ; hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
-		masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-		if (masterPtr->deleted) {
-		    continue;
-		}
-		Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tcl_GetHashKey(
-		    &winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, hPtr));
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case IMAGE_HEIGHT:
+    case IMAGE_INUSE:
+    case IMAGE_TYPE:
+    case IMAGE_WIDTH:
+	/*
+	 * These operations all parse virtually identically. First check to
+	 * see if three args are given. Then get a non-deleted master from the
+	 * third arg.
+	 */
+
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "name");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	
-	case IMAGE_TYPE: {
-	    char *arg;
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "name");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, arg);
-	    if (hPtr == NULL) {
-	      typeAlreadyDeleted:
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image \"", arg,
-			"\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-	    if (masterPtr->deleted) {
-		goto typeAlreadyDeleted;
-	    }
+
+	arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
+	hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, arg);
+	if (hPtr == NULL) {
+	    goto alreadyDeleted;
+	}
+	masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	if (masterPtr->deleted) {
+	    goto alreadyDeleted;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Now we read off the specific piece of data we were asked for.
+	 */
+
+	switch ((enum options) index) {
+	case IMAGE_HEIGHT:
+	    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), masterPtr->height);
+	    break;
+	case IMAGE_INUSE:
+	    Tcl_SetBooleanObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
+		    masterPtr->typePtr!=NULL && masterPtr->instancePtr!=NULL);
+	    break;
+	case IMAGE_TYPE:
 	    if (masterPtr->typePtr != NULL) {
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, masterPtr->typePtr->name, TCL_STATIC);
 	    }
 	    break;
-	}
-	case IMAGE_TYPES: {
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    for (typePtr = tsdPtr->imageTypeList; typePtr != NULL;
-		 typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
-		Tcl_AppendElement(interp, typePtr->name);
-	    }
-	    for (typePtr = tsdPtr->oldImageTypeList; typePtr != NULL;
-		 typePtr = typePtr->nextPtr) {
-		Tcl_AppendElement(interp, typePtr->name);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case IMAGE_WIDTH: {
-	    char *arg;
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "name");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    arg = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&winPtr->mainPtr->imageTable, arg);
-	    if (hPtr == NULL) {
-	      widthAlreadyDeleted:
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image \"", arg,
-			"\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-	    if (masterPtr->deleted) {
-		goto widthAlreadyDeleted;
-	    }
+	case IMAGE_WIDTH:
 	    Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), masterPtr->width);
 	    break;
 	}
+	break;
     }
     return TCL_OK;
+
+  alreadyDeleted:
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image \"",arg,"\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -494,32 +443,30 @@ Tk_ImageObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * Tk_ImageChanged --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by an image manager whenever something
- *	has happened that requires the image to be redrawn (some of its
- *	pixels have changed, or its size has changed).
+ *	This function is called by an image manager whenever something has
+ *	happened that requires the image to be redrawn (some of its pixels
+ *	have changed, or its size has changed).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Any widgets that display the image are notified so that they
- *	can redisplay themselves as appropriate.
+ *	Any widgets that display the image are notified so that they can
+ *	redisplay themselves as appropriate.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
-Tk_ImageChanged(imageMaster, x, y, width, height, imageWidth,
-	imageHeight)
+Tk_ImageChanged(imageMaster, x, y, width, height, imageWidth, imageHeight)
     Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster;	/* Image that needs redisplay. */
-    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of upper-left pixel of
-				 * region of image that needs to be
-				 * redrawn. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions (in pixels) of region of
-				 * image to redraw.  If either dimension
-				 * is zero then the image doesn't need to
-				 * be redrawn (perhaps all that happened is
-				 * that its size changed). */
+    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of upper-left pixel of region
+				 * of image that needs to be redrawn. */
+    int width, height;		/* Dimensions (in pixels) of region of image
+				 * to redraw. If either dimension is zero then
+				 * the image doesn't need to be redrawn
+				 * (perhaps all that happened is that its size
+				 * changed). */
     int imageWidth, imageHeight;/* New dimensions of image. */
 {
     ImageMaster *masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) imageMaster;
@@ -528,7 +475,7 @@ Tk_ImageChanged(imageMaster, x, y, width, height, imageWidth,
     masterPtr->width = imageWidth;
     masterPtr->height = imageHeight;
     for (imagePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; imagePtr != NULL;
-	 imagePtr = imagePtr->nextPtr) {
+	    imagePtr = imagePtr->nextPtr) {
 	(*imagePtr->changeProc)(imagePtr->widgetClientData, x, y,
 		width, height, imageWidth, imageHeight);
     }
@@ -539,8 +486,8 @@ Tk_ImageChanged(imageMaster, x, y, width, height, imageWidth,
  *
  * Tk_NameOfImage --
  *
- *	Given a token for an image master, this procedure returns
- *	the name of the image.
+ *	Given a token for an image master, this function returns the name of
+ *	the image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is the string name for imageMaster.
@@ -553,7 +500,7 @@ Tk_ImageChanged(imageMaster, x, y, width, height, imageWidth,
 
 CONST char *
 Tk_NameOfImage(imageMaster)
-    Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster;		/* Token for image. */
+    Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster;	/* Token for image. */
 {
     ImageMaster *masterPtr = (ImageMaster *) imageMaster;
 
@@ -568,35 +515,33 @@ Tk_NameOfImage(imageMaster)
  *
  * Tk_GetImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by a widget when it wants to use
- *	a particular image in a particular window.
+ *	This function is invoked by a widget when it wants to use a particular
+ *	image in a particular window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the image.  If there is no image
- *	by the given name, then NULL is returned and an error message is
- *	left in the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a token for the image. If there is no image by the
+ *	given name, then NULL is returned and an error message is left in the
+ *	interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Tk records the fact that the widget is using the image, and
- *	it will invoke changeProc later if the widget needs redisplay
- *	(i.e. its size changes or some of its pixels change).  The
- *	caller must eventually invoke Tk_FreeImage when it no longer
- *	needs the image.
+ *	Tk records the fact that the widget is using the image, and it will
+ *	invoke changeProc later if the widget needs redisplay (i.e. its size
+ *	changes or some of its pixels change). The caller must eventually
+ *	invoke Tk_FreeImage when it no longer needs the image.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Image
 Tk_GetImage(interp, tkwin, name, changeProc, clientData)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Place to leave error message if image
-				 * can't be found. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window in which image will
-				 * be used. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Place to leave error message if image can't
+				 * be found. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window in which image will be
+				 * used. */
     CONST char *name;		/* Name of desired image. */
     Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc;
-				/* Procedure to invoke when redisplay is
-				 * needed because image's pixels or size
-				 * changed. */
+				/* Function to invoke when redisplay is needed
+				 * because image's pixels or size changed. */
     ClientData clientData;	/* One-word argument to pass to damageProc. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
@@ -626,7 +571,7 @@ Tk_GetImage(interp, tkwin, name, changeProc, clientData)
     masterPtr->instancePtr = imagePtr;
     return (Tk_Image) imagePtr;
 
-    noSuchImage:
+  noSuchImage:
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image \"", name, "\" doesn't exist",
 	    (char *) NULL);
     return NULL;
@@ -637,9 +582,9 @@ Tk_GetImage(interp, tkwin, name, changeProc, clientData)
  *
  * Tk_FreeImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by a widget when it no longer needs
- *	an image acquired by a previous call to Tk_GetImage.  For each
- *	call to Tk_GetImage there must be exactly one call to Tk_FreeImage.
+ *	This function is invoked by a widget when it no longer needs an image
+ *	acquired by a previous call to Tk_GetImage. For each call to
+ *	Tk_GetImage there must be exactly one call to Tk_FreeImage.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -652,8 +597,8 @@ Tk_GetImage(interp, tkwin, name, changeProc, clientData)
 
 void
 Tk_FreeImage(image)
-    Tk_Image image;		/* Token for image that is no longer
-				 * needed by a widget. */
+    Tk_Image image;		/* Token for image that is no longer needed by
+				 * a widget. */
 {
     Image *imagePtr = (Image *) image;
     ImageMaster *masterPtr = imagePtr->masterPtr;
@@ -678,9 +623,9 @@ Tk_FreeImage(image)
     }
     ckfree((char *) imagePtr);
 
-    /* 
-     * If there are no more instances left for the master, and if the
-     * master image has been deleted, then delete the master too.
+    /*
+     * If there are no more instances left for the master, and if the master
+     * image has been deleted, then delete the master too.
      */
 
     if ((masterPtr->typePtr == NULL) && (masterPtr->instancePtr == NULL)) {
@@ -697,15 +642,15 @@ Tk_FreeImage(image)
  *
  * Tk_PostscriptImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by widgets that contain images in order
- *	to redisplay an image on the screen or an off-screen pixmap.
+ *	This function is called by widgets that contain images in order to
+ *	redisplay an image on the screen or an off-screen pixmap.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The image's manager is notified, and it redraws the desired
- *	portion of the image before returning.
+ *	The image's manager is notified, and it redraws the desired portion of
+ *	the image before returning.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -732,12 +677,13 @@ Tk_PostscriptImage(image, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height, prepass)
 	/*
 	 * No master for image, so nothing to display on postscript.
 	 */
+
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Check if an image specific postscript-generation function
-     * exists; otherwise go on with generic code.
+     * Check if an image specific postscript-generation function exists;
+     * otherwise go on with generic code.
      */
 
     if (imagePtr->masterPtr->typePtr->postscriptProc != NULL) {
@@ -752,12 +698,12 @@ Tk_PostscriptImage(image, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height, prepass)
 
     /*
      * Create a Pixmap, tell the image to redraw itself there, and then
-     * generate an XImage from the Pixmap.  We can then read pixel 
-     * values out of the XImage.
+     * generate an XImage from the Pixmap. We can then read pixel values out
+     * of the XImage.
      */
 
-    pmap = Tk_GetPixmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
-                        width, height, Tk_Depth(tkwin));
+    pmap = Tk_GetPixmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_WindowId(tkwin), width, height,
+	    Tk_Depth(tkwin));
 
     gcValues.foreground = WhitePixelOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
     newGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
@@ -773,11 +719,13 @@ Tk_PostscriptImage(image, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height, prepass)
 	    (unsigned int)width, (unsigned int)height, AllPlanes, ZPixmap);
 
     Tk_FreePixmap(Tk_Display(tkwin), pmap);
-    
+
     if (ximage == NULL) {
-	/* The XGetImage() function is apparently not
-	 * implemented on this system. Just ignore it.
+	/*
+	 * The XGetImage() function is apparently not implemented on this
+	 * system. Just ignore it.
 	 */
+
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
     result = TkPostscriptImage(interp, tkwin, psinfo, ximage, x, y,
@@ -792,15 +740,15 @@ Tk_PostscriptImage(image, interp, tkwin, psinfo, x, y, width, height, prepass)
  *
  * Tk_RedrawImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by widgets that contain images in order
- *	to redisplay an image on the screen or an off-screen pixmap.
+ *	This function is called by widgets that contain images in order to
+ *	redisplay an image on the screen or an off-screen pixmap.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The image's manager is notified, and it redraws the desired
- *	portion of the image before returning.
+ *	The image's manager is notified, and it redraws the desired portion of
+ *	the image before returning.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -812,13 +760,12 @@ Tk_RedrawImage(image, imageX, imageY, width, height, drawable,
     int imageX, imageY;		/* Upper-left pixel of region in image that
 				 * needs to be redisplayed. */
     int width, height;		/* Dimensions of region to redraw. */
-    Drawable drawable;		/* Drawable in which to display image
-				 * (window or pixmap).  If this is a pixmap,
-				 * it must have the same depth as the window
-				 * used in the Tk_GetImage call for the
-				 * image. */
-    int drawableX, drawableY;	/* Coordinates in drawable that correspond
-				 * to imageX and imageY. */
+    Drawable drawable;		/* Drawable in which to display image (window
+				 * or pixmap). If this is a pixmap, it must
+				 * have the same depth as the window used in
+				 * the Tk_GetImage call for the image. */
+    int drawableX, drawableY;	/* Coordinates in drawable that correspond to
+				 * imageX and imageY. */
 {
     Image *imagePtr = (Image *) image;
 
@@ -860,11 +807,11 @@ Tk_RedrawImage(image, imageX, imageY, width, height, drawable,
  *
  * Tk_SizeOfImage --
  *
- *	This procedure returns the current dimensions of an image.
+ *	This function returns the current dimensions of an image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The width and height of the image are returned in *widthPtr
- *	and *heightPtr.
+ *	The width and height of the image are returned in *widthPtr and
+ *	*heightPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -889,16 +836,14 @@ Tk_SizeOfImage(image, widthPtr, heightPtr)
  *
  * Tk_DeleteImage --
  *
- *	Given the name of an image, this procedure destroys the
- *	image.
+ *	Given the name of an image, this function destroys the image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The image is destroyed; existing instances will display as
- *	blank areas.  If no such image exists then the procedure does
- *	nothing.
+ *	The image is destroyed; existing instances will display as blank
+ *	areas. If no such image exists then the function does nothing.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -928,15 +873,15 @@ Tk_DeleteImage(interp, name)
  *
  * DeleteImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is responsible for deleting an image.
+ *	This function is responsible for deleting an image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The connection is dropped between instances of this image and
- *	an image master.  Image instances will redisplay themselves
- *	as empty areas, but existing instances will not be deleted.
+ *	The connection is dropped between instances of this image and an image
+ *	master. Image instances will redisplay themselves as empty areas, but
+ *	existing instances will not be deleted.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -983,9 +928,9 @@ DeleteImage(masterPtr)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Image will get freed, though not until it is no longer
- *	Tcl_Preserve()d by anything.  May be called multiple times on
- *	the same image without ill effects.
+ *	Image will get freed, though not until it is no longer Tcl_Preserve()d
+ *	by anything. May be called multiple times on the same image without
+ *	ill effects.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -993,8 +938,8 @@ DeleteImage(masterPtr)
 static void
 EventuallyDeleteImage(masterPtr, forgetImageHashNow)
     ImageMaster *masterPtr;	/* Pointer to main data structure for image. */
-    int forgetImageHashNow;	/* Flag to say whether the hash table is
-				 * about to vanish. */
+    int forgetImageHashNow;	/* Flag to say whether the hash table is about
+				 * to vanish. */
 {
     if (forgetImageHashNow) {
 	masterPtr->hPtr = NULL;
@@ -1011,10 +956,9 @@ EventuallyDeleteImage(masterPtr, forgetImageHashNow)
  *
  * TkDeleteAllImages --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an application is deleted.  It
- *	calls back all of the managers for all images so that they
- *	can cleanup, then it deletes all of Tk's internal information
- *	about images.
+ *	This function is called when an application is deleted. It calls back
+ *	all of the managers for all images so that they can cleanup, then it
+ *	deletes all of Tk's internal information about images.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1045,15 +989,14 @@ TkDeleteAllImages(mainPtr)
  *
  * Tk_GetImageMasterData --
  *
- *	Given the name of an image, this procedure returns the type
- *	of the image and the clientData associated with its master.
+ *	Given the name of an image, this function returns the type of the
+ *	image and the clientData associated with its master.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If there is no image by the given name, then NULL is returned
- *	and a NULL value is stored at *typePtrPtr.  Otherwise the return
- *	value is the clientData returned by the createProc when the
- *	image was created and a pointer to the type structure for the
- *	image is stored at *typePtrPtr.
+ *	If there is no image by the given name, then NULL is returned and a
+ *	NULL value is stored at *typePtrPtr. Otherwise the return value is the
+ *	clientData returned by the createProc when the image was created and a
+ *	pointer to the type structure for the image is stored at *typePtrPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1066,8 +1009,8 @@ Tk_GetImageMasterData(interp, name, typePtrPtr)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter in which the image was
 				 * created. */
     CONST char *name;		/* Name of image. */
-    Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr;	/* Points to location to fill in with
-				 * pointer to type information for image. */
+    Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr;	/* Points to location to fill in with pointer
+				 * to type information for image. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     TkWindow *winPtr;
@@ -1093,21 +1036,22 @@ Tk_GetImageMasterData(interp, name, typePtrPtr)
  *
  * Tk_SetTSOrigin --
  *
- *	Set the pattern origin of the tile to a common point (i.e. the
- *	origin (0,0) of the top level window) so that tiles from two
- *	different widgets will match up.  This done by setting the
- *	GCTileStipOrigin field is set to the translated origin of the
- *	toplevel window in the hierarchy.
+ *	Set the pattern origin of the tile to a common point (i.e. the origin
+ *	(0,0) of the top level window) so that tiles from two different
+ *	widgets will match up. This done by setting the GCTileStipOrigin field
+ *	is set to the translated origin of the toplevel window in the
+ *	hierarchy.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side Effects:
- *	The GCTileStipOrigin is reset in the GC.  This will cause the
- *	tile origin to change when the GC is used for drawing.
+ *	The GCTileStipOrigin is reset in the GC. This will cause the tile
+ *	origin to change when the GC is used for drawing.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 /*ARGSUSED*/
 void
 Tk_SetTSOrigin(tkwin, gc, x, y)
@@ -1122,4 +1066,11 @@ Tk_SetTSOrigin(tkwin, gc, x, y)
     }
     XSetTSOrigin(Tk_Display(tkwin), gc, x, y);
 }
-
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkImgGIF.c b/generic/tkImgGIF.c
index 69aa02f..1c58769 100644
--- a/generic/tkImgGIF.c
+++ b/generic/tkImgGIF.c
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
  *	At present, there only is a file write function. GIF images may be
  *	read using the -data option of the photo image. The data may be given
  *	as a binary string in a Tcl_Obj or by representing the data as BASE64
- *	encoded ascii.  Derived from the giftoppm code found in the pbmplus
+ *	encoded ascii. Derived from the giftoppm code found in the pbmplus
  *	package and tkImgFmtPPM.c in the tk4.0b2 distribution.
  *
  * Copyright (c) Reed Wade (wade@cs.utk.edu), University of Tennessee
@@ -25,22 +25,22 @@
  * |   and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby	|
  * |   granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all	|
  * |   copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission	|
- * |   notice appear in supporting documentation.  This software is	|
+ * |   notice appear in supporting documentation. This software is	|
  * |   provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.		|
  * +--------------------------------------------------------------------+
  *
  * This file also contains code from miGIF. See lower down in file for the
  * applicable copyright notice for that portion.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkImgGIF.c,v 1.28 2005/06/19 21:54:16 dkf Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkImgGIF.c,v 1.29 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 /*
- * GIF's are represented as data in either binary or base64 format.  base64
- * strings consist of 4 6-bit characters -> 3 8 bit bytes.  A-Z, a-z, 0-9, +
- * and / represent the 64 values (in order).  '=' is a trailing padding char
- * when the un-encoded data is not a multiple of 3 bytes.  We'll ignore white
- * space when encountered.  Any other invalid character is treated as an EOF
+ * GIF's are represented as data in either binary or base64 format. base64
+ * strings consist of 4 6-bit characters -> 3 8 bit bytes. A-Z, a-z, 0-9, +
+ * and / represent the 64 values (in order). '=' is a trailing padding char
+ * when the un-encoded data is not a multiple of 3 bytes. We'll ignore white
+ * space when encountered. Any other invalid character is treated as an EOF
  */
 
 #define GIF_SPECIAL	(256)
@@ -50,8 +50,8 @@
 #define GIF_DONE	(GIF_SPECIAL+4)
 
 /*
- * structure to "mimic" FILE for Mread, so we can look like fread.  The
- * decoder state keeps track of which byte we are about to read, or EOF.
+ * structure to "mimic" FILE for Mread, so we can look like fread. The decoder
+ * state keeps track of which byte we are about to read, or EOF.
  */
 
 typedef struct mFile {
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ static CONST char GIF89a[] = {			/* ASCII GIF89a */
 #define INLINE_DATA_BASE64	((const char *) 0x02)
 
 /*
- *			HACK ALERT!!  HACK ALERT!!  HACK ALERT!!
+ *		HACK ALERT!!  HACK ALERT!!  HACK ALERT!!
  * This code is hard-wired for reading from files. In order to read from a
  * data stream, we'll trick fread so we can reuse the same code. 0==from file;
  * 1==from base64 encoded data; 2==from binary data
@@ -110,25 +110,23 @@ typedef struct {
  * The format record for the GIF file format:
  */
 
-static int	FileMatchGIF _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan, CONST char *fileName,
-		    Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
-		    Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static int	FileReadGIF _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel chan,
-		    CONST char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format,
-		    Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY,
-		    int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY));
-static int	StringMatchGIF _ANSI_ARGS_(( Tcl_Obj *dataObj, Tcl_Obj *format,
-		    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static int	StringReadGIF _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *dataObj,
-		    Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle,
-		    int destX, int destY, int width, int height,
-		    int srcX, int srcY));
-static int 	FileWriteGIF _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-		    CONST char *filename, Tcl_Obj *format,
-		    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr));
-static int	CommonWriteGIF _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-		    Tcl_Channel handle, Tcl_Obj *format,
-		    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr));
+static int		FileMatchGIF(Tcl_Channel chan, CONST char *fileName,
+			    Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static int		FileReadGIF(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel chan,
+			    CONST char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format,
+			    Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY,
+			    int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY);
+static int		StringMatchGIF(Tcl_Obj *dataObj, Tcl_Obj *format,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static int		StringReadGIF(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *dataObj,
+			    Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle,
+			    int destX, int destY, int width, int height,
+			    int srcX, int srcY);
+static int		FileWriteGIF(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *filename,
+			    Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr);
+static int		CommonWriteGIF(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel handle,
+			    Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr);
 
 Tk_PhotoImageFormat tkImgFmtGIF = {
     "gif",		/* name */
@@ -152,47 +150,47 @@ Tk_PhotoImageFormat tkImgFmtGIF = {
 #define LM_to_uint(a,b)		(((b)<<8)|(a))
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for local procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for local functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static int	DoExtension _ANSI_ARGS_((GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
-		    Tcl_Channel chan, int label, unsigned char *buffer,
-		    int *transparent));
-static int	GetCode _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan, int code_size, int flag,
-		    GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr));
-static int	GetDataBlock _ANSI_ARGS_((GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
-		    Tcl_Channel chan, unsigned char *buf));
-static int	ReadColorMap _ANSI_ARGS_((GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
-		    Tcl_Channel chan, int number,
-		    unsigned char buffer[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4]));
-static int	ReadGIFHeader _ANSI_ARGS_((GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
-		    Tcl_Channel chan, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
-static int	ReadImage _ANSI_ARGS_((GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
-		    Tcl_Interp *interp, char *imagePtr, Tcl_Channel chan,
-		    int len, int rows, unsigned char cmap[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4],
-		    int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY, int interlace,
-		    int transparent));
+static int		DoExtension(GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
+			    Tcl_Channel chan, int label, unsigned char *buffer,
+			    int *transparent);
+static int		GetCode(Tcl_Channel chan, int code_size, int flag,
+			    GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr);
+static int		GetDataBlock(GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
+			    Tcl_Channel chan, unsigned char *buf);
+static int		ReadColorMap(GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
+			    Tcl_Channel chan, int number,
+			    unsigned char buffer[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4]);
+static int		ReadGIFHeader(GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
+			    Tcl_Channel chan, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+static int		ReadImage(GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, char *imagePtr,
+			    Tcl_Channel chan, int len, int rows,
+			    unsigned char cmap[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][4],
+			    int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY,
+			    int interlace, int transparent);
 
 /*
  * these are for the BASE64 image reader code only
  */
 
-static int	Fread _ANSI_ARGS_((GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr,
-		    unsigned char *dst, size_t size, size_t count,
-		    Tcl_Channel chan));
-static int	Mread _ANSI_ARGS_((unsigned char *dst, size_t size,
-		    size_t count, MFile *handle));
-static int	Mgetc _ANSI_ARGS_((MFile *handle));
-static int	char64 _ANSI_ARGS_((int c));
-static void	mInit _ANSI_ARGS_((unsigned char *string, MFile *handle,
-		    int length));
+static int		Fread(GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr, unsigned char *dst,
+			    size_t size, size_t count, Tcl_Channel chan);
+static int		Mread(unsigned char *dst, size_t size, size_t count,
+			    MFile *handle);
+static int		Mgetc(MFile *handle);
+static int		char64(int c);
+static void		mInit(unsigned char *string, MFile *handle,
+			    int length);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * FileMatchGIF --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the photo image type to see if a file
+ *	This function is invoked by the photo image type to see if a file
  *	contains image data in GIF format.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -225,12 +223,12 @@ FileMatchGIF(chan, fileName, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
  *
  * FileReadGIF --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the photo image type to read GIF format
+ *	This function is called by the photo image type to read GIF format
  *	data from a file and write it into a given photo image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL completion code.  If TCL_ERROR is returned then an
- *	error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard TCL completion code. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The access position in file f is changed, and new data is added to the
@@ -298,7 +296,7 @@ FileReadGIF(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
 	}
     }
     if (!ReadGIFHeader(gifConfPtr, chan, &fileWidth, &fileHeight)) {
-    	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "couldn't read GIF header from file \"",
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "couldn't read GIF header from file \"",
 		fileName, "\"", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
@@ -393,6 +391,7 @@ FileReadGIF(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
 	    /*
 	     * Not a valid start character; ignore it.
 	     */
+
 	    continue;
 	}
 
@@ -412,6 +411,7 @@ FileReadGIF(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
 	    /*
 	     * This is not the image we want to read: skip it.
 	     */
+
 	    if (BitSet(buf[8], LOCALCOLORMAP)) {
 		if (!ReadColorMap(gifConfPtr, chan, bitPixel, colorMap)) {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
@@ -423,13 +423,14 @@ FileReadGIF(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
 	    /*
 	     * If we've not yet allocated a trash buffer, do so now.
 	     */
+
 	    if (trashBuffer == NULL) {
 		nBytes = fileWidth * fileHeight * 3;
 		trashBuffer = (unsigned char *) ckalloc((unsigned int) nBytes);
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Slurp!  Process the data for this image and stuff it in a trash
+	     * Slurp! Process the data for this image and stuff it in a trash
 	     * buffer.
 	     *
 	     * Yes, it might be more efficient here to *not* store the data
@@ -455,7 +456,7 @@ FileReadGIF(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
 
 	if (BitSet(buf[8], LOCALCOLORMAP)) {
 	    if (!ReadColorMap(gifConfPtr, chan, bitPixel, colorMap)) {
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error reading color map", 
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error reading color map",
 			    (char *) NULL);
 		    goto error;
 	    }
@@ -512,6 +513,7 @@ FileReadGIF(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
     /*
      * If a trash buffer has been allocated, free it now.
      */
+
     if (trashBuffer != NULL) {
 	ckfree((char *)trashBuffer);
     }
@@ -525,6 +527,7 @@ FileReadGIF(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
     /*
      * If a trash buffer has been allocated, free it now.
      */
+
     if (trashBuffer != NULL) {
 	ckfree((char *)trashBuffer);
     }
@@ -539,7 +542,7 @@ FileReadGIF(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
  *
  * StringMatchGIF --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the photo image type to see if an object
+ *	This function is invoked by the photo image type to see if an object
  *	contains image data in GIF format.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -569,6 +572,7 @@ StringMatchGIF(dataObj, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
     /*
      * Header is a minimum of 10 bytes.
      */
+
     if (length < 10) {
 	return 0;
     }
@@ -577,15 +581,16 @@ StringMatchGIF(dataObj, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
      * Check whether the data is Base64 encoded.
      */
 
-    if ((strncmp(GIF87a, (char *) data, 6) != 0) && 
+    if ((strncmp(GIF87a, (char *) data, 6) != 0) &&
 	    (strncmp(GIF89a, (char *) data, 6) != 0)) {
 	/*
 	 * Try interpreting the data as Base64 encoded
 	 */
+
 	mInit((unsigned char *) data, &handle, length);
 	got = Mread(header, 10, 1, &handle);
-	if (got != 10
-		|| ((strncmp(GIF87a, (char *) header, 6) != 0)
+	if (got != 10 ||
+		((strncmp(GIF87a, (char *) header, 6) != 0)
 		&& (strncmp(GIF89a, (char *) header, 6) != 0))) {
 	    return 0;
 	}
@@ -602,16 +607,16 @@ StringMatchGIF(dataObj, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
  *
  * StringReadGIF --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the photo image type to read GIF format
+ *	This function is called by the photo image type to read GIF format
  *	data from an object, optionally base64 encoded, and give it to the
  *	photo image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL completion code.  If TCL_ERROR is returned then an
- *	error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard TCL completion code. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	New data is added to the image given by imageHandle.  This procedure
+ *	New data is added to the image given by imageHandle. This function
  *	calls FileReadGIF by redefining the operation of fprintf temporarily.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -655,12 +660,12 @@ StringReadGIF(interp, dataObj, format, imageHandle,
  *
  * ReadGIFHeader --
  *
- *	This procedure reads the GIF header from the beginning of a GIF file
+ *	This function reads the GIF header from the beginning of a GIF file
  *	and returns the dimensions of the image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is 1 if file "f" appears to start with a valid GIF
- *	header, 0 otherwise.  If the header is valid, then *widthPtr and
+ *	header, 0 otherwise. If the header is valid, then *widthPtr and
  *	*heightPtr are modified to hold the dimensions of the image.
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -845,6 +850,7 @@ ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
     /*
      * Initialize the decoder
      */
+
     if (Fread(gifConfPtr, &initialCodeSize, 1, 1, chan) <= 0) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error reading GIF image: ",
 		Tcl_PosixError(interp), (char *) NULL);
@@ -868,13 +874,14 @@ ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
      * code size	size of the next code to retrieve
      * max code		next available table position
      */
+
     clearCode = 1 << (int) initialCodeSize;
     endCode = clearCode + 1;
     codeSize = (int) initialCodeSize + 1;
     maxCode = clearCode + 2;
     oldCode = -1;
     firstCode = -1;
-    
+
     memset((void *)prefix, 0, (1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS) * sizeof(short));
     memset((void *)append, 0, (1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS) * sizeof(char));
     for (i = 0; i < clearCode; i++) {
@@ -887,13 +894,15 @@ ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
     /*
      * Read until we finish the image
      */
+
     for (i = 0, ypos = 0; i < rows; i++) {
 	for (xpos = 0; xpos < len; ) {
 
 	    if (top == stack) {
 		/*
-		 * Bummer -- our stack is empty.  Now we have to work!
+		 * Bummer - our stack is empty. Now we have to work!
 		 */
+
 		code = GetCode(chan, codeSize, 0, gifConfPtr);
 		if (code < 0) {
 		    return TCL_OK;
@@ -902,12 +911,13 @@ ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
 		if (code > maxCode || code == endCode) {
 		    /*
 		     * If we're doing things right, we should never receive a
-		     * code that is greater than our current maximum code.  If
+		     * code that is greater than our current maximum code. If
 		     * we do, bail, because our decoder does not yet have that
 		     * code set up.
 		     *
 		     * If the code is the magic endCode value, quit.
 		     */
+
 		    return TCL_OK;
 		}
 
@@ -915,12 +925,13 @@ ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
 		    /*
 		     * Reset the decoder.
 		     */
+
 		    codeSize = initialCodeSize + 1;
 		    maxCode = clearCode + 2;
 		    oldCode = -1;
 		    continue;
 		}
-		
+
 		if (oldCode == -1) {
 		    /*
 		     * Last pass reset the decoder, so the first code we see
@@ -930,12 +941,13 @@ ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
 		     * clearCode test above, because at that point we have not
 		     * yet read the next code.
 		     */
+
 		    *top++ = append[code];
 		    oldCode = code;
 		    firstCode = code;
 		    continue;
 		}
-		
+
 		inCode = code;
 
 		if (code == maxCode) {
@@ -944,6 +956,7 @@ ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
 		     * code. If the code we see is equal to maxCode, then we
 		     * are about to add a new string to the table. ???
 		     */
+
 		    *top++ = firstCode;
 		    code = oldCode;
 		}
@@ -953,6 +966,7 @@ ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
 		     * Populate the stack by tracing the string in the string
 		     * table from its tail to its head
 		     */
+
 		    *top++ = append[code];
 		    code = prefix[code];
 		}
@@ -962,6 +976,7 @@ ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
 		 * If there's no more room in our string table, quit.
 		 * Otherwise, add a new string to the table
 		 */
+
 		if (maxCode >= (1 << MAX_LWZ_BITS)) {
 		    return TCL_OK;
 		}
@@ -969,11 +984,13 @@ ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
 		/*
 		 * Push the head of the string onto the stack.
 		 */
+
 		*top++ = firstCode;
 
 		/*
 		 * Add a new string to the string table
 		 */
+
 		prefix[maxCode] = oldCode;
 		append[maxCode] = firstCode;
 		maxCode++;
@@ -1001,7 +1018,7 @@ ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
 		return TCL_OK;
 	    }
 
-	    /* 
+	    /*
 	     * If pixelPtr is null, we're skipping this image (presumably
 	     * there are more in the file and we will be called to read one of
 	     * them later)
@@ -1018,8 +1035,9 @@ ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If interlacing, the next ypos is not just +1
+	 * If interlacing, the next ypos is not just +1.
 	 */
+
 	if (interlace) {
 	    ypos += interlaceStep[pass];
 	    while (ypos >= height) {
@@ -1042,7 +1060,7 @@ ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
  *
  * GetCode --
  *
- *	Extract the next compression code from the file.  In GIF's, the
+ *	Extract the next compression code from the file. In GIF's, the
  *	compression codes are between 3 and 12 bits long and are then packed
  *	into 8 bit bytes, left to right, for example:
  *		bbbaaaaa
@@ -1050,7 +1068,7 @@ ReadImage(gifConfPtr, interp, imagePtr, chan, len, rows, cmap,
  *		eeeedddd
  *		...
  *	We use a byte buffer read from the file and a sliding window to unpack
- *	the bytes.  Thanks to ImageMagick for the sliding window idea.
+ *	the bytes. Thanks to ImageMagick for the sliding window idea.
  *	args:  chan	    the channel to read from
  *	       code_size    size of the code to extract
  *	       flag	    boolean indicating whether the extractor should be
@@ -1073,11 +1091,12 @@ GetCode(chan, code_size, flag, gifConfPtr)
     GIFImageConfig *gifConfPtr;
 {
     int ret;
-    
+
     if (flag) {
 	/*
 	 * Initialize the decoder.
 	 */
+
 	gifConfPtr->reader.bitsInWindow = 0;
 	gifConfPtr->reader.bytes = 0;
 	gifConfPtr->reader.window = 0;
@@ -1090,6 +1109,7 @@ GetCode(chan, code_size, flag, gifConfPtr)
 	/*
 	 * Not enough bits in our window to cover the request.
 	 */
+
 	if (gifConfPtr->reader.done) {
 	    return -1;
 	}
@@ -1097,6 +1117,7 @@ GetCode(chan, code_size, flag, gifConfPtr)
 	    /*
 	     * Not enough bytes in our buffer to add to the window.
 	     */
+
 	    gifConfPtr->reader.bytes =
 		    GetDataBlock(gifConfPtr, chan, gifConfPtr->workingBuffer);
 	    gifConfPtr->reader.c = gifConfPtr->workingBuffer;
@@ -1105,9 +1126,11 @@ GetCode(chan, code_size, flag, gifConfPtr)
 		break;
 	    }
 	}
+
 	/*
 	 * Tack another byte onto the window, see if that's enough.
 	 */
+
 	gifConfPtr->reader.window +=
 		(*gifConfPtr->reader.c) << gifConfPtr->reader.bitsInWindow;
 	gifConfPtr->reader.c++;
@@ -1118,11 +1141,13 @@ GetCode(chan, code_size, flag, gifConfPtr)
     /*
      * The next code will always be the last code_size bits of the window.
      */
+
     ret = gifConfPtr->reader.window & ((1 << code_size) - 1);
-    
+
     /*
      * Shift data in the window to put the next code at the end.
      */
+
     gifConfPtr->reader.window >>= code_size;
     gifConfPtr->reader.bitsInWindow -= code_size;
     return ret;
@@ -1133,7 +1158,7 @@ GetCode(chan, code_size, flag, gifConfPtr)
  *
  * Minit -- --
  *
- *	This procedure initializes a base64 decoder handle
+ *	This function initializes a base64 decoder handle
  *
  * Results:
  *	None
@@ -1161,7 +1186,7 @@ mInit(string, handle, length)
  *
  * Mread --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the GIF file reader as a temporary
+ *	This function is invoked by the GIF file reader as a temporary
  *	replacement for "fread", to get GIF data out of a string (using
  *	Mgetc).
  *
@@ -1175,7 +1200,7 @@ mInit(string, handle, length)
  */
 
 static int
-Mread(dst, chunkSize, numChunks, handle)  
+Mread(dst, chunkSize, numChunks, handle)
    unsigned char *dst;	/* where to put the result */
    size_t chunkSize;	/* size of each transfer */
    size_t numChunks;	/* number of chunks */
@@ -1189,19 +1214,14 @@ Mread(dst, chunkSize, numChunks, handle)
    }
    return i;
 }
-
-/*
- * Get the next decoded character from an mmencode handle.
- * This causes at least 1 character to be "read" from the encoded string
- */
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Mgetc --
  *
- *	This procedure decodes and returns the next byte from a base64 encoded
- *	string.
+ *	This function gets the next decoded character from an mmencode handle.
+ *	This causes at least 1 character to be "read" from the encoded string.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The next byte (or GIF_DONE) is returned.
@@ -1263,9 +1283,9 @@ Mgetc(handle)
  *
  * char64 --
  *
- *	This procedure converts a base64 ascii character into its binary
- *	equivalent.  This code is a slightly modified version of the char64
- *	proc in N. Borenstein's metamail decoder.
+ *	This function converts a base64 ascii character into its binary
+ *	equivalent. This code is a slightly modified version of the char64
+ *	function in N. Borenstein's metamail decoder.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The binary value, or an error code.
@@ -1320,7 +1340,7 @@ char64(c)
  *
  * Fread --
  *
- *	This procedure calls either fread or Mread to read data from a file or
+ *	This function calls either fread or Mread to read data from a file or
  *	a base64 encoded string.
  *
  * Results: - same as POSIX fread() or Tcl Tcl_Read()
@@ -1354,6 +1374,7 @@ Fread(gifConfPtr, dst, hunk, count, chan)
     /*
      * Otherwise we've got a real file to read.
      */
+
     return Tcl_Read(chan, (char *) dst, (int) (hunk * count));
 }
 
@@ -1361,8 +1382,8 @@ Fread(gifConfPtr, dst, hunk, count, chan)
  * ChanWriteGIF - writes a image in GIF format.
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  * Author:			Lolo
- *				Engeneering Projects Area 
- *				Department of Mining 
+ *				Engeneering Projects Area
+ *				Department of Mining
  *				University of Oviedo
  * e-mail			zz11425958@zeus.etsimo.uniovi.es
  *				lolo@pcsig22.etsimo.uniovi.es
@@ -1374,12 +1395,12 @@ Fread(gifConfPtr, dst, hunk, count, chan)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  * FileWriteGIF-
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the photo image type to write GIF format
+ *	This function is called by the photo image type to write GIF format
  *	data from a photo image into a given file
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL completion code.  If TCL_ERROR is returned then an
- *	error message is left in interp->result.
+ *	A standard TCL completion code. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in interp->result.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1388,13 +1409,13 @@ Fread(gifConfPtr, dst, hunk, count, chan)
  * Types, defines and variables needed to write and compress a GIF.
  */
 
-typedef int (* ifunptr) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+typedef int (* ifunptr) (ClientData clientData);
 
-#define LSB(a)			((unsigned char) (((short)(a)) & 0x00FF))
-#define MSB(a)			((unsigned char) (((short)(a)) >> 8))
+#define LSB(a)		((unsigned char) (((short)(a)) & 0x00FF))
+#define MSB(a)		((unsigned char) (((short)(a)) >> 8))
 
-#define GIFBITS 12
-#define HSIZE  5003		/* 80% occupancy */
+#define GIFBITS		12
+#define HSIZE		5003	/* 80% occupancy */
 
 typedef struct {
     int ssize;
@@ -1414,18 +1435,18 @@ typedef struct {
  * Definition of new functions to write GIFs
  */
 
-static int	color _ANSI_ARGS_((GifWriterState *statePtr,
-		    int red, int green, int blue,
-		    unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3]));
-static void	compress _ANSI_ARGS_((int initBits, Tcl_Channel handle,
-		    ifunptr readValue, ClientData clientData));
-static int	nuevo _ANSI_ARGS_((GifWriterState *statePtr,
-		    int red, int green, int blue,
-		    unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3]));
-static void	savemap _ANSI_ARGS_((GifWriterState *statePtr,
-		    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
-		    unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3]));
-static int	ReadValue _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+static int		color(GifWriterState *statePtr,
+			    int red, int green, int blue,
+			    unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3]);
+static void		compress(int initBits, Tcl_Channel handle,
+			    ifunptr readValue, ClientData clientData);
+static int		nuevo(GifWriterState *statePtr,
+			    int red, int green, int blue,
+			    unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3]);
+static void		savemap(GifWriterState *statePtr,
+			    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
+			    unsigned char mapa[MAXCOLORMAPSIZE][3]);
+static int		ReadValue(ClientData clientData);
 
 static int
 FileWriteGIF(interp, filename, format, blockPtr)
@@ -1526,14 +1547,14 @@ CommonWriteGIF(interp, handle, format, blockPtr)
     statePtr->num = 1 << resolution;
 
     /*
-     * background color
+     * Background color
      */
 
     c = 0;
     Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
 
     /*
-     * zero for future expansion.
+     * Zero for future expansion.
      */
 
     Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
@@ -1587,12 +1608,12 @@ CommonWriteGIF(interp, handle, format, blockPtr)
     statePtr->csize = blockPtr->height;
     compress(resolution+1, handle, ReadValue, (ClientData) statePtr);
 
-    c = 0; 
+    c = 0;
     Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
     c = GIF_TERMINATOR;
     Tcl_Write(handle, (char *) &c, 1);
 
-    return TCL_OK;	
+    return TCL_OK;
 }
 
 static int
@@ -1719,7 +1740,7 @@ ReadValue(clientData)
  * including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and
  * fitness for a particular purpose, with respect to this code and
  * accompanying documentation.
- * 
+ *
  * The miGIF compression routines do not, strictly speaking, generate files
  * conforming to the GIF spec, since the image data is not LZW-compressed
  * (this is the point: in order to avoid transgression of the Unisys patent on
@@ -1782,8 +1803,8 @@ typedef struct {
 
 static int verboseSet = 0;
 static int verbose;
-#define MIGIF_VERBOSE (verboseSet?verbose:setVerbose())
-#define DEBUGMSG(printfArgs) if (MIGIF_VERBOSE) { printf printfArgs; }
+#define MIGIF_VERBOSE		(verboseSet?verbose:setVerbose())
+#define DEBUGMSG(printfArgs)	if (MIGIF_VERBOSE) { printf printfArgs; }
 
 static int
 setVerbose(void)
@@ -2142,16 +2163,18 @@ compress(initBits, handle, readValue, clientData)
     statePtr->codeEOF = statePtr->codeClear + 1;
     statePtr->runlengthBaseCode = statePtr->codeEOF + 1;
     statePtr->outputBumpInit = (1 << (initBits - 1)) - 1;
+
     /*
      * For images with a lot of runs, making outputClearInit larger will give
      * better compression.
      */
+
     statePtr->outputClearInit =
 	    (initBits <= 3) ? 9 : (statePtr->outputBumpInit-1);
 #ifdef MIGIF_DEBUGGING_ENVARS
     {
-	const char *ocienv;
-	ocienv = getenv("MIGIF_OUT_CLEAR_INIT");
+	const char *ocienv = getenv("MIGIF_OUT_CLEAR_INIT");
+
 	if (ocienv) {
 	    statePtr->outputClearInit = atoi(ocienv);
 	    DEBUGMSG(("[overriding outputClearInit to %d]\n",
@@ -2187,7 +2210,15 @@ compress(initBits, handle, readValue, clientData)
 /*
  *-----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
- * End of miGIF section  - See copyright notice at start of section.
+ * End of miGIF section - See copyright notice at start of section.
  *
  *-----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkImgPPM.c b/generic/tkImgPPM.c
index ac989db..73f4844 100644
--- a/generic/tkImgPPM.c
+++ b/generic/tkImgPPM.c
@@ -6,22 +6,22 @@
  * Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
  * Author: Paul Mackerras (paulus@cs.anu.edu.au),
  *	   Department of Computer Science,
  *	   Australian National University.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkImgPPM.c,v 1.14 2004/03/27 00:12:22 dkf Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkImgPPM.c,v 1.15 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
 #include "tkPort.h"
 
 /*
- * The maximum amount of memory to allocate for data read from the
- * file.  If we need more than this, we do it in pieces.
+ * The maximum amount of memory to allocate for data read from the file. If we
+ * need more than this, we do it in pieces.
  */
 
 #define MAX_MEMORY	10000		/* don't allocate > 10KB */
@@ -37,27 +37,23 @@
  * The format record for the PPM file format:
  */
 
-static int		FileMatchPPM _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan,
+static int		FileMatchPPM(Tcl_Channel chan, CONST char *fileName,
+			    Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static int		FileReadPPM(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel chan,
 			    CONST char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format,
-			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static int		FileReadPPM  _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Channel chan, CONST char *fileName,
+			    Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY,
+			    int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY);
+static int		FileWritePPM(Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST char *fileName,
+			    Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr);
+static int		StringWritePPM(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *format,
+			    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr);
+static int		StringMatchPPM(Tcl_Obj *dataObj, Tcl_Obj *format,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp);
+static int		StringReadPPM(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *dataObj,
 			    Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle,
 			    int destX, int destY, int width, int height,
-			    int srcX, int srcY));
-static int		FileWritePPM _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    CONST char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format,
-			    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr));
-static int		StringWritePPM _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr));
-static int		StringMatchPPM _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *dataObj,
-			    Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp));
-static int		StringReadPPM _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *dataObj, Tcl_Obj *format,
-			    Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY,
-			    int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY));
+			    int srcX, int srcY);
 
 
 Tk_PhotoImageFormat tkImgFmtPPM = {
@@ -71,28 +67,26 @@ Tk_PhotoImageFormat tkImgFmtPPM = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for local procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for local functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static int		ReadPPMFileHeader _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan,
-			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
-			    int *maxIntensityPtr));
-static int		ReadPPMStringHeader _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *dataObj,
-			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr,
-			    int *maxIntensityPtr,
-			    unsigned char **dataBufferPtr, int *dataSizePtr));
+static int		ReadPPMFileHeader(Tcl_Channel chan, int *widthPtr,
+			    int *heightPtr, int *maxIntensityPtr);
+static int		ReadPPMStringHeader(Tcl_Obj *dataObj, int *widthPtr,
+			    int *heightPtr, int *maxIntensityPtr,
+			    unsigned char **dataBufferPtr, int *dataSizePtr);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * FileMatchPPM --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the photo image type to see if
- *	a file contains image data in PPM format.
+ *	This function is invoked by the photo image type to see if a file
+ *	contains image data in PPM format.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is >0 if the first characters in file "f" look
- *	like PPM data, and 0 otherwise.
+ *	The return value is >0 if the first characters in file "f" look like
+ *	PPM data, and 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The access position in f may change.
@@ -105,9 +99,9 @@ FileMatchPPM(chan, fileName, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
     Tcl_Channel chan;		/* The image file, open for reading. */
     CONST char *fileName;	/* The name of the image file. */
     Tcl_Obj *format;		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are
-				 * returned here if the file is a valid
-				 * raw PPM file. */
+    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are returned
+				 * here if the file is a valid raw PPM
+				 * file. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* unused */
 {
     int dummy;
@@ -120,17 +114,16 @@ FileMatchPPM(chan, fileName, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
  *
  * FileReadPPM --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the photo image type to read
- *	PPM format data from a file and write it into a given
- *	photo image.
+ *	This function is called by the photo image type to read PPM format
+ *	data from a file and write it into a given photo image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL completion code.  If TCL_ERROR is returned
- *	then an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard TCL completion code. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The access position in file f is changed, and new data is
- *	added to the image given by imageHandle.
+ *	The access position in file f is changed, and new data is added to the
+ *	image given by imageHandle.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -143,12 +136,12 @@ FileReadPPM(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
     CONST char *fileName;	/* The name of the image file. */
     Tcl_Obj *format;		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
     Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle;	/* The photo image to write into. */
-    int destX, destY;		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel in
-				 * photo image to be written to. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of block of photo image to
-				 * be written to. */
-    int srcX, srcY;		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel to be used
-				 * in image being read. */
+    int destX, destY;		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel in photo
+				 * image to be written to. */
+    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of block of photo image to be
+				 * written to. */
+    int srcX, srcY;		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel to be used in
+				 * image being read. */
 {
     int fileWidth, fileHeight, maxIntensity;
     int nLines, nBytes, h, type, count;
@@ -191,8 +184,7 @@ FileReadPPM(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
         block.offset[0] = 0;
 	block.offset[1] = 0;
 	block.offset[2] = 0;
-    }
-    else {
+    } else {
         block.pixelSize = 3;
         block.offset[0] = 0;
 	block.offset[1] = 1;
@@ -261,12 +253,12 @@ FileReadPPM(interp, chan, fileName, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
  *
  * FileWritePPM --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to write image data to a file in PPM
- *	format.
+ *	This function is invoked to write image data to a file in PPM format
+ *	(although we can read PGM files, we never write them).
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL completion code.  If TCL_ERROR is returned
- *	then an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard TCL completion code. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Data is written to the file given by "fileName".
@@ -302,10 +294,10 @@ FileWritePPM(interp, fileName, format, blockPtr)
 	Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
+
     sprintf(header, "P6\n%d %d\n255\n", blockPtr->width, blockPtr->height);
     Tcl_Write(chan, header, -1);
-	
+
     pixLinePtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr + blockPtr->offset[0];
     greenOffset = blockPtr->offset[1] - blockPtr->offset[0];
     blueOffset = blockPtr->offset[2] - blockPtr->offset[0];
@@ -320,9 +312,9 @@ FileWritePPM(interp, fileName, format, blockPtr)
 	for (h = blockPtr->height; h > 0; h--) {
 	    pixelPtr = pixLinePtr;
 	    for (w = blockPtr->width; w > 0; w--) {
-		if ((Tcl_Write(chan, (char *) &pixelPtr[0], 1) == -1)
-			|| (Tcl_Write(chan, (char *) &pixelPtr[greenOffset], 1) == -1)
-			|| (Tcl_Write(chan, (char *) &pixelPtr[blueOffset], 1) == -1)) {
+		if (    Tcl_Write(chan,(char *)&pixelPtr[0], 1) == -1 ||
+			Tcl_Write(chan,(char *)&pixelPtr[greenOffset],1)==-1 ||
+			Tcl_Write(chan,(char *)&pixelPtr[blueOffset],1) ==-1) {
 		    goto writeerror;
 		}
 		pixelPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
@@ -336,7 +328,7 @@ FileWritePPM(interp, fileName, format, blockPtr)
     }
     chan = NULL;
 
- writeerror:
+  writeerror:
     Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "error writing \"", fileName, "\": ",
 	    Tcl_PosixError(interp), NULL);
     if (chan != NULL) {
@@ -350,12 +342,12 @@ FileWritePPM(interp, fileName, format, blockPtr)
  *
  * StringWritePPM --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to write image data to a string in PPM
+ *	This function is invoked to write image data to a string in PPM
  *	format.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL completion code.  If TCL_ERROR is returned
- *	then an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard TCL completion code. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -375,10 +367,12 @@ StringWritePPM(interp, format, blockPtr)
     Tcl_Obj *byteArrayObj;
 
     sprintf(header, "P6\n%d %d\n255\n", blockPtr->width, blockPtr->height);
+
     /*
      * Construct a byte array of the right size with the header and
      * get a pointer to the data part of it.
      */
+
     size = strlen(header);
     byteArrayObj = Tcl_NewByteArrayObj((unsigned char *)header, size);
     byteArray = Tcl_SetByteArrayLength(byteArrayObj,
@@ -392,6 +386,7 @@ StringWritePPM(interp, format, blockPtr)
     /*
      * Check if we can do the data move in single action.
      */
+
     if ((greenOffset == 1) && (blueOffset == 2) && (blockPtr->pixelSize == 3)
 	    && (blockPtr->pitch == (blockPtr->width * 3))) {
 	memcpy(byteArray, pixLinePtr,
@@ -413,6 +408,7 @@ StringWritePPM(interp, format, blockPtr)
     /*
      * Return the object in the interpreter result.
      */
+
     Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, byteArrayObj);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -422,12 +418,12 @@ StringWritePPM(interp, format, blockPtr)
  *
  * StringMatchPPM --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the photo image type to see if
- *	a string contains image data in PPM format.
+ *	This function is invoked by the photo image type to see if a string
+ *	contains image data in PPM format.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is >0 if the first characters in file "f" look
- *	like PPM data, and 0 otherwise.
+ *	The return value is >0 if the first characters in file "f" look like
+ *	PPM data, and 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The access position in f may change.
@@ -439,9 +435,9 @@ static int
 StringMatchPPM(dataObj, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
     Tcl_Obj *dataObj;		/* The image data. */
     Tcl_Obj *format;		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are
-				 * returned here if the file is a valid
-				 * raw PPM file. */
+    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are returned
+				 * here if the file is a valid raw PPM
+				 * file. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* unused */
 {
     int dummy;
@@ -455,13 +451,12 @@ StringMatchPPM(dataObj, format, widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)
  *
  * StringReadPPM --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the photo image type to read
- *	PPM format data from a string and write it into a given
- *	photo image.
+ *	This function is called by the photo image type to read PPM format
+ *	data from a string and write it into a given photo image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL completion code.  If TCL_ERROR is returned
- *	then an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard TCL completion code. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	New data is added to the image given by imageHandle.
@@ -476,12 +471,12 @@ StringReadPPM(interp, dataObj, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
     Tcl_Obj *dataObj;		/* The image data. */
     Tcl_Obj *format;		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
     Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle;	/* The photo image to write into. */
-    int destX, destY;		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel in
-				 * photo image to be written to. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of block of photo image to
-				 * be written to. */
-    int srcX, srcY;		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel to be used
-				 * in image being read. */
+    int destX, destY;		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel in photo
+				 * image to be written to. */
+    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of block of photo image to be
+				 * written to. */
+    int srcX, srcY;		/* Coordinates of top-left pixel to be used in
+				 * image being read. */
 {
     int fileWidth, fileHeight, maxIntensity;
     int nLines, nBytes, h, type, count, dataSize;
@@ -543,9 +538,9 @@ StringReadPPM(interp, dataObj, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
 
     if (maxIntensity == 255) {
 	/*
-	 * We have all the data in memory, so write everything in one
-	 * go.
+	 * We have all the data in memory, so write everything in one go.
 	 */
+
 	if (block.pitch*height < dataSize) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "truncated PPM data", NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -606,16 +601,15 @@ StringReadPPM(interp, dataObj, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
  *
  * ReadPPMFileHeader --
  *
- *	This procedure reads the PPM header from the beginning of a
- *	PPM file and returns information from the header.
+ *	This function reads the PPM header from the beginning of a PPM file
+ *	and returns information from the header.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is PGM if file "f" appears to start with
- *	a valid PGM header, PPM if "f" appears to start with a valid
- *      PPM header, and 0 otherwise.  If the header is valid,
- *	then *widthPtr and *heightPtr are modified to hold the
- *	dimensions of the image and *maxIntensityPtr is modified to
- *	hold the value of a "fully on" intensity value.
+ *	The return value is PGM if file "f" appears to start with a valid PGM
+ *	header, PPM if "f" appears to start with a valid PPM header, and 0
+ *	otherwise. If the header is valid, then *widthPtr and *heightPtr are
+ *	modified to hold the dimensions of the image and *maxIntensityPtr is
+ *	modified to hold the value of a "fully on" intensity value.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	The access position in f advances.
@@ -625,11 +619,11 @@ StringReadPPM(interp, dataObj, format, imageHandle, destX, destY,
 
 static int
 ReadPPMFileHeader(chan, widthPtr, heightPtr, maxIntensityPtr)
-    Tcl_Channel chan;		/* Image file to read the header from */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are
-				 * returned here. */
-    int *maxIntensityPtr;	/* The maximum intensity value for
-				 * the image is stored here. */
+    Tcl_Channel chan;		/* Image file to read the header from. */
+    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are returned
+				 * here. */
+    int *maxIntensityPtr;	/* The maximum intensity value for the image
+				 * is stored here. */
 {
 #define BUFFER_SIZE 1000
     char buffer[BUFFER_SIZE];
@@ -638,8 +632,8 @@ ReadPPMFileHeader(chan, widthPtr, heightPtr, maxIntensityPtr)
     char c;
 
     /*
-     * Read 4 space-separated fields from the file, ignoring
-     * comments (any line that starts with "#").
+     * Read 4 space-separated fields from the file, ignoring comments (any
+     * line that starts with "#").
      */
 
     if (Tcl_Read(chan, &c, 1) != 1) {
@@ -685,7 +679,8 @@ ReadPPMFileHeader(chan, widthPtr, heightPtr, maxIntensityPtr)
 	    i++;
 	}
     }
-    done:
+
+  done:
     buffer[i] = 0;
 
     /*
@@ -711,16 +706,16 @@ ReadPPMFileHeader(chan, widthPtr, heightPtr, maxIntensityPtr)
  *
  * ReadPPMStringHeader --
  *
- *	This procedure reads the PPM header from the beginning of a
- *	PPM-format string and returns information from the header.
+ *	This function reads the PPM header from the beginning of a PPM-format
+ *	string and returns information from the header.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is PGM if the string appears to start with
- *	a valid PGM header, PPM if the string appears to start with
- *      a valid PPM header, and 0 otherwise.  If the header is valid,
- *	then *widthPtr and *heightPtr are modified to hold the
- *	dimensions of the image and *maxIntensityPtr is modified to
- *	hold the value of a "fully on" intensity value.
+ *	The return value is PGM if the string appears to start with a valid
+ *	PGM header, PPM if the string appears to start with a valid PPM
+ *	header, and 0 otherwise. If the header is valid, then *widthPtr and
+ *	*heightPtr are modified to hold the dimensions of the image and
+ *	*maxIntensityPtr is modified to hold the value of a "fully on"
+ *	intensity value.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None
@@ -732,10 +727,10 @@ static int
 ReadPPMStringHeader(dataPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr, maxIntensityPtr,
 	dataBufferPtr, dataSizePtr)
     Tcl_Obj *dataPtr;		/* Object to read the header from. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are
-				 * returned here. */
-    int *maxIntensityPtr;	/* The maximum intensity value for
-				 * the image is stored here. */
+    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are returned
+				 * here. */
+    int *maxIntensityPtr;	/* The maximum intensity value for the image
+				 * is stored here. */
     unsigned char **dataBufferPtr;
     int *dataSizePtr;
 {
@@ -749,8 +744,8 @@ ReadPPMStringHeader(dataPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr, maxIntensityPtr,
     dataBuffer = Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(dataPtr, &dataSize);
 
     /*
-     * Read 4 space-separated fields from the string, ignoring
-     * comments (any line that starts with "#").
+     * Read 4 space-separated fields from the string, ignoring comments (any
+     * line that starts with "#").
      */
 
     if (dataSize-- < 1) {
@@ -800,7 +795,8 @@ ReadPPMStringHeader(dataPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr, maxIntensityPtr,
 	    i++;
 	}
     }
-    done:
+
+  done:
     buffer[i] = 0;
 
     /*
@@ -824,3 +820,11 @@ ReadPPMStringHeader(dataPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr, maxIntensityPtr,
     }
     return type;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkImgPhoto.c b/generic/tkImgPhoto.c
index 7745db1..2cfe7ff 100644
--- a/generic/tkImgPhoto.c
+++ b/generic/tkImgPhoto.c
@@ -1,23 +1,23 @@
 /*
  * tkImgPhoto.c --
  *
- *	Implements images of type "photo" for Tk.  Photo images are
- *	stored in full color (32 bits per pixel including alpha channel)
- *	and displayed using dithering if necessary.
+ *	Implements images of type "photo" for Tk. Photo images are stored in
+ *	full color (32 bits per pixel including alpha channel) and displayed
+ *	using dithering if necessary.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 2002-2003 Donal K. Fellows
  * Copyright (c) 2003 ActiveState Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
  * Author: Paul Mackerras (paulus@cs.anu.edu.au),
  *	   Department of Computer Science,
  *	   Australian National University.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkImgPhoto.c,v 1.55 2005/01/31 16:22:14 dkf Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkImgPhoto.c,v 1.56 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
@@ -32,12 +32,12 @@
  * Declaration for internal Xlib function used here:
  */
 
-extern int _XInitImageFuncPtrs _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage *image));
+extern int _XInitImageFuncPtrs(XImage *image);
 
 /*
- * A signed 8-bit integral type.  If chars are unsigned and the compiler
- * isn't an ANSI one, then we have to use short instead (which wastes
- * space) to get signed behavior.
+ * A signed 8-bit integral type. If chars are unsigned and the compiler isn't
+ * an ANSI one, then we have to use short instead (which wastes space) to get
+ * signed behavior.
  */
 
 #if defined(__STDC__) || defined(_AIX)
@@ -51,16 +51,15 @@ extern int _XInitImageFuncPtrs _ANSI_ARGS_((XImage *image));
 #endif
 
 /*
- * An unsigned 32-bit integral type, used for pixel values.
- * We use int rather than long here to accommodate those systems
- * where longs are 64 bits.
+ * An unsigned 32-bit integral type, used for pixel values. We use int rather
+ * than long here to accommodate those systems where longs are 64 bits.
  */
 
 typedef unsigned int pixel;
 
 /*
- * The maximum number of pixels to transmit to the server in a
- * single XPutImage call.
+ * The maximum number of pixels to transmit to the server in a single
+ * XPutImage call.
  */
 
 #define MAX_PIXELS 65536
@@ -68,16 +67,15 @@ typedef unsigned int pixel;
 /*
  * The set of colors required to display a photo image in a window depends on:
  *	- the visual used by the window
- *	- the palette, which specifies how many levels of each primary
- *	  color to use, and
+ *	- the palette, which specifies how many levels of each primary color to
+ *	  use, and
  *	- the gamma value for the image.
  *
- * Pixel values allocated for specific colors are valid only for the
- * colormap in which they were allocated.  Sets of pixel values
- * allocated for displaying photos are re-used in other windows if
- * possible, that is, if the display, colormap, palette and gamma
- * values match.  A hash table is used to locate these sets of pixel
- * values, using the following data structure as key:
+ * Pixel values allocated for specific colors are valid only for the colormap
+ * in which they were allocated. Sets of pixel values allocated for displaying
+ * photos are re-used in other windows if possible, that is, if the display,
+ * colormap, palette and gamma values match. A hash table is used to locate
+ * these sets of pixel values, using the following data structure as key:
  */
 
 typedef struct {
@@ -89,33 +87,33 @@ typedef struct {
 } ColorTableId;
 
 /*
- * For a particular (display, colormap, palette, gamma) combination,
- * a data structure of the following type is used to store the allocated
- * pixel values and other information:
+ * For a particular (display, colormap, palette, gamma) combination, a data
+ * structure of the following type is used to store the allocated pixel values
+ * and other information:
  */
 
 typedef struct ColorTable {
-    ColorTableId id;		/* Information used in selecting this
-				 * color table. */
+    ColorTableId id;		/* Information used in selecting this color
+				 * table. */
     int	flags;			/* See below. */
     int	refCount;		/* Number of instances using this map. */
-    int liveRefCount;		/* Number of instances which are actually
-				 * in use, using this map. */
+    int liveRefCount;		/* Number of instances which are actually in
+				 * use, using this map. */
     int	numColors;		/* Number of colors allocated for this map. */
 
     XVisualInfo	visualInfo;	/* Information about the visual for windows
 				 * using this color table. */
 
-    pixel redValues[256];	/* Maps 8-bit values of red intensity
-				 * to a pixel value or index in pixelMap. */
+    pixel redValues[256];	/* Maps 8-bit values of red intensity to a
+				 * pixel value or index in pixelMap. */
     pixel greenValues[256];	/* Ditto for green intensity */
     pixel blueValues[256];	/* Ditto for blue intensity */
     unsigned long *pixelMap;	/* Actual pixel values allocated. */
 
     unsigned char colorQuant[3][256];
 				/* Maps 8-bit intensities to quantized
-				 * intensities.  The first index is 0 for
-				 * red, 1 for green, 2 for blue. */
+				 * intensities. The first index is 0 for red,
+				 * 1 for green, 2 for blue. */
 } ColorTable;
 
 /*
@@ -124,12 +122,13 @@ typedef struct ColorTable {
  *				available.
  * COLOR_WINDOW:		1 means a full 3-D color cube has been
  *				allocated.
- * DISPOSE_PENDING:		1 means a call to DisposeColorTable has
- *				been scheduled as an idle handler, but it
- *				hasn't been invoked yet.
- * MAP_COLORS:			1 means pixel values should be mapped
- *				through pixelMap.
+ * DISPOSE_PENDING:		1 means a call to DisposeColorTable has been
+ *				scheduled as an idle handler, but it hasn't
+ *				been invoked yet.
+ * MAP_COLORS:			1 means pixel values should be mapped through
+ *				pixelMap.
  */
+
 #ifdef COLOR_WINDOW
 #undef COLOR_WINDOW
 #endif
@@ -144,14 +143,13 @@ typedef struct ColorTable {
  */
 
 typedef struct PhotoMaster {
-    Tk_ImageMaster tkMaster;	/* Tk's token for image master.  NULL means
-				 * the image is being deleted. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with the
-				 * application using this image. */
-    Tcl_Command imageCmd;	/* Token for image command (used to delete
-				 * it when the image goes away).  NULL means
-				 * the image command has already been
-				 * deleted. */
+    Tk_ImageMaster tkMaster;	/* Tk's token for image master. NULL means the
+				 * image is being deleted. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with the application
+				 * using this image. */
+    Tcl_Command imageCmd;	/* Token for image command (used to delete it
+				 * when the image goes away). NULL means the
+				 * image command has already been deleted. */
     int	flags;			/* Sundry flags, defined below. */
     int	width, height;		/* Dimensions of image. */
     int userWidth, userHeight;	/* User-declared image dimensions. */
@@ -160,26 +158,27 @@ typedef struct PhotoMaster {
     double gamma;		/* Display gamma value to correct for. */
     char *fileString;		/* Name of file to read into image. */
     Tcl_Obj *dataString;	/* Object to use as contents of image. */
-    Tcl_Obj *format;		/* User-specified format of data in image
-				 * file or string value. */
+    Tcl_Obj *format;		/* User-specified format of data in image file
+				 * or string value. */
     unsigned char *pix32;	/* Local storage for 32-bit image. */
-    int ditherX, ditherY;	/* Location of first incorrectly
-				 * dithered pixel in image. */
-    TkRegion validRegion;	/* Tk region indicating which parts of
-				 * the image have valid image data. */
+    int ditherX, ditherY;	/* Location of first incorrectly dithered
+				 * pixel in image. */
+    TkRegion validRegion;	/* Tk region indicating which parts of the
+				 * image have valid image data. */
     struct PhotoInstance *instancePtr;
-				/* First in the list of instances
-				 * associated with this master. */
+				/* First in the list of instances associated
+				 * with this master. */
 } PhotoMaster;
 
 /*
  * Bit definitions for the flags field of a PhotoMaster.
  * COLOR_IMAGE:			1 means that the image has different color
  *				components.
- * IMAGE_CHANGED:		1 means that the instances of this image
- *				need to be redithered.
- * COMPLEX_ALPHA:		1 means that the instances of this image
- *				have alpha values that aren't 0 or 255.
+ * IMAGE_CHANGED:		1 means that the instances of this image need
+ *				to be redithered.
+ * COMPLEX_ALPHA:		1 means that the instances of this image have
+ *				alpha values that aren't 0 or 255, and so need
+ *				the copy-merge-replace renderer .
  */
 
 #define COLOR_IMAGE		1
@@ -187,9 +186,8 @@ typedef struct PhotoMaster {
 #define COMPLEX_ALPHA		4
 
 /*
- * The following data structure represents all of the instances of
- * a photo image in windows on a given screen that are using the
- * same colormap.
+ * The following data structure represents all of the instances of a photo
+ * image in windows on a given screen that are using the same colormap.
  */
 
 typedef struct PhotoInstance {
@@ -198,34 +196,34 @@ typedef struct PhotoInstance {
     Colormap colormap;		/* The image may only be used in windows with
 				 * this particular colormap. */
     struct PhotoInstance *nextPtr;
-				/* Pointer to the next instance in the list
-				 * of instances associated with this master. */
+				/* Pointer to the next instance in the list of
+				 * instances associated with this master. */
     int refCount;		/* Number of instances using this structure. */
     Tk_Uid palette;		/* Palette for these particular instances. */
     double gamma;		/* Gamma value for these instances. */
-    Tk_Uid defaultPalette;	/* Default palette to use if a palette
-				 * is not specified for the master. */
+    Tk_Uid defaultPalette;	/* Default palette to use if a palette is not
+				 * specified for the master. */
     ColorTable *colorTablePtr;	/* Pointer to information about colors
-				 * allocated for image display in windows
-				 * like this one. */
+				 * allocated for image display in windows like
+				 * this one. */
     Pixmap pixels;		/* X pixmap containing dithered image. */
     int width, height;		/* Dimensions of the pixmap. */
     schar *error;		/* Error image, used in dithering. */
     XImage *imagePtr;		/* Image structure for converted pixels. */
     XVisualInfo visualInfo;	/* Information about the visual that these
 				 * windows are using. */
-    GC gc;			/* Graphics context for writing images
-				 * to the pixmap. */
+    GC gc;			/* Graphics context for writing images to the
+				 * pixmap. */
 } PhotoInstance;
 
 /*
- * The following data structure is used to return information
- * from ParseSubcommandOptions:
+ * The following data structure is used to return information from
+ * ParseSubcommandOptions:
  */
 
 struct SubcommandOptions {
-    int options;		/* Individual bits indicate which
-				 * options were specified - see below. */
+    int options;		/* Individual bits indicate which options were
+				 * specified - see below. */
     Tcl_Obj *name;		/* Name specified without an option. */
     int fromX, fromY;		/* Values specified for -from option. */
     int fromX2, fromY2;		/* Second coordinate pair for -from option. */
@@ -239,11 +237,11 @@ struct SubcommandOptions {
 };
 
 /*
- * Bit definitions for use with ParseSubcommandOptions:
- * Each bit is set in the allowedOptions parameter on a call to
- * ParseSubcommandOptions if that option is allowed for the current
- * photo image subcommand.  On return, the bit is set in the options
- * field of the SubcommandOptions structure if that option was specified.
+ * Bit definitions for use with ParseSubcommandOptions: each bit is set in the
+ * allowedOptions parameter on a call to ParseSubcommandOptions if that option
+ * is allowed for the current photo image subcommand. On return, the bit is
+ * set in the options field of the SubcommandOptions structure if that option
+ * was specified.
  *
  * OPT_BACKGROUND:		Set if -format option allowed/specified.
  * OPT_COMPOSITE:		Set if -compositingrule option allowed/spec'd.
@@ -267,8 +265,8 @@ struct SubcommandOptions {
 #define OPT_ZOOM	0x100
 
 /*
- * List of option names.  The order here must match the order of
- * declarations of the OPT_* constants above.
+ * List of option names. The order here must match the order of declarations
+ * of the OPT_* constants above.
  */
 
 static char *optionNames[] = {
@@ -285,9 +283,10 @@ static char *optionNames[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Message to generate when an attempt to resize an image fails due
- * to memory problems.
+ * Message to generate when an attempt to resize an image fails due to memory
+ * problems.
  */
+
 #define TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE \
 	"not enough free memory for image buffer"
 
@@ -295,23 +294,21 @@ static char *optionNames[] = {
  * Functions used in the type record for photo images.
  */
 
-static int		ImgPhotoCreate _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *name, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
+static int		ImgPhotoCreate(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *name,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
 			    Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageMaster master,
-			    ClientData *clientDataPtr));
-static ClientData	ImgPhotoGet _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		ImgPhotoDisplay _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    ClientData *clientDataPtr);
+static ClientData	ImgPhotoGet(Tk_Window tkwin, ClientData clientData);
+static void		ImgPhotoDisplay(ClientData clientData,
 			    Display *display, Drawable drawable,
 			    int imageX, int imageY, int width, int height,
-			    int drawableX, int drawableY));
-static void		ImgPhotoFree _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Display *display));
-static void		ImgPhotoDelete _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static int		ImgPhotoPostscript _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    int drawableX, int drawableY);
+static void		ImgPhotoFree(ClientData clientData, Display *display);
+static void		ImgPhotoDelete(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ImgPhotoPostscript(ClientData clientData,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
 			    Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, int x, int y, int width,
-			    int height, int prepass));
+			    int height, int prepass);
 
 /*
  * The type record itself for photo images:
@@ -329,11 +326,14 @@ Tk_ImageType tkPhotoImageType = {
 };
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
-    Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatList;  /* Pointer to the first in the 
-				       * list of known photo image formats.*/
-    Tk_PhotoImageFormat *oldFormatList;  /* Pointer to the first in the 
-				       * list of known photo image formats.*/
-    int initialized;	/* set to 1 if we've initialized the strucuture */
+    Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatList;
+				/* Pointer to the first in the list of known
+				 * photo image formats.*/
+    Tk_PhotoImageFormat *oldFormatList;
+				/* Pointer to the first in the list of known
+				 * photo image formats.*/
+    int initialized;		/* Set to 1 if we've initialized the
+				 * strucuture. */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
@@ -349,6 +349,7 @@ static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 /*
  * Information used for parsing configuration specifications:
  */
+
 static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
     {TK_CONFIG_STRING, "-file", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
 	 (char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(PhotoMaster, fileString), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
@@ -365,8 +366,8 @@ static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Hash table used to hash from (display, colormap, palette, gamma)
- * to ColorTable address.
+ * Hash table used to hash from (display, colormap, palette, gamma) to
+ * ColorTable address.
  */
 
 static Tcl_HashTable imgPhotoColorHash;
@@ -386,61 +387,53 @@ static int imgPhotoColorHashInitialized;
  * Forward declarations
  */
 
-static void		PhotoFormatThreadExitProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static int		ImgPhotoCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		ParseSubcommandOptions _ANSI_ARGS_((
+static void		PhotoFormatThreadExitProc(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ImgPhotoCmd(ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		ParseSubcommandOptions(
 			    struct SubcommandOptions *optPtr,
 			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int allowedOptions,
-			    int *indexPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		ImgPhotoCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static int		ImgPhotoConfigureMaster _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, PhotoMaster *masterPtr,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags));
-static void		ImgPhotoConfigureInstance _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    PhotoInstance *instancePtr));
-static int              ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded _ANSI_ARGS_((
-                            PhotoMaster *mPtr));
-static void             ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    XImage *bgImg, PhotoInstance *iPtr,
-			    int xOffset, int yOffset, int width, int height));
-static int		ImgPhotoSetSize _ANSI_ARGS_((PhotoMaster *masterPtr,
-			    int width, int height));
-static void		ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    PhotoInstance *instancePtr));
-static int		ImgStringWrite _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int *indexPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		ImgPhotoCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    PhotoMaster *masterPtr, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags);
+static void		ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(PhotoInstance *instancePtr);
+static int              ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded(PhotoMaster *mPtr);
+static void             ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(XImage *bgImg,
+			    PhotoInstance *iPtr, int xOffset, int yOffset,
+			    int width, int height);
+static int		ImgPhotoSetSize(PhotoMaster *masterPtr, int width,
+			    int height);
+static void		ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(PhotoInstance *instancePtr);
+static int		ImgStringWrite(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tcl_Obj *formatString,
-			    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr));
-static char *		ImgGetPhoto _ANSI_ARGS_((PhotoMaster *masterPtr,
+			    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr);
+static char *		ImgGetPhoto(PhotoMaster *masterPtr,
 			    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
-			    struct SubcommandOptions *optPtr));
-static int		IsValidPalette _ANSI_ARGS_((PhotoInstance *instancePtr,
-			    CONST char *palette));
-static int		CountBits _ANSI_ARGS_((pixel mask));
-static void		GetColorTable _ANSI_ARGS_((PhotoInstance *instancePtr));
-static void		FreeColorTable _ANSI_ARGS_((ColorTable *colorPtr,
-			    int force));
-static void		AllocateColors _ANSI_ARGS_((ColorTable *colorPtr));
-static void		DisposeColorTable _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		DisposeInstance _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static int		ReclaimColors _ANSI_ARGS_((ColorTableId *id,
-			    int numColors));
-static int		MatchFileFormat _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Channel chan, char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *formatString,
+			    struct SubcommandOptions *optPtr);
+static int		IsValidPalette(PhotoInstance *instancePtr,
+			    CONST char *palette);
+static int		CountBits(pixel mask);
+static void		GetColorTable(PhotoInstance *instancePtr);
+static void		FreeColorTable(ColorTable *colorPtr, int force);
+static void		AllocateColors(ColorTable *colorPtr);
+static void		DisposeColorTable(ClientData clientData);
+static void		DisposeInstance(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ReclaimColors(ColorTableId *id, int numColors);
+static int		MatchFileFormat(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel chan,
+			    char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *formatString,
 			    Tk_PhotoImageFormat **imageFormatPtr,
-			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, int *oldformat));
-static int		MatchStringFormat _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *data, Tcl_Obj *formatString,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, int *oldformat);
+static int		MatchStringFormat(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *data,
+			    Tcl_Obj *formatString,
 			    Tk_PhotoImageFormat **imageFormatPtr,
-			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, int *oldformat));
-static Tcl_ObjCmdProc *	PhotoOptionFind _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp * interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *obj));
-static void		DitherInstance _ANSI_ARGS_((PhotoInstance *instancePtr,
-			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
-static void		PhotoOptionCleanupProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp));
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, int *oldformat);
+static Tcl_ObjCmdProc *	PhotoOptionFind(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *obj);
+static void		DitherInstance(PhotoInstance *instancePtr, int x,
+			    int y, int width, int height);
+static void		PhotoOptionCleanupProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp);
 
 #undef MIN
 #define MIN(a, b)	((a) < (b)? (a): (b))
@@ -468,7 +461,7 @@ PhotoFormatThreadExitProc(clientData)
     ClientData clientData;	/* not used */
 {
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat *freePtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     while (tsdPtr->oldFormatList != NULL) {
@@ -490,30 +483,29 @@ PhotoFormatThreadExitProc(clientData)
  *
  * Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat, Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by an image file handler to register
- *	a new photo image format and the procedures that handle the
- *	new format.  The procedure is typically invoked during
- *	Tcl_AppInit.
+ *	This function is invoked by an image file handler to register a new
+ *	photo image format and the functions that handle the new format. The
+ *	function is typically invoked during Tcl_AppInit.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The new image file format is entered into a table used in the
- *	photo image "read" and "write" subcommands.
+ *	The new image file format is entered into a table used in the photo
+ *	image "read" and "write" subcommands.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 void
 Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat(formatPtr)
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr;
-				/* Structure describing the format.  All of
-				 * the fields except "nextPtr" must be filled
-				 * in by caller.  Must not have been passed
-				 * to Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat previously. */
+				/* Structure describing the format. All of the
+				 * fields except "nextPtr" must be filled in
+				 * by caller. Must not have been passed to
+				 * Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat previously. */
 {
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat *copyPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (!tsdPtr->initialized) {
@@ -531,13 +523,13 @@ Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat(formatPtr)
 void
 Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat(formatPtr)
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr;
-				/* Structure describing the format.  All of
-				 * the fields except "nextPtr" must be filled
-				 * in by caller.  Must not have been passed
-				 * to Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat previously. */
+				/* Structure describing the format. All of the
+				 * fields except "nextPtr" must be filled in
+				 * by caller. Must not have been passed to
+				 * Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat previously. */
 {
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat *copyPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (!tsdPtr->initialized) {
@@ -562,15 +554,14 @@ Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat(formatPtr)
  *
  * ImgPhotoCreate --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the Tk image code to create
- *	a new photo image.
+ *	This function is called by the Tk image code to create a new photo
+ *	image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The data structure for a new photo image is allocated and
- *	initialized.
+ *	The data structure for a new photo image is allocated and initialized.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -584,10 +575,10 @@ ImgPhotoCreate(interp, name, objc, objv, typePtr, master, clientDataPtr)
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects for options (doesn't
 				 * include image name or type). */
     Tk_ImageType *typePtr;	/* Pointer to our type record (not used). */
-    Tk_ImageMaster master;	/* Token for image, to be used by us in
-				 * later callbacks. */
-    ClientData *clientDataPtr;	/* Store manager's token for image here;
-				 * it will be returned in later callbacks. */
+    Tk_ImageMaster master;	/* Token for image, to be used by us in later
+				 * callbacks. */
+    ClientData *clientDataPtr;	/* Store manager's token for image here; it
+				 * will be returned in later callbacks. */
 {
     PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
 
@@ -624,9 +615,9 @@ ImgPhotoCreate(interp, name, objc, objv, typePtr, master, clientDataPtr)
  *
  * ImgPhotoCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command that
- *	corresponds to a photo image.  See the user documentation
- *	for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a photo image. See the user documentation for details on what it
+ *	does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -667,11 +658,10 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     Tk_Window tkwin;
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat *imageFormat;
     int imageWidth, imageHeight;
-    int matched;
+    int matched, length;
     Tcl_Channel chan;
     Tk_PhotoHandle srcHandle;
-    size_t length;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (objc < 2) {
@@ -710,12 +700,12 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], (int *) &length);
-	if (strncmp(arg,"-data", length) == 0) {
+	arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], &length);
+	if (strncmp(arg,"-data", (unsigned) length) == 0) {
 	    if (masterPtr->dataString) {
 		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, masterPtr->dataString);
 	    }
-	} else if (strncmp(arg,"-format", length) == 0) {
+	} else if (strncmp(arg,"-format", (unsigned) length) == 0) {
 	    if (masterPtr->format) {
 		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, masterPtr->format);
 	    }
@@ -733,6 +723,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 	if (objc == 2) {
 	    Tcl_Obj *obj, *subobj;
+
 	    result = Tk_ConfigureInfo(interp, Tk_MainWindow(interp),
 		    configSpecs, (char *) masterPtr, (char *) NULL, 0);
 	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
@@ -741,14 +732,14 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    obj = Tcl_NewObj();
 	    subobj = Tcl_NewStringObj("-data {} {} {}", 14);
 	    if (masterPtr->dataString) {
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, subobj, masterPtr->dataString);
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, subobj, masterPtr->dataString);
 	    } else {
 		Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(subobj, " {}", (char *) NULL);
 	    }
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
 	    subobj = Tcl_NewStringObj("-format {} {} {}", 16);
 	    if (masterPtr->format) {
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, subobj, masterPtr->format);
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, subobj, masterPtr->format);
 	    } else {
 		Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(subobj, " {}", (char *) NULL);
 	    }
@@ -756,10 +747,11 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendList(interp, obj, Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
 	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, obj);
 	    return TCL_OK;
-	}
-	if (objc == 3) {
-	    char *arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], (int *) &length);
-	    if (!strncmp(arg, "-data", length)) {
+
+	} else if (objc == 3) {
+	    char *arg = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[2], &length);
+
+	    if (length > 1 && !strncmp(arg, "-data", (unsigned) length)) {
 		Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
 			"-data {} {} {}", (char *) NULL);
 		if (masterPtr->dataString) {
@@ -770,7 +762,8 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 			    " {}", (char *) NULL);
 		}
 		return TCL_OK;
-	    } else if (!strncmp(arg, "-format", length)) {
+	    } else if (length > 1 &&
+		    !strncmp(arg, "-format", (unsigned) length)) {
 		Tcl_AppendStringsToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
 			"-format {} {} {}", (char *) NULL);
 		if (masterPtr->format) {
@@ -898,6 +891,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	/*
 	 * photo data command - first parse and check any options given.
 	 */
+
 	Tk_ImageStringWriteProc *stringWriteProc = NULL;
 
 	index = 2;
@@ -977,30 +971,32 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Call the handler's string write procedure to write out
-	 * the image.
+	 * Call the handler's string write function to write out the image.
 	 */
 
 	data = ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, &block, &options);
 
 	if (oldformat) {
+	    typedef (int (*oldStringWriterProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp,
+		    Tcl_DString *dataPtr, char *formatString,
+		    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr));
 	    Tcl_DString buffer;
 
 	    Tcl_DStringInit(&buffer);
-	    result = ((int (*) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-		    Tcl_DString *dataPtr, char *formatString,
-		    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr))) stringWriteProc)
-		    (interp, &buffer, Tcl_GetString(options.format), &block);
+	    result = ((oldStringWriterProc) stringWriteProc) (interp, &buffer,
+		    Tcl_GetString(options.format), &block);
 	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
 		Tcl_DStringResult(interp, &buffer);
 	    } else {
 		Tcl_DStringFree(&buffer);
 	    }
 	} else {
-	    result = ((int (*) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+	    typedef (int (*newStringWriterProc) (Tcl_Interp *interp,
 		    Tcl_Obj *formatString, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr,
-		    VOID *dummy))) stringWriteProc)
-		    (interp, options.format, &block, (VOID *) NULL);
+		    VOID *dummy));
+
+	    result = ((newStringWriterProc) stringWriteProc) (interp,
+		    options.format, &block, (VOID *) NULL);
 	}
 	if (options.background) {
 	    Tk_FreeColor(options.background);
@@ -1061,7 +1057,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
-	if (MatchStringFormat(interp, options.name ? objv[2]:NULL, 
+	if (MatchStringFormat(interp, options.name ? objv[2]:NULL,
 		options.format, &imageFormat, &imageWidth,
 		&imageHeight, &oldformat) == TCL_OK) {
 	    Tcl_Obj *format, *data;
@@ -1110,11 +1106,13 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		    &listObjc, &listObjv) != TCL_OK) {
 		break;
 	    }
+
 	    if (y == 0) {
 		if (listObjc == 0) {
 		    /*
 		     * Lines must be non-empty...
 		     */
+
 		    break;
 		}
 		dataWidth = listObjc;
@@ -1126,14 +1124,15 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 			" have the same number of elements", (char *) NULL);
 		break;
 	    }
+
 	    for (x = 0; x < dataWidth; ++x) {
 		char *colorString = Tcl_GetString(listObjv[x]);
 		XColor color;
 		int tmpr, tmpg, tmpb;
 
 		/*
-		 * We do not use Tk_GetColorFromObj() because we
-		 * absolutely do not want to invoke the fallback code.
+		 * We do not use Tk_GetColorFromObj() because we absolutely do
+		 * not want to invoke the fallback code.
 		 */
 
 		if (colorString[0] == '#') {
@@ -1188,8 +1187,8 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Fill in default values for the -to option, then
-	 * copy the block in using Tk_PhotoPutBlock.
+	 * Fill in default values for the -to option, then copy the block in
+	 * using Tk_PhotoPutBlock.
 	 */
 
 	if (!(options.options & OPT_TO) || (options.toX2 < 0)) {
@@ -1241,7 +1240,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		    " safe interpreter", (char *) NULL);
             return TCL_ERROR;
         }
-        
+
 	/*
 	 * Open the image file and look for a handler for it.
 	 */
@@ -1261,7 +1260,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
             return TCL_ERROR;
         }
-    
+
 	if (MatchFileFormat(interp, chan,
 		Tcl_GetString(options.name), options.format, &imageFormat,
 		&imageWidth, &imageHeight, &oldformat) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -1304,8 +1303,8 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Call the handler's file read procedure to read the data
-	 * into the image.
+	 * Call the handler's file read function to read the data into the
+	 * image.
 	 */
 
 	format = options.format;
@@ -1329,8 +1328,8 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Call Dither if any part of the image is not correctly
-	 * dithered at present.
+	 * Call Dither if any part of the image is not correctly dithered at
+	 * present.
 	 */
 
 	x = masterPtr->ditherX;
@@ -1490,7 +1489,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		    " safe interpreter", (char *) NULL);
             return TCL_ERROR;
         }
-        
+
 	/*
 	 * photo write command - first parse and check any options given.
 	 */
@@ -1527,8 +1526,8 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Search for an appropriate image file format handler,
-	 * and give an error if none is found.
+	 * Search for an appropriate image file format handler, and give an
+	 * error if none is found.
 	 */
 
 	matched = 0;
@@ -1575,8 +1574,7 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Call the handler's file write procedure to write out
-	 * the image.
+	 * Call the handler's file write function to write out the image.
 	 */
 
 	data = ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, &block, &options);
@@ -1605,10 +1603,9 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ParseSubcommandOptions --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process one of the options
- *	which may be specified for the photo image subcommands,
- *	namely, -from, -to, -zoom, -subsample, -format, -shrink,
- *	and -compositingrule.
+ *	This function is invoked to process one of the options which may be
+ *	specified for the photo image subcommands, namely, -from, -to, -zoom,
+ *	-subsample, -format, -shrink, and -compositingrule.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -1622,14 +1619,14 @@ ImgPhotoCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 static int
 ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
     struct SubcommandOptions *optPtr;
-				/* Information about the options specified
-				 * and the values given is returned here. */
+				/* Information about the options specified and
+				 * the values given is returned here. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting errors. */
-    int allowedOptions;		/* Indicates which options are valid for
-				 * the current command. */
-    int *optIndexPtr;		/* Points to a variable containing the
-				 * current index in objv; this variable is
-				 * updated by this procedure. */
+    int allowedOptions;		/* Indicates which options are valid for the
+				 * current command. */
+    int *optIndexPtr;		/* Points to a variable containing the current
+				 * index in objv; this variable is updated by
+				 * this function. */
     int objc;			/* Number of arguments in objv[]. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments to be parsed. */
 {
@@ -1641,8 +1638,8 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
 
     for (index = *optIndexPtr; index < objc; *optIndexPtr = ++index) {
 	/*
-	 * We can have one value specified without an option;
-	 * it goes into optPtr->name.
+	 * We can have one value specified without an option; it goes into
+	 * optPtr->name.
 	 */
 
 	option = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[index], &length);
@@ -1674,8 +1671,8 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If this option is not recognized and allowed, put
-	 * an error message in the interpreter and return.
+	 * If this option is not recognized and allowed, put an error message
+	 * in the interpreter and return.
 	 */
 
 	if ((allowedOptions & bit) == 0) {
@@ -1699,9 +1696,8 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * For the -from, -to, -zoom and -subsample options,
-	 * parse the values given.  Report an error if too few
-	 * or too many values are given.
+	 * For the -from, -to, -zoom and -subsample options, parse the values
+	 * given. Report an error if too few or too many values are given.
 	 */
 
 	if (bit == OPT_BACKGROUND) {
@@ -1723,9 +1719,8 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	} else if (bit == OPT_FORMAT) {
 	    /*
-	     * The -format option takes a single string value.  Note
-	     * that parsing this is outside the scope of this
-	     * function.
+	     * The -format option takes a single string value. Note that
+	     * parsing this is outside the scope of this function.
 	     */
 
 	    if (index + 1 < objc) {
@@ -1738,8 +1733,8 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	} else if (bit == OPT_COMPOSITE) {
 	    /*
-	     * The -compositingrule option takes a single value from
-	     * a well-known set.
+	     * The -compositingrule option takes a single value from a
+	     * well-known set.
 	     */
 
 	    if (index + 1 < objc) {
@@ -1747,6 +1742,7 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
 		 * Note that these must match the TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_*
 		 * constants.
 		 */
+
 		static CONST char *compositingRules[] = {
 		    "overlay", "set",
 		    NULL
@@ -1805,62 +1801,62 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
 	    }
 
 	    /*
-	     * Check the values given and put them in the appropriate
-	     * field of the SubcommandOptions structure.
+	     * Check the values given and put them in the appropriate field of
+	     * the SubcommandOptions structure.
 	     */
 
 	    switch (bit) {
-		case OPT_FROM:
-		    if ((values[0] < 0) || (values[1] < 0) || ((numValues > 2)
-			    && ((values[2] < 0) || (values[3] < 0)))) {
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value(s) for the -from",
-				" option must be non-negative", (char *) NULL);
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    if (numValues <= 2) {
-			optPtr->fromX = values[0];
-			optPtr->fromY = values[1];
-			optPtr->fromX2 = -1;
-			optPtr->fromY2 = -1;
-		    } else {
-			optPtr->fromX = MIN(values[0], values[2]);
-			optPtr->fromY = MIN(values[1], values[3]);
-			optPtr->fromX2 = MAX(values[0], values[2]);
-			optPtr->fromY2 = MAX(values[1], values[3]);
-		    }
-		    break;
-		case OPT_SUBSAMPLE:
-		    optPtr->subsampleX = values[0];
-		    optPtr->subsampleY = values[1];
-		    break;
-		case OPT_TO:
-		    if ((values[0] < 0) || (values[1] < 0) || ((numValues > 2)
-			    && ((values[2] < 0) || (values[3] < 0)))) {
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value(s) for the -to",
-				" option must be non-negative", (char *) NULL);
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    if (numValues <= 2) {
-			optPtr->toX = values[0];
-			optPtr->toY = values[1];
-			optPtr->toX2 = -1;
-			optPtr->toY2 = -1;
-		    } else {
-			optPtr->toX = MIN(values[0], values[2]);
-			optPtr->toY = MIN(values[1], values[3]);
-			optPtr->toX2 = MAX(values[0], values[2]);
-			optPtr->toY2 = MAX(values[1], values[3]);
-		    }
-		    break;
-		case OPT_ZOOM:
-		    if ((values[0] <= 0) || (values[1] <= 0)) {
-			Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value(s) for the -zoom",
-				" option must be positive", (char *) NULL);
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    optPtr->zoomX = values[0];
-		    optPtr->zoomY = values[1];
-		    break;
+	    case OPT_FROM:
+		if ((values[0] < 0) || (values[1] < 0) || ((numValues > 2)
+			&& ((values[2] < 0) || (values[3] < 0)))) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value(s) for the -from",
+			    " option must be non-negative", (char *) NULL);
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		if (numValues <= 2) {
+		    optPtr->fromX = values[0];
+		    optPtr->fromY = values[1];
+		    optPtr->fromX2 = -1;
+		    optPtr->fromY2 = -1;
+		} else {
+		    optPtr->fromX = MIN(values[0], values[2]);
+		    optPtr->fromY = MIN(values[1], values[3]);
+		    optPtr->fromX2 = MAX(values[0], values[2]);
+		    optPtr->fromY2 = MAX(values[1], values[3]);
+		}
+		break;
+	    case OPT_SUBSAMPLE:
+		optPtr->subsampleX = values[0];
+		optPtr->subsampleY = values[1];
+		break;
+	    case OPT_TO:
+		if ((values[0] < 0) || (values[1] < 0) || ((numValues > 2)
+			&& ((values[2] < 0) || (values[3] < 0)))) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value(s) for the -to",
+			    " option must be non-negative", (char *) NULL);
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		if (numValues <= 2) {
+		    optPtr->toX = values[0];
+		    optPtr->toY = values[1];
+		    optPtr->toX2 = -1;
+		    optPtr->toY2 = -1;
+		} else {
+		    optPtr->toX = MIN(values[0], values[2]);
+		    optPtr->toY = MIN(values[1], values[3]);
+		    optPtr->toX2 = MAX(values[0], values[2]);
+		    optPtr->toY2 = MAX(values[1], values[3]);
+		}
+		break;
+	    case OPT_ZOOM:
+		if ((values[0] <= 0) || (values[1] <= 0)) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value(s) for the -zoom",
+			    " option must be positive", (char *) NULL);
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		optPtr->zoomX = values[0];
+		optPtr->zoomY = values[1];
+		break;
 	    }
 	}
 
@@ -1879,17 +1875,17 @@ ParseSubcommandOptions(optPtr, interp, allowedOptions, optIndexPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * ImgPhotoConfigureMaster --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when a photo image is created or
- *	reconfigured.  It processes configuration options and resets
- *	any instances of the image.
+ *	This function is called when a photo image is created or reconfigured.
+ *	It processes configuration options and resets any instances of the
+ *	image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If TCL_ERROR is returned then
- *	an error message is left in the masterPtr->interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If TCL_ERROR is returned then an error
+ *	message is left in the masterPtr->interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Existing instances of the image will be redisplayed to match
- *	the new configuration options.
+ *	Existing instances of the image will be redisplayed to match the new
+ *	configuration options.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1901,8 +1897,8 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 				 * overall photo image to (re)configure. */
     int objc;			/* Number of entries in objv. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Pairs of configuration options for image. */
-    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget,
-				 * such as TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY. */
+    int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget, such
+				 * as TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY. */
 {
     PhotoInstance *instancePtr;
     CONST char *oldFileString, *oldPaletteString;
@@ -1946,12 +1942,10 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Save the current values for fileString and dataString, so we
-     * can tell if the user specifies them anew.
-     * IMPORTANT: if the format changes we have to interpret
-     * "-file" and "-data" again as well!!!!!!! It might be
-     * that the format string influences how "-data" or "-file"
-     * is interpreted.
+     * Save the current values for fileString and dataString, so we can tell
+     * if the user specifies them anew. IMPORTANT: if the format changes we
+     * have to interpret "-file" and "-data" again as well! It might be that
+     * the format string influences how "-data" or "-file" is interpreted.
      */
 
     oldFileString = masterPtr->fileString;
@@ -1982,8 +1976,7 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     ckfree((char *) args);
 
     /*
-     * Regard the empty string for -file, -data or -format as the null
-     * value.
+     * Regard the empty string for -file, -data or -format as the null value.
      */
 
     if ((masterPtr->fileString != NULL) && (masterPtr->fileString[0] == 0)) {
@@ -1992,9 +1985,10 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
     if (data) {
 	/*
-	 * Force into ByteArray format, which most (all) image handlers
-	 * will use anyway.  Empty length means ignore the -data option.
+	 * Force into ByteArray format, which most (all) image handlers will
+	 * use anyway. Empty length means ignore the -data option.
 	 */
+
 	(void) Tcl_GetByteArrayFromObj(data, &length);
 	if (length) {
 	    Tcl_IncrRefCount(data);
@@ -2008,9 +2002,10 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
     if (format) {
 	/*
-	 * Stringify to ignore -format "".  It may come in as a list or
-	 * other object.
+	 * Stringify to ignore -format "". It may come in as a list or other
+	 * object.
 	 */
+
 	(void) Tcl_GetStringFromObj(format, &length);
 	if (length) {
 	    Tcl_IncrRefCount(format);
@@ -2023,8 +2018,8 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	masterPtr->format = format;
     }
     /*
-     * Set the image to the user-requested size, if any,
-     * and make sure storage is correctly allocated for this image.
+     * Set the image to the user-requested size, if any, and make sure storage
+     * is correctly allocated for this image.
      */
 
     if (ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, masterPtr->width,
@@ -2036,8 +2031,8 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Read in the image from the file or string if the user has
-     * specified the -file or -data option.
+     * Read in the image from the file or string if the user has specified the
+     * -file or -data option.
      */
 
     if ((masterPtr->fileString != NULL)
@@ -2055,7 +2050,7 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 		    (char *) NULL);
 	    goto errorExit;
         }
-        
+
 	chan = Tcl_OpenFileChannel(interp, masterPtr->fileString, "r", 0);
 	if (chan == NULL) {
 	    goto errorExit;
@@ -2084,9 +2079,8 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	    tempformat = (Tcl_Obj *) Tcl_GetString(tempformat);
 	}
 	result = (*imageFormat->fileReadProc)(interp, chan,
-		masterPtr->fileString, tempformat,
-		(Tk_PhotoHandle) masterPtr, 0, 0,
-		imageWidth, imageHeight, 0, 0);
+		masterPtr->fileString, tempformat, (Tk_PhotoHandle) masterPtr,
+		0, 0, imageWidth, imageHeight, 0, 0);
 	Tcl_Close(NULL, chan);
 	if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	    goto errorExit;
@@ -2143,9 +2137,9 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Cycle through all of the instances of this image, regenerating
-     * the information for each instance.  Then force the image to be
-     * redisplayed everywhere that it is used.
+     * Cycle through all of the instances of this image, regenerating the
+     * information for each instance. Then force the image to be redisplayed
+     * everywhere that it is used.
      */
 
     for (instancePtr = masterPtr->instancePtr; instancePtr != NULL;
@@ -2154,8 +2148,7 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Inform the generic image code that the image
-     * has (potentially) changed.
+     * Inform the generic image code that the image has (potentially) changed.
      */
 
     Tk_ImageChanged(masterPtr->tkMaster, 0, 0, masterPtr->width,
@@ -2188,17 +2181,17 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureMaster(interp, masterPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * ImgPhotoConfigureInstance --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to create displaying information for
- *	a photo image instance based on the configuration information
- *	in the master.  It is invoked both when new instances are
- *	created and when the master is reconfigured.
+ *	This function is called to create displaying information for a photo
+ *	image instance based on the configuration information in the master.
+ *	It is invoked both when new instances are created and when the master
+ *	is reconfigured.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Generates errors via Tcl_BackgroundError if there are problems
- *	in setting up the instance.
+ *	Generates errors via Tcl_BackgroundError if there are problems in
+ *	setting up the instance.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -2214,10 +2207,9 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
     XRectangle validBox;
 
     /*
-     * If the -palette configuration option has been set for the master,
-     * use the value specified for our palette, but only if it is
-     * a valid palette for our windows.  Use the gamma value specified
-     * the master.
+     * If the -palette configuration option has been set for the master, use
+     * the value specified for our palette, but only if it is a valid palette
+     * for our windows. Use the gamma value specified the master.
      */
 
     if ((masterPtr->palette && masterPtr->palette[0])
@@ -2229,9 +2221,9 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
     instancePtr->gamma = masterPtr->gamma;
 
     /*
-     * If we don't currently have a color table, or if the one we
-     * have no longer applies (e.g. because our palette or gamma
-     * has changed), get a new one.
+     * If we don't currently have a color table, or if the one we have no
+     * longer applies (e.g. because our palette or gamma has changed), get a
+     * new one.
      */
 
     colorTablePtr = instancePtr->colorTablePtr;
@@ -2250,8 +2242,8 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
 	GetColorTable(instancePtr);
 
 	/*
-	 * Create a new XImage structure for sending data to
-	 * the X server, if necessary.
+	 * Create a new XImage structure for sending data to the X server, if
+	 * necessary.
 	 */
 
 	if (instancePtr->colorTablePtr->flags & BLACK_AND_WHITE) {
@@ -2272,12 +2264,11 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
 	    instancePtr->imagePtr = imagePtr;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Determine the endianness of this machine.
-	     * We create images using the local host's endianness, rather
-	     * than the endianness of the server; otherwise we would have
-	     * to byte-swap any 16 or 32 bit values that we store in the
-	     * image in those situations where the server's endianness
-	     * is different from ours.
+	     * Determine the endianness of this machine. We create images
+	     * using the local host's endianness, rather than the endianness
+	     * of the server; otherwise we would have to byte-swap any 16 or
+	     * 32 bit values that we store in the image in those situations
+	     * where the server's endianness is different from ours.
 	     *
 	     * FIXME: use autoconf to figure this out.
 	     */
@@ -2298,11 +2289,10 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the user has specified a width and/or height for the master
-     * which is different from our current width/height, set the size
-     * to the values specified by the user.  If we have no pixmap, we
-     * do this also, since it has the side effect of allocating a
-     * pixmap for us.
+     * If the user has specified a width and/or height for the master which is
+     * different from our current width/height, set the size to the values
+     * specified by the user. If we have no pixmap, we do this also, since it
+     * has the side effect of allocating a pixmap for us.
      */
 
     if ((instancePtr->pixels == None) || (instancePtr->error == NULL)
@@ -2330,16 +2320,15 @@ ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr)
  *
  * ImgPhotoGet --
  *
- *	This procedure is called for each use of a photo image in a
- *	widget.
+ *	This function is called for each use of a photo image in a widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a token for the instance, which is passed
- *	back to us in calls to ImgPhotoDisplay and ImgPhotoFree.
+ *	The return value is a token for the instance, which is passed back to
+ *	us in calls to ImgPhotoDisplay and ImgPhotoFree.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A data structure is set up for the instance (or, an existing
- *	instance is re-used for the new one).
+ *	A data structure is set up for the instance (or, an existing instance
+ *	is re-used for the new one).
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -2362,30 +2351,30 @@ ImgPhotoGet(tkwin, masterData)
     XGCValues gcValues;
 
     /*
-     * Table of "best" choices for palette for PseudoColor displays
-     * with between 3 and 15 bits/pixel.
+     * Table of "best" choices for palette for PseudoColor displays with
+     * between 3 and 15 bits/pixel.
      */
 
     static int paletteChoice[13][3] = {
 	/*  #red, #green, #blue */
-	 {2,  2,  2,			/* 3 bits, 8 colors */},
-	 {2,  3,  2,			/* 4 bits, 12 colors */},
-	 {3,  4,  2,			/* 5 bits, 24 colors */},
-	 {4,  5,  3,			/* 6 bits, 60 colors */},
-	 {5,  6,  4,			/* 7 bits, 120 colors */},
-	 {7,  7,  4,			/* 8 bits, 198 colors */},
-	 {8, 10,  6,			/* 9 bits, 480 colors */},
-	{10, 12,  8,			/* 10 bits, 960 colors */},
-	{14, 15,  9,			/* 11 bits, 1890 colors */},
-	{16, 20, 12,			/* 12 bits, 3840 colors */},
-	{20, 24, 16,			/* 13 bits, 7680 colors */},
-	{26, 30, 20,			/* 14 bits, 15600 colors */},
-	{32, 32, 30,			/* 15 bits, 30720 colors */}
+	 {2,  2,  2,		/* 3 bits, 8 colors */},
+	 {2,  3,  2,		/* 4 bits, 12 colors */},
+	 {3,  4,  2,		/* 5 bits, 24 colors */},
+	 {4,  5,  3,		/* 6 bits, 60 colors */},
+	 {5,  6,  4,		/* 7 bits, 120 colors */},
+	 {7,  7,  4,		/* 8 bits, 198 colors */},
+	 {8, 10,  6,		/* 9 bits, 480 colors */},
+	{10, 12,  8,		/* 10 bits, 960 colors */},
+	{14, 15,  9,		/* 11 bits, 1890 colors */},
+	{16, 20, 12,		/* 12 bits, 3840 colors */},
+	{20, 24, 16,		/* 13 bits, 7680 colors */},
+	{26, 30, 20,		/* 14 bits, 15600 colors */},
+	{32, 32, 30,		/* 15 bits, 30720 colors */}
     };
 
     /*
-     * See if there is already an instance for windows using
-     * the same colormap.  If so then just re-use it.
+     * See if there is already an instance for windows using the same
+     * colormap. If so then just re-use it.
      */
 
     colormap = Tk_Colormap(tkwin);
@@ -2393,7 +2382,6 @@ ImgPhotoGet(tkwin, masterData)
 	    instancePtr = instancePtr->nextPtr) {
 	if ((colormap == instancePtr->colormap)
 		&& (Tk_Display(tkwin) == instancePtr->display)) {
-
 	    /*
 	     * Re-use this instance.
 	     */
@@ -2435,8 +2423,7 @@ ImgPhotoGet(tkwin, masterData)
     masterPtr->instancePtr = instancePtr;
 
     /*
-     * Obtain information about the visual and decide on the
-     * default palette.
+     * Obtain information about the visual and decide on the default palette.
      */
 
     visualInfo.screen = Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin);
@@ -2449,33 +2436,33 @@ ImgPhotoGet(tkwin, masterData)
     if (visInfoPtr != NULL) {
 	instancePtr->visualInfo = *visInfoPtr;
 	switch (visInfoPtr->class) {
-	    case DirectColor:
-	    case TrueColor:
-		nRed = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->red_mask);
-		nGreen = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->green_mask);
-		nBlue = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->blue_mask);
+	case DirectColor:
+	case TrueColor:
+	    nRed = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->red_mask);
+	    nGreen = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->green_mask);
+	    nBlue = 1 << CountBits(visInfoPtr->blue_mask);
+	    mono = 0;
+	    break;
+	case PseudoColor:
+	case StaticColor:
+	    if (visInfoPtr->depth > 15) {
+		nRed = 32;
+		nGreen = 32;
+		nBlue = 32;
 		mono = 0;
-		break;
-	    case PseudoColor:
-	    case StaticColor:
-		if (visInfoPtr->depth > 15) {
-		    nRed = 32;
-		    nGreen = 32;
-		    nBlue = 32;
-		    mono = 0;
-		} else if (visInfoPtr->depth >= 3) {
-		    int *ip = paletteChoice[visInfoPtr->depth - 3];
-    
-		    nRed = ip[0];
-		    nGreen = ip[1];
-		    nBlue = ip[2];
-		    mono = 0;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case GrayScale:
-	    case StaticGray:
-		nRed = 1 << visInfoPtr->depth;
-		break;
+	    } else if (visInfoPtr->depth >= 3) {
+		int *ip = paletteChoice[visInfoPtr->depth - 3];
+
+		nRed = ip[0];
+		nGreen = ip[1];
+		nBlue = ip[2];
+		mono = 0;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case GrayScale:
+	case StaticGray:
+	    nRed = 1 << visInfoPtr->depth;
+	    break;
 	}
 	XFree((char *) visInfoPtr);
 
@@ -2501,8 +2488,8 @@ ImgPhotoGet(tkwin, masterData)
 	    GCForeground|GCBackground|GCGraphicsExposures, &gcValues);
 
     /*
-     * Set configuration options and finish the initialization of the instance.
-     * This will also dither the image if necessary.
+     * Set configuration options and finish the initialization of the
+     * instance. This will also dither the image if necessary.
      */
 
     ImgPhotoConfigureInstance(instancePtr);
@@ -2524,9 +2511,9 @@ ImgPhotoGet(tkwin, masterData)
  *
  * ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an image is modified to
- *	check if any partially transparent pixels exist, which
- *	requires blending instead of straight copy.
+ *	This function is called when an image is modified to check if any
+ *	partially transparent pixels exist, which requires blending instead of
+ *	straight copy.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2551,7 +2538,7 @@ ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded(PhotoMaster *mPtr)
      */
 
     mPtr->flags &= ~COMPLEX_ALPHA;
-    c += 3; /* start at first alpha byte */
+    c += 3;			/* start at first alpha byte */
     for (; c < end; c += 4) {
 	if (*c && *c != 255) {
      	    mPtr->flags |= COMPLEX_ALPHA;
@@ -2566,8 +2553,13 @@ ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded(PhotoMaster *mPtr)
  *
  * ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an image with partially
- *	transparent pixels must be drawn over another image.
+ *	This function is called when an image with partially transparent
+ *	pixels must be drawn over another image. It blends the photo data onto
+ *	a local copy of the surface that we are drawing on, *including* the
+ *	pixels drawn by everything that should be drawn underneath the image.
+ *
+ *	Much of this code has hard-coded values in for speed because this
+ *	routine is performance critical for complex image drawing.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2580,19 +2572,25 @@ ToggleComplexAlphaIfNeeded(PhotoMaster *mPtr)
 
 /*
  * This should work on all platforms that set mask and shift data properly
- * from the visualInfo.
- * RGB is really only a 24+ bpp version whereas RGB15 is the correct version
- * and works for 15bpp+, but it slower, so it's only used for 15bpp+.
+ * from the visualInfo. RGB is really only a 24+ bpp version whereas RGB15 is
+ * the correct version and works for 15bpp+, but it slower, so it's only used
+ * for 15bpp+.
  *
  * Note that Win32 pre-defines those operations that we really need.
  */
 
 #ifndef __WIN32__
-#define GetRValue(rgb)	(UCHAR((rgb & red_mask) >> red_shift))
-#define GetGValue(rgb)	(UCHAR((rgb & green_mask) >> green_shift))
-#define GetBValue(rgb)	(UCHAR((rgb & blue_mask) >> blue_shift))
-#define RGB(r,g,b)      ((unsigned)((UCHAR(r)<<red_shift)|(UCHAR(g)<<green_shift)|(UCHAR(b)<<blue_shift)))
-#define RGB15(r,g,b)    ((unsigned)(((r*red_mask/255)&red_mask)|((g*green_mask/255)&green_mask)|((b*blue_mask/255)&blue_mask)))
+#define GetRValue(rgb)	(UCHAR(((rgb) & red_mask) >> red_shift))
+#define GetGValue(rgb)	(UCHAR(((rgb) & green_mask) >> green_shift))
+#define GetBValue(rgb)	(UCHAR(((rgb) & blue_mask) >> blue_shift))
+#define RGB(r, g, b)	((unsigned)( \
+	(UCHAR(r) << red_shift)   | \
+	(UCHAR(g) << green_shift) | \
+	(UCHAR(b) << blue_shift)  ))
+#define RGB15(r, g, b)	((unsigned)( \
+	(((r) * red_mask / 255)   & red_mask)   | \
+	(((g) * green_mask / 255) & green_mask) | \
+	(((b) * blue_mask / 255)  & blue_mask)  ))
 #endif /* !__WIN32__ */
 
 static void
@@ -2609,19 +2607,19 @@ ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
     unsigned char *masterPtr;
 
     /*
-     * This blending is an integer version of the Source-Over
-     * compositing rule (see Porter&Duff, "Compositing Digital
-     * Images", proceedings of SIGGRAPH 1984) that has been hard-coded
-     * (for speed) to work with targetting a solid surface.
+     * This blending is an integer version of the Source-Over compositing rule
+     * (see Porter&Duff, "Compositing Digital Images", proceedings of SIGGRAPH
+     * 1984) that has been hard-coded (for speed) to work with targetting a
+     * solid surface.
      */
 
 #define ALPHA_BLEND(bgPix, imgPix, alpha, unalpha) \
 	((bgPix * unalpha + imgPix * alpha) / 255)
 
     /*
-     * We have to get the mask and shift info from the visual on
-     * non-Win32 so that the macros Get*Value(), RGB() and RGB15()
-     * work correctly.  This might be cached for better performance.
+     * We have to get the mask and shift info from the visual on non-Win32 so
+     * that the macros Get*Value(), RGB() and RGB15() work correctly. This
+     * might be cached for better performance.
      */
 
 #ifndef __WIN32__
@@ -2647,9 +2645,9 @@ ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
 #endif /* !__WIN32__ */
 
     /*
-     * Only unix requires the special case for <24bpp.  It varies with
-     * 3 extra shifts and uses RGB15.  The 24+bpp version could also
-     * then be further optimized.
+     * Only unix requires the special case for <24bpp. It varies with 3 extra
+     * shifts and uses RGB15. The 24+bpp version could also then be further
+     * optimized.
      */
 
 #if !(defined(__WIN32__) || defined(MAC_OSX_TK))
@@ -2664,14 +2662,17 @@ ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
 	    for (x = 0; x < width; x++) {
 		masterPtr = alphaAr + ((line + x + xOffset) * 4);
 		alpha = masterPtr[3];
+
 		/*
 		 * Ignore pixels that are fully transparent
 		 */
+
 		if (alpha) {
 		    /*
 		     * We could perhaps be more efficient than XGetPixel for
 		     * 24 and 32 bit displays, but this seems "fast enough".
 		     */
+
 		    r = masterPtr[0];
 		    g = masterPtr[1];
 		    b = masterPtr[2];
@@ -2679,13 +2680,14 @@ ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
 			/*
 			 * Only blend pixels that have some transparency
 			 */
+
 			unsigned char ra, ga, ba;
 
 			pixel = XGetPixel(bgImg, x, y);
 			ra = GetRValue(pixel) << red_mlen;
 			ga = GetGValue(pixel) << green_mlen;
 			ba = GetBValue(pixel) << blue_mlen;
-			unalpha = 255 - alpha;
+			unalpha = 255 - alpha;	/* calculate once */
 			r = ALPHA_BLEND(ra, r, alpha, unalpha);
 			g = ALPHA_BLEND(ga, g, alpha, unalpha);
 			b = ALPHA_BLEND(ba, b, alpha, unalpha);
@@ -2703,14 +2705,17 @@ ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
 	for (x = 0; x < width; x++) {
 	    masterPtr = alphaAr + ((line + x + xOffset) * 4);
 	    alpha = masterPtr[3];
+
 	    /*
 	     * Ignore pixels that are fully transparent
 	     */
+
 	    if (alpha) {
 		/*
-		 * We could perhaps be more efficient than XGetPixel for
-		 * 24 and 32 bit displays, but this seems "fast enough".
+		 * We could perhaps be more efficient than XGetPixel for 24
+		 * and 32 bit displays, but this seems "fast enough".
 		 */
+
 		r = masterPtr[0];
 		g = masterPtr[1];
 		b = masterPtr[2];
@@ -2718,13 +2723,14 @@ ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
 		    /*
 		     * Only blend pixels that have some transparency
 		     */
+
 		    unsigned char ra, ga, ba;
 
 		    pixel = XGetPixel(bgImg, x, y);
 		    ra = GetRValue(pixel);
 		    ga = GetGValue(pixel);
 		    ba = GetBValue(pixel);
-		    unalpha = 255 - alpha;
+		    unalpha = 255 - alpha;	/* calculate once */
 		    r = ALPHA_BLEND(ra, r, alpha, unalpha);
 		    g = ALPHA_BLEND(ga, g, alpha, unalpha);
 		    b = ALPHA_BLEND(ba, b, alpha, unalpha);
@@ -2733,7 +2739,6 @@ ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
 	    }
 	}
     }
-
 #undef ALPHA_BLEND
 }
 
@@ -2742,7 +2747,7 @@ ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, iPtr, xOffset, yOffset, width, height)
  *
  * ImgPhotoDisplay --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to draw a photo image.
+ *	This function is invoked to draw a photo image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2757,21 +2762,22 @@ static void
 ImgPhotoDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
 	height, drawableX, drawableY)
     ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to PhotoInstance structure for
-				 * for instance to be displayed. */
+				 * instance to be displayed. */
     Display *display;		/* Display on which to draw image. */
     Drawable drawable;		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw image. */
-    int imageX, imageY;		/* Upper-left corner of region within image
-				 * to draw. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of region within image to draw. */
-    int drawableX, drawableY;	/* Coordinates within drawable that
-				 * correspond to imageX and imageY. */
+    int imageX, imageY;		/* Upper-left corner of region within image to
+				 * draw. */
+    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of region within image to
+				 * draw. */
+    int drawableX, drawableY;	/* Coordinates within drawable that correspond
+				 * to imageX and imageY. */
 {
     PhotoInstance *instancePtr = (PhotoInstance *) clientData;
     XVisualInfo visInfo = instancePtr->visualInfo;
 
     /*
-     * If there's no pixmap, it means that an error occurred
-     * while creating the image instance so it can't be displayed.
+     * If there's no pixmap, it means that an error occurred while creating
+     * the image instance so it can't be displayed.
      */
 
     if (instancePtr->pixels == None) {
@@ -2788,11 +2794,14 @@ ImgPhotoDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
 	 * Create an error handler to suppress the case where the input was
 	 * not properly constrained, which can cause an X error. [Bug 979239]
 	 */
+
 	handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(display, -1, -1, -1,
 		(Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+
 	/*
 	 * Pull the current background from the display to blend with
 	 */
+
 	bgImg = XGetImage(display, drawable, drawableX, drawableY,
 		(unsigned int)width, (unsigned int)height, AllPlanes, ZPixmap);
 	if (bgImg == NULL) {
@@ -2800,13 +2809,14 @@ ImgPhotoDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
 	    return;
 	}
 
-	ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, instancePtr,
-		imageX, imageY, width, height);
+	ImgPhotoBlendComplexAlpha(bgImg, instancePtr, imageX, imageY, width,
+		height);
 
 	/*
-	 * Color info is unimportant as we only do this operation for
-	 * depth >= 15.
+	 * Color info is unimportant as we only do this operation for depth >=
+	 * 15.
 	 */
+
 	TkPutImage(NULL, 0, display, drawable, instancePtr->gc,
 		bgImg, 0, 0, drawableX, drawableY,
 		(unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) height);
@@ -2814,21 +2824,22 @@ ImgPhotoDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
 	Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * masterPtr->region describes which parts of the image contain
-	 * valid data.  We set this region as the clip mask for the gc,
-	 * setting its origin appropriately, and use it when drawing the
-	 * image.
+	 * masterPtr->region describes which parts of the image contain valid
+	 * data. We set this region as the clip mask for the gc, setting its
+	 * origin appropriately, and use it when drawing the image.
 	 */
-	TkSetRegion(display, instancePtr->gc, instancePtr->masterPtr->validRegion);
+
+	TkSetRegion(display, instancePtr->gc,
+		instancePtr->masterPtr->validRegion);
 	XSetClipOrigin(display, instancePtr->gc, drawableX - imageX,
-	               drawableY - imageY);
+		drawableY - imageY);
 	XCopyArea(display, instancePtr->pixels, drawable, instancePtr->gc,
-	          imageX, imageY, (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height,
-	          drawableX, drawableY);
+		imageX, imageY, (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height,
+		drawableX, drawableY);
 	XSetClipMask(display, instancePtr->gc, None);
 	XSetClipOrigin(display, instancePtr->gc, 0, 0);
     }
-    XFlush (display);
+    XFlush(display);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -2836,10 +2847,9 @@ ImgPhotoDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
  *
  * ImgPhotoFree --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when a widget ceases to use a
- *	particular instance of an image.  We don't actually get
- *	rid of the instance until later because we may be about
- *	to get this instance again.
+ *	This function is called when a widget ceases to use a particular
+ *	instance of an image. We don't actually get rid of the instance until
+ *	later because we may be about to get this instance again.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2853,8 +2863,9 @@ ImgPhotoDisplay(clientData, display, drawable, imageX, imageY, width,
 static void
 ImgPhotoFree(clientData, display)
     ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to PhotoInstance structure for
-				 * for instance to be displayed. */
-    Display *display;		/* Display containing window that used image. */
+				 * instance to be displayed. */
+    Display *display;		/* Display containing window that used
+				 * image. */
 {
     PhotoInstance *instancePtr = (PhotoInstance *) clientData;
     ColorTable *colorPtr;
@@ -2865,17 +2876,17 @@ ImgPhotoFree(clientData, display)
     }
 
     /*
-     * There are no more uses of the image within this widget.
-     * Decrement the count of live uses of its color table, so
-     * that its colors can be reclaimed if necessary, and
-     * set up an idle call to free the instance structure.
+     * There are no more uses of the image within this widget. Decrement the
+     * count of live uses of its color table, so that its colors can be
+     * reclaimed if necessary, and set up an idle call to free the instance
+     * structure.
      */
 
     colorPtr = instancePtr->colorTablePtr;
     if (colorPtr != NULL) {
 	colorPtr->liveRefCount -= 1;
     }
-    
+
     Tcl_DoWhenIdle(DisposeInstance, (ClientData) instancePtr);
 }
 
@@ -2884,8 +2895,8 @@ ImgPhotoFree(clientData, display)
  *
  * ImgPhotoDelete --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the image code to delete the
- *	master structure for an image.
+ *	This function is called by the image code to delete the master
+ *	structure for an image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2898,8 +2909,8 @@ ImgPhotoFree(clientData, display)
 
 static void
 ImgPhotoDelete(masterData)
-    ClientData masterData;	/* Pointer to PhotoMaster structure for
-				 * image.  Must not have any more instances. */
+    ClientData masterData;	/* Pointer to PhotoMaster structure for image.
+				 * Must not have any more instances. */
 {
     PhotoMaster *masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) masterData;
     PhotoInstance *instancePtr;
@@ -2936,8 +2947,8 @@ ImgPhotoDelete(masterData)
  *
  * ImgPhotoCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when the image command for an image
- *	is deleted.  It deletes the image.
+ *	This function is invoked when the image command for an image is
+ *	deleted. It deletes the image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2966,13 +2977,13 @@ ImgPhotoCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * ImgPhotoSetSize --
  *
- *	This procedure reallocates the image storage and instance
- *	pixmaps for a photo image, as necessary, to change the
- *	image's size to `width' x `height' pixels.
+ *	This function reallocates the image storage and instance pixmaps for a
+ *	photo image, as necessary, to change the image's size to `width' x
+ *	`height' pixels.
  *
  * Results:
- *	TCL_OK if successful, TCL_ERROR if failure occurred (currently
- *	just with memory allocation.)
+ *	TCL_OK if successful, TCL_ERROR if failure occurred (currently just
+ *	with memory allocation.)
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Storage gets reallocated, for the master and all its instances.
@@ -3002,19 +3013,22 @@ ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
     pitch = width * 4;
 
     /*
-     * Test if we're going to (re)allocate the main buffer now, so
-     * that any failures will leave the photo unchanged.
+     * Test if we're going to (re)allocate the main buffer now, so that any
+     * failures will leave the photo unchanged.
      */
+
     if ((width != masterPtr->width) || (height != masterPtr->height)
 	    || (masterPtr->pix32 == NULL)) {
 	/*
 	 * Not a u-long, but should be one.
 	 */
+
 	unsigned /*long*/ newPixSize = (unsigned /*long*/) (height * pitch);
 
 	/*
 	 * Some mallocs() really hate allocating zero bytes. [Bug 619544]
 	 */
+
 	if (newPixSize == 0) {
 	    newPix32 = NULL;
 	} else {
@@ -3026,8 +3040,8 @@ ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * We have to trim the valid region if it is currently
-     * larger than the new image size.
+     * We have to trim the valid region if it is currently larger than the new
+     * image size.
      */
 
     TkClipBox(masterPtr->validRegion, &validBox);
@@ -3046,15 +3060,16 @@ ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Use the reallocated storage (allocation above) for the 32-bit
-     * image and copy over valid regions.  Note that this test is true
-     * precisely when the allocation has already been done.
+     * Use the reallocated storage (allocation above) for the 32-bit image and
+     * copy over valid regions. Note that this test is true precisely when the
+     * allocation has already been done.
      */
+
     if (newPix32 != NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * Zero the new array.  The dithering code shouldn't read the
-	 * areas outside validBox, but they might be copied to another
-	 * photo image or written to a file.
+	 * Zero the new array. The dithering code shouldn't read the areas
+	 * outside validBox, but they might be copied to another photo image
+	 * or written to a file.
 	 */
 
 	if ((masterPtr->pix32 != NULL)
@@ -3072,10 +3087,9 @@ ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
 	}
 
 	if (masterPtr->pix32 != NULL) {
-
 	    /*
-	     * Copy the common area over to the new array array and
-	     * free the old array.
+	     * Copy the common area over to the new array array and free the
+	     * old array.
 	     */
 
 	    if (width == masterPtr->width) {
@@ -3090,7 +3104,6 @@ ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
 			(size_t) (validBox.height * pitch));
 
 	    } else if ((validBox.width > 0) && (validBox.height > 0)) {
-
 		/*
 		 * Area to be copied is not contiguous - copy line by line.
 		 */
@@ -3114,8 +3127,8 @@ ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
 	masterPtr->height = height;
 
 	/*
-	 * Dithering will be correct up to the end of the last
-	 * pre-existing complete scanline.
+	 * Dithering will be correct up to the end of the last pre-existing
+	 * complete scanline.
 	 */
 
 	if ((validBox.x > 0) || (validBox.y > 0)) {
@@ -3152,9 +3165,9 @@ ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
  *
  * ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize --
  *
- * 	This procedure reallocates the instance pixmap and dithering
- *	error array for a photo instance, as necessary, to change the
- *	image's size to `width' x `height' pixels.
+ *	This function reallocates the instance pixmap and dithering error
+ *	array for a photo instance, as necessary, to change the image's size
+ *	to `width' x `height' pixels.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -3167,8 +3180,7 @@ ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, width, height)
 
 static void
 ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(instancePtr)
-    PhotoInstance *instancePtr;		/* Instance whose size is to be
-					 * changed. */
+    PhotoInstance *instancePtr;	/* Instance whose size is to be changed. */
 {
     PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
     schar *newError;
@@ -3185,7 +3197,7 @@ ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(instancePtr)
 	    || (instancePtr->pixels == None)) {
 	newPixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(instancePtr->display,
 		RootWindow(instancePtr->display,
-		    instancePtr->visualInfo.screen),
+			instancePtr->visualInfo.screen),
 		(masterPtr->width > 0) ? masterPtr->width: 1,
 		(masterPtr->height > 0) ? masterPtr->height: 1,
 		instancePtr->visualInfo.depth);
@@ -3196,11 +3208,11 @@ ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(instancePtr)
 
 	/*
 	 * The following is a gross hack needed to properly support colormaps
-	 * under Windows.  Before the pixels can be copied to the pixmap,
-	 * the relevent colormap must be associated with the drawable.
-	 * Normally we can infer this association from the window that
-	 * was used to create the pixmap.  However, in this case we're
-	 * using the root window, so we have to be more explicit.
+	 * under Windows. Before the pixels can be copied to the pixmap, the
+	 * relevent colormap must be associated with the drawable. Normally we
+	 * can infer this association from the window that was used to create
+	 * the pixmap. However, in this case we're using the root window, so
+	 * we have to be more explicit.
 	 */
 
 	TkSetPixmapColormap(newPixmap, instancePtr->colormap);
@@ -3209,6 +3221,7 @@ ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(instancePtr)
 	    /*
 	     * Copy any common pixels from the old pixmap and free it.
 	     */
+
 	    XCopyArea(instancePtr->display, instancePtr->pixels, newPixmap,
 		    instancePtr->gc, validBox.x, validBox.y,
 		    validBox.width, validBox.height, validBox.x, validBox.y);
@@ -3226,8 +3239,8 @@ ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(instancePtr)
 		    masterPtr->height * masterPtr->width * 3 * sizeof(schar));
 
 	    /*
-	     * Zero the new array so that we don't get bogus error
-	     * values propagating into areas we dither later.
+	     * Zero the new array so that we don't get bogus error values
+	     * propagating into areas we dither later.
 	     */
 
 	    if ((instancePtr->error != NULL)
@@ -3245,21 +3258,19 @@ ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(instancePtr)
 		}
 	    } else {
 		memset((VOID *) newError, 0, (size_t)
-			masterPtr->height * masterPtr->width * 3 * sizeof(schar));
+			masterPtr->height * masterPtr->width *3*sizeof(schar));
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    newError = NULL;
 	}
 
 	if (instancePtr->error != NULL) {
-
 	    /*
-	     * Copy the common area over to the new array
-	     * and free the old array.
+	     * Copy the common area over to the new array and free the old
+	     * array.
 	     */
 
 	    if (masterPtr->width == instancePtr->width) {
-
 		offset = validBox.y * masterPtr->width * 3;
 		memcpy((VOID *) (newError + offset),
 			(VOID *) (instancePtr->error + offset),
@@ -3267,11 +3278,11 @@ ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(instancePtr)
 			* masterPtr->width * 3 * sizeof(schar)));
 
 	    } else if (validBox.width > 0 && validBox.height > 0) {
+		errDestPtr = newError +
+			(validBox.y * masterPtr->width + validBox.x) * 3;
+		errSrcPtr = instancePtr->error +
+			(validBox.y * instancePtr->width + validBox.x) * 3;
 
-		errDestPtr = newError
-			+ (validBox.y * masterPtr->width + validBox.x) * 3;
-		errSrcPtr = instancePtr->error
-			+ (validBox.y * instancePtr->width + validBox.x) * 3;
 		for (h = validBox.height; h > 0; --h) {
 		    memcpy((VOID *) errDestPtr, (VOID *) errSrcPtr,
 			    validBox.width * 3 * sizeof(schar));
@@ -3294,9 +3305,8 @@ ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(instancePtr)
  *
  * IsValidPalette --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to check whether a value given for
- *	the -palette option is valid for a particular instance
- * 	of a photo image.
+ *	This function is called to check whether a value given for the
+ *	-palette option is valid for a particular instance of a photo image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A boolean value: 1 if the palette is acceptable, 0 otherwise.
@@ -3309,16 +3319,15 @@ ImgPhotoInstanceSetSize(instancePtr)
 
 static int
 IsValidPalette(instancePtr, palette)
-    PhotoInstance *instancePtr;		/* Instance to which the palette
-					 * specification is to be applied. */
-    CONST char *palette;		/* Palette specification string. */
+    PhotoInstance *instancePtr;	/* Instance to which the palette specification
+				 * is to be applied. */
+    CONST char *palette;	/* Palette specification string. */
 {
     int nRed, nGreen, nBlue, mono, numColors;
     char *endp;
 
     /*
-     * First parse the specification: it must be of the form
-     * %d or %d/%d/%d.
+     * First parse the specification: it must be of the form %d or %d/%d/%d.
      */
 
     nRed = strtol(palette, &endp, 10);
@@ -3347,32 +3356,30 @@ IsValidPalette(instancePtr, palette)
     }
 
     switch (instancePtr->visualInfo.class) {
-	case DirectColor:
-	case TrueColor:
-	    if ((nRed > (1 << CountBits(instancePtr->visualInfo.red_mask)))
-		    || (nGreen > (1
-			<< CountBits(instancePtr->visualInfo.green_mask)))
-		    || (nBlue > (1
-			<< CountBits(instancePtr->visualInfo.blue_mask)))) {
-		return 0;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case PseudoColor:
-	case StaticColor:
-	    numColors = nRed;
-	    if (!mono) {
-		numColors *= nGreen*nBlue;
-	    }
-	    if (numColors > (1 << instancePtr->visualInfo.depth)) {
-		return 0;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case GrayScale:
-	case StaticGray:
-	    if (!mono || (nRed > (1 << instancePtr->visualInfo.depth))) {
-		return 0;
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case DirectColor:
+    case TrueColor:
+	if ((nRed > (1 << CountBits(instancePtr->visualInfo.red_mask)))
+		|| (nGreen>(1<<CountBits(instancePtr->visualInfo.green_mask)))
+		|| (nBlue>(1<<CountBits(instancePtr->visualInfo.blue_mask)))) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
+	break;
+    case PseudoColor:
+    case StaticColor:
+	numColors = nRed;
+	if (!mono) {
+	    numColors *= nGreen*nBlue;
+	}
+	if (numColors > (1 << instancePtr->visualInfo.depth)) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
+	break;
+    case GrayScale:
+    case StaticGray:
+	if (!mono || (nRed > (1 << instancePtr->visualInfo.depth))) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
+	break;
     }
 
     return 1;
@@ -3383,7 +3390,7 @@ IsValidPalette(instancePtr, palette)
  *
  * CountBits --
  *
- *	This procedure counts how many bits are set to 1 in `mask'.
+ *	This function counts how many bits are set to 1 in `mask'.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The integer number of bits.
@@ -3400,8 +3407,9 @@ CountBits(mask)
 {
     int n;
 
-    for( n = 0; mask != 0; mask &= mask - 1 )
+    for (n=0 ; mask!=0 ; mask&=mask-1) {
 	n++;
+    }
     return n;
 }
 
@@ -3410,28 +3418,27 @@ CountBits(mask)
  *
  * GetColorTable --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to allocate a table of colormap
- *	information for an instance of a photo image.  Only one such
- *	table is allocated for all photo instances using the same
- *	display, colormap, palette and gamma values, so that the
- *	application need only request a set of colors from the X
- *	server once for all such photo widgets.  This procedure
- *	maintains a hash table to find previously-allocated
+ *	This function is called to allocate a table of colormap information
+ *	for an instance of a photo image. Only one such table is allocated for
+ *	all photo instances using the same display, colormap, palette and
+ *	gamma values, so that the application need only request a set of
+ *	colors from the X server once for all such photo widgets. This
+ *	function maintains a hash table to find previously-allocated
  *	ColorTables.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new ColorTable may be allocated and placed in the hash
- *	table, and have colors allocated for it.
+ *	A new ColorTable may be allocated and placed in the hash table, and
+ *	have colors allocated for it.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 GetColorTable(instancePtr)
-    PhotoInstance *instancePtr;		/* Instance needing a color table. */
+    PhotoInstance *instancePtr;	/* Instance needing a color table. */
 {
     ColorTable *colorPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *entry;
@@ -3468,13 +3475,12 @@ GetColorTable(instancePtr)
 	colorPtr = (ColorTable *) ckalloc(sizeof(ColorTable));
 
 	/*
-	 * The following line of code should not normally be needed due
-	 * to the assignment in the following line.  However, it compensates
-	 * for bugs in some compilers (HP, for example) where
-	 * sizeof(ColorTable) is 24 but the assignment only copies 20 bytes,
-	 * leaving 4 bytes uninitialized;  these cause problems when using
-	 * the id for lookups in imgPhotoColorHash, and can result in
-	 * core dumps.
+	 * The following line of code should not normally be needed due to the
+	 * assignment in the following line. However, it compensates for bugs
+	 * in some compilers (HP, for example) where sizeof(ColorTable) is 24
+	 * but the assignment only copies 20 bytes, leaving 4 bytes
+	 * uninitialized; these cause problems when using the id for lookups
+	 * in imgPhotoColorHash, and can result in core dumps.
 	 */
 
 	memset((VOID *) &colorPtr->id, 0, sizeof(ColorTableId));
@@ -3512,24 +3518,23 @@ GetColorTable(instancePtr)
  *
  * FreeColorTable --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when an instance ceases using a
- *	color table.
+ *	This function is called when an instance ceases using a color table.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If no other instances are using this color table, a when-idle
- *	handler is registered to free up the color table and the colors
- *	allocated for it.
+ *	If no other instances are using this color table, a when-idle handler
+ *	is registered to free up the color table and the colors allocated for
+ *	it.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 FreeColorTable(colorPtr, force)
-    ColorTable *colorPtr;	/* Pointer to the color table which is
-				 * no longer required by an instance. */
+    ColorTable *colorPtr;	/* Pointer to the color table which is no
+				 * longer required by an instance. */
     int force;			/* Force free to happen immediately. */
 {
     colorPtr->refCount--;
@@ -3553,24 +3558,24 @@ FreeColorTable(colorPtr, force)
  *
  * AllocateColors --
  *
- *	This procedure allocates the colors required by a color table,
- *	and sets up the fields in the color table data structure which
- *	are used in dithering.
+ *	This function allocates the colors required by a color table, and sets
+ *	up the fields in the color table data structure which are used in
+ *	dithering.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Colors are allocated from the X server.  Fields in the
- *	color table data structure are updated.
+ *	Colors are allocated from the X server. Fields in the color table data
+ *	structure are updated.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 AllocateColors(colorPtr)
-    ColorTable *colorPtr;	/* Pointer to the color table requiring
-				 * colors to be allocated. */
+    ColorTable *colorPtr;	/* Pointer to the color table requiring colors
+				 * to be allocated. */
 {
     int i, r, g, b, rMult, mono;
     int numColors, nRed, nGreen, nBlue;
@@ -3578,11 +3583,13 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
     XColor *colors;
     unsigned long *pixels;
 
-    /* 16-bit intensity value for i/n of full intensity. */
-#   define CFRAC(i, n)	((i) * 65535 / (n))
+    /*
+     * 16-bit intensity value for i/n of full intensity.
+     */
+#define CFRAC(i, n)	((i) * 65535 / (n))
 
     /* As for CFRAC, but apply exponent of g. */
-#   define CGFRAC(i, n, g)	((int)(65535 * pow((double)(i) / (n), (g))))
+#define CGFRAC(i, n, g)	((int)(65535 * pow((double)(i) / (n), (g))))
 
     /*
      * First parse the palette specification to get the required number of
@@ -3594,16 +3601,14 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
     igam = 1.0 / colorPtr->id.gamma;
 
     /*
-     * Each time around this loop, we reduce the number of colors we're
-     * trying to allocate until we succeed in allocating all of the colors
-     * we need.
+     * Each time around this loop, we reduce the number of colors we're trying
+     * to allocate until we succeed in allocating all of the colors we need.
      */
 
     for (;;) {
 	/*
-	 * If we are using 1 bit/pixel, we don't need to allocate
-	 * any colors (we just use the foreground and background
-	 * colors in the GC).
+	 * If we are using 1 bit/pixel, we don't need to allocate any colors
+	 * (we just use the foreground and background colors in the GC).
 	 */
 
 	if (mono && (nRed <= 2)) {
@@ -3612,12 +3617,12 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Calculate the RGB coordinates of the colors we want to
-	 * allocate and store them in *colors.
+	 * Calculate the RGB coordinates of the colors we want to allocate and
+	 * store them in *colors.
 	 */
 
 	if ((colorPtr->visualInfo.class == DirectColor)
-	    || (colorPtr->visualInfo.class == TrueColor)) {
+		|| (colorPtr->visualInfo.class == TrueColor)) {
 
 	    /*
 	     * Direct/True Color: allocate shades of red, green, blue
@@ -3644,8 +3649,8 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    /*
-	     * PseudoColor, StaticColor, GrayScale or StaticGray visual:
-	     * we have to allocate each color in the color cube separately.
+	     * PseudoColor, StaticColor, GrayScale or StaticGray visual: we
+	     * have to allocate each color in the color cube separately.
 	     */
 
 	    numColors = (mono) ? nRed: (nRed * nGreen * nBlue);
@@ -3697,7 +3702,6 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
 	for (i = 0; i < numColors; ++i) {
 	    if (!XAllocColor(colorPtr->id.display, colorPtr->id.colormap,
 		    &colors[i])) {
-
 		/*
 		 * Can't get all the colors we want in the default colormap;
 		 * first try freeing colors from other unused color tables.
@@ -3716,9 +3720,8 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If we didn't get all of the colors, reduce the
-	 * resolution of the color cube, free the ones we got,
-	 * and try again.
+	 * If we didn't get all of the colors, reduce the resolution of the
+	 * color cube, free the ones we got, and try again.
 	 */
 
 	if (i >= numColors) {
@@ -3737,10 +3740,10 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
 		mono = 1;
 	    } else {
 		/*
-		 * Reduce the number of shades of each primary to about
-		 * 3/4 of the previous value.  This should reduce the
-		 * total number of colors required to about half the
-		 * previous value for PseudoColor displays.
+		 * Reduce the number of shades of each primary to about 3/4 of
+		 * the previous value. This should reduce the total number of
+		 * colors required to about half the previous value for
+		 * PseudoColor displays.
 		 */
 
 		nRed = (nRed * 3 + 2) / 4;
@@ -3755,23 +3758,22 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
 	    nRed = nRed / 2;
 	}
     }
-    
+
     /*
-     * We have allocated all of the necessary colors:
-     * fill in various fields of the ColorTable record.
+     * We have allocated all of the necessary colors: fill in various fields
+     * of the ColorTable record.
      */
 
     if (!mono) {
 	colorPtr->flags |= COLOR_WINDOW;
 
 	/*
-	 * The following is a hairy hack.  We only want to index into
-	 * the pixelMap on colormap displays.  However, if the display
-	 * is on Windows, then we actually want to store the index not
-	 * the value since we will be passing the color table into the
-	 * TkPutImage call.
+	 * The following is a hairy hack. We only want to index into the
+	 * pixelMap on colormap displays. However, if the display is on
+	 * Windows, then we actually want to store the index not the value
+	 * since we will be passing the color table into the TkPutImage call.
 	 */
-	
+
 #ifndef __WIN32__
 	if ((colorPtr->visualInfo.class != DirectColor)
 		&& (colorPtr->visualInfo.class != TrueColor)) {
@@ -3786,6 +3788,7 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
     /*
      * Set up quantization tables for dithering.
      */
+
     rMult = nGreen * nBlue;
     for (i = 0; i < 256; ++i) {
 	r = (i * (nRed - 1) + 127) / 255;
@@ -3801,12 +3804,12 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
 	    b = (i * (nBlue - 1) + 127) / 255;
 	    if ((colorPtr->visualInfo.class == DirectColor)
 		    || (colorPtr->visualInfo.class == TrueColor)) {
-		colorPtr->redValues[i] = colors[r].pixel
-		    & colorPtr->visualInfo.red_mask;
-		colorPtr->greenValues[i] = colors[g].pixel
-		    & colorPtr->visualInfo.green_mask;
-		colorPtr->blueValues[i] = colors[b].pixel
-		    & colorPtr->visualInfo.blue_mask;
+		colorPtr->redValues[i] =
+			colors[r].pixel & colorPtr->visualInfo.red_mask;
+		colorPtr->greenValues[i] =
+			colors[g].pixel & colorPtr->visualInfo.green_mask;
+		colorPtr->blueValues[i] =
+			colors[b].pixel & colorPtr->visualInfo.blue_mask;
 	    } else {
 		r *= rMult;
 		g *= nBlue;
@@ -3836,14 +3839,15 @@ AllocateColors(colorPtr)
  *
  * DisposeColorTable --
  *
+ *	Release a color table and its associated resources.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The colors in the argument color table are freed, as is the
- *	color table structure itself.  The color table is removed
- *	from the hash table which is used to locate color tables.
+ *	The colors in the argument color table are freed, as is the color
+ *	table structure itself. The color table is removed from the hash table
+ *	which is used to locate color tables.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -3880,21 +3884,21 @@ DisposeColorTable(clientData)
  *
  * ReclaimColors --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to try to free up colors in the
- *	colormap used by a color table.  It looks for other color
- *	tables with the same colormap and with a zero live reference
- *	count, and frees their colors.  It only does so if there is
- *	the possibility of freeing up at least `numColors' colors.
+ *	This function is called to try to free up colors in the colormap used
+ *	by a color table. It looks for other color tables with the same
+ *	colormap and with a zero live reference count, and frees their colors.
+ *	It only does so if there is the possibility of freeing up at least
+ *	`numColors' colors.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is TRUE if any colors were freed, FALSE
- *	otherwise.
+ *	The return value is TRUE if any colors were freed, FALSE otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	ColorTables which are not currently in use may lose their
- *	color allocations.
+ *	ColorTables which are not currently in use may lose their color
+ *	allocations.
  *
- *---------------------------------------------------------------------- */
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
 
 static int
 ReclaimColors(id, numColors)
@@ -3908,8 +3912,8 @@ ReclaimColors(id, numColors)
     int nAvail;
 
     /*
-     * First scan through the color hash table to get an
-     * upper bound on how many colors we might be able to free.
+     * First scan through the color hash table to get an upper bound on how
+     * many colors we might be able to free.
      */
 
     nAvail = 0;
@@ -3917,11 +3921,10 @@ ReclaimColors(id, numColors)
     while (entry != NULL) {
 	colorPtr = (ColorTable *) Tcl_GetHashValue(entry);
 	if ((colorPtr->id.display == id->display)
-	    && (colorPtr->id.colormap == id->colormap)
-	    && (colorPtr->liveRefCount == 0 )&& (colorPtr->numColors != 0)
-	    && ((colorPtr->id.palette != id->palette)
-		|| (colorPtr->id.gamma != id->gamma))) {
-
+		&& (colorPtr->id.colormap == id->colormap)
+		&& (colorPtr->liveRefCount == 0 )&& (colorPtr->numColors != 0)
+		&& ((colorPtr->id.palette != id->palette)
+			|| (colorPtr->id.gamma != id->gamma))) {
 	    /*
 	     * We could take this guy's colors off him.
 	     */
@@ -3950,8 +3953,7 @@ ReclaimColors(id, numColors)
 		&& (colorPtr->id.colormap == id->colormap)
 		&& (colorPtr->liveRefCount == 0) && (colorPtr->numColors != 0)
 		&& ((colorPtr->id.palette != id->palette)
-		    || (colorPtr->id.gamma != id->gamma))) {
-
+			|| (colorPtr->id.gamma != id->gamma))) {
 	    /*
 	     * Free the colors that this ColorTable has.
 	     */
@@ -3974,23 +3976,22 @@ ReclaimColors(id, numColors)
  *
  * DisposeInstance --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to finally free up an instance
- *	of a photo image which is no longer required.
+ *	This function is called to finally free up an instance of a photo
+ *	image which is no longer required.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The instance data structure and the resources it references
- *	are freed.
+ *	The instance data structure and the resources it references are freed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 DisposeInstance(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to the instance whose resources
-				 * are to be released. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to the instance whose resources are
+				 * to be released. */
 {
     PhotoInstance *instancePtr = (PhotoInstance *) clientData;
     PhotoInstance *prevPtr;
@@ -4029,16 +4030,16 @@ DisposeInstance(clientData)
  *
  * MatchFileFormat --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to find a photo image file format
- *	handler which can parse the image data in the given file.
- *	If a user-specified format string is provided, only handlers
- *	whose names match a prefix of the format string are tried.
+ *	This function is called to find a photo image file format handler
+ *	which can parse the image data in the given file. If a user-specified
+ *	format string is provided, only handlers whose names match a prefix of
+ *	the format string are tried.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL return value.  If the return value is TCL_OK, a
- *	pointer to the image format record is returned in
- *	*imageFormatPtr, and the width and height of the image are
- *	returned in *widthPtr and *heightPtr.
+ *	A standard TCL return value. If the return value is TCL_OK, a pointer
+ *	to the image format record is returned in *imageFormatPtr, and the
+ *	width and height of the image are returned in *widthPtr and
+ *	*heightPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4054,16 +4055,16 @@ MatchFileFormat(interp, chan, fileName, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
     char *fileName;		/* The name of the image file. */
     Tcl_Obj *formatObj;		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat **imageFormatPtr;
-				/* A pointer to the photo image format
-				 * record is returned here. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are
-				 * returned here. */
-    int *oldformat;
+				/* A pointer to the photo image format record
+				 * is returned here. */
+    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are returned
+				 * here. */
+    int *oldformat;		/* returns 1 if the old image API is used */
 {
     int matched;
     int useoldformat = 0;
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     char *formatString = NULL;
 
@@ -4072,8 +4073,8 @@ MatchFileFormat(interp, chan, fileName, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
     }
 
     /*
-     * Scan through the table of file format handlers to find
-     * one which can handle the image.
+     * Scan through the table of file format handlers to find one which can
+     * handle the image.
      */
 
     matched = 0;
@@ -4093,7 +4094,7 @@ MatchFileFormat(interp, chan, fileName, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
 	}
 	if (formatPtr->fileMatchProc != NULL) {
 	    (void) Tcl_Seek(chan, Tcl_LongAsWide(0L), SEEK_SET);
-	    
+
 	    if ((*formatPtr->fileMatchProc)(chan, fileName, formatObj,
 		    widthPtr, heightPtr, interp)) {
 		if (*widthPtr < 1) {
@@ -4140,13 +4141,12 @@ MatchFileFormat(interp, chan, fileName, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
 
     if (formatPtr == NULL) {
 	if ((formatObj != NULL) && !matched) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image file format \"",
-		    formatString,
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "image file format \"", formatString,
 		    "\" is not supported", (char *) NULL);
 	} else {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
-		    "couldn't recognize data in image file \"",
-		    fileName, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    "couldn't recognize data in image file \"", fileName, "\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
 	}
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
@@ -4162,16 +4162,16 @@ MatchFileFormat(interp, chan, fileName, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
  *
  * MatchStringFormat --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to find a photo image file format
- *	handler which can parse the image data in the given string.
- *	If a user-specified format string is provided, only handlers
- *	whose names match a prefix of the format string are tried.
+ *	This function is called to find a photo image file format handler
+ *	which can parse the image data in the given string. If a
+ *	user-specified format string is provided, only handlers whose names
+ *	match a prefix of the format string are tried.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard TCL return value.  If the return value is TCL_OK, a
- *	pointer to the image format record is returned in
- *	*imageFormatPtr, and the width and height of the image are
- *	returned in *widthPtr and *heightPtr.
+ *	A standard TCL return value. If the return value is TCL_OK, a pointer
+ *	to the image format record is returned in *imageFormatPtr, and the
+ *	width and height of the image are returned in *widthPtr and
+ *	*heightPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4186,26 +4186,26 @@ MatchStringFormat(interp, data, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
     Tcl_Obj *data;		/* Object containing the image data. */
     Tcl_Obj *formatObj;		/* User-specified format string, or NULL. */
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat **imageFormatPtr;
-				/* A pointer to the photo image format
-				 * record is returned here. */
-    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are
-				 * returned here. */
+				/* A pointer to the photo image format record
+				 * is returned here. */
+    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are returned
+				 * here. */
     int *oldformat;		/* returns 1 if the old image API is used */
 {
     int matched;
     int useoldformat = 0;
     Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     char *formatString = NULL;
-    
+
     if (formatObj) {
 	formatString = Tcl_GetString(formatObj);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Scan through the table of file format handlers to find
-     * one which can handle the image.
+     * Scan through the table of file format handlers to find one which can
+     * handle the image.
      */
 
     matched = 0;
@@ -4278,14 +4278,14 @@ MatchStringFormat(interp, data, formatObj, imageFormatPtr,
  *
  * Tk_FindPhoto --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to get an opaque handle (actually a
- *	PhotoMaster *) for a given image, which can be used in
- *	subsequent calls to Tk_PhotoPutBlock, etc.  The `name'
- *	parameter is the name of the image.
+ *	This function is called to get an opaque handle (actually a
+ *	PhotoMaster *) for a given image, which can be used in subsequent
+ *	calls to Tk_PhotoPutBlock, etc. The `name' parameter is the name of
+ *	the image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The handle for the photo image, or NULL if there is no
- *	photo image with the name given.
+ *	The handle for the photo image, or NULL if there is no photo image
+ *	with the name given.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -4314,16 +4314,16 @@ Tk_FindPhoto(interp, imageName)
  *
  * Tk_PhotoPutBlock --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to put image data into a photo image.
+ *	This function is called to put image data into a photo image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result code.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The image data is stored.  The image may be expanded.
- *	The Tk image code is informed that the image has changed.
- *	If the result code is TCL_ERROR, an error message will be placed
- *	in the interpreter (if non-NULL).
+ *	The image data is stored. The image may be expanded. The Tk image code
+ *	is informed that the image has changed. If the result code is
+ *	TCL_ERROR, an error message will be placed in the interpreter (if
+ *	non-NULL).
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -4332,15 +4332,15 @@ int
 Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for passing back error
 				 * messages, or NULL. */
-    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Opaque handle for the photo image
-				 * to be updated. */
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Opaque handle for the photo image to be
+				 * updated. */
     register Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
-				/* Pointer to a structure describing the
-				 * pixel data to be copied into the image. */
-    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of the top-left pixel to
-				 * be updated in the image. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of the area of the image
-				 * to be updated. */
+				/* Pointer to a structure describing the pixel
+				 * data to be copied into the image. */
+    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of the top-left pixel to be
+				 * updated in the image. */
+    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of the area of the image to be
+				 * updated. */
     int compRule;		/* Compositing rule to use when processing
 				 * transparent pixels. */
 {
@@ -4371,6 +4371,7 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
     yEnd = y + height;
     if ((xEnd > masterPtr->width) || (yEnd > masterPtr->height)) {
 	int sameSrc = (blockPtr->pixelPtr == masterPtr->pix32);
+
 	if (ImgPhotoSetSize(masterPtr, MAX(xEnd, masterPtr->width),
 		MAX(yEnd, masterPtr->height)) == TCL_ERROR) {
 	    if (interp != NULL) {
@@ -4391,6 +4392,7 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
 	/*
 	 * The dithering isn't correct past the start of this block.
 	 */
+
 	masterPtr->ditherX = x;
 	masterPtr->ditherY = y;
     }
@@ -4413,18 +4415,19 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Copy the data into our local 32-bit/pixel array.
-     * If we can do it with a single memcpy, we do.
+     * Copy the data into our local 32-bit/pixel array. If we can do it with a
+     * single memcpy, we do.
      */
 
     destLinePtr = masterPtr->pix32 + (y * masterPtr->width + x) * 4;
     pitch = masterPtr->width * 4;
 
     /*
-     * This test is probably too restrictive.  We should also be able to
-     * do a memcpy if pixelSize == 3 and alphaOffset == 0.  Maybe other cases
-     * too.
+     * Test to see if we can do the whole write in a single copy. This test is
+     * probably too restrictive. We should also be able to do a memcpy if
+     * pixelSize == 3 and alphaOffset == 0. Maybe other cases too.
      */
+
     if ((blockPtr->pixelSize == 4)
 	    && (greenOffset == 1) && (blueOffset == 2) && (alphaOffset == 3)
 	    && (width <= blockPtr->width) && (height <= blockPtr->height)
@@ -4434,90 +4437,114 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
 	memcpy((VOID *) destLinePtr,
 		(VOID *) (blockPtr->pixelPtr + blockPtr->offset[0]),
 		(size_t) (height * width * 4));
-    } else {
-	int alpha;
-	for (hLeft = height; hLeft > 0;) {
-	    srcLinePtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr + blockPtr->offset[0];
-	    hCopy = MIN(hLeft, blockPtr->height);
-	    hLeft -= hCopy;
-	    for (; hCopy > 0; --hCopy) {
-		if ((blockPtr->pixelSize == 4) && (greenOffset == 1)
+
+	/*
+	 * We know there's an alpha offset and we're setting the data, so skip
+	 * directly to the point when we recompute the photo validity region.
+	 */
+
+	goto recalculateValidRegion;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Copy and merge pixels according to the compositing rule.
+     */
+
+    for (hLeft = height; hLeft > 0;) {
+	srcLinePtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr + blockPtr->offset[0];
+	hCopy = MIN(hLeft, blockPtr->height);
+	hLeft -= hCopy;
+	for (; hCopy > 0; --hCopy) {
+	    /*
+	     * If the layout of the source line matches our memory layout and
+	     * we're setting, we can just copy the bytes directly, which is
+	     * much faster.
+	     */
+
+	    if ((blockPtr->pixelSize == 4) && (greenOffset == 1)
 		    && (blueOffset == 2) && (alphaOffset == 3)
 		    && (width <= blockPtr->width)
 		    && (compRule == TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET)) {
-		    memcpy((VOID *) destLinePtr, (VOID *) srcLinePtr,
-			   (size_t) (width * 4));
-		} else {
-		    destPtr = destLinePtr;
-		    for (wLeft = width; wLeft > 0;) {
-			wCopy = MIN(wLeft, blockPtr->width);
-			wLeft -= wCopy;
-			srcPtr = srcLinePtr;
-			for (; wCopy > 0; --wCopy) {
-			    alpha = srcPtr[alphaOffset];
-			    
-			    /*
-			     * In the easy case, we can just copy.
-			     */
-			    if (!alphaOffset || (alpha == 255)) {
-				/* new solid part of the image */
-				*destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
-				*destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
-				*destPtr++ = srcPtr[blueOffset];
-				*destPtr++ = 255;
-				srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
-				continue;
-			    }
+		memcpy((VOID *) destLinePtr, (VOID *) srcLinePtr,
+			(size_t) (width * 4));
+		srcLinePtr += blockPtr->pitch;
+		destLinePtr += pitch;
+		continue;
+	    }
 
-			    /*
-			     * Combine according to the compositing rule.
-			     */
-			    switch (compRule) {
-			    case TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY:
-				if (!destPtr[3]) {
-				    /*
-				     * The destination is entirely
-				     * blank, so set it to the source,
-				     * just as if we used the SET
-				     * compositing rule.
-				     */
-				case TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET:
-				    *destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
-				    *destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
-				    *destPtr++ = srcPtr[blueOffset];
-				    *destPtr++ = alpha;
-				    break;
-				}
+	    /*
+	     * Have to copy the slow way.
+	     */
 
-				if (alpha) {
-				    int Alpha = destPtr[3];
+	    destPtr = destLinePtr;
+	    for (wLeft = width; wLeft > 0;) {
+		wCopy = MIN(wLeft, blockPtr->width);
+		wLeft -= wCopy;
+		srcPtr = srcLinePtr;
+		for (; wCopy>0 ; --wCopy, srcPtr+=blockPtr->pixelSize) {
+		    int alpha = srcPtr[alphaOffset];
 
-				    /*
-				     * This implements the Porter-Duff
-				     * Source-Over compositing rule.
-				     */
+		    /*
+		     * In the easy case, we can just copy.
+		     */
 
-				    destPtr[0] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[0],alpha,destPtr[0],Alpha);
-				    destPtr[1] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[greenOffset],alpha,destPtr[1],Alpha);
-				    destPtr[2] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[blueOffset],alpha,destPtr[2],Alpha);
-				    destPtr[3] = PD_SRC_OVER_ALPHA(alpha,Alpha);
-				}
-				/*
-				 * else should be empty space
-				 */
-				destPtr += 4;
-				break;
-
-			    default:
-				Tcl_Panic("unknown compositing rule: %d", compRule);
-			    }
-			    srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
-			}
+		    if (!alphaOffset || (alpha == 255)) {
+			/*
+			 * New solid part of the image.
+			 */
+
+			*destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
+			*destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
+			*destPtr++ = srcPtr[blueOffset];
+			*destPtr++ = 255;
+			continue;
+		    }
+
+		    /*
+		     * Combine according to the compositing rule.
+		     */
+
+		    if ((compRule == TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET) || !destPtr[3]) {
+			/*
+			 * Either this is the SET rule (we overwrite whatever
+			 * is there) or the destination is entirely blank. In
+			 * both cases, we just set the destination to the
+			 * source.
+			 */
+
+			*destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
+			*destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
+			*destPtr++ = srcPtr[blueOffset];
+			*destPtr++ = alpha;
+			continue;
 		    }
+
+		    if (alpha) {
+			int Alpha = destPtr[3];
+
+			/*
+			 * This implements the Porter-Duff Source-Over
+			 * compositing rule.
+			 */
+
+			destPtr[0] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[0], alpha, destPtr[0],
+				Alpha);
+			destPtr[1] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[greenOffset], alpha,
+				destPtr[1], Alpha);
+			destPtr[2] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[blueOffset], alpha,
+				destPtr[2], Alpha);
+			destPtr[3] = PD_SRC_OVER_ALPHA(alpha, Alpha);
+		    }
+
+		    /*
+		     * else should be empty space
+		     */
+
+		    destPtr += 4;
 		}
-		srcLinePtr += blockPtr->pitch;
-		destLinePtr += pitch;
 	    }
+	    srcLinePtr += blockPtr->pitch;
+	    destLinePtr += pitch;
 	}
     }
 
@@ -4526,33 +4553,35 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
      */
 
     if (alphaOffset) {
-
 	/*
-	 * This block is grossly inefficient.  For each row in the image, it
+	 * This block is grossly inefficient. For each row in the image, it
 	 * finds each continguous string of nontransparent pixels, then marks
-	 * those areas as valid in the validRegion mask.  This makes drawing
+	 * those areas as valid in the validRegion mask. This makes drawing
 	 * very efficient, because of the way we use X: we just say, here's
-	 * your mask, and here's your data.  We need not worry about the
-	 * current background color, etc.  But this costs us a lot on the
-	 * image setup.  Still, image setup only happens once, whereas the
-	 * drawing happens many times, so this might be the best way to go.
+	 * your mask, and here's your data. We need not worry about the
+	 * current background color, etc. But this costs us a lot on the image
+	 * setup. Still, image setup only happens once, whereas the drawing
+	 * happens many times, so this might be the best way to go.
 	 *
 	 * An alternative might be to not set up this mask, and instead, at
 	 * drawing time, for each transparent pixel, set its color to the
-	 * color of the background behind that pixel.  This is what I suspect
-	 * most of programs do.  However, they don't have to deal with the
+	 * color of the background behind that pixel. This is what I suspect
+	 * most of programs do. However, they don't have to deal with the
 	 * canvas, which could have many different background colors.
 	 * Determining the correct bg color for a given pixel might be
 	 * expensive.
 	 */
 
 	if (compRule != TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY) {
+	    TkRegion workRgn;
+
 	    /*
-	     * Don't need this when using the OVERLAY compositing rule,
-	     * which always strictly increases the valid region.
+	     * Don't need this when using the OVERLAY compositing rule, which
+	     * always strictly increases the valid region.
 	     */
-	    TkRegion workRgn = TkCreateRegion();
 
+	recalculateValidRegion:
+	    workRgn = TkCreateRegion();
 	    rect.x = x;
 	    rect.y = y;
 	    rect.width = width;
@@ -4564,9 +4593,8 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Factorize out the main part of the building of the region
-	 * data to allow for more efficient per-platform
-	 * implementations. [Bug 919066]
+	 * Factorize out the main part of the building of the region data to
+	 * allow for more efficient per-platform implementations. [Bug 919066]
 	 */
 
 	TkpBuildRegionFromAlphaData(masterPtr->validRegion, (unsigned) x,
@@ -4610,15 +4638,15 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock(interp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height, compRule)
  *
  * Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to put image data into a photo image,
- *	with possible subsampling and/or zooming of the pixels.
+ *	This function is called to put image data into a photo image, with
+ *	possible subsampling and/or zooming of the pixels.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The image data is stored.  The image may be expanded.
- *	The Tk image code is informed that the image has changed.
+ *	The image data is stored. The image may be expanded. The Tk image code
+ *	is informed that the image has changed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -4628,17 +4656,18 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(interp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
 	zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY, compRule)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for passing back error
 				 * messages, or NULL. */
-    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Opaque handle for the photo image
-				 * to be updated. */
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Opaque handle for the photo image to be
+				 * updated. */
     register Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
-				/* Pointer to a structure describing the
-				 * pixel data to be copied into the image. */
-    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of the top-left pixel to
-				 * be updated in the image. */
-    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of the area of the image
-				 * to be updated. */
+				/* Pointer to a structure describing the pixel
+				 * data to be copied into the image. */
+    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of the top-left pixel to be
+				 * updated in the image. */
+    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of the area of the image to be
+				 * updated. */
     int zoomX, zoomY;		/* Zoom factors for the X and Y axes. */
-    int subsampleX, subsampleY;	/* Subsampling factors for the X and Y axes. */
+    int subsampleX, subsampleY;	/* Subsampling factors for the X and Y
+				 * axes. */
     int compRule;		/* Compositing rule to use when processing
 				 * transparent pixels. */
 {
@@ -4771,10 +4800,12 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(interp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
 		srcPtr = srcLinePtr;
 		for (; wCopy > 0; wCopy -= zoomX) {
 		    for (xRepeat = MIN(wCopy, zoomX); xRepeat > 0; xRepeat--) {
-			int alpha = srcPtr[alphaOffset];
+			int alpha = srcPtr[alphaOffset];/* source alpha */
+
 			/*
 			 * Common case (solid pixels) first
 			 */
+
 			if (!alphaOffset || (alpha == 255)) {
 			    *destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
 			    *destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
@@ -4783,32 +4814,32 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(interp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
 			    continue;
  			}
 
-			switch (compRule) {
-			case TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY:
-			    if (!destPtr[3]) {
-				/*
-				 * The destination is entirely blank,
-				 * so set it to the source, just as if
-				 * we used the SET compositing rule.
-				 */
-			    case TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET:
-				*destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
-				*destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
-				*destPtr++ = srcPtr[blueOffset];
-				*destPtr++ = alpha;
-				break;
-			    }
-			    if (alpha) {
-				int Alpha = destPtr[3];
-				destPtr[0] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[0],alpha,destPtr[0],Alpha);
-				destPtr[1] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[greenOffset],alpha,destPtr[1],Alpha);
-				destPtr[2] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[blueOffset],alpha,destPtr[2],Alpha);
-				destPtr[3] = PD_SRC_OVER_ALPHA(alpha,Alpha);
-			    }
+			if (compRule==TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET || !destPtr[3]) {
+			    /*
+			     * Either this is the SET rule (we overwrite
+			     * whatever is there) or the destination is
+			     * entirely blank. In both cases, we just set the
+			     * destination to the source.
+			     */
+
+			    *destPtr++ = srcPtr[0];
+			    *destPtr++ = srcPtr[greenOffset];
+			    *destPtr++ = srcPtr[blueOffset];
+			    *destPtr++ = alpha;
+			} else if (alpha) {
+			    int Alpha = destPtr[3];	/* destination alpha */
+
+			    destPtr[0] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[0], alpha,
+				    destPtr[0], Alpha);
+			    destPtr[1] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[greenOffset],alpha,
+				    destPtr[1], Alpha);
+			    destPtr[2] = PD_SRC_OVER(srcPtr[blueOffset], alpha,
+				    destPtr[2], Alpha);
+			    destPtr[3] = PD_SRC_OVER_ALPHA(alpha, Alpha);
+
+			    destPtr += 4;
+			} else {
 			    destPtr += 4;
-			    break;
-			default:
-			    Tcl_Panic("unknown compositing rule: %d", compRule);
 			}
 		    }
 		    srcPtr += blockXSkip;
@@ -4835,6 +4866,7 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(interp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
 	     * Don't need this when using the OVERLAY compositing rule, which
 	     * always strictly increases the valid region.
 	     */
+
 	    TkRegion workRgn = TkCreateRegion();
 
 	    rect.x = x;
@@ -4847,34 +4879,9 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(interp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
 	    TkDestroyRegion(workRgn);
 	}
 
-	destLinePtr = masterPtr->pix32 + (y * masterPtr->width + x) * 4 + 3;
-	for (y1 = 0; y1 < height; y1++) {
-	    x1 = 0;
-	    destPtr = destLinePtr;
-	    while (x1 < width) {
-		/* search for first non-transparent pixel */
-		while ((x1 < width) && !*destPtr) {
-		    x1++;
-		    destPtr += 4;
-		}
-		end = x1;
-		/* search for first transparent pixel */
-		while ((end < width) && *destPtr) {
-		    end++;
-		    destPtr += 4;
-		}
-		if (end > x1) {
-		    rect.x = x + x1;
-		    rect.y = y + y1;
-		    rect.width = end - x1;
-		    rect.height = 1;
-		    TkUnionRectWithRegion(&rect, masterPtr->validRegion,
-			    masterPtr->validRegion);
-		}
-		x1 = end;
-	    }
-	    destLinePtr += masterPtr->width * 4;
-	}
+	TkBuildRegionFromAlphaData(masterPtr->validRegion, x, y, width, height,
+		&masterPtr->pix32[(y * masterPtr->width + x) * 4 + 3], 4,
+		masterPtr->width * 4);
     } else {
 	rect.x = x;
 	rect.y = y;
@@ -4896,7 +4903,7 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(interp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
      * Update each instance.
      */
 
-    Tk_DitherPhoto((Tk_PhotoHandle)masterPtr, x, y, width, height);
+    Tk_DitherPhoto((Tk_PhotoHandle) masterPtr, x, y, width, height);
 
     /*
      * Tell the core image code that this image has changed.
@@ -4912,26 +4919,26 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(interp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
  *
  * Tk_DitherPhoto --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to update an area of each instance's
- *	pixmap by dithering the corresponding area of the image master.
+ *	This function is called to update an area of each instance's pixmap by
+ *	dithering the corresponding area of the image master.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The pixmap of each instance of this image gets updated.
- *	The fields in *masterPtr indicating which area of the image
- *	is correctly dithered get updated.
+ *	The pixmap of each instance of this image gets updated. The fields in
+ *	*masterPtr indicating which area of the image is correctly dithered
+ *	get updated.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
 Tk_DitherPhoto(photo, x, y, width, height)
-    Tk_PhotoHandle photo;	/* Image master whose instances are
-				 * to be updated. */
-    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of the top-left pixel
-				 * in the area to be dithered. */
+    Tk_PhotoHandle photo;	/* Image master whose instances are to be
+				 * updated. */
+    int x, y;			/* Coordinates of the top-left pixel in the
+				 * area to be dithered. */
     int width, height;		/* Dimensions of the area to be dithered. */
 {
     PhotoMaster *masterPtr = (PhotoMaster *) photo;
@@ -4947,14 +4954,13 @@ Tk_DitherPhoto(photo, x, y, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Work out whether this block will be correctly dithered
-     * and whether it will extend the correctly dithered region.
+     * Work out whether this block will be correctly dithered and whether it
+     * will extend the correctly dithered region.
      */
 
     if (((y < masterPtr->ditherY)
 	    || ((y == masterPtr->ditherY) && (x <= masterPtr->ditherX)))
 	    && ((y + height) > (masterPtr->ditherY))) {
-
 	/*
 	 * This block starts inside (or immediately after) the correctly
 	 * dithered region, so the first scan line at least will be right.
@@ -4963,8 +4969,8 @@ Tk_DitherPhoto(photo, x, y, width, height)
 
 	if ((x == 0) && (width == masterPtr->width)) {
 	    /*
-	     * We are doing the full width, therefore the dithering
-	     * will be correct to the end.
+	     * We are doing the full width, therefore the dithering will be
+	     * correct to the end.
 	     */
 
 	    masterPtr->ditherX = 0;
@@ -4972,8 +4978,8 @@ Tk_DitherPhoto(photo, x, y, width, height)
 	} else {
 	    /*
 	     * We are doing partial scanlines, therefore the
-	     * correctly-dithered region will be extended by
-	     * at most one scan line.
+	     * correctly-dithered region will be extended by at most one scan
+	     * line.
 	     */
 
 	    if (x <= masterPtr->ditherX) {
@@ -4985,16 +4991,15 @@ Tk_DitherPhoto(photo, x, y, width, height)
 	    }
 	}
     }
-
-}    
+}
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * DitherInstance --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to update an area of an instance's
- *	pixmap by dithering the corresponding area of the master.
+ *	This function is called to update an area of an instance's pixmap by
+ *	dithering the corresponding area of the master.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -5031,8 +5036,8 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
     masterPtr = instancePtr->masterPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Turn dithering off in certain cases where it is not
-     * needed (TrueColor, DirectColor with many colors).
+     * Turn dithering off in certain cases where it is not needed (TrueColor,
+     * DirectColor with many colors).
      */
 
     if ((colorPtr->visualInfo.class == DirectColor)
@@ -5048,9 +5053,8 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * First work out how many lines to do at a time,
-     * then how many bytes we'll need for pixel storage,
-     * and allocate it.
+     * First work out how many lines to do at a time, then how many bytes
+     * we'll need for pixel storage, and allocate it.
      */
 
     nLines = (MAX_PIXELS + width - 1) / width;
@@ -5070,7 +5074,8 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
     imagePtr->width = width;
     imagePtr->height = nLines;
     imagePtr->bytes_per_line = bytesPerLine;
-    imagePtr->data = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (imagePtr->bytes_per_line * nLines));
+    imagePtr->data = (char *)
+	    ckalloc((unsigned) (imagePtr->bytes_per_line * nLines));
     bigEndian = imagePtr->bitmap_bit_order == MSBFirst;
     firstBit = bigEndian? (1 << (imagePtr->bitmap_unit - 1)): 1;
 
@@ -5080,8 +5085,8 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
     xEnd = xStart + width;
 
     /*
-     * Loop over the image, doing at most nLines lines before
-     * updating the screen image.
+     * Loop over the image, doing at most nLines lines before updating the
+     * screen image.
      */
 
     for (; height > 0; height -= nLines) {
@@ -5097,10 +5102,10 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 	    destLongPtr = (pixel *) dstLinePtr;
 	    if (colorPtr->flags & COLOR_WINDOW) {
 		/*
-		 * Color window.  We dither the three components
-		 * independently, using Floyd-Steinberg dithering,
-		 * which propagates errors from the quantization of
-		 * pixels to the pixels below and to the right.
+		 * Color window. We dither the three components independently,
+		 * using Floyd-Steinberg dithering, which propagates errors
+		 * from the quantization of pixels to the pixels below and to
+		 * the right.
 		 */
 
 		for (x = xStart; x < xEnd; ++x) {
@@ -5108,18 +5113,17 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 			for (i = 0; i < 3; ++i) {
 			    /*
 			     * Compute the error propagated into this pixel
-			     * for this component.
-			     * If e[x,y] is the array of quantization error
-			     * values, we compute
+			     * for this component. If e[x,y] is the array of
+			     * quantization error values, we compute
 			     *     7/16 * e[x-1,y] + 1/16 * e[x-1,y-1]
 			     *   + 5/16 * e[x,y-1] + 3/16 * e[x+1,y-1]
 			     * and round it to an integer.
 			     *
-			     * The expression ((c + 2056) >> 4) - 128
-			     * computes round(c / 16), and works correctly on
-			     * machines without a sign-extending right shift.
+			     * The expression ((c + 2056) >> 4) - 128 computes
+			     * round(c / 16), and works correctly on machines
+			     * without a sign-extending right shift.
 			     */
-			    
+
 			    c = (x > 0) ? errPtr[-3] * 7: 0;
 			    if (y > 0) {
 				if (x > 0) {
@@ -5130,13 +5134,13 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 				    c += errPtr[-lineLength+3] * 3;
 				}
 			    }
-			    
+
 			    /*
 			     * Add the propagated error to the value of this
 			     * component, quantize it, and store the
 			     * quantization error.
 			     */
-			    
+
 			    c = ((c + 2056) >> 4) - 128 + *srcPtr++;
 			    if (c < 0) {
 				c = 0;
@@ -5147,9 +5151,9 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 			    *errPtr++ = c - col[i];
 			}
 		    } else {
-			/* 
-			 * Output is virtually continuous in this case,
-			 * so don't bother dithering.
+			/*
+			 * Output is virtually continuous in this case, so
+			 * don't bother dithering.
 			 */
 
 			col[0] = *srcPtr++;
@@ -5159,8 +5163,8 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 		    srcPtr++;
 
 		    /*
-		     * Translate the quantized component values into
-		     * an X pixel value, and store it in the image.
+		     * Translate the quantized component values into an X
+		     * pixel value, and store it in the image.
 		     */
 
 		    i = colorPtr->redValues[col[0]]
@@ -5170,32 +5174,34 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 			i = colorPtr->pixelMap[i];
 		    }
 		    switch (bitsPerPixel) {
-			case NBBY:
-			    *destBytePtr++ = i;
-			    break;
+		    case NBBY:
+			*destBytePtr++ = i;
+			break;
 #ifndef __WIN32__
-/*
- * This case is not valid for Windows because the image format is different
- * from the pixel format in Win32.  Eventually we need to fix the image
- * code in Tk to use the Windows native image ordering.  This would speed
- * up the image code for all of the common sizes.
- */
+			/*
+			 * This case is not valid for Windows because the
+			 * image format is different from the pixel format in
+			 * Win32. Eventually we need to fix the image code in
+			 * Tk to use the Windows native image ordering. This
+			 * would speed up the image code for all of the common
+			 * sizes.
+			 */
 
-			case NBBY * sizeof(pixel):
-			    *destLongPtr++ = i;
-			    break;
+		    case NBBY * sizeof(pixel):
+			*destLongPtr++ = i;
+			break;
 #endif
-			default:
-			    XPutPixel(imagePtr, x - xStart, y - yStart,
-				    (unsigned) i);
+		    default:
+			XPutPixel(imagePtr, x - xStart, y - yStart,
+				(unsigned) i);
 		    }
 		}
 
 	    } else if (bitsPerPixel > 1) {
 		/*
-		 * Multibit monochrome window.  The operation here is similar
+		 * Multibit monochrome window. The operation here is similar
 		 * to the color window case above, except that there is only
-		 * one component.  If the master image is in color, use the
+		 * one component. If the master image is in color, use the
 		 * luminance computed as
 		 *	0.344 * red + 0.5 * green + 0.156 * blue.
 		 */
@@ -5217,7 +5223,7 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 			c += srcPtr[0];
 		    } else {
 			c += (unsigned)(srcPtr[0] * 11 + srcPtr[1] * 16
-					+ srcPtr[2] * 5 + 16) >> 5;
+				+ srcPtr[2] * 5 + 16) >> 5;
 		    }
 		    srcPtr += 4;
 
@@ -5230,40 +5236,42 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 		    *errPtr++ = c - i;
 		    i = colorPtr->redValues[i];
 		    switch (bitsPerPixel) {
-			case NBBY:
-			    *destBytePtr++ = i;
-			    break;
+		    case NBBY:
+			*destBytePtr++ = i;
+			break;
 #ifndef __WIN32__
-/*
- * This case is not valid for Windows because the image format is different
- * from the pixel format in Win32.  Eventually we need to fix the image
- * code in Tk to use the Windows native image ordering.  This would speed
- * up the image code for all of the common sizes.
- */
+			/*
+			 * This case is not valid for Windows because the
+			 * image format is different from the pixel format in
+			 * Win32. Eventually we need to fix the image code in
+			 * Tk to use the Windows native image ordering. This
+			 * would speed up the image code for all of the common
+			 * sizes.
+			 */
 
-			case NBBY * sizeof(pixel):
-			    *destLongPtr++ = i;
-			    break;
+		    case NBBY * sizeof(pixel):
+			*destLongPtr++ = i;
+			break;
 #endif
-			default:
-			    XPutPixel(imagePtr, x - xStart, y - yStart,
-				    (unsigned) i);
+		    default:
+			XPutPixel(imagePtr, x - xStart, y - yStart,
+				(unsigned) i);
 		    }
 		}
 	    } else {
 		/*
-		 * 1-bit monochrome window.  This is similar to the
-		 * multibit monochrome case above, except that the
-		 * quantization is simpler (we only have black = 0
-		 * and white = 255), and we produce an XY-Bitmap.
+		 * 1-bit monochrome window. This is similar to the multibit
+		 * monochrome case above, except that the quantization is
+		 * simpler (we only have black = 0 and white = 255), and we
+		 * produce an XY-Bitmap.
 		 */
 
 		word = 0;
 		mask = firstBit;
 		for (x = xStart; x < xEnd; ++x) {
 		    /*
-		     * If we have accumulated a whole word, store it
-		     * in the image and start a new word.
+		     * If we have accumulated a whole word, store it in the
+		     * image and start a new word.
 		     */
 
 		    if (mask == 0) {
@@ -5288,7 +5296,7 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 			c += srcPtr[0];
 		    } else {
 			c += (unsigned)(srcPtr[0] * 11 + srcPtr[1] * 16
-					+ srcPtr[2] * 5 + 16) >> 5;
+				+ srcPtr[2] * 5 + 16) >> 5;
 		    }
 		    srcPtr += 4;
 
@@ -5313,8 +5321,8 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Update the pixmap for this instance with the block of
-	 * pixels that we have just computed.
+	 * Update the pixmap for this instance with the block of pixels that
+	 * we have just computed.
 	 */
 
 	TkPutImage(colorPtr->pixelMap, colorPtr->numColors,
@@ -5322,7 +5330,6 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
 		instancePtr->gc, imagePtr, 0, 0, xStart, yStart,
 		(unsigned) width, (unsigned) nLines);
 	yStart = yEnd;
-	
     }
 
     ckfree(imagePtr->data);
@@ -5334,14 +5341,14 @@ DitherInstance(instancePtr, xStart, yStart, width, height)
  *
  * Tk_PhotoBlank --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to clear an entire photo image.
+ *	This function is called to clear an entire photo image.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The valid region for the image is set to the null region.
- *	The generic image code is notified that the image has changed.
+ *	The valid region for the image is set to the null region. The generic
+ *	image code is notified that the image has changed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -5367,8 +5374,8 @@ Tk_PhotoBlank(handle)
     masterPtr->validRegion = TkCreateRegion();
 
     /*
-     * Clear out the 32-bit pixel storage array.
-     * Clear out the dithering error arrays for each instance.
+     * Clear out the 32-bit pixel storage array. Clear out the dithering error
+     * arrays for each instance.
      */
 
     memset((VOID *) masterPtr->pix32, 0,
@@ -5395,18 +5402,17 @@ Tk_PhotoBlank(handle)
  *
  * Tk_PhotoExpand --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to request that a photo image be
- *	expanded if necessary to be at least `width' pixels wide and
- *	`height' pixels high.  If the user has declared a definite
- *	image size (using the -width and -height configuration
- *	options) then this call has no effect.
+ *	This function is called to request that a photo image be expanded if
+ *	necessary to be at least `width' pixels wide and `height' pixels high.
+ *	If the user has declared a definite image size (using the -width and
+ *	-height configuration options) then this call has no effect.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The size of the photo image may change; if so the generic
- *	image code is informed.
+ *	The size of the photo image may change; if so the generic image code
+ *	is informed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -5449,12 +5455,10 @@ Tk_PhotoExpand(interp, handle, width, height)
  *
  * Tk_PhotoGetSize --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to obtain the current size of a photo
- *	image.
+ *	This function is called to obtain the current size of a photo image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The image's width and height are returned in *widthp
- *	and *heightp.
+ *	The image's width and height are returned in *widthp and *heightp.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5464,8 +5468,8 @@ Tk_PhotoExpand(interp, handle, width, height)
 
 void
 Tk_PhotoGetSize(handle, widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Handle for the image whose dimensions
-				 * are requested. */
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Handle for the image whose dimensions are
+				 * requested. */
     int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* The dimensions of the image are returned
 				 * here. */
 {
@@ -5481,16 +5485,15 @@ Tk_PhotoGetSize(handle, widthPtr, heightPtr)
  *
  * Tk_PhotoSetSize --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to set size of a photo image.
- *	This call is equivalent to using the -width and -height
- *	configuration options.
+ *	This function is called to set size of a photo image. This call is
+ *	equivalent to using the -width and -height configuration options.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The size of the image may change; if so the generic
- *	image code is informed.
+ *	The size of the image may change; if so the generic image code is
+ *	informed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -5499,8 +5502,8 @@ int
 Tk_PhotoSetSize(interp, handle, width, height)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for passing back error
 				 * messages, or NULL. */
-    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Handle for the image whose size is to
-				 * be set. */
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Handle for the image whose size is to be
+				 * set. */
     int width, height;		/* New dimensions for the image. */
 {
     PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
@@ -5528,14 +5531,14 @@ Tk_PhotoSetSize(interp, handle, width, height)
  *
  * TkGetPhotoValidRegion --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to get the part of the photo where
- *	there is valid data.  Or, conversely, the part of the photo
- *	which is transparent.
+ *	This function is called to get the part of the photo where there is
+ *	valid data. Or, conversely, the part of the photo which is
+ *	transparent.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A TkRegion value that indicates the current area of the photo
- *	that is valid.  This value should not be used after any
- *	modification to the photo image.
+ *	A TkRegion value that indicates the current area of the photo that is
+ *	valid. This value should not be used after any modification to the
+ *	photo image.
  *
  * Side Effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5545,8 +5548,8 @@ Tk_PhotoSetSize(interp, handle, width, height)
 
 TkRegion
 TkPhotoGetValidRegion(handle)
-    Tk_PhotoHandle handle; /* Handle for the image whose valid region
-			    * is to obtained. */
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Handle for the image whose valid region is
+				 * to obtained. */
 {
     PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
 
@@ -5559,15 +5562,15 @@ TkPhotoGetValidRegion(handle)
  *
  * ImgGetPhoto --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to obtain image data from a photo
- *	image.  This procedure fills in the Tk_PhotoImageBlock structure
- *	pointed to by `blockPtr' with details of the address and
- *	layout of the image data in memory.
+ *	This function is called to obtain image data from a photo image. This
+ *	function fills in the Tk_PhotoImageBlock structure pointed to by
+ *	`blockPtr' with details of the address and layout of the image data in
+ *	memory.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A pointer to the allocated data which should be freed later.
- *	NULL if there is no need to free data because
- *	blockPtr->pixelPtr points directly to the image data.
+ *	A pointer to the allocated data which should be freed later. NULL if
+ *	there is no need to free data because blockPtr->pixelPtr points
+ *	directly to the image data.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5577,11 +5580,11 @@ TkPhotoGetValidRegion(handle)
 
 static char *
 ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
-    PhotoMaster *masterPtr;	/* Handle for the photo image from which
-				 * image data is desired. */
+    PhotoMaster *masterPtr;	/* Handle for the photo image from which image
+				 * data is desired. */
     Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
-				/* Information about the address and layout
-				 * of the image data is returned here. */
+				/* Information about the address and layout of
+				 * the image data is returned here. */
     struct SubcommandOptions *optPtr;
 {
     unsigned char *pixelPtr;
@@ -5597,8 +5600,7 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
 	    (!(optPtr->options & OPT_BACKGROUND)
 	    || ((optPtr->background->red == optPtr->background->green)
 	    && (optPtr->background->red == optPtr->background->blue)))) {
-	blockPtr->offset[0] = blockPtr->offset[1] =
-		blockPtr->offset[2];
+	blockPtr->offset[0] = blockPtr->offset[1] = blockPtr->offset[2];
     }
     alphaOffset = 0;
     for (y = 0; y < blockPtr->height; y++) {
@@ -5624,13 +5626,14 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
     greenOffset = blockPtr->offset[1] - blockPtr->offset[0];
     blueOffset = blockPtr->offset[2] - blockPtr->offset[0];
     if (((optPtr->options & OPT_BACKGROUND) && alphaOffset) ||
-	    ((optPtr->options & OPT_GRAYSCALE) && (greenOffset || blueOffset))) {
+	    ((optPtr->options & OPT_GRAYSCALE) && (greenOffset||blueOffset))) {
 	int newPixelSize,x,y;
 	unsigned char *srcPtr, *destPtr;
 	char *data;
 
-	newPixelSize =  (!(optPtr->options & OPT_BACKGROUND) && alphaOffset) ? 2 : 1;
-	if ((greenOffset || blueOffset) && !(optPtr->options & OPT_GRAYSCALE)) {
+	newPixelSize = (!(optPtr->options & OPT_BACKGROUND) && alphaOffset)
+		? 2 : 1;
+	if ((greenOffset||blueOffset) && !(optPtr->options & OPT_GRAYSCALE)) {
 	    newPixelSize += 2;
 	}
 	data = ckalloc((unsigned int) (newPixelSize *
@@ -5644,17 +5647,19 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
 		    srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
 		    destPtr += newPixelSize;
 		}
-		srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch - (blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize);
+		srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch -
+			blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize;
 	    }
 	} else if (optPtr->options & OPT_GRAYSCALE) {
 	    for (y = blockPtr->height; y > 0; y--) {
 		for (x = blockPtr->width; x > 0; x--) {
-		    *destPtr = (unsigned char) ((srcPtr[0] * 11 + srcPtr[1] * 16
-			    + srcPtr[2] * 5 + 16) >> 5);
+		    *destPtr = (unsigned char)
+			    (srcPtr[0]*11+srcPtr[1]*16+srcPtr[2]*5 + 16) >> 5;
 		    srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
 		    destPtr += newPixelSize;
 		}
-		srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch - (blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize);
+		srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch -
+			blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize;
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    for (y = blockPtr->height; y > 0; y--) {
@@ -5665,13 +5670,16 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
 		    srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
 		    destPtr += newPixelSize;
 		}
-		srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch - (blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize);
+		srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch -
+			blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize;
 	    }
 	}
 	srcPtr = blockPtr->pixelPtr + alphaOffset;
 	destPtr = (unsigned char *) data;
 	if (!alphaOffset) {
-	    /* nothing to be done */
+	    /*
+	     * Nothing to be done.
+	     */
 	} else if (optPtr->options & OPT_BACKGROUND) {
 	    if (newPixelSize > 2) {
 	        int red = optPtr->background->red>>8;
@@ -5688,12 +5696,14 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
 			srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
 			destPtr += newPixelSize;
 		    }
-		    srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch - (blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize);
+		    srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch -
+			    blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize;
 		}
 	    } else {
 	 	int gray = (unsigned char) (((optPtr->background->red>>8) * 11
-			    + (optPtr->background->green>>8) * 16
-			    + (optPtr->background->blue>>8) * 5 + 16) >> 5);
+			+ (optPtr->background->green>>8) * 16
+			+ (optPtr->background->blue>>8) * 5 + 16) >> 5);
+
 		for (y = blockPtr->height; y > 0; y--) {
 		    for (x = blockPtr->width; x > 0; x--) {
 			destPtr[0] += ((255 - *srcPtr) *
@@ -5701,7 +5711,8 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
 			srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
 			destPtr += newPixelSize;
 		    }
-		    srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch - (blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize);
+		    srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch -
+			    blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize;
 		}
 	    }
 	} else {
@@ -5712,7 +5723,8 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
 		    srcPtr += blockPtr->pixelSize;
 		    destPtr += newPixelSize;
 		}
-		srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch - (blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize);
+		srcPtr += blockPtr->pitch -
+			blockPtr->width * blockPtr->pixelSize;
 	    }
 	}
 	blockPtr->pixelPtr = (unsigned char *) data;
@@ -5736,8 +5748,8 @@ ImgGetPhoto(masterPtr, blockPtr, optPtr)
  *
  * ImgStringWrite --
  *
- *	Default string write function. The data is formatted in
- *	the default format as accepted by the "<img> put" command.
+ *	Default string write function. The data is formatted in the default
+ *	format as accepted by the "<img> put" command.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -5789,14 +5801,14 @@ ImgStringWrite(interp, formatString, blockPtr)
  *
  * Tk_PhotoGetImage --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to obtain image data from a photo
- *	image.  This procedure fills in the Tk_PhotoImageBlock structure
- *	pointed to by `blockPtr' with details of the address and
- *	layout of the image data in memory.
+ *	This function is called to obtain image data from a photo image. This
+ *	function fills in the Tk_PhotoImageBlock structure pointed to by
+ *	`blockPtr' with details of the address and layout of the image data in
+ *	memory.
  *
  * Results:
- *	TRUE (1) indicating that image data is available,
- *	for backwards compatibility with the old photo widget.
+ *	TRUE (1) indicating that image data is available, for backwards
+ *	compatibility with the old photo widget.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -5806,11 +5818,11 @@ ImgStringWrite(interp, formatString, blockPtr)
 
 int
 Tk_PhotoGetImage(handle, blockPtr)
-    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Handle for the photo image from which
-				 * image data is desired. */
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;	/* Handle for the photo image from which image
+				 * data is desired. */
     Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
-				/* Information about the address and layout
-				 * of the image data is returned here. */
+				/* Information about the address and layout of
+				 * the image data is returned here. */
 {
     PhotoMaster *masterPtr;
 
@@ -5844,26 +5856,26 @@ Tk_PhotoGetImage(handle, blockPtr)
  */
 
 typedef struct OptionAssocData {
-    struct OptionAssocData *nextPtr;	/* pointer to next OptionAssocData */
-    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *command;		/* command associated with this
-					 * option */
-    char name[1];			/* name of option (remaining chars) */
+    struct OptionAssocData *nextPtr;
+				/* Pointer to next OptionAssocData. */
+    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *command;	/* Command associated with this option. */
+    char name[1];		/* Name of option (remaining chars) */
 } OptionAssocData;
 
 static Tcl_ObjCmdProc *
 PhotoOptionFind(interp, obj)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter that is being deleted. */
-    Tcl_Obj *obj;			/* Name of option to be found. */
+    Tcl_Obj *obj;		/* Name of option to be found. */
 {
-    size_t length;
-    char *name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(obj, (int *) &length);
+    int length;
+    char *name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(obj, &length);
     char *prevname = NULL;
     Tcl_ObjCmdProc *proc = (Tcl_ObjCmdProc *) NULL;
     OptionAssocData *list = (OptionAssocData *) Tcl_GetAssocData(interp,
 	    "photoOption", (Tcl_InterpDeleteProc **) NULL);
 
     while (list != (OptionAssocData *) NULL) {
-	if (strncmp(name, list->name, length) == 0) {
+	if (strncmp(name, list->name, (unsigned) length) == 0) {
 	    if (proc != (Tcl_ObjCmdProc *) NULL) {
 		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "ambiguous option \"", name,
@@ -5892,8 +5904,8 @@ PhotoOptionFind(interp, obj)
  *
  * PhotoOptionCleanupProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked whenever an interpreter is deleted
- *	to cleanup the AssocData for "photoVisitor".
+ *	This function is invoked whenever an interpreter is deleted to cleanup
+ *	the AssocData for "photoVisitor".
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -5906,8 +5918,8 @@ PhotoOptionFind(interp, obj)
 
 static void
 PhotoOptionCleanupProc(clientData, interp)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Points to "photoVisitor" AssocData
-				 * for the interpreter. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Points to "photoVisitor" AssocData for the
+				 * interpreter. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter that is being deleted. */
 {
     OptionAssocData *list = (OptionAssocData *) clientData;
@@ -5924,24 +5936,23 @@ PhotoOptionCleanupProc(clientData, interp)
  *
  * Tk_CreatePhotoOption --
  *
- *	This procedure may be invoked to add a new kind of photo
- *	option to the core photo command supported by Tk.
+ *	This function may be invoked to add a new kind of photo option to the
+ *	core photo command supported by Tk.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	From now on, the new option will be useable by the
- *	photo command.
+ *	From now on, the new option will be useable by the photo command.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
 Tk_CreatePhotoOption(interp, name, proc)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* interpreter */
-    CONST char *name;			/* option name */
-    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *proc;		/* proc to execute command */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter */
+    CONST char *name;		/* Option name */
+    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *proc;	/* Function to execute command */
 {
     OptionAssocData *typePtr2, *prevPtr, *ptr;
     OptionAssocData *list;
@@ -5978,9 +5989,8 @@ Tk_CreatePhotoOption(interp, name, proc)
  *
  * TkPostscriptPhoto --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to output the contents of a
- *	photo image in Postscript by calling the Tk_PostscriptPhoto
- *	function.
+ *	This function is called to output the contents of a photo image in
+ *	Postscript by calling the Tk_PostscriptPhoto function.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns a standard Tcl return value.
@@ -5993,7 +6003,7 @@ Tk_CreatePhotoOption(interp, name, proc)
 static int
 ImgPhotoPostscript(clientData, interp, tkwin, psInfo,
         x, y, width, height, prepass)
-     ClientData clientData;	/* Handle for the photo image */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Handle for the photo image */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* (unused) */
     Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo;	/* postscript info */
@@ -6014,19 +6024,19 @@ ImgPhotoPostscript(clientData, interp, tkwin, psInfo,
  *
  * Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite, Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite --
  *
- * These backward-compatability functions just exist to fill slots in
- * stubs table.  For the behaviour of *_NoComposite, refer to the
- * corresponding function without the extra suffix, except that the
- * compositing rule is always "overlay" and the function always panics
- * on memory-allocation failure.
+ * These backward-compatability functions just exist to fill slots in stubs
+ * table. For the behaviour of *_NoComposite, refer to the corresponding
+ * function without the extra suffix, except that the compositing rule is
+ * always "overlay" and the function always panics on memory-allocation
+ * failure.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 void
 Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height)
-     Tk_PhotoHandle handle;
-     Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
-     int x, y, width, height;
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;
+    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
+    int x, y, width, height;
 {
     if (Tk_PhotoPutBlock(NULL, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
 	    TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -6036,10 +6046,10 @@ Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height)
 
 void
 Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
-				   zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY)
-     Tk_PhotoHandle handle;
-     Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
-     int x, y, width, height, zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY;
+	zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY)
+    Tk_PhotoHandle handle;
+    Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr;
+    int x, y, width, height, zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY;
 {
     if (Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock(NULL, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
 	    zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY,
@@ -6054,11 +6064,11 @@ Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite(handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,
  * Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic, Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic,
  * Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic, Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic
  *
- * Backward compatability functions for preserving the old behaviour
- * (i.e. panic on memory allocation failure) so that extensions do not
- * need to be significantly updated to take account of TIP #116.  These
- * call the new interface (i.e. the interface without the extra suffix),
- * but panic if an error condition is returned.
+ * Backward compatability functions for preserving the old behaviour (i.e.
+ * panic on memory allocation failure) so that extensions do not need to be
+ * significantly updated to take account of TIP #116. These call the new
+ * interface (i.e. the interface without the extra suffix), but panic if an
+ * error condition is returned.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -6107,3 +6117,11 @@ Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic(handle, width, height)
 	Tcl_Panic(TK_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE_MESSAGE);
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkObj.c b/generic/tkObj.c
index fc5def6..3b34eed 100644
--- a/generic/tkObj.c
+++ b/generic/tkObj.c
@@ -1,15 +1,14 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkObj.c --
  *
- *	This file contains procedures that implement the common Tk object
- *	types
+ *	This file contains functions that implement the common Tk object types
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkObj.c,v 1.12 2005/01/11 16:04:41 dkf Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkObj.c,v 1.13 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkInt.h"
@@ -17,7 +16,7 @@
 /*
  * The following structure is the internal representation for pixel objects.
  */
- 
+
 typedef struct PixelRep {
     double value;
     int units;
@@ -46,7 +45,7 @@ typedef struct PixelRep {
 /*
  * The following structure is the internal representation for mm objects.
  */
- 
+
 typedef struct MMRep {
     double value;
     int units;
@@ -56,41 +55,35 @@ typedef struct MMRep {
 
 /*
  * The following structure is the internal representation for window objects.
- * A WindowRep caches name-to-window lookups.  The cache is invalid
- * if tkwin is NULL or if mainPtr->deletionEpoch does not match epoch.
+ * A WindowRep caches name-to-window lookups. The cache is invalid if tkwin is
+ * NULL or if mainPtr->deletionEpoch does not match epoch.
  */
 typedef struct WindowRep {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Cached window; NULL if not found */
-    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* MainWindow associated with tkwin */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Cached window; NULL if not found. */
+    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* MainWindow associated with tkwin. */
     long epoch;			/* Value of mainPtr->deletionEpoch at last
-				 * successful lookup.  */
+				 * successful lookup. */
 } WindowRep;
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Prototypes for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		DupMMInternalRep _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *copyPtr));
-static void		DupPixelInternalRep _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *copyPtr));
-static void		DupWindowInternalRep _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *copyPtr));
-static void		FreeMMInternalRep _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static void		FreePixelInternalRep _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static void		FreeWindowInternalRep _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static void		UpdateStringOfMM _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static int		SetMMFromAny _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static int		SetPixelFromAny _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static int		SetWindowFromAny _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+static void		DupMMInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *srcPtr, Tcl_Obj *copyPtr);
+static void		DupPixelInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *srcPtr, Tcl_Obj *copyPtr);
+static void		DupWindowInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *srcPtr,Tcl_Obj *copyPtr);
+static void		FreeMMInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static void		FreePixelInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static void		FreeWindowInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static void		UpdateStringOfMM(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static int		SetMMFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static int		SetPixelFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static int		SetWindowFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
 
 /*
- * The following structure defines the implementation of the "pixel"
- * Tcl object, used for measuring distances.  The pixel object remembers
- * its initial display-independant settings.
+ * The following structure defines the implementation of the "pixel" Tcl
+ * object, used for measuring distances. The pixel object remembers its
+ * initial display-independant settings.
  */
 
 static Tcl_ObjType pixelObjType = {
@@ -102,9 +95,9 @@ static Tcl_ObjType pixelObjType = {
 };
 
 /*
- * The following structure defines the implementation of the "pixel"
- * Tcl object, used for measuring distances.  The pixel object remembers
- * its initial display-independant settings.
+ * The following structure defines the implementation of the "pixel" Tcl
+ * object, used for measuring distances. The pixel object remembers its
+ * initial display-independant settings.
  */
 
 static Tcl_ObjType mmObjType = {
@@ -121,14 +114,12 @@ static Tcl_ObjType mmObjType = {
  */
 
 static Tcl_ObjType windowObjType = {
-    "window",				/* name */
-    FreeWindowInternalRep,		/* freeIntRepProc */
-    DupWindowInternalRep,		/* dupIntRepProc */
-    NULL,				/* updateStringProc */
-    SetWindowFromAny			/* setFromAnyProc */
+    "window",			/* name */
+    FreeWindowInternalRep,	/* freeIntRepProc */
+    DupWindowInternalRep,	/* dupIntRepProc */
+    NULL,			/* updateStringProc */
+    SetWindowFromAny		/* setFromAnyProc */
 };
-
-
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -136,8 +127,8 @@ static Tcl_ObjType windowObjType = {
  * Tk_GetPixelsFromObj --
  *
  *	Attempt to return a pixel value from the Tcl object "objPtr". If the
- *	object is not already a pixel value, an attempt will be made to convert
- *	it to one.
+ *	object is not already a pixel value, an attempt will be made to
+ *	convert it to one.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a standard Tcl object result. If an error occurs
@@ -145,8 +136,8 @@ static Tcl_ObjType windowObjType = {
  *	result unless "interp" is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the object is not already a pixel, the conversion will free
- *	any old internal representation. 
+ *	If the object is not already a pixel, the conversion will free any old
+ *	internal representation.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -189,7 +180,7 @@ Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, intPtr)
 	    }
 	    pixelPtr->tkwin = tkwin;
 	}
-        *intPtr = pixelPtr->returnValue;
+	*intPtr = pixelPtr->returnValue;
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -206,8 +197,8 @@ Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, intPtr)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Frees objPtr's internal representation and sets objPtr's
- *	internalRep to NULL.
+ *	Frees objPtr's internal representation and sets objPtr's internalRep
+ *	to NULL.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -217,7 +208,7 @@ FreePixelInternalRep(objPtr)
     Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Pixel object with internal rep to free. */
 {
     PixelRep *pixelPtr;
-    
+
     if (!SIMPLE_PIXELREP(objPtr)) {
 	pixelPtr = GET_COMPLEXPIXEL(objPtr);
 	ckfree((char *) pixelPtr);
@@ -231,15 +222,15 @@ FreePixelInternalRep(objPtr)
  *
  * DupPixelInternalRep --
  *
- *	Initialize the internal representation of a pixel Tcl_Obj to a
- *	copy of the internal representation of an existing pixel object. 
+ *	Initialize the internal representation of a pixel Tcl_Obj to a copy of
+ *	the internal representation of an existing pixel object.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	copyPtr's internal rep is set to the pixel corresponding to
- *	srcPtr's internal rep.
+ *	copyPtr's internal rep is set to the pixel corresponding to srcPtr's
+ *	internal rep.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -250,7 +241,7 @@ DupPixelInternalRep(srcPtr, copyPtr)
     register Tcl_Obj *copyPtr;	/* Object with internal rep to set. */
 {
     PixelRep *oldPtr, *newPtr;
-    
+
     copyPtr->typePtr = srcPtr->typePtr;
 
     if (SIMPLE_PIXELREP(srcPtr)) {
@@ -271,8 +262,7 @@ DupPixelInternalRep(srcPtr, copyPtr)
  *
  * SetPixelFromAny --
  *
- *	Attempt to generate a pixel internal form for the Tcl object
- *	"objPtr".
+ *	Attempt to generate a pixel internal form for the Tcl object "objPtr".
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If an error occurs during
@@ -280,8 +270,8 @@ DupPixelInternalRep(srcPtr, copyPtr)
  *	unless "interp" is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If no error occurs, a pixel representation of the object is
- *	stored internally and the type of "objPtr" is set to pixel.
+ *	If no error occurs, a pixel representation of the object is stored
+ *	internally and the type of "objPtr" is set to pixel.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -295,55 +285,39 @@ SetPixelFromAny(interp, objPtr)
     char *string, *rest;
     double d;
     int i, units;
-    PixelRep *pixelPtr;
 
     string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, NULL);
 
     d = strtod(string, &rest);
     if (rest == string) {
-	/*
-	 * Must copy string before resetting the result in case a caller
-	 * is trying to convert the interpreter's result to pixels.
-	 */
-
-	char buf[100];
-
-	error:
-	sprintf(buf, "bad screen distance \"%.50s\"", string);
-	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, NULL);
-	return TCL_ERROR;
+	goto error;
     }
     while ((*rest != '\0') && isspace(UCHAR(*rest))) {
 	rest++;
     }
-    switch (*rest) {
-	case '\0':
-	    units = -1;
-	    break;
-
-	case 'm':
-	    units = 0;
-	    break;
-
-	case 'c':
-	    units = 1;
-	    break;
 
-	case 'i':
-	    units = 2;
-	    break;
-
-	case 'p':
-	    units = 3;
-	    break;
-
-	default:
-	    goto error;
+    switch (*rest) {
+    case '\0':
+	units = -1;
+	break;
+    case 'm':
+	units = 0;
+	break;
+    case 'c':
+	units = 1;
+	break;
+    case 'i':
+	units = 2;
+	break;
+    case 'p':
+	units = 3;
+	break;
+    default:
+	goto error;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one. 
+     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one.
      */
 
     typePtr = objPtr->typePtr;
@@ -357,7 +331,8 @@ SetPixelFromAny(interp, objPtr)
     if ((units < 0) && (i == d)) {
 	SET_SIMPLEPIXEL(objPtr, i);
     } else {
-	pixelPtr = (PixelRep *) ckalloc(sizeof(PixelRep));
+	PixelRep *pixelPtr = (PixelRep *) ckalloc(sizeof(PixelRep));
+
 	pixelPtr->value = d;
 	pixelPtr->units = units;
 	pixelPtr->tkwin = NULL;
@@ -365,6 +340,21 @@ SetPixelFromAny(interp, objPtr)
 	SET_COMPLEXPIXEL(objPtr, pixelPtr);
     }
     return TCL_OK;
+
+  error:
+    if (interp != NULL) {
+	/*
+	 * Must copy string before resetting the result in case a caller is
+	 * trying to convert the interpreter's result to pixels.
+	 */
+
+	char buf[100];
+
+	sprintf(buf, "bad screen distance \"%.50s\"", string);
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, NULL);
+    }
+    return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -382,8 +372,8 @@ SetPixelFromAny(interp, objPtr)
  *	result unless "interp" is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the object is not already a pixel, the conversion will free
- *	any old internal representation. 
+ *	If the object is not already a pixel, the conversion will free any old
+ *	internal representation.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -438,8 +428,8 @@ Tk_GetMMFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, doublePtr)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Frees objPtr's internal representation and sets objPtr's
- *	internalRep to NULL.
+ *	Frees objPtr's internal representation and sets objPtr's internalRep
+ *	to NULL.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -458,15 +448,15 @@ FreeMMInternalRep(objPtr)
  *
  * DupMMInternalRep --
  *
- *	Initialize the internal representation of a pixel Tcl_Obj to a
- *	copy of the internal representation of an existing pixel object. 
+ *	Initialize the internal representation of a pixel Tcl_Obj to a copy of
+ *	the internal representation of an existing pixel object.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	copyPtr's internal rep is set to the pixel corresponding to
- *	srcPtr's internal rep.
+ *	copyPtr's internal rep is set to the pixel corresponding to srcPtr's
+ *	internal rep.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -477,7 +467,7 @@ DupMMInternalRep(srcPtr, copyPtr)
     register Tcl_Obj *copyPtr;	/* Object with internal rep to set. */
 {
     MMRep *oldPtr, *newPtr;
-    
+
     copyPtr->typePtr = srcPtr->typePtr;
     oldPtr = (MMRep *) srcPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr;
     newPtr = (MMRep *) ckalloc(sizeof(MMRep));
@@ -493,17 +483,16 @@ DupMMInternalRep(srcPtr, copyPtr)
  *
  * UpdateStringOfMM --
  *
- *      Update the string representation for a pixel Tcl_Obj
- *      this function is only called, if the pixel Tcl_Obj has no unit,
- *      because with units the string representation is created by
- *      SetMMFromAny
+ *	Update the string representation for a pixel Tcl_Obj this function is
+ *	only called, if the pixel Tcl_Obj has no unit, because with units the
+ *	string representation is created by SetMMFromAny
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *      The object's string is set to a valid string that results from
- *      the double-to-string conversion.
+ *	The object's string is set to a valid string that results from the
+ *	double-to-string conversion.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -519,7 +508,7 @@ UpdateStringOfMM(objPtr)
     mmPtr = (MMRep *) objPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr;
     /* assert( mmPtr->units == -1 && objPtr->bytes == NULL ); */
     if ((mmPtr->units != -1) || (objPtr->bytes != NULL)) {
-        Tcl_Panic("UpdateStringOfMM: false precondition");
+	Tcl_Panic("UpdateStringOfMM: false precondition");
     }
 
     Tcl_PrintDouble((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, mmPtr->value, buffer);
@@ -535,8 +524,7 @@ UpdateStringOfMM(objPtr)
  *
  * SetMMFromAny --
  *
- *	Attempt to generate a mm internal form for the Tcl object
- *	"objPtr".
+ *	Attempt to generate a mm internal form for the Tcl object "objPtr".
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If an error occurs during
@@ -544,8 +532,8 @@ UpdateStringOfMM(objPtr)
  *	unless "interp" is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If no error occurs, a mm representation of the object is
- *	stored internally and the type of "objPtr" is set to mm.
+ *	If no error occurs, a mm representation of the object is stored
+ *	internally and the type of "objPtr" is set to mm.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -566,8 +554,8 @@ SetMMFromAny(interp, objPtr)
 
     if (tclDoubleObjType == NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * Cache the object types for comaprison below.
-	 * This allows optimized checks for standard cases.
+	 * Cache the object types for comaprison below. This allows optimized
+	 * checks for standard cases.
 	 */
 
 	tclDoubleObjType = Tcl_GetObjType("double");
@@ -583,10 +571,11 @@ SetMMFromAny(interp, objPtr)
 	units = -1;
 
 	/*
-	 * In the case of ints, we need to ensure that a valid
-	 * string exists in order for int-but-not-string objects
-	 * to be converted back to ints again from mm obj types.
+	 * In the case of ints, we need to ensure that a valid string exists
+	 * in order for int-but-not-string objects to be converted back to
+	 * ints again from mm obj types.
 	 */
+
 	(void) Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, NULL);
     } else {
 	/*
@@ -602,42 +591,38 @@ SetMMFromAny(interp, objPtr)
 	     * is trying to convert the interpreter's result to mms.
 	     */
 
-	    error:
-            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad screen distance \"", string,
-                    "\"", (char *) NULL);
-            return TCL_ERROR;
-        }
-        while ((*rest != '\0') && isspace(UCHAR(*rest))) {
-            rest++;
-        }
-        switch (*rest) {
-	    case '\0':
-		units = -1;
-		break;
-
-	    case 'c':
-		units = 0;
-		break;
-
-	    case 'i':
-		units = 1;
-		break;
-
-	    case 'm':
-		units = 2;
-		break;
-
-	    case 'p':
-		units = 3;
-		break;
-
-	    default:
-		goto error;
+	error:
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad screen distance \"", string,
+		    "\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	while ((*rest != '\0') && isspace(UCHAR(*rest))) {
+	    rest++;
+	}
+
+	switch (*rest) {
+	case '\0':
+	    units = -1;
+	    break;
+	case 'c':
+	    units = 0;
+	    break;
+	case 'i':
+	    units = 1;
+	    break;
+	case 'm':
+	    units = 2;
+	    break;
+	case 'p':
+	    units = 3;
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    goto error;
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one. 
+     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one.
      */
 
     typePtr = objPtr->typePtr;
@@ -673,8 +658,8 @@ SetMMFromAny(interp, objPtr)
  *	result unless "interp" is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	If the object is not already a Tk_Window, the conversion will free
- *	any old internal representation. 
+ *	If the object is not already a Tk_Window, the conversion will free any
+ *	old internal representation.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -698,8 +683,8 @@ TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, windowPtr)
     winPtr = (WindowRep *) objPtr->internalRep.otherValuePtr;
     if (    winPtr->tkwin == NULL
 	 || winPtr->mainPtr == NULL
-	 || winPtr->mainPtr != mainPtr 
-	 || winPtr->epoch != mainPtr->deletionEpoch) 
+	 || winPtr->mainPtr != mainPtr
+	 || winPtr->epoch != mainPtr->deletionEpoch)
     {
 	/* Cache is invalid.
 	 */
@@ -722,14 +707,15 @@ TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, windowPtr)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * SetWindowFromAny --
+ *
  *	Generate a windowObj internal form for the Tcl object "objPtr".
  *
  * Results:
- *	Always returns TCL_OK. 
+ *	Always returns TCL_OK.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Sets objPtr's internal representation to an uninitialized
- *	windowObj. Frees the old internal representation, if any.
+ *	Sets objPtr's internal representation to an uninitialized windowObj.
+ *	Frees the old internal representation, if any.
  *
  * See also:
  * 	TkGetWindowFromObj, which initializes the WindowRep cache.
@@ -746,7 +732,7 @@ SetWindowFromAny(interp, objPtr)
     WindowRep *winPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one. 
+     * Free the old internalRep before setting the new one.
      */
 
     Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, NULL);
@@ -771,15 +757,15 @@ SetWindowFromAny(interp, objPtr)
  *
  * DupWindowInternalRep --
  *
- *	Initialize the internal representation of a window Tcl_Obj to a
- *	copy of the internal representation of an existing window object. 
+ *	Initialize the internal representation of a window Tcl_Obj to a copy
+ *	of the internal representation of an existing window object.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	copyPtr's internal rep is set to refer to the same window as
- *	srcPtr's internal rep.
+ *	copyPtr's internal rep is set to refer to the same window as srcPtr's
+ *	internal rep.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -812,8 +798,8 @@ DupWindowInternalRep(srcPtr, copyPtr)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Frees objPtr's internal representation and sets objPtr's
- *	internalRep to NULL.
+ *	Frees objPtr's internal representation and sets objPtr's internalRep
+ *	to NULL.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -832,19 +818,19 @@ FreeWindowInternalRep(objPtr)
  *
  * TkParsePadAmount --
  *
- *	This procedure parses a padding specification and returns
- *	the appropriate padding values.  A padding specification can
- *	be either a single pixel width, or a list of two pixel widths.
- *	If a single pixel width, the amount specified is used for 
- *	padding on both sides.  If two amounts are specified, then
- *	they specify the left/right or top/bottom padding.
+ *	This function parses a padding specification and returns the
+ *	appropriate padding values. A padding specification can be either a
+ *	single pixel width, or a list of two pixel widths. If a single pixel
+ *	width, the amount specified is used for padding on both sides. If two
+ *	amounts are specified, then they specify the left/right or top/bottom
+ *	padding.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl return value.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	An error message is written to the interpreter is something
- *	is not right.
+ *	An error message is written to the interpreter if something is not
+ *	right.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -854,7 +840,7 @@ TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, specObj, halfPtr, allPtr)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* A window.  Needed by Tk_GetPixels() */
     Tcl_Obj *specObj;		/* The argument to "-padx", "-pady", "-ipadx",
-				 * or "-ipady".  The thing to be parsed. */
+				 * or "-ipady". The thing to be parsed. */
     int *halfPtr;		/* Write the left/top part of padding here */
     int *allPtr;		/* Write the total padding here */
 {
@@ -880,8 +866,8 @@ TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, specObj, halfPtr, allPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Pad specifications are a list of one or two elements, each of
-     * which is a pixel specification.
+     * Pad specifications are a list of one or two elements, each of which is
+     * a pixel specification.
      */
 
     if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, specObj, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK) {
@@ -906,8 +892,8 @@ TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, specObj, halfPtr, allPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Parse the second part if it exists, otherwise it is as if it
-     * was the same as the first part.
+     * Parse the second part if it exists, otherwise it is as if it was the
+     * same as the first part.
      */
 
     if (objc == 1) {
@@ -944,8 +930,8 @@ TkParsePadAmount(interp, tkwin, specObj, halfPtr, allPtr)
  *	None
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	All instances of Tcl_ObjType structues used in Tk are registered
- *	with Tcl.
+ *	All instances of Tcl_ObjType structues used in Tk are registered with
+ *	Tcl.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -965,3 +951,11 @@ TkRegisterObjTypes()
     Tcl_RegisterObjType(&windowObjType);
     Tcl_RegisterObjType(&tkTextIndexType);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkOption.c b/generic/tkOption.c
index 7f1b007..a0080fc 100644
--- a/generic/tkOption.c
+++ b/generic/tkOption.c
@@ -1,59 +1,58 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkOption.c --
  *
- *	This module contains procedures to manage the option
- *	database, which allows various strings to be associated
- *	with windows either by name or by class or both.
+ *	This module contains functions to manage the option database, which
+ *	allows various strings to be associated with windows either by name or
+ *	by class or both.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkOption.c,v 1.15 2002/08/05 04:30:40 dgp Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkOption.c,v 1.16 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkPort.h"
 #include "tkInt.h"
 
 /*
- * The option database is stored as one tree for each main window.
- * Each name or class field in an option is associated with a node or
- * leaf of the tree.  For example, the options "x.y.z" and "x.y*a"
- * each correspond to three nodes in the tree;  they share the nodes
- * "x" and "x.y", but have different leaf nodes.  One of the following
- * structures exists for each node or leaf in the option tree.  It is
- * actually stored as part of the parent node, and describes a particular
- * child of the parent.
- *
- * The structure of the option db tree is a little confusing.  There are
- * four different kinds of nodes in the tree:
+ * The option database is stored as one tree for each main window. Each name
+ * or class field in an option is associated with a node or leaf of the tree.
+ * For example, the options "x.y.z" and "x.y*a" each correspond to three nodes
+ * in the tree; they share the nodes "x" and "x.y", but have different leaf
+ * nodes. One of the following structures exists for each node or leaf in the
+ * option tree. It is actually stored as part of the parent node, and
+ * describes a particular child of the parent.
+ *
+ * The structure of the option db tree is a little confusing. There are four
+ * different kinds of nodes in the tree:
  *	interior class nodes
  *	interior name nodes
  *	leaf class nodes
  *	leaf name nodes
  *
  * All interior nodes refer to _window_ classes and names; all leaf nodes
- * refer to _option_ classes and names.  When looking for a particular option,
+ * refer to _option_ classes and names. When looking for a particular option,
  * therefore, you must compare interior node values to corresponding window
  * values, and compare leaf node values to corresponding option values.
  *
  * The tree is actually stored in a collection of arrays; there is one each
- * combination of WILDCARD/EXACT and CLASS/NAME and NODE/LEAF.  The NODE arrays
+ * combination of WILDCARD/EXACT and CLASS/NAME and NODE/LEAF. The NODE arrays
  * contain the interior nodes of the tree; each element has a pointer to an
- * array of elements which are the leaves of the tree.  The LEAF arrays, rather
+ * array of elements which are the leaves of the tree. The LEAF arrays, rather
  * than holding the leaves of the tree, hold a cached subset of the option
  * database, consisting of the values of all defined options for a single
  * window, and some additional information about each ancestor of the window
- * (since some options may be inherited from a parent), all the way back to the
- * root window.
+ * (since some options may be inherited from a parent), all the way back to
+ * the root window.
  *
  * Each time a call is made to Tk_GetOption, Tk will attempt to use the cached
- * information to satisfy the lookup.  If the call is for a window other than
+ * information to satisfy the lookup. If the call is for a window other than
  * that for which options are currently cached, the portion of the cache that
- * contains information for common ancestors of the two windows is retained and
- * the remainder is discarded and rebuilt with new information for the new
+ * contains information for common ancestors of the two windows is retained
+ * and the remainder is discarded and rebuilt with new information for the new
  * window.
  */
 
@@ -61,35 +60,34 @@ typedef struct Element {
     Tk_Uid nameUid;			/* Name or class from one element of
 					 * an option spec. */
     union {
-	struct ElArray *arrayPtr;	/* If this is an intermediate node,
-					 * a pointer to a structure describing
+	struct ElArray *arrayPtr;	/* If this is an intermediate node, a
+					 * pointer to a structure describing
 					 * the remaining elements of all
-					 * options whose prefixes are the
-					 * same up through this element. */
+					 * options whose prefixes are the same
+					 * up through this element. */
 	Tk_Uid valueUid;		/* For leaf nodes, this is the string
 					 * value of the option. */
     } child;
     int priority;			/* Used to select among matching
-					 * options.  Includes both the
-					 * priority level and a serial #.
-					 * Greater value means higher
-					 * priority.  Irrelevant except in
-					 * leaf nodes. */
-    int flags;				/* OR-ed combination of bits.  See
+					 * options. Includes both the priority
+					 * level and a serial #. Greater value
+					 * means higher priority. Irrelevant
+					 * except in leaf nodes. */
+    int flags;				/* OR-ed combination of bits. See
 					 * below for values. */
 } Element;
 
 /*
  * Flags in Element structures:
  *
- * CLASS -		Non-zero means this element refers to a class,
- *			Zero means this element refers to a name.
- * NODE -		Zero means this is a leaf element (the child
- *			field is a value, not a pointer to another node).
- *			One means this is a node element.
- * WILDCARD -		Non-zero means this there was a star in the
- *			original specification just before this element.
- *			Zero means there was a dot.
+ * CLASS -		Non-zero means this element refers to a class, zero
+ *			means this element refers to a name.
+ * NODE -		Zero means this is a leaf element (the child field is
+ *			a value, not a pointer to another node). One means
+ *			this is a node element.
+ * WILDCARD -		Non-zero means this there was a star in the original
+ *			specification just before this element. Zero means
+ *			there was a dot.
  */
 
 #define TYPE_MASK		0x7
@@ -108,25 +106,22 @@ typedef struct Element {
 #define WILDCARD_NODE_CLASS	0x7
 
 /*
- * The following structure is used to manage a dynamic array of
- * Elements.  These structures are used for two purposes:  to store
- * the contents of a node in the option tree, and for the option
- * stacks described below.
+ * The following structure is used to manage a dynamic array of Elements.
+ * These structures are used for two purposes: to store the contents of a node
+ * in the option tree, and for the option stacks described below.
  */
 
 typedef struct ElArray {
-    int arraySize;		/* Number of elements actually
-				 * allocated in the "els" array. */
-    int numUsed;		/* Number of elements currently in
-				 * use out of els. */
+    int arraySize;		/* Number of elements actually allocated in
+				 * the "els" array. */
+    int numUsed;		/* Number of elements currently in use out of
+				 * els. */
     Element *nextToUse;		/* Pointer to &els[numUsed]. */
-    Element els[1];		/* Array of structures describing
-				 * children of this node.  The
-				 * array will actually contain enough
-				 * elements for all of the children
-				 * (and even a few extras, perhaps).
-				 * This must be the last field in
-				 * the structure. */
+    Element els[1];		/* Array of structures describing children of
+				 * this node. The array will actually contain
+				 * enough elements for all of the children
+				 * (and even a few extras, perhaps). This must
+				 * be the last field in the structure. */
 } ElArray;
 
 #define EL_ARRAY_SIZE(numEls) ((unsigned) (sizeof(ElArray) \
@@ -135,54 +130,53 @@ typedef struct ElArray {
 
 /*
  * In addition to the option tree, which is a relatively static structure,
- * there are eight additional structures called "stacks", which are used
- * to speed up queries into the option database.  The stack structures
- * are designed for the situation where an individual widget makes repeated
- * requests for its particular options.  The requests differ only in
- * their last name/class, so during the first request we extract all
- * the options pertaining to the particular widget and save them in a
- * stack-like cache;  subsequent requests for the same widget can search
- * the cache relatively quickly.  In fact, the cache is a hierarchical
- * one, storing a list of relevant options for this widget and all of
- * its ancestors up to the application root;  hence the name "stack".
- *
- * Each of the eight stacks consists of an array of Elements, ordered in
- * terms of levels in the window hierarchy.  All the elements relevant
- * for the top-level widget appear first in the array, followed by all
- * those from the next-level widget on the path to the current widget,
- * etc. down to those for the current widget.
- *
- * Cached information is divided into eight stacks according to the
- * CLASS, NODE, and WILDCARD flags.  Leaf and non-leaf information is
- * kept separate to speed up individual probes (non-leaf information is
- * only relevant when building the stacks, but isn't relevant when
- * making probes;  similarly, only non-leaf information is relevant
- * when the stacks are being extended to the next widget down in the
- * widget hierarchy).  Wildcard elements are handled separately from
- * "exact" elements because once they appear at a particular level in
- * the stack they remain active for all deeper levels;  exact elements
- * are only relevant at a particular level.  For example, when searching
- * for options relevant in a particular window, the entire wildcard
- * stacks get checked, but only the portions of the exact stacks that
- * pertain to the window's parent.  Lastly, name and class stacks are
- * kept separate because different search keys are used when searching
- * them;  keeping them separate speeds up the searches.
+ * there are eight additional structures called "stacks", which are used to
+ * speed up queries into the option database. The stack structures are
+ * designed for the situation where an individual widget makes repeated
+ * requests for its particular options. The requests differ only in their last
+ * name/class, so during the first request we extract all the options
+ * pertaining to the particular widget and save them in a stack-like cache;
+ * subsequent requests for the same widget can search the cache relatively
+ * quickly. In fact, the cache is a hierarchical one, storing a list of
+ * relevant options for this widget and all of its ancestors up to the
+ * application root; hence the name "stack".
+ *
+ * Each of the eight stacks consists of an array of Elements, ordered in terms
+ * of levels in the window hierarchy. All the elements relevant for the
+ * top-level widget appear first in the array, followed by all those from the
+ * next-level widget on the path to the current widget, etc. down to those for
+ * the current widget.
+ *
+ * Cached information is divided into eight stacks according to the CLASS,
+ * NODE, and WILDCARD flags. Leaf and non-leaf information is kept separate to
+ * speed up individual probes (non-leaf information is only relevant when
+ * building the stacks, but isn't relevant when making probes; similarly, only
+ * non-leaf information is relevant when the stacks are being extended to the
+ * next widget down in the widget hierarchy). Wildcard elements are handled
+ * separately from "exact" elements because once they appear at a particular
+ * level in the stack they remain active for all deeper levels; exact elements
+ * are only relevant at a particular level. For example, when searching for
+ * options relevant in a particular window, the entire wildcard stacks get
+ * checked, but only the portions of the exact stacks that pertain to the
+ * window's parent. Lastly, name and class stacks are kept separate because
+ * different search keys are used when searching them; keeping them separate
+ * speeds up the searches.
  */
 
 #define NUM_STACKS 8
 
 /*
- * One of the following structures is used to keep track of each
- * level in the stacks.
+ * One of the following structures is used to keep track of each level in the
+ * stacks.
  */
 
 typedef struct StackLevel {
     TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window corresponding to this stack
 				 * level. */
-    int bases[NUM_STACKS];	/* For each stack, index of first
-				 * element on stack corresponding to
-				 * this level (used to restore "numUsed"
-				 * fields when popping out of a level. */
+    int bases[NUM_STACKS];	/* For each stack, index of first element on
+				 * stack corresponding to this level (used to
+				 * restore "numUsed" fields when popping out
+				 * of a level. */
 } StackLevel;
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
@@ -190,59 +184,51 @@ typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
 				 * for the current thread needs to be
 				 * initialized. */
     ElArray *stacks[NUM_STACKS];
-    TkWindow *cachedWindow;
-                                /* Lowest-level window currently
-				 * loaded in stacks at present. 
-				 * NULL means stacks have never
-				 * been used, or have been
-				 * invalidated because of a change
-				 * to the database. */
+    TkWindow *cachedWindow;	/* Lowest-level window currently loaded in
+				 * stacks at present. NULL means stacks have
+				 * never been used, or have been invalidated
+				 * because of a change to the database. */
     /*
-     * Information about all of the stack levels that are currently
-     * active.  This array grows dynamically to become as large as needed.
+     * Information about all of the stack levels that are currently active.
+     * This array grows dynamically to become as large as needed.
      */
 
     StackLevel *levels;	        /* Array describing current stack. */
     int numLevels;	        /* Total space allocated. */
-    int curLevel;	        /* Highest level currently in use.  Note:
-				 * curLevel is never 0!  (I don't remember
-				 * why anymore...) */
-    /*
-     * The variable below is a serial number for all options entered into
-     * the database so far.  It increments on each addition to the option
-     * database.  It is used in computing option priorities, so that the
-     * most recent entry wins when choosing between options at the same
-     * priority level.
-     */
-
-    int serial;
-    Element defaultMatch;       /* Special "no match" Element to use as 
+    int curLevel;	        /* Highest level currently in use. Note:
+				 * curLevel is never 0! (I don't remember why
+				 * anymore...) */
+    int serial;			/* A serial number for all options entered
+				 * into the database so far. It increments on
+				 * each addition to the option database. It is
+				 * used in computing option priorities, so
+				 * that the most recent entry wins when
+				 * choosing between options at the same
+				 * priority level.
+				 */
+    Element defaultMatch;       /* Special "no match" Element to use as
 				 * default for searches.*/
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static int		AddFromString _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *string, int priority));
-static void		ClearOptionTree _ANSI_ARGS_((ElArray *arrayPtr));
-static ElArray *	ExtendArray _ANSI_ARGS_((ElArray *arrayPtr,
-			    Element *elPtr));
-static void		ExtendStacks _ANSI_ARGS_((ElArray *arrayPtr,
-			    int leaf));
-static int		GetDefaultOptions _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkWindow *winPtr));	
-static ElArray *	NewArray _ANSI_ARGS_((int numEls));	
-static void		OptionThreadExitProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		OptionInit _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMainInfo *mainPtr));
-static int		ParsePriority _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    char *string));
-static int		ReadOptionFile _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *fileName, int priority));
-static void		SetupStacks _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, int leaf));
+static int		AddFromString(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    char *string, int priority);
+static void		ClearOptionTree(ElArray *arrayPtr);
+static ElArray *	ExtendArray(ElArray *arrayPtr, Element *elPtr);
+static void		ExtendStacks(ElArray *arrayPtr, int leaf);
+static int		GetDefaultOptions(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkWindow *winPtr);
+static ElArray *	NewArray(int numEls);
+static void		OptionThreadExitProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		OptionInit(TkMainInfo *mainPtr);
+static int		ParsePriority(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *string);
+static int		ReadOptionFile(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    char *fileName, int priority);
+static void		SetupStacks(TkWindow *winPtr, int leaf);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -262,14 +248,14 @@ static void		SetupStacks _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr, int leaf));
 
 void
 Tk_AddOption(tkwin, name, value, priority)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window token;  option will be associated
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window token; option will be associated
 				 * with main window for this window. */
     CONST char *name;		/* Multi-element name of option. */
     CONST char *value;		/* String value for option. */
-    int priority;		/* Overall priority level to use for
-				 * this option, such as TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO
-				 * or TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO.  Must be between
-				 * 0 and TK_MAX_PRIO. */
+    int priority;		/* Overall priority level to use for this
+				 * option, such as TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO or
+				 * TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO. Must be between 0 and
+				 * TK_MAX_PRIO. */
 {
     TkWindow *winPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->winPtr;
     register ElArray **arrayPtrPtr;
@@ -280,18 +266,17 @@ Tk_AddOption(tkwin, name, value, priority)
     int count, firstField, length;
 #define TMP_SIZE 100
     char tmp[TMP_SIZE+1];
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (winPtr->mainPtr->optionRootPtr == NULL) {
 	OptionInit(winPtr->mainPtr);
     }
-    tsdPtr->cachedWindow = NULL;	/* Invalidate the cache. */
+    tsdPtr->cachedWindow = NULL;/* Invalidate the cache. */
 
     /*
-     * Compute the priority for the new element, including both the
-     * overall level and the serial number (to disambiguate with the
-     * level).
+     * Compute the priority for the new element, including both the overall
+     * level and the serial number (to disambiguate with the level).
      */
 
     if (priority < 0) {
@@ -309,11 +294,10 @@ Tk_AddOption(tkwin, name, value, priority)
     arrayPtrPtr = &(((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->optionRootPtr);
     p = name;
     for (firstField = 1; ; firstField = 0) {
-
 	/*
-	 * Scan the next field from the name and convert it to a Tk_Uid.
-	 * Must copy the field before calling Tk_Uid, so that a terminating
-	 * NULL may be added without modifying the source string.
+	 * Scan the next field from the name and convert it to a Tk_Uid. Must
+	 * copy the field before calling Tk_Uid, so that a terminating NULL
+	 * may be added without modifying the source string.
 	 */
 
 	if (*p == '*') {
@@ -338,12 +322,10 @@ Tk_AddOption(tkwin, name, value, priority)
 	}
 
 	if (*p != 0) {
-
 	    /*
-	     * New element will be a node.  If this option can't possibly
-	     * apply to this main window, then just skip it.  Otherwise,
-	     * add it to the parent, if it isn't already there, and descend
-	     * into it.
+	     * New element will be a node. If this option can't possibly apply
+	     * to this main window, then just skip it. Otherwise, add it to
+	     * the parent, if it isn't already there, and descend into it.
 	     */
 
 	    newEl.flags |= NODE;
@@ -370,11 +352,10 @@ Tk_AddOption(tkwin, name, value, priority)
 		p++;
 	    }
 	} else {
-
 	    /*
-	     * New element is a leaf.  Add it to the parent, if it isn't
-	     * already there.  If it exists already, keep whichever value
-	     * has highest priority.
+	     * New element is a leaf. Add it to the parent, if it isn't
+	     * already there. If it exists already, keep whichever value has
+	     * highest priority.
 	     */
 
 	    newEl.child.valueUid = Tk_GetUid(value);
@@ -405,27 +386,26 @@ Tk_AddOption(tkwin, name, value, priority)
  *	Retrieve an option from the option database.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the value specified in the option
- *	database for the given name and class on the given
- *	window.  If there is nothing specified in the database
- *	for that option, then NULL is returned.
+ *	The return value is the value specified in the option database for the
+ *	given name and class on the given window. If there is nothing
+ *	specified in the database for that option, then NULL is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The internal caches used to speed up option mapping
- *	may be modified, if this tkwin is different from the
- *	last tkwin used for option retrieval.
+ *	The internal caches used to speed up option mapping may be modified,
+ *	if this tkwin is different from the last tkwin used for option
+ *	retrieval.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 Tk_Uid
 Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window that option is
-				 * associated with. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window that option is associated
+				 * with. */
     CONST char *name;		/* Name of option. */
-    CONST char *className;	/* Class of option.  NULL means there
-				 * is no class for this option:  just
-				 * check for name. */
+    CONST char *className;	/* Class of option. NULL means there is no
+				 * class for this option: just check for
+				 * name. */
 {
     Tk_Uid nameId, classId = NULL;
     char *masqName;
@@ -433,12 +413,12 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
     register int count;
     StackLevel *levelPtr;
     int stackDepth[NUM_STACKS];
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
-     * Note:  no need to call OptionInit here:  it will be done by
-     * the SetupStacks call below (squeeze out those nanoseconds).
+     * Note: no need to call OptionInit here: it will be done by the
+     * SetupStacks call below (squeeze out those nanoseconds).
      */
 
     if (tkwin != (Tk_Window) tsdPtr->cachedWindow) {
@@ -448,32 +428,33 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
     /*
      * Get a default "best" match.
      */
-    
+
     bestPtr = &tsdPtr->defaultMatch;
 
     /*
      * For megawidget support, we want to have some widget options masquerade
-     * as options for other widgets.  For example, a combobox has a button in
+     * as options for other widgets. For example, a combobox has a button in
      * it; this button ought to pick up the *Button.background, etc., options.
      * But because the class of the widget is Combobox, our normal search
      * won't get that option.
      *
      * To work around this, the option name field syntax was extended to allow
      * for a "." in the name; if this character occurs in the name, then it
-     * indicates that this name contains a new window class and an option name,
-     * ie, "Button.foreground".  If we see this form in the name field, we 
-     * query the option database directly (since the option stacks will not
+     * indicates that this name contains a new window class and an option
+     * name, ie, "Button.foreground". If we see this form in the name field,
+     * we query the option database directly (since the option stacks will not
      * have the information we need).
      */
 
     masqName = strchr(name, (int)'.');
     if (masqName != NULL) {
 	/*
-	 * This option is masquerading with a different window class.
-	 * Search the stack to the depth it was before the current window's
+	 * This option is masquerading with a different window class. Search
+	 * the stack to the depth it was before the current window's
 	 * information was pushed (the value for which is stored in the bases
 	 * field).
 	 */
+
 	levelPtr = &tsdPtr->levels[tsdPtr->curLevel];
 	nameId = Tk_GetUid(masqName+1);
 	for (count = 0; count < NUM_STACKS; count++) {
@@ -481,9 +462,10 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
 	}
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * No option masquerading here.  Just use the current level to get the
+	 * No option masquerading here. Just use the current level to get the
 	 * stack depths.
 	 */
+
 	nameId = Tk_GetUid(name);
 	for (count = 0; count < NUM_STACKS; count++) {
 	    stackDepth[count] = tsdPtr->stacks[count]->numUsed;
@@ -530,11 +512,11 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
 	    }
 	}
     }
-    
+
     /*
-     * If this option was masquerading with a different window class,
-     * probe the option database now.  Note that this will be inefficient
-     * if the option database is densely populated, or if the widget has many
+     * If this option was masquerading with a different window class, probe
+     * the option database now. Note that this will be inefficient if the
+     * option database is densely populated, or if the widget has many
      * masquerading options.
      */
 
@@ -543,43 +525,42 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
 	Tk_Uid nodeId, winClassId, winNameId;
 	unsigned int classNameLength;
 	register Element *nodePtr, *leafPtr;
-	static int searchOrder[] = { EXACT_NODE_NAME,
-					 WILDCARD_NODE_NAME,
-					 EXACT_NODE_CLASS,
-					 WILDCARD_NODE_CLASS,
-					 -1 };
+	static int searchOrder[] = {
+	    EXACT_NODE_NAME, WILDCARD_NODE_NAME, EXACT_NODE_CLASS,
+	    WILDCARD_NODE_CLASS, -1
+	};
 	int *currentPtr, currentStack, leafCount;
-	
+
 	/*
 	 * Extract the masquerade class name from the name field.
 	 */
-	
+
 	classNameLength	= (unsigned int)(masqName - name);
-	masqClass	= (char *)ckalloc(classNameLength + 1);
+	masqClass = (char *) ckalloc(classNameLength + 1);
 	strncpy(masqClass, name, classNameLength);
 	masqClass[classNameLength] = '\0';
-	
-	winClassId	= Tk_GetUid(masqClass);
+
+	winClassId = Tk_GetUid(masqClass);
 	ckfree(masqClass);
-	winNameId	= ((TkWindow *)tkwin)->nameUid;
+	winNameId = ((TkWindow *)tkwin)->nameUid;
 
 	levelPtr = &tsdPtr->levels[tsdPtr->curLevel];
 
 	for (currentPtr = searchOrder; *currentPtr != -1; currentPtr++) {
 	    currentStack = *currentPtr;
-	    nodePtr	= tsdPtr->stacks[currentStack]->els;
-	    count	= levelPtr->bases[currentStack];
+	    nodePtr = tsdPtr->stacks[currentStack]->els;
+	    count = levelPtr->bases[currentStack];
 
 	    /*
-	     * For wildcard stacks, check all entries;  for non-wildcard
+	     * For wildcard stacks, check all entries; for non-wildcard
 	     * stacks, only check things that matched in the parent.
 	     */
-	    
+
 	    if (!(currentStack & WILDCARD)) {
 		nodePtr += levelPtr[-1].bases[currentStack];
 		count	-= levelPtr[-1].bases[currentStack];
 	    }
-	    
+
 	    if (currentStack && CLASS) {
 		nodeId = winClassId;
 	    } else {
@@ -588,8 +569,8 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
 
 	    for ( ; count > 0; nodePtr++, count--) {
 		if (nodePtr->nameUid == nodeId) {
-		    leafPtr	= nodePtr->child.arrayPtr->els;
-		    leafCount	= nodePtr->child.arrayPtr->numUsed;
+		    leafPtr = nodePtr->child.arrayPtr->els;
+		    leafCount = nodePtr->child.arrayPtr->numUsed;
 		    for ( ; leafCount > 0; leafPtr++, leafCount--) {
 			if (leafPtr->flags & CLASS && className != NULL) {
 			    if (leafPtr->nameUid == classId &&
@@ -607,7 +588,7 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
 	    }
 	}
     }
-    
+
     return bestPtr->child.valueUid;
 }
 
@@ -616,8 +597,8 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
  *
  * Tk_OptionObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "option" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "option" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -630,15 +611,14 @@ Tk_GetOption(tkwin, name, className)
 
 int
 Tk_OptionObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
     int objc;			/* Number of Tcl_Obj arguments. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Tcl_Obj arguments. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
     int index, result;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     static CONST char *optionCmds[] = {
@@ -659,85 +639,85 @@ Tk_OptionObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     if (result != TCL_OK) {
 	return result;
     }
-    
+
     result = TCL_OK;
     switch ((enum optionVals) index) {
-	case OPTION_ADD: {
-	    int priority;
-	    if ((objc != 4) && (objc != 5)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pattern value ?priority?");
+    case OPTION_ADD: {
+	int priority;
+	if ((objc != 4) && (objc != 5)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "pattern value ?priority?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	if (objc == 4) {
+	    priority = TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO;
+	} else {
+	    priority = ParsePriority(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
+	    if (priority < 0) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
+	}
+	Tk_AddOption(tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+		priority);
+	break;
+    }
 
-	    if (objc == 4) {
-		priority = TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO;
-	    } else {
-		priority = ParsePriority(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
-		if (priority < 0) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    }
-	    Tk_AddOption(tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), priority);
-	    break;
+    case OPTION_CLEAR: {
+	TkMainInfo *mainPtr;
+
+	if (objc != 2) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	mainPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr;
+	if (mainPtr->optionRootPtr != NULL) {
+	    ClearOptionTree(mainPtr->optionRootPtr);
+	    mainPtr->optionRootPtr = NULL;
 	}
+	tsdPtr->cachedWindow = NULL;
+	break;
+    }
 
-	case OPTION_CLEAR: {
-	    TkMainInfo *mainPtr;
+    case OPTION_GET: {
+	Tk_Window window;
+	Tk_Uid value;
 
-	    if (objc != 2) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    mainPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr;
-	    if (mainPtr->optionRootPtr != NULL) {
-		ClearOptionTree(mainPtr->optionRootPtr);
-		mainPtr->optionRootPtr = NULL;
-	    }
-	    tsdPtr->cachedWindow = NULL;
-	    break;
+	if (objc != 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window name class");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	window = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), tkwin);
+	if (window == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
+	value = Tk_GetOption(window, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+		Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
+	if (value != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *)value, TCL_STATIC);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
 
-	case OPTION_GET: {
-	    Tk_Window window;
-	    Tk_Uid value;
-	    
-	    if (objc != 5) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "window name class");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    window = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]), tkwin);
-	    if (window == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    value = Tk_GetOption(window, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
-		    Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
-	    if (value != NULL) {
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *)value, TCL_STATIC);
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case OPTION_READFILE: {
+	int priority;
+
+	if ((objc != 3) && (objc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fileName ?priority?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
-	case OPTION_READFILE: {
-	    int priority;
-	    
-	    if ((objc != 3) && (objc != 4)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fileName ?priority?");
+	if (objc == 4) {
+	    priority = ParsePriority(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
+	    if (priority < 0) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-
-	    if (objc == 4) {
-		priority = ParsePriority(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]));
-		if (priority < 0) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    } else {
-		priority = TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO;
-	    }
-	    result = ReadOptionFile(interp, tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-		    priority);
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    priority = TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO;
 	}
+	result = ReadOptionFile(interp, tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		priority);
+	break;
+    }
     }
     return result;
 }
@@ -747,16 +727,14 @@ Tk_OptionObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkOptionDeadWindow --
  *
- *	This procedure is called whenever a window is deleted.
- *	It cleans up any option-related stuff associated with
- *	the window.
+ *	This function is called whenever a window is deleted. It cleans up any
+ *	option-related stuff associated with the window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Option-related resources are freed.  See code below
- *	for details.
+ *	Option-related resources are freed. See code below for details.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -765,7 +743,7 @@ void
 TkOptionDeadWindow(winPtr)
     register TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to be cleaned up. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
@@ -783,8 +761,7 @@ TkOptionDeadWindow(winPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If this window was a main window, then delete its option
-     * database.
+     * If this window was a main window, then delete its option database.
      */
 
     if ((winPtr->mainPtr != NULL) && (winPtr->mainPtr->winPtr == winPtr)
@@ -799,10 +776,9 @@ TkOptionDeadWindow(winPtr)
  *
  * TkOptionClassChanged --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a window's class changes.  If
- *	the window is on the option cache, this procedure flushes
- *	any information for the window, since the new class could change
- *	what is relevant.
+ *	This function is invoked when a window's class changes. If the window
+ *	is on the option cache, this function flushes any information for the
+ *	window, since the new class could change what is relevant.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -819,7 +795,7 @@ TkOptionClassChanged(winPtr)
 {
     int i, j, *basePtr;
     ElArray *arrayPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (winPtr->optionLevel == -1) {
@@ -827,8 +803,8 @@ TkOptionClassChanged(winPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find the lowest stack level that refers to this window, then
-     * flush all of the levels above the matching one.
+     * Find the lowest stack level that refers to this window, then flush all
+     * of the levels above the matching one.
      */
 
     for (i = 1; i <= tsdPtr->curLevel; i++) {
@@ -861,9 +837,9 @@ TkOptionClassChanged(winPtr)
  *	Parse a string priority value.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the integer priority level corresponding
- *	to string, or -1 if string doesn't point to a valid priority level.
- *	In this case, an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is the integer priority level corresponding to
+ *	string, or -1 if string doesn't point to a valid priority level. In
+ *	this case, an error message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -915,17 +891,17 @@ ParsePriority(interp, string)
  *
  * AddFromString --
  *
- *	Given a string containing lines in the standard format for
- *	X resources (see other documentation for details on what this
- *	is), parse the resource specifications and enter them as options
- *	for tkwin's main window.
+ *	Given a string containing lines in the standard format for X resources
+ *	(see other documentation for details on what this is), parse the
+ *	resource specifications and enter them as options for tkwin's main
+ *	window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return code.  In the case of
- *	an error in parsing string, TCL_ERROR will be returned and an
- *	error message will be left in the interp's result.  The memory at
- *	string is totally trashed by this procedure.  If you care about
- *	its contents, make a copy before calling here.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return code. In the case of an
+ *	error in parsing string, TCL_ERROR will be returned and an error
+ *	message will be left in the interp's result. The memory at string is
+ *	totally trashed by this function. If you care about its contents, make
+ *	a copy before calling here.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -936,13 +912,13 @@ ParsePriority(interp, string)
 static int
 AddFromString(interp, tkwin, string, priority)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting results. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window:  options are entered
-				 * for this window's main window. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window: options are entered for
+				 * this window's main window. */
     char *string;		/* String containing option specifiers. */
-    int priority;		/* Priority level to use for options in
-				 * this string, such as TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO
-				 * or TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO.  Must be between
-				 * 0 and TK_MAX_PRIO. */
+    int priority;		/* Priority level to use for options in this
+				 * string, such as TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO or
+				 * TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO. Must be between 0 and
+				 * TK_MAX_PRIO. */
 {
     register char *src, *dst;
     char *name, *value;
@@ -973,7 +949,7 @@ AddFromString(interp, tkwin, string, priority)
 	    src++;
 	    lineNum++;
 	    continue;
-	} 
+	}
 	if (*src == '\0') {
 	    break;
 	}
@@ -987,7 +963,7 @@ AddFromString(interp, tkwin, string, priority)
 	while (*src != ':') {
 	    if ((*src == '\0') || (*src == '\n')) {
 		char buf[32 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-		
+
 		sprintf(buf, "missing colon on line %d", lineNum);
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1022,7 +998,7 @@ AddFromString(interp, tkwin, string, priority)
 	}
 	if (*src == '\0') {
 	    char buf[32 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	    
+
 	    sprintf(buf, "missing value on line %d", lineNum);
 	    Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1037,7 +1013,7 @@ AddFromString(interp, tkwin, string, priority)
 	while (*src != '\n') {
 	    if (*src == '\0') {
 		char buf[32 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-		
+
 		sprintf(buf, "missing newline on line %d", lineNum);
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1069,13 +1045,13 @@ AddFromString(interp, tkwin, string, priority)
  *
  * ReadOptionFile --
  *
- * 	Read a file of options ("resources" in the old X terminology)
- *	and load them into the option database.
+ *	Read a file of options ("resources" in the old X terminology) and load
+ *	them into the option database.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return code.  In the case of
- *	an error in parsing string, TCL_ERROR will be returned and an
- *	error message will be left in the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return code. In the case of an
+ *	error in parsing string, TCL_ERROR will be returned and an error
+ *	message will be left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1086,13 +1062,13 @@ AddFromString(interp, tkwin, string, priority)
 static int
 ReadOptionFile(interp, tkwin, fileName, priority)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting results. */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window:  options are entered
-				 * for this window's main window. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window: options are entered for
+				 * this window's main window. */
     char *fileName;		/* Name of file containing options. */
-    int priority;		/* Priority level to use for options in
-				 * this file, such as TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO
-				 * or TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO.  Must be between
-				 * 0 and TK_MAX_PRIO. */
+    int priority;		/* Priority level to use for options in this
+				 * file, such as TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO or
+				 * TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO. Must be between 0 and
+				 * TK_MAX_PRIO. */
 {
     CONST char *realName;
     char *buffer;
@@ -1103,13 +1079,13 @@ ReadOptionFile(interp, tkwin, fileName, priority)
     /*
      * Prevent file system access in a safe interpreter.
      */
-    
+
     if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
         Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't read options from a file in a",
                 " safe interpreter", (char *) NULL);
         return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
+
     realName = Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, fileName, &newName);
     if (realName == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1124,10 +1100,10 @@ ReadOptionFile(interp, tkwin, fileName, priority)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Compute size of file by seeking to the end of the file.  This will
+     * Compute size of file by seeking to the end of the file. This will
      * overallocate if we are performing CRLF translation.
      */
-    
+
     bufferSize = (int) Tcl_Seek(chan, (Tcl_WideInt) 0, SEEK_END);
     (void) Tcl_Seek(chan, (Tcl_WideInt) 0, SEEK_SET);
 
@@ -1161,9 +1137,8 @@ ReadOptionFile(interp, tkwin, fileName, priority)
  *	Create a new ElArray structure of a given size.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to a properly initialized
- *	element array with "numEls" space.  The array is marked
- *	as having no active elements.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to a properly initialized element array
+ *	with "numEls" space. The array is marked as having no active elements.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory is allocated.
@@ -1189,12 +1164,11 @@ NewArray(numEls)
  *
  * ExtendArray --
  *
- *	Add a new element to an array, extending the array if
- *	necessary.
+ *	Add a new element to an array, extending the array if necessary.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the new array, which
- *	will be different from arrayPtr if the array got expanded.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the new array, which will be
+ *	different from arrayPtr if the array got expanded.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory may be allocated or freed.
@@ -1204,8 +1178,8 @@ NewArray(numEls)
 
 static ElArray *
 ExtendArray(arrayPtr, elPtr)
-    register ElArray *arrayPtr;		/* Array to be extended. */
-    register Element *elPtr;		/* Element to be copied into array. */
+    register ElArray *arrayPtr;	/* Array to be extended. */
+    register Element *elPtr;	/* Element to be copied into array. */
 {
     /*
      * If the current array has filled up, make it bigger.
@@ -1235,40 +1209,40 @@ ExtendArray(arrayPtr, elPtr)
  *
  * SetupStacks --
  *
- *	Arrange the stacks so that they cache all the option
- *	information for a particular window.
+ *	Arrange the stacks so that they cache all the option information for a
+ *	particular window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The stacks are modified to hold information for tkwin
- *	and all its ancestors in the window hierarchy.
+ *	The stacks are modified to hold information for tkwin and all its
+ *	ancestors in the window hierarchy.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
-    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window for which information is to
-				 * be cached. */
-    int leaf;			/* Non-zero means this is the leaf
-				 * window being probed.  Zero means this
-				 * is an ancestor of the desired leaf. */
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window for which information is to be
+				 * cached. */
+    int leaf;			/* Non-zero means this is the leaf window
+				 * being probed. Zero means this is an
+				 * ancestor of the desired leaf. */
 {
     int level, i, *iPtr;
     register StackLevel *levelPtr;
     register ElArray *arrayPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     /*
-     * The following array defines the order in which the current
-     * stacks are searched to find matching entries to add to the
-     * stacks.  Given the current priority-based scheme, the order
-     * below is no longer relevant;  all that matters is that an
-     * element is on the list *somewhere*.  The ordering is a relic
-     * of the old days when priorities were determined differently.
+     * The following array defines the order in which the current stacks are
+     * searched to find matching entries to add to the stacks. Given the
+     * current priority-based scheme, the order below is no longer relevant;
+     * all that matters is that an element is on the list *somewhere*. The
+     * ordering is a relic of the old days when priorities were determined
+     * differently.
      */
 
     static int searchOrder[] = {WILDCARD_NODE_CLASS, WILDCARD_NODE_NAME,
@@ -1279,8 +1253,7 @@ SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Step 1:  make sure that options are cached for this window's
-     * parent.
+     * Step 1: make sure that options are cached for this window's parent.
      */
 
     if (winPtr->parentPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1295,8 +1268,8 @@ SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Step 2:  pop extra unneeded information off the stacks and
-     * mark those windows as no longer having cached information.
+     * Step 2: pop extra unneeded information off the stacks and mark those
+     * windows as no longer having cached information.
      */
 
     if (tsdPtr->curLevel >= level) {
@@ -1314,9 +1287,9 @@ SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
     tsdPtr->curLevel = winPtr->optionLevel = level;
 
     /*
-     * Step 3:  if the root database information isn't loaded or
-     * isn't valid, initialize level 0 of the stack from the
-     * database root (this only happens if winPtr is a main window).
+     * Step 3: if the root database information isn't loaded or isn't valid,
+     * initialize level 0 of the stack from the database root (this only
+     * happens if winPtr is a main window).
      */
 
     if ((tsdPtr->curLevel == 1)
@@ -1331,10 +1304,9 @@ SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Step 4: create a new stack level;  grow the level array if
-     * we've run out of levels.  Clear the stacks for EXACT_LEAF_NAME
-     * and EXACT_LEAF_CLASS (anything that was there is of no use
-     * any more).
+     * Step 4: create a new stack level; grow the level array if we've run out
+     * of levels. Clear the stacks for EXACT_LEAF_NAME and EXACT_LEAF_CLASS
+     * (anything that was there is of no use any more).
      */
 
     if (tsdPtr->curLevel >= tsdPtr->numLevels) {
@@ -1359,10 +1331,10 @@ SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
     for (i = 0; i < NUM_STACKS; i++) {
 	levelPtr->bases[i] = tsdPtr->stacks[i]->numUsed;
     }
+
     /*
      * Step 5: scan the current stack level looking for matches to this
-     * window's name or class;  where found, add new information to the
-     * stacks.
+     * window's name or class; where found, add new information to the stacks.
      */
 
     for (iPtr = searchOrder; *iPtr != -1; iPtr++) {
@@ -1380,8 +1352,8 @@ SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
 	count = levelPtr->bases[i];
 
 	/*
-	 * For wildcard stacks, check all entries;  for non-wildcard
-	 * stacks, only check things that matched in the parent.
+	 * For wildcard stacks, check all entries; for non-wildcard stacks,
+	 * only check things that matched in the parent.
 	 */
 
 	if (!(i & WILDCARD)) {
@@ -1403,9 +1375,8 @@ SetupStacks(winPtr, leaf)
  *
  * ExtendStacks --
  *
- *	Given an element array, copy all the elements from the
- *	array onto the system stacks (except for irrelevant leaf
- *	elements).
+ *	Given an element array, copy all the elements from the array onto the
+ *	system stacks (except for irrelevant leaf elements).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1424,7 +1395,7 @@ ExtendStacks(arrayPtr, leaf)
 {
     register int count;
     register Element *elPtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     for (elPtr = arrayPtr->els, count = arrayPtr->numUsed;
@@ -1457,7 +1428,7 @@ static void
 OptionThreadExitProc(clientData)
     ClientData clientData;	/* not used */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (tsdPtr->initialized) {
@@ -1488,20 +1459,20 @@ OptionThreadExitProc(clientData)
 
 static void
 OptionInit(mainPtr)
-    register TkMainInfo *mainPtr;	/* Top-level information about
-					 * window that isn't initialized
-					 * yet. */
+    register TkMainInfo *mainPtr;
+				/* Top-level information about window that
+				 * isn't initialized yet. */
 {
     int i;
     Tcl_Interp *interp;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
             Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     Element *defaultMatchPtr = &tsdPtr->defaultMatch;
 
     /*
      * First, once-only initialization.
      */
-    
+
     if (tsdPtr->initialized == 0) {
         tsdPtr->initialized = 1;
         tsdPtr->cachedWindow = NULL;
@@ -1509,13 +1480,13 @@ OptionInit(mainPtr)
 	tsdPtr->curLevel = -1;
 	tsdPtr->serial = 0;
 
-	tsdPtr->levels = (StackLevel *) ckalloc((unsigned) 
+	tsdPtr->levels = (StackLevel *) ckalloc((unsigned)
                 (5*sizeof(StackLevel)));
 	for (i = 0; i < NUM_STACKS; i++) {
 	    tsdPtr->stacks[i] = NewArray(10);
 	    tsdPtr->levels[0].bases[i] = 0;
 	}
-    
+
 	defaultMatchPtr->nameUid = NULL;
 	defaultMatchPtr->child.valueUid = NULL;
 	defaultMatchPtr->priority = -1;
@@ -1524,7 +1495,7 @@ OptionInit(mainPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Then, per-main-window initialization.  Create and delete dummy
+     * Then, per-main-window initialization. Create and delete dummy
      * interpreter for message logging.
      */
 
@@ -1539,23 +1510,22 @@ OptionInit(mainPtr)
  *
  * ClearOptionTree --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to erase everything in a
- *	hierarchical option database.
+ *	This function is called to erase everything in a hierarchical option
+ *	database.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	All the options associated with arrayPtr are deleted,
- *	along with all option subtrees.  The space pointed to
- *	by arrayPtr is freed.
+ *	All the options associated with arrayPtr are deleted, along with all
+ *	option subtrees. The space pointed to by arrayPtr is freed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 ClearOptionTree(arrayPtr)
-    ElArray *arrayPtr;		/* Array of options;  delete everything
+    ElArray *arrayPtr;		/* Array of options; delete everything
 				 * referred to recursively by this. */
 {
     register Element *elPtr;
@@ -1575,17 +1545,16 @@ ClearOptionTree(arrayPtr)
  *
  * GetDefaultOptions --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to load the default set of options
- *	for a window.
+ *	This function is invoked to load the default set of options for a
+ *	window.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Options are added to those for winPtr's main window.  If
- *	there exists a RESOURCE_MANAGER proprety for winPtr's
- *	display, that is used.  Otherwise, the .Xdefaults file in
- *	the user's home directory is used.
+ *	Options are added to those for winPtr's main window. If there exists a
+ *	RESOURCE_MANAGER proprety for winPtr's display, that is used.
+ *	Otherwise, the .Xdefaults file in the user's home directory is used.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1621,8 +1590,7 @@ GetDefaultOptions(interp, winPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * No luck there.  Try a .Xdefaults file in the user's home
-     * directory.
+     * No luck there. Try a .Xdefaults file in the user's home directory.
      */
 
     if (regProp != NULL) {
@@ -1632,3 +1600,11 @@ GetDefaultOptions(interp, winPtr)
 	    TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO);
     return result;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkPack.c b/generic/tkPack.c
index 269e395..105bca0 100644
--- a/generic/tkPack.c
+++ b/generic/tkPack.c
@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkPack.c --
  *
- *	This file contains code to implement the "packer"
- *	geometry manager for Tk.
+ *	This file contains code to implement the "packer" geometry manager for
+ *	Tk.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkPack.c,v 1.21 2005/01/11 10:35:27 dkf Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkPack.c,v 1.22 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tkPort.h"
@@ -28,70 +28,68 @@ static CONST char *sideNames[] = {
  */
 
 typedef struct Packer {
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk token for window.  NULL means that
-				 * the window has been deleted, but the
-				 * packet hasn't had a chance to clean up
-				 * yet because the structure is still in
-				 * use. */
-    struct Packer *masterPtr;	/* Master window within which this window
-				 * is packed (NULL means this window
-				 * isn't managed by the packer). */
-    struct Packer *nextPtr;	/* Next window packed within same
-				 * master.  List is priority-ordered:
-				 * first on list gets packed first. */
-    struct Packer *slavePtr;	/* First in list of slaves packed
-				 * inside this window (NULL means
-				 * no packed slaves). */
-    Side side;			/* Side of master against which
-				 * this window is packed. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk token for window. NULL means that the
+				 * window has been deleted, but the packet
+				 * hasn't had a chance to clean up yet because
+				 * the structure is still in use. */
+    struct Packer *masterPtr;	/* Master window within which this window is
+				 * packed (NULL means this window isn't
+				 * managed by the packer). */
+    struct Packer *nextPtr;	/* Next window packed within same master.
+				 * List is priority-ordered: first on list
+				 * gets packed first. */
+    struct Packer *slavePtr;	/* First in list of slaves packed inside this
+				 * window (NULL means no packed slaves). */
+    Side side;			/* Side of master against which this window is
+				 * packed. */
     Tk_Anchor anchor;		/* If frame allocated for window is larger
-				 * than window needs, this indicates how
-				 * where to position window in frame. */
+				 * than window needs, this indicates how where
+				 * to position window in frame. */
     int padX, padY;		/* Total additional pixels to leave around the
-				 * window.  Some is of this space is on each 
-				 * side.  This is space *outside* the window:
+				 * window. Some is of this space is on each
+				 * side. This is space *outside* the window:
 				 * we'll allocate extra space in frame but
 				 * won't enlarge window). */
-    int padLeft, padTop;	/* The part of padX or padY to use on the
-				 * left or top of the widget, respectively.
-				 * By default, this is half of padX or padY. */
+    int padLeft, padTop;	/* The part of padX or padY to use on the left
+				 * or top of the widget, respectively. By
+				 * default, this is half of padX or padY. */
     int iPadX, iPadY;		/* Total extra pixels to allocate inside the
 				 * window (half of this amount will appear on
 				 * each side). */
-    int doubleBw;		/* Twice the window's last known border
-				 * width.  If this changes, the window
-				 * must be repacked within its master. */
-    int *abortPtr;		/* If non-NULL, it means that there is a nested
-				 * call to ArrangePacking already working on
-				 * this window.  *abortPtr may be set to 1 to
-				 * abort that nested call.  This happens, for
-				 * example, if tkwin or any of its slaves
-				 * is deleted. */
-    int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flags;  see below
-				 * for definitions. */
+    int doubleBw;		/* Twice the window's last known border width.
+				 * If this changes, the window must be
+				 * repacked within its master. */
+    int *abortPtr;		/* If non-NULL, it means that there is a
+				 * nested call to ArrangePacking already
+				 * working on this window. *abortPtr may be
+				 * set to 1 to abort that nested call. This
+				 * happens, for example, if tkwin or any of
+				 * its slaves is deleted. */
+    int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flags; see below for
+				 * definitions. */
 } Packer;
 
 /*
  * Flag values for Packer structures:
  *
- * REQUESTED_REPACK:		1 means a Tcl_DoWhenIdle request
- *				has already been made to repack
- *				all the slaves of this window.
- * FILLX:			1 means if frame allocated for window
- *				is wider than window needs, expand window
- *				to fill frame.  0 means don't make window
- *				any larger than needed.
+ * REQUESTED_REPACK:		1 means a Tcl_DoWhenIdle request has already
+ *				been made to repack all the slaves of this
+ *				window.
+ * FILLX:			1 means if frame allocated for window is wider
+ *				than window needs, expand window to fill
+ *				frame. 0 means don't make window any larger
+ *				than needed.
  * FILLY:			Same as FILLX, except for height.
  * EXPAND:			1 means this window's frame will absorb any
  *				extra space in the master window.
- * OLD_STYLE:			1 means this window is being managed with
- *				the old-style packer algorithms (before
- *				Tk version 3.3).  The main difference is
- *				that padding and filling are done differently.
+ * OLD_STYLE:			1 means this window is being managed with the
+ *				old-style packer algorithms (before Tk version
+ *				3.3). The main difference is that padding and
+ *				filling are done differently.
  * DONT_PROPAGATE:		1 means don't set this window's requested
- *				size.  0 means if this window is a master
- *				then Tk will set its requested size to fit
- *				the needs of its slaves.
+ *				size. 0 means if this window is a master then
+ *				Tk will set its requested size to fit the
+ *				needs of its slaves.
  */
 
 #define REQUESTED_REPACK	1
@@ -102,14 +100,12 @@ typedef struct Packer {
 #define DONT_PROPAGATE		32
 
 /*
- * The following structure is the official type record for the
- * packer:
+ * The following structure is the official type record for the packer:
  */
 
-static void		PackReqProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void		PackLostSlaveProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
+static void		PackReqProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		PackLostSlaveProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin);
 
 static Tk_GeomMgr packerType = {
     "pack",			/* name */
@@ -118,36 +114,31 @@ static Tk_GeomMgr packerType = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ArrangePacking _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static int		ConfigureSlaves _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void             DestroyPacker _ANSI_ARGS_((char *memPtr));
-static Packer *		GetPacker _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin));
-static int		PackAfter _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Packer *prevPtr, Packer *masterPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		PackReqProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin));
-static void		PackStructureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static void		Unlink _ANSI_ARGS_((Packer *packPtr));
-static int		XExpansion _ANSI_ARGS_((Packer *slavePtr,
-			    int cavityWidth));
-static int		YExpansion _ANSI_ARGS_((Packer *slavePtr,
-			    int cavityHeight));
+static void		ArrangePacking(ClientData clientData);
+static int		ConfigureSlaves(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		DestroyPacker(char *memPtr);
+static Packer *		GetPacker(Tk_Window tkwin);
+static int		PackAfter(Tcl_Interp *interp, Packer *prevPtr,
+			    Packer *masterPtr, int objc,Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		PackReqProc(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin);
+static void		PackStructureProc(ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr);
+static void		Unlink(Packer *packPtr);
+static int		XExpansion(Packer *slavePtr, int cavityWidth);
+static int		YExpansion(Packer *slavePtr, int cavityHeight);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkPrintPadAmount --
  *
- *	This procedure generates a text value that describes one
- *	of the -padx, -pady, -ipadx, or -ipady configuration options.
- *	The text value generated is appended to the interpreter
- *	result.
+ *	This function generates a text value that describes one of the -padx,
+ *	-pady, -ipadx, or -ipady configuration options. The text value
+ *	generated is appended to the interpreter result.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -157,10 +148,11 @@ static int		YExpansion _ANSI_ARGS_((Packer *slavePtr,
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-void 
+
+void
 TkPrintPadAmount(interp, switchName, halfSpace, allSpace)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The interpreter into which the result
-				 * is written. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The interpreter into which the result is
+				 * written. */
     char *switchName;		/* One of "padx", "pady", "ipadx" or "ipady" */
     int halfSpace;		/* The left or top padding amount */
     int allSpace;		/* The total amount of padding */
@@ -181,8 +173,8 @@ TkPrintPadAmount(interp, switchName, halfSpace, allSpace)
  *
  * Tk_PackCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "pack" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "pack" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -195,8 +187,7 @@ TkPrintPadAmount(interp, switchName, halfSpace, allSpace)
 
 int
 Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
     int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
@@ -226,9 +217,8 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], optionStrings, "option", 0,
 	    &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	/*
-	 * Call it again without the deprecated ones to get a proper
-	 * error message.
-	 * This works well since there can't be any ambiguity between
+	 * Call it again without the deprecated ones to get a proper error
+	 * message. This works well since there can't be any ambiguity between
 	 * deprecated and new options.
 	 */
 
@@ -239,7 +229,8 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     argv2 = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]);
-    if (index == PACK_AFTER) {
+    switch ((enum options) index) {
+    case PACK_AFTER: {
 	Packer *prevPtr;
 	Tk_Window tkwin2;
 
@@ -253,7 +244,8 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	return PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, prevPtr->masterPtr, objc-3, objv+3);
-    } else if (index == PACK_APPEND) {
+    }
+    case PACK_APPEND: {
 	Packer *masterPtr;
 	register Packer *prevPtr;
 	Tk_Window tkwin2;
@@ -269,7 +261,8 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	}
 	return PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc-3, objv+3);
-    } else if (index == PACK_BEFORE) {
+    }
+    case PACK_BEFORE: {
 	Packer *packPtr, *masterPtr;
 	register Packer *prevPtr;
 	Tk_Window tkwin2;
@@ -298,14 +291,15 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	}
 	return PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc-3, objv+3);
-    } else if (index == PACK_CONFIGURE) {
+    }
+    case PACK_CONFIGURE:
 	if (argv2[0] != '.') {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad argument \"", argv2,
 		    "\": must be name of window", (char *) NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	return ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc-2, objv+2);
-    } else if (index == PACK_FORGET) {
+    case PACK_FORGET: {
 	Tk_Window slave;
 	Packer *slavePtr;
 	int i;
@@ -326,7 +320,9 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		Tk_UnmapWindow(slavePtr->tkwin);
 	    }
 	}
-    } else if (index == PACK_INFO) {
+	break;
+    }
+    case PACK_INFO: {
 	register Packer *slavePtr;
 	Tk_Window slave;
 
@@ -351,26 +347,28 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		(slavePtr->flags & EXPAND) ? "1" : "0", " -fill ",
 		(char *) NULL);
 	switch (slavePtr->flags & (FILLX|FILLY)) {
-	    case 0:
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "none", (char *) NULL);
-		break;
-	    case FILLX:
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "x", (char *) NULL);
-		break;
-	    case FILLY:
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "y", (char *) NULL);
-		break;
-	    case FILLX|FILLY:
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "both", (char *) NULL);
-		break;
+	case 0:
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "none", (char *) NULL);
+	    break;
+	case FILLX:
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "x", (char *) NULL);
+	    break;
+	case FILLY:
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "y", (char *) NULL);
+	    break;
+	case FILLX|FILLY:
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "both", (char *) NULL);
+	    break;
 	}
-        TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "ipadx", slavePtr->iPadX/2, slavePtr->iPadX);
-        TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "ipady", slavePtr->iPadY/2, slavePtr->iPadY);
-        TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "padx", slavePtr->padLeft, slavePtr->padX);
-        TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "pady", slavePtr->padTop, slavePtr->padY);
+	TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "ipadx", slavePtr->iPadX/2, slavePtr->iPadX);
+	TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "ipady", slavePtr->iPadY/2, slavePtr->iPadY);
+	TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "padx", slavePtr->padLeft, slavePtr->padX);
+	TkPrintPadAmount(interp, "pady", slavePtr->padTop, slavePtr->padY);
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, " -side ", sideNames[slavePtr->side],
 		(char *) NULL);
-    } else if (index == PACK_PROPAGATE) {
+	break;
+    }
+    case PACK_PROPAGATE: {
 	Tk_Window master;
 	Packer *masterPtr;
 	int propagate;
@@ -409,7 +407,9 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	} else {
 	    masterPtr->flags |= DONT_PROPAGATE;
 	}
-    } else if (index == PACK_SLAVES) {
+	break;
+    }
+    case PACK_SLAVES: {
 	Tk_Window master;
 	Packer *masterPtr, *slavePtr;
 
@@ -425,7 +425,9 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		slavePtr = slavePtr->nextPtr) {
 	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tk_PathName(slavePtr->tkwin));
 	}
-    } else if (index == PACK_UNPACK) {
+	break;
+    }
+    case PACK_UNPACK: {
 	Tk_Window tkwin2;
 	Packer *packPtr;
 
@@ -447,6 +449,7 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    Unlink(packPtr);
 	    Tk_UnmapWindow(packPtr->tkwin);
 	}
+	break;
     }
 
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -457,15 +460,15 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * PackReqProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk_GeometryRequest for
- *	windows managed by the packer.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk_GeometryRequest for windows managed by
+ *	the packer.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Arranges for tkwin, and all its managed siblings, to
- *	be re-packed at the next idle point.
+ *	Arranges for tkwin, and all its managed siblings, to be re-packed at
+ *	the next idle point.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -473,11 +476,10 @@ Tk_PackObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
 PackReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Packer's information about
-				 * window that got new preferred
-				 * geometry.  */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Other Tk-related information
-				 * about the window. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Packer's information about window that got
+				 * new preferred geometry.  */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Other Tk-related information about the
+				 * window. */
 {
     register Packer *packPtr = (Packer *) clientData;
 
@@ -493,8 +495,8 @@ PackReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * PackLostSlaveProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry
- *	claims control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
+ *	This function is invoked by Tk whenever some other geometry claims
+ *	control over a slave that used to be managed by us.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -508,8 +510,8 @@ PackReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
 PackLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Packer structure for slave window that
-				 * was stolen away. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Packer structure for slave window that was
+				 * stolen away. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk's handle for the slave window. */
 {
     register Packer *slavePtr = (Packer *) clientData;
@@ -526,18 +528,16 @@ PackLostSlaveProc(clientData, tkwin)
  *
  * ArrangePacking --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked (using the Tcl_DoWhenIdle
- *	mechanism) to re-layout a set of windows managed by
- *	the packer.  It is invoked at idle time so that a
- *	series of packer requests can be merged into a single
- *	layout operation.
+ *	This function is invoked (using the Tcl_DoWhenIdle mechanism) to
+ *	re-layout a set of windows managed by the packer. It is invoked at
+ *	idle time so that a series of packer requests can be merged into a
+ *	single layout operation.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The packed slaves of masterPtr may get resized or
- *	moved.
+ *	The packed slaves of masterPtr may get resized or moved.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -548,16 +548,16 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
 				 * are to be re-layed out. */
 {
     register Packer *masterPtr = (Packer *) clientData;
-    register Packer *slavePtr;	
+    register Packer *slavePtr;
     int cavityX, cavityY, cavityWidth, cavityHeight;
 				/* These variables keep track of the
-				 * as-yet-unallocated space remaining in
-				 * the middle of the master window. */
+				 * as-yet-unallocated space remaining in the
+				 * middle of the master window. */
     int frameX, frameY, frameWidth, frameHeight;
 				/* These variables keep track of the frame
 				 * allocated to the current window. */
-    int x, y, width, height;	/* These variables are used to hold the
-				 * actual geometry of the current window. */
+    int x, y, width, height;	/* These variables are used to hold the actual
+				 * geometry of the current window. */
     int abort;			/* May get set to non-zero to abort this
 				 * repacking operation. */
     int borderX, borderY;
@@ -568,8 +568,8 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
     masterPtr->flags &= ~REQUESTED_REPACK;
 
     /*
-     * If the master has no slaves anymore, then don't do anything
-     * at all:  just leave the master's size as-is.
+     * If the master has no slaves anymore, then don't do anything at all:
+     * just leave the master's size as-is.
      */
 
     if (masterPtr->slavePtr == NULL) {
@@ -577,9 +577,9 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Abort any nested call to ArrangePacking for this window, since
-     * we'll do everything necessary here, and set up so this call
-     * can be aborted if necessary.  
+     * Abort any nested call to ArrangePacking for this window, since we'll do
+     * everything necessary here, and set up so this call can be aborted if
+     * necessary.
      */
 
     if (masterPtr->abortPtr != NULL) {
@@ -590,22 +590,19 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
     Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) masterPtr);
 
     /*
-     * Pass #1: scan all the slaves to figure out the total amount
-     * of space needed.  Two separate width and height values are
-     * computed:
+     * Pass #1: scan all the slaves to figure out the total amount of space
+     * needed. Two separate width and height values are computed:
      *
-     * width -		Holds the sum of the widths (plus padding) of
-     *			all the slaves seen so far that were packed LEFT
-     *			or RIGHT.
-     * height -		Holds the sum of the heights (plus padding) of
-     *			all the slaves seen so far that were packed TOP
-     *			or BOTTOM.
+     * width -		Holds the sum of the widths (plus padding) of all the
+     *			slaves seen so far that were packed LEFT or RIGHT.
+     * height -		Holds the sum of the heights (plus padding) of all the
+     *			slaves seen so far that were packed TOP or BOTTOM.
      *
-     * maxWidth -	Gradually builds up the width needed by the master
-     *			to just barely satisfy all the slave's needs.  For
-     *			each slave, the code computes the width needed for
-     *			all the slaves so far and updates maxWidth if the
-     *			new value is greater.
+     * maxWidth -	Gradually builds up the width needed by the master to
+     *			just barely satisfy all the slave's needs. For each
+     *			slave, the code computes the width needed for all the
+     *			slaves so far and updates maxWidth if the new value is
+     *			greater.
      * maxHeight -	Same as maxWidth, except keeps height info.
      */
 
@@ -648,11 +645,10 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the total amount of space needed in the master window has
-     * changed, and if we're propagating geometry information, then
-     * notify the next geometry manager up and requeue ourselves to
-     * start again after the master has had a chance to
-     * resize us.
+     * If the total amount of space needed in the master window has changed,
+     * and if we're propagating geometry information, then notify the next
+     * geometry manager up and requeue ourselves to start again after the
+     * master has had a chance to resize us.
      */
 
     if (((maxWidth != Tk_ReqWidth(masterPtr->tkwin))
@@ -665,14 +661,12 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Pass #2: scan the slaves a second time assigning
-     * new sizes.  The "cavity" variables keep track of the
-     * unclaimed space in the cavity of the window;  this
-     * shrinks inward as we allocate windows around the
-     * edges.  The "frame" variables keep track of the space
-     * allocated to the current window and its frame.  The
-     * current window is then placed somewhere inside the
-     * frame, depending on anchor.
+     * Pass #2: scan the slaves a second time assigning new sizes. The
+     * "cavity" variables keep track of the unclaimed space in the cavity of
+     * the window; this shrinks inward as we allocate windows around the
+     * edges. The "frame" variables keep track of the space allocated to the
+     * current window and its frame. The current window is then placed
+     * somewhere inside the frame, depending on anchor.
      */
 
     cavityX = x = Tk_InternalBorderLeft(masterPtr->tkwin);
@@ -726,13 +720,12 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Now that we've got the size of the frame for the window,
-	 * compute the window's actual size and location using the
-	 * fill, padding, and frame factors.  The variables "borderX"
-	 * and "borderY" are used to handle the differences between
-	 * old-style packing and the new style (in old-style, iPadX
-	 * and iPadY are always zero and padding is completely ignored
-	 * except when computing frame size).
+	 * Now that we've got the size of the frame for the window, compute
+	 * the window's actual size and location using the fill, padding, and
+	 * frame factors. The variables "borderX" and "borderY" are used to
+	 * handle the differences between old-style packing and the new style
+	 * (in old-style, iPadX and iPadY are always zero and padding is
+	 * completely ignored except when computing frame size).
 	 */
 
 	if (slavePtr->flags & OLD_STYLE) {
@@ -760,52 +753,52 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
 	    height = frameHeight - borderY;
 	}
 	switch (slavePtr->anchor) {
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_N:
-		x = frameX + (borderLeft + frameWidth - width - borderRight)/2;
-		y = frameY + borderTop;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
-		x = frameX + frameWidth - width - borderRight;
-		y = frameY + borderTop;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_E:
-		x = frameX + frameWidth - width - borderRight;
-		y = frameY + (borderTop + frameHeight - height - borderBtm)/2;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
-		x = frameX + frameWidth - width - borderRight;
-		y = frameY + frameHeight - height - borderBtm;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_S:
-		x = frameX + (borderLeft + frameWidth - width - borderRight)/2;
-		y = frameY + frameHeight - height - borderBtm;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
-		x = frameX + borderLeft;
-		y = frameY + frameHeight - height - borderBtm;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_W:
-		x = frameX + borderLeft;
-		y = frameY + (borderTop + frameHeight - height - borderBtm)/2;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
-		x = frameX + borderLeft;
-		y = frameY + borderTop;
-		break;
-	    case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
-		x = frameX + (borderLeft + frameWidth - width - borderRight)/2;
-		y = frameY + (borderTop + frameHeight - height - borderBtm)/2;
-		break;
-	    default:
-		Tcl_Panic("bad frame factor in ArrangePacking");
+	case TK_ANCHOR_N:
+	    x = frameX + (borderLeft + frameWidth - width - borderRight)/2;
+	    y = frameY + borderTop;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_NE:
+	    x = frameX + frameWidth - width - borderRight;
+	    y = frameY + borderTop;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_E:
+	    x = frameX + frameWidth - width - borderRight;
+	    y = frameY + (borderTop + frameHeight - height - borderBtm)/2;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_SE:
+	    x = frameX + frameWidth - width - borderRight;
+	    y = frameY + frameHeight - height - borderBtm;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_S:
+	    x = frameX + (borderLeft + frameWidth - width - borderRight)/2;
+	    y = frameY + frameHeight - height - borderBtm;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_SW:
+	    x = frameX + borderLeft;
+	    y = frameY + frameHeight - height - borderBtm;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_W:
+	    x = frameX + borderLeft;
+	    y = frameY + (borderTop + frameHeight - height - borderBtm)/2;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_NW:
+	    x = frameX + borderLeft;
+	    y = frameY + borderTop;
+	    break;
+	case TK_ANCHOR_CENTER:
+	    x = frameX + (borderLeft + frameWidth - width - borderRight)/2;
+	    y = frameY + (borderTop + frameHeight - height - borderBtm)/2;
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    Tcl_Panic("bad frame factor in ArrangePacking");
 	}
 	width -= slavePtr->doubleBw;
 	height -= slavePtr->doubleBw;
 
 	/*
 	 * The final step is to set the position, size, and mapped/unmapped
-	 * state of the slave.  If the slave is a child of the master, then
-	 * do this here.  Otherwise let Tk_MaintainGeometry do the work.
+	 * state of the slave. If the slave is a child of the master, then do
+	 * this here. Otherwise let Tk_MaintainGeometry do the work.
 	 */
 
 	if (masterPtr->tkwin == Tk_Parent(slavePtr->tkwin)) {
@@ -823,8 +816,8 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
 		}
 
 		/*
-		 * Don't map the slave if the master isn't mapped: wait
-		 * until the master gets mapped later.
+		 * Don't map the slave if the master isn't mapped: wait until
+		 * the master gets mapped later.
 		 */
 
 		if (Tk_IsMapped(masterPtr->tkwin)) {
@@ -842,9 +835,9 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Changes to the window's structure could cause almost anything
-	 * to happen, including deleting the parent or child.  If this
-	 * happens, we'll be told to abort.
+	 * Changes to the window's structure could cause almost anything to
+	 * happen, including deleting the parent or child. If this happens,
+	 * we'll be told to abort.
 	 */
 
 	if (abort) {
@@ -852,7 +845,7 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
 	}
     }
 
-    done:
+  done:
     masterPtr->abortPtr = NULL;
     Tcl_Release((ClientData) masterPtr);
 }
@@ -862,13 +855,12 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
  *
  * XExpansion --
  *
- *	Given a list of packed slaves, the first of which is packed
- *	on the left or right and is expandable, compute how much to
- *	expand the child.
+ *	Given a list of packed slaves, the first of which is packed on the
+ *	left or right and is expandable, compute how much to expand the child.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the number of additional pixels to give to
- *	the child.
+ *	The return value is the number of additional pixels to give to the
+ *	child.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -878,23 +870,22 @@ ArrangePacking(clientData)
 
 static int
 XExpansion(slavePtr, cavityWidth)
-    register Packer *slavePtr;		/* First in list of remaining
-					 * slaves. */
-    int cavityWidth;			/* Horizontal space left for all
-					 * remaining slaves. */
+    register Packer *slavePtr;	/* First in list of remaining slaves. */
+    int cavityWidth;		/* Horizontal space left for all remaining
+				 * slaves. */
 {
     int numExpand, minExpand, curExpand;
     int childWidth;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure is tricky because windows packed top or bottom can
-     * be interspersed among expandable windows packed left or right.
-     * Scan through the list, keeping a running sum of the widths of
-     * all left and right windows (actually, count the cavity space not
-     * allocated) and a running count of all expandable left and right
-     * windows.  At each top or bottom window, and at the end of the
-     * list, compute the expansion factor that seems reasonable at that
-     * point.  Return the smallest factor seen at any of these points.
+     * This function is tricky because windows packed top or bottom can be
+     * interspersed among expandable windows packed left or right. Scan
+     * through the list, keeping a running sum of the widths of all left and
+     * right windows (actually, count the cavity space not allocated) and a
+     * running count of all expandable left and right windows. At each top or
+     * bottom window, and at the end of the list, compute the expansion factor
+     * that seems reasonable at that point. Return the smallest factor seen at
+     * any of these points.
      */
 
     minExpand = cavityWidth;
@@ -926,13 +917,12 @@ XExpansion(slavePtr, cavityWidth)
  *
  * YExpansion --
  *
- *	Given a list of packed slaves, the first of which is packed
- *	on the top or bottom and is expandable, compute how much to
- *	expand the child.
+ *	Given a list of packed slaves, the first of which is packed on the top
+ *	or bottom and is expandable, compute how much to expand the child.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the number of additional pixels to give to
- *	the child.
+ *	The return value is the number of additional pixels to give to the
+ *	child.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -942,10 +932,9 @@ XExpansion(slavePtr, cavityWidth)
 
 static int
 YExpansion(slavePtr, cavityHeight)
-    register Packer *slavePtr;		/* First in list of remaining
-					 * slaves. */
-    int cavityHeight;			/* Vertical space left for all
-					 * remaining slaves. */
+    register Packer *slavePtr;	/* First in list of remaining slaves. */
+    int cavityHeight;		/* Vertical space left for all remaining
+				 * slaves. */
 {
     int numExpand, minExpand, curExpand;
     int childHeight;
@@ -983,26 +972,24 @@ YExpansion(slavePtr, cavityHeight)
  *
  * GetPacker --
  *
- *	This internal procedure is used to locate a Packer
- *	structure for a given window, creating one if one
- *	doesn't exist already.
+ *	This internal function is used to locate a Packer structure for a
+ *	given window, creating one if one doesn't exist already.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the Packer structure
- *	corresponding to tkwin.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the Packer structure corresponding to
+ *	tkwin.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new packer structure may be created.  If so, then
- *	a callback is set up to clean things up when the
- *	window is deleted.
+ *	A new packer structure may be created. If so, then a callback is set
+ *	up to clean things up when the window is deleted.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static Packer *
 GetPacker(tkwin)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window for which
-				 * packer structure is desired. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window for which packer structure
+				 * is desired. */
 {
     register Packer *packPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
@@ -1015,12 +1002,12 @@ GetPacker(tkwin)
     }
 
     /*
-     * See if there's already packer for this window.  If not,
-     * then create a new one.
+     * See if there's already packer for this window. If not, then create a
+     * new one.
      */
 
-    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->packerHashTable, (char *) tkwin, 
-            &new);
+    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&dispPtr->packerHashTable, (char *) tkwin,
+	    &new);
     if (!new) {
 	return (Packer *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
     }
@@ -1048,15 +1035,15 @@ GetPacker(tkwin)
  *
  * PackAfter --
  *
- *	This procedure does most of the real work of adding
- *	one or more windows into the packing order for its master.
+ *	This function does most of the real work of adding one or more windows
+ *	into the packing order for its master.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl return value.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The geometry of the specified windows may change, both now and
- *	again in the future.
+ *	The geometry of the specified windows may change, both now and again
+ *	in the future.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1065,13 +1052,13 @@ static int
 PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
     Packer *prevPtr;		/* Pack windows in argv just after this
-				 * window;  NULL means pack as first
-				 * child of masterPtr. */
+				 * window; NULL means pack as first child of
+				 * masterPtr. */
     Packer *masterPtr;		/* Master in which to pack windows. */
     int objc;			/* Number of elements in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Array of lists, each containing 2
-				 * elements:  window name and side
-				 * against which to pack. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Array of lists, each containing 2 elements:
+				 * window name and side against which to
+				 * pack. */
 {
     register Packer *packPtr;
     Tk_Window tkwin, ancestor, parent;
@@ -1080,10 +1067,9 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
     int index, optionCount, c;
 
     /*
-     * Iterate over all of the window specifiers, each consisting of
-     * two arguments.  The first argument contains the window name and
-     * the additional arguments contain options such as "top" or
-     * "padx 20".
+     * Iterate over all of the window specifiers, each consisting of two
+     * arguments. The first argument contains the window name and the
+     * additional arguments contain options such as "top" or "padx 20".
      */
 
     for ( ; objc > 0; objc -= 2, objv += 2, prevPtr = packPtr) {
@@ -1095,9 +1081,9 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Find the packer for the window to be packed, and make sure
-	 * that the window in which it will be packed is either its
-	 * or a descendant of its parent.
+	 * Find the packer for the window to be packed, and make sure that the
+	 * window in which it will be packed is either its or a descendant of
+	 * its parent.
 	 */
 
 	if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, masterPtr->tkwin, objv[0], &tkwin)
@@ -1111,7 +1097,7 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
 		break;
 	    }
 	    if (((Tk_FakeWin *) (ancestor))->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) {
-		badWindow:
+	    badWindow:
 		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't pack ", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]),
 			" inside ", Tk_PathName(masterPtr->tkwin),
 			(char *) NULL);
@@ -1143,7 +1129,7 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
 	packPtr->flags |= OLD_STYLE;
 	for (index = 0 ; index < optionCount; index++) {
 	    Tcl_Obj *curOptPtr = options[index];
-	    char *curOpt = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(curOptPtr, (int *) &length);
+	    char *curOpt = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(curOptPtr, &length);
 
 	    c = curOpt[0];
 
@@ -1171,7 +1157,7 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
 		packPtr->flags |= FILLY;
 	    } else if ((c == 'p') && (strcmp(curOpt, "padx")) == 0) {
 		if (optionCount < (index+2)) {
-		    missingPad:
+		missingPad:
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: \"", curOpt,
 			    "\" option must be followed by screen distance",
 			    (char *) NULL);
@@ -1234,11 +1220,10 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
 		}
 		Unlink(packPtr);
 	    }
-	
+
 	    /*
-	     * Add the window in the correct place in its master's
-	     * packing order, then make sure that the window is
-	     * managed by us.
+	     * Add the window in the correct place in its master's packing
+	     * order, then make sure that the window is managed by us.
 	     */
 
 	    packPtr->masterPtr = masterPtr;
@@ -1254,8 +1239,7 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Arrange for the master to be re-packed at the first
-     * idle moment.
+     * Arrange for the master to be re-packed at the first idle moment.
      */
 
     if (masterPtr->abortPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1286,7 +1270,7 @@ PackAfter(interp, prevPtr, masterPtr, objc, objv)
 
 static void
 Unlink(packPtr)
-    register Packer *packPtr;		/* Window to unlink. */
+    register Packer *packPtr;	/* Window to unlink. */
 {
     register Packer *masterPtr, *packPtr2;
 
@@ -1323,9 +1307,9 @@ Unlink(packPtr)
  *
  * DestroyPacker --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a packer at a safe time
- *	(when no-one is using it anymore).
+ *	This function is invoked by Tcl_EventuallyFree or Tcl_Release to clean
+ *	up the internal structure of a packer at a safe time (when no-one is
+ *	using it anymore).
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1350,25 +1334,24 @@ DestroyPacker(memPtr)
  *
  * PackStructureProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher in response
- *	to StructureNotify events.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher in response to
+ *	StructureNotify events.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	If a window was just deleted, clean up all its packer-related
- *	information.  If it was just resized, repack its slaves, if
- *	any.
+ *	information. If it was just resized, repack its slaves, if any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 PackStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Our information about window
-					 * referred to by eventPtr. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Describes what just happened. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Our information about window referred to by
+				 * eventPtr. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Describes what just happened. */
 {
     register Packer *packPtr = (Packer *) clientData;
 
@@ -1392,6 +1375,7 @@ PackStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	if (packPtr->masterPtr != NULL) {
 	    Unlink(packPtr);
 	}
+
 	for (slavePtr = packPtr->slavePtr; slavePtr != NULL;
 		slavePtr = nextPtr) {
 	    Tk_ManageGeometry(slavePtr->tkwin, (Tk_GeomMgr *) NULL,
@@ -1401,11 +1385,13 @@ PackStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	    nextPtr = slavePtr->nextPtr;
 	    slavePtr->nextPtr = NULL;
 	}
+
 	if (packPtr->tkwin != NULL) {
 	    TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) packPtr->tkwin)->dispPtr;
             Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(Tcl_FindHashEntry(&dispPtr->packerHashTable,
 		    (char *) packPtr->tkwin));
 	}
+
 	if (packPtr->flags & REQUESTED_REPACK) {
 	    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ArrangePacking, (ClientData) packPtr);
 	}
@@ -1413,8 +1399,8 @@ PackStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	Tcl_EventuallyFree((ClientData) packPtr, DestroyPacker);
     } else if (eventPtr->type == MapNotify) {
 	/*
-	 * When a master gets mapped, must redo the geometry computation
-	 * so that all of its slaves get remapped.
+	 * When a master gets mapped, must redo the geometry computation so
+	 * that all of its slaves get remapped.
 	 */
 
 	if ((packPtr->slavePtr != NULL)
@@ -1426,10 +1412,10 @@ PackStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	register Packer *packPtr2;
 
 	/*
-	 * Unmap all of the slaves when the master gets unmapped,
-	 * so that they don't bother to keep redisplaying
-	 * themselves.
+	 * Unmap all of the slaves when the master gets unmapped, so that they
+	 * don't bother to keep redisplaying themselves.
 	 */
+
 	for (packPtr2 = packPtr->slavePtr; packPtr2 != NULL;
 	     packPtr2 = packPtr2->nextPtr) {
 	    Tk_UnmapWindow(packPtr2->tkwin);
@@ -1442,13 +1428,13 @@ PackStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * ConfigureSlaves --
  *
- *	This implements the guts of the "pack configure" command.  Given
- *	a list of slaves and configuration options, it arranges for the
- *	packer to manage the slaves and sets the specified options.
+ *	This implements the guts of the "pack configure" command. Given a list
+ *	of slaves and configuration options, it arranges for the packer to
+ *	manage the slaves and sets the specified options.
  *
  * Results:
- *	TCL_OK is returned if all went well.  Otherwise, TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned and the interp's result is set to contain an error message.
+ *	TCL_OK is returned if all went well. Otherwise, TCL_ERROR is returned
+ *	and the interp's result is set to contain an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Slave windows get taken over by the packer.
@@ -1460,13 +1446,12 @@ static int
 ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Any window in application containing
-				 * slaves.  Used to look up slave names. */
+				 * slaves. Used to look up slave names. */
     int objc;			/* Number of elements in argv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects:  contains one or more
-				 * window names followed by any number
-				 * of "option value" pairs.  Caller must
-				 * make sure that there is at least one
-				 * window name. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects: contains one or more
+				 * window names followed by any number of
+				 * "option value" pairs. Caller must make sure
+				 * that there is at least one window name. */
 {
     Packer *masterPtr, *slavePtr, *prevPtr, *otherPtr;
     Tk_Window other, slave, parent, ancestor;
@@ -1493,13 +1478,12 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 
     /*
      * Iterate over all of the slave windows, parsing the configuration
-     * options for each slave.  It's a bit wasteful to re-parse the
-     * options for each slave, but things get too messy if we try to
-     * parse the arguments just once at the beginning.  For example,
-     * if a slave already is packed we want to just change a few
-     * existing values without resetting everything.  If there are
-     * multiple windows, the -after, -before, and -in options only
-     * get processed for the first window.
+     * options for each slave. It's a bit wasteful to re-parse the options for
+     * each slave, but things get too messy if we try to parse the arguments
+     * just once at the beginning. For example, if a slave already is packed
+     * we want to just change a few existing values without resetting
+     * everything. If there are multiple windows, the -after, -before, and -in
+     * options only get processed for the first window.
      */
 
     masterPtr = NULL;
@@ -1518,9 +1502,9 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	slavePtr->flags &= ~OLD_STYLE;
 
 	/*
-	 * If the slave isn't currently packed, reset all of its
-	 * configuration information to default values (there could
-	 * be old values left from a previous packing).
+	 * If the slave isn't currently packed, reset all of its configuration
+	 * information to default values (there could be old values left from
+	 * a previous packing).
 	 */
 
 	if (slavePtr->masterPtr == NULL) {
@@ -1543,7 +1527,9 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 		    0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (index == CONF_AFTER) {
+
+	    switch ((enum options) index) {
+	    case CONF_AFTER:
 		if (j == 0) {
 		    if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other)
 			    != TCL_OK) {
@@ -1560,12 +1546,14 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 		    masterPtr = prevPtr->masterPtr;
 		    positionGiven = 1;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_ANCHOR) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_ANCHOR:
 		if (Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &slavePtr->anchor)
 			!= TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_BEFORE) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_BEFORE:
 		if (j == 0) {
 		    if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other)
 			    != TCL_OK) {
@@ -1586,7 +1574,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 		    }
 		    positionGiven = 1;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_EXPAND) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_EXPAND:
 		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], &tmp) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
@@ -1594,7 +1583,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 		if (tmp) {
 		    slavePtr->flags |= EXPAND;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_FILL) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_FILL:
 		string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]);
 		if (strcmp(string, "none") == 0) {
 		    slavePtr->flags &= ~(FILLX|FILLY);
@@ -1609,7 +1599,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 			    "\": must be none, x, y, or both", (char *) NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_IN) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_IN:
 		if (j == 0) {
 		    if (TkGetWindowFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[i+1], &other)
 			    != TCL_OK) {
@@ -1624,7 +1615,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 		    }
 		    positionGiven = 1;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_IPADX) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_IPADX:
 		if ((Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, slave, objv[i+1], &tmp)
 			!= TCL_OK)
 			|| (tmp < 0)) {
@@ -1636,7 +1628,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		slavePtr->iPadX = tmp * 2;
-	    } else if (index == CONF_IPADY) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_IPADY:
 		if ((Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, slave, objv[i+1], &tmp)
 			!= TCL_OK)
 			|| (tmp < 0)) {
@@ -1648,29 +1641,33 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		slavePtr->iPadY = tmp * 2;
-	    } else if (index == CONF_PADX) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_PADX:
 		if (TkParsePadAmount(interp, slave, objv[i+1],
 			&slavePtr->padLeft, &slavePtr->padX) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_PADY) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_PADY:
 		if (TkParsePadAmount(interp, slave, objv[i+1],
 			&slavePtr->padTop, &slavePtr->padY) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-	    } else if (index == CONF_SIDE) {
+		break;
+	    case CONF_SIDE:
 		if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i+1], sideNames, "side",
 			TCL_EXACT, &side) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
 		slavePtr->side = (Side) side;
+		break;
 	    }
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If no position in a packing list was specified and the slave
-	 * is already packed, then leave it in its current location in
-	 * its current packing list.
+	 * If no position in a packing list was specified and the slave is
+	 * already packed, then leave it in its current location in its
+	 * current packing list.
 	 */
 
 	if (!positionGiven && (slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL)) {
@@ -1679,22 +1676,22 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If the slave is going to be put back after itself or
-	 * the same -in window is passed in again, then just
-	 * skip the whole operation, since it won't work anyway.
+	 * If the slave is going to be put back after itself or the same -in
+	 * window is passed in again, then just skip the whole operation,
+	 * since it won't work anyway.
 	 */
 
 	if (prevPtr == slavePtr) {
 	    masterPtr = slavePtr->masterPtr;
 	    goto scheduleLayout;
 	}
-    
+
 	/*
-	 * If none of the "-in", "-before", or "-after" options has
-	 * been specified, arrange for the slave to go at the end of
-	 * the order for its parent.
+	 * If none of the "-in", "-before", or "-after" options has been
+	 * specified, arrange for the slave to go at the end of the order for
+	 * its parent.
 	 */
-    
+
 	if (!positionGiven) {
 	    masterPtr = GetPacker(Tk_Parent(slave));
 	    prevPtr = masterPtr->slavePtr;
@@ -1706,11 +1703,11 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Make sure that the slave's parent is either the master or
-	 * an ancestor of the master, and that the master and slave
-	 * aren't the same.
+	 * Make sure that the slave's parent is either the master or an
+	 * ancestor of the master, and that the master and slave aren't the
+	 * same.
 	 */
-    
+
 	parent = Tk_Parent(slave);
 	for (ancestor = masterPtr->tkwin; ; ancestor = Tk_Parent(ancestor)) {
 	    if (ancestor == parent) {
@@ -1730,8 +1727,8 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Unpack the slave if it's currently packed, then position it
-	 * after prevPtr.
+	 * Unpack the slave if it's currently packed, then position it after
+	 * prevPtr.
 	 */
 
 	if (slavePtr->masterPtr != NULL) {
@@ -1755,11 +1752,10 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
 	prevPtr = slavePtr;
 
 	/*
-	 * Arrange for the master to be re-packed at the first
-	 * idle moment.
+	 * Arrange for the master to be re-packed at the first idle moment.
 	 */
 
-	scheduleLayout:
+    scheduleLayout:
 	if (masterPtr->abortPtr != NULL) {
 	    *masterPtr->abortPtr = 1;
 	}
@@ -1770,3 +1766,11 @@ ConfigureSlaves(interp, tkwin, objc, objv)
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkRectOval.c b/generic/tkRectOval.c
index 8d13a60..7e612f9 100644
--- a/generic/tkRectOval.c
+++ b/generic/tkRectOval.c
@@ -1,16 +1,15 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkRectOval.c --
  *
- *	This file implements rectangle and oval items for canvas
- *	widgets.
+ *	This file implements rectangle and oval items for canvas widgets.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkRectOval.c,v 1.12 2004/11/11 01:24:32 das Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkRectOval.c,v 1.13 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include <stdio.h>
@@ -25,18 +24,22 @@
 
 typedef struct RectOvalItem  {
     Tk_Item header;		/* Generic stuff that's the same for all
-				 * types.  MUST BE FIRST IN STRUCTURE. */
+				 * types. MUST BE FIRST IN STRUCTURE. */
     Tk_Outline outline;		/* Outline structure */
     double bbox[4];		/* Coordinates of bounding box for rectangle
-				 * or oval (x1, y1, x2, y2).  Item includes
-				 * x1 and x2 but not y1 and y2. */
+				 * or oval (x1, y1, x2, y2). Item includes x1
+				 * and x2 but not y1 and y2. */
     Tk_TSOffset tsoffset;
     XColor *fillColor;		/* Color for filling rectangle/oval. */
-    XColor *activeFillColor;	/* Color for filling rectangle/oval if state is active. */
-    XColor *disabledFillColor;	/* Color for filling rectangle/oval if state is disabled. */
+    XColor *activeFillColor;	/* Color for filling rectangle/oval if state
+				 * is active. */
+    XColor *disabledFillColor;	/* Color for filling rectangle/oval if state
+				 * is disabled. */
     Pixmap fillStipple;		/* Stipple bitmap for filling item. */
-    Pixmap activeFillStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for filling item if state is active. */
-    Pixmap disabledFillStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for filling item if state is disabled. */
+    Pixmap activeFillStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for filling item if state is
+				 * active. */
+    Pixmap disabledFillStipple;	/* Stipple bitmap for filling item if state is
+				 * disabled. */
     GC fillGC;			/* Graphics context for filling item. */
 } RectOvalItem;
 
@@ -125,7 +128,7 @@ static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
 	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(Tk_Item, state),TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK,
 	&stateOption},
     {TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, "-stipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, fillStipple), TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
+	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(RectOvalItem, fillStipple),TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK},
     {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-tags", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
 	(char *) NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption},
     {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "-width", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
@@ -136,90 +139,88 @@ static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ComputeRectOvalBbox _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr));
-static int		ConfigureRectOval _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int flags));
-static int		CreateRectOval _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Canvas canvas, struct Tk_Item *itemPtr,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		DeleteRectOval _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display));
-static void		DisplayRectOval _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst,
-			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
-static int		OvalToArea _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *areaPtr));
-static double		OvalToPoint _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr));
-static int		RectOvalCoords _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc,
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		RectOvalToPostscript _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass));
-static int		RectToArea _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *areaPtr));
-static double		RectToPoint _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr));
-static void		ScaleRectOval _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double originX, double originY,
-			    double scaleX, double scaleY));
-static void		TranslateRectOval _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas,
-			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY));
+static void		ComputeRectOvalBbox(Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr);
+static int		ConfigureRectOval(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
+			    int flags);
+static int		CreateRectOval(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		DeleteRectOval(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    Display *display);
+static void		DisplayRectOval(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    Display *display, Drawable dst, int x, int y,
+			    int width, int height);
+static int		OvalToArea(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    double *areaPtr);
+static double		OvalToPoint(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    double *pointPtr);
+static int		RectOvalCoords(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas,
+			    Tk_Item *itemPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		RectOvalToPostscript(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass);
+static int		RectToArea(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    double *areaPtr);
+static double		RectToPoint(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    double *pointPtr);
+static void		ScaleRectOval(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    double originX, double originY,
+			    double scaleX, double scaleY);
+static void		TranslateRectOval(Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr,
+			    double deltaX, double deltaY);
 
 /*
- * The structures below defines the rectangle and oval item types
- * by means of procedures that can be invoked by generic item code.
+ * The structures below defines the rectangle and oval item types by means of
+ * functions that can be invoked by generic item code.
  */
 
 Tk_ItemType tkRectangleType = {
-    "rectangle",			/* name */
-    sizeof(RectOvalItem),		/* itemSize */
-    CreateRectOval,			/* createProc */
-    configSpecs,			/* configSpecs */
-    ConfigureRectOval,			/* configureProc */
-    RectOvalCoords,			/* coordProc */
-    DeleteRectOval,			/* deleteProc */
-    DisplayRectOval,			/* displayProc */
-    TK_CONFIG_OBJS,			/* flags */
-    RectToPoint,			/* pointProc */
-    RectToArea,				/* areaProc */
-    RectOvalToPostscript,		/* postscriptProc */
-    ScaleRectOval,			/* scaleProc */
-    TranslateRectOval,			/* translateProc */
-    (Tk_ItemIndexProc *) NULL,		/* indexProc */
-    (Tk_ItemCursorProc *) NULL,		/* icursorProc */
-    (Tk_ItemSelectionProc *) NULL,	/* selectionProc */
-    (Tk_ItemInsertProc *) NULL,		/* insertProc */
-    (Tk_ItemDCharsProc *) NULL,		/* dTextProc */
-    (Tk_ItemType *) NULL,		/* nextPtr */
+    "rectangle",		/* name */
+    sizeof(RectOvalItem),	/* itemSize */
+    CreateRectOval,		/* createProc */
+    configSpecs,		/* configSpecs */
+    ConfigureRectOval,		/* configureProc */
+    RectOvalCoords,		/* coordProc */
+    DeleteRectOval,		/* deleteProc */
+    DisplayRectOval,		/* displayProc */
+    TK_CONFIG_OBJS,		/* flags */
+    RectToPoint,		/* pointProc */
+    RectToArea,			/* areaProc */
+    RectOvalToPostscript,	/* postscriptProc */
+    ScaleRectOval,		/* scaleProc */
+    TranslateRectOval,		/* translateProc */
+    (Tk_ItemIndexProc *) NULL,	/* indexProc */
+    (Tk_ItemCursorProc *) NULL,	/* icursorProc */
+    (Tk_ItemSelectionProc *) NULL, /* selectionProc */
+    (Tk_ItemInsertProc *) NULL,	/* insertProc */
+    (Tk_ItemDCharsProc *) NULL,	/* dTextProc */
+    (Tk_ItemType *) NULL,	/* nextPtr */
 };
 
 Tk_ItemType tkOvalType = {
-    "oval",				/* name */
-    sizeof(RectOvalItem),		/* itemSize */
-    CreateRectOval,			/* createProc */
-    configSpecs,			/* configSpecs */
-    ConfigureRectOval,			/* configureProc */
-    RectOvalCoords,			/* coordProc */
-    DeleteRectOval,			/* deleteProc */
-    DisplayRectOval,			/* displayProc */
-    TK_CONFIG_OBJS,			/* flags */
-    OvalToPoint,			/* pointProc */
-    OvalToArea,				/* areaProc */
-    RectOvalToPostscript,		/* postscriptProc */
-    ScaleRectOval,			/* scaleProc */
-    TranslateRectOval,			/* translateProc */
-    (Tk_ItemIndexProc *) NULL,		/* indexProc */
-    (Tk_ItemCursorProc *) NULL,		/* cursorProc */
-    (Tk_ItemSelectionProc *) NULL,	/* selectionProc */
-    (Tk_ItemInsertProc *) NULL,		/* insertProc */
-    (Tk_ItemDCharsProc *) NULL,		/* dTextProc */
-    (Tk_ItemType *) NULL,		/* nextPtr */
+    "oval",			/* name */
+    sizeof(RectOvalItem),	/* itemSize */
+    CreateRectOval,		/* createProc */
+    configSpecs,		/* configSpecs */
+    ConfigureRectOval,		/* configureProc */
+    RectOvalCoords,		/* coordProc */
+    DeleteRectOval,		/* deleteProc */
+    DisplayRectOval,		/* displayProc */
+    TK_CONFIG_OBJS,		/* flags */
+    OvalToPoint,		/* pointProc */
+    OvalToArea,			/* areaProc */
+    RectOvalToPostscript,	/* postscriptProc */
+    ScaleRectOval,		/* scaleProc */
+    TranslateRectOval,		/* translateProc */
+    (Tk_ItemIndexProc *) NULL,	/* indexProc */
+    (Tk_ItemCursorProc *) NULL,	/* cursorProc */
+    (Tk_ItemSelectionProc *) NULL, /* selectionProc */
+    (Tk_ItemInsertProc *) NULL,	/* insertProc */
+    (Tk_ItemDCharsProc *) NULL,	/* dTextProc */
+    (Tk_ItemType *) NULL,	/* nextPtr */
 };
 
 /*
@@ -227,14 +228,14 @@ Tk_ItemType tkOvalType = {
  *
  * CreateRectOval --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to create a new rectangle
- *	or oval item in a canvas.
+ *	This function is invoked to create a new rectangle or oval item in a
+ *	canvas.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl return value.  If an error occurred in
- *	creating the item, then an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result;  in this case itemPtr is left uninitialized,
- *	so it can be safely freed by the caller.
+ *	A standard Tcl return value. If an error occurred in creating the
+ *	item, then an error message is left in the interp's result; in this
+ *	case itemPtr is left uninitialized, so it can be safely freed by the
+ *	caller.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	A new rectangle or oval item is created.
@@ -244,12 +245,12 @@ Tk_ItemType tkOvalType = {
 
 static int
 CreateRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* For error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas to hold new item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Record to hold new item;  header
-					 * has been initialized by caller. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of arguments in objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Arguments describing rectangle. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* For error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas to hold new item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Record to hold new item; header has been
+				 * initialized by caller. */
+    int objc;			/* Number of arguments in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments describing rectangle. */
 {
     RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
     int i;
@@ -259,8 +260,8 @@ CreateRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Carry out initialization that is needed in order to clean
-     * up after errors during the the remainder of this procedure.
+     * Carry out initialization that is needed in order to clean up after
+     * errors during the the remainder of this function.
      */
 
     Tk_CreateOutline(&(rectOvalPtr->outline));
@@ -293,7 +294,7 @@ CreateRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    error:
+  error:
     DeleteRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, Tk_Display(Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas)));
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
@@ -303,9 +304,9 @@ CreateRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * RectOvalCoords --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "coords" widget
- *	command on rectangles and ovals.  See the user documentation
- *	for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "coords" widget command on
+ *	rectangles and ovals. See the user documentation for details on what
+ *	it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR, and sets the interp's result.
@@ -318,59 +319,72 @@ CreateRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
 
 static int
 RectOvalCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item whose coordinates are to be
-					 * read or modified. */
-    int objc;				/* Number of coordinates supplied in
-					 * objv. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];		/* Array of coordinates: x1, y1,
-					 * x2, y2, ... */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item whose coordinates are to be read or
+				 * modified. */
+    int objc;			/* Number of coordinates supplied in objv. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Array of coordinates: x1,y1,x2,y2,... */
 {
     RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
 
+    /*
+     * If no coordinates, return the current coordinates (i.e. bounding box).
+     */
+
     if (objc == 0) {
 	Tcl_Obj *obj = Tcl_NewObj();
-	Tcl_Obj *subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(rectOvalPtr->bbox[0]);
-	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
-	subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(rectOvalPtr->bbox[1]);
-	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
-	subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]);
-	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
-	subobj = Tcl_NewDoubleObj(rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]);
-	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, obj, subobj);
+
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, obj,
+		Tcl_NewDoubleObj(rectOvalPtr->bbox[0]));
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, obj,
+		Tcl_NewDoubleObj(rectOvalPtr->bbox[1]));
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, obj,
+		Tcl_NewDoubleObj(rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]));
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, obj,
+		Tcl_NewDoubleObj(rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]));
 	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, obj);
-    } else if ((objc == 1)||(objc == 4)) {
- 	if (objc==1) {
-	    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[0], &objc,
-		    (Tcl_Obj ***) &objv) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    } else if (objc != 4) {
-		char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
 
-		sprintf(buf, "wrong # coordinates: expected 0 or 4, got %d", objc);
-		Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	}
-	if ((Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[0],
- 		    &rectOvalPtr->bbox[0]) != TCL_OK)
-		|| (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[1],
-		    &rectOvalPtr->bbox[1]) != TCL_OK)
-		|| (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[2],
-			&rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]) != TCL_OK)
-		|| (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[3],
-			&rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]) != TCL_OK)) {
+    /*
+     * If one "coordinate", treat as list of coordinates.
+     */
+
+    if (objc == 1) {
+	if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[0], &objc,
+		(Tcl_Obj ***) &objv) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr);
-    } else {
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Better have four coordinates now. Spit out an error message otherwise.
+     */
+
+    if (objc != 4) {
 	char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
-	
+
 	sprintf(buf, "wrong # coordinates: expected 0 or 4, got %d", objc);
 	Tcl_SetResult(interp, buf, TCL_VOLATILE);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
+
+    /*
+     * Parse the coordinates and update our bounding box.
+     */
+
+    if ((Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[0],
+		&rectOvalPtr->bbox[0]) != TCL_OK)
+	    || (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[1],
+		&rectOvalPtr->bbox[1]) != TCL_OK)
+	    || (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[2],
+		&rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]) != TCL_OK)
+	    || (Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj(interp, canvas, objv[3],
+		&rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]) != TCL_OK)) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
@@ -379,17 +393,16 @@ RectOvalCoords(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * ConfigureRectOval --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to configure various aspects
- *	of a rectangle or oval item, such as its border and
- *	background colors.
+ *	This function is invoked to configure various aspects of a rectangle
+ *	or oval item, such as its border and background colors.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result code.  If an error occurs, then
- *	an error message is left in the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result code. If an error occurs, then an error message
+ *	is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as colors and stipple
- *	patterns, may be set for itemPtr.
+ *	Configuration information, such as colors and stipple patterns, may be
+ *	set for itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -399,7 +412,7 @@ ConfigureRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
     Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing itemPtr. */
     Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Rectangle item to reconfigure. */
-    int objc;			/* Number of elements in objv.  */
+    int objc;			/* Number of elements in objv. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Arguments describing things to configure. */
     int flags;			/* Flags to pass to Tk_ConfigureWidget. */
 {
@@ -416,14 +429,14 @@ ConfigureRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     tkwin = Tk_CanvasTkwin(canvas);
 
     if (TCL_OK != Tk_ConfigureWidget(interp, tkwin, configSpecs, objc,
-	    (CONST char **) objv, (char *) rectOvalPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS)) {
+	    (CONST char **)objv, (char *) rectOvalPtr, flags|TK_CONFIG_OBJS)) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     state = itemPtr->state;
 
     /*
-     * A few of the options require additional processing, such as
-     * graphics contexts.
+     * A few of the options require additional processing, such as graphics
+     * contexts.
      */
 
     if (rectOvalPtr->outline.activeWidth > rectOvalPtr->outline.width ||
@@ -442,27 +455,28 @@ ConfigureRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     if (flags & TK_OFFSET_LEFT) {
 	tsoffset->xoffset = (int) (rectOvalPtr->bbox[0] + 0.5);
     } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
-	tsoffset->xoffset = (int) ((rectOvalPtr->bbox[0]+rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]+1)/2);
+	tsoffset->xoffset = (int)
+		((rectOvalPtr->bbox[0]+rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]+1)/2);
     } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_RIGHT) {
 	tsoffset->xoffset = (int) (rectOvalPtr->bbox[2] + 0.5);
     }
     if (flags & TK_OFFSET_TOP) {
 	tsoffset->yoffset = (int) (rectOvalPtr->bbox[1] + 0.5);
     } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE) {
-	tsoffset->yoffset = (int) ((rectOvalPtr->bbox[1]+rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]+1)/2);
+	tsoffset->yoffset = (int)
+		((rectOvalPtr->bbox[1]+rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]+1)/2);
     } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM) {
 	tsoffset->yoffset = (int) (rectOvalPtr->bbox[2] + 0.5);
     }
 
     /*
-     * Configure the outline graphics context.  If mask is non-zero,
-     * the gc has changed and must be reallocated, provided that the
-     * new settings specify a valid outline (non-zero width and non-NULL
-     * color)
+     * Configure the outline graphics context. If mask is non-zero, the gc has
+     * changed and must be reallocated, provided that the new settings specify
+     * a valid outline (non-zero width and non-NULL color)
      */
 
     mask = Tk_ConfigOutlineGC(&gcValues, canvas, itemPtr,
-	     &(rectOvalPtr->outline));
+	    &(rectOvalPtr->outline));
     if (mask && \
 	    rectOvalPtr->outline.width != 0 && \
 	    rectOvalPtr->outline.color != NULL) {
@@ -477,10 +491,10 @@ ConfigureRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     }
     rectOvalPtr->outline.gc = newGC;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
-    if (state==TK_STATE_HIDDEN) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN) {
 	ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr);
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
@@ -494,7 +508,7 @@ ConfigureRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 	if (rectOvalPtr->activeFillStipple!=None) {
 	    stipple = rectOvalPtr->activeFillStipple;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (rectOvalPtr->disabledFillColor!=NULL) {
 	    color = rectOvalPtr->disabledFillColor;
 	}
@@ -526,14 +540,16 @@ ConfigureRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
     if (flags & TK_OFFSET_LEFT) {
 	tsoffset->xoffset = (int) (rectOvalPtr->bbox[0] + 0.5);
     } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
-	tsoffset->xoffset = (int) ((rectOvalPtr->bbox[0]+rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]+1)/2);
+	tsoffset->xoffset = (int)
+		((rectOvalPtr->bbox[0]+rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]+1)/2);
     } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_RIGHT) {
 	tsoffset->xoffset = (int) (rectOvalPtr->bbox[2] + 0.5);
     }
     if (flags & TK_OFFSET_TOP) {
 	tsoffset->yoffset = (int) (rectOvalPtr->bbox[1] + 0.5);
     } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE) {
-	tsoffset->yoffset = (int) ((rectOvalPtr->bbox[1]+rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]+1)/2);
+	tsoffset->yoffset = (int)
+		((rectOvalPtr->bbox[1]+rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]+1)/2);
     } else if (flags & TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM) {
 	tsoffset->yoffset = (int) (rectOvalPtr->bbox[3] + 0.5);
     }
@@ -548,8 +564,8 @@ ConfigureRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
  *
  * DeleteRectOval --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to clean up the data structure
- *	associated with a rectangle or oval item.
+ *	This function is called to clean up the data structure associated with
+ *	a rectangle or oval item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -562,10 +578,9 @@ ConfigureRectOval(interp, canvas, itemPtr, objc, objv, flags)
 
 static void
 DeleteRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Info about overall widget. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item that is being deleted. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display containing window for
-					 * canvas. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Info about overall widget. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item that is being deleted. */
+    Display *display;		/* Display containing window for canvas. */
 {
     RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -598,16 +613,14 @@ DeleteRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display)
  *
  * ComputeRectOvalBbox --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to compute the bounding box of
- *	all the pixels that may be drawn as part of a rectangle
- *	or oval.
+ *	This function is invoked to compute the bounding box of all the pixels
+ *	that may be drawn as part of a rectangle or oval.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header
- *	for itemPtr.
+ *	The fields x1, y1, x2, and y2 are updated in the header for itemPtr.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -615,20 +628,19 @@ DeleteRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display)
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static void
 ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr;		/* Item whose bbox is to be
-					 * recomputed. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr;	/* Item whose bbox is to be recomputed. */
 {
     int bloat, tmp;
     double dtmp, width;
     Tk_State state = rectOvalPtr->header.state;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
     width = rectOvalPtr->outline.width;
-    if (state==TK_STATE_HIDDEN) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_HIDDEN) {
 	rectOvalPtr->header.x1 = rectOvalPtr->header.y1 =
 	rectOvalPtr->header.x2 = rectOvalPtr->header.y2 = -1;
 	return;
@@ -637,7 +649,7 @@ ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr)
 	if (rectOvalPtr->outline.activeWidth>width) {
 	    width = rectOvalPtr->outline.activeWidth;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (rectOvalPtr->outline.disabledWidth>0) {
 	    width = rectOvalPtr->outline.disabledWidth;
 	}
@@ -648,24 +660,25 @@ ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr)
      */
 
     if (rectOvalPtr->bbox[1] > rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]) {
-	double tmp;
-	tmp = rectOvalPtr->bbox[3];
+	double tmpY = rectOvalPtr->bbox[3];
+
 	rectOvalPtr->bbox[3] = rectOvalPtr->bbox[1];
-	rectOvalPtr->bbox[1] = tmp;
+	rectOvalPtr->bbox[1] = tmpY;
     }
     if (rectOvalPtr->bbox[0] > rectOvalPtr->bbox[2]) {
-	double tmp;
-	tmp = rectOvalPtr->bbox[2];
+	double tmpX = rectOvalPtr->bbox[2];
+
 	rectOvalPtr->bbox[2] = rectOvalPtr->bbox[0];
-	rectOvalPtr->bbox[0] = tmp;
+	rectOvalPtr->bbox[0] = tmpX;
     }
 
     if (rectOvalPtr->outline.gc == None) {
 	/*
-	 * The Win32 switch was added for 8.3 to solve a problem
-	 * with ovals leaving traces on bottom and right of 1 pixel.
-	 * This may not be the correct place to solve it, but it works.
+	 * The Win32 switch was added for 8.3 to solve a problem with ovals
+	 * leaving traces on bottom and right of 1 pixel. This may not be the
+	 * correct place to solve it, but it works.
 	 */
+
 #ifdef __WIN32__
 	bloat = 1;
 #else
@@ -673,9 +686,12 @@ ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr)
 #endif
     } else {
 #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK
-	/* Mac OS X CoreGraphics needs correct rounding here 
-	 * otherwise it will draw outside the bounding box.
-	 * Probably correct on other platforms as well? */
+	/*
+	 * Mac OS X CoreGraphics needs correct rounding here otherwise it will
+	 * draw outside the bounding box. Probably correct on other platforms
+	 * as well?
+	 */
+
 	bloat = (int) (width+1.5)/2;
 #else
 	bloat = (int) (width+1)/2;
@@ -683,9 +699,9 @@ ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Special note:  the rectangle is always drawn at least 1x1 in
-     * size, so round up the upper coordinates to be at least 1 unit
-     * greater than the lower ones.
+     * Special note: the rectangle is always drawn at least 1x1 in size, so
+     * round up the upper coordinates to be at least 1 unit greater than the
+     * lower ones.
      */
 
     tmp = (int) ((rectOvalPtr->bbox[0] >= 0) ? rectOvalPtr->bbox[0] + .5
@@ -713,28 +729,27 @@ ComputeRectOvalBbox(canvas, rectOvalPtr)
  *
  * DisplayRectOval --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to draw a rectangle or oval
- *	item in a given drawable.
+ *	This function is invoked to draw a rectangle or oval item in a given
+ *	drawable.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation
- *	information in canvas.
+ *	ItemPtr is drawn in drawable using the transformation information in
+ *	canvas.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 DisplayRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas that contains item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item to be displayed. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display on which to draw item. */
-    Drawable drawable;			/* Pixmap or window in which to draw
-					 * item. */
-    int x, y, width, height;		/* Describes region of canvas that
-					 * must be redisplayed (not used). */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas that contains item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to be displayed. */
+    Display *display;		/* Display on which to draw item. */
+    Drawable drawable;		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw item. */
+    int x, y, width, height;	/* Describes region of canvas that must be
+				 * redisplayed (not used). */
 {
     RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
     short x1, y1, x2, y2;
@@ -742,9 +757,9 @@ DisplayRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
     /*
-     * Compute the screen coordinates of the bounding box for the item.
-     * Make sure that the bbox is at least one pixel large, since some
-     * X servers will die if it isn't.
+     * Compute the screen coordinates of the bounding box for the item. Make
+     * sure that the bbox is at least one pixel large, since some X servers
+     * will die if it isn't.
      */
 
     Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords(canvas, rectOvalPtr->bbox[0], rectOvalPtr->bbox[1],
@@ -759,22 +774,21 @@ DisplayRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Display filled part first (if wanted), then outline.  If we're
-     * stippling, then modify the stipple offset in the GC.  Be sure to
-     * reset the offset when done, since the GC is supposed to be
-     * read-only.
+     * Display filled part first (if wanted), then outline. If we're
+     * stippling, then modify the stipple offset in the GC. Be sure to reset
+     * the offset when done, since the GC is supposed to be read-only.
      */
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
     fillStipple = rectOvalPtr->fillStipple;
     if (((TkCanvas *)canvas)->currentItemPtr == (Tk_Item *)rectOvalPtr) {
-	if (rectOvalPtr->activeFillStipple!=None) {
+	if (rectOvalPtr->activeFillStipple != None) {
 	    fillStipple = rectOvalPtr->activeFillStipple;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
-	if (rectOvalPtr->disabledFillStipple!=None) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+	if (rectOvalPtr->disabledFillStipple != None) {
 	    fillStipple = rectOvalPtr->disabledFillStipple;
 	}
     }
@@ -782,10 +796,12 @@ DisplayRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
     if (rectOvalPtr->fillGC != None) {
 	if (fillStipple != None) {
 	    Tk_TSOffset *tsoffset;
-	    int w=0; int h=0;
+	    int w = 0, h = 0;
+
 	    tsoffset = &rectOvalPtr->tsoffset;
 	    if (tsoffset) {
 		int flags = tsoffset->flags;
+
 		if (flags & (TK_OFFSET_CENTER|TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE)) {
 		    Tk_SizeOfBitmap(display, fillStipple, &w, &h);
 		    if (flags & TK_OFFSET_CENTER) {
@@ -820,6 +836,7 @@ DisplayRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
 	    XSetTSOrigin(display, rectOvalPtr->fillGC, 0, 0);
 	}
     }
+
     if (rectOvalPtr->outline.gc != None) {
 	Tk_ChangeOutlineGC(canvas, itemPtr, &(rectOvalPtr->outline));
 	if (rectOvalPtr->header.typePtr == &tkRectangleType) {
@@ -838,17 +855,16 @@ DisplayRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, display, drawable, x, y, width, height)
  *
  * RectToPoint --
  *
- *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given
- *	rectangle, in canvas units.
+ *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given rectangle, in
+ *	canvas units.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates
- *	are coordPtr[0] and coordPtr[1] is inside the rectangle.  If the
- *	point isn't inside the rectangle then the return value is the
- *	distance from the point to the rectangle.  If itemPtr is filled,
- *	then anywhere in the interior is considered "inside"; if
- *	itemPtr isn't filled, then "inside" means only the area
- *	occupied by the outline.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates are
+ *	coordPtr[0] and coordPtr[1] is inside the rectangle. If the point
+ *	isn't inside the rectangle then the return value is the distance from
+ *	the point to the rectangle. If itemPtr is filled, then anywhere in the
+ *	interior is considered "inside"; if itemPtr isn't filled, then
+ *	"inside" means only the area occupied by the outline.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -868,7 +884,7 @@ RectToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
     double width;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
@@ -877,15 +893,15 @@ RectToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 	if (rectPtr->outline.activeWidth>width) {
 	    width = rectPtr->outline.activeWidth;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (rectPtr->outline.disabledWidth>0) {
 	    width = rectPtr->outline.disabledWidth;
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * Generate a new larger rectangle that includes the border
-     * width, if there is one.
+     * Generate a new larger rectangle that includes the border width, if
+     * there is one.
      */
 
     x1 = rectPtr->bbox[0];
@@ -901,14 +917,13 @@ RectToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * If the point is inside the rectangle, handle specially:
-     * distance is 0 if rectangle is filled, otherwise compute
-     * distance to nearest edge of rectangle and subtract width
-     * of edge.
+     * If the point is inside the rectangle, handle specially: distance is 0
+     * if rectangle is filled, otherwise compute distance to nearest edge of
+     * rectangle and subtract width of edge.
      */
 
     if ((pointPtr[0] >= x1) && (pointPtr[0] < x2)
-		&& (pointPtr[1] >= y1) && (pointPtr[1] < y2)) {
+	    && (pointPtr[1] >= y1) && (pointPtr[1] < y2)) {
 	if ((rectPtr->fillGC != None) || (rectPtr->outline.gc == None)) {
 	    return 0.0;
 	}
@@ -960,17 +975,16 @@ RectToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
  *
  * OvalToPoint --
  *
- *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given
- *	oval, in canvas units.
+ *	Computes the distance from a given point to a given oval, in canvas
+ *	units.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates
- *	are coordPtr[0] and coordPtr[1] is inside the oval.  If the
- *	point isn't inside the oval then the return value is the
- *	distance from the point to the oval.  If itemPtr is filled,
- *	then anywhere in the interior is considered "inside"; if
- *	itemPtr isn't filled, then "inside" means only the area
- *	occupied by the outline.
+ *	The return value is 0 if the point whose x and y coordinates are
+ *	coordPtr[0] and coordPtr[1] is inside the oval. If the point isn't
+ *	inside the oval then the return value is the distance from the point
+ *	to the oval. If itemPtr is filled, then anywhere in the interior is
+ *	considered "inside"; if itemPtr isn't filled, then "inside" means only
+ *	the area occupied by the outline.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -990,7 +1004,7 @@ OvalToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
     int filled;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
@@ -999,7 +1013,7 @@ OvalToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
 	if (ovalPtr->outline.activeWidth>width) {
 	    width = (double) ovalPtr->outline.activeWidth;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (ovalPtr->outline.disabledWidth>0) {
 	    width = (double) ovalPtr->outline.disabledWidth;
 	}
@@ -1019,14 +1033,13 @@ OvalToPoint(canvas, itemPtr, pointPtr)
  *
  * RectToArea --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to determine whether an item
- *	lies entirely inside, entirely outside, or overlapping
- *	a given rectangle.
+ *	This function is called to determine whether an item lies entirely
+ *	inside, entirely outside, or overlapping a given rectangle.
  *
  * Results:
- *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area
- *	given by rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely
- *	inside the given area.
+ *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area given by
+ *	rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside the given
+ *	area.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1039,16 +1052,15 @@ static int
 RectToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
     Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
     Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against rectangle. */
-    double *areaPtr;		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates
-				 * (x1, y1, x2, y2) describing rectangular
-				 * area.  */
+    double *areaPtr;		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates (x1,
+				 * y1, x2, y2) describing rectangular area. */
 {
     RectOvalItem *rectPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
     double halfWidth;
     double width;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
@@ -1057,7 +1069,7 @@ RectToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
 	if (rectPtr->outline.activeWidth>width) {
 	    width = rectPtr->outline.activeWidth;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (rectPtr->outline.disabledWidth>0) {
 	    width = rectPtr->outline.disabledWidth;
 	}
@@ -1095,14 +1107,13 @@ RectToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
  *
  * OvalToArea --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to determine whether an item
- *	lies entirely inside, entirely outside, or overlapping
- *	a given rectangular area.
+ *	This function is called to determine whether an item lies entirely
+ *	inside, entirely outside, or overlapping a given rectangular area.
  *
  * Results:
- *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area
- *	given by rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely
- *	inside the given area.
+ *	-1 is returned if the item is entirely outside the area given by
+ *	rectPtr, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside the given
+ *	area.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1115,9 +1126,8 @@ static int
 OvalToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
     Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
     Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item to check against oval. */
-    double *areaPtr;		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates
-				 * (x1, y1, x2, y2) describing rectangular
-				 * area.  */
+    double *areaPtr;		/* Pointer to array of four coordinates (x1,
+				 * y1, x2, y2) describing rectangular area. */
 {
     RectOvalItem *ovalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
     double oval[4], halfWidth;
@@ -1125,7 +1135,7 @@ OvalToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
     double width;
     Tk_State state = itemPtr->state;
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
 
@@ -1134,7 +1144,7 @@ OvalToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
 	if (ovalPtr->outline.activeWidth>width) {
 	    width = ovalPtr->outline.activeWidth;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (ovalPtr->outline.disabledWidth>0) {
 	    width = ovalPtr->outline.disabledWidth;
 	}
@@ -1156,10 +1166,10 @@ OvalToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
     result = TkOvalToArea(oval, areaPtr);
 
     /*
-     * If the rectangle appears to overlap the oval and the oval
-     * isn't filled, do one more check to see if perhaps all four
-     * of the rectangle's corners are totally inside the oval's
-     * unfilled center, in which case we should return "outside".
+     * If the rectangle appears to overlap the oval and the oval isn't filled,
+     * do one more check to see if perhaps all four of the rectangle's corners
+     * are totally inside the oval's unfilled center, in which case we should
+     * return "outside".
      */
 
     if ((result == 0) && (ovalPtr->outline.gc != None)
@@ -1194,16 +1204,14 @@ OvalToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
  *
  * ScaleRectOval --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to rescale a rectangle or oval
- *	item.
+ *	This function is invoked to rescale a rectangle or oval item.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The rectangle or oval referred to by itemPtr is rescaled
- *	so that the following transformation is applied to all
- *	point coordinates:
+ *	The rectangle or oval referred to by itemPtr is rescaled so that the
+ *	following transformation is applied to all point coordinates:
  *		x' = originX + scaleX*(x-originX)
  *		y' = originY + scaleY*(y-originY)
  *
@@ -1212,11 +1220,11 @@ OvalToArea(canvas, itemPtr, areaPtr)
 
 static void
 ScaleRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing rectangle. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Rectangle to be scaled. */
-    double originX, originY;		/* Origin about which to scale rect. */
-    double scaleX;			/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
-    double scaleY;			/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing rectangle. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Rectangle to be scaled. */
+    double originX, originY;	/* Origin about which to scale rect. */
+    double scaleX;		/* Amount to scale in X direction. */
+    double scaleY;		/* Amount to scale in Y direction. */
 {
     RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -1232,26 +1240,24 @@ ScaleRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, originX, originY, scaleX, scaleY)
  *
  * TranslateRectOval --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to move a rectangle or oval by a
- *	given amount.
+ *	This function is called to move a rectangle or oval by a given amount.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The position of the rectangle or oval is offset by
- *	(xDelta, yDelta), and the bounding box is updated in the
- *	generic part of the item structure.
+ *	The position of the rectangle or oval is offset by (xDelta, yDelta),
+ *	and the bounding box is updated in the generic part of the item
+ *	structure.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 TranslateRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Canvas containing item. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item that is being moved. */
-    double deltaX, deltaY;		/* Amount by which item is to be
-					 * moved. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Canvas containing item. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item that is being moved. */
+    double deltaX, deltaY;	/* Amount by which item is to be moved. */
 {
     RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
 
@@ -1267,15 +1273,14 @@ TranslateRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
  *
  * RectOvalToPostscript --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to generate Postscript for
- *	rectangle and oval items.
+ *	This function is called to generate Postscript for rectangle and oval
+ *	items.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If an error
- *	occurs in generating Postscript then an error message is
- *	left in the interp's result, replacing whatever used to be there.
- *	If no error occurs, then Postscript for the rectangle is
- *	appended to the result.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If an error occurs in
+ *	generating Postscript then an error message is left in the interp's
+ *	result, replacing whatever used to be there. If no error occurs, then
+ *	Postscript for the rectangle is appended to the result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1285,13 +1290,12 @@ TranslateRectOval(canvas, itemPtr, deltaX, deltaY)
 
 static int
 RectOvalToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
-    Tk_Canvas canvas;			/* Information about overall canvas. */
-    Tk_Item *itemPtr;			/* Item for which Postscript is
-					 * wanted. */
-    int prepass;			/* 1 means this is a prepass to
-					 * collect font information;  0 means
-					 * final Postscript is being created. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Canvas canvas;		/* Information about overall canvas. */
+    Tk_Item *itemPtr;		/* Item for which Postscript is wanted. */
+    int prepass;		/* 1 means this is a prepass to collect font
+				 * information; 0 means final Postscript is
+				 * being created. */
 {
     char pathCmd[500];
     RectOvalItem *rectOvalPtr = (RectOvalItem *) itemPtr;
@@ -1305,12 +1309,10 @@ RectOvalToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
     y2 = Tk_CanvasPsY(canvas, rectOvalPtr->bbox[3]);
 
     /*
-     * Generate a string that creates a path for the rectangle or oval.
-     * This is the only part of the procedure's code that is type-
-     * specific.
+     * Generate a string that creates a path for the rectangle or oval. This
+     * is the only part of the function's code that is type-specific.
      */
 
-
     if (rectOvalPtr->header.typePtr == &tkRectangleType) {
 	sprintf(pathCmd, "%.15g %.15g moveto %.15g 0 rlineto 0 %.15g rlineto %.15g 0 rlineto closepath\n",
 		rectOvalPtr->bbox[0], y1,
@@ -1322,7 +1324,7 @@ RectOvalToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 		(rectOvalPtr->bbox[2] - rectOvalPtr->bbox[0])/2, (y1 - y2)/2);
     }
 
-    if(state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
+    if (state == TK_STATE_NULL) {
 	state = ((TkCanvas *)canvas)->canvas_state;
     }
     color = rectOvalPtr->outline.color;
@@ -1338,7 +1340,7 @@ RectOvalToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 	if (rectOvalPtr->activeFillStipple!=None) {
 	    fillStipple = rectOvalPtr->activeFillStipple;
 	}
-    } else if (state==TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
+    } else if (state == TK_STATE_DISABLED) {
 	if (rectOvalPtr->outline.disabledColor!=NULL) {
 	    color = rectOvalPtr->outline.disabledColor;
 	}
@@ -1356,14 +1358,12 @@ RectOvalToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
 
     if (fillColor != NULL) {
 	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, pathCmd, (char *) NULL);
-	if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, fillColor)
-		!= TCL_OK) {
+	if (Tk_CanvasPsColor(interp, canvas, fillColor) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (fillStipple != None) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "clip ", (char *) NULL);
-	    if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, fillStipple)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
+	    if (Tk_CanvasPsStipple(interp, canvas, fillStipple) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	    if (color != NULL) {
@@ -1388,3 +1388,11 @@ RectOvalToPostscript(interp, canvas, itemPtr, prepass)
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkText.c b/generic/tkText.c
index f7dc176..bb4044b 100644
--- a/generic/tkText.c
+++ b/generic/tkText.c
@@ -1,20 +1,19 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkText.c --
  *
- *	This module provides a big chunk of the implementation of
- *	multi-line editable text widgets for Tk.  Among other things, it
- *	provides the Tcl command interfaces to text widgets.  The B-tree
- *	representation of text and its actual display are implemented
- *	elsewhere.
+ *	This module provides a big chunk of the implementation of multi-line
+ *	editable text widgets for Tk. Among other things, it provides the Tcl
+ *	command interfaces to text widgets. The B-tree representation of text
+ *	and its actual display are implemented elsewhere.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1999 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkText.c,v 1.57 2005/04/04 22:00:05 vincentdarley Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkText.c,v 1.58 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "default.h"
@@ -29,26 +28,27 @@
 
 /*
  * For compatibility with Tk 4.0 through 8.4.x, we allow tabs to be
- * mis-specified with non-increasing values.  These are converted into
- * tabs which are the equivalent of at least a character width apart.
+ * mis-specified with non-increasing values. These are converted into tabs
+ * which are the equivalent of at least a character width apart.
  */
+
 #if (TK_MAJOR_VERSION < 9)
 #define _TK_ALLOW_DECREASING_TABS
 #endif
 
 #include "tkText.h"
 
-/* 
- * Used to avoid having to allocate and deallocate arrays on the
- * fly for commonly used procedures.  Must be > 0.
+/*
+ * Used to avoid having to allocate and deallocate arrays on the fly for
+ * commonly used functions. Must be > 0.
  */
 
 #define PIXEL_CLIENTS 5
 
 /*
- * The 'TkTextState' enum in tkText.h is used to define a type for the
- * -state option of the Text widget.  These values are used as indices
- * into the string table below.
+ * The 'TkTextState' enum in tkText.h is used to define a type for the -state
+ * option of the Text widget. These values are used as indices into the string
+ * table below.
  */
 
 static char *stateStrings[] = {
@@ -56,9 +56,9 @@ static char *stateStrings[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * The 'TkWrapMode' enum in tkText.h is used to define a type for the
- * -wrap option of the Text widget.  These values are used as indices
- * into the string table below.
+ * The 'TkWrapMode' enum in tkText.h is used to define a type for the -wrap
+ * option of the Text widget. These values are used as indices into the string
+ * table below.
  */
 
 static char *wrapStrings[] = {
@@ -69,22 +69,24 @@ static char *wrapStrings[] = {
  * The following functions and custom option type are used to define the
  * "line" option type, and thereby handle the text widget '-startline',
  * '-endline' configuration options which are of that type.
- * 
- * We do not need a 'freeProc' because all changes to these two options
- * are handled through the TK_TEXT_LINE_RANGE flag in the optionSpecs
- * list, and the internal storage is just a pointer, which therefore
- * doesn't need freeing.
+ *
+ * We do not need a 'freeProc' because all changes to these two options are
+ * handled through the TK_TEXT_LINE_RANGE flag in the optionSpecs list, and
+ * the internal storage is just a pointer, which therefore doesn't need
+ * freeing.
  */
-static int	SetLineStartEnd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			Tcl_Obj **value, char *recordPtr, int internalOffset,
-			char *oldInternalPtr, int flags));
-static Tcl_Obj* GetLineStartEnd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
-			char *recordPtr, int internalOffset));
-static void	RestoreLineStartEnd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			Tk_Window tkwin, char *internalPtr,
-			char *oldInternalPtr));
-static int	ObjectIsEmpty _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+
+static int		SetLineStartEnd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Obj **value, char *recordPtr,
+			    int internalOffset, char *oldInternalPtr,
+			    int flags);
+static Tcl_Obj*		GetLineStartEnd(ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    char *recordPtr, int internalOffset);
+static void		RestoreLineStartEnd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, char *internalPtr,
+			    char *oldInternalPtr);
+static int		ObjectIsEmpty(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
 
 static Tk_ObjCustomOption lineOption = {
     "line",				/* name */
@@ -101,21 +103,21 @@ static Tk_ObjCustomOption lineOption = {
 
 static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-autoseparators", "autoSeparators",
-        "AutoSeparators", DEF_TEXT_AUTO_SEPARATORS, -1,
-        Tk_Offset(TkText, autoSeparators), 0, 0, 0},
+	"AutoSeparators", DEF_TEXT_AUTO_SEPARATORS, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(TkText, autoSeparators), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", "background", "Background",
 	DEF_TEXT_BG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, border),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_TEXT_BG_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bd", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth", 
+	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-borderwidth",
 	TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
     {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-bg", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
 	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-background", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-blockcursor", "blockCursor",
-	"BlockCursor", DEF_TEXT_BLOCK_CURSOR, -1, 
+	"BlockCursor", DEF_TEXT_BLOCK_CURSOR, -1,
 	Tk_Offset(TkText, insertCursorType), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", "borderWidth", "BorderWidth",
-	DEF_TEXT_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, borderWidth), 
+	DEF_TEXT_BORDER_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, borderWidth),
 	0, 0, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
     {TK_OPTION_CURSOR, "-cursor", "cursor", "Cursor",
 	DEF_TEXT_CURSOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, cursor),
@@ -124,70 +126,70 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
 	 NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, end), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
 	 (ClientData) &lineOption, TK_TEXT_LINE_RANGE},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-exportselection", "exportSelection",
-	"ExportSelection", DEF_TEXT_EXPORT_SELECTION, -1, 
+	"ExportSelection", DEF_TEXT_EXPORT_SELECTION, -1,
 	Tk_Offset(TkText, exportSelection), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, "-fg", "foreground", (char *) NULL,
 	(char *) NULL, 0, -1, 0, (ClientData) "-foreground", 0},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", "font", "Font",
-	DEF_TEXT_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, tkfont), 0, 0, 
+	DEF_TEXT_FONT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, tkfont), 0, 0,
 	TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", "foreground", "Foreground",
-	DEF_TEXT_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, fgColor), 0, 
+	DEF_TEXT_FG, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, fgColor), 0,
 	0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-height", "height", "Height",
 	DEF_TEXT_HEIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, height), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightbackground", "highlightBackground",
 	"HighlightBackground", DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT_BG,
-	-1, Tk_Offset(TkText, highlightBgColorPtr), 
+	-1, Tk_Offset(TkText, highlightBgColorPtr),
 	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-highlightcolor", "highlightColor", "HighlightColor",
 	DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, highlightColorPtr),
 	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-highlightthickness", "highlightThickness",
-	"HighlightThickness", DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1, 
+	"HighlightThickness", DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH, -1,
 	Tk_Offset(TkText, highlightWidth), 0, 0, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
-    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-inactiveselectbackground", "inactiveSelectBackground", 
-        "Foreground", 
+    {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-inactiveselectbackground", "inactiveSelectBackground",
+	"Foreground",
 #ifdef ALWAYS_SHOW_SELECTION
-	DEF_TEXT_SELECT_COLOR, 
+	DEF_TEXT_SELECT_COLOR,
 #else
-	NULL, 
+	NULL,
 #endif
 	-1, Tk_Offset(TkText, inactiveSelBorder),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, (ClientData) DEF_TEXT_SELECT_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-insertbackground", "insertBackground", "Foreground",
 	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BG,
-	-1, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertBorder), 
+	-1, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertBorder),
 	0, 0, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth", 
-	"BorderWidth", DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BD_COLOR, -1, 
-	Tk_Offset(TkText, insertBorderWidth), 0, 
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertborderwidth", "insertBorderWidth",
+	"BorderWidth", DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BD_COLOR, -1,
+	Tk_Offset(TkText, insertBorderWidth), 0,
 	(ClientData) DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BD_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertofftime", "insertOffTime", "OffTime",
-	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_OFF_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertOffTime), 
+	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_OFF_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertOffTime),
 	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-insertontime", "insertOnTime", "OnTime",
-	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_ON_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertOnTime), 
+	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_ON_TIME, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertOnTime),
 	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-insertwidth", "insertWidth", "InsertWidth",
-	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertWidth), 
+	DEF_TEXT_INSERT_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, insertWidth),
 	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-maxundo", "maxUndo", "MaxUndo",
 	DEF_TEXT_MAX_UNDO, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, maxUndo), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", "padX", "Pad",
-	DEF_TEXT_PADX, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, padX), 0, 0, 
+	DEF_TEXT_PADX, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, padX), 0, 0,
 	TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", "padY", "Pad",
 	DEF_TEXT_PADY, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, padY), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_RELIEF, "-relief", "relief", "Relief",
 	DEF_TEXT_RELIEF, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, relief), 0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-selectbackground", "selectBackground", "Foreground",
-        DEF_TEXT_SELECT_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, selBorder),
+	DEF_TEXT_SELECT_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, selBorder),
 	0, (ClientData) DEF_TEXT_SELECT_MONO, 0},
-    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth", 
-	"BorderWidth", DEF_TEXT_SELECT_BD_COLOR, 
-	Tk_Offset(TkText, selBorderWidthPtr), 
-	Tk_Offset(TkText, selBorderWidth), 
+    {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-selectborderwidth", "selectBorderWidth",
+	"BorderWidth", DEF_TEXT_SELECT_BD_COLOR,
+	Tk_Offset(TkText, selBorderWidthPtr),
+	Tk_Offset(TkText, selBorderWidth),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, (ClientData) DEF_TEXT_SELECT_BD_MONO, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-selectforeground", "selectForeground", "Background",
 	DEF_TEXT_SELECT_FG_COLOR, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, selFgColorPtr),
@@ -207,234 +209,212 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
 	 NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, start), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,
 	 (ClientData) &lineOption, TK_TEXT_LINE_RANGE},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-state", "state", "State",
-        DEF_TEXT_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, state), 
+	DEF_TEXT_STATE, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, state),
 	0, (ClientData) stateStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tabs", "tabs", "Tabs",
 	DEF_TEXT_TABS, Tk_Offset(TkText, tabOptionPtr), -1,
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-takefocus", "takeFocus", "TakeFocus",
-	DEF_TEXT_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, takeFocus), 
+	DEF_TEXT_TAKE_FOCUS, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, takeFocus),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, "-undo", "undo", "Undo",
-        DEF_TEXT_UNDO, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, undo), 0, 0 , 0},
+	DEF_TEXT_UNDO, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, undo), 0, 0 , 0},
     {TK_OPTION_INT, "-width", "width", "Width",
-        DEF_TEXT_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, width), 0, 0, 
+	DEF_TEXT_WIDTH, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, width), 0, 0,
 	TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-wrap", "wrap", "Wrap",
-        DEF_TEXT_WRAP, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, wrapMode), 
+	DEF_TEXT_WRAP, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, wrapMode),
 	0, (ClientData) wrapStrings, TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-xscrollcommand", "xScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
-        DEF_TEXT_XSCROLL_COMMAND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, xScrollCmd),
+	DEF_TEXT_XSCROLL_COMMAND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, xScrollCmd),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-yscrollcommand", "yScrollCommand", "ScrollCommand",
-        DEF_TEXT_YSCROLL_COMMAND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, yScrollCmd),
+	DEF_TEXT_YSCROLL_COMMAND, -1, Tk_Offset(TkText, yScrollCmd),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_END}
 };
 
 /*
  * These three typedefs, the structure and the SearchPerform, SearchCore
- * functions below are used for line-based searches of the text widget,
- * and, in particular, to handle multi-line matching even though the text
- * widget is a single-line based data structure.  They are completely
- * abstracted away from the Text widget internals, however, so could
- * easily be re-used with any line-based entity to provide multi-line
- * matching.
- * 
- * We have abstracted this code away from the text widget to try to
- * keep Tk as modular as possible.
+ * functions below are used for line-based searches of the text widget, and,
+ * in particular, to handle multi-line matching even though the text widget is
+ * a single-line based data structure. They are completely abstracted away
+ * from the Text widget internals, however, so could easily be re-used with
+ * any line-based entity to provide multi-line matching.
+ *
+ * We have abstracted this code away from the text widget to try to keep Tk as
+ * modular as possible.
  */
 
 struct SearchSpec;	/* Forward declaration. */
 
-typedef ClientData      SearchAddLineProc _ANSI_ARGS_((int lineNum,
-			    struct SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *theLine, int *lenPtr, 
-			    int *extraLinesPtr));
-typedef int             SearchMatchProc _ANSI_ARGS_((int lineNum, 
-			    struct SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr, 
-			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Obj *theLine, 
-			    int matchOffset, int matchLength));
-typedef int             SearchLineIndexProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+typedef ClientData	SearchAddLineProc(int lineNum,
+			    struct SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *theLine, int *lenPtr,
+			    int *extraLinesPtr);
+typedef int		SearchMatchProc(int lineNum,
+			    struct SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr,
+			    ClientData clientData, Tcl_Obj *theLine,
+			    int matchOffset, int matchLength);
+typedef int		SearchLineIndexProc(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr, struct SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr,
-			    int *linePosPtr, int *offsetPosPtr));
+			    int *linePosPtr, int *offsetPosPtr);
 
 typedef struct SearchSpec {
-    int exact;                       /* Whether search is exact or regexp */
-    int noCase;                      /* Case-insenstivive? */
-    int noLineStop;                  /* If not set, a regexp search will
-				      * use the TCL_REG_NLSTOP flag */
-    int overlap;                     /* If set, results from multiple
-                                      * searches (-all) are allowed to
-                                      * overlap each other. */
-    int strictLimits;                /* If set, matches must be
-                                      * completely inside the from,to
-                                      * range.  Otherwise the limits
-                                      * only apply to the start of each 
-                                      * match. */
-    int all;                         /* Whether all or the first match should 
-				      * be reported */
-    int startLine;                   /* First line to examine */
-    int startOffset;                 /* Index in first line to start at */
-    int stopLine;                    /* Last line to examine, or -1 when we
-				      * search all available text */
-    int stopOffset;                  /* Index to stop at, provided stopLine
-				      * is not -1 */
-    int numLines;                    /* Total lines which are available */
-    int backwards;                   /* Searching forwards or backwards */
-    Tcl_Obj *varPtr;                 /* If non-NULL, store length(s) of 
-				      * match(es) in this variable */
-    Tcl_Obj *countPtr;               /* Keeps track of currently found 
-				      * lengths */
-    Tcl_Obj *resPtr;                 /* Keeps track of currently found 
-				      * locations */
-    int searchElide;                 /* Search in hidden text as well */
-    SearchAddLineProc *addLineProc;  /* Function to call when we need to
-                                      * add another line to the search string
-                                      * so far */
-    SearchMatchProc *foundMatchProc; /* Function to call when we have
-				      * found a match */
-    SearchLineIndexProc *lineIndexProc;/* Function to call when we have
-				      * found a match */
-    ClientData clientData;	     /* Information about structure being
-                          	      * searched, in this case a text 
-                          	      * widget. */
+    int exact;			/* Whether search is exact or regexp */
+    int noCase;			/* Case-insenstivive? */
+    int noLineStop;		/* If not set, a regexp search will use the
+				 * TCL_REG_NLSTOP flag. */
+    int overlap;		/* If set, results from multiple searches
+				 * (-all) are allowed to overlap each
+				 * other. */
+    int strictLimits;		/* If set, matches must be completely inside
+				 * the from,to range. Otherwise the limits
+				 * only apply to the start of each match. */
+    int all;			/* Whether all or the first match should be
+				 * reported. */
+    int startLine;		/* First line to examine. */
+    int startOffset;		/* Index in first line to start at. */
+    int stopLine;		/* Last line to examine, or -1 when we search
+				 * all available text. */
+    int stopOffset;		/* Index to stop at, provided stopLine is not
+				 * -1 */
+    int numLines;		/* Total lines which are available. */
+    int backwards;		/* Searching forwards or backwards. */
+    Tcl_Obj *varPtr;		/* If non-NULL, store length(s) of match(es)
+				 * in this variable. */
+    Tcl_Obj *countPtr;		/* Keeps track of currently found lengths. */
+    Tcl_Obj *resPtr;		/* Keeps track of currently found locations */
+    int searchElide;		/* Search in hidden text as well. */
+    SearchAddLineProc *addLineProc;
+				/* Function to call when we need to add
+				 * another line to the search string so far */
+    SearchMatchProc *foundMatchProc;
+				/* Function to call when we have found a
+				 * match. */
+    SearchLineIndexProc *lineIndexProc;
+				/* Function to call when we have found a
+				 * match. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about structure being searched,
+				 * in this case a text widget. */
 } SearchSpec;
 
-/* 
- * The text-widget-independent functions which actually perform
- * the search, handling both regexp and exact searches.
+/*
+ * The text-widget-independent functions which actually perform the search,
+ * handling both regexp and exact searches.
  */
-static int SearchCore    _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr, Tcl_Obj *patObj));
-static int SearchPerform _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+
+static int		SearchCore(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr, Tcl_Obj *patObj);
+static int		SearchPerform(Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr, Tcl_Obj *patObj,
-			    Tcl_Obj *fromPtr, Tcl_Obj *toPtr));
+			    Tcl_Obj *fromPtr, Tcl_Obj *toPtr);
 
 /*
- * Boolean variable indicating whether or not special debugging code
- * should be executed.
+ * Boolean variable indicating whether or not special debugging code should be
+ * executed.
  */
 
 int tkTextDebug = 0;
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static int		ConfigureText _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkText *textPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		DeleteChars _ANSI_ARGS_((TkSharedText *sharedPtr, 
-			    TkText *textPtr,
-			    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr1, 
-			    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr2, int viewUpdate));
-static int		CountIndices _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST TkText *textPtr,
-			    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr1, 
-			    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr2, 
-			    TkTextCountType type));
-static void		DestroyText _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr));
-static int		InsertChars _ANSI_ARGS_((TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr,
-			    TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, Tcl_Obj *stringPtr,
-			    int viewUpdate));
-static void		TextBlinkProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
-static void		TextCmdDeletedProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static int		CreateWidget _ANSI_ARGS_((TkSharedText *sharedPtr,
-			    Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Interp *interp, 
-			    CONST TkText *parent,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		TextEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    XEvent *eventPtr));
-static int		TextFetchSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes));
-static int		TextIndexSortProc _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST VOID *first,
-			    CONST VOID *second));
-static int		TextInsertCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr, 
-			    TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, 
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], 
-			    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int viewUpdate));
-static int		TextReplaceCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, 
+static int		ConfigureText(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkText *textPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		DeleteChars(TkSharedText *sharedPtr, TkText *textPtr,
+			    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr1,
+			    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr2, int viewUpdate);
+static int		CountIndices(CONST TkText *textPtr,
+			    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr1,
+			    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr2,
+			    TkTextCountType type);
+static void		DestroyText(TkText *textPtr);
+static int		InsertChars(TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr,
+			    TkText *textPtr, TkTextIndex *indexPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *stringPtr, int viewUpdate);
+static void		TextBlinkProc(ClientData clientData);
+static void		TextCmdDeletedProc(ClientData clientData);
+static int		CreateWidget(TkSharedText *sharedPtr, Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, CONST TkText *parent,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		TextEventProc(ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr);
+static int		TextFetchSelection(ClientData clientData, int offset,
+			    char *buffer, int maxBytes);
+static int		TextIndexSortProc(CONST VOID *first,
+			    CONST VOID *second);
+static int		TextInsertCmd(TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr,
+			    TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[],
+			    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int viewUpdate);
+static int		TextReplaceCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
 			    CONST TkTextIndex *indexFromPtr,
 			    CONST TkTextIndex *indexToPtr,
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], 
-			    int viewUpdate));
-static int		TextSearchCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, 
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		TextEditCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, 
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		TextWidgetObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, 
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		SharedTextObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, 
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		TextWorldChangedCallback _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData instanceData));
-static void		TextWorldChanged _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    int mask));
-static int		TextDumpCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, 
-			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		DumpLine _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, 
-			    TkText *textPtr, int what, TkTextLine *linePtr,
-			    int start, int end, int lineno,
-			    CONST char *command));
-static int		DumpSegment _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, 
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, 
-			    CONST char *key,
-			    CONST char *value, CONST char * command,
-			    CONST TkTextIndex *index, int what));
-static int		TextEditUndo _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr));
-static int		TextEditRedo _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr));
-static Tcl_Obj*		TextGetText _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST TkText *textPtr,
-			    CONST TkTextIndex * index1,
-			    CONST TkTextIndex * index2, int visibleOnly));
-static void		UpdateDirtyFlag _ANSI_ARGS_((TkSharedText *sharedPtr));
-static void             TextPushUndoAction _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *undoString, int insert, 
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int viewUpdate);
+static int		TextSearchCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		TextEditCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		TextWidgetObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		SharedTextObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		TextWorldChangedCallback(ClientData instanceData);
+static void		TextWorldChanged(TkText *textPtr, int mask);
+static int		TextDumpCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		DumpLine(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkText *textPtr, int what,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int start, int end,
+			    int lineno, CONST char *command);
+static int		DumpSegment(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    CONST char *key, CONST char *value,
+			    CONST char *command, CONST TkTextIndex *index,
+			    int what);
+static int		TextEditUndo(TkText *textPtr);
+static int		TextEditRedo(TkText *textPtr);
+static Tcl_Obj *	TextGetText(CONST TkText *textPtr,
+			    CONST TkTextIndex *index1,
+			    CONST TkTextIndex *index2, int visibleOnly);
+static void		UpdateDirtyFlag(TkSharedText *sharedPtr);
+static void		TextPushUndoAction(TkText *textPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *undoString, int insert,
 			    CONST TkTextIndex *index1Ptr,
-			    CONST TkTextIndex *index2Ptr));
-static int              TextSearchIndexInLine _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    CONST SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr, 
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int byteIndex));
-static int		TextPeerCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static TkUndoProc       TextUndoRedoCallback;
-
-/* 
- * Declarations of the three search procs required by
- * the multi-line search routines
+			    CONST TkTextIndex *index2Ptr);
+static int		TextSearchIndexInLine(CONST SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int byteIndex);
+static int		TextPeerCmd(TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static TkUndoProc	TextUndoRedoCallback;
+
+/*
+ * Declarations of the three search procs required by the multi-line search
+ * routines.
  */
-static SearchMatchProc         TextSearchFoundMatch;
-static SearchAddLineProc       TextSearchAddNextLine;
-static SearchLineIndexProc     TextSearchGetLineIndex;
 
-
+static SearchMatchProc		TextSearchFoundMatch;
+static SearchAddLineProc	TextSearchAddNextLine;
+static SearchLineIndexProc	TextSearchGetLineIndex;
 
 /*
- * The structure below defines text class behavior by means of procedures
- * that can be invoked from generic window code.
+ * The structure below defines text class behavior by means of functions that
+ * can be invoked from generic window code.
  */
 
 static Tk_ClassProcs textClass = {
     sizeof(Tk_ClassProcs),	/* size */
     TextWorldChangedCallback,	/* worldChangedProc */
 };
-
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * Tk_TextObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "text" Tcl command.
- *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "text" Tcl command. See the
+ *	user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -447,8 +427,7 @@ static Tk_ClassProcs textClass = {
 
 int
 Tk_TextObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
     int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
@@ -468,15 +447,15 @@ Tk_TextObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * CreateWidget --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "text" Tcl command,
- *	(when called by Tk_TextObjCmd) and the "$text peer create"
- *	text widget sub-command (called from TextPeerCmd).
- *	
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "text" Tcl command, (when
+ *	called by Tk_TextObjCmd) and the "$text peer create" text widget
+ *	sub-command (called from TextPeerCmd).
+ *
  *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A standard Tcl result, places the name of the widget
- *	created into the interp's result.
+ *	A standard Tcl result, places the name of the widget created into the
+ *	interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	See the user documentation.
@@ -487,11 +466,10 @@ Tk_TextObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 static int
 CreateWidget(sharedPtr, tkwin, interp, parent, objc, objv)
     TkSharedText *sharedPtr;    /* Shared widget info, or null */
-    Tk_Window tkwin;	        /* Main window associated with
-				 * interpreter. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
-    CONST TkText *parent;       /* If non-NULL then take default
-                                 * start, end from this parent. */
+    CONST TkText *parent;	/* If non-NULL then take default start, end
+				 * from this parent. */
     int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
 {
@@ -499,22 +477,21 @@ CreateWidget(sharedPtr, tkwin, interp, parent, objc, objv)
     Tk_OptionTable optionTable;
     TkTextIndex startIndex;
     Tk_Window new;
-    
+
     /*
      * Create the window.
      */
 
-    new = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), 
-				  (char *) NULL);
+    new = Tk_CreateWindowFromPath(interp, tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objv[1]),
+	    (char *) NULL);
     if (new == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the text widget and initialize everything to zero,
-     * then set the necessary initial (non-NULL) values.  It is
-     * important that the 'set' tag and 'insert', 'current' mark
-     * pointers are all NULL to start.
+     * Create the text widget and initialize everything to zero, then set the
+     * necessary initial (non-NULL) values. It is important that the 'set' tag
+     * and 'insert', 'current' mark pointers are all NULL to start.
      */
 
     textPtr = (TkText *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkText));
@@ -530,11 +507,11 @@ CreateWidget(sharedPtr, tkwin, interp, parent, objc, objv)
     if (sharedPtr == NULL) {
 	sharedPtr = (TkSharedText *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkSharedText));
 	memset((VOID *) sharedPtr, 0, sizeof(TkSharedText));
-	
+
 	sharedPtr->refCount = 0;
 	sharedPtr->peers = NULL;
 	sharedPtr->tree = TkBTreeCreate(sharedPtr);
-	
+
 	Tcl_InitHashTable(&sharedPtr->tagTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
 	Tcl_InitHashTable(&sharedPtr->markTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
 	Tcl_InitHashTable(&sharedPtr->windowTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
@@ -547,24 +524,28 @@ CreateWidget(sharedPtr, tkwin, interp, parent, objc, objv)
 	sharedPtr->stateEpoch = 0;
     }
 
-    /* Add the new widget to the shared list */
+    /*
+     * Add the new widget to the shared list.
+     */
+
     textPtr->sharedTextPtr = sharedPtr;
     sharedPtr->refCount++;
     textPtr->next = sharedPtr->peers;
     sharedPtr->peers = textPtr;
-    /* 
-     * This refCount will be held until DestroyText is called.
-     * Note also that the later call to 'TkTextCreateDInfo'
-     * will add more refCounts.
+
+    /*
+     * This refCount will be held until DestroyText is called. Note also that
+     * the later call to 'TkTextCreateDInfo' will add more refCounts.
      */
+
     textPtr->refCount = 1;
 
-    /* 
-     * Specify start and end lines in the B-tree.  The default
-     * is the same as the parent, but this can be adjusted to
-     * display more or less if the start, end where given
-     * as configuration options.  
+    /*
+     * Specify start and end lines in the B-tree. The default is the same as
+     * the parent, but this can be adjusted to display more or less if the
+     * start, end where given as configuration options.
      */
+
     if (parent != NULL) {
 	textPtr->start = parent->start;
 	textPtr->end = parent->end;
@@ -573,12 +554,12 @@ CreateWidget(sharedPtr, tkwin, interp, parent, objc, objv)
 	textPtr->end = NULL;
     }
 
-    /* 
-     * Register with the B-tree.  In some sense it would be best
-     * if we could do this later (after configuration options),
-     * so that any changes to start,end do not require a total
-     * recalculation.
+    /*
+     * Register with the B-tree. In some sense it would be best if we could do
+     * this later (after configuration options), so that any changes to
+     * start,end do not require a total recalculation.
      */
+
     TkBTreeAddClient(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr, textPtr->charHeight);
 
     textPtr->state = TK_TEXT_STATE_NORMAL;
@@ -589,10 +570,14 @@ CreateWidget(sharedPtr, tkwin, interp, parent, objc, objv)
     textPtr->wrapMode = TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR;
     textPtr->prevWidth = Tk_Width(new);
     textPtr->prevHeight = Tk_Height(new);
-    /* This will add refCounts to textPtr */
+
+    /*
+     * This will add refCounts to textPtr.
+     */
+
     TkTextCreateDInfo(textPtr);
-    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 
-			0, 0, &startIndex);
+    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0,
+	    &startIndex);
     TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &startIndex, 0);
     textPtr->exportSelection = 1;
     textPtr->pickEvent.type = LeaveNotify;
@@ -600,7 +585,7 @@ CreateWidget(sharedPtr, tkwin, interp, parent, objc, objv)
     textPtr->maxUndo = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->maxUndo;
     textPtr->autoSeparators = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->autoSeparators;
     textPtr->tabOptionPtr = NULL;
-    
+
     /*
      * Create the "sel" tag and the "current" and "insert" marks.
      */
@@ -610,21 +595,23 @@ CreateWidget(sharedPtr, tkwin, interp, parent, objc, objv)
     textPtr->selBorderWidth = 0;
     textPtr->selBorderWidthPtr = NULL;
     textPtr->selFgColorPtr = NULL;
-    /* 
-     * Note: it is important that textPtr->selTagPtr is NULL before
-     * this initial call.
+
+    /*
+     * Note: it is important that textPtr->selTagPtr is NULL before this
+     * initial call.
      */
+
     textPtr->selTagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, "sel", NULL);
-    textPtr->selTagPtr->reliefString =
-	    (char *) ckalloc(sizeof(DEF_TEXT_SELECT_RELIEF));
+    textPtr->selTagPtr->reliefString = (char *)
+	    ckalloc(sizeof(DEF_TEXT_SELECT_RELIEF));
     strcpy(textPtr->selTagPtr->reliefString, DEF_TEXT_SELECT_RELIEF);
     textPtr->selTagPtr->relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
     textPtr->currentMarkPtr = TkTextSetMark(textPtr, "current", &startIndex);
     textPtr->insertMarkPtr = TkTextSetMark(textPtr, "insert", &startIndex);
 
     /*
-     * Create the option table for this widget class.  If it has already
-     * been created, the cached pointer will be returned.
+     * Create the option table for this widget class. If it has already been
+     * created, the cached pointer will be returned.
      */
 
     optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
@@ -642,7 +629,7 @@ CreateWidget(sharedPtr, tkwin, interp, parent, objc, objv)
 	    TkTextBindProc, (ClientData) textPtr);
     Tk_CreateSelHandler(textPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY, XA_STRING,
 	    TextFetchSelection, (ClientData) textPtr, XA_STRING);
-    
+
     if (Tk_InitOptions(interp, (char *) textPtr, optionTable, textPtr->tkwin)
 	    != TCL_OK) {
 	Tk_DestroyWindow(textPtr->tkwin);
@@ -653,8 +640,8 @@ CreateWidget(sharedPtr, tkwin, interp, parent, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, 
-		     Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin),-1));
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin),-1));
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
@@ -663,9 +650,9 @@ CreateWidget(sharedPtr, tkwin, interp, parent, objc, objv)
  *
  * TextWidgetObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the Tcl command
- *	that corresponds to a text widget.  See the user
- *	documentation for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the Tcl command that corresponds
+ *	to a text widget. See the user documentation for details on what it
+ *	does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -686,21 +673,21 @@ TextWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     register TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) clientData;
     int result = TCL_OK;
     int index;
-    
+
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
-	"bbox", "cget", "compare", "configure", "count", "debug", 
-	"delete", "dlineinfo", "dump", "edit", "get", "image", "index", 
-	"insert", "mark", "peer", "replace", "scan", "search", "see", 
-	"tag", "window", "xview", "yview", (char *) NULL 
+	"bbox", "cget", "compare", "configure", "count", "debug",
+	"delete", "dlineinfo", "dump", "edit", "get", "image", "index",
+	"insert", "mark", "peer", "replace", "scan", "search", "see",
+	"tag", "window", "xview", "yview", (char *) NULL
     };
     enum options {
-	TEXT_BBOX, TEXT_CGET, TEXT_COMPARE, TEXT_CONFIGURE, TEXT_COUNT, 
-	TEXT_DEBUG, TEXT_DELETE, TEXT_DLINEINFO, TEXT_DUMP, TEXT_EDIT, 
-	TEXT_GET, TEXT_IMAGE, TEXT_INDEX, TEXT_INSERT, TEXT_MARK, 
-	TEXT_PEER, TEXT_REPLACE, TEXT_SCAN, TEXT_SEARCH, TEXT_SEE, 
+	TEXT_BBOX, TEXT_CGET, TEXT_COMPARE, TEXT_CONFIGURE, TEXT_COUNT,
+	TEXT_DEBUG, TEXT_DELETE, TEXT_DLINEINFO, TEXT_DUMP, TEXT_EDIT,
+	TEXT_GET, TEXT_IMAGE, TEXT_INDEX, TEXT_INSERT, TEXT_MARK,
+	TEXT_PEER, TEXT_REPLACE, TEXT_SCAN, TEXT_SEARCH, TEXT_SEE,
 	TEXT_TAG, TEXT_WINDOW, TEXT_XVIEW, TEXT_YVIEW
     };
-    
+
     if (objc < 2) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -713,783 +700,784 @@ TextWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     textPtr->refCount++;
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case TEXT_BBOX: {
-	    int x, y, width, height;
-	    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr;
-	    
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    indexPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
-	    if (indexPtr == NULL) {
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    if (TkTextCharBbox(textPtr, indexPtr, &x, &y, 
-			       &width, &height, NULL) == 0) {
-		Tcl_Obj *listObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
-		
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, 
-					 Tcl_NewIntObj(x));
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, 
-					 Tcl_NewIntObj(y));
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, 
-					 Tcl_NewIntObj(width));
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, 
-					 Tcl_NewIntObj(height));
-		
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObj);
-	    }
-	    break;
+    case TEXT_BBOX: {
+	int x, y, width, height;
+	CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr;
+
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	indexPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
+	if (indexPtr == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	if (TkTextCharBbox(textPtr, indexPtr, &x, &y, &width, &height,
+		NULL) == 0) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *listObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(x));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(y));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(width));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(height));
+
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObj);
 	}
-	case TEXT_CGET: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+	break;
+    }
+    case TEXT_CGET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) textPtr,
+		    textPtr->optionTable, objv[2], textPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
 	    } else {
-		Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) textPtr,
-		  textPtr->optionTable, objv[2], textPtr->tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		    goto done;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		    result = TCL_OK;
-		}
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+		result = TCL_OK;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TEXT_COMPARE: {
-	    int relation, value;
-	    CONST char *p;
-	    CONST TkTextIndex *index1Ptr, *index2Ptr;
-	    
-	    if (objc != 5) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index1 op index2");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    index1Ptr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
-	    index2Ptr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[4]);
-	    if (index1Ptr == NULL || index2Ptr == NULL) {
+	break;
+    case TEXT_COMPARE: {
+	int relation, value;
+	CONST char *p;
+	CONST TkTextIndex *index1Ptr, *index2Ptr;
+
+	if (objc != 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index1 op index2");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	index1Ptr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
+	index2Ptr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[4]);
+	if (index1Ptr == NULL || index2Ptr == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	relation = TkTextIndexCmp(index1Ptr, index2Ptr);
+	p = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
+	if (p[0] == '<') {
+	    value = (relation < 0);
+	    if ((p[1] == '=') && (p[2] == 0)) {
+		value = (relation <= 0);
+	    } else if (p[1] != 0) {
+	    compareError:
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad comparison operator \"",
+			Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+			"\": must be <, <=, ==, >=, >, or !=",
+			(char *) NULL);
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
 	    }
-	    relation = TkTextIndexCmp(index1Ptr, index2Ptr);
-	    p = Tcl_GetString(objv[3]);
-	    if (p[0] == '<') {
-		    value = (relation < 0);
-		if ((p[1] == '=') && (p[2] == 0)) {
-		    value = (relation <= 0);
-		} else if (p[1] != 0) {
-		    compareError:
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad comparison operator \"",
-			Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), 
-			"\": must be <, <=, ==, >=, >, or !=",
-			(char *) NULL);
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		    goto done;
-		}
-	    } else if (p[0] == '>') {
-		    value = (relation > 0);
-		if ((p[1] == '=') && (p[2] == 0)) {
-		    value = (relation >= 0);
-		} else if (p[1] != 0) {
-		    goto compareError;
-		}
-	    } else if ((p[0] == '=') && (p[1] == '=') && (p[2] == 0)) {
-		value = (relation == 0);
-	    } else if ((p[0] == '!') && (p[1] == '=') && (p[2] == 0)) {
-		value = (relation != 0);
-	    } else {
+	} else if (p[0] == '>') {
+	    value = (relation > 0);
+	    if ((p[1] == '=') && (p[2] == 0)) {
+		value = (relation >= 0);
+	    } else if (p[1] != 0) {
 		goto compareError;
 	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(value));
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TEXT_CONFIGURE: {
-	    if (objc <= 3) {
-		Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) textPtr,
-					  textPtr->optionTable,
-			(objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-					  textPtr->tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		    goto done;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		}
-	    } else {
-		result = ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, objc-2, objv+2);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	} else if ((p[0] == '=') && (p[1] == '=') && (p[2] == 0)) {
+	    value = (relation == 0);
+	} else if ((p[0] == '!') && (p[1] == '=') && (p[2] == 0)) {
+	    value = (relation != 0);
+	} else {
+	    goto compareError;
 	}
-	case TEXT_COUNT: {
-	    CONST TkTextIndex *indexFromPtr, *indexToPtr;
-	    int i, found = 0, update = 0;
-	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr = NULL;
-	    
-	    if (objc < 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?options? index1 index2");
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(value));
+	break;
+    }
+    case TEXT_CONFIGURE:
+	if (objc <= 3) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) textPtr,
+		    textPtr->optionTable,
+		    ((objc == 3) ? objv[2] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL),
+		    textPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
+	    } else {
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
 	    }
+	} else {
+	    result = ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, objc-2, objv+2);
+	}
+	break;
+    case TEXT_COUNT: {
+	CONST TkTextIndex *indexFromPtr, *indexToPtr;
+	int i, found = 0, update = 0;
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr = NULL;
+
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?options? index1 index2");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
 
-	    indexFromPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[objc-2]);
-	    if (indexFromPtr == NULL) {
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    indexToPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[objc-1]);
-	    if (indexToPtr == NULL) {
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
+	indexFromPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[objc-2]);
+	if (indexFromPtr == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	indexToPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[objc-1]);
+	if (indexToPtr == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
 
-	    for (i = 2; i < objc-2; i++) {
-		int value;
-		unsigned length;
-		CONST char *option = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i],
-			(int *)&length);
-		char c;
-		if (length < 2 || option[0] != '-') {
-		  badOption:
-		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option \"", 
-			Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), 
+	for (i = 2; i < objc-2; i++) {
+	    int value, length;
+	    CONST char *option = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
+	    char c;
+
+	    if (length < 2 || option[0] != '-') {
+	    badOption:
+		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option \"",
+			Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
 			"\" must be -chars, -displaychars, -displayindices, ",
 			"-displaylines, -indices, -lines, -update, ",
 			"-xpixels, or -ypixels", NULL);
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		    goto done;
+		result = TCL_ERROR;
+		goto done;
+	    }
+	    c = option[1];
+	    if (c == 'c' && !strncmp("-chars", option, (unsigned) length)) {
+		value = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr,
+			COUNT_CHARS);
+	    } else if (c == 'd' && (length > 8)
+		    && !strncmp("-displaychars", option, (unsigned) length)) {
+		value = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr,
+			COUNT_DISPLAY_CHARS);
+	    } else if (c == 'd' && (length > 8)
+		    && !strncmp("-displayindices", option, (unsigned)length)) {
+		value = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr,
+			COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
+	    } else if (c == 'd' && (length > 8)
+		    && !strncmp("-displaylines", option, (unsigned) length)) {
+		TkTextLine *fromPtr, *lastPtr;
+		TkTextIndex index;
+
+		int compare = TkTextIndexCmp(indexFromPtr, indexToPtr);
+		value = 0;
+
+		if (compare == 0) {
+		    goto countDone;
 		}
-		c = option[1];
-		if (c == 'c' && !strncmp("-chars",option,length)) {
-		    value = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr, 
-					 COUNT_CHARS);
-		} else if (c == 'd' && !strncmp("-displaychars", option, 
-						length) && (length > 8)) {
-		    value = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr, 
-					 COUNT_DISPLAY_CHARS);
-		} else if (c == 'd' && !strncmp("-displayindices", option, 
-						length) && (length > 8)) {
-		    value = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr, 
-					 COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
-		} else if (c == 'd' && !strncmp("-displaylines", option,
-						length) && (length > 8)) {
-		    TkTextLine *fromPtr, *lastPtr;
-		    TkTextIndex index;
-
-		    int compare = TkTextIndexCmp(indexFromPtr, indexToPtr);
-		    value = 0;
-
-		    if (compare == 0) goto countDone;
-
-		    if (compare > 0) {
-			CONST TkTextIndex *tmpPtr = indexFromPtr;
-			indexFromPtr = indexToPtr;
-			indexToPtr = tmpPtr;
-		    }
 
-		    lastPtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, 
-					      textPtr,
-			TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr));
-		    fromPtr = indexFromPtr->linePtr;
-		    if (fromPtr == lastPtr) {
-			goto countDone;
-		    }
+		if (compare > 0) {
+		    CONST TkTextIndex *tmpPtr = indexFromPtr;
+
+		    indexFromPtr = indexToPtr;
+		    indexToPtr = tmpPtr;
+		}
+
+		lastPtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+			textPtr,
+			TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,textPtr));
+		fromPtr = indexFromPtr->linePtr;
+		if (fromPtr == lastPtr) {
+		    goto countDone;
+		}
+
+		/*
+		 * Caution: we must NEVER call TkTextUpdateOneLine with the
+		 * last artificial line in the widget.
+		 */
 
-		    /* 
-		     * Caution: we must NEVER call TkTextUpdateOneLine
-		     * with the last artificial line in the widget.
+		index = *indexFromPtr;
+		while (index.linePtr != indexToPtr->linePtr) {
+		    value += TkTextUpdateOneLine(textPtr, fromPtr, 0,&index,0);
+
+		    /*
+		     * We might have skipped past indexToPtr, if we have
+		     * multiple logical lines in a single display line.
+		     * Therefore we iterate through each intermediate logical
+		     * line, just to check. Another approach would be just to
+		     * use TkTextIndexCmp on every while() iteration, but that
+		     * would be less efficient.
 		     */
-		    index = *indexFromPtr;
-		    while (index.linePtr != indexToPtr->linePtr) {
-			value += TkTextUpdateOneLine(textPtr, fromPtr, 
-						     0, &index, 0);
-			/* 
-			 * We might have skipped past indexToPtr, if we
-			 * have multiple logical lines in a single
-			 * display line.  Therefore we iterate through
-			 * each intermediate logical line, just to
-			 * check.  Another approach would be just to use
-			 * TkTextIndexCmp on every while() iteration,
-			 * but that would be less efficient.
-			 */
-			while (fromPtr != index.linePtr) {
-			    fromPtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, fromPtr);
-			    if (fromPtr == indexToPtr->linePtr) {
-			        break;
-			    }
+
+		    while (fromPtr != index.linePtr) {
+			fromPtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, fromPtr);
+			if (fromPtr == indexToPtr->linePtr) {
+			    break;
 			}
 		    }
-		    /* 
-		     * Now we need to adjust the count to add on the
-		     * number of display lines in the last logical line,
-		     * and subtract off the number of display lines
-		     * overcounted in the first logical line.  This logic
-		     * is still ok if both indices are in the same
-		     * logical line.
-		     */
-		    index.linePtr = indexFromPtr->linePtr;
+		}
+
+		/*
+		 * Now we need to adjust the count to add on the number of
+		 * display lines in the last logical line, and subtract off
+		 * the number of display lines overcounted in the first
+		 * logical line. This logic is still ok if both indices are in
+		 * the same logical line.
+		 */
+
+		index.linePtr = indexFromPtr->linePtr;
+		index.byteIndex = 0;
+		while (1) {
+		    TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, &index, 1, NULL);
+		    if (index.byteIndex >= indexFromPtr->byteIndex) {
+			break;
+		    }
+		    TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &index, 1, &index);
+		    value--;
+
+		}
+		if (indexToPtr->linePtr != lastPtr) {
+		    index.linePtr = indexToPtr->linePtr;
 		    index.byteIndex = 0;
 		    while (1) {
 			TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, &index, 1, NULL);
-			if (index.byteIndex >= indexFromPtr->byteIndex) {
+			if (index.byteIndex >= indexToPtr->byteIndex) {
 			    break;
 			}
 			TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &index, 1, &index);
-			value--;
+			value++;
 		    }
-		    if (indexToPtr->linePtr != lastPtr) {
-			index.linePtr = indexToPtr->linePtr;
-			index.byteIndex = 0;
-			while (1) {
-			    TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, &index, 1, NULL);
-			    if (index.byteIndex >= indexToPtr->byteIndex) {
-				break;
-			    }
-			    TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &index, 1, &index);
-			    value++;
-			}
-		    }
-		    
-		    if (compare > 0) {
-			value = -value;
-		    }
-		} else if (c == 'i' && !strncmp("-indices",option,length)) {
-		    value = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr, 
-					 COUNT_INDICES);
-		} else if (c == 'l' && !strncmp("-lines",option,length)) {
-		    value = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexToPtr->linePtr)
-			      - TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexFromPtr->linePtr);
-	        } else if (c == 'u' && !strncmp("-update",option,length)) {
-		    update = 1;
-		    continue;
-		} else if (c == 'x' && !strncmp("-xpixels",option,length)) {
-		    int x1, x2;
-		    TkTextIndex index;
-		    index = *indexFromPtr;
-		    TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, &index, 0, &x1);
-		    index = *indexToPtr;
-		    TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, &index, 0, &x2);
-		    value = x2 - x1;
-		} else if (c == 'y' && !strncmp("-ypixels",option,length)) {
-		    if (update) {
-			TkTextUpdateLineMetrics(textPtr, 
-			    TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexFromPtr->linePtr), 
-			    TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexToPtr->linePtr), -1);
-		    }
-		    value = TkTextIndexYPixels(textPtr, indexToPtr)
-		      - TkTextIndexYPixels(textPtr, indexFromPtr);
-		} else {
-		    goto badOption;
 		}
-	      countDone:
-		found++;
-		if (found == 1) {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(value));
-		} else {
-		    if (found == 2) {
-			/*
-			 * Move the first item we put into the result into
-			 * the first element of the list object.
-			 */
-			objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
-			Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
-						 Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
-		    }
-		    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, Tcl_NewIntObj(value));
+
+		if (compare > 0) {
+		    value = -value;
+		}
+	    } else if (c == 'i'
+		    && !strncmp("-indices", option, (unsigned) length)) {
+		value = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr,
+			COUNT_INDICES);
+	    } else if (c == 'l'
+		    && !strncmp("-lines", option, (unsigned) length)) {
+		value = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexToPtr->linePtr)
+			- TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexFromPtr->linePtr);
+	    } else if (c == 'u'
+		    && !strncmp("-update", option, (unsigned) length)) {
+		update = 1;
+		continue;
+	    } else if (c == 'x'
+		    && !strncmp("-xpixels", option, (unsigned) length)) {
+		int x1, x2;
+		TkTextIndex index;
+
+		index = *indexFromPtr;
+		TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, &index, 0, &x1);
+		index = *indexToPtr;
+		TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, &index, 0, &x2);
+		value = x2 - x1;
+	    } else if (c == 'y'
+		    && !strncmp("-ypixels", option, (unsigned) length)) {
+		if (update) {
+		    TkTextUpdateLineMetrics(textPtr,
+			    TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexFromPtr->linePtr),
+			    TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexToPtr->linePtr), -1);
 		}
+		value = TkTextIndexYPixels(textPtr, indexToPtr)
+			- TkTextIndexYPixels(textPtr, indexFromPtr);
+	    } else {
+		goto badOption;
 	    }
-	    if (found == 0) {
-	        /* Use the default '-indices' */
-		int value = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr, 
-					 COUNT_INDICES);
+
+	countDone:
+	    found++;
+	    if (found == 1) {
 		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(value));
-	    } else if (found > 1) {
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TEXT_DEBUG: {
-	    if (objc > 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "boolean");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    if (objc == 2) {
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(tkBTreeDebug));
 	    } else {
-		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objv[2], 
-					  &tkBTreeDebug) != TCL_OK) {
-		    result = TCL_ERROR;
-		    goto done;
+		if (found == 2) {
+		    /*
+		     * Move the first item we put into the result into
+		     * the first element of the list object.
+		     */
+		    objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
+		    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
+			    Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
 		}
-		tkTextDebug = tkBTreeDebug;
+		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, Tcl_NewIntObj(value));
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TEXT_DELETE: {
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index1 ?index2 ...?");
+
+	if (found == 0) {
+	    /*
+	     * Use the default '-indices'.
+	     */
+
+	    int value = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr,
+		    COUNT_INDICES);
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewIntObj(value));
+	} else if (found > 1) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TEXT_DEBUG:
+	if (objc > 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "boolean");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	if (objc == 2) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(tkBTreeDebug));
+	} else {
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objv[2],
+		    &tkBTreeDebug) != TCL_OK) {
 		result = TCL_ERROR;
 		goto done;
 	    }
-	    if (textPtr->state == TK_TEXT_STATE_NORMAL) {
-		if (objc < 5) {
-		    /*
-		     * Simple case requires no predetermination of indices.
-		     */
-		    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr1, *indexPtr2;
-		    
-		    /*
-		     * Parse the starting and stopping indices.
-		     */
+	    tkTextDebug = tkBTreeDebug;
+	}
+	break;
+    case TEXT_DELETE:
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index1 ?index2 ...?");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	if (textPtr->state == TK_TEXT_STATE_NORMAL) {
+	    if (objc < 5) {
+		/*
+		 * Simple case requires no predetermination of indices.
+		 */
+
+		CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr1, *indexPtr2;
+
+		/*
+		 * Parse the starting and stopping indices.
+		 */
 
-		    indexPtr1 = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(textPtr->interp, 
-						      textPtr, objv[2]);
-		    if (indexPtr1 == NULL) {
+		indexPtr1 = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(textPtr->interp, textPtr,
+			objv[2]);
+		if (indexPtr1 == NULL) {
+		    result = TCL_ERROR;
+		    goto done;
+		}
+		if (objc == 4) {
+		    indexPtr2 = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(textPtr->interp, textPtr,
+			    objv[3]);
+		    if (indexPtr2 == NULL) {
 			result = TCL_ERROR;
 			goto done;
-		    } 
-		    if (objc == 4) {
-			indexPtr2 = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(textPtr->interp, 
-							  textPtr, objv[3]);
-			if (indexPtr2 == NULL) {
-			    result = TCL_ERROR;
-			    goto done;
-			}
-		    } else {
-			indexPtr2 = NULL;
 		    }
-		    DeleteChars(NULL, textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, 1);
 		} else {
-		    int i;
-		    /*
-		     * Multi-index pair case requires that we prevalidate
-		     * the indices and sort from last to first so that
-		     * deletes occur in the exact (unshifted) text.  It
-		     * also needs to handle partial and fully overlapping
-		     * ranges.  We have to do this with multiple passes.
-		     */
-		    TkTextIndex *indices, *ixStart, *ixEnd, *lastStart;
-		    char *useIdx;
+		    indexPtr2 = NULL;
+		}
+		DeleteChars(NULL, textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, 1);
+	    } else {
+		/*
+		 * Multi-index pair case requires that we prevalidate the
+		 * indices and sort from last to first so that deletes occur
+		 * in the exact (unshifted) text. It also needs to handle
+		 * partial and fully overlapping ranges. We have to do this
+		 * with multiple passes.
+		 */
+
+		TkTextIndex *indices, *ixStart, *ixEnd, *lastStart;
+		char *useIdx;
+		int i;
 
-		    objc -= 2;
-		    objv += 2;
-		    indices = (TkTextIndex *)
+		objc -= 2;
+		objv += 2;
+		indices = (TkTextIndex *)
 			ckalloc((objc + 1) * sizeof(TkTextIndex));
 
-		    /*
-		     * First pass verifies that all indices are valid.
-		     */
-		    for (i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
-			CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr = 
-			  TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[i]);
-			
-			if (indexPtr == NULL) {
-			    result = TCL_ERROR;
-			    ckfree((char *) indices);
-			    goto done;
-			}
-			indices[i] = *indexPtr;
+		/*
+		 * First pass verifies that all indices are valid.
+		 */
+
+		for (i = 0; i < objc; i++) {
+		    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr =
+			    TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[i]);
+
+		    if (indexPtr == NULL) {
+			result = TCL_ERROR;
+			ckfree((char *) indices);
+			goto done;
 		    }
-		    /*
-		     * Pad out the pairs evenly to make later code easier.
-		     */
-		    if (objc & 1) {
-			indices[i] = indices[i-1];
-			TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, &indices[i], 1, &indices[i], 
-					     COUNT_INDICES);
-			objc++;
+		    indices[i] = *indexPtr;
+		}
+
+		/*
+		 * Pad out the pairs evenly to make later code easier.
+		 */
+
+		if (objc & 1) {
+		    indices[i] = indices[i-1];
+		    TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, &indices[i], 1, &indices[i],
+			    COUNT_INDICES);
+		    objc++;
+		}
+		useIdx = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) objc);
+		memset(useIdx, 0, (unsigned) objc);
+
+		/*
+		 * Do a decreasing order sort so that we delete the end ranges
+		 * first to maintain index consistency.
+		 */
+
+		qsort((VOID *) indices, (unsigned) (objc / 2),
+			2 * sizeof(TkTextIndex), TextIndexSortProc);
+		lastStart = NULL;
+
+		/*
+		 * Second pass will handle bogus ranges (end < start) and
+		 * overlapping ranges.
+		 */
+
+		for (i = 0; i < objc; i += 2) {
+		    ixStart = &indices[i];
+		    ixEnd = &indices[i+1];
+		    if (TkTextIndexCmp(ixEnd, ixStart) <= 0) {
+			continue;
 		    }
-		    useIdx = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) objc);
-		    memset(useIdx, 0, (unsigned) objc);
-		    /*
-		     * Do a decreasing order sort so that we delete the end
-		     * ranges first to maintain index consistency.
-		     */
-		    qsort((VOID *) indices, (unsigned) (objc / 2),
-			    2 * sizeof(TkTextIndex), TextIndexSortProc);
-		    lastStart = NULL;
-		    /*
-		     * Second pass will handle bogus ranges (end < start) and
-		     * overlapping ranges.
-		     */
-		    for (i = 0; i < objc; i += 2) {
-			ixStart = &indices[i];
-			ixEnd   = &indices[i+1];
-			if (TkTextIndexCmp(ixEnd, ixStart) <= 0) {
+		    if (lastStart) {
+			if (TkTextIndexCmp(ixStart, lastStart) == 0) {
+			    /*
+			     * Start indices were equal, and the sort placed
+			     * the longest range first, so skip this one.
+			     */
+
 			    continue;
-			}
-			if (lastStart) {
-			    if (TkTextIndexCmp(ixStart, lastStart) == 0) {
-				/*
-				 * Start indices were equal, and the sort
-				 * placed the longest range first, so
-				 * skip this one.
-				 */
+			} else if (TkTextIndexCmp(lastStart, ixEnd) < 0) {
+			    /*
+			     * The next pair has a start range before the end
+			     * point of the last range. Constrain the delete
+			     * range, but use the pointer values.
+			     */
+
+			    *ixEnd = *lastStart;
+			    if (TkTextIndexCmp(ixEnd, ixStart) <= 0) {
 				continue;
-			    } else if (TkTextIndexCmp(lastStart, ixEnd) < 0) {
-				/*
-				 * The next pair has a start range before
-				 * the end point of the last range.
-				 * Constrain the delete range, but use
-				 * the pointer values.
-				 */
-				*ixEnd = *lastStart;
-				if (TkTextIndexCmp(ixEnd, ixStart) <= 0) {
-				    continue;
-				}
 			    }
 			}
-			lastStart = ixStart;
-			useIdx[i]   = 1;
 		    }
-		    /*
-		     * Final pass take the input from the previous and
-		     * deletes the ranges which are flagged to be
-		     * deleted.
-		     */
-		    for (i = 0; i < objc; i += 2) {
-			if (useIdx[i]) {
-			    /*
-			     * We don't need to check the return value
-			     * because all indices are preparsed above.
-			     */
-			    DeleteChars(NULL, textPtr, &indices[i], 
-					&indices[i+1], 1);
-			}
+		    lastStart = ixStart;
+		    useIdx[i] = 1;
+		}
+
+		/*
+		 * Final pass take the input from the previous and deletes the
+		 * ranges which are flagged to be deleted.
+		 */
+
+		for (i = 0; i < objc; i += 2) {
+		    if (useIdx[i]) {
+			/*
+			 * We don't need to check the return value because all
+			 * indices are preparsed above.
+			 */
+
+			DeleteChars(NULL, textPtr, &indices[i], &indices[i+1],
+				1);
 		    }
-		    ckfree((char *) indices);
 		}
+		ckfree((char *) indices);
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TEXT_DLINEINFO: {
-	    int x, y, width, height, base;
-	    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr;
-	    
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    indexPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
-	    if (indexPtr == NULL) {
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    if (TkTextDLineInfo(textPtr, indexPtr, &x, &y, &width, 
-				&height, &base) == 0) {
-		Tcl_Obj *listObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
-		
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, 
-					 Tcl_NewIntObj(x));
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, 
-					 Tcl_NewIntObj(y));
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, 
-					 Tcl_NewIntObj(width));
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, 
-					 Tcl_NewIntObj(height));
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, 
-					 Tcl_NewIntObj(base));
-		
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObj);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	break;
+    case TEXT_DLINEINFO: {
+	int x, y, width, height, base;
+	CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr;
+
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
 	}
-	case TEXT_DUMP: {
-	    result = TextDumpCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-	    break;
+	indexPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
+	if (indexPtr == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
 	}
-	case TEXT_EDIT: {
-	    result = TextEditCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-	    break;
+	if (TkTextDLineInfo(textPtr, indexPtr, &x, &y, &width, &height,
+		&base) == 0) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *listObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(x));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(y));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(width));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(height));
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, Tcl_NewIntObj(base));
+
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObj);
 	}
-	case TEXT_GET: {
-	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr = NULL;
-	    int i, found = 0, visible = 0;
-	    CONST char *name;
-	    int length;
-	    
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, 
-				 "?-displaychars? ?--? index1 ?index2 ...?");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TEXT_DUMP:
+	result = TextDumpCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_EDIT:
+	result = TextEditCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_GET: {
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr = NULL;
+	int i, found = 0, visible = 0;
+	CONST char *name;
+	int length;
+
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "?-displaychars? ?--? index1 ?index2 ...?");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Simple, restrictive argument parsing. The only options are -- and
+	 * -displaychars (or any unique prefix).
+	 */
+
+	i = 2;
+	if (objc > 3) {
+	    name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
+	    if (length > 1 && name[0] == '-') {
+		if (strncmp("-displaychars", name, (unsigned)length)==0) {
+		    i++;
+		    visible = 1;
+		    name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
+		}
+		if ((i < objc-1) && (length == 2) && !strcmp("--", name)) {
+		    i++;
+		}
 	    }
-	
-	    /*
-	     * Simple, restrictive argument parsing.  The only options are --
-	     * and -displaychars (or any unique prefix).
-	     */
-	    i = 2;
-	    if (objc > 3) {
-		name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
-		if (length > 1 && name[0] == '-') {
-		    if (strncmp("-displaychars", name, (unsigned)length)==0) {
-			i++;
-			visible = 1;
-			name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &length);
-		    }
-		    if ((i < objc-1) && (length == 2) 
-		      && (strcmp("--", name) == 0)) {
-			i++;
-		    }
+	}
+
+	for (; i < objc; i += 2) {
+	    CONST TkTextIndex *index1Ptr, *index2Ptr;
+	    TkTextIndex index2;
+
+	    index1Ptr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[i]);
+	    if (index1Ptr == NULL) {
+		if (objPtr) {
+		    Tcl_DecrRefCount(objPtr);
 		}
+		result = TCL_ERROR;
+		goto done;
 	    }
-	    for (; i < objc; i += 2) {
-		CONST TkTextIndex *index1Ptr, *index2Ptr;
-		TkTextIndex index2;
-		
-		index1Ptr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[i]);
-		if (index1Ptr == NULL) {
+
+	    if (i+1 == objc) {
+		TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, index1Ptr, 1, &index2,
+			COUNT_INDICES);
+		index2Ptr = &index2;
+	    } else {
+		index2Ptr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[i+1]);
+		if (index2Ptr == NULL) {
 		    if (objPtr) {
 			Tcl_DecrRefCount(objPtr);
 		    }
 		    result = TCL_ERROR;
 		    goto done;
 		}
-		if (i+1 == objc) {
-		    TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, index1Ptr, 
-					 1, &index2, COUNT_INDICES);
-		    index2Ptr = &index2;
+	    }
+
+	    if (TkTextIndexCmp(index1Ptr, index2Ptr) < 0) {
+		/*
+		 * We want to move the text we get from the window into the
+		 * result, but since this could in principle be a megabyte or
+		 * more, we want to do it efficiently!
+		 */
+
+		Tcl_Obj *get = TextGetText(textPtr, index1Ptr, index2Ptr,
+			visible);
+
+		found++;
+		if (found == 1) {
+		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, get);
 		} else {
-		    index2Ptr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, 
-						      objv[i+1]);
-		    if (index2Ptr == NULL) {
-			if (objPtr) {
-			    Tcl_DecrRefCount(objPtr);
-			}
-			result = TCL_ERROR;
-			goto done;
-		    }
-		}
-		if (TkTextIndexCmp(index1Ptr, index2Ptr) < 0) {
-		    /* 
-		     * We want to move the text we get from the window
-		     * into the result, but since this could in principle
-		     * be a megabyte or more, we want to do it
-		     * efficiently!
-		     */
-		    Tcl_Obj *get = TextGetText(textPtr, index1Ptr, 
-					       index2Ptr, visible);
-		    found++;
-		    if (found == 1) {
-			Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, get);
-		    } else {
-			if (found == 2) {
-			    /*
-			     * Move the first item we put into the result into
-			     * the first element of the list object.
-			     */
-			    objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
-			    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
-						     Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
-			}
-			Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, get);
+		    if (found == 2) {
+			/*
+			 * Move the first item we put into the result into the
+			 * first element of the list object.
+			 */
+
+			objPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
+			Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr,
+				Tcl_GetObjResult(interp));
 		    }
+		    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, get);
 		}
 	    }
-	    if (found > 1) {
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TEXT_IMAGE: {
-	    result = TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-	    break;
+	if (found > 1) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TEXT_IMAGE:
+	result = TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_INDEX: {
+	CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr;
+
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
 	}
-	case TEXT_INDEX: {
-	    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr;
 
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    
-	    indexPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
-	    if (indexPtr == NULL) {
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, indexPtr));
-	    break;
+	indexPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
+	if (indexPtr == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
 	}
-	case TEXT_INSERT: {
-	    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr;
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, indexPtr));
+	break;
+    }
+    case TEXT_INSERT: {
+	CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr;
 
-	    if (objc < 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, 
-				 "index chars ?tagList chars tagList ...?");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    indexPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
-	    if (indexPtr == NULL) {
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    if (textPtr->state == TK_TEXT_STATE_NORMAL) {
-		result = TextInsertCmd(NULL, textPtr, interp, 
-				       objc-3, objv+3, 
-				       indexPtr, 1);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "index chars ?tagList chars tagList ...?");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
 	}
-	case TEXT_MARK: {
-	    result = TkTextMarkCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-	    break;
+	indexPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
+	if (indexPtr == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
 	}
-	case TEXT_PEER: {
-	    result = TextPeerCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-	    break;
+	if (textPtr->state == TK_TEXT_STATE_NORMAL) {
+	    result = TextInsertCmd(NULL, textPtr, interp, objc-3, objv+3,
+		    indexPtr, 1);
+	}
+	break;
+    }
+    case TEXT_MARK:
+	result = TkTextMarkCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_PEER:
+	result = TextPeerCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_REPLACE: {
+	CONST TkTextIndex *indexFromPtr, *indexToPtr;
+
+	if (objc < 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "index1 index2 chars ?tagList chars tagList ...?");
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	indexFromPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
+	if (indexFromPtr == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
 	}
-	case TEXT_REPLACE: {
-	    CONST TkTextIndex *indexFromPtr, *indexToPtr;
+	indexToPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[3]);
+	if (indexToPtr == NULL) {
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	if (TkTextIndexCmp(indexFromPtr, indexToPtr) > 0) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Index \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[3]),
+		    "\" before \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
+		    "\" in the text", NULL);
+	    result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	if (textPtr->state == TK_TEXT_STATE_NORMAL) {
+	    int lineNum, byteIndex;
+	    TkTextIndex index;
 
-	    if (objc < 5) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, 
-			"index1 index2 chars ?tagList chars tagList ...?");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    indexFromPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[2]);
-	    if (indexFromPtr == NULL) {
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    indexToPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objv[3]);
-	    if (indexToPtr == NULL) {
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    if (TkTextIndexCmp(indexFromPtr, indexToPtr) > 0) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Index \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), 
-				 "\" before \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[2]),
-				 "\" in the text.", NULL);
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    if (textPtr->state == TK_TEXT_STATE_NORMAL) {
-		int lineNum, byteIndex;
-		TkTextIndex index;
+	    /*
+	     * The 'replace' operation is quite complex to do correctly,
+	     * because we want a number of criteria to hold:
+	     *
+	     * 1.  The insertion point shouldn't move, unless it is within the
+	     *	   deleted range. In this case it should end up after the new
+	     *	   text.
+	     *
+	     * 2.  The window should not change the text it shows - should not
+	     *	   scroll vertically - unless the result of the replace is
+	     *	   that the insertion position which used to be on-screen is
+	     *	   now off-screen.
+	     */
+
+	    byteIndex = textPtr->topIndex.byteIndex;
+	    lineNum = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, textPtr->topIndex.linePtr);
+
+	    TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, textPtr->insertMarkPtr, &index);
+	    if ((TkTextIndexCmp(indexFromPtr, &index) < 0)
+		    && (TkTextIndexCmp(indexToPtr, &index) > 0)) {
 		/*
-		 * The 'replace' operation is quite complex to do
-		 * correctly, because we want a number of criteria
-		 * to hold:
-		 * 
-		 * 1.  The insertion point shouldn't move, unless
-		 * it is within the deleted range.  In this case
-		 * it should end up after the new text.
-		 * 
-		 * 2.  The window should not change the text it
-		 * shows -- should not scroll vertically -- unless
-		 * the result of the replace is that the insertion
-		 * position which used to be on-screen is now
-		 * off-screen.
+		 * The insertion point is inside the range to be replaced, so
+		 * we have to do some calculations to ensure it doesn't move
+		 * unnecessarily.
 		 */
-		byteIndex = textPtr->topIndex.byteIndex;
-		lineNum = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, textPtr->topIndex.linePtr);
 
-		TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, textPtr->insertMarkPtr, 
-				     &index);
-		if ((TkTextIndexCmp(indexFromPtr, &index) < 0) 
-		    && (TkTextIndexCmp(indexToPtr, &index) > 0)) {
-		    /* 
-		     * The insertion point is inside the range to be
-		     * replaced, so we have to do some calculations to
-		     * ensure it doesn't move unnecessarily.
-		     */
-		    int deleteInsertOffset, insertLength, j;
-		    
-		    insertLength = 0;
-		    for (j = 4;  j < objc; j += 2) {
-			insertLength += Tcl_GetCharLength(objv[j]);
-		    }
-		    
-		    /* 
-		     * Calculate 'deleteInsertOffset' as an offset we
-		     * will apply to the insertion point after this
-		     * operation.
-		     */
-		    deleteInsertOffset = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr, 
-						      &index, COUNT_CHARS);
-		    if (deleteInsertOffset > insertLength) {
-			deleteInsertOffset = insertLength;
-		    }
-		    
-		    result = TextReplaceCmd(textPtr, interp, 
-					    indexFromPtr, indexToPtr,
-					    objc, objv, 0);
-		    
-		    if (result == TCL_OK) {
-			/* 
-			 * Move the insertion position to the correct
-			 * place 
-			 */
-			TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, indexFromPtr, 
-					     deleteInsertOffset, 
-					     &index, COUNT_INDICES);
-			TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(textPtr->insertMarkPtr,
-			    textPtr->insertMarkPtr->body.mark.linePtr);
-			TkBTreeLinkSegment(textPtr->insertMarkPtr, &index);
-		    }
-		} else {
-		    result = TextReplaceCmd(textPtr, interp, 
-					    indexFromPtr, indexToPtr,
-					    objc, objv, 1);
+		int deleteInsertOffset, insertLength, j;
+
+		insertLength = 0;
+		for (j = 4; j < objc; j += 2) {
+		    insertLength += Tcl_GetCharLength(objv[j]);
+		}
+
+		/*
+		 * Calculate 'deleteInsertOffset' as an offset we will apply
+		 * to the insertion point after this operation.
+		 */
+
+		deleteInsertOffset = CountIndices(textPtr, indexFromPtr,
+			&index, COUNT_CHARS);
+		if (deleteInsertOffset > insertLength) {
+		    deleteInsertOffset = insertLength;
 		}
+
+		result = TextReplaceCmd(textPtr, interp, indexFromPtr,
+			indexToPtr, objc, objv, 0);
+
 		if (result == TCL_OK) {
-		    /* 
-		     * Now ensure the top-line is in the right
-		     * place
+		    /*
+		     * Move the insertion position to the correct place.
 		     */
-		    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, 
-					textPtr, lineNum, 
-					byteIndex, &index);
-		    TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, TK_TEXT_NOPIXELADJUST);
+
+		    TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, indexFromPtr,
+			    deleteInsertOffset, &index, COUNT_INDICES);
+		    TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(textPtr->insertMarkPtr,
+			    textPtr->insertMarkPtr->body.mark.linePtr);
+		    TkBTreeLinkSegment(textPtr->insertMarkPtr, &index);
 		}
+	    } else {
+		result = TextReplaceCmd(textPtr, interp, indexFromPtr,
+			indexToPtr, objc, objv, 1);
+	    }
+	    if (result == TCL_OK) {
+		/*
+		 * Now ensure the top-line is in the right place.
+		 */
+
+		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+			lineNum, byteIndex, &index);
+		TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index, TK_TEXT_NOPIXELADJUST);
 	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TEXT_SCAN: {
-	    result = TkTextScanCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TEXT_SEARCH: {
- 	    result = TextSearchCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TEXT_SEE: {
-	    result = TkTextSeeCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TEXT_TAG: {
-	    result = TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TEXT_WINDOW: {
-	    result = TkTextWindowCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TEXT_XVIEW: {
-	    result = TkTextXviewCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-	    break;
-	}
-	case TEXT_YVIEW: {
-	    result = TkTextYviewCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
-	    break;
 	}
-    }
-    
-    done:
+	break;
+    }
+    case TEXT_SCAN:
+	result = TkTextScanCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_SEARCH:
+	result = TextSearchCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_SEE:
+	result = TkTextSeeCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_TAG:
+	result = TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_WINDOW:
+	result = TkTextWindowCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_XVIEW:
+	result = TkTextXviewCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    case TEXT_YVIEW:
+	result = TkTextYviewCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv);
+	break;
+    }
+
+  done:
     textPtr->refCount--;
     if (textPtr->refCount == 0) {
 	ckfree((char *) textPtr);
@@ -1502,12 +1490,11 @@ TextWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * SharedTextObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process commands on the shared
- *	portion of a text widget.  Currently it is not actually exported
- *	as a Tcl command, and is only used internally to process parts
- *	of undo/redo scripts.  See the user documentation for 'text' for
- *	details on what it does - the only subcommands it currently
- *	supports are 'insert' and 'delete'.
+ *	This function is invoked to process commands on the shared portion of
+ *	a text widget. Currently it is not actually exported as a Tcl command,
+ *	and is only used internally to process parts of undo/redo scripts.
+ *	See the user documentation for 'text' for details on what it does -
+ *	the only subcommands it currently supports are 'insert' and 'delete'.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -1520,8 +1507,7 @@ TextWidgetObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 static int
 SharedTextObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about shared test
-                          	 * B-tree. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about shared test B-tree. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
     int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
@@ -1529,14 +1515,14 @@ SharedTextObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     register TkSharedText *sharedPtr = (TkSharedText *) clientData;
     int result = TCL_OK;
     int index;
-    
+
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
-	"delete", "insert", (char *) NULL 
+	"delete", "insert", (char *) NULL
     };
     enum options {
 	TEXT_DELETE, TEXT_INSERT
     };
-    
+
     if (objc < 2) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -1548,65 +1534,64 @@ SharedTextObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     switch ((enum options) index) {
-	case TEXT_DELETE: {
-	    if (objc < 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index1 ?index2 ...?");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
+    case TEXT_DELETE:
+	if (objc < 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "index1 ?index2 ...?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (objc < 5) {
+	    /*
+	     * Simple case requires no predetermination of indices.
+	     */
+
+	    TkTextIndex index1;
+
+	    /*
+	     * Parse the starting and stopping indices.
+	     */
+
+	    result = TkTextSharedGetObjIndex(interp, sharedPtr, objv[2],
+		    &index1);
+	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+		return result;
 	    }
-	    if (objc < 5) {
-		/*
-		 * Simple case requires no predetermination of indices.
-		 */
-		TkTextIndex index1;
-		
-		/*
-		 * Parse the starting and stopping indices.
-		 */
+	    if (objc == 4) {
+		TkTextIndex index2;
 
-		result = TkTextSharedGetObjIndex(interp, sharedPtr, 
-						 objv[2], &index1);
+		result = TkTextSharedGetObjIndex(interp, sharedPtr, objv[3],
+			&index2);
 		if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		    goto done;
-		} 
-		if (objc == 4) {
-		    TkTextIndex index2;
-		    result = TkTextSharedGetObjIndex(interp, sharedPtr, 
-						     objv[3], &index2);
-		    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-			goto done;
-		    }
-		    DeleteChars(sharedPtr, NULL, &index1, &index2, 1);
-		} else {
-		    DeleteChars(sharedPtr, NULL, &index1, NULL, 1);
+		    return result;
 		}
+		DeleteChars(sharedPtr, NULL, &index1, &index2, 1);
 	    } else {
-		/* Too many arguments */
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
+		DeleteChars(sharedPtr, NULL, &index1, NULL, 1);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	} else {
+	    /* Too many arguments */
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case TEXT_INSERT: {
-	    TkTextIndex index1;
-	    if (objc < 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, 
-				 "index chars ?tagList chars tagList ...?");
-		result = TCL_ERROR;
-		goto done;
-	    }
-	    result = TkTextSharedGetObjIndex(interp, sharedPtr, 
-					     objv[2], &index1);
-	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
-		goto done;
-	    } 
-	    result = TextInsertCmd(sharedPtr, NULL, interp, objc-3, objv+3, 
-				   &index1, 1);
-	    break;
+	break;
+    case TEXT_INSERT: {
+	TkTextIndex index1;
+
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv,
+		    "index chars ?tagList chars tagList ...?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
+	result = TkTextSharedGetObjIndex(interp, sharedPtr, objv[2],
+		&index1);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    return result;
+	}
+	return TextInsertCmd(sharedPtr, NULL, interp, objc-3, objv+3, &index1,
+		1);
+    }
+    default:
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
-    
-    done:
-    return result;
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1614,9 +1599,8 @@ SharedTextObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TextPeerCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "text peer" Tcl
- *	command.  See the user documentation for details on what it
- *	does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "text peer" Tcl command. See
+ *	the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -1629,16 +1613,16 @@ SharedTextObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
 static int
 TextPeerCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
-    TkText *textPtr;	        /* Information about text widget. */
+    TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
     int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     Tk_Window tkwin = textPtr->tkwin;
     int index;
-    
+
     static CONST char *peerOptionStrings[] = {
-	"create", "names", (char *) NULL 
+	"create", "names", (char *) NULL
     };
     enum peerOptions {
 	PEER_CREATE, PEER_NAMES
@@ -1648,35 +1632,35 @@ TextPeerCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
-    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], peerOptionStrings, 
-			    "peer option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], peerOptionStrings,
+	    "peer option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
+
     switch ((enum peerOptions)index) {
-	case PEER_CREATE: {
-	    if (objc < 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "pathName ?options?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    return CreateWidget(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, tkwin,
-				interp, textPtr, objc-2, objv+2);
+    case PEER_CREATE:
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "pathName ?options?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case PEER_NAMES: {
-	    TkText *tPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->peers;
-	    if (objc > 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    while (tPtr != NULL) {
-		if (tPtr != textPtr) {
-		    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tk_PathName(tPtr->tkwin));
-		}
-		tPtr = tPtr->next;
+	return CreateWidget(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, tkwin, interp, textPtr,
+		objc-2, objv+2);
+    case PEER_NAMES: {
+	TkText *tPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->peers;
+
+	if (objc > 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	while (tPtr != NULL) {
+	    if (tPtr != textPtr) {
+		Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tk_PathName(tPtr->tkwin));
 	    }
+	    tPtr = tPtr->next;
 	}
     }
+    }
 
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -1686,7 +1670,7 @@ TextPeerCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TextReplaceCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process part of the "replace" widget
+ *	This function is invoked to process part of the "replace" widget
  *	command for text widgets.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -1694,53 +1678,55 @@ TextPeerCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	See the user documentation.
- *	
- *	If 'viewUpdate' is false, then textPtr->topIndex may no longer
- *	be a valid index after this function returns.  The caller is
- *	responsible for ensuring a correct index is in place.
+ *
+ *	If 'viewUpdate' is false, then textPtr->topIndex may no longer be a
+ *	valid index after this function returns. The caller is responsible for
+ *	ensuring a correct index is in place.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
-TextReplaceCmd(textPtr, interp, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr, 
-	       objc, objv, viewUpdate)
-    TkText *textPtr;		    /* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		    /* Current interpreter. */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *indexFromPtr;/* Index from which to replace */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *indexToPtr;  /* Index to which to replace */
-    int objc;			    /* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	    /* Argument objects. */
-    int viewUpdate;                 /* Update vertical view if set. */
+TextReplaceCmd(textPtr, interp, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr, objc, objv,
+	viewUpdate)
+    TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexFromPtr;
+				/* Index from which to replace */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexToPtr;
+				/* Index to which to replace */
+    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+    int viewUpdate;		/* Update vertical view if set. */
 {
-    int result;
     /*
-     * Perform the deletion and insertion, but ensure
-     * no undo-separator is placed between the two
-     * operations.  Since we are using the helper procedures
-     * 'DeleteChars' and 'TextInsertCmd' we have to pretend
-     * that the autoSeparators setting is off, so that we don't
-     * get an undo-separator between the delete and insert.
+     * Perform the deletion and insertion, but ensure no undo-separator is
+     * placed between the two operations. Since we are using the helper
+     * functions 'DeleteChars' and 'TextInsertCmd' we have to pretend that the
+     * autoSeparators setting is off, so that we don't get an undo-separator
+     * between the delete and insert.
      */
+
     int origAutoSep = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->autoSeparators;
+    int result;
 
     if (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo) {
 	textPtr->sharedTextPtr->autoSeparators = 0;
-        if (origAutoSep 
-	  && textPtr->sharedTextPtr->lastEditMode != TK_TEXT_EDIT_REPLACE) {
+	if (origAutoSep &&
+		textPtr->sharedTextPtr->lastEditMode != TK_TEXT_EDIT_REPLACE) {
 	    TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
 	}
     }
 
     DeleteChars(NULL, textPtr, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr, viewUpdate);
-    result = TextInsertCmd(NULL, textPtr, interp, objc-4, objv+4, 
-			   indexFromPtr, viewUpdate);
+    result = TextInsertCmd(NULL, textPtr, interp, objc-4, objv+4,
+	    indexFromPtr, viewUpdate);
 
     if (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo) {
-        textPtr->sharedTextPtr->lastEditMode = TK_TEXT_EDIT_REPLACE;
+	textPtr->sharedTextPtr->lastEditMode = TK_TEXT_EDIT_REPLACE;
 	textPtr->sharedTextPtr->autoSeparators = origAutoSep;
     }
-    
+
     return result;
 }
 
@@ -1749,13 +1735,13 @@ TextReplaceCmd(textPtr, interp, indexFromPtr, indexToPtr,
  *
  * TextIndexSortProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by qsort when sorting an array of
- *	indices in *decreasing* order (last to first).
+ *	This function is called by qsort when sorting an array of indices in
+ *	*decreasing* order (last to first).
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is -1 if the first argument should be before
- *	the second element, 0 if it's equivalent, and 1 if it should be
- *	after the second element.
+ *	The return value is -1 if the first argument should be before the
+ *	second element, 0 if it's equivalent, and 1 if it should be after the
+ *	second element.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1774,9 +1760,10 @@ TextIndexSortProc(first, second)
     if (cmp == 0) {
 	/*
 	 * If the first indices were equal, we want the second index of the
-	 * pair also to be the greater.  Use pointer magic to access the
-	 * second index pair.
+	 * pair also to be the greater. Use pointer magic to access the second
+	 * index pair.
 	 */
+
 	cmp = TkTextIndexCmp(&pair1[0], &pair2[0]);
     }
     if (cmp > 0) {
@@ -1792,20 +1779,20 @@ TextIndexSortProc(first, second)
  *
  * DestroyText --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when we receive a destroy event
- *	to clean up the internal structure of a text widget.  We will
- *	free up most of the internal structure and delete the
- *	associated Tcl command.  If there are no outstanding
- *	references to the widget, we also free up the textPtr itself.
- *	
+ *	This function is invoked when we receive a destroy event to clean up
+ *	the internal structure of a text widget. We will free up most of the
+ *	internal structure and delete the associated Tcl command. If there are
+ *	no outstanding references to the widget, we also free up the textPtr
+ *	itself.
+ *
  *	The widget has already been flagged as deleted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Either everything or almost everything associated with the 
- *	text is freed up.
+ *	Either everything or almost everything associated with the text is
+ *	freed up.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1818,22 +1805,22 @@ DestroyText(textPtr)
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     TkTextTag *tagPtr;
     TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr;
-    
+
     /*
-     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling.  We have
-     * already called let Tk_FreeConfigOptions to handle all the standard
-     * option-related stuff (and so none of that exists when we are
-     * called).  Special note: free up display-related information before
-     * deleting the B-tree, since display-related stuff may refer to
-     * stuff in the B-tree.
+     * Free up all the stuff that requires special handling. We have already
+     * called let Tk_FreeConfigOptions to handle all the standard
+     * option-related stuff (and so none of that exists when we are called).
+     * Special note: free up display-related information before deleting the
+     * B-tree, since display-related stuff may refer to stuff in the B-tree.
      */
 
     TkTextFreeDInfo(textPtr);
     textPtr->dInfoPtr = NULL;
-    
+
     /*
      * Remove ourselves from the peer list
      */
+
     if (sharedTextPtr->peers == textPtr) {
 	sharedTextPtr->peers = textPtr->next;
     } else {
@@ -1847,52 +1834,55 @@ DestroyText(textPtr)
 	}
     }
 
-    /* 
-     * Always clean up the widget-specific tags first.  Common tags
-     * (i.e. most) will only be cleaned up when the shared structure
-     * is cleaned up.
-     * 
-     * We also need to clean up widget-specific marks ('insert', 
-     * 'current'), since otherwise marks will never disappear from
-     * the B-tree.
+    /*
+     * Always clean up the widget-specific tags first. Common tags (i.e. most)
+     * will only be cleaned up when the shared structure is cleaned up.
+     *
+     * We also need to clean up widget-specific marks ('insert', 'current'),
+     * since otherwise marks will never disappear from the B-tree.
      */
-    
+
     TkTextDeleteTag(textPtr, textPtr->selTagPtr);
     TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(textPtr->insertMarkPtr,
-			 textPtr->insertMarkPtr->body.mark.linePtr);
+	    textPtr->insertMarkPtr->body.mark.linePtr);
     ckfree((char *) textPtr->insertMarkPtr);
     TkBTreeUnlinkSegment(textPtr->currentMarkPtr,
-			 textPtr->currentMarkPtr->body.mark.linePtr);
+	    textPtr->currentMarkPtr->body.mark.linePtr);
     ckfree((char *) textPtr->currentMarkPtr);
 
-    /* 
-     * Now we've cleaned up everything of relevance to us in the B-tree,
-     * so we disassociate outselves from it.
-     * 
-     * When the refCount reaches zero, it's time to clean up
-     * the shared portion of the text widget
-     */ 
+    /*
+     * Now we've cleaned up everything of relevance to us in the B-tree, so we
+     * disassociate outselves from it.
+     *
+     * When the refCount reaches zero, it's time to clean up the shared
+     * portion of the text widget
+     */
+
     sharedTextPtr->refCount--;
-    
+
     if (sharedTextPtr->refCount > 0) {
 	TkBTreeRemoveClient(sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr);
-	
-	/* Free up any embedded windows which belong to this widget. */
+
+	/*
+	 * Free up any embedded windows which belong to this widget.
+	 */
+
 	for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&sharedTextPtr->windowTable, &search);
-	     hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+		hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 	    TkTextEmbWindowClient *loop;
 	    TkTextSegment *ewPtr = (TkTextSegment *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-	    
+
 	    loop = ewPtr->body.ew.clients;
 	    if (loop->textPtr == textPtr) {
 		ewPtr->body.ew.clients = loop->next;
 		TkTextWinFreeClient(hPtr, loop);
 	    } else {
 		TkTextEmbWindowClient *client = ewPtr->body.ew.clients;
+
 		client = loop->next;
 		while (client != NULL) {
 		    if (client->textPtr == textPtr) {
-		        loop->next = client->next;
+			loop->next = client->next;
 			TkTextWinFreeClient(hPtr, client);
 			break;
 		    } else {
@@ -1903,19 +1893,22 @@ DestroyText(textPtr)
 	    }
 	}
     } else {
-	/* 
-	 * No need to call 'TkBTreeRemoveClient' first, since this 
-	 * will do everything in one go, more quickly.
+	/*
+	 * No need to call 'TkBTreeRemoveClient' first, since this will do
+	 * everything in one go, more quickly.
 	 */
+
 	TkBTreeDestroy(sharedTextPtr->tree);
-	
+
 	for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&sharedTextPtr->tagTable, &search);
-	     hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+		hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 	    tagPtr = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-	    /* 
-	     * No need to use 'TkTextDeleteTag' since we've already 
-	     * removed the B-tree completely
+
+	    /*
+	     * No need to use 'TkTextDeleteTag' since we've already removed
+	     * the B-tree completely
 	     */
+
 	    TkTextFreeTag(textPtr, tagPtr);
 	}
 	Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&sharedTextPtr->tagTable);
@@ -1925,15 +1918,15 @@ DestroyText(textPtr)
 	}
 	Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&sharedTextPtr->markTable);
 	TkUndoFreeStack(sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
-	
+
 	Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&sharedTextPtr->windowTable);
 	Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&sharedTextPtr->imageTable);
-	
+
 	if (sharedTextPtr->bindingTable != NULL) {
 	    Tk_DeleteBindingTable(sharedTextPtr->bindingTable);
 	}
     }
-    
+
     if (textPtr->tabArrayPtr != NULL) {
 	ckfree((char *) textPtr->tabArrayPtr);
     }
@@ -1945,7 +1938,7 @@ DestroyText(textPtr)
     textPtr->refCount--;
     Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(textPtr->interp, textPtr->widgetCmd);
     if (textPtr->refCount == 0) {
-        ckfree((char *) textPtr);
+	ckfree((char *) textPtr);
     }
 }
 
@@ -1954,18 +1947,16 @@ DestroyText(textPtr)
  *
  * ConfigureText --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to process an objv/objc list, plus
- *	the Tk option database, in order to configure (or
- *	reconfigure) a text widget.
+ *	This function is called to process an objv/objc list, plus the Tk
+ *	option database, in order to configure (or reconfigure) a text widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information, such as text string, colors, font,
- *	etc. get set for textPtr;  old resources get freed, if there
- *	were any.
+ *	Configuration information, such as text string, colors, font, etc. get
+ *	set for textPtr; old resources get freed, if there were any.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1973,8 +1964,8 @@ DestroyText(textPtr)
 static int
 ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, objc, objv)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
-    register TkText *textPtr;	/* Information about widget;  may or may
-				 * not already have values for some fields. */
+    register TkText *textPtr;	/* Information about widget; may or may not
+				 * already have values for some fields. */
     int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
 {
@@ -1987,32 +1978,34 @@ ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, objc, objv)
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    /* 
-     * Copy down shared flags 
+    /*
+     * Copy down shared flags.
      */
+
     textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo = textPtr->undo;
     textPtr->sharedTextPtr->maxUndo = textPtr->maxUndo;
     textPtr->sharedTextPtr->autoSeparators = textPtr->autoSeparators;
 
-    TkUndoSetDepth(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack, 
-		   textPtr->sharedTextPtr->maxUndo);
+    TkUndoSetDepth(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack,
+	    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->maxUndo);
 
     /*
-     * A few other options also need special processing, such as parsing
-     * the geometry and setting the background from a 3-D border.
+     * A few other options also need special processing, such as parsing the
+     * geometry and setting the background from a 3-D border.
      */
 
     Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(textPtr->tkwin, textPtr->border);
 
     if (mask & TK_TEXT_LINE_RANGE) {
 	int start, end, current;
-	
-	/* 
-	 * Line start and/or end have been adjusted.  We need to validate
-	 * the first displayed line and arrange for re-layout.
+
+	/*
+	 * Line start and/or end have been adjusted. We need to validate the
+	 * first displayed line and arrange for re-layout.
 	 */
+
 	TkBTreeClientRangeChanged(textPtr, textPtr->charHeight);
-	
+
 	if (textPtr->start != NULL) {
 	    start = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, textPtr->start);
 	} else {
@@ -2024,7 +2017,8 @@ ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, objc, objv)
 	    end = TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL);
 	}
 	if (start > end) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "-startline must be less than or equal to -endline", NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		    "-startline must be less than or equal to -endline", NULL);
 	    Tk_RestoreSavedOptions(&savedOptions);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
@@ -2033,22 +2027,25 @@ ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, objc, objv)
 	    TkTextSearch search;
 	    TkTextIndex index1, first, last;
 	    int selChanged = 0;
-	    
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL, 
-				start, 0, &index1);
+
+	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL, start, 0,
+		    &index1);
 	    TkTextSetYView(textPtr, &index1, 0);
-	    /* 
-	     * We may need to adjust the selection.  So we have to
-	     * check whether the "sel" tag was applied to anything
-	     * outside the current start,end.
+
+	    /*
+	     * We may need to adjust the selection. So we have to check
+	     * whether the "sel" tag was applied to anything outside the
+	     * current start,end.
 	     */
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL, 0, 0, &first);
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL, 
-			TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL), 
-			0, &last);
+
+	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL, 0, 0,
+		    &first);
+	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL,
+		    TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL),
+		    &last);
 	    TkBTreeStartSearch(&first, &last, textPtr->selTagPtr, &search);
-	    if (!TkBTreeCharTagged(&first, textPtr->selTagPtr) 
-	      && !TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) {
+	    if (!TkBTreeCharTagged(&first, textPtr->selTagPtr)
+		    && !TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) {
 		/* Nothing tagged with "sel" */
 	    } else {
 		int line = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, search.curIndex.linePtr);
@@ -2056,26 +2053,28 @@ ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, objc, objv)
 		    selChanged = 1;
 		} else {
 		    TkTextLine *linePtr = search.curIndex.linePtr;
+
 		    while (TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) {
 			linePtr = search.curIndex.linePtr;
 		    }
 		    line = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, linePtr);
 		    if (line >= end) {
-		        selChanged = 1;
+			selChanged = 1;
 		    }
 		}
 	    }
 	    if (selChanged) {
-		/* 
-		 * Send an event that the selection has changed, and
-		 * abort any partial-selections in progress.
+		/*
+		 * Send an event that the selection has changed, and abort any
+		 * partial-selections in progress.
 		 */
+
 		TkTextSelectionEvent(textPtr);
 		textPtr->abortSelections = 1;
 	    }
 	}
     }
-    
+
     /*
      * Don't allow negative spacings.
      */
@@ -2109,11 +2108,10 @@ ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Make sure that configuration options are properly mirrored
-     * between the widget record and the "sel" tags.  NOTE: we don't
-     * have to free up information during the mirroring;  old
-     * information was freed when it was replaced in the widget
-     * record.
+     * Make sure that configuration options are properly mirrored between the
+     * widget record and the "sel" tags. NOTE: we don't have to free up
+     * information during the mirroring; old information was freed when it was
+     * replaced in the widget record.
      */
 
     textPtr->selTagPtr->border = textPtr->selBorder;
@@ -2160,9 +2158,11 @@ ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, objc, objv)
 	TkTextSearch search;
 	TkTextIndex first, last;
 
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0, &first);
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 
-	    TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr), 0, &last);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0,
+		&first);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr),
+		0, &last);
 	TkBTreeStartSearch(&first, &last, textPtr->selTagPtr, &search);
 	if (TkBTreeCharTagged(&first, textPtr->selTagPtr)
 		|| TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) {
@@ -2183,8 +2183,8 @@ ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Register the desired geometry for the window, and arrange for
-     * the window to be redisplayed.
+     * Register the desired geometry for the window, and arrange for the
+     * window to be redisplayed.
      */
 
     if (textPtr->width <= 0) {
@@ -2203,21 +2203,21 @@ ConfigureText(interp, textPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * TextWorldChangedCallback --
  *
- *      This procedure is called when the world has changed in some
- *      way and the widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts
- *	and determine its new geometry.
+ *	This function is called when the world has changed in some way and the
+ *	widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts and determine its
+ *	new geometry.
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configures all tags in the Text with a empty objc/objv, for
- *	the side effect of causing all the items to recompute their
- *	geometry and to be redisplayed.
+ *	Configures all tags in the Text with a empty objc/objv, for the side
+ *	effect of causing all the items to recompute their geometry and to be
+ *	redisplayed.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 static void
 TextWorldChangedCallback(instanceData)
     ClientData instanceData;	/* Information about widget. */
@@ -2233,30 +2233,29 @@ TextWorldChangedCallback(instanceData)
  *
  * TextWorldChanged --
  *
- *      This procedure is called when the world has changed in some
- *      way and the widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts
- *	and determine its new geometry.
+ *	This function is called when the world has changed in some way and the
+ *	widget needs to recompute all its graphics contexts and determine its
+ *	new geometry.
  *
  * Results:
- *      None.
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configures all tags in the Text with a empty objc/objv, for
- *	the side effect of causing all the items to recompute their
- *	geometry and to be redisplayed.
+ *	Configures all tags in the Text with a empty objc/objv, for the side
+ *	effect of causing all the items to recompute their geometry and to be
+ *	redisplayed.
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
- 
+
 static void
 TextWorldChanged(textPtr, mask)
     TkText *textPtr;	/* Information about widget. */
-    int mask;           /* OR'd collection of bits showing what
-                         * has changed */
+    int mask;		/* OR'd collection of bits showing what has changed */
 {
     Tk_FontMetrics fm;
     int border;
-    
+
     textPtr->charWidth = Tk_TextWidth(textPtr->tkfont, "0", 1);
     if (textPtr->charWidth <= 0) {
 	textPtr->charWidth = 1;
@@ -2269,15 +2268,13 @@ TextWorldChanged(textPtr, mask)
     }
     border = textPtr->borderWidth + textPtr->highlightWidth;
     Tk_GeometryRequest(textPtr->tkwin,
-	    textPtr->width * textPtr->charWidth 
-		    + 2*textPtr->padX + 2*border,
-	    textPtr->height * (fm.linespace + textPtr->spacing1
-		    + textPtr->spacing3) 
+	    textPtr->width * textPtr->charWidth + 2*textPtr->padX + 2*border,
+	    textPtr->height* (fm.linespace+textPtr->spacing1+textPtr->spacing3)
 		    + 2*textPtr->padY + 2*border);
 
-    Tk_SetInternalBorderEx(textPtr->tkwin, 
-			   border + textPtr->padX, border + textPtr->padX,
-			   border + textPtr->padY, border + textPtr->padY);
+    Tk_SetInternalBorderEx(textPtr->tkwin,
+	    border + textPtr->padX, border + textPtr->padX,
+	    border + textPtr->padY, border + textPtr->padY);
     if (textPtr->setGrid) {
 	Tk_SetGrid(textPtr->tkwin, textPtr->width, textPtr->height,
 		textPtr->charWidth, textPtr->charHeight);
@@ -2293,16 +2290,16 @@ TextWorldChanged(textPtr, mask)
  *
  * TextEventProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher on
- *	structure changes to a text.  For texts with 3D
- *	borders, this procedure is also invoked for exposures.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher on structure changes to
+ *	a text. For texts with 3D borders, this function is also invoked for
+ *	exposures.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get
- *	cleaned up.  When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
+ *	When the window gets deleted, internal structures get cleaned up.
+ *	When it gets exposed, it is redisplayed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -2323,8 +2320,9 @@ TextEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	if ((textPtr->prevWidth != Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin))
 		|| (textPtr->prevHeight != Tk_Height(textPtr->tkwin))) {
 	    int mask = 0;
+
 	    if (textPtr->prevWidth != Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin)) {
-	        mask = TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY;
+		mask = TK_TEXT_LINE_GEOMETRY;
 	    }
 	    TkTextRelayoutWindow(textPtr, mask);
 	    textPtr->prevWidth = Tk_Width(textPtr->tkwin);
@@ -2333,12 +2331,12 @@ TextEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
     } else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
 	/*
 	 * NOTE: we must zero out selBorder, selBorderWidthPtr and
-	 * selFgColorPtr: they are duplicates of information in the
-	 * "sel" tag, which will be freed up when we delete all tags.
-	 * Hence we don't want the automatic config options freeing
-	 * process to delete them as well.
+	 * selFgColorPtr: they are duplicates of information in the "sel" tag,
+	 * which will be freed up when we delete all tags. Hence we don't want
+	 * the automatic config options freeing process to delete them as
+	 * well.
 	 */
-	
+
 	textPtr->selBorder = NULL;
 	textPtr->selBorderWidthPtr = NULL;
 	textPtr->selBorderWidth = 0;
@@ -2349,24 +2347,23 @@ TextEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	}
 	if (!(textPtr->flags & OPTIONS_FREED)) {
 	    Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) textPtr, textPtr->optionTable,
-				 textPtr->tkwin);
+		    textPtr->tkwin);
 	    textPtr->flags |= OPTIONS_FREED;
 	}
 	textPtr->flags |= DESTROYED;
-	
-	/* 
-	 * Call 'DestroyTest' to handle the deletion for us.  The
-	 * actual textPtr may still exist after this, if there are
-	 * some outstanding references.  But we have flagged it
-	 * as DESTROYED just above, so nothing will try to make use
-	 * of it very extensively.
+
+	/*
+	 * Call 'DestroyTest' to handle the deletion for us. The actual
+	 * textPtr may still exist after this, if there are some outstanding
+	 * references. But we have flagged it as DESTROYED just above, so
+	 * nothing will try to make use of it very extensively.
 	 */
+
 	DestroyText(textPtr);
     } else if ((eventPtr->type == FocusIn) || (eventPtr->type == FocusOut)) {
 	if (eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyInferior
-	    || eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyAncestor
-	    || eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyNonlinear
-	    ) {
+		|| eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyAncestor
+		|| eventPtr->xfocus.detail == NotifyNonlinear) {
 	    Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(textPtr->insertBlinkHandler);
 	    if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn) {
 		textPtr->flags |= GOT_FOCUS | INSERT_ON;
@@ -2380,18 +2377,21 @@ TextEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 		textPtr->insertBlinkHandler = (Tcl_TimerToken) NULL;
 	    }
 	    if (textPtr->inactiveSelBorder != textPtr->selBorder) {
-	        TkTextRedrawTag(NULL, textPtr, NULL, NULL, textPtr->selTagPtr, 1);
+		TkTextRedrawTag(NULL, textPtr, NULL, NULL, textPtr->selTagPtr,
+			1);
 	    }
 	    TkTextMarkSegToIndex(textPtr, textPtr->insertMarkPtr, &index);
 	    TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, &index, 1, &index2, COUNT_INDICES);
-	    /* 
-	     * While we wish to redisplay, no heights have changed, so
-	     * no need to call TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics
+
+	    /*
+	     * While we wish to redisplay, no heights have changed, so no need
+	     * to call TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics
 	     */
+
 	    TkTextChanged(NULL, textPtr, &index, &index2);
 	    if (textPtr->highlightWidth > 0) {
 		TkTextRedrawRegion(textPtr, 0, 0, textPtr->highlightWidth,
-				   textPtr->highlightWidth);
+			textPtr->highlightWidth);
 	    }
 	}
     }
@@ -2402,9 +2402,9 @@ TextEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * TextCmdDeletedProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when a widget command is deleted.  If
- *	the widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed,
- *	this command destroys it.
+ *	This function is invoked when a widget command is deleted. If the
+ *	widget isn't already in the process of being destroyed, this command
+ *	destroys it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2423,10 +2423,10 @@ TextCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
     Tk_Window tkwin = textPtr->tkwin;
 
     /*
-     * This procedure could be invoked either because the window was
-     * destroyed and the command was then deleted (in which this flag is
-     * already set) or because the command was deleted, and then this
-     * procedure destroys the widget.
+     * This function could be invoked either because the window was destroyed
+     * and the command was then deleted (in which this flag is already set) or
+     * because the command was deleted, and then this function destroys the
+     * widget.
      */
 
     if (!(textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) {
@@ -2444,18 +2444,18 @@ TextCmdDeletedProc(clientData)
  *
  * InsertChars --
  *
- *	This procedure implements most of the functionality of the
- *	"insert" widget command.
+ *	This function implements most of the functionality of the "insert"
+ *	widget command.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The length of the inserted string.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The characters in "stringPtr" get added to the text just before
- *	the character indicated by "indexPtr".
- *	
- *	If 'viewUpdate' is true, we may adjust the window 
- *	contents' y-position, and scrollbar setting.
+ *	The characters in "stringPtr" get added to the text just before the
+ *	character indicated by "indexPtr".
+ *
+ *	If 'viewUpdate' is true, we may adjust the window contents'
+ *	y-position, and scrollbar setting.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -2464,58 +2464,56 @@ static int
 InsertChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr, stringPtr, viewUpdate)
     TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr;
     TkText *textPtr;		/* Overall information about text widget. */
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;      /* Where to insert new characters.  May be
-				 * modified if the index is not valid
-				 * for insertion (e.g. if at "end"). */
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Where to insert new characters. May be
+				 * modified if the index is not valid for
+				 * insertion (e.g. if at "end"). */
     Tcl_Obj *stringPtr;		/* Null-terminated string containing new
 				 * information to add to text. */
-    int viewUpdate;             /* Update the view if set */
+    int viewUpdate;		/* Update the view if set */
 {
     int lineIndex, length;
     TkText *tPtr;
     int *lineAndByteIndex;
     int resetViewCount;
     int pixels[2*PIXEL_CLIENTS];
-    
+
     CONST char *string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(stringPtr, &length);
 
     if (sharedTextPtr == NULL) {
 	sharedTextPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr;
     }
-    
+
     /*
-     * Don't allow insertions on the last (dummy) line of the text.
-     * This is the only place in this function where the indexPtr is
-     * modified.
+     * Don't allow insertions on the last (dummy) line of the text. This is
+     * the only place in this function where the indexPtr is modified.
      */
 
     lineIndex = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexPtr->linePtr);
     if (lineIndex == TkBTreeNumLines(sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr)) {
 	lineIndex--;
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, lineIndex, 
-			    1000000, indexPtr);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, lineIndex, 1000000,
+		indexPtr);
     }
-    
+
     /*
-     * Notify the display module that lines are about to change, then do
-     * the insertion.  If the insertion occurs on the top line of the
-     * widget (textPtr->topIndex), then we have to recompute topIndex
-     * after the insertion, since the insertion could invalidate it.
+     * Notify the display module that lines are about to change, then do the
+     * insertion. If the insertion occurs on the top line of the widget
+     * (textPtr->topIndex), then we have to recompute topIndex after the
+     * insertion, since the insertion could invalidate it.
      */
 
     resetViewCount = 0;
     if (sharedTextPtr->refCount > PIXEL_CLIENTS) {
-        lineAndByteIndex = (int*)ckalloc(sizeof(int)*
-				     2*sharedTextPtr->refCount);
+	lineAndByteIndex = (int *)
+		ckalloc(sizeof(int) * 2 * sharedTextPtr->refCount);
     } else {
 	lineAndByteIndex = pixels;
     }
-    for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; 
-      tPtr = tPtr->next) {
+    for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; tPtr = tPtr->next) {
 	lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount] = -1;
 	if (indexPtr->linePtr == tPtr->topIndex.linePtr) {
-	    lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount] = 
-	            TkBTreeLinesTo(tPtr, indexPtr->linePtr);
+	    lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount] =
+		    TkBTreeLinesTo(tPtr, indexPtr->linePtr);
 	    lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount+1] = tPtr->topIndex.byteIndex;
 	    if (lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount+1] > indexPtr->byteIndex) {
 		lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount+1] += length;
@@ -2523,11 +2521,11 @@ InsertChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr, stringPtr, viewUpdate)
 	}
 	resetViewCount += 2;
     }
-	
+
     TkTextChanged(sharedTextPtr, NULL, indexPtr, indexPtr);
-    
+
     sharedTextPtr->stateEpoch++;
-      
+
     TkBTreeInsertChars(sharedTextPtr->tree, indexPtr, string);
 
     /*
@@ -2535,33 +2533,31 @@ InsertChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr, stringPtr, viewUpdate)
      */
 
     if (sharedTextPtr->undo) {
-        TkTextIndex toIndex;
-	
-        if (sharedTextPtr->autoSeparators &&
-            sharedTextPtr->lastEditMode != TK_TEXT_EDIT_INSERT) {
-            TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
-        }
-        
-        sharedTextPtr->lastEditMode = TK_TEXT_EDIT_INSERT;
+	TkTextIndex toIndex;
+
+	if (sharedTextPtr->autoSeparators &&
+	    sharedTextPtr->lastEditMode != TK_TEXT_EDIT_INSERT) {
+	    TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
+	}
+
+	sharedTextPtr->lastEditMode = TK_TEXT_EDIT_INSERT;
 
 	TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, indexPtr, length, &toIndex);
 	TextPushUndoAction(textPtr, stringPtr, 1, indexPtr, &toIndex);
     }
-    
+
     UpdateDirtyFlag(sharedTextPtr);
 
     resetViewCount = 0;
-    for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; 
-      tPtr = tPtr->next) {
+    for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; tPtr = tPtr->next) {
 	if (lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount] != -1) {
 	    if ((tPtr != textPtr) || viewUpdate) {
 		TkTextIndex newTop;
-		TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedTextPtr->tree, tPtr, 
-				    lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount], 
-				    0, &newTop);
-		TkTextIndexForwBytes(tPtr, &newTop, 
-				     lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount+1], 
-				     &newTop);
+
+		TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedTextPtr->tree, tPtr,
+			lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount], 0, &newTop);
+		TkTextIndexForwBytes(tPtr, &newTop,
+			lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount+1], &newTop);
 		TkTextSetYView(tPtr, &newTop, 0);
 	    }
 	}
@@ -2570,17 +2566,19 @@ InsertChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr, stringPtr, viewUpdate)
     if (sharedTextPtr->refCount > PIXEL_CLIENTS) {
 	ckfree((char*)lineAndByteIndex);
     }
-        
+
     /*
      * Invalidate any selection retrievals in progress.
      */
 
-    for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; 
-      tPtr = tPtr->next) {
+    for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; tPtr = tPtr->next) {
 	tPtr->abortSelections = 1;
     }
-       
-    /* For convenience, return the length of the string */
+
+    /*
+     * For convenience, return the length of the string.
+     */
+
     return length;
 }
 
@@ -2589,10 +2587,10 @@ InsertChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr, stringPtr, viewUpdate)
  *
  * TextPushUndoAction --
  *
- *	Shared by insert and delete actions.  Stores the appropriate
- *	scripts into our undo stack.  We will add a single refCount to
- *	the 'undoString' object, so, if it previously had a refCount of
- *	zero, the caller should not free it.
+ *	Shared by insert and delete actions. Stores the appropriate scripts
+ *	into our undo stack. We will add a single refCount to the 'undoString'
+ *	object, so, if it previously had a refCount of zero, the caller should
+ *	not free it.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2605,50 +2603,66 @@ InsertChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr, stringPtr, viewUpdate)
 
 static void
 TextPushUndoAction (textPtr, undoString, insert, index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
-    TkText *textPtr;		 /* Overall information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Obj *undoString;	 /* New text */
-    int insert;                  /* 1 if insert, else delete */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *index1Ptr;/* Index describing first location */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *index2Ptr;/* Index describing second location */
+    TkText *textPtr;		/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Obj *undoString;	/* New text */
+    int insert;			/* 1 if insert, else delete */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *index1Ptr;
+				/* Index describing first location */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *index2Ptr;
+				/* Index describing second location */
 {
     TkUndoSubAtom *iAtom, *dAtom;
-    
-    /* Create the helpers */
+
+    /*
+     * Create the helpers.
+     */
+
     Tcl_Obj *seeInsertObj = Tcl_NewObj();
     Tcl_Obj *markSet1InsertObj = Tcl_NewObj();
     Tcl_Obj *markSet2InsertObj = Tcl_NewObj();
     Tcl_Obj *insertCmdObj = Tcl_NewObj();
     Tcl_Obj *deleteCmdObj = Tcl_NewObj();
-    
-    /* Get the index positions */
+
+    /*
+     * Get the index positions.
+     */
+
     Tcl_Obj *index1Obj = TkTextNewIndexObj(NULL, index1Ptr);
     Tcl_Obj *index2Obj = TkTextNewIndexObj(NULL, index2Ptr);
 
-    /* These need refCounts, because they are used more than once below */
+    /*
+     * These need refCounts, because they are used more than once below.
+     */
+
     Tcl_IncrRefCount(seeInsertObj);
     Tcl_IncrRefCount(index1Obj);
     Tcl_IncrRefCount(index2Obj);
 
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, seeInsertObj, 
-			     Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin), -1));
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, seeInsertObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("see",3));
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, seeInsertObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("insert",6));
-
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, markSet1InsertObj, 
-			     Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin), -1));
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, markSet1InsertObj, 
-			     Tcl_NewStringObj("mark",4));
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, markSet1InsertObj, 
-			     Tcl_NewStringObj("set",3));
-    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, markSet1InsertObj, 
-			     Tcl_NewStringObj("insert",6));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, seeInsertObj,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin), -1));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, seeInsertObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("see", 3));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, seeInsertObj,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj("insert", 6));
+
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, markSet1InsertObj,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin), -1));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, markSet1InsertObj,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj("mark", 4));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, markSet1InsertObj,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj("set", 3));
+    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, markSet1InsertObj,
+	    Tcl_NewStringObj("insert", 6));
     markSet2InsertObj = Tcl_DuplicateObj(markSet1InsertObj);
     Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, markSet1InsertObj, index1Obj);
     Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, markSet2InsertObj, index2Obj);
 
     Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, insertCmdObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("insert",6));
     Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, insertCmdObj, index1Obj);
-    /* Only use of 'undoString' is here */
+
+    /*
+     * Only use of 'undoString' is here.
+     */
+
     Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, insertCmdObj, undoString);
 
     Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, deleteCmdObj, Tcl_NewStringObj("delete",6));
@@ -2657,47 +2671,42 @@ TextPushUndoAction (textPtr, undoString, insert, index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
 
     /*
      * Note: we don't wish to use textPtr->widgetCmd in these callbacks
-     * because if we delete the textPtr, but peers still exist, we will
-     * then have references to a non-existent Tcl_Command in the undo
-     * stack, which will lead to crashes later.  Also, the behaviour of
-     * the widget wrt bindings (%W substitutions) always uses the widget
-     * path name, so there is no good reason the undo stack should do
-     * otherwise.
-     * 
-     * For the 'insert' and 'delete' actions, we have to register a
-     * functional callback, because these actions are defined to
-     * operate on the underlying data shared by all peers.
+     * because if we delete the textPtr, but peers still exist, we will then
+     * have references to a non-existent Tcl_Command in the undo stack, which
+     * will lead to crashes later. Also, the behaviour of the widget wrt
+     * bindings (%W substitutions) always uses the widget path name, so there
+     * is no good reason the undo stack should do otherwise.
+     *
+     * For the 'insert' and 'delete' actions, we have to register a functional
+     * callback, because these actions are defined to operate on the
+     * underlying data shared by all peers.
      */
-    iAtom = TkUndoMakeSubAtom(&TextUndoRedoCallback, 
-			      (ClientData)textPtr->sharedTextPtr,
-			      insertCmdObj, NULL);
+
+    iAtom = TkUndoMakeSubAtom(&TextUndoRedoCallback,
+	    (ClientData)textPtr->sharedTextPtr, insertCmdObj, NULL);
     TkUndoMakeCmdSubAtom(NULL, markSet2InsertObj, iAtom);
     TkUndoMakeCmdSubAtom(NULL, seeInsertObj, iAtom);
- 
-    dAtom = TkUndoMakeSubAtom(&TextUndoRedoCallback, 
-			      (ClientData)textPtr->sharedTextPtr,
-			      deleteCmdObj, NULL);
+
+    dAtom = TkUndoMakeSubAtom(&TextUndoRedoCallback,
+	    (ClientData)textPtr->sharedTextPtr, deleteCmdObj, NULL);
     TkUndoMakeCmdSubAtom(NULL, markSet1InsertObj, dAtom);
     TkUndoMakeCmdSubAtom(NULL, seeInsertObj, dAtom);
-    
+
     Tcl_DecrRefCount(seeInsertObj);
     Tcl_DecrRefCount(index1Obj);
     Tcl_DecrRefCount(index2Obj);
 
-    /* 
-     * Depending whether the action is to insert or delete, we provide
-     * the appropriate second and third arguments to TkUndoPushAction.
-     * (The first is the 'actionCommand', and the second the
-     * 'revertCommand').
+    /*
+     * Depending whether the action is to insert or delete, we provide the
+     * appropriate second and third arguments to TkUndoPushAction. (The first
+     * is the 'actionCommand', and the second the 'revertCommand').
      */
+
     if (insert) {
-	TkUndoPushAction(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack, 
-			 iAtom, dAtom);
+	TkUndoPushAction(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack, iAtom, dAtom);
     } else {
-	TkUndoPushAction(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack, 
-			 dAtom, iAtom);
+	TkUndoPushAction(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack, dAtom, iAtom);
     }
-    
 }
 
 /*
@@ -2705,96 +2714,95 @@ TextPushUndoAction (textPtr, undoString, insert, index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
  *
  * TextUndoRedoCallback --
  *
- *	This procedure is registered with the generic undo/redo code
- *	to handle 'insert' and 'delete' actions on all text widgets.
- *	We cannot perform those actions on any particular text widget,
- *	because that text widget might have been deleted by the time
- *	we get here.
+ *	This function is registered with the generic undo/redo code to handle
+ *	'insert' and 'delete' actions on all text widgets. We cannot perform
+ *	those actions on any particular text widget, because that text widget
+ *	might have been deleted by the time we get here.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Will insert or delete text, depending on the first word
- *	contained in objPtr.
- *	
+ *	Will insert or delete text, depending on the first word contained in
+ *	objPtr.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
 TextUndoRedoCallback(interp, clientData, objPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		    /* Current interpreter. */
-    ClientData clientData;          /* Passed from undo code, but
-                                     * contains our shared text
-                                     * data structure. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;                /* Arguments of a command to
-                                     * be handled by the shared
-                                     * text data structure. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Passed from undo code, but contains our
+				 * shared text data structure. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Arguments of a command to be handled by the
+				 * shared text data structure. */
 {
     TkSharedText *sharedPtr = (TkSharedText*)clientData;
     int objc;
     Tcl_Obj **objv;
     int res;
     TkText *textPtr;
-    
+
     res = Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &objc, &objv);
     if (res != TCL_OK) {
 	return res;
     }
 
-    /* 
-     * If possible, use a real text widget to perform the undo/redo
-     * action (i.e. insertion or deletion of text).  This provides
-     * maximum compatibility with older versions of Tk, in which the
-     * user may rename the text widget to allow capture of undo or
-     * redo actions.
-     * 
-     * In particular, this sorting of capture is useful in text editors
-     * based on the Tk text widget, which need to know which new text
-     * needs re-coloring.
-     * 
-     * It would be better if the text widget provided some other
-     * mechanism to allow capture of this information ("What has
-     * just changed in the text widget?").  What we have here is
-     * not entirely satisfactory under all circumstances.
+    /*
+     * If possible, use a real text widget to perform the undo/redo action
+     * (i.e. insertion or deletion of text). This provides maximum
+     * compatibility with older versions of Tk, in which the user may rename
+     * the text widget to allow capture of undo or redo actions.
+     *
+     * In particular, this sorting of capture is useful in text editors based
+     * on the Tk text widget, which need to know which new text needs
+     * re-coloring.
+     *
+     * It would be better if the text widget provided some other mechanism to
+     * allow capture of this information ("What has just changed in the text
+     * widget?"). What we have here is not entirely satisfactory under all
+     * circumstances.
      */
+
     textPtr = sharedPtr->peers;
     while (textPtr != NULL) {
-        if (textPtr->start == NULL && textPtr->end == NULL) {
+	if (textPtr->start == NULL && textPtr->end == NULL) {
 	    Tcl_Obj *cmdNameObj, *evalObj;
-	    
+
 	    evalObj = Tcl_NewObj();
 	    Tcl_IncrRefCount(evalObj);
+
 	    /*
-	     * We might wish to use the real, current command-name
-	     * for the widget, but this will break any code that has
-	     * over-ridden the widget, and is expecting to observe
-	     * the insert/delete actions which are caused by undo/redo
-	     * operations.
-	     * 
+	     * We might wish to use the real, current command-name for the
+	     * widget, but this will break any code that has over-ridden the
+	     * widget, and is expecting to observe the insert/delete actions
+	     * which are caused by undo/redo operations.
+	     *
 	     * cmdNameObj = Tcl_NewObj();
-	     * Tcl_GetCommandFullName(interp, textPtr->widgetCmd, 
-	     *                        cmdNameObj);
-	     * 
+	     * Tcl_GetCommandFullName(interp, textPtr->widgetCmd, cmdNameObj);
+	     *
 	     * While such interception is not explicitly documented as
-	     * supported, it does occur, and so until we can provide
-	     * some alternative mechanism for such code to do what
-	     * it needs, we allow it to take place here.
+	     * supported, it does occur, and so until we can provide some
+	     * alternative mechanism for such code to do what it needs, we
+	     * allow it to take place here.
 	     */
+
 	    cmdNameObj = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tk_PathName(textPtr->tkwin), -1);
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, evalObj, cmdNameObj);
 	    Tcl_ListObjAppendList(NULL, evalObj, objPtr);
 	    res = Tcl_EvalObjEx(interp, evalObj, TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL);
 	    Tcl_DecrRefCount(evalObj);
-            return res;
-        }
-        textPtr = textPtr->next;
+	    return res;
+	}
+	textPtr = textPtr->next;
     }
+
     /*
-     * If there's no current text widget which shows everything, then 
-     * we fall back on acting directly.  This means there is no way to
-     * intercept from the Tcl level.
+     * If there's no current text widget which shows everything, then we fall
+     * back on acting directly. This means there is no way to intercept from
+     * the Tcl level.
      */
+
     return SharedTextObjCmd((ClientData)sharedPtr, interp, objc+1, objv-1);
 }
 
@@ -2803,12 +2811,12 @@ TextUndoRedoCallback(interp, clientData, objPtr)
  *
  * CountIndices --
  *
- *	This procedure implements most of the functionality of the
- *	"count" widget command.
+ *	This function implements most of the functionality of the "count"
+ *	widget command.
  *
  *	Note that 'textPtr' is only used if we need to check for elided
  *	attributes, i.e. if type is COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES or
- *	COUNT_DISPLAY_CHARS.
+ *	COUNT_DISPLAY_CHARS
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns the number of characters in the range.
@@ -2821,23 +2829,24 @@ TextUndoRedoCallback(interp, clientData, objPtr)
 
 static int
 CountIndices(textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, type)
-    CONST TkText *textPtr;	 /* Overall information about text widget. */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr1;/* Index describing location of first
-				  * character to delete. */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr2;/* Index describing location of last
-				  * character to delete.  NULL means just
-				  * delete the one character given by
-				  * indexPtr1. */
-    TkTextCountType type;        /* The kind of indices to count */
+    CONST TkText *textPtr;	/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr1;
+				/* Index describing location of first
+				 * character to delete. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr2;
+				/* Index describing location of last character
+				 * to delete. NULL means just delete the one
+				 * character given by indexPtr1. */
+    TkTextCountType type;	/* The kind of indices to count */
 {
     /*
      * Order the starting and stopping indices.
      */
 
     int compare = TkTextIndexCmp(indexPtr1, indexPtr2);
-   
+
     if (compare == 0) {
-        return 0;
+	return 0;
     } else if (compare > 0) {
 	return -TkTextIndexCount(textPtr, indexPtr2, indexPtr1, type);
     } else {
@@ -2850,39 +2859,40 @@ CountIndices(textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, type)
  *
  * DeleteChars --
  *
- *	This procedure implements most of the functionality of the
- *	"delete" widget command.
+ *	This function implements most of the functionality of the "delete"
+ *	widget command.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns a standard Tcl result, currently always TCL_OK.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Characters get deleted from the text.
- *	
- *	If 'viewUpdate' is true, we may adjust the window 
- *	contents' y-position, and scrollbar setting.
- *	
- *	If 'viewUpdate' is false, true we can guarantee that
- *	textPtr->topIndex points to a valid TkTextLine after this
- *	procedure returns.  However, if 'viewUpdate' is false, then
- *	there is no such guarantee (topIndex.linePtr can be garbage).
- *	The caller is expected to take actions to ensure the topIndex
- *	is validated before laying out the window again.
+ *
+ *	If 'viewUpdate' is true, we may adjust the window contents'
+ *	y-position, and scrollbar setting.
+ *
+ *	If 'viewUpdate' is false, true we can guarantee that textPtr->topIndex
+ *	points to a valid TkTextLine after this function returns. However, if
+ *	'viewUpdate' is false, then there is no such guarantee (since
+ *	topIndex.linePtr can be garbage). The caller is expected to take
+ *	actions to ensure the topIndex is validated before laying out the
+ *	window again.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
 DeleteChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, viewUpdate)
-    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr; /* Shared portion of peer widgets. */
-    TkText *textPtr;		 /* Overall information about text widget. */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr1;/* Index describing location of first
-				  * character to delete. */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr2;/* Index describing location of last
-				  * character to delete.  NULL means just
-				  * delete the one character given by
-				  * indexPtr1. */
-    int viewUpdate;              /* Update vertical view if set. */
+    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr;/* Shared portion of peer widgets. */
+    TkText *textPtr;		/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr1;
+				/* Index describing location of first
+				 * character to delete. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr2;
+				/* Index describing location of last character
+				 * to delete. NULL means just delete the one
+				 * character given by indexPtr1. */
+    int viewUpdate;		/* Update vertical view if set. */
 {
     int line1, line2;
     TkTextIndex index1, index2;
@@ -2894,7 +2904,7 @@ DeleteChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, viewUpdate)
     if (sharedTextPtr == NULL) {
 	sharedTextPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr;
     }
-    
+
     /*
      * Prepare the starting and stopping indices.
      */
@@ -2916,15 +2926,15 @@ DeleteChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, viewUpdate)
     }
 
     /*
-     * The code below is ugly, but it's needed to make sure there
-     * is always a dummy empty line at the end of the text.  If the
-     * final newline of the file (just before the dummy line) is being
-     * deleted, then back up index to just before the newline.  If
-     * there is a newline just before the first character being deleted,
-     * then back up the first index too, so that an even number of lines
-     * gets deleted.  Furthermore, remove any tags that are present on
-     * the newline that isn't going to be deleted after all (this simulates
-     * deleting the newline and then adding a "clean" one back again).
+     * The code below is ugly, but it's needed to make sure there is always a
+     * dummy empty line at the end of the text. If the final newline of the
+     * file (just before the dummy line) is being deleted, then back up index
+     * to just before the newline. If there is a newline just before the first
+     * character being deleted, then back up the first index too, so that an
+     * even number of lines gets deleted. Furthermore, remove any tags that
+     * are present on the newline that isn't going to be deleted after all
+     * (this simulates deleting the newline and then adding a "clean" one back
+     * again).
      */
 
     line1 = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, index1.linePtr);
@@ -2952,71 +2962,69 @@ DeleteChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, viewUpdate)
 
     if (line1 < line2) {
 	/*
-	 * We are deleting more than one line.  For speed,
-	 * we remove all tags from the range first.  If we
-	 * don't do this, the code below can (when there are
-	 * many tags) grow non-linearly in execution time.
+	 * We are deleting more than one line. For speed, we remove all tags
+	 * from the range first. If we don't do this, the code below can (when
+	 * there are many tags) grow non-linearly in execution time.
 	 */
+
 	Tcl_HashSearch search;
 	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
 	int i;
-	
-	for (i = 0, hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&sharedTextPtr->tagTable, 
-					      &search);
+
+	for (i=0, hPtr=Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&sharedTextPtr->tagTable, &search);
 		hPtr != NULL; i++, hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
-	    TkTextTag *tagPtr;
-	    tagPtr = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	    TkTextTag *tagPtr = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+
 	    TkBTreeTag(&index1, &index2, tagPtr, 0);
 	}
+
 	/*
-	 * Special case for the sel tag which is not in the hash table.
-	 * We need to do this once for each peer text widget.
+	 * Special case for the sel tag which is not in the hash table. We
+	 * need to do this once for each peer text widget.
 	 */
-	
-	for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; 
-	  tPtr = tPtr->next) {
+
+	for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ;
+		tPtr = tPtr->next) {
 	    if (TkBTreeTag(&index1, &index2, tPtr->selTagPtr, 0)) {
 		/*
-		 * Send an event that the selection changed.
-		 * This is equivalent to
-		 * "event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>"
+		 * Send an event that the selection changed. This is
+		 * equivalent to:
+		 *	event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>
 		 */
 
 		TkTextSelectionEvent(textPtr);
-
 		tPtr->abortSelections = 1;
 	    }
 	}
     }
-    
+
     /*
-     * Tell the display what's about to happen so it can discard
-     * obsolete display information, then do the deletion.  Also,
-     * if the deletion involves the top line on the screen, then
-     * we have to reset the view (the deletion will invalidate
-     * textPtr->topIndex).  Compute what the new first character
-     * will be, then do the deletion, then reset the view.
+     * Tell the display what's about to happen so it can discard obsolete
+     * display information, then do the deletion. Also, if the deletion
+     * involves the top line on the screen, then we have to reset the view
+     * (the deletion will invalidate textPtr->topIndex). Compute what the new
+     * first character will be, then do the deletion, then reset the view.
      */
 
     TkTextChanged(sharedTextPtr, NULL, &index1, &index2);
-    
+
     resetViewCount = 0;
     if (sharedTextPtr->refCount > PIXEL_CLIENTS) {
-	lineAndByteIndex = (int*)ckalloc(sizeof(int)*
-					 2*sharedTextPtr->refCount);
+	lineAndByteIndex = (int *)
+		ckalloc(sizeof(int) * 2 * sharedTextPtr->refCount);
     } else {
 	lineAndByteIndex = pixels;
     }
-    for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; 
-      tPtr = tPtr->next) {
+    for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; tPtr = tPtr->next) {
 	int line = 0;
 	int byteIndex = 0;
 	int resetView = 0;
+
 	if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index2, &tPtr->topIndex) >= 0) {
 	    if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index1, &tPtr->topIndex) <= 0) {
 		/*
-		 * Deletion range straddles topIndex: use the beginning
-		 * of the range as the new topIndex.
+		 * Deletion range straddles topIndex: use the beginning of the
+		 * range as the new topIndex.
 		 */
 
 		resetView = 1;
@@ -3024,8 +3032,8 @@ DeleteChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, viewUpdate)
 		byteIndex = index1.byteIndex;
 	    } else if (index1.linePtr == tPtr->topIndex.linePtr) {
 		/*
-		 * Deletion range starts on top line but after topIndex.
-		 * Use the current topIndex as the new one.
+		 * Deletion range starts on top line but after topIndex. Use
+		 * the current topIndex as the new one.
 		 */
 
 		resetView = 1;
@@ -3034,9 +3042,9 @@ DeleteChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, viewUpdate)
 	    }
 	} else if (index2.linePtr == tPtr->topIndex.linePtr) {
 	    /*
-	     * Deletion range ends on top line but before topIndex.
-	     * Figure out what will be the new character index for
-	     * the character currently pointed to by topIndex.
+	     * Deletion range ends on top line but before topIndex. Figure out
+	     * what will be the new character index for the character
+	     * currently pointed to by topIndex.
 	     */
 
 	    resetView = 1;
@@ -3056,17 +3064,17 @@ DeleteChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, viewUpdate)
 	}
 	resetViewCount+=2;
     }
-    
+
     /*
      * Push the deletion on the undo stack
      */
 
     if (sharedTextPtr->undo) {
 	Tcl_Obj *get;
-	
+
 	if (sharedTextPtr->autoSeparators
 		&& (sharedTextPtr->lastEditMode != TK_TEXT_EDIT_DELETE)) {
-	   TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
+	    TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
 	}
 
 	sharedTextPtr->lastEditMode = TK_TEXT_EDIT_DELETE;
@@ -3081,20 +3089,21 @@ DeleteChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, viewUpdate)
     TkBTreeDeleteChars(sharedTextPtr->tree, &index1, &index2);
 
     resetViewCount = 0;
-    for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; 
-      tPtr = tPtr->next) {
+    for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; tPtr = tPtr->next) {
 	int line = lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount];
+
 	if (line != -1) {
 	    int byteIndex = lineAndByteIndex[resetViewCount+1];
+
 	    if (tPtr == textPtr) {
 		if (viewUpdate) {
-		    TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 
-					line, byteIndex, &index1);
+		    TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, line,
+			    byteIndex, &index1);
 		    TkTextSetYView(tPtr, &index1, 0);
 		}
 	    } else {
-		TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL, 
-				    line, byteIndex, &index1);
+		TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedTextPtr->tree, NULL, line, byteIndex,
+			&index1);
 		TkTextSetYView(tPtr, &index1, 0);
 	    }
 	}
@@ -3103,20 +3112,19 @@ DeleteChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, viewUpdate)
     if (sharedTextPtr->refCount > PIXEL_CLIENTS) {
 	ckfree((char*)lineAndByteIndex);
     }
-        
+
     if (line1 >= line2) {
-        
+
 	/*
-	 * Invalidate any selection retrievals in progress, assuming
-	 * we didn't check for this case above.
+	 * Invalidate any selection retrievals in progress, assuming we didn't
+	 * check for this case above.
 	 */
 
-	for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; 
-	  tPtr = tPtr->next) {
+	for (tPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; tPtr != NULL ; tPtr = tPtr->next) {
 	    tPtr->abortSelections = 1;
 	}
     }
-    
+
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 
@@ -3125,15 +3133,15 @@ DeleteChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, viewUpdate)
  *
  * TextFetchSelection --
  *
- *	This procedure is called back by Tk when the selection is
- *	requested by someone.  It returns part or all of the selection
- *	in a buffer provided by the caller.
+ *	This function is called back by Tk when the selection is requested by
+ *	someone. It returns part or all of the selection in a buffer provided
+ *	by the caller.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is the number of non-NULL bytes stored
- *	at buffer.  Buffer is filled (or partially filled) with a
- *	NULL-terminated string containing part or all of the selection,
- *	as given by offset and maxBytes.
+ *	The return value is the number of non-NULL bytes stored at buffer.
+ *	Buffer is filled (or partially filled) with a NULL-terminated string
+ *	containing part or all of the selection, as given by offset and
+ *	maxBytes.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3143,14 +3151,13 @@ DeleteChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, viewUpdate)
 
 static int
 TextFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about text widget. */
-    int offset;				/* Offset within selection of first
-					 * character to be returned. */
-    char *buffer;			/* Location in which to place
-					 * selection. */
-    int maxBytes;			/* Maximum number of bytes to place
-					 * at buffer, not including terminating
-					 * NULL character. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about text widget. */
+    int offset;			/* Offset within selection of first character
+				 * to be returned. */
+    char *buffer;		/* Location in which to place selection. */
+    int maxBytes;		/* Maximum number of bytes to place at buffer,
+				 * not including terminating NULL
+				 * character. */
 {
     register TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) clientData;
     TkTextIndex eof;
@@ -3163,23 +3170,21 @@ TextFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find the beginning of the next range of selected text.  Note:  if
-     * the selection is being retrieved in multiple pieces (offset != 0)
-     * and some modification has been made to the text that affects the
-     * selection then reject the selection request (make 'em start over
-     * again).
+     * Find the beginning of the next range of selected text. Note: if the
+     * selection is being retrieved in multiple pieces (offset != 0) and some
+     * modification has been made to the text that affects the selection then
+     * reject the selection request (make 'em start over again).
      */
 
     if (offset == 0) {
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 
-			    0, 0, &textPtr->selIndex);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0,
+		&textPtr->selIndex);
 	textPtr->abortSelections = 0;
     } else if (textPtr->abortSelections) {
 	return 0;
     }
-    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 
-			TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr), 
-			0, &eof);
+    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+	    TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr), 0, &eof);
     TkBTreeStartSearch(&textPtr->selIndex, &eof, textPtr->selTagPtr, &search);
     if (!TkBTreeCharTagged(&textPtr->selIndex, textPtr->selTagPtr)) {
 	if (!TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) {
@@ -3194,8 +3199,8 @@ TextFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
 
     /*
      * Each iteration through the outer loop below scans one selected range.
-     * Each iteration through the inner loop scans one segment in the
-     * selected range.
+     * Each iteration through the inner loop scans one segment in the selected
+     * range.
      */
 
     count = 0;
@@ -3209,9 +3214,9 @@ TextFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Copy information from character segments into the buffer
-	 * until either we run out of space in the buffer or we get
-	 * to the end of this range of text.
+	 * Copy information from character segments into the buffer until
+	 * either we run out of space in the buffer or we get to the end of
+	 * this range of text.
 	 */
 
 	while (1) {
@@ -3257,7 +3262,7 @@ TextFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
 	textPtr->selIndex = search.curIndex;
     }
 
-    fetchDone:
+  fetchDone:
     *buffer = 0;
     return count;
 }
@@ -3267,11 +3272,10 @@ TextFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
  *
  * TkTextLostSelection --
  *
- *	This procedure is called back by Tk when the selection is
- *	grabbed away from a text widget.  On Windows and Mac systems, we
- *	want to remember the selection for the next time the focus
- *	enters the window.  On Unix, just remove the "sel" tag from
- *	everything in the widget.
+ *	This function is called back by Tk when the selection is grabbed away
+ *	from a text widget. On Windows and Mac systems, we want to remember
+ *	the selection for the next time the focus enters the window. On Unix,
+ *	just remove the "sel" tag from everything in the widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -3284,7 +3288,7 @@ TextFetchSelection(clientData, offset, buffer, maxBytes)
 
 void
 TkTextLostSelection(clientData)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about text widget. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about text widget. */
 {
     register TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) clientData;
 #ifdef ALWAYS_SHOW_SELECTION
@@ -3295,23 +3299,23 @@ TkTextLostSelection(clientData)
     }
 
     /*
-     * On Windows and Mac systems, we want to remember the selection
-     * for the next time the focus enters the window.  On Unix, 
-     * just remove the "sel" tag from everything in the widget.
+     * On Windows and Mac systems, we want to remember the selection for the
+     * next time the focus enters the window. On Unix, just remove the "sel"
+     * tag from everything in the widget.
      */
 
     TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0, &start);
-    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 
-			TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr), 
-			0, &end);
+    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+	    TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr), 0, &end);
     TkTextRedrawTag(NULL, textPtr, &start, &end, textPtr->selTagPtr, 1);
     TkBTreeTag(&start, &end, textPtr->selTagPtr, 0);
 #endif
-    
+
     /*
-     * Send an event that the selection changed.  This is equivalent to
-     * "event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>"
+     * Send an event that the selection changed. This is equivalent to:
+     *	   event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>
      */
+
     TkTextSelectionEvent(textPtr);
 
     textPtr->flags &= ~GOT_SELECTION;
@@ -3322,8 +3326,8 @@ TkTextLostSelection(clientData)
  *
  * TkTextSelectionEvent --
  *
- *	When anything relevant to the "sel" tag has been changed,
- *	call this procedure to generate a <<Selection>> event.
+ *	When anything relevant to the "sel" tag has been changed, call this
+ *	function to generate a <<Selection>> event.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -3334,15 +3338,17 @@ TkTextLostSelection(clientData)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void 
-TkTextSelectionEvent(textPtr) 
+void
+TkTextSelectionEvent(textPtr)
     TkText *textPtr;
 {
     /*
-     * Send an event that the selection changed.  This is equivalent to
-     * "event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>"
+     * Send an event that the selection changed. This is equivalent to:
+     *     event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>
      */
+
     XEvent event;
+
     memset((VOID *) &event, 0, sizeof(event));
     event.xany.type = VirtualEvent;
     event.xany.serial = NextRequest(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin));
@@ -3358,15 +3364,15 @@ TkTextSelectionEvent(textPtr)
  *
  * TextBlinkProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called as a timer handler to blink the
- *	insertion cursor off and on.
+ *	This function is called as a timer handler to blink the insertion
+ *	cursor off and on.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The cursor gets turned on or off, redisplay gets invoked,
- *	and this procedure reschedules itself.
+ *	The cursor gets turned on or off, redisplay gets invoked, and this
+ *	function reschedules itself.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -3383,10 +3389,10 @@ TextBlinkProc(clientData)
 	    !(textPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) || (textPtr->insertOffTime == 0)) {
 	if ((textPtr->insertOffTime == 0) && !(textPtr->flags & INSERT_ON)) {
 	    /*
-	     * The widget was configured to have zero offtime while
-	     * the insertion point was not displayed.  We have to
-	     * display it once.
+	     * The widget was configured to have zero offtime while the
+	     * insertion point was not displayed. We have to display it once.
 	     */
+
 	    textPtr->flags |= INSERT_ON;
 	    goto redrawInsert;
 	}
@@ -3407,12 +3413,12 @@ TextBlinkProc(clientData)
 	if (textPtr->insertCursorType) {
 	    /* Block cursor */
 	    TkTextRedrawRegion(textPtr, x - textPtr->width / 2, y,
-			       charWidth + textPtr->insertWidth / 2, h);
+		    charWidth + textPtr->insertWidth / 2, h);
 	} else {
 	    /* I-beam cursor */
 	    TkTextRedrawRegion(textPtr, x - textPtr->insertWidth / 2, y,
-			       textPtr->insertWidth, h);
-        }
+		    textPtr->insertWidth, h);
+	}
     }
 }
 
@@ -3421,8 +3427,8 @@ TextBlinkProc(clientData)
  *
  * TextInsertCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "insert" and "replace"
- *	widget commands for text widgets.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "insert" and "replace" widget
+ *	commands for text widgets.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3430,21 +3436,21 @@ TextBlinkProc(clientData)
  * Side effects:
  *	See the user documentation.
  *
- *	If 'viewUpdate' is true, we may adjust the window 
- *	contents' y-position, and scrollbar setting.
- *	
+ *	If 'viewUpdate' is true, we may adjust the window contents'
+ *	y-position, and scrollbar setting.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
 TextInsertCmd(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, interp, objc, objv, indexPtr, viewUpdate)
-    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr; /* Shared portion of peer widgets. */
-    TkText *textPtr;		 /* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		 /* Current interpreter. */
-    int objc;			 /* Number of arguments. */
-    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	 /* Argument objects. */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* Index at which to insert */
-    int viewUpdate;              /* Update the view if set */
+    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr;/* Shared portion of peer widgets. */
+    TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
+    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr;/* Index at which to insert */
+    int viewUpdate;		/* Update the view if set */
 {
     TkTextIndex index1, index2;
     int j;
@@ -3452,44 +3458,45 @@ TextInsertCmd(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, interp, objc, objv, indexPtr, viewUpdate)
     if (sharedTextPtr == NULL) {
 	sharedTextPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr;
     }
-    
+
     index1 = *indexPtr;
-    for (j = 0;  j < objc; j += 2) {
+    for (j = 0; j < objc; j += 2) {
 	/*
-	 * Here we rely on this call to modify index1 if
-	 * it is outside the acceptable range.  In particular,
-	 * if index1 is "end", it must be set to the last
-	 * allowable index for insertion, otherwise 
-	 * subsequent tag insertions will fail.
+	 * Here we rely on this call to modify index1 if it is outside the
+	 * acceptable range. In particular, if index1 is "end", it must be set
+	 * to the last allowable index for insertion, otherwise subsequent tag
+	 * insertions will fail.
 	 */
-	int length = InsertChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, &index1, 
-				 objv[j], viewUpdate);
+
+	int length = InsertChars(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, &index1, objv[j],
+		viewUpdate);
+
 	if (objc > (j+1)) {
 	    Tcl_Obj **tagNamePtrs;
 	    TkTextTag **oldTagArrayPtr;
 	    int numTags;
-	    
+
 	    TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &index1, length, &index2);
 	    oldTagArrayPtr = TkBTreeGetTags(&index1, NULL, &numTags);
 	    if (oldTagArrayPtr != NULL) {
 		int i;
+
 		for (i = 0; i < numTags; i++) {
-		    TkBTreeTag(&index1, &index2, 
-			       oldTagArrayPtr[i], 0);
+		    TkBTreeTag(&index1, &index2, oldTagArrayPtr[i], 0);
 		}
 		ckfree((char *) oldTagArrayPtr);
 	    }
-	    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[j+1], 
-				       &numTags, &tagNamePtrs)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
+	    if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[j+1], &numTags,
+		    &tagNamePtrs) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    } else {
 		int i;
-		
+
 		for (i = 0; i < numTags; i++) {
 		    CONST char *strTag = Tcl_GetString(tagNamePtrs[i]);
-		    TkBTreeTag(&index1, &index2, 
-			       TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, strTag, NULL), 1);
+
+		    TkBTreeTag(&index1, &index2,
+			    TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, strTag, NULL), 1);
 		}
 		index1 = index2;
 	    }
@@ -3503,9 +3510,8 @@ TextInsertCmd(sharedTextPtr, textPtr, interp, objc, objv, indexPtr, viewUpdate)
  *
  * TextSearchCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "search" widget command
- *	for text widgets.  See the user documentation for details on what
- *	it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "search" widget command for
+ *	text widgets. See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -3528,7 +3534,7 @@ TextSearchCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 
     static CONST char *switchStrings[] = {
 	"--", "-all", "-backwards", "-count", "-elide", "-exact",
-	"-forwards", "-hidden", "-nocase", "-nolinestop", 
+	"-forwards", "-hidden", "-nocase", "-nolinestop",
 	"-overlap", "-regexp", "-strictlimits", NULL
     };
     enum SearchSwitches {
@@ -3538,10 +3544,11 @@ TextSearchCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	SEARCH_STRICTLIMITS
     };
 
-    /* 
-     * Set up the search specification, including
-     * the last 4 fields which are text widget specific
+    /*
+     * Set up the search specification, including the last 4 fields which are
+     * text widget specific.
      */
+
     searchSpec.exact = 1;
     searchSpec.noCase = 0;
     searchSpec.all = 0;
@@ -3553,12 +3560,13 @@ TextSearchCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     searchSpec.noLineStop = 0;
     searchSpec.overlap = 0;
     searchSpec.strictLimits = 0;
-    searchSpec.numLines = TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr);
+    searchSpec.numLines =
+	    TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr);
     searchSpec.clientData = (ClientData)textPtr;
     searchSpec.addLineProc = &TextSearchAddNextLine;
     searchSpec.foundMatchProc = &TextSearchFoundMatch;
     searchSpec.lineIndexProc = &TextSearchGetLineIndex;
-    
+
     /*
      * Parse switches and other arguments.
      */
@@ -3574,6 +3582,7 @@ TextSearchCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	    /*
 	     * Hide the -hidden option
 	     */
+
 	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad switch \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
 		    "\": must be --, -all, -backward, -count, -elide, ",
@@ -3600,10 +3609,12 @@ TextSearchCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	    i++;
-	    /* 
-	     * Assumption objv[i] isn't going to disappear on us during
-	     * this procedure, which is fair.
+
+	    /*
+	     * Assumption objv[i] isn't going to disappear on us during this
+	     * function, which is fair.
 	     */
+
 	    searchSpec.varPtr = objv[i];
 	    break;
 	case SEARCH_ELIDE:
@@ -3657,13 +3668,12 @@ TextSearchCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Scan through all of the lines of the text circularly, starting
-     * at the given index.  'objv[i]' is the pattern which may be an
-     * exact string or a regexp pattern depending on the flags set
-     * above.
+     * Scan through all of the lines of the text circularly, starting at the
+     * given index. 'objv[i]' is the pattern which may be an exact string or a
+     * regexp pattern depending on the flags set above.
      */
 
-    code = SearchPerform(interp, &searchSpec, objv[i], objv[i+1], 
+    code = SearchPerform(interp, &searchSpec, objv[i], objv[i+1],
 	    (argsLeft == 1 ? objv[i+2] : NULL));
     if (code != TCL_OK) {
 	goto cleanup;
@@ -3672,9 +3682,10 @@ TextSearchCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     /*
      * Set the '-count' variable, if given.
      */
+
     if (searchSpec.varPtr != NULL && searchSpec.countPtr != NULL) {
 	Tcl_IncrRefCount(searchSpec.countPtr);
-	if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, searchSpec.varPtr, NULL, 
+	if (Tcl_ObjSetVar2(interp, searchSpec.varPtr, NULL,
 		searchSpec.countPtr, TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG) == NULL) {
 	    code = TCL_ERROR;
 	    goto cleanup;
@@ -3684,12 +3695,13 @@ TextSearchCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     /*
      * Set the result
      */
+
     if (searchSpec.resPtr != NULL) {
 	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, searchSpec.resPtr);
 	searchSpec.resPtr = NULL;
     }
 
-    cleanup:
+  cleanup:
     if (searchSpec.countPtr != NULL) {
 	Tcl_DecrRefCount(searchSpec.countPtr);
     }
@@ -3705,20 +3717,19 @@ TextSearchCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  * TextSearchGetLineIndex --
  *
  *	Extract a row, text offset index position from an objPtr
- *	
- *	This means we ignore any embedded windows/images and
- *	elidden text (unless we are searching that).
+ *
+ *	This means we ignore any embedded windows/images and elidden text
+ *	(unless we are searching that).
  *
  * Results:
- *      Standard Tcl error code (with a message in the interpreter
- *      on error conditions).
- *      
+ *	Standard Tcl error code (with a message in the interpreter on error
+ *	conditions).
+ *
  *	The offset placed in offsetPosPtr is a utf-8 char* byte index for
- *	exact searches, and a Unicode character index for regexp
- *	searches.
- *	
- *	The line number should start at zero (searches which wrap
- *	around assume the first line is numbered 0).
+ *	exact searches, and a Unicode character index for regexp searches.
+ *
+ *	The line number should start at zero (searches which wrap around
+ *	assume the first line is numbered 0).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3727,43 +3738,44 @@ TextSearchCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  */
 static int
 TextSearchGetLineIndex(interp, objPtr, searchSpecPtr, linePosPtr, offsetPosPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;                /* For error messages */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;                   /* Contains a textual index 
-                                        * like "1.2" */
-    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr;         /* Contains other search 
-                                        * parameters */
-    int *linePosPtr;                   /* For returning the line number */
-    int *offsetPosPtr;                 /* For returning the text offset in 
-                                        * the line */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* For error messages */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Contains a textual index like "1.2" */
+    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr;	/* Contains other search parameters */
+    int *linePosPtr;		/* For returning the line number. */
+    int *offsetPosPtr;		/* For returning the text offset in the
+				 * line. */
 {
     CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr;
     int line;
     TkText *textPtr = (TkText*)(searchSpecPtr->clientData);
-    
+
     indexPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objPtr);
     if (indexPtr == NULL) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
+
     line = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexPtr->linePtr);
     if (line >= searchSpecPtr->numLines) {
 	TkTextLine *linePtr;
 	int count = 0;
 	TkTextSegment *segPtr;
-	
+
 	line = searchSpecPtr->numLines-1;
 	linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, line);
-	/* Count the number of bytes in this line */
-	for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr; segPtr != NULL; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+
+	/*
+	 * Count the number of bytes in this line.
+	 */
+
+	for (segPtr=linePtr->segPtr ; segPtr!=NULL ; segPtr=segPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    count += segPtr->size;
 	}
-	*offsetPosPtr = TextSearchIndexInLine(searchSpecPtr, linePtr, 
-					      count);
+	*offsetPosPtr = TextSearchIndexInLine(searchSpecPtr, linePtr, count);
     } else {
-	*offsetPosPtr = TextSearchIndexInLine(searchSpecPtr, 
-			  indexPtr->linePtr, indexPtr->byteIndex);
+	*offsetPosPtr = TextSearchIndexInLine(searchSpecPtr, indexPtr->linePtr,
+		indexPtr->byteIndex);
     }
-    
+
     *linePosPtr = line;
 
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -3774,15 +3786,15 @@ TextSearchGetLineIndex(interp, objPtr, searchSpecPtr, linePosPtr, offsetPosPtr)
  *
  * TextSearchIndexInLine --
  *
- *	Find textual index of 'byteIndex' in the searchable
- *	characters of 'linePtr'.
- *	
- *	This means we ignore any embedded windows/images and
- *	elidden text (unless we are searching that).
+ *	Find textual index of 'byteIndex' in the searchable characters of
+ *	'linePtr'.
+ *
+ *	This means we ignore any embedded windows/images and elidden text
+ *	(unless we are searching that).
  *
  * Results:
- *	The returned index is a utf-8 char* byte index for exact
- *	searches, and a Unicode character index for regexp searches.
+ *	The returned index is a utf-8 char* byte index for exact searches, and
+ *	a Unicode character index for regexp searches.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -3792,9 +3804,10 @@ TextSearchGetLineIndex(interp, objPtr, searchSpecPtr, linePosPtr, offsetPosPtr)
 
 static int
 TextSearchIndexInLine(searchSpecPtr, linePtr, byteIndex)
-    CONST SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr; /* Search parameters */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;             /* The line we're looking at */
-    int byteIndex;                   /* Index into the line */
+    CONST SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr;
+				/* Search parameters */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr;	/* The line we're looking at */
+    int byteIndex;		/* Index into the line */
 {
     TkTextSegment *segPtr;
     TkTextIndex curIndex;
@@ -3805,23 +3818,21 @@ TextSearchIndexInLine(searchSpecPtr, linePtr, byteIndex)
     curIndex.tree = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
     curIndex.linePtr = linePtr; curIndex.byteIndex = 0;
     for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr, leftToScan = byteIndex;
-	 leftToScan > 0; 
-	 curIndex.byteIndex += segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
-	if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType)
-	    && (searchSpecPtr->searchElide || 
-		!TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL))) {
+	    leftToScan > 0;
+	    curIndex.byteIndex += segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) &&
+		(searchSpecPtr->searchElide
+		|| !TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL))) {
 	    if (leftToScan < segPtr->size) {
 		if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
 		    index += leftToScan;
 		} else {
 		    index += Tcl_NumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, leftToScan);
 		}
+	    } else if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
+		index += segPtr->size;
 	    } else {
-		if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
-		    index += segPtr->size;
-		} else {
-		    index += Tcl_NumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, -1);
-		}
+		index += Tcl_NumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, -1);
 	    }
 	}
 	leftToScan -= segPtr->size;
@@ -3837,18 +3848,18 @@ TextSearchIndexInLine(searchSpecPtr, linePtr, byteIndex)
  *	Adds a line from the text widget to the object 'theLine'.
  *
  * Results:
- *	A pointer to the TkTextLine corresponding to the given line,
- *	or NULL if there was no available line.
- *	
+ *	A pointer to the TkTextLine corresponding to the given line, or NULL
+ *	if there was no available line.
+ *
  *	Also 'lenPtr' (if non-NULL) is filled in with the total length of
- *	'theLine' (not just what we added to it, but the length including
- *	what was already in there).  This is in bytes for an exact search
- *	and in chars for a regexp search.
- *	
- *	Also 'extraLinesPtr' (if non-NULL) will have its value 
- *	incremented by 1 for each additional logical line we have 
- *	added because a newline is elided (this will only ever happen
- *	if we have chosen not to search elided text, of course).
+ *	'theLine' (not just what we added to it, but the length including what
+ *	was already in there). This is in bytes for an exact search and in
+ *	chars for a regexp search.
+ *
+ *	Also 'extraLinesPtr' (if non-NULL) will have its value incremented by
+ *	1 for each additional logical line we have added because a newline is
+ *	elided (this will only ever happen if we have chosen not to search
+ *	elided text, of course).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Memory may be allocated or re-allocated for theLine's string
@@ -3857,26 +3868,25 @@ TextSearchIndexInLine(searchSpecPtr, linePtr, byteIndex)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static ClientData 
+static ClientData
 TextSearchAddNextLine(lineNum, searchSpecPtr, theLine, lenPtr, extraLinesPtr)
-    int lineNum;                     /* Line we must add */
-    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr;       /* Search parameters */
-    Tcl_Obj *theLine;                /* Object to append to */
-    int *lenPtr;                     /* For returning the total length */
-    int *extraLinesPtr;              /* If non-NULL, will have its value
-                                      * incremented by the number of
-                                      * additional logical lines which are
-                                      * merged into this one by newlines
-                                      * being elided */
+    int lineNum;		/* Line we must add */
+    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr;	/* Search parameters */
+    Tcl_Obj *theLine;		/* Object to append to */
+    int *lenPtr;		/* For returning the total length */
+    int *extraLinesPtr;		/* If non-NULL, will have its value
+				 * incremented by the number of additional
+				 * logical lines which are merged into this
+				 * one by newlines being elided */
 {
     TkTextLine *linePtr, *thisLinePtr;
     TkTextIndex curIndex;
     TkTextSegment *segPtr;
     TkText *textPtr = (TkText*)(searchSpecPtr->clientData);
     int nothingYet = 1;
-    
+
     /*
-     * Extract the text from the line. 
+     * Extract the text from the line.
      */
 
     linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, lineNum);
@@ -3885,24 +3895,25 @@ TextSearchAddNextLine(lineNum, searchSpecPtr, theLine, lenPtr, extraLinesPtr)
     }
     curIndex.tree = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
     thisLinePtr = linePtr;
-    
+
     while (thisLinePtr != NULL) {
 	int elideWraps = 0;
+
 	curIndex.linePtr = thisLinePtr;
 	curIndex.byteIndex = 0;
 	for (segPtr = thisLinePtr->segPtr; segPtr != NULL;
 		curIndex.byteIndex += segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
-	    if (!searchSpecPtr->searchElide 
-	      && TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL)) {
-		/* 
-		 * If we reach the end of the logical line, and if we
-		 * have at least one character in the string, then we
-		 * continue wrapping to the next logical line.  If
-		 * there are no characters yet, then the entire line
-		 * of characters is elided and there's no need to 
-		 * complicate matters by wrapping - we'll look at the
-		 * next line in due course.
+	    if (!searchSpecPtr->searchElide
+		    && TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL)) {
+		/*
+		 * If we reach the end of the logical line, and if we have at
+		 * least one character in the string, then we continue
+		 * wrapping to the next logical line. If there are no
+		 * characters yet, then the entire line of characters is
+		 * elided and there's no need to complicate matters by
+		 * wrapping - we'll look at the next line in due course.
 		 */
+
 		if (segPtr->nextPtr == NULL && !nothingYet) {
 		    elideWraps = 1;
 		}
@@ -3923,22 +3934,26 @@ TextSearchAddNextLine(lineNum, searchSpecPtr, theLine, lenPtr, extraLinesPtr)
 	}
 	thisLinePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, thisLinePtr);
 	if (thisLinePtr != NULL && extraLinesPtr != NULL) {
-	    /* Tell our caller we have an extra line merged in */
+	    /*
+	     * Tell our caller we have an extra line merged in.
+	     */
+
 	    *extraLinesPtr = (*extraLinesPtr) + 1;
 	}
     }
-        
+
     /*
-     * If we're ignoring case, convert the line to lower case.
-     * There is no need to do this for regexp searches, since
-     * they handle a flag for this purpose.
+     * If we're ignoring case, convert the line to lower case. There is no
+     * need to do this for regexp searches, since they handle a flag for this
+     * purpose.
      */
+
     if (searchSpecPtr->exact && searchSpecPtr->noCase) {
 	Tcl_SetObjLength(theLine, Tcl_UtfToLower(Tcl_GetString(theLine)));
     }
-    
+
     if (lenPtr != NULL) {
-        if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
+	if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
 	    Tcl_GetStringFromObj(theLine, lenPtr);
 	} else {
 	    *lenPtr = Tcl_GetCharLength(theLine);
@@ -3955,38 +3970,34 @@ TextSearchAddNextLine(lineNum, searchSpecPtr, theLine, lenPtr, extraLinesPtr)
  *	Stores information from a successful search.
  *
  * Results:
- *	1 if the information was stored, 0 if the position at which
- *	the match was found actually falls outside the allowable 
- *	search region (and therefore the search is actually
- *	complete).
+ *	1 if the information was stored, 0 if the position at which the match
+ *	was found actually falls outside the allowable search region (and
+ *	therefore the search is actually complete).
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Memory may be allocated in the 'countPtr' and 'resPtr' fields
- *	of 'searchSpecPtr'.  Each of those objects will have refCount
- *	zero and must eventually be freed or stored elsewhere as 
- *	appropriate.
+ *	Memory may be allocated in the 'countPtr' and 'resPtr' fields of
+ *	'searchSpecPtr'. Each of those objects will have refCount zero and
+ *	must eventually be freed or stored elsewhere as appropriate.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static int 
-TextSearchFoundMatch(lineNum, searchSpecPtr, clientData, theLine, 
-		     matchOffset, matchLength)
-    int lineNum;                    /* Line on which match was found */
-    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr;      /* Search parameters */
-    ClientData clientData;          /* Token returned by the 'addNextLineProc',
-                                     * TextSearchAddNextLine.  May be
-                                     * NULL, in which we case we must
-                                     * generate it (from lineNum) */
-    Tcl_Obj *theLine;               /* Text from current line, only
-                                     * accessed for exact searches, and
-                                     * is allowed to be NULL for regexp
-                                     * searches.  */
-    int matchOffset;                /* Offset of found item in utf-8 bytes
-                                     * for exact search, Unicode chars 
-                                     * for regexp */
-    int matchLength;                /* Length also in bytes/chars as per
-                                     * search type. */
+static int
+TextSearchFoundMatch(lineNum, searchSpecPtr, clientData, theLine, matchOffset,
+	matchLength)
+    int lineNum;		/* Line on which match was found. */
+    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr;	/* Search parameters. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Token returned by the 'addNextLineProc',
+				 * TextSearchAddNextLine. May be NULL, in
+				 * which we case we must generate it (from
+				 * lineNum). */
+    Tcl_Obj *theLine;		/* Text from current line, only accessed for
+				 * exact searches, and is allowed to be NULL
+				 * for regexp searches. */
+    int matchOffset;		/* Offset of found item in utf-8 bytes for
+				 * exact search, Unicode chars for regexp */
+    int matchLength;		/* Length also in bytes/chars as per search
+				 * type. */
 {
     int numChars;
     int leftToScan;
@@ -3996,63 +4007,70 @@ TextSearchFoundMatch(lineNum, searchSpecPtr, clientData, theLine,
     TkText *textPtr = (TkText*)(searchSpecPtr->clientData);
 
     if (lineNum == searchSpecPtr->stopLine) {
-	/* 
-	 * If the current index is on the wrong side of the stopIndex,
-	 * then the item we just found is actually outside the acceptable
-	 * range, and the search is over.
+	/*
+	 * If the current index is on the wrong side of the stopIndex, then
+	 * the item we just found is actually outside the acceptable range,
+	 * and the search is over.
 	 */
-	if (searchSpecPtr->backwards ^ 
-	  (matchOffset >= searchSpecPtr->stopOffset)) {
+
+	if (searchSpecPtr->backwards ^
+		(matchOffset >= searchSpecPtr->stopOffset)) {
 	    return 0;
 	}
     }
-    
+
     /*
-     * Calculate the character count, which may need augmenting
-     * if there are embedded windows or elidden text.
+     * Calculate the character count, which may need augmenting if there are
+     * embedded windows or elidden text.
      */
 
     if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
 	CONST char *startOfLine = Tcl_GetString(theLine);
+
 	numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(startOfLine + matchOffset, matchLength);
     } else {
 	numChars = matchLength;
     }
-    
+
     /*
-     * The index information returned by the regular expression
-     * parser only considers textual information:  it doesn't
-     * account for embedded windows, elided text (when we are not
-     * searching elided text) or any other non-textual info.
-     * Scan through the line's segments again to adjust both
+     * The index information returned by the regular expression parser only
+     * considers textual information: it doesn't account for embedded windows,
+     * elided text (when we are not searching elided text) or any other
+     * non-textual info. Scan through the line's segments again to adjust both
      * matchChar and matchCount.
      *
-     * We will walk through the segments of this line until we
-     * have either reached the end of the match or we have
-     * reached the end of the line.
+     * We will walk through the segments of this line until we have either
+     * reached the end of the match or we have reached the end of the line.
      */
 
     linePtr = (TkTextLine *)clientData;
     if (linePtr == NULL) {
-	linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, lineNum);
+	linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		lineNum);
     }
-    
+
     curIndex.tree = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
-    /* Find the starting point */
+
+    /*
+     * Find the starting point.
+     */
+
     leftToScan = matchOffset;
     while (1) {
-	curIndex.linePtr = linePtr; 
+	curIndex.linePtr = linePtr;
 	curIndex.byteIndex = 0;
-	/* 
-	 * Note that we allow leftToScan to be zero because we want
-	 * to skip over any preceding non-textual items.
+
+	/*
+	 * Note that we allow leftToScan to be zero because we want to skip
+	 * over any preceding non-textual items.
 	 */
-	for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
-		leftToScan >= 0 && segPtr; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+
+	for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr; leftToScan >= 0 && segPtr;
+		segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (segPtr->typePtr != &tkTextCharType) {
 		matchOffset += segPtr->size;
-	    } else if (!searchSpecPtr->searchElide 
-		       && TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL)) {
+	    } else if (!searchSpecPtr->searchElide
+		    && TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL)) {
 		if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
 		    matchOffset += segPtr->size;
 		} else {
@@ -4064,73 +4082,85 @@ TextSearchFoundMatch(lineNum, searchSpecPtr, clientData, theLine,
 	    curIndex.byteIndex += segPtr->size;
 	}
 	if (segPtr == NULL && leftToScan >= 0) {
-	    /* This will only happen if we are eliding newlines */
+	    /*
+	     * This will only happen if we are eliding newlines.
+	     */
+
 	    linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, linePtr);
 	    if (linePtr == NULL) {
-		/* 
-		 * If we reach the end of the text, we have a serious
-		 * problem, unless there's actually nothing left to look
-		 * for.
+		/*
+		 * If we reach the end of the text, we have a serious problem,
+		 * unless there's actually nothing left to look for.
 		 */
+
 		if (leftToScan == 0) {
 		    break;
 		} else {
 		    Tcl_Panic("Reached end of text in a match");
 		}
 	    }
-	    /* 
-	     * We've wrapped to the beginning of the next logical line,
-	     * which has been merged with the previous one whose newline
-	     * was elided.
+
+	    /*
+	     * We've wrapped to the beginning of the next logical line, which
+	     * has been merged with the previous one whose newline was elided.
 	     */
+
 	    lineNum++;
 	    matchOffset = 0;
 	} else {
 	    break;
 	}
     }
-    /* Calculate and store the found index in the result */
+
+    /*
+     * Calculate and store the found index in the result.
+     */
+
     if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, lineNum, 
-			    matchOffset, &foundIndex);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, lineNum,
+		matchOffset, &foundIndex);
     } else {
-	TkTextMakeCharIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, lineNum, 
-			    matchOffset, &foundIndex);
+	TkTextMakeCharIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, lineNum,
+		matchOffset, &foundIndex);
     }
+
     if (searchSpecPtr->all) {
 	if (searchSpecPtr->resPtr == NULL) {
 	    searchSpecPtr->resPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
 	}
-	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, searchSpecPtr->resPtr, 
+	Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, searchSpecPtr->resPtr,
 		TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, &foundIndex));
     } else {
-	searchSpecPtr->resPtr = 
-	        TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, &foundIndex);
-    }
-    /* 
-     * Find the end point.  Here 'leftToScan' could be negative already
-     * as a result of the above loop if the segment we reached spanned
-     * the start of the string.  When we add matchLength it will become
-     * non-negative.
+	searchSpecPtr->resPtr = TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, &foundIndex);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Find the end point. Here 'leftToScan' could be negative already as a
+     * result of the above loop if the segment we reached spanned the start of
+     * the string. When we add matchLength it will become non-negative.
      */
+
     for (leftToScan += matchLength; leftToScan > 0;
-	 curIndex.byteIndex += segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    curIndex.byteIndex += segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (segPtr == NULL) {
-	    /* 
-	     * We are on the next line -- this of course should only
-	     * ever happen with searches which have matched across
-	     * multiple lines 
+	    /*
+	     * We are on the next line - this of course should only ever
+	     * happen with searches which have matched across multiple lines.
 	     */
+
 	    linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, linePtr);
 	    segPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
 	    curIndex.linePtr = linePtr; curIndex.byteIndex = 0;
 	}
 	if (segPtr->typePtr != &tkTextCharType) {
-	    /* Anything we didn't count in the search needs adding */
+	    /*
+	     * Anything we didn't count in the search needs adding.
+	     */
+
 	    numChars += segPtr->size;
 	    continue;
-	} else if (!searchSpecPtr->searchElide 
-		 && TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL)) {
+	} else if (!searchSpecPtr->searchElide
+		&& TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &curIndex, NULL)) {
 	    numChars += Tcl_NumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, -1);
 	    continue;
 	}
@@ -4140,9 +4170,11 @@ TextSearchFoundMatch(lineNum, searchSpecPtr, clientData, theLine,
 	    leftToScan -= Tcl_NumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, -1);
 	}
     }
-    /* 
-     * Now store the count result, if it is wanted
+
+    /*
+     * Now store the count result, if it is wanted.
      */
+
     if (searchSpecPtr->varPtr != NULL) {
 	Tcl_Obj *tmpPtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(numChars);
 	if (searchSpecPtr->all) {
@@ -4165,27 +4197,23 @@ TextSearchFoundMatch(lineNum, searchSpecPtr, clientData, theLine,
  *	Parses a string description of a set of tab stops.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to a malloc'ed structure holding
- *	parsed information about the tab stops.  If an error occurred
- *	then the return value is NULL and an error message is left in
- *	the interp's result.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to a malloc'ed structure holding parsed
+ *	information about the tab stops. If an error occurred then the return
+ *	value is NULL and an error message is left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Memory is allocated for the structure that is returned.  It is
- *	up to the caller to free this structure when it is no longer
- *	needed.
+ *	Memory is allocated for the structure that is returned. It is up to
+ *	the caller to free this structure when it is no longer needed.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 TkTextTabArray *
 TkTextGetTabs(interp, textPtr, stringPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Used for error reporting. */
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Information about the
-                    			 * text widget. */
-    Tcl_Obj *stringPtr;			/* Description of the tab stops.  
-                       			 * See the text manual entry for 
-                       			 * details. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about the text widget. */
+    Tcl_Obj *stringPtr;		/* Description of the tab stops. See the text
+				 * manual entry for details. */
 {
     int objc, i, count;
     Tcl_Obj **objv;
@@ -4193,20 +4221,19 @@ TkTextGetTabs(interp, textPtr, stringPtr)
     TkTextTab *tabPtr;
     Tcl_UniChar ch;
     double prevStop, lastStop;
-
-    /* Map these strings to TkTextTabAlign values */
-    
+    /*
+     * Map these strings to TkTextTabAlign values.
+     */
     static CONST char *tabOptionStrings[] = {
-	"left", "right", "center", "numeric", (char *) NULL 
+	"left", "right", "center", "numeric", (char *) NULL
     };
-    
+
     if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, stringPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK) {
 	return NULL;
     }
 
     /*
-     * First find out how many entries we need to allocate in the
-     * tab array.
+     * First find out how many entries we need to allocate in the tab array.
      */
 
     count = 0;
@@ -4218,8 +4245,7 @@ TkTextGetTabs(interp, textPtr, stringPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Parse the elements of the list one at a time to fill in the
-     * array.
+     * Parse the elements of the list one at a time to fill in the array.
      */
 
     tabArrayPtr = (TkTextTabArray *) ckalloc((unsigned)
@@ -4227,99 +4253,103 @@ TkTextGetTabs(interp, textPtr, stringPtr)
     tabArrayPtr->numTabs = 0;
     prevStop = 0.0;
     lastStop = 0.0;
-    for (i = 0, tabPtr = &tabArrayPtr->tabs[0]; i  < objc; i++, tabPtr++) {
+    for (i = 0, tabPtr = &tabArrayPtr->tabs[0]; i < objc; i++, tabPtr++) {
 	int index;
-	
-	/* 
-	 * This will round fractional pixels above 0.5 upwards, and
-	 * otherwise downwards, to find the right integer pixel
-	 * position.
+
+	/*
+	 * This will round fractional pixels above 0.5 upwards, and otherwise
+	 * downwards, to find the right integer pixel position.
 	 */
-	if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, textPtr->tkwin, objv[i], 
-				&tabPtr->location) != TCL_OK) {
+
+	if (Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(interp, textPtr->tkwin, objv[i],
+		&tabPtr->location) != TCL_OK) {
 	    goto error;
 	}
 
 	if (tabPtr->location <= 0) {
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, 
-		 "tab stop \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
-		 "\" is not at a positive distance", NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "tab stop \"", Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
+		    "\" is not at a positive distance", NULL);
 	    goto error;
 	}
-	
+
 	prevStop = lastStop;
-	if (Tk_GetMMFromObj(interp, textPtr->tkwin, objv[i], 
-			    &lastStop) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (Tk_GetMMFromObj(interp, textPtr->tkwin, objv[i],
+		&lastStop) != TCL_OK) {
 	    goto error;
 	}
 	lastStop *= WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(textPtr->tkwin));
 	lastStop /= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(textPtr->tkwin));
-	
+
 	if (i > 0 && (tabPtr->location <= (tabPtr-1)->location)) {
-	    /* 
-	     * This tab is actually to the left of the previous
-	     * one, which is illegal.
+	    /*
+	     * This tab is actually to the left of the previous one, which is
+	     * illegal.
 	     */
+
 #ifdef _TK_ALLOW_DECREASING_TABS
-	    /* 
-	     * Force the tab to be a typical character width to the
-	     * right of the previous one, and update the 'lastStop'
-	     * with the changed position.
+	    /*
+	     * Force the tab to be a typical character width to the right of
+	     * the previous one, and update the 'lastStop' with the changed
+	     * position.
 	     */
+
 	    if (textPtr->charWidth > 0) {
-	        tabPtr->location = (tabPtr-1)->location + textPtr->charWidth;
+		tabPtr->location = (tabPtr-1)->location + textPtr->charWidth;
 	    } else {
 		tabPtr->location = (tabPtr-1)->location + 8;
 	    }
 	    lastStop = tabPtr->location;
 #else
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, 
-		 "tabs must be monotonically increasing, but \"",
-		 Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), 
-		 "\" is smaller than or equal to the previous tab",
-		 NULL);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+		    "tabs must be monotonically increasing, but \"",
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]),
+		    "\" is smaller than or equal to the previous tab",
+		    NULL);
 	    goto error;
-#endif
+#endif /* _TK_ALLOW_DECREASING_TABS */
 	}
-	
+
 	tabArrayPtr->numTabs++;
 
 	/*
-	 * See if there is an explicit alignment in the next list
-	 * element.  Otherwise just use "left".
+	 * See if there is an explicit alignment in the next list element.
+	 * Otherwise just use "left".
 	 */
 
 	tabPtr->alignment = LEFT;
 	if ((i+1) == objc) {
 	    continue;
 	}
-	/* There may be a more efficient way of getting this */
+
+	/*
+	 * There may be a more efficient way of getting this.
+	 */
+
 	Tcl_UtfToUniChar(Tcl_GetString(objv[i+1]), &ch);
 	if (!Tcl_UniCharIsAlpha(ch)) {
 	    continue;
 	}
 	i += 1;
-	
-	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], tabOptionStrings, 
-				"tab alignment", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[i], tabOptionStrings,
+		"tab alignment", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	    goto error;
 	}
 	tabPtr->alignment = ((TkTextTabAlign)index);
     }
-    
+
     /*
-     * For when we need to interpolate tab stops, store
-     * these two so we know the tab stop size to very
-     * high precision.  With the above checks, we can
-     * guarantee that tabIncrement is strictly positive
-     * here.
+     * For when we need to interpolate tab stops, store these two so we know
+     * the tab stop size to very high precision. With the above checks, we can
+     * guarantee that tabIncrement is strictly positive here.
      */
+
     tabArrayPtr->lastTab = lastStop;
     tabArrayPtr->tabIncrement = lastStop - prevStop;
-    
+
     return tabArrayPtr;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     ckfree((char *) tabArrayPtr);
     return NULL;
 }
@@ -4330,8 +4360,8 @@ TkTextGetTabs(interp, textPtr, stringPtr)
  * TextDumpCmd --
  *
  *	Return information about the text, tags, marks, and embedded windows
- *	and images in a text widget.  See the man page for the description
- *	of the text dump operation for all the details.
+ *	and images in a text widget. See the man page for the description of
+ *	the text dump operation for all the details.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -4405,7 +4435,7 @@ TextDumpCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	case DUMP_CMD:
 	    arg++;
 	    if (arg >= objc) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Usage: ", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), 
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Usage: ", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]),
 			" dump ?-all -image -text -mark -tag -window? ",
 			"?-command script? index ?index2?", NULL);
 		return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -4417,7 +4447,7 @@ TextDumpCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	}
     }
     if (arg >= objc || arg+2 < objc) {
-	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Usage: ", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]), 
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "Usage: ", Tcl_GetString(objv[0]),
 		" dump ?-all -image -text -mark -tag -window? ",
 		"?-command script? index ?index2?", NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -4436,6 +4466,7 @@ TextDumpCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     } else {
 	int length;
 	char *str;
+
 	if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[arg], &index2) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
@@ -4465,12 +4496,14 @@ TextDumpCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	DumpLine(interp, textPtr, what, index2.linePtr, 0,
 		index2.byteIndex, lineno, command);
     }
+
     /*
      * Special case to get the leftovers hiding at the end mark.
      */
+
     if (atEnd) {
 	DumpLine(interp, textPtr, what & ~TK_DUMP_TEXT, index2.linePtr,
-		0, 1, lineno, command);			    
+		0, 1, lineno, command);
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -4479,16 +4512,16 @@ TextDumpCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * DumpLine
- * 
- * 	Return information about a given text line from character
- *	position "start" up to, but not including, "end".
+ *
+ *	Return information about a given text line from character position
+ *	"start" up to, but not including, "end".
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None, but see DumpSegment.
- *	
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 static void
@@ -4521,6 +4554,7 @@ DumpLine(interp, textPtr, what, linePtr, startByte, endByte, lineno, command)
 	    char savedChar;		/* Last char used in the seg */
 	    int last = segPtr->size;	/* Index of savedChar */
 	    int first = 0;		/* Index of first char in seg */
+
 	    if (offset + segPtr->size > endByte) {
 		last = endByte - offset;
 	    }
@@ -4529,62 +4563,65 @@ DumpLine(interp, textPtr, what, linePtr, startByte, endByte, lineno, command)
 	    }
 	    savedChar = segPtr->body.chars[last];
 	    segPtr->body.chars[last] = '\0';
-	    
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, lineno, 
-				offset + first, &index);
+
+	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, lineno,
+		    offset + first, &index);
 	    DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, "text", segPtr->body.chars + first,
 		    command, &index, what);
 	    segPtr->body.chars[last] = savedChar;
 	} else if ((offset >= startByte)) {
 	    if ((what & TK_DUMP_MARK) && (segPtr->typePtr->name[0] == 'm')) {
 		char *name;
-		TkTextMark *markPtr = (TkTextMark *)&segPtr->body;
+		TkTextMark *markPtr = (TkTextMark *) &segPtr->body;
+
 		if (segPtr == textPtr->insertMarkPtr) {
 		    name = "insert";
 		} else if (segPtr == textPtr->currentMarkPtr) {
 		    name = "current";
 		} else {
-		    name = Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable, 
-					  markPtr->hPtr);
+		    name = Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable,
+			    markPtr->hPtr);
 		}
-		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 
-				    lineno, offset, &index);
+		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+			lineno, offset, &index);
 		DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, "mark", name, command, &index, what);
 	    } else if ((what & TK_DUMP_TAG) &&
-			(segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) {
-		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 
-				    lineno, offset, &index);
+		    (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) {
+		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+			lineno, offset, &index);
 		DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, "tagon",
-			segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->name,
-			command, &index, what);
-	    } else if ((what & TK_DUMP_TAG) && 
-			(segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)) {
-		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 
-				    lineno, offset, &index);
+			segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->name, command, &index,
+			what);
+	    } else if ((what & TK_DUMP_TAG) &&
+		    (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)) {
+		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+			lineno, offset, &index);
 		DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, "tagoff",
-			segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->name,
-			command, &index, what);
-	    } else if ((what & TK_DUMP_IMG) && 
-			(segPtr->typePtr->name[0] == 'i')) {
+			segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr->name, command, &index,
+			what);
+	    } else if ((what & TK_DUMP_IMG) &&
+		    (segPtr->typePtr->name[0] == 'i')) {
 		TkTextEmbImage *eiPtr = (TkTextEmbImage *)&segPtr->body;
-		char *name = (eiPtr->name ==  NULL) ? "" : eiPtr->name;
-		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 
-				    lineno, offset, &index);
-		DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, "image", name,
-			command, &index, what);
-	    } else if ((what & TK_DUMP_WIN) && 
-			(segPtr->typePtr->name[0] == 'w')) {
+		char *name = (eiPtr->name == NULL) ? "" : eiPtr->name;
+
+		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+			lineno, offset, &index);
+		DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, "image", name, command, &index,
+			what);
+	    } else if ((what & TK_DUMP_WIN) &&
+		    (segPtr->typePtr->name[0] == 'w')) {
 		TkTextEmbWindow *ewPtr = (TkTextEmbWindow *)&segPtr->body;
 		char *pathname;
+
 		if (ewPtr->tkwin == (Tk_Window) NULL) {
 		    pathname = "";
 		} else {
 		    pathname = Tk_PathName(ewPtr->tkwin);
 		}
-		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 
-				    lineno, offset, &index);
-		DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, "window", pathname,
-			command, &index, what);
+		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+			lineno, offset, &index);
+		DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, "window", pathname, command,
+			&index, what);
 	    }
 	}
     }
@@ -4594,18 +4631,19 @@ DumpLine(interp, textPtr, what, linePtr, startByte, endByte, lineno, command)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * DumpSegment
- * 
- *	Either append information about the current segment to the result,
- *	or make a script callback with that information as arguments.
+ *
+ *	Either append information about the current segment to the result, or
+ *	make a script callback with that information as arguments.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Either evals the callback or appends elements to the result string.
- *	
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static int
 DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, key, value, command, index, what)
     TkText *textPtr;
@@ -4613,10 +4651,11 @@ DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, key, value, command, index, what)
     CONST char *key;		/* Segment type key */
     CONST char *value;		/* Segment value */
     CONST char *command;	/* Script callback */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *index;   /* index with line/byte position info */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *index;	/* index with line/byte position info */
     int what;			/* Look for TK_DUMP_INDEX bit */
 {
     char buffer[TK_POS_CHARS];
+
     TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, index, buffer);
     if (command == NULL) {
 	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, key);
@@ -4627,6 +4666,7 @@ DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, key, value, command, index, what)
 	CONST char *argv[4];
 	char *list;
 	int result;
+
 	argv[0] = key;
 	argv[1] = value;
 	argv[2] = buffer;
@@ -4642,41 +4682,40 @@ DumpSegment(textPtr, interp, key, value, command, index, what)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TextEditUndo --
- * 
- *    undo the last change.
+ *
+ *	Undo the last change.
  *
  * Results:
- *    None
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
- *    
+ *	Apart from manipulating the undo and redo stacks, the state of the
+ *	rest of the widget may also change (due to whatever is being undone).
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
 TextEditUndo(textPtr)
-    TkText     *textPtr;    /* Overall information about text widget. */
+    TkText *textPtr;		/* Overall information about text widget. */
 {
     int status;
 
     if (!textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo) {
-       return TCL_OK;
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    /* Turn off the undo feature */
-    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo = 0;
+    /*
+     * Turn off the undo feature while we revert a compound action. Note that
+     * the dirty counter counts backwards while we are undoing...
+     */
 
-    /* The dirty counter should count downwards as we are undoing things */
+    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo = 0;
     textPtr->sharedTextPtr->isDirtyIncrement = -1;
 
-    /* revert one compound action */
     status = TkUndoRevert(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
 
-    /* Restore the isdirty increment */
     textPtr->sharedTextPtr->isDirtyIncrement = 1;
-
-    /* Turn back on the undo feature */
     textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo = 1;
 
     return status;
@@ -4686,37 +4725,39 @@ TextEditUndo(textPtr)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TextEditRedo --
- * 
- *    redo the last undone change.
+ *
+ *	Redo the last undone change.
  *
  * Results:
- *    None
+ *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
- *    
+ *	Apart from manipulating the undo and redo stacks, the state of the
+ *	rest of the widget may also change (due to whatever is being redone).
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
 TextEditRedo(textPtr)
-    TkText     *textPtr;     /* Overall information about text widget. */
+    TkText *textPtr;		/* Overall information about text widget. */
 {
     int status;
 
     if (!textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo) {
-       return TCL_OK;
+	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    /* Turn off the undo feature temporarily */
+    /*
+     * Turn off the undo feature temporarily while we revert a previously
+     * undone compound action.
+     */
+
     textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo = 0;
 
-    /* reapply one compound action */
     status = TkUndoApply(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
 
-    /* Turn back on the undo feature */
     textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undo = 1;
-
     return status;
 }
 
@@ -4725,126 +4766,122 @@ TextEditRedo(textPtr)
  *
  * TextEditCmd --
  *
- *    Handle the subcommands to "$text edit ...".
- *    See documentation for details.
+ *	Handle the subcommands to "$text edit ...". See documentation for
+ *	details.
  *
  * Results:
- *    None
+ *	None
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
- *    
+ *	None.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
 TextEditCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
-    TkText *textPtr;          /* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;       /* Current interpreter. */
+    TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
     int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
 {
     int index;
-    
+
     static CONST char *editOptionStrings[] = {
-	"modified", "redo", "reset", "separator", "undo", (char *) NULL 
+	"modified", "redo", "reset", "separator", "undo", (char *) NULL
     };
     enum editOptions {
 	EDIT_MODIFIED, EDIT_REDO, EDIT_RESET, EDIT_SEPARATOR, EDIT_UNDO
     };
-    
+
     if (objc < 3) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
-    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], editOptionStrings, 
-			    "edit option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], editOptionStrings,
+	    "edit option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    switch ((enum editOptions)index) {
-	case EDIT_MODIFIED: {
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, 
-			Tcl_NewBooleanObj(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->isDirty));
-	    } else if (objc != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "?boolean?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    } else {
-		int setModified;
-		XEvent event;
-		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objv[3], &setModified) 
-		  != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		/*
-		 * Set or reset the dirty info and trigger a Modified event.
-		 */
+    switch ((enum editOptions) index) {
+    case EDIT_MODIFIED:
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp,
+		    Tcl_NewBooleanObj(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->isDirty));
+	} else if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "?boolean?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	} else {
+	    int setModified;
+	    XEvent event;
 
-		if (setModified) {
-		    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->isDirty     = 1;
-		    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->modifiedSet = 1;
-		} else {
-		    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->isDirty     = 0;
-		    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->modifiedSet = 0;
-		}
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, objv[3],
+		    &setModified) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
 
-		/*
-		 * Send an event that the text was modified.  This is
-		 * equivalent to "event generate $textWidget <<Modified>>"
-		 */
+	    /*
+	     * Set or reset the dirty info and trigger a Modified event.
+	     */
 
-		memset((VOID *) &event, 0, sizeof(event));
-		event.xany.type = VirtualEvent;
-		event.xany.serial = NextRequest(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin));
-		event.xany.send_event = False;
-		event.xany.window = Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin);
-		event.xany.display = Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin);
-		((XVirtualEvent *) &event)->name = Tk_GetUid("Modified");
-		Tk_HandleEvent(&event);
+	    if (setModified) {
+		textPtr->sharedTextPtr->isDirty = 1;
+		textPtr->sharedTextPtr->modifiedSet = 1;
+	    } else {
+		textPtr->sharedTextPtr->isDirty = 0;
+		textPtr->sharedTextPtr->modifiedSet = 0;
 	    }
-	    break;
+
+	    /*
+	     * Send an event that the text was modified. This is equivalent to
+	     * "event generate $textWidget <<Modified>>"
+	     */
+
+	    memset((VOID *) &event, 0, sizeof(event));
+	    event.xany.type = VirtualEvent;
+	    event.xany.serial = NextRequest(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin));
+	    event.xany.send_event = False;
+	    event.xany.window = Tk_WindowId(textPtr->tkwin);
+	    event.xany.display = Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin);
+	    ((XVirtualEvent *) &event)->name = Tk_GetUid("Modified");
+	    Tk_HandleEvent(&event);
 	}
-	case EDIT_REDO: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (TextEditRedo(textPtr)) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "nothing to redo", (char *) NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    break;
+	break;
+    case EDIT_REDO:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case EDIT_RESET: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    TkUndoClearStacks(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
-	    break;
+	if (TextEditRedo(textPtr)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "nothing to redo", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case EDIT_SEPARATOR: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
-	    break;
+	break;
+    case EDIT_RESET:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case EDIT_UNDO: {
-	    if (objc != 3) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (TextEditUndo(textPtr)) {
-		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "nothing to undo",
-			(char *) NULL);
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}	
+	TkUndoClearStacks(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
+	break;
+    case EDIT_SEPARATOR:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	TkUndoInsertUndoSeparator(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->undoStack);
+	break;
+    case EDIT_UNDO:
+	if (objc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (TextEditUndo(textPtr)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "nothing to undo", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	break;
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -4853,49 +4890,51 @@ TextEditCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TextGetText --
- * 
- *    Returns the text from indexPtr1 to indexPtr2, placing that text
- *    in a string object which is returned with a refCount of zero.
- *    
- *    Since the amount of text may potentially be several megabytes (e.g.
- *    in text editors built on the text widget), efficiency is very
- *    important.  We may want to investigate the efficiency of the
- *    Tcl_AppendToObj more carefully (e.g. if we know we are going to be
- *    appending several thousand lines, we could attempt to pre-allocate
- *    a larger space).
- *    
- *    Also the result is built up as a utf-8 string, but, if we knew
- *    we wanted it as Unicode, we could potentially save a huge
- *    conversion by building it up as Unicode directly.  This could
- *    be as simple as replacing Tcl_NewObj by Tcl_NewUnicodeObj.
+ *
+ *	Returns the text from indexPtr1 to indexPtr2, placing that text in a
+ *	string object which is returned with a refCount of zero.
+ *
+ *	Since the amount of text may potentially be several megabytes (e.g.
+ *	in text editors built on the text widget), efficiency is very
+ *	important. We may want to investigate the efficiency of the
+ *	Tcl_AppendToObj more carefully (e.g. if we know we are going to be
+ *	appending several thousand lines, we could attempt to pre-allocate a
+ *	larger space).
+ *
+ *	Also the result is built up as a utf-8 string, but, if we knew we
+ *	wanted it as Unicode, we could potentially save a huge conversion by
+ *	building it up as Unicode directly. This could be as simple as
+ *	replacing Tcl_NewObj by Tcl_NewUnicodeObj.
  *
  * Results:
- *    Tcl_Obj of string type containing the specified text.  If the
- *    visibleOnly flag is set to 1, then only those characters which
- *    are not elided will be returned.  Otherwise (flag is 0) all 
- *    characters in the given range are returned.
+ *	Tcl_Obj of string type containing the specified text. If the
+ *	visibleOnly flag is set to 1, then only those characters which are not
+ *	elided will be returned. Otherwise (flag is 0) all characters in the
+ *	given range are returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    Memory will be allocated for the new object.  Remember to free it if
- *    it isn't going to be stored appropriately.
- *    
+ *	Memory will be allocated for the new object. Remember to free it if it
+ *	isn't going to be stored appropriately.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static Tcl_Obj* 
+static Tcl_Obj*
 TextGetText(textPtr, indexPtr1,indexPtr2, visibleOnly)
-    CONST TkText *textPtr;         /* Information about text widget. */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr1;  /* Get text from this index... */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr2;  /* ...to this index */
-    int visibleOnly;               /* If non-zero, then only return
-                                    * non-elided characters. */
+    CONST TkText *textPtr;	/* Information about text widget. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr1;
+				/* Get text from this index... */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr2;
+				/* ...to this index. */
+    int visibleOnly;		/* If non-zero, then only return non-elided
+				 * characters. */
 {
     TkTextIndex tmpIndex;
     Tcl_Obj *resultPtr = Tcl_NewObj();
-    
-    TkTextMakeByteIndex(indexPtr1->tree, textPtr, 
-			TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexPtr1->linePtr),
-			indexPtr1->byteIndex, &tmpIndex);
+
+    TkTextMakeByteIndex(indexPtr1->tree, textPtr,
+	    TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexPtr1->linePtr),
+	    indexPtr1->byteIndex, &tmpIndex);
 
     if (TkTextIndexCmp(indexPtr1, indexPtr2) < 0) {
 	while (1) {
@@ -4905,25 +4944,27 @@ TextGetText(textPtr, indexPtr1,indexPtr2, visibleOnly)
 	    segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&tmpIndex, &offset);
 	    last = segPtr->size;
 	    if (tmpIndex.linePtr == indexPtr2->linePtr) {
-		/* 
-		 * The last line that was requested must be handled
-		 * carefully, because we may need to break out of this
-		 * loop in the middle of the line
+		/*
+		 * The last line that was requested must be handled carefully,
+		 * because we may need to break out of this loop in the middle
+		 * of the line.
 		 */
+
 		if (indexPtr2->byteIndex == tmpIndex.byteIndex) {
 		    break;
 		} else {
-		    int last2;
-		    last2 = indexPtr2->byteIndex - tmpIndex.byteIndex + offset;
+		    int last2 =
+			    indexPtr2->byteIndex - tmpIndex.byteIndex + offset;
+
 		    if (last2 < last) {
 			last = last2;
 		    }
 		}
 	    }
 	    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
-		if (!visibleOnly || !TkTextIsElided(textPtr, &tmpIndex, NULL)) {
+		if (!visibleOnly || !TkTextIsElided(textPtr,&tmpIndex,NULL)) {
 		    Tcl_AppendToObj(resultPtr, segPtr->body.chars + offset,
-				    last - offset);
+			    last - offset);
 		}
 	    }
 	    TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, &tmpIndex, last-offset, &tmpIndex);
@@ -4936,39 +4977,40 @@ TextGetText(textPtr, indexPtr1,indexPtr2, visibleOnly)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * UpdateDirtyFlag --
- * 
- *    Increases the dirtyness of the text widget
+ *
+ *	Increases the dirtyness of the text widget
  *
  * Results:
- *    None
+ *	None
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
- *    
+ *	None.
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static void 
-UpdateDirtyFlag (sharedTextPtr)
-    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr;      /* Information about text widget. */
+static void
+UpdateDirtyFlag(sharedTextPtr)
+    TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr;/* Information about text widget. */
 {
     int oldDirtyFlag;
 
     if (sharedTextPtr->modifiedSet) {
-        return;
+	return;
     }
     oldDirtyFlag = sharedTextPtr->isDirty;
     sharedTextPtr->isDirty += sharedTextPtr->isDirtyIncrement;
     if (sharedTextPtr->isDirty == 0 || oldDirtyFlag == 0) {
 	TkText *textPtr;
-	for (textPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; textPtr != NULL; 
-	   textPtr = textPtr->next) {
-	    XEvent event;
+	for (textPtr = sharedTextPtr->peers; textPtr != NULL;
+		textPtr = textPtr->next) {
 	    /*
-	     * Send an event that the text was modified.  This is equivalent to
-	     * "event generate $textWidget <<Modified>>"
+	     * Send an event that the text was modified. This is equivalent to
+	     *	   event generate $textWidget <<Modified>>
 	     */
 
+	    XEvent event;
+
 	    memset((VOID *) &event, 0, sizeof(event));
 	    event.xany.type = VirtualEvent;
 	    event.xany.serial = NextRequest(Tk_Display(textPtr->tkwin));
@@ -4986,68 +5028,75 @@ UpdateDirtyFlag (sharedTextPtr)
  *
  * SearchPerform --
  *
- *	Overall control of search process.  Is given a pattern, a
- *	starting index and an ending index, and attempts to perform a
- *	search.  This procedure is actually completely independent of Tk,
- *	and could in the future be split off.
- *	
+ *	Overall control of search process. Is given a pattern, a starting
+ *	index and an ending index, and attempts to perform a search. This
+ *	function is actually completely independent of Tk, and could in the
+ *	future be split off.
+ *
  * Results:
- *	Standard Tcl result code.  In particular, if fromPtr or toPtr
- *	are not considered valid by the 'lineIndexProc', an error
- *	will be thrown and no search performed.
+ *	Standard Tcl result code. In particular, if fromPtr or toPtr are not
+ *	considered valid by the 'lineIndexProc', an error will be thrown and
+ *	no search performed.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	See 'SearchCore'.
- *	
+ *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
 SearchPerform(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj, fromPtr, toPtr)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;             /* For error messages */
-    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr;      /* Search parameters */
-    Tcl_Obj *patObj;                /* Contains an exact string or a
-				     * regexp pattern.  Must have a 
-				     * refCount > 0 */
-    Tcl_Obj *fromPtr;               /* Contains information describing
-                                     * the first index */
-    Tcl_Obj *toPtr;                 /* NULL or information describing
-                                     * the last index */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* For error messages */
+    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr;	/* Search parameters */
+    Tcl_Obj *patObj;		/* Contains an exact string or a regexp
+				 * pattern. Must have a refCount > 0 */
+    Tcl_Obj *fromPtr;		/* Contains information describing the first
+				 * index */
+    Tcl_Obj *toPtr;		/* NULL or information describing the last
+				 * index */
 {
-    /* 
-     * Find the starting line and starting offset (measured in Unicode
-     * chars for regexp search, utf-8 bytes for exact search)
+    /*
+     * Find the starting line and starting offset (measured in Unicode chars
+     * for regexp search, utf-8 bytes for exact search).
      */
-    if ((*searchSpecPtr->lineIndexProc)(interp, fromPtr, searchSpecPtr, 
+
+    if ((*searchSpecPtr->lineIndexProc)(interp, fromPtr, searchSpecPtr,
 	    &searchSpecPtr->startLine,
 	    &searchSpecPtr->startOffset) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
-    /* 
+    /*
      * Find the optional end location, similarly.
      */
+
     if (toPtr != NULL) {
 	CONST TkTextIndex *indexToPtr, *indexFromPtr;
 	TkText *textPtr = (TkText*)(searchSpecPtr->clientData);
-	
+
 	indexToPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, toPtr);
 	if (indexToPtr == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	indexFromPtr = TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, fromPtr);
-	/* 
-	 * Check for any empty search range here.  It might be better
-	 * in the future to embed that in SearchCore (whose default
-	 * behaviour is to wrap when given a negative search range).
+
+	/*
+	 * Check for any empty search range here. It might be better in the
+	 * future to embed that in SearchCore (whose default behaviour is to
+	 * wrap when given a negative search range).
 	 */
+
 	if (searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
-	    if (TkTextIndexCmp(indexFromPtr, indexToPtr) == -1) return TCL_OK;
+	    if (TkTextIndexCmp(indexFromPtr, indexToPtr) == -1) {
+		return TCL_OK;
+	    }
 	} else {
-	    if (TkTextIndexCmp(indexFromPtr, indexToPtr) == 1) return TCL_OK;
+	    if (TkTextIndexCmp(indexFromPtr, indexToPtr) == 1) {
+		return TCL_OK;
+	    }
 	}
-	
-	if ((*searchSpecPtr->lineIndexProc)(interp, toPtr, searchSpecPtr, 
+
+	if ((*searchSpecPtr->lineIndexProc)(interp, toPtr, searchSpecPtr,
 		&searchSpecPtr->stopLine,
 		&searchSpecPtr->stopOffset) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -5057,10 +5106,9 @@ SearchPerform(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj, fromPtr, toPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Scan through all of the lines of the text circularly, starting
-     * at the given index.  'patObj' is the pattern which may be an
-     * exact string or a regexp pattern depending on the flags in
-     * searchSpecPtr.
+     * Scan through all of the lines of the text circularly, starting at the
+     * given index. 'patObj' is the pattern which may be an exact string or a
+     * regexp pattern depending on the flags in searchSpecPtr.
      */
 
     return SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj);
@@ -5071,14 +5119,12 @@ SearchPerform(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj, fromPtr, toPtr)
  *
  * SearchCore --
  *
- *	The core of the search procedure.  This procedure is actually
- *	completely independent of Tk, and could in the future be split
- *	off.
+ *	The core of the search function. This function is actually completely
+ *	independent of Tk, and could in the future be split off.
  *
- *	The function assumes regexp-based searches operate on Unicode
- *	strings, and exact searches on utf-8 strings.  Therefore the
- *	'foundMatchProc' and 'addLineProc' need to be aware of this
- *	distinction.
+ *	The function assumes regexp-based searches operate on Unicode strings,
+ *	and exact searches on utf-8 strings. Therefore the 'foundMatchProc'
+ *	and 'addLineProc' need to be aware of this distinction.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result code.
@@ -5087,46 +5133,50 @@ SearchPerform(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj, fromPtr, toPtr)
  *	Only those of the 'searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc' which is called
  *	whenever a match is found.
  *
- *	Note that the way matching across multiple lines is implemented,
- *	we start afresh with each line we have available, even though we
- *	may already have examined the contents of that line (and further
- *	ones) if we were attempting a multi-line match using the previous
- *	line.  This means there may be ways to speed this up a lot by not
- *	throwing away all the multi-line information one has accumulated.
- *	Profiling should be done to see where the bottlenecks lie before
- *	attempting this, however.  We would also need to be very careful
- *	such optimisation keep within the specified search bounds.
+ *	Note that the way matching across multiple lines is implemented, we
+ *	start afresh with each line we have available, even though we may
+ *	already have examined the contents of that line (and further ones) if
+ *	we were attempting a multi-line match using the previous line. This
+ *	means there may be ways to speed this up a lot by not throwing away
+ *	all the multi-line information one has accumulated. Profiling should
+ *	be done to see where the bottlenecks lie before attempting this,
+ *	however. We would also need to be very careful such optimisation keep
+ *	within the specified search bounds.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
 SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* For error messages */
-    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr;		/* Search parameters */
-    Tcl_Obj *patObj;			/* Contains an exact string or a
-					 * regexp pattern.  Must have a
-					 * refCount > 0 */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* For error messages */
+    SearchSpec *searchSpecPtr;	/* Search parameters */
+    Tcl_Obj *patObj;		/* Contains an exact string or a regexp
+				 * pattern. Must have a refCount > 0 */
 {
-    int passes;
     /*
-     * For exact searches these are utf-8 char* offsets, for regexp
-     * searches they are Unicode char offsets
+     * For exact searches these are utf-8 char* offsets, for regexp searches
+     * they are Unicode char offsets.
      */
+
     int firstOffset, lastOffset, matchOffset, matchLength;
+    int passes;
     int lineNum = searchSpecPtr->startLine;
     int code = TCL_OK;
     Tcl_Obj *theLine;
     int alreadySearchOffset = -1;
-    
-    Tcl_RegExp regexp = NULL;		/* For regexp searches only */
-    /* 
-     * These items are for backward regexp searches only.  They are for
-     * two purposes: to allow us to report backwards matches in the
-     * correct order, even though the implementation uses repeated
-     * forward searches; and to provide for overlap checking between
-     * backwards matches on different text lines.
+
+    CONST char *pattern = NULL;	/* For exact searches only. */
+    int firstNewLine = -1; 	/* For exact searches only. */
+    Tcl_RegExp regexp = NULL;	/* For regexp searches only. */
+
+    /*
+     * These items are for backward regexp searches only. They are for two
+     * purposes: to allow us to report backwards matches in the correct order,
+     * even though the implementation uses repeated forward searches; and to
+     * provide for overlap checking between backwards matches on different
+     * text lines.
      */
+
 #define LOTS_OF_MATCHES 20
     int matchNum = LOTS_OF_MATCHES;
     int smArray[2 * LOTS_OF_MATCHES];
@@ -5134,76 +5184,81 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
     int *storeLength = smArray + LOTS_OF_MATCHES;
     int lastBackwardsLineMatch = -1;
     int lastBackwardsMatchOffset = -1;
-    
-    /* These two items are for exact searches only */
-    CONST char *pattern = NULL;		
-    int firstNewLine = -1;		
 
     if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
 	/*
-	 * Convert the pattern to lower-case if we're supposed to ignore
-	 * case.
+	 * Convert the pattern to lower-case if we're supposed to ignore case.
 	 */
+
 	if (searchSpecPtr->noCase) {
 	    patObj = Tcl_DuplicateObj(patObj);
+
 	    /*
-	     * This can change the length of the string behind the
-	     * object's back, so ensure it is correctly synchronised.
+	     * This can change the length of the string behind the object's
+	     * back, so ensure it is correctly synchronised.
 	     */
+
 	    Tcl_SetObjLength(patObj, Tcl_UtfToLower(Tcl_GetString(patObj)));
 	}
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * Compile the regular expression.  We want '^$' to match after and
+	 * Compile the regular expression. We want '^$' to match after and
 	 * before \n respectively, so use the TCL_REG_NLANCH flag.
 	 */
+
 	regexp = Tcl_GetRegExpFromObj(interp, patObj,
 		(searchSpecPtr->noCase ? TCL_REG_NOCASE : 0)
 		| (searchSpecPtr->noLineStop ? 0 : TCL_REG_NLSTOP)
-	        | TCL_REG_ADVANCED | TCL_REG_CANMATCH | TCL_REG_NLANCH);
+		| TCL_REG_ADVANCED | TCL_REG_CANMATCH | TCL_REG_NLANCH);
 	if (regexp == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
     }
 
     /*
-     * For exact strings, we want to know where the first newline is,
-     * and we will also use this as a flag to test whether it is even
-     * possible to match the pattern on a single line.  If not we
-     * will have to search across multiple lines.
+     * For exact strings, we want to know where the first newline is, and we
+     * will also use this as a flag to test whether it is even possible to
+     * match the pattern on a single line. If not we will have to search
+     * across multiple lines.
      */
+
     if (searchSpecPtr->exact) {
 	CONST char *nl;
 
 	/*
-	 * We only need to set the matchLength once for exact searches,
-	 * and we do it here.  It is also used below as the actual
-	 * pattern length, so it has dual purpose.
+	 * We only need to set the matchLength once for exact searches, and we
+	 * do it here. It is also used below as the actual pattern length, so
+	 * it has dual purpose.
 	 */
+
 	pattern = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(patObj, &matchLength);
 	nl = strchr(pattern, '\n');
+
 	/*
-	 * If there is no newline, or it is the very end of the string,
-	 * then we don't need any special treatment, since single-line
-	 * matching will work fine.
+	 * If there is no newline, or it is the very end of the string, then
+	 * we don't need any special treatment, since single-line matching
+	 * will work fine.
 	 */
+
 	if (nl != NULL && nl[1] != '\0') {
 	    firstNewLine = (nl - pattern);
 	}
     } else {
-	matchLength = 0;  /* Only needed to prevent compiler warnings. */
+	matchLength = 0;	/* Only needed to prevent compiler warnings. */
     }
 
     /*
-     * Keep a reference here, so that we can be sure the object
-     * doesn't disappear behind our backs and invalidate its
-     * contents which we are using.
+     * Keep a reference here, so that we can be sure the object doesn't
+     * disappear behind our backs and invalidate its contents which we are
+     * using.
      */
+
     Tcl_IncrRefCount(patObj);
 
     /*
-     * For building up the current line being checked
+     * For building up the current line being checked.
      */
+
     theLine = Tcl_NewObj();
     Tcl_IncrRefCount(theLine);
 
@@ -5211,40 +5266,41 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 	ClientData lineInfo;
 	int linesSearched = 1;
 	int extraLinesSearched = 0;
-	
+
 	if (lineNum >= searchSpecPtr->numLines) {
 	    /*
 	     * Don't search the dummy last line of the text.
 	     */
+
 	    goto nextLine;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Extract the text from the line, storing its length in
-	 * 'lastOffset' (in bytes if exact, chars if regexp), since
-	 * obviously the length is the maximum offset at which
-	 * it is possible to find something on this line, which is
-	 * what 'lastOffset' represents.
+	 * Extract the text from the line, storing its length in 'lastOffset'
+	 * (in bytes if exact, chars if regexp), since obviously the length is
+	 * the maximum offset at which it is possible to find something on
+	 * this line, which is what 'lastOffset' represents.
 	 */
 
-	lineInfo = (*searchSpecPtr->addLineProc)(lineNum,
-		searchSpecPtr, theLine, &lastOffset, &linesSearched);
+	lineInfo = (*searchSpecPtr->addLineProc)(lineNum, searchSpecPtr,
+		theLine, &lastOffset, &linesSearched);
 
 	if (lineInfo == NULL) {
-	    /* 
-	     * This should not happen, since 'lineNum' should be valid
-	     * in the call above.  However, let's try to be flexible and
-	     * not cause a crash below.
+	    /*
+	     * This should not happen, since 'lineNum' should be valid in the
+	     * call above. However, let's try to be flexible and not cause a
+	     * crash below.
 	     */
+
 	    goto nextLine;
 	}
-	
+
 	if (lineNum == searchSpecPtr->stopLine && searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
 	    firstOffset = searchSpecPtr->stopOffset;
 	} else {
 	    firstOffset = 0;
 	}
-		
+
 	if (alreadySearchOffset != -1) {
 	    if (searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
 		if (alreadySearchOffset < lastOffset) {
@@ -5257,18 +5313,19 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 	    }
 	    alreadySearchOffset = -1;
 	}
-	
+
 	if (lineNum == searchSpecPtr->startLine) {
 	    /*
-	     * The starting line is tricky: the first time we see it
-	     * we check one part of the line, and the second pass through
-	     * we check the other part of the line.
+	     * The starting line is tricky: the first time we see it we check
+	     * one part of the line, and the second pass through we check the
+	     * other part of the line.
 	     */
+
 	    passes++;
 	    if ((passes == 1) ^ searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
 		/*
-		 * Forward search and first pass, or backward
-		 * search and second pass.
+		 * Forward search and first pass, or backward search and
+		 * second pass.
 		 *
 		 * Only use the last part of the line.
 		 */
@@ -5292,11 +5349,11 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Check for matches within the current line 'lineNum'.  If so,
-	 * and if we're searching backwards or for all matches, repeat
-	 * the search until we find the last match in the line.  The
-	 * 'lastOffset' is one beyond the last position in the line at
-	 * which a match is allowed to begin.
+	 * Check for matches within the current line 'lineNum'. If so, and if
+	 * we're searching backwards or for all matches, repeat the search
+	 * until we find the last match in the line. The 'lastOffset' is one
+	 * beyond the last position in the line at which a match is allowed to
+	 * begin.
 	 */
 
 	matchOffset = -1;
@@ -5311,22 +5368,29 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 		int lastFullLine = lastOffset;
 
 		if (firstNewLine == -1) {
-		    if (searchSpecPtr->strictLimits 
-			&& (firstOffset + matchLength > lastOffset)) {
-			/* Not enough characters to match. */
-		        break;
+		    if (searchSpecPtr->strictLimits
+			    && (firstOffset + matchLength > lastOffset)) {
+			/*
+			 * Not enough characters to match.
+			 */
+
+			break;
 		    }
-		    /* 
-		     * Single line matching.  We want to scan forwards
-		     * or backwards as appropriate. 
+
+		    /*
+		     * Single line matching. We want to scan forwards or
+		     * backwards as appropriate.
 		     */
+
 		    if (searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
-			/* 
-			 * Search back either from the previous match or
-			 * from 'startOfLine + lastOffset - 1' until we
-			 * find a match.
+			/*
+			 * Search back either from the previous match or from
+			 * 'startOfLine + lastOffset - 1' until we find a
+			 * match.
 			 */
+
 			CONST char c = pattern[0];
+
 			if (alreadySearchOffset != -1) {
 			    p = startOfLine + alreadySearchOffset;
 			    alreadySearchOffset = -1;
@@ -5345,41 +5409,49 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 			p = strstr(startOfLine + firstOffset, pattern);
 		    }
 		    if (p == NULL) {
-			/* 
-			 * Single line match failed. 
+			/*
+			 * Single line match failed.
 			 */
-		        break;
+
+			break;
 		    }
 		} else if (firstNewLine >= (lastOffset - firstOffset)) {
-		    /* 
-		     * Multi-line match, but not enough characters to
-		     * match.
+		    /*
+		     * Multi-line match, but not enough characters to match.
 		     */
+
 		    break;
 		} else {
-		    /* 
-		     * Multi-line match has only one possible match
-		     * position, because we know where the '\n' is.
+		    /*
+		     * Multi-line match has only one possible match position,
+		     * because we know where the '\n' is.
 		     */
+
 		    p = startOfLine + lastOffset - firstNewLine - 1;
 		    if (strncmp(p, pattern, (unsigned)(firstNewLine + 1))) {
-			/* No match */
+			/*
+			 * No match.
+			 */
 			break;
 		    } else {
 			int extraLines = 1;
-			/* 
+
+			/*
 			 * If we find a match that overlaps more than one
-			 * line, we will use this value to determine the
-			 * first allowed starting offset for the following
-			 * search (to avoid overlapping results).
+			 * line, we will use this value to determine the first
+			 * allowed starting offset for the following search
+			 * (to avoid overlapping results).
 			 */
+
 			int lastTotal = lastOffset;
 			int skipFirst = lastOffset - firstNewLine -1;
+
 			/*
-			 * We may be able to match if given more text.
-			 * The following 'while' block handles multi-line
-			 * exact searches.
+			 * We may be able to match if given more text. The
+			 * following 'while' block handles multi-line exact
+			 * searches.
 			 */
+
 			while (1) {
 			    lastFullLine = lastTotal;
 
@@ -5389,9 +5461,10 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 			    }
 
 			    /*
-			     * Only add the line if we haven't already
-			     * done so already.
+			     * Only add the line if we haven't already done so
+			     * already.
 			     */
+
 			    if (extraLines > maxExtraLines) {
 				if ((*searchSpecPtr->addLineProc)(lineNum
 					+ extraLines, searchSpecPtr, theLine,
@@ -5407,64 +5480,80 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 
 			    startOfLine = Tcl_GetString(theLine);
 			    p = startOfLine + skipFirst;
+
 			    /*
-			     * Use the fact that 'matchLength = patLength'
-			     * for exact searches
+			     * Use the fact that 'matchLength = patLength' for
+			     * exact searches.
 			     */
+
 			    if ((lastTotal - skipFirst) >= matchLength) {
-			        /*
-			         * We now have enough text to match, so
-			         * we make a final test and break
-			         * whatever the result
-			         */
-				if (strncmp(p, pattern, (unsigned)matchLength)) {
+				/*
+				 * We now have enough text to match, so we
+				 * make a final test and break whatever the
+				 * result.
+				 */
+
+				if (strncmp(p,pattern,(unsigned)matchLength)) {
 				    p = NULL;
 				}
 				break;
 			    } else {
 				/*
-				 * Not enough text yet, but check the prefix
+				 * Not enough text yet, but check the prefix.
 				 */
+
 				if (strncmp(p, pattern,
 					(unsigned)(lastTotal - skipFirst))) {
 				    p = NULL;
 				    break;
 				}
+
 				/*
-				 * The prefix matches, so keep looking
+				 * The prefix matches, so keep looking.
 				 */
 			    }
 			    extraLines++;
 			}
 			/*
 			 * If we reach here, with p != NULL, we've found a
-			 * multi-line match, else we started a multi-match
-			 * but didn't finish it off, so we go to the next line.
+			 * multi-line match, else we started a multi-match but
+			 * didn't finish it off, so we go to the next line.
 			 */
+
 			if (p == NULL) {
 			    break;
 			}
-			/* We've found a multi-line match */
+
+			/*
+			 * We've found a multi-line match.
+			 */
+
 			extraLinesSearched = extraLines - 1;
 		    }
 		}
-		backwardsMatch:
+
+	    backwardsMatch:
 		if ((p - startOfLine) >= lastOffset) {
 		    break;
 		}
+
 		/*
-		 * Remember the match
+		 * Remember the match.
 		 */
+
 		matchOffset = p - startOfLine;
 
 		if (searchSpecPtr->all &&
-		  !(*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lineNum, searchSpecPtr, 
-		  lineInfo, theLine, matchOffset, matchLength)) {
+			!(*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lineNum,
+			searchSpecPtr, lineInfo, theLine, matchOffset,
+			matchLength)) {
 		    /*
 		     * We reached the end of the search
 		     */
+
 		    goto searchDone;
 		}
+
 		if (!searchSpecPtr->overlap) {
 		    if (searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
 			alreadySearchOffset = p - startOfLine;
@@ -5476,18 +5565,20 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 		    } else {
 			firstOffset = p - startOfLine + matchLength;
 			if (firstOffset >= lastOffset) {
-			    /* 
+			    /*
 			     * Now, we have to be careful not to find
 			     * overlapping matches either on the same or
-			     * following lines.  Assume that if we did find
-			     * something, it goes until the last extra line
-			     * we added.
-			     * 
-			     * We can break out of the loop, since we know
-			     * no more will be found.
+			     * following lines. Assume that if we did find
+			     * something, it goes until the last extra line we
+			     * added.
+			     *
+			     * We can break out of the loop, since we know no
+			     * more will be found.
 			     */
+
 			    if (!searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
-				alreadySearchOffset = firstOffset - lastFullLine;
+				alreadySearchOffset =
+					firstOffset - lastFullLine;
 				break;
 			    }
 			}
@@ -5499,8 +5590,8 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 			    break;
 			}
 		    } else {
-			firstOffset = p - startOfLine 
-			  + Tcl_UtfToUniChar(startOfLine + matchOffset, &ch);
+			firstOffset = p - startOfLine +
+				Tcl_UtfToUniChar(startOfLine+matchOffset, &ch);
 		    }
 		}
 	    } while (searchSpecPtr->all);
@@ -5510,12 +5601,12 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 	    int maxExtraLines = 0;
 	    int matches = 0;
 	    int lastNonOverlap = -1;
-	    
+
 	    do {
 		Tcl_RegExpInfo info;
 		int match;
 		int lastFullLine = lastOffset;
-		
+
 		match = Tcl_RegExpExecObj(interp, regexp, theLine, firstOffset,
 			1, ((firstOffset > 0) ? TCL_REG_NOTBOL : 0));
 		if (match < 0) {
@@ -5524,54 +5615,66 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 		}
 		Tcl_RegExpGetInfo(regexp, &info);
 
-		/* 
-		 * If we don't have a match, or if we do, but it
-		 * extends to the end of the line, we must try to
-		 * add more lines to get a full greedy match.
+		/*
+		 * If we don't have a match, or if we do, but it extends to
+		 * the end of the line, we must try to add more lines to get a
+		 * full greedy match.
 		 */
-		if (!match 
-		    || ((info.extendStart == info.matches[0].start) 
-			&& (info.matches[0].end == (lastOffset - firstOffset)))) {
+
+		if (!match ||
+			((info.extendStart == info.matches[0].start)
+			&& (info.matches[0].end == lastOffset-firstOffset))) {
 		    int extraLines = 0;
 		    int prevFullLine;
-		    /* 
-		     * If we find a match that overlaps more than one
-		     * line, we will use this value to determine the
-		     * first allowed starting offset for the following
-		     * search (to avoid overlapping results).
+
+		    /*
+		     * If we find a match that overlaps more than one line, we
+		     * will use this value to determine the first allowed
+		     * starting offset for the following search (to avoid
+		     * overlapping results).
 		     */
+
 		    int lastTotal = lastOffset;
-		    
+
 		    if ((lastBackwardsLineMatch != -1)
-			&& (lastBackwardsLineMatch == (lineNum + 1))) {
+			    && (lastBackwardsLineMatch == (lineNum + 1))) {
 			lastNonOverlap = lastTotal;
 		    }
 
 		    if (info.extendStart < 0) {
-			/* No multi-line match is possible */
+			/*
+			 * No multi-line match is possible.
+			 */
+
 			break;
 		    }
 
 		    /*
-		     * We may be able to match if given more text.
-		     * The following 'while' block handles multi-line
-		     * regexp searches.
+		     * We may be able to match if given more text. The
+		     * following 'while' block handles multi-line regexp
+		     * searches.
 		     */
+
 		    while (1) {
 			prevFullLine = lastTotal;
+
 			/*
 			 * Move firstOffset to first possible start
 			 */
-			if (!match) firstOffset += info.extendStart;
+
+			if (!match) {
+			    firstOffset += info.extendStart;
+			}
 			if (firstOffset >= lastOffset) {
 			    /*
-			     * We're being told that the only possible
-			     * new match is starting after the end of
-			     * the line. But, that is the next line which
-			     * we will handle when we look at that line.
+			     * We're being told that the only possible new
+			     * match is starting after the end of the line.
+			     * But, that is the next line which we will handle
+			     * when we look at that line.
 			     */
+
 			    if (!match && !searchSpecPtr->backwards
-			      && (firstOffset == 0)) {
+				    && (firstOffset == 0)) {
 				extraLinesSearched = extraLines;
 			    }
 			    break;
@@ -5580,128 +5683,145 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 			if (lineNum + extraLines >= searchSpecPtr->numLines) {
 			    break;
 			}
+
 			/*
-			 * Add next line, provided we haven't already done so
+			 * Add next line, provided we haven't already done so.
 			 */
+
 			if (extraLines > maxExtraLines) {
 			    if ((*searchSpecPtr->addLineProc)(lineNum
 				    + extraLines, searchSpecPtr, theLine,
 				    &lastTotal, &extraLines) == NULL) {
 				/*
-				 * There are no more acceptable lines, so
-				 * we can say we have searched all of these
+				 * There are no more acceptable lines, so we
+				 * can say we have searched all of these.
 				 */
+
 				if (!match && !searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
 				    extraLinesSearched = extraLines;
 				}
 				break;
 			    }
+
 			    maxExtraLines = extraLines;
 			    if ((lastBackwardsLineMatch != -1)
-				&& (lastBackwardsLineMatch 
+				    && (lastBackwardsLineMatch
 				    == (lineNum + extraLines + 1))) {
 				lastNonOverlap = lastTotal;
 			    }
 			}
 
 			match = Tcl_RegExpExecObj(interp, regexp, theLine,
-				  firstOffset, 1,
-				  ((firstOffset > 0) ? TCL_REG_NOTBOL : 0));
+				firstOffset, 1,
+				((firstOffset > 0) ? TCL_REG_NOTBOL : 0));
 			if (match < 0) {
 			    code = TCL_ERROR;
 			    goto searchDone;
 			}
 			Tcl_RegExpGetInfo(regexp, &info);
 
-			/* 
+			/*
 			 * Unfortunately there are bugs in Tcl's regexp
-			 * library, which tells us that info.extendStart
-			 * is zero when it should not be (should be -1),
-			 * which makes our task a bit more complicated
-			 * here.  We check if there was a match, and the
-			 * end of the match leaves an entire extra line
-			 * unmatched, then we stop searching.  Clearly it
-			 * still might sometimes be possible to add more
-			 * text and match again, but Tcl's regexp library
-			 * doesn't tell us that.
-			 * 
-			 * This means we often add and search one more
-			 * line than might be necessary if Tcl were able
-			 * to give us a correct value of info.extendStart
-			 * under all circumstances.
-			 */ 
-			if ((match && ((firstOffset + info.matches[0].end) 
-				       != lastTotal)
-			    && ((firstOffset + info.matches[0].end) 
-				< prevFullLine))
-			    || info.extendStart < 0) {
+			 * library, which tells us that info.extendStart is
+			 * zero when it should not be (should be -1), which
+			 * makes our task a bit more complicated here. We
+			 * check if there was a match, and the end of the
+			 * match leaves an entire extra line unmatched, then
+			 * we stop searching. Clearly it still might sometimes
+			 * be possible to add more text and match again, but
+			 * Tcl's regexp library doesn't tell us that.
+			 *
+			 * This means we often add and search one more line
+			 * than might be necessary if Tcl were able to give us
+			 * a correct value of info.extendStart under all
+			 * circumstances.
+			 */
+
+			if ((match &&
+				firstOffset+info.matches[0].end != lastTotal &&
+				firstOffset+info.matches[0].end < prevFullLine)
+				|| info.extendStart < 0) {
 			    break;
 			}
+
 			/*
-			 * If there is a match, but that match starts
-			 * after the end of the first line, then we'll
-			 * handle that next time around, when we're
-			 * actually looking at that line.
+			 * If there is a match, but that match starts after
+			 * the end of the first line, then we'll handle that
+			 * next time around, when we're actually looking at
+			 * that line.
 			 */
+
 			if (match && (info.matches[0].start >= lastOffset)) {
 			    break;
 			}
-			if (match && ((firstOffset + info.matches[0].end) 
-				      >= prevFullLine)) {
+			if (match && ((firstOffset + info.matches[0].end)
+				>= prevFullLine)) {
 			    extraLinesSearched = extraLines - 1;
 			    lastFullLine = prevFullLine;
 			}
+
 			/*
-			 * The prefix matches, so keep looking
+			 * The prefix matches, so keep looking.
 			 */
+
 			extraLines++;
 		    }
+
 		    /*
 		     * If we reach here with 'match == 1', we've found a
 		     * multi-line match, which we will record in the code
-		     * which follows directly else we started a
-		     * multi-line match but didn't finish it off, so we
-		     * go to the next line.
+		     * which follows directly else we started a multi-line
+		     * match but didn't finish it off, so we go to the next
+		     * line.
 		     */
+
 		    if (!match) {
-			/* 
+			/*
 			 * Here is where we could perform an optimisation,
-			 * since we have already retrieved the contents of
-			 * the next line (perhaps many more), so we shouldn't
-			 * really throw it all away and start again.  This
+			 * since we have already retrieved the contents of the
+			 * next line (perhaps many more), so we shouldn't
+			 * really throw it all away and start again. This
 			 * could be particularly important for complex regexp
 			 * searches.
-			 * 
+			 *
 			 * This 'break' will take us to just before the
 			 * 'nextLine:' below.
 			 */
+
 			break;
 		    }
 
 		    if (lastBackwardsLineMatch != -1) {
-			if ((lineNum + linesSearched + extraLinesSearched) 
-			    == lastBackwardsLineMatch) {
-			    /* Possible overlap or inclusion */
-			    int thisOffset = firstOffset + info.matches[0].end 
-				- info.matches[0].start;
-				
+			if ((lineNum + linesSearched + extraLinesSearched)
+				== lastBackwardsLineMatch) {
+			    /*
+			     * Possible overlap or inclusion.
+			     */
+
+			    int thisOffset = firstOffset + info.matches[0].end
+				    - info.matches[0].start;
+
 			    if (lastNonOverlap != -1) {
-			        /* Possible overlap or enclosure */
-				if ((thisOffset - lastNonOverlap) 
-				    >= (lastBackwardsMatchOffset 
-					+ matchLength)) {
-				    /* 
+				/*
+				 * Possible overlap or enclosure.
+				 */
+
+				if (thisOffset-lastNonOverlap >=
+					lastBackwardsMatchOffset+matchLength) {
+				    /*
 				     * Totally encloses previous match, so
-				     * forget the previous match 
+				     * forget the previous match.
 				     */
+
 				    lastBackwardsLineMatch = -1;
-				} else if ((thisOffset - lastNonOverlap) 
-					   > lastBackwardsMatchOffset) {
-				    /* 
-				     * Overlap.  Previous match is ok, and
-				     * the current match is only ok if
-				     * we are searching with -overlap. 
+				} else if ((thisOffset - lastNonOverlap)
+					> lastBackwardsMatchOffset) {
+				    /*
+				     * Overlap. Previous match is ok, and the
+				     * current match is only ok if we are
+				     * searching with -overlap.
 				     */
+
 				    if (searchSpecPtr->overlap) {
 					goto recordBackwardsMatch;
 				    } else {
@@ -5709,83 +5829,95 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 					break;
 				    }
 				} else {
-				    /* 
-				     * No overlap, although the same
-				     * line was reached.
+				    /*
+				     * No overlap, although the same line was
+				     * reached.
 				     */
+
 				    goto recordBackwardsMatch;
 				}
 			    } else {
-				/* No overlap */
+				/*
+				 * No overlap.
+				 */
+
 				goto recordBackwardsMatch;
 			    }
-			} else if (lineNum + linesSearched + extraLinesSearched 
-				   < lastBackwardsLineMatch) {
-			    /* No overlap */
+			} else if (lineNum+linesSearched+extraLinesSearched
+				< lastBackwardsLineMatch) {
+			    /*
+			     * No overlap.
+			     */
+
 			    goto recordBackwardsMatch;
 			} else {
-			    /* Totally enclosed */
+			    /*
+			     * Totally enclosed.
+			     */
+
 			    lastBackwardsLineMatch = -1;
 			}
 		    }
 
 		} else {
-		    /* Matched in a single line */
+		    /*
+		     * Matched in a single line.
+		     */
+
 		    if (lastBackwardsLineMatch != -1) {
-		      recordBackwardsMatch:
-			(*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lastBackwardsLineMatch, 
-				searchSpecPtr, NULL, NULL, 
-				lastBackwardsMatchOffset, matchLength);
+		    recordBackwardsMatch:
+			(*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(
+				lastBackwardsLineMatch, searchSpecPtr, NULL,
+				NULL, lastBackwardsMatchOffset, matchLength);
 			lastBackwardsLineMatch = -1;
 			if (!searchSpecPtr->all) {
 			    goto searchDone;
 			}
 		    }
 		}
-		
+
 		firstOffset += info.matches[0].start;
 		if (firstOffset >= lastOffset) {
 		    break;
 		}
 
 		/*
-		 * Update our local variables with the match, if we
-		 * haven't yet found anything, or if we're doing '-all'
-		 * or '-backwards' _and_ this match isn't fully enclosed
-		 * in the previous match.
+		 * Update our local variables with the match, if we haven't
+		 * yet found anything, or if we're doing '-all' or
+		 * '-backwards' _and_ this match isn't fully enclosed in the
+		 * previous match.
 		 */
-		
-		if (matchOffset == -1 || 
-		    ((searchSpecPtr->all || searchSpecPtr->backwards) 
-		     && ((firstOffset < matchOffset) 
-			 || ((firstOffset + info.matches[0].end 
-			      - info.matches[0].start) 
-			     > (matchOffset + matchLength))
-			 )
-		     )
-		    ) {
+
+		if (matchOffset == -1 ||
+			((searchSpecPtr->all || searchSpecPtr->backwards)
+			&& ((firstOffset < matchOffset)
+			|| ((firstOffset + info.matches[0].end
+				- info.matches[0].start)
+				> (matchOffset + matchLength))))) {
 
 		    matchOffset = firstOffset;
 		    matchLength = info.matches[0].end - info.matches[0].start;
 
 		    if (searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
-			/* 
-			 * To get backwards searches in the correct
-			 * order, we must store them away here.
+			/*
+			 * To get backwards searches in the correct order, we
+			 * must store them away here.
 			 */
+
 			if (matches == matchNum) {
-			    /* 
-			     * We've run out of space in our normal
-			     * store, so we must allocate space for
-			     * these backwards matches on the heap.
+			    /*
+			     * We've run out of space in our normal store, so
+			     * we must allocate space for these backwards
+			     * matches on the heap.
 			     */
-			    int *newArray;
-			    newArray = (int*) ckalloc(4*matchNum *sizeof(int));
+
+			    int *newArray = (int *)
+				    ckalloc(4 * matchNum * sizeof(int));
 			    memcpy(newArray, storeMatch, matchNum*sizeof(int));
-			    memcpy(newArray + 2*matchNum, 
-				   storeLength, matchNum*sizeof(int));
+			    memcpy(newArray + 2*matchNum, storeLength,
+				    matchNum * sizeof(int));
 			    if (storeMatch != smArray) {
-			        ckfree((char*)storeMatch);
+				ckfree((char *) storeMatch);
 			    }
 			    matchNum *= 2;
 			    storeMatch = newArray;
@@ -5795,93 +5927,105 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 			storeLength[matches] = matchLength;
 			matches++;
 		    } else {
-			/* 
-			 * Now actually record the match, but only if we
-			 * are doing an '-all' search.
+			/*
+			 * Now actually record the match, but only if we are
+			 * doing an '-all' search.
 			 */
+
 			if (searchSpecPtr->all &&
-			  !(*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lineNum, 
-			  searchSpecPtr, lineInfo, theLine, matchOffset, 
-							    matchLength)) {
+				!(*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lineNum,
+				searchSpecPtr, lineInfo, theLine, matchOffset,
+				matchLength)) {
 			    /*
 			     * We reached the end of the search
 			     */
+
 			    goto searchDone;
 			}
 		    }
+
 		    /*
-		     * For forward matches, unless we allow overlaps, we
-		     * move this on by the length of the current match so
-		     * that we explicitly disallow overlapping matches.
+		     * For forward matches, unless we allow overlaps, we move
+		     * this on by the length of the current match so that we
+		     * explicitly disallow overlapping matches.
 		     */
-		    if (matchLength > 0 && !searchSpecPtr->overlap 
-			&& !searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
+
+		    if (matchLength > 0 && !searchSpecPtr->overlap
+			    && !searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
 			firstOffset += matchLength;
 			if (firstOffset >= lastOffset) {
-			    /* 
+			    /*
 			     * Now, we have to be careful not to find
 			     * overlapping matches either on the same or
-			     * following lines.  Assume that if we did find
-			     * something, it goes until the last extra line
-			     * we added.
-			     * 
-			     * We can break out of the loop, since we know
-			     * no more will be found.
+			     * following lines. Assume that if we did find
+			     * something, it goes until the last extra line we
+			     * added.
+			     *
+			     * We can break out of the loop, since we know no
+			     * more will be found.
 			     */
+
 			    alreadySearchOffset = firstOffset - lastFullLine;
 			    break;
 			}
-			/* We'll add this on again just below */
+
+			/*
+			 * We'll add this on again just below.
+			 */
+
 			firstOffset --;
 		    }
 		}
 
 		/*
-		 * Move the starting point on, in case we are doing
-		 * repeated or backwards searches (for the latter, we
-		 * actually do repeated forward searches).
+		 * Move the starting point on, in case we are doing repeated
+		 * or backwards searches (for the latter, we actually do
+		 * repeated forward searches).
 		 */
+
 		firstOffset++;
 	    } while (searchSpecPtr->backwards || searchSpecPtr->all);
 
 	    if (matches > 0) {
-		/* 
+		/*
 		 * Now we have all the matches in our array, but not stored
 		 * with 'foundMatchProc' yet.
 		 */
+
 		matches--;
 		matchOffset = storeMatch[matches];
 		matchLength = storeLength[matches];
 		while (--matches >= 0) {
 		    if (lineNum == searchSpecPtr->stopLine) {
-			/* 
-			 * It appears as if a condition like
-			 * 'if (storeMatch[matches] 
-			 *      < searchSpecPtr->stopOffset) break;'
-			 *      
-			 * might be needed here, but no test case
-			 * has been found which would exercise such
-			 * a problem.
+			/*
+			 * It appears as if a condition like:
+			 *
+			 * if (storeMatch[matches]<searchSpecPtr->stopOffset)
+			 *	break;
+			 *
+			 * might be needed here, but no test case has been
+			 * found which would exercise such a problem.
 			 */
 		    }
-		    if (storeMatch[matches] + storeLength[matches] 
-		      >= matchOffset + matchLength) {
-			/* 
-			 * The new match totally encloses the previous
-			 * one, so we overwrite the previous one.
+		    if (storeMatch[matches] + storeLength[matches]
+			    >= matchOffset + matchLength) {
+			/*
+			 * The new match totally encloses the previous one, so
+			 * we overwrite the previous one.
 			 */
+
 			matchOffset = storeMatch[matches];
 			matchLength = storeLength[matches];
 			continue;
 		    }
 		    if (!searchSpecPtr->overlap) {
-			if (storeMatch[matches] + storeLength[matches] 
-			  > matchOffset) {
+			if (storeMatch[matches] + storeLength[matches]
+				> matchOffset) {
 			    continue;
 			}
 		    }
 		    (*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lineNum, searchSpecPtr,
-		                lineInfo, theLine, matchOffset, matchLength);
+			    lineInfo, theLine, matchOffset, matchLength);
 		    if (!searchSpecPtr->all) {
 			goto searchDone;
 		    }
@@ -5889,13 +6033,14 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 		    matchLength = storeLength[matches];
 		}
 		if (searchSpecPtr->all && matches > 0) {
-		    /* 
-		     * We only need to do this for the '-all' case,
-		     * because just below we will call the
-		     * foundMatchProc for the non-all case
+		    /*
+		     * We only need to do this for the '-all' case, because
+		     * just below we will call the foundMatchProc for the
+		     * non-all case.
 		     */
+
 		    (*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lineNum, searchSpecPtr,
-		               lineInfo, theLine, matchOffset, matchLength);
+			    lineInfo, theLine, matchOffset, matchLength);
 		} else {
 		    lastBackwardsLineMatch = lineNum;
 		    lastBackwardsMatchOffset = matchOffset;
@@ -5904,18 +6049,17 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If the 'all' flag is set, we will already have stored all
-	 * matches, so we just proceed to the next line.
+	 * If the 'all' flag is set, we will already have stored all matches,
+	 * so we just proceed to the next line.
 	 *
-	 * If not, and there is a match we need to store that information
-	 * and we are done.
+	 * If not, and there is a match we need to store that information and
+	 * we are done.
 	 */
 
-	if ((lastBackwardsLineMatch == -1) 
-	  && (matchOffset >= 0) 
-	  && !searchSpecPtr->all) {
-	    (*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lineNum, searchSpecPtr,
-	                  lineInfo, theLine, matchOffset, matchLength);
+	if ((lastBackwardsLineMatch == -1) && (matchOffset >= 0)
+		&& !searchSpecPtr->all) {
+	    (*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lineNum, searchSpecPtr, lineInfo,
+		    theLine, matchOffset, matchLength);
 	    goto searchDone;
 	}
 
@@ -5923,13 +6067,14 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 	 * Go to the next (or previous) line;
 	 */
 
-      nextLine:
-        linesSearched += extraLinesSearched;
-	
+    nextLine:
+	linesSearched += extraLinesSearched;
+
 	while (linesSearched-- > 0) {
 	    /*
 	     * If we have just completed the 'stopLine', we are done
 	     */
+
 	    if (lineNum == searchSpecPtr->stopLine) {
 		goto searchDone;
 	    }
@@ -5937,12 +6082,12 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 	    if (searchSpecPtr->backwards) {
 		lineNum--;
 
-		if (lastBackwardsLineMatch != -1 
-		  && ((lineNum < 0) || (lineNum + 2 < lastBackwardsLineMatch))) {
-		    (*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lastBackwardsLineMatch, 
-						     searchSpecPtr, NULL, NULL, 
-						     lastBackwardsMatchOffset, 
-						     matchLength);
+		if (lastBackwardsLineMatch != -1
+			&& ((lineNum < 0)
+			|| (lineNum + 2 < lastBackwardsLineMatch))) {
+		    (*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lastBackwardsLineMatch,
+			    searchSpecPtr, NULL, NULL,
+			    lastBackwardsMatchOffset, matchLength);
 		    lastBackwardsLineMatch = -1;
 		    if (!searchSpecPtr->all) {
 			goto searchDone;
@@ -5953,15 +6098,15 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 		    lineNum = searchSpecPtr->numLines-1;
 		}
 		if (!searchSpecPtr->exact) {
-		    /* 
-		     * The 'exact' search loops above are designed to
-		     * give us an accurate picture of the number of lines
-		     * which we can skip here.  For 'regexp' searches, on
-		     * the other hand, which can match potentially variable
-		     * lengths, we cannot skip multiple lines when searching
-		     * backwards.  Therefore we only allow one line to be
-		     * skipped here.
+		    /*
+		     * The 'exact' search loops above are designed to give us
+		     * an accurate picture of the number of lines which we can
+		     * skip here. For 'regexp' searches, on the other hand,
+		     * which can match potentially variable lengths, we cannot
+		     * skip multiple lines when searching backwards. Therefore
+		     * we only allow one line to be skipped here.
 		     */
+
 		    break;
 		}
 	    } else {
@@ -5971,11 +6116,12 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 		}
 	    }
 	    if (lineNum == searchSpecPtr->startLine && linesSearched > 0) {
-		/* 
-		 * We've just searched all the way round and have
-		 * gone right through the start line without finding
-		 * anything in the last attempt.
+		/*
+		 * We've just searched all the way round and have gone right
+		 * through the start line without finding anything in the last
+		 * attempt.
 		 */
+
 		break;
 	    }
 	}
@@ -5986,18 +6132,20 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
 
     if (lastBackwardsLineMatch != -1) {
 	(*searchSpecPtr->foundMatchProc)(lastBackwardsLineMatch, searchSpecPtr,
-		      NULL, NULL, lastBackwardsMatchOffset, matchLength);
+		NULL, NULL, lastBackwardsMatchOffset, matchLength);
     }
-    
+
     /*
      * Free up the cached line and pattern
      */
+
     Tcl_DecrRefCount(theLine);
     Tcl_DecrRefCount(patObj);
 
     /*
      * Free up any extra space we allocated
      */
+
     if (storeMatch != smArray) {
 	ckfree((char*)storeMatch);
     }
@@ -6010,9 +6158,8 @@ SearchCore(interp, searchSpecPtr, patObj)
  *
  * GetLineStartEnd -
  *
- *	Converts an internal TkTextLine ptr into a Tcl string obj
- *	containing the line number.  (Handler for the 'line'
- *	configuration option type)
+ *	Converts an internal TkTextLine ptr into a Tcl string obj containing
+ *	the line number. (Handler for the 'line' configuration option type.)
  *
  * Results:
  *	Tcl_Obj containing the string representation of the line value.
@@ -6045,16 +6192,15 @@ GetLineStartEnd(clientData, tkwin, recordPtr, internalOffset)
  *
  * SetLineStartEnd --
  *
- *	Converts a Tcl_Obj representing a widget's (start or end) line
- *	into a TkTextLine* value.  (Handler for the 'line' configuration
- *	option type)
+ *	Converts a Tcl_Obj representing a widget's (start or end) line into a
+ *	TkTextLine* value. (Handler for the 'line' configuration option type.)
  *
  * Results:
  *	Standard Tcl result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	May store the TkTextLine* value into the internal representation
- *	pointer.  May change the pointer to the Tcl_Obj to NULL to indicate
+ *	pointer. May change the pointer to the Tcl_Obj to NULL to indicate
  *	that the specified string was empty and that is acceptable.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -6067,28 +6213,29 @@ SetLineStartEnd(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, recordPtr, internalOffset,
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interp; may be used for errors. */
     Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which option is being set. */
     Tcl_Obj **value;		/* Pointer to the pointer to the value object.
-				 * We use a pointer to the pointer because
-				 * we may need to return a value (NULL). */
+				 * We use a pointer to the pointer because we
+				 * may need to return a value (NULL). */
     char *recordPtr;		/* Pointer to storage for the widget record. */
     int internalOffset;		/* Offset within *recordPtr at which the
-				   internal value is to be stored. */
+				 * internal value is to be stored. */
     char *oldInternalPtr;	/* Pointer to storage for the old value. */
     int flags;			/* Flags for the option, set Tk_SetOptions. */
 {
     TkTextLine *linePtr = NULL;
     char *internalPtr;
     TkText *textPtr = (TkText*)recordPtr;
-    
+
     if (internalOffset >= 0) {
 	internalPtr = recordPtr + internalOffset;
     } else {
 	internalPtr = NULL;
     }
-    
+
     if (flags & TK_OPTION_NULL_OK && ObjectIsEmpty(*value)) {
 	*value = NULL;
     } else {
 	int line;
+
 	if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, *value, &line) != TCL_OK) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
@@ -6100,15 +6247,15 @@ SetLineStartEnd(clientData, interp, tkwin, value, recordPtr, internalOffset,
 	*((TkTextLine **) internalPtr) = linePtr;
     }
     return TCL_OK;
-}		
+}
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * RestoreLineStartEnd --
  *
- *	Restore a line option value from a saved value.  (Handler for
- *	the 'line' configuration option type)
+ *	Restore a line option value from a saved value. (Handler for the
+ *	'line' configuration option type.)
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -6134,12 +6281,11 @@ RestoreLineStartEnd(clientData, tkwin, internalPtr, oldInternalPtr)
  *
  * ObjectIsEmpty --
  *
- *	This procedure tests whether the string value of an object is
- *	empty.
+ *	This function tests whether the string value of an object is empty.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1 if the string value of objPtr has length
- *	zero, and 0 otherwise.
+ *	The return value is 1 if the string value of objPtr has length zero,
+ *	and 0 otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	May cause object shimmering, since this function can force a
@@ -6150,7 +6296,7 @@ RestoreLineStartEnd(clientData, tkwin, internalPtr, oldInternalPtr)
 
 static int
 ObjectIsEmpty(objPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object to test.  May be NULL. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object to test. May be NULL. */
 {
     int length;
 
@@ -6163,3 +6309,11 @@ ObjectIsEmpty(objPtr)
     Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objPtr, &length);
     return (length == 0);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkTextImage.c b/generic/tkTextImage.c
index fbbec00..fa95e3c 100644
--- a/generic/tkTextImage.c
+++ b/generic/tkTextImage.c
@@ -1,16 +1,15 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkImage.c --
  *
- *	This file contains code that allows images to be
- *	nested inside text widgets.  It also implements the "image"
- *	widget command for texts.
+ *	This file contains code that allows images to be nested inside text
+ *	widgets. It also implements the "image" widget command for texts.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkTextImage.c,v 1.14 2004/09/10 12:13:41 vincentdarley Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkTextImage.c,v 1.15 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "tk.h"
@@ -21,52 +20,52 @@
  * Macro that determines the size of an embedded image segment:
  */
 
-#define EI_SEG_SIZE ((unsigned) (Tk_Offset(TkTextSegment, body) \
-	+ sizeof(TkTextEmbImage)))
+#define EI_SEG_SIZE \
+	((unsigned) (Tk_Offset(TkTextSegment, body) + sizeof(TkTextEmbImage)))
 
 /*
- * Prototypes for procedures defined in this file:
+ * Prototypes for functions defined in this file:
  */
 
-static TkTextSegment *	EmbImageCleanupProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr));
-static void		EmbImageCheckProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr));
-static void		EmbImageBboxProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr,
-			    int index, int y, int lineHeight, int baseline,
-			    int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr,
-			    int *heightPtr));
-static int		EmbImageConfigure _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextSegment *eiPtr, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static int		EmbImageDeleteProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkTextSegment *segPtr,
-			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int treeGone));
-static void		EmbImageDisplayProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
+static TkTextSegment *	EmbImageCleanupProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+static void		EmbImageCheckProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr);
+static void		EmbImageBboxProc(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int index, int y,
+			    int lineHeight, int baseline, int *xPtr, int *yPtr,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+static int		EmbImageConfigure(TkText *textPtr,
+			    TkTextSegment *eiPtr, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static int		EmbImageDeleteProc(TkTextSegment *segPtr,
+			    TkTextLine *linePtr, int treeGone);
+static void		EmbImageDisplayProc(TkText *textPtr,
 			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr, int x, int y,
 			    int lineHeight, int baseline, Display *display,
-			    Drawable dst, int screenY));
-static int		EmbImageLayoutProc _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
+			    Drawable dst, int screenY);
+static int		EmbImageLayoutProc(TkText *textPtr,
 			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, TkTextSegment *segPtr,
 			    int offset, int maxX, int maxChars,
 			    int noCharsYet, TkWrapMode wrapMode,
-			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr));
-static void		EmbImageProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    int x, int y, int width, int height,
-			    int imageWidth, int imageHeight));
+			    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr);
+static void		EmbImageProc(ClientData clientData, int x, int y,
+			    int width, int height, int imageWidth,
+			    int imageHeight);
 
 /*
  * The following structure declares the "embedded image" segment type.
  */
 
 static Tk_SegType tkTextEmbImageType = {
-    "image",					/* name */
-    0,						/* leftGravity */
-    (Tk_SegSplitProc *) NULL,			/* splitProc */
-    EmbImageDeleteProc,				/* deleteProc */
-    EmbImageCleanupProc,			/* cleanupProc */
-    (Tk_SegLineChangeProc *) NULL,		/* lineChangeProc */
-    EmbImageLayoutProc,				/* layoutProc */
-    EmbImageCheckProc				/* checkProc */
+    "image",			/* name */
+    0,				/* leftGravity */
+    NULL,			/* splitProc */
+    EmbImageDeleteProc,		/* deleteProc */
+    EmbImageCleanupProc,	/* cleanupProc */
+    NULL,			/* lineChangeProc */
+    EmbImageLayoutProc,		/* layoutProc */
+    EmbImageCheckProc		/* checkProc */
 };
 
 /*
@@ -77,7 +76,7 @@ static char *alignStrings[] = {
     "baseline", "bottom", "center", "top", (char *) NULL
 };
 
-typedef enum {	
+typedef enum {
     ALIGN_BASELINE, ALIGN_BOTTOM, ALIGN_CENTER, ALIGN_TOP
 } alignMode;
 
@@ -87,13 +86,13 @@ typedef enum {
 
 static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, "-align", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	"center", -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbImage, align), 
+	"center", -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbImage, align),
 	0, (ClientData) alignStrings, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-padx", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	"0", -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbImage, padX), 
+	"0", -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbImage, padX),
 	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-pady", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	"0", -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbImage, padY), 
+	"0", -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbImage, padY),
 	0, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-image", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
 	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextEmbImage, imageString),
@@ -110,9 +109,8 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec optionSpecs[] = {
  *
  * TkTextImageCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "image" widget command
- *	for text widgets.  See the user documentation for details
- *	on what it does.
+ *	This function implements the "image" widget command for text widgets.
+ *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result or error.
@@ -141,7 +139,7 @@ TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     enum opts {
 	CMD_CGET, CMD_CONF, CMD_CREATE, CMD_NAMES
     };
-    
+
     if (objc < 3) {
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -152,7 +150,8 @@ TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
     }
     switch ((enum opts) idx) {
     case CMD_CGET: {
-        Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+	Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+
 	if (objc != 5) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index option");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -163,11 +162,11 @@ TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	eiPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&index, (int *) NULL);
 	if (eiPtr->typePtr != &tkTextEmbImageType) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no embedded image at index \"",
-			     Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), "\"", (char *) NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) &eiPtr->body.ei,
-		  eiPtr->body.ei.optionTable, objv[4], textPtr->tkwin);
+		eiPtr->body.ei.optionTable, objv[4], textPtr->tkwin);
 	if (objPtr == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	} else {
@@ -175,7 +174,7 @@ TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	    return TCL_OK;
 	}
     }
-    case CMD_CONF: {
+    case CMD_CONF:
 	if (objc < 4) {
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "index ?option value ...?");
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -186,14 +185,13 @@ TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	eiPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(&index, (int *) NULL);
 	if (eiPtr->typePtr != &tkTextEmbImageType) {
 	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no embedded image at index \"",
-			     Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), "\"", (char *) NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (objc <= 5) {
-	    Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) &eiPtr->body.ei,
-		    eiPtr->body.ei.optionTable,
-		    (objc == 5) ? objv[4] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-				      textPtr->tkwin);
+	    Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp,
+		    (char *) &eiPtr->body.ei, eiPtr->body.ei.optionTable,
+		    (objc == 5) ? objv[4] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL, textPtr->tkwin);
 	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    } else {
@@ -202,23 +200,23 @@ TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	    }
 	} else {
 	    TkTextChanged(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, &index, &index);
-	    /* 
-	     * It's probably not true that all window configuration
-	     * can change the line height, so we could be more
-	     * efficient here and only call this when necessary.
+
+	    /*
+	     * It's probably not true that all window configuration can change
+	     * the line height, so we could be more efficient here and only
+	     * call this when necessary.
 	     */
-	    TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, 
-					index.linePtr, 0,
-					TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_ONLY);
+
+	    TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+		    index.linePtr, 0, TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_ONLY);
 	    return EmbImageConfigure(textPtr, eiPtr, objc-4, objv+4);
 	}
-    }
     case CMD_CREATE: {
 	int lineIndex;
 
 	/*
-	 * Add a new image.  Find where to put the new image, and
-	 * mark that position for redisplay.
+	 * Add a new image. Find where to put the new image, and mark that
+	 * position for redisplay.
 	 */
 
 	if (objc < 4) {
@@ -232,12 +230,13 @@ TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	/*
 	 * Don't allow insertions on the last (dummy) line of the text.
 	 */
-    
+
 	lineIndex = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, index.linePtr);
-	if (lineIndex == TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr)) {
+	if (lineIndex == TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+		textPtr)) {
 	    lineIndex--;
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 
-				lineIndex, 1000000, &index);
+	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		    lineIndex, 1000000, &index);
 	}
 
 	/*
@@ -259,8 +258,8 @@ TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	eiPtr->body.ei.optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(interp, optionSpecs);
 
 	/*
-	 * Link the segment into the text widget, then configure it (delete
-	 * it again if the configuration fails).
+	 * Link the segment into the text widget, then configure it (delete it
+	 * again if the configuration fails).
 	 */
 
 	TkTextChanged(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, &index, &index);
@@ -272,9 +271,8 @@ TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	    TkBTreeDeleteChars(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, &index, &index2);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, 
-				    index.linePtr, 0,
-				    TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_ONLY);
+	TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+		index.linePtr, 0, TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_ONLY);
 	return TCL_OK;
     }
     case CMD_NAMES: {
@@ -285,8 +283,8 @@ TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->imageTable, &search);
-		hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+	for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->imageTable,
+		&search); hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
 	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp,
 		    Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->markTable, hPtr));
 	}
@@ -303,24 +301,24 @@ TkTextImageCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * EmbImageConfigure --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to handle configuration options
- *	for an embedded image, using an objc/objv list.
+ *	This function is called to handle configuration options for an
+ *	embedded image, using an objc/objv list.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl result.  If TCL_ERROR is
- *	returned, then the interp's result contains an error message..
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl result. If TCL_ERROR is returned,
+ *	then the interp's result contains an error message..
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information for the embedded image changes,
- *	such as alignment, or name of the image.
+ *	Configuration information for the embedded image changes, such as
+ *	alignment, or name of the image.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static int
 EmbImageConfigure(textPtr, eiPtr, objc, objv)
-    TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget that
-				 * contains embedded image. */
+    TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget that contains
+				 * embedded image. */
     TkTextSegment *eiPtr;	/* Embedded image to be configured. */
     int objc;			/* Number of strings in objv. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Array of strings describing configuration
@@ -335,24 +333,23 @@ EmbImageConfigure(textPtr, eiPtr, objc, objv)
     int count = 0;		/* The counter for picking a unique name */
     int conflict = 0;		/* True if we have a name conflict */
     unsigned int len;		/* length of image name */
-   
-    if (Tk_SetOptions(textPtr->interp, (char*)&eiPtr->body.ei, 
+
+    if (Tk_SetOptions(textPtr->interp, (char*)&eiPtr->body.ei,
 	    eiPtr->body.ei.optionTable,
 	    objc, objv, textPtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Create the image.  Save the old image around and don't free it
-     * until after the new one is allocated.  This keeps the reference
-     * count from going to zero so the image doesn't have to be recreated
-     * if it hasn't changed.
+     * Create the image. Save the old image around and don't free it until
+     * after the new one is allocated. This keeps the reference count from
+     * going to zero so the image doesn't have to be recreated if it hasn't
+     * changed.
      */
 
     if (eiPtr->body.ei.imageString != NULL) {
-	image = Tk_GetImage(textPtr->interp, textPtr->tkwin, 
-			    eiPtr->body.ei.imageString, EmbImageProc, 
-			    (ClientData) eiPtr);
+	image = Tk_GetImage(textPtr->interp, textPtr->tkwin,
+		eiPtr->body.ei.imageString, EmbImageProc, (ClientData) eiPtr);
 	if (image == NULL) {
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
@@ -368,10 +365,10 @@ EmbImageConfigure(textPtr, eiPtr, objc, objv)
     	return TCL_OK;
     }
 
-    /* 
-     * Find a unique name for this image.  Use imageName (or imageString)
-     * if available, otherwise tack on a #nn and use it.  If a name is
-     * already associated with this image, delete the name.
+    /*
+     * Find a unique name for this image. Use imageName (or imageString) if
+     * available, otherwise tack on a #nn and use it. If a name is already
+     * associated with this image, delete the name.
      */
 
     name = eiPtr->body.ei.imageName;
@@ -379,16 +376,17 @@ EmbImageConfigure(textPtr, eiPtr, objc, objv)
     	name = eiPtr->body.ei.imageString;
     }
     if (name == NULL) {
-        Tcl_AppendResult(textPtr->interp,"Either a \"-name\" ",
+	Tcl_AppendResult(textPtr->interp,"Either a \"-name\" ",
 		"or a \"-image\" argument must be provided ",
-		"to the \"image create\" subcommand.",
-		(char *) NULL);
+		"to the \"image create\" subcommand.", (char *) NULL);
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     len = strlen(name);
-    for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->imageTable, &search);
-	    hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
-	char *haveName = Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->imageTable, hPtr);
+    for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->imageTable,
+	    &search); hPtr != NULL; hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+	char *haveName =
+		Tcl_GetHashKey(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->imageTable, hPtr);
+
 	if (strncmp(name, haveName, len) == 0) {
 	    new = 0;
 	    sscanf(haveName+len, "#%d", &new);
@@ -406,11 +404,12 @@ EmbImageConfigure(textPtr, eiPtr, objc, objv)
 
     if (conflict) {
     	char buf[4 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
+
 	sprintf(buf, "#%d", count+1);
 	Tcl_DStringAppend(&newName, buf, -1);
     }
     name = Tcl_DStringValue(&newName);
-    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->imageTable, name, &new);
+    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->imageTable, name,&new);
     Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, eiPtr);
     Tcl_AppendResult(textPtr->interp, name , (char *) NULL);
     eiPtr->body.ei.name = ckalloc((unsigned) Tcl_DStringLength(&newName)+1);
@@ -425,8 +424,8 @@ EmbImageConfigure(textPtr, eiPtr, objc, objv)
  *
  * EmbImageDeleteProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the text B-tree code whenever
- *	an embedded image lies in a range of characters being deleted.
+ *	This function is invoked by the text B-tree code whenever an embedded
+ *	image lies in a range of characters being deleted.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns 0 to indicate that the deletion has been accepted.
@@ -441,11 +440,11 @@ EmbImageConfigure(textPtr, eiPtr, objc, objv)
 	/* ARGSUSED */
 static int
 EmbImageDeleteProc(eiPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
-    TkTextSegment *eiPtr;		/* Segment being deleted. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line containing segment. */
-    int treeGone;			/* Non-zero means the entire tree is
-					 * being deleted, so everything must
-					 * get cleaned up. */
+    TkTextSegment *eiPtr;	/* Segment being deleted. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr;	/* Line containing segment. */
+    int treeGone;		/* Non-zero means the entire tree is being
+				 * deleted, so everything must get cleaned
+				 * up. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
 
@@ -463,12 +462,14 @@ EmbImageDeleteProc(eiPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
 	}
 	Tk_FreeImage(eiPtr->body.ei.image);
     }
-    /* 
-     * No need to supply a tkwin argument, since we have no
-     * window-specific options.
+
+    /*
+     * No need to supply a tkwin argument, since we have no window-specific
+     * options.
      */
+
     Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) &eiPtr->body.ei, eiPtr->body.ei.optionTable,
-			 NULL);
+	    NULL);
     ckfree((char *) eiPtr);
     return 0;
 }
@@ -478,9 +479,8 @@ EmbImageDeleteProc(eiPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
  *
  * EmbImageCleanupProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the B-tree code whenever a
- *	segment containing an embedded image is moved from one
- *	line to another.
+ *	This function is invoked by the B-tree code whenever a segment
+ *	containing an embedded image is moved from one line to another.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -493,8 +493,8 @@ EmbImageDeleteProc(eiPtr, linePtr, treeGone)
 
 static TkTextSegment *
 EmbImageCleanupProc(eiPtr, linePtr)
-    TkTextSegment *eiPtr;		/* Mark segment that's being moved. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line that now contains segment. */
+    TkTextSegment *eiPtr;	/* Mark segment that's being moved. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr;	/* Line that now contains segment. */
 {
     eiPtr->body.ei.linePtr = linePtr;
     return eiPtr;
@@ -505,12 +505,11 @@ EmbImageCleanupProc(eiPtr, linePtr)
  *
  * EmbImageLayoutProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is the "layoutProc" for embedded image
- *	segments.
+ *	This function is the "layoutProc" for embedded image segments.
  *
  * Results:
- *	1 is returned to indicate that the segment should be
- *	displayed.  The chunkPtr structure is filled in.
+ *	1 is returned to indicate that the segment should be displayed. The
+ *	chunkPtr structure is filled in.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None, except for filling in chunkPtr.
@@ -529,16 +528,17 @@ EmbImageLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, eiPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
 				 * indexPtr (always 0). */
     int maxX;			/* Chunk must not occupy pixels at this
 				 * position or higher. */
-    int maxChars;		/* Chunk must not include more than this
-				 * many characters. */
+    int maxChars;		/* Chunk must not include more than this many
+				 * characters. */
     int noCharsYet;		/* Non-zero means no characters have been
 				 * assigned to this line yet. */
-    TkWrapMode wrapMode;	/* Wrap mode to use for line: TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR,
-				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE, or TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD. */
+    TkWrapMode wrapMode;	/* Wrap mode to use for line:
+				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_CHAR, TEXT_WRAPMODE_NONE, or
+				 * TEXT_WRAPMODE_WORD. */
     register TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;
-				/* Structure to fill in with information
-				 * about this chunk.  The x field has already
-				 * been set by the caller. */
+				/* Structure to fill in with information about
+				 * this chunk. The x field has already been
+				 * set by the caller. */
 {
     int width, height;
 
@@ -594,29 +594,30 @@ EmbImageLayoutProc(textPtr, indexPtr, eiPtr, offset, maxX, maxChars,
  *
  * EmbImageCheckProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the B-tree code to perform
- *	consistency checks on embedded images.
+ *	This function is invoked by the B-tree code to perform consistency
+ *	checks on embedded images.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The procedure panics if it detects anything wrong with
- *	the embedded image.
+ *	The function panics if it detects anything wrong with the embedded
+ *	image.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 EmbImageCheckProc(eiPtr, linePtr)
-    TkTextSegment *eiPtr;		/* Segment to check. */
-    TkTextLine *linePtr;		/* Line containing segment. */
+    TkTextSegment *eiPtr;	/* Segment to check. */
+    TkTextLine *linePtr;	/* Line containing segment. */
 {
     if (eiPtr->nextPtr == NULL) {
 	Tcl_Panic("EmbImageCheckProc: embedded image is last segment in line");
     }
     if (eiPtr->size != 1) {
-	Tcl_Panic("EmbImageCheckProc: embedded image has size %d", eiPtr->size);
+	Tcl_Panic("EmbImageCheckProc: embedded image has size %d",
+		eiPtr->size);
     }
 }
 
@@ -625,39 +626,36 @@ EmbImageCheckProc(eiPtr, linePtr)
  *
  * EmbImageDisplayProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the text displaying code
- *	when it is time to actually draw an embedded image
- *	chunk on the screen.
+ *	This function is invoked by the text displaying code when it is time
+ *	to actually draw an embedded image chunk on the screen.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The embedded image gets moved to the correct location
- *	and drawn onto the display.
+ *	The embedded image gets moved to the correct location and drawn onto
+ *	the display.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
-EmbImageDisplayProc(textPtr, chunkPtr, x, y, lineHeight, baseline, display, 
-		    dst, screenY)
+EmbImageDisplayProc(textPtr, chunkPtr, x, y, lineHeight, baseline, display,
+	dst, screenY)
     TkText *textPtr;
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Chunk that is to be drawn. */
-    int x;				/* X-position in dst at which to
-					 * draw this chunk (differs from
-					 * the x-position in the chunk because
-					 * of scrolling). */
-    int y;				/* Top of rectangular bounding box
-					 * for line: tells where to draw this
-					 * chunk in dst (x-position is in
-					 * the chunk itself). */
-    int lineHeight;			/* Total height of line. */
-    int baseline;			/* Offset of baseline from y. */
-    Display *display;			/* Display to use for drawing. */
-    Drawable dst;			/* Pixmap or window in which to draw */
-    int screenY;			/* Y-coordinate in text window that
-					 * corresponds to y. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;	/* Chunk that is to be drawn. */
+    int x;			/* X-position in dst at which to draw this
+				 * chunk (differs from the x-position in the
+				 * chunk because of scrolling). */
+    int y;			/* Top of rectangular bounding box for line:
+				 * tells where to draw this chunk in dst
+				 * (x-position is in the chunk itself). */
+    int lineHeight;		/* Total height of line. */
+    int baseline;		/* Offset of baseline from y. */
+    Display *display;		/* Display to use for drawing. */
+    Drawable dst;		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw */
+    int screenY;		/* Y-coordinate in text window that
+				 * corresponds to y. */
 {
     TkTextSegment *eiPtr = (TkTextSegment *) chunkPtr->clientData;
     int lineX, imageX, imageY, width, height;
@@ -672,16 +670,15 @@ EmbImageDisplayProc(textPtr, chunkPtr, x, y, lineHeight, baseline, display,
     }
 
     /*
-     * Compute the image's location and size in the text widget, taking
-     * into account the align value for the image.
+     * Compute the image's location and size in the text widget, taking into
+     * account the align value for the image.
      */
 
     EmbImageBboxProc(textPtr, chunkPtr, 0, y, lineHeight, baseline, &lineX,
 	    &imageY, &width, &height);
     imageX = lineX - chunkPtr->x + x;
 
-    Tk_RedrawImage(image, 0, 0, width, height, dst,
-	    imageX, imageY);
+    Tk_RedrawImage(image, 0, 0, width, height, dst, imageX, imageY);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -689,17 +686,16 @@ EmbImageDisplayProc(textPtr, chunkPtr, x, y, lineHeight, baseline, display,
  *
  * EmbImageBboxProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to compute the bounding box of
- *	the area occupied by an embedded image.
+ *	This function is called to compute the bounding box of the area
+ *	occupied by an embedded image.
  *
  * Results:
- *	There is no return value.  *xPtr and *yPtr are filled in
- *	with the coordinates of the upper left corner of the
- *	image, and *widthPtr and *heightPtr are filled in with
- *	the dimensions of the image in pixels.  Note:  not all
- *	of the returned bbox is necessarily visible on the screen
- *	(the rightmost part might be off-screen to the right,
- *	and the bottommost part might be off-screen to the bottom).
+ *	There is no return value. *xPtr and *yPtr are filled in with the
+ *	coordinates of the upper left corner of the image, and *widthPtr and
+ *	*heightPtr are filled in with the dimensions of the image in pixels.
+ *	Note: not all of the returned bbox is necessarily visible on the
+ *	screen (the rightmost part might be off-screen to the right, and the
+ *	bottommost part might be off-screen to the bottom).
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -711,20 +707,20 @@ static void
 EmbImageBboxProc(textPtr, chunkPtr, index, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr,
 	widthPtr, heightPtr)
     TkText *textPtr;
-    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;		/* Chunk containing desired char. */
-    int index;				/* Index of desired character within
-					 * the chunk. */
-    int y;				/* Topmost pixel in area allocated
-					 * for this line. */
-    int lineHeight;			/* Total height of line. */
-    int baseline;			/* Location of line's baseline, in
-					 * pixels measured down from y. */
-    int *xPtr, *yPtr;			/* Gets filled in with coords of
-					 * character's upper-left pixel. */
-    int *widthPtr;			/* Gets filled in with width of
-					 * image, in pixels. */
-    int *heightPtr;			/* Gets filled in with height of
-					 * image, in pixels. */
+    TkTextDispChunk *chunkPtr;	/* Chunk containing desired char. */
+    int index;			/* Index of desired character within the
+				 * chunk. */
+    int y;			/* Topmost pixel in area allocated for this
+				 * line. */
+    int lineHeight;		/* Total height of line. */
+    int baseline;		/* Location of line's baseline, in pixels
+				 * measured down from y. */
+    int *xPtr, *yPtr;		/* Gets filled in with coords of character's
+				 * upper-left pixel. */
+    int *widthPtr;		/* Gets filled in with width of image, in
+				 * pixels. */
+    int *heightPtr;		/* Gets filled in with height of image, in
+				 * pixels. */
 {
     TkTextSegment *eiPtr = (TkTextSegment *) chunkPtr->clientData;
     Tk_Image image;
@@ -736,20 +732,22 @@ EmbImageBboxProc(textPtr, chunkPtr, index, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr,
 	*widthPtr = 0;
 	*heightPtr = 0;
     }
+
     *xPtr = chunkPtr->x + eiPtr->body.ei.padX;
+
     switch (eiPtr->body.ei.align) {
-	case ALIGN_BOTTOM:
-	    *yPtr = y + (lineHeight - *heightPtr - eiPtr->body.ei.padY);
-	    break;
-	case ALIGN_CENTER:
-	    *yPtr = y + (lineHeight - *heightPtr)/2;
-	    break;
-	case ALIGN_TOP:
-	    *yPtr = y + eiPtr->body.ei.padY;
-	    break;
-	case ALIGN_BASELINE:
-	    *yPtr = y + (baseline - *heightPtr);
-	    break;
+    case ALIGN_BOTTOM:
+	*yPtr = y + (lineHeight - *heightPtr - eiPtr->body.ei.padY);
+	break;
+    case ALIGN_CENTER:
+	*yPtr = y + (lineHeight - *heightPtr)/2;
+	break;
+    case ALIGN_TOP:
+	*yPtr = y + eiPtr->body.ei.padY;
+	break;
+    case ALIGN_BASELINE:
+	*yPtr = y + (baseline - *heightPtr);
+	break;
     }
 }
 
@@ -758,14 +756,13 @@ EmbImageBboxProc(textPtr, chunkPtr, index, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr,
  *
  * TkTextImageIndex --
  *
- *	Given the name of an embedded image within a text widget,
- *	returns an index corresponding to the image's position
- *	in the text.
+ *	Given the name of an embedded image within a text widget, returns an
+ *	index corresponding to the image's position in the text.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 1 if there is an embedded image by
- *	the given name in the text widget, 0 otherwise.  If the
- *	image exists, *indexPtr is filled in with its index.
+ *	The return value is 1 if there is an embedded image by the given name
+ *	in the text widget, 0 otherwise. If the image exists, *indexPtr is
+ *	filled in with its index.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -776,7 +773,7 @@ EmbImageBboxProc(textPtr, chunkPtr, index, y, lineHeight, baseline, xPtr, yPtr,
 int
 TkTextImageIndex(textPtr, name, indexPtr)
     TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget containing image. */
-    CONST char *name;			/* Name of image. */
+    CONST char *name;		/* Name of image. */
     TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index information gets stored here. */
 {
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
@@ -798,8 +795,8 @@ TkTextImageIndex(textPtr, name, indexPtr)
  *
  * EmbImageProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by the image code whenever an
- *	image or its contents changes.
+ *	This function is called by the image code whenever an image or its
+ *	contents changes.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -812,12 +809,12 @@ TkTextImageIndex(textPtr, name, indexPtr)
 
 static void
 EmbImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth, imgHeight)
-    ClientData clientData;              /* Pointer to widget record. */
-    int x, y;                           /* Upper left pixel (within image)
-                                         * that must be redisplayed. */
-    int width, height;                  /* Dimensions of area to redisplay
-                                         * (may be <= 0). */
-    int imgWidth, imgHeight;            /* New dimensions of image. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to widget record. */
+    int x, y;			/* Upper left pixel (within image) that must
+				 * be redisplayed. */
+    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of area to redisplay (may be
+				 * <= 0). */
+    int imgWidth, imgHeight;	/* New dimensions of image. */
 
 {
     TkTextSegment *eiPtr = (TkTextSegment *) clientData;
@@ -827,11 +824,21 @@ EmbImageProc(clientData, x, y, width, height, imgWidth, imgHeight)
     index.linePtr = eiPtr->body.ei.linePtr;
     index.byteIndex = TkTextSegToOffset(eiPtr, eiPtr->body.ei.linePtr);
     TkTextChanged(eiPtr->body.ei.sharedTextPtr, NULL, &index, &index);
-    /* 
-     * It's probably not true that all image changes
-     * can change the line height, so we could be more
-     * efficient here and only call this when necessary.
+
+    /*
+     * It's probably not true that all image changes can change the line
+     * height, so we could be more efficient here and only call this when
+     * necessary.
      */
-    TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(eiPtr->body.ei.sharedTextPtr, NULL, 
-				index.linePtr, 0, TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_ONLY);
+
+    TkTextInvalidateLineMetrics(eiPtr->body.ei.sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+	    index.linePtr, 0, TK_TEXT_INVALIDATE_ONLY);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkTextIndex.c b/generic/tkTextIndex.c
index e9469ee..127b397 100644
--- a/generic/tkTextIndex.c
+++ b/generic/tkTextIndex.c
@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkTextIndex.c --
  *
- *	This module provides procedures that manipulate indices for
- *	text widgets.
+ *	This module provides functions that manipulate indices for text
+ *	widgets.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkTextIndex.c,v 1.21 2005/02/14 23:00:46 vincentdarley Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkTextIndex.c,v 1.22 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "default.h"
@@ -27,62 +27,72 @@
 /*
  * Modifiers for index parsing: 'display', 'any' or nothing.
  */
-#define TKINDEX_NONE 0
-#define TKINDEX_DISPLAY 1
-#define TKINDEX_ANY 2
+
+#define TKINDEX_NONE	0
+#define TKINDEX_DISPLAY	1
+#define TKINDEX_ANY	2
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static CONST char *	ForwBack _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, 
-			    CONST char *string, TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-static CONST char *	StartEnd _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, 
-			    CONST char *string, TkTextIndex *indexPtr));
-static int		GetIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkSharedText *sharedPtr, TkText *textPtr, 
-			    CONST char *string,
-			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int *canCachePtr));
+static CONST char *	ForwBack(TkText *textPtr, CONST char *string,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+static CONST char *	StartEnd(TkText *textPtr, CONST char *string,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr);
+static int		GetIndex(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkSharedText *sharedPtr,
+			    TkText *textPtr, CONST char *string,
+			    TkTextIndex *indexPtr, int *canCachePtr);
 
 /*
  * The "textindex" Tcl_Obj definition:
  */
 
-static void		DupTextIndexInternalRep _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcPtr,
-			    Tcl_Obj *copyPtr));
-static void		FreeTextIndexInternalRep _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *listPtr));
-static int		SetTextIndexFromAny _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
-static void		UpdateStringOfTextIndex _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr));
+static void		DupTextIndexInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *srcPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *copyPtr);
+static void		FreeTextIndexInternalRep(Tcl_Obj *listPtr);
+static int		SetTextIndexFromAny(Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+static void		UpdateStringOfTextIndex(Tcl_Obj *objPtr);
+
+/*
+ * Accessor macros for the "textindex" type.
+ */
 
 #define GET_TEXTINDEX(objPtr) \
-		((TkTextIndex *) (objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1)
+	((TkTextIndex *) (objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1)
 #define GET_INDEXEPOCH(objPtr) \
-		((int) (objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2)
+	((int) (objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2)
 #define SET_TEXTINDEX(objPtr, indexPtr) \
-		(objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID*) (indexPtr)
+	((objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) (indexPtr))
 #define SET_INDEXEPOCH(objPtr, epoch) \
-		(objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2 = (VOID*) (epoch)
+	((objPtr)->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr2 = (VOID *) (epoch))
+
 /*
- * Define the 'textindex' object type, which Tk uses to represent
- * indices in text widgets internally.
+ * Define the 'textindex' object type, which Tk uses to represent indices in
+ * text widgets internally.
  */
+
 Tcl_ObjType tkTextIndexType = {
-    "textindex",			/* name */
-    FreeTextIndexInternalRep,		/* freeIntRepProc */
-    DupTextIndexInternalRep,	        /* dupIntRepProc */
-    NULL,                               /* updateStringProc */
-    SetTextIndexFromAny		        /* setFromAnyProc */
+    "textindex",		/* name */
+    FreeTextIndexInternalRep,	/* freeIntRepProc */
+    DupTextIndexInternalRep,	/* dupIntRepProc */
+    NULL,			/* updateStringProc */
+    SetTextIndexFromAny		/* setFromAnyProc */
 };
-
+
 static void
 FreeTextIndexInternalRep(indexObjPtr)
-    Tcl_Obj *indexObjPtr;   /* TextIndex object with internal rep to free. */
+    Tcl_Obj *indexObjPtr;	/* TextIndex object with internal rep to
+				 * free. */
 {
     TkTextIndex *indexPtr = GET_TEXTINDEX(indexObjPtr);
     if (indexPtr->textPtr != NULL) {
-        if (--indexPtr->textPtr->refCount == 0) {
-	    /* The text widget has been deleted and we need to free it now */
+	if (--indexPtr->textPtr->refCount == 0) {
+	    /*
+	     * The text widget has been deleted and we need to free it now.
+	     */
+
 	    ckfree((char *) (indexPtr->textPtr));
 	}
     }
@@ -99,19 +109,21 @@ DupTextIndexInternalRep(srcPtr, copyPtr)
     dupIndexPtr = (TkTextIndex*) ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextIndex));
     indexPtr = GET_TEXTINDEX(srcPtr);
     epoch = GET_INDEXEPOCH(srcPtr);
-    
+
     dupIndexPtr->tree = indexPtr->tree;
     dupIndexPtr->linePtr = indexPtr->linePtr;
     dupIndexPtr->byteIndex = indexPtr->byteIndex;
-    
+
     SET_TEXTINDEX(copyPtr, dupIndexPtr);
     SET_INDEXEPOCH(copyPtr, epoch);
 }
-/* 
- * This will not be called except by TkTextNewIndexObj below.
- * This is because if a TkTextIndex is no longer valid, it is
- * not possible to regenerate the string representation.
+
+/*
+ * This will not be called except by TkTextNewIndexObj below. This is because
+ * if a TkTextIndex is no longer valid, it is not possible to regenerate the
+ * string representation.
  */
+
 static void
 UpdateStringOfTextIndex(objPtr)
     Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
@@ -127,14 +139,15 @@ UpdateStringOfTextIndex(objPtr)
     strcpy(objPtr->bytes, buffer);
     objPtr->length = len;
 }
+
 static int
 SetTextIndexFromAny(interp, objPtr)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */
     Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* The object to convert. */
 {
     Tcl_AppendToObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp),
-	"can't convert value to textindex except via TkTextGetIndexFromObj API",
-	-1);
+	    "can't convert value to textindex except via TkTextGetIndexFromObj API",
+	    -1);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -142,19 +155,19 @@ SetTextIndexFromAny(interp, objPtr)
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * MakeObjIndex --
- *	
- *	This procedure generates a Tcl_Obj description of an index,
- *	suitable for reading in again later.  If the 'textPtr' is NULL
- *	then we still generate an index object, but it's internal
- *	description is deemed non-cacheable, and therefore effectively
- *	useless (apart from as a temporary memory storage).  This is used
- *	for indices whose meaning is very temporary (like @0,0 or the
- *	name of a mark or tag).  The mapping from such strings/objects to
- *	actual TkTextIndex pointers is not stable to minor text widget
- *	changes which we do not track (we track insertions/deletions).
+ *
+ *	This function generates a Tcl_Obj description of an index, suitable
+ *	for reading in again later. If the 'textPtr' is NULL then we still
+ *	generate an index object, but it's internal description is deemed
+ *	non-cacheable, and therefore effectively useless (apart from as a
+ *	temporary memory storage). This is used for indices whose meaning is
+ *	very temporary (like @0,0 or the name of a mark or tag). The mapping
+ *	from such strings/objects to actual TkTextIndex pointers is not stable
+ *	to minor text widget changes which we do not track (we track
+ *	insertions/deletions).
  *
  * Results:
- *	A pointer to an allocated TkTextIndex which will be freed 
+ *	A pointer to an allocated TkTextIndex which will be freed
  *	automatically when the Tcl_Obj is used for other purposes.
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -162,13 +175,15 @@ SetTextIndexFromAny(interp, objPtr)
  *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static TkTextIndex*
-MakeObjIndex(textPtr, objPtr, origPtr) 
+
+static TkTextIndex *
+MakeObjIndex(textPtr, objPtr, origPtr)
     TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object containing description of position. */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *origPtr; /* Pointer to index. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object containing description of
+				 * position. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *origPtr;	/* Pointer to index. */
 {
-    TkTextIndex *indexPtr = (TkTextIndex*) ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextIndex));
+    TkTextIndex *indexPtr = (TkTextIndex *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextIndex));
 
     indexPtr->tree = origPtr->tree;
     indexPtr->linePtr = origPtr->linePtr;
@@ -190,18 +205,19 @@ CONST TkTextIndex*
 TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objPtr)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Use this for error reporting. */
     TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object containing description of position. */
+    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;		/* Object containing description of
+				 * position. */
 {
     TkTextIndex index;
     TkTextIndex *indexPtr = NULL;
     int cache;
-    
+
     if (objPtr->typePtr == &tkTextIndexType) {
 	int epoch;
-	
+
 	indexPtr = GET_TEXTINDEX(objPtr);
 	epoch = GET_INDEXEPOCH(objPtr);
-	
+
 	if (epoch == textPtr->sharedTextPtr->stateEpoch) {
 	    if (indexPtr->textPtr == textPtr) {
 		return indexPtr;
@@ -209,17 +225,17 @@ TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objPtr)
 	}
     }
 
-    /* 
-     * The object is either not an index type or referred to a different
-     * text widget, or referred to the correct widget, but it is out of
-     * date (text has been added/deleted since).
+    /*
+     * The object is either not an index type or referred to a different text
+     * widget, or referred to the correct widget, but it is out of date (text
+     * has been added/deleted since).
      */
-    
-    if (GetIndex(interp, NULL, textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objPtr), 
-		 &index, &cache) != TCL_OK) {
+
+    if (GetIndex(interp, NULL, textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objPtr), &index,
+	    &cache) != TCL_OK) {
 	return NULL;
     }
-    
+
     if (objPtr->typePtr != NULL) {
 	if (objPtr->bytes == NULL) {
 	    objPtr->typePtr->updateStringProc(objPtr);
@@ -228,7 +244,7 @@ TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objPtr)
 	    (*objPtr->typePtr->freeIntRepProc)(objPtr);
 	}
     }
-    
+
     if (cache) {
 	return MakeObjIndex(textPtr, objPtr, &index);
     } else {
@@ -240,11 +256,10 @@ TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objPtr)
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkTextNewIndexObj --
- *	
- *	This procedure generates a Tcl_Obj description of an index,
- *	suitable for reading in again later.  The index generated is
- *	effectively stable to all except insertion/deletion operations on
- *	the widget.
+ *
+ *	This function generates a Tcl_Obj description of an index, suitable
+ *	for reading in again later. The index generated is effectively stable
+ *	to all except insertion/deletion operations on the widget.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A new Tcl_Obj with refCount zero.
@@ -257,25 +272,27 @@ TkTextGetIndexFromObj(interp, textPtr, objPtr)
 
 Tcl_Obj*
 TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, indexPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;             /* text widget for this index */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr; /* Pointer to index. */
+    TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget for this index */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr;/* Pointer to index. */
 {
     Tcl_Obj *retVal;
 
     retVal = Tcl_NewObj();
     retVal->bytes = NULL;
 
-    /* 
-     * Assumption that the above call returns an object with
+    /*
+     * Assumption that the above call returns an object with:
      * retVal->typePtr == NULL
      */
+
     MakeObjIndex(textPtr, retVal, indexPtr);
-    
-    /* 
-     * Unfortunately, it isn't possible for us to regenerate the
-     * string representation so we have to create it here, while we
-     * can be sure the contents of the index are still valid.
+
+    /*
+     * Unfortunately, it isn't possible for us to regenerate the string
+     * representation so we have to create it here, while we can be sure the
+     * contents of the index are still valid.
      */
+
     UpdateStringOfTextIndex(retVal);
     return retVal;
 }
@@ -285,23 +302,22 @@ TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, indexPtr)
  *
  * TkTextMakePixelIndex --
  *
- *	Given a pixel index and a byte index, look things up in the B-tree
- *	and fill in a TkTextIndex structure.
- *	
- *	The valid input range for pixelIndex is from 0 to the number
- *	of pixels in the widget-1.  Anything outside that range will
- *	be rounded to the closest acceptable value. 
+ *	Given a pixel index and a byte index, look things up in the B-tree and
+ *	fill in a TkTextIndex structure.
+ *
+ *	The valid input range for pixelIndex is from 0 to the number of pixels
+ *	in the widget-1. Anything outside that range will be rounded to the
+ *	closest acceptable value.
  *
  * Results:
- * 
- *	The structure at *indexPtr is filled in with information about
- *	the character at pixelIndex (or the closest existing character,
- *	if the specified one doesn't exist), and the number of excess
- *	pixels is returned as a result.  This means if the given pixel
- *	index is exactly correct for the top-edge of the indexPtr, then
- *	zero will be returned, and otherwise we will return the
- *	calculation 'desired pixelIndex' - 'actual pixel index of
- *	indexPtr'.
+ *
+ *	The structure at *indexPtr is filled in with information about the
+ *	character at pixelIndex (or the closest existing character, if the
+ *	specified one doesn't exist), and the number of excess pixels is
+ *	returned as a result. This means if the given pixel index is exactly
+ *	correct for the top-edge of the indexPtr, then zero will be returned,
+ *	and otherwise we will return the calculation 'desired pixelIndex' -
+ *	'actual pixel index of indexPtr'.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -312,7 +328,7 @@ TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, indexPtr)
 int
 TkTextMakePixelIndex(textPtr, pixelIndex, indexPtr)
     TkText* textPtr;		/* The Text Widget */
-    int pixelIndex;		/* pixel-index of desired line (0 means first
+    int pixelIndex;		/* Pixel-index of desired line (0 means first
 				 * pixel of first line of text). */
     TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Structure to fill in. */
 {
@@ -320,24 +336,24 @@ TkTextMakePixelIndex(textPtr, pixelIndex, indexPtr)
 
     indexPtr->tree = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree;
     indexPtr->textPtr = textPtr;
-    
+
     if (pixelIndex < 0) {
 	pixelIndex = 0;
     }
-    indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindPixelLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, 
-					     textPtr,
-					     pixelIndex, 
-					     &pixelOffset);
-    /* 
-     * 'pixedlIndex' was too large, so we try again, just to find
-     * the last pixel in the window
+    indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindPixelLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+	    textPtr, pixelIndex, &pixelOffset);
+
+    /*
+     * 'pixelIndex' was too large, so we try again, just to find the last
+     * pixel in the window
      */
+
     if (indexPtr->linePtr == NULL) {
 	int lastMinusOne = TkBTreeNumPixels(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
-					    textPtr)-1;
-	indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindPixelLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, 
-						 textPtr, 
-						 lastMinusOne, &pixelOffset);
+		textPtr)-1;
+
+	indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindPixelLine(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree,
+		textPtr, lastMinusOne, &pixelOffset);
 	indexPtr->byteIndex = 0;
 	return pixelOffset;
     }
@@ -354,8 +370,8 @@ TkTextMakePixelIndex(textPtr, pixelIndex, indexPtr)
  *
  * TkTextMakeByteIndex --
  *
- *	Given a line index and a byte index, look things up in the B-tree
- *	and fill in a TkTextIndex structure.
+ *	Given a line index and a byte index, look things up in the B-tree and
+ *	fill in a TkTextIndex structure.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The structure at *indexPtr is filled in with information about the
@@ -374,8 +390,8 @@ TkTextMakeByteIndex(tree, textPtr, lineIndex, byteIndex, indexPtr)
     TkTextBTree tree;		/* Tree that lineIndex and byteIndex refer
 				 * to. */
     CONST TkText *textPtr;
-    int lineIndex;		/* Index of desired line (0 means first
-				 * line of text). */
+    int lineIndex;		/* Index of desired line (0 means first line
+				 * of text). */
     int byteIndex;		/* Byte index of desired character. */
     TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Structure to fill in. */
 {
@@ -394,8 +410,8 @@ TkTextMakeByteIndex(tree, textPtr, lineIndex, byteIndex, indexPtr)
     }
     indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(tree, textPtr, lineIndex);
     if (indexPtr->linePtr == NULL) {
-	indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(tree, textPtr, 
-					    TkBTreeNumLines(tree, textPtr));
+	indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(tree, textPtr,
+		TkBTreeNumLines(tree, textPtr));
 	byteIndex = 0;
     }
     if (byteIndex == 0) {
@@ -404,19 +420,19 @@ TkTextMakeByteIndex(tree, textPtr, lineIndex, byteIndex, indexPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Verify that the index is within the range of the line and points
-     * to a valid character boundary.  
+     * Verify that the index is within the range of the line and points to a
+     * valid character boundary.
      */
 
     index = 0;
     for (segPtr = indexPtr->linePtr->segPtr; ; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (segPtr == NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * Use the index of the last character in the line.  Since
-	     * the last character on the line is guaranteed to be a '\n',
-	     * we can back up a constant sizeof(char) bytes.
+	     * Use the index of the last character in the line. Since the last
+	     * character on the line is guaranteed to be a '\n', we can back
+	     * up a constant sizeof(char) bytes.
 	     */
-	     
+
 	    indexPtr->byteIndex = index - sizeof(char);
 	    break;
 	}
@@ -425,7 +441,7 @@ TkTextMakeByteIndex(tree, textPtr, lineIndex, byteIndex, indexPtr)
 	    if ((byteIndex > index) && (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType)) {
 		/*
 		 * Prevent UTF-8 character from being split up by ensuring
-		 * that byteIndex falls on a character boundary.  If index
+		 * that byteIndex falls on a character boundary. If index
 		 * falls in the middle of a UTF-8 character, it will be
 		 * adjusted to the end of that UTF-8 character.
 		 */
@@ -447,8 +463,8 @@ TkTextMakeByteIndex(tree, textPtr, lineIndex, byteIndex, indexPtr)
  *
  * TkTextMakeCharIndex --
  *
- *	Given a line index and a character index, look things up in the
- *	B-tree and fill in a TkTextIndex structure.
+ *	Given a line index and a character index, look things up in the B-tree
+ *	and fill in a TkTextIndex structure.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The structure at *indexPtr is filled in with information about the
@@ -467,8 +483,8 @@ TkTextMakeCharIndex(tree, textPtr, lineIndex, charIndex, indexPtr)
     TkTextBTree tree;		/* Tree that lineIndex and charIndex refer
 				 * to. */
     TkText *textPtr;
-    int lineIndex;		/* Index of desired line (0 means first
-				 * line of text). */
+    int lineIndex;		/* Index of desired line (0 means first line
+				 * of text). */
     int charIndex;		/* Index of desired character. */
     TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Structure to fill in. */
 {
@@ -487,25 +503,25 @@ TkTextMakeCharIndex(tree, textPtr, lineIndex, charIndex, indexPtr)
     }
     indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(tree, textPtr, lineIndex);
     if (indexPtr->linePtr == NULL) {
-	indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(tree, textPtr, 
-					    TkBTreeNumLines(tree, textPtr));
+	indexPtr->linePtr = TkBTreeFindLine(tree, textPtr,
+		TkBTreeNumLines(tree, textPtr));
 	charIndex = 0;
     }
 
     /*
-     * Verify that the index is within the range of the line.
-     * If not, just use the index of the last character in the line.
+     * Verify that the index is within the range of the line. If not, just use
+     * the index of the last character in the line.
      */
 
     index = 0;
     for (segPtr = indexPtr->linePtr->segPtr; ; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (segPtr == NULL) {
 	    /*
-	     * Use the index of the last character in the line.  Since
-	     * the last character on the line is guaranteed to be a '\n',
-	     * we can back up a constant sizeof(char) bytes.
+	     * Use the index of the last character in the line. Since the last
+	     * character on the line is guaranteed to be a '\n', we can back
+	     * up a constant sizeof(char) bytes.
 	     */
-	     
+
 	    indexPtr->byteIndex = index - sizeof(char);
 	    break;
 	}
@@ -542,14 +558,14 @@ TkTextMakeCharIndex(tree, textPtr, lineIndex, charIndex, indexPtr)
  *
  * TkTextIndexToSeg --
  *
- *	Given an index, this procedure returns the segment and offset
- *	within segment for the index.
+ *	Given an index, this function returns the segment and offset within
+ *	segment for the index.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a pointer to the segment referred to by
- *	indexPtr; this will always be a segment with non-zero size.  The
- *	variable at *offsetPtr is set to hold the integer offset within
- *	the segment of the character given by indexPtr.
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the segment referred to by indexPtr;
+ *	this will always be a segment with non-zero size. The variable at
+ *	*offsetPtr is set to hold the integer offset within the segment of the
+ *	character given by indexPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -582,7 +598,7 @@ TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr, offsetPtr)
  *
  * TkTextSegToOffset --
  *
- *	Given a segment pointer and the line containing it, this procedure
+ *	Given a segment pointer and the line containing it, this function
  *	returns the offset of the segment within its line.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -615,16 +631,16 @@ TkTextSegToOffset(segPtr, linePtr)
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkTextGetObjIndex --
- * 
- *    Simpler wrapper around the string based function, but could be
- *    enhanced with a new object type in the future.
+ *
+ *	Simpler wrapper around the string based function, but could be
+ *	enhanced with a new object type in the future.
  *
  * Results:
- *    see TkTextGetIndex
+ *	see TkTextGetIndex
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
- *    
+ *	None.
+ *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
@@ -632,27 +648,28 @@ int
 TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, idxObj, indexPtr)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Use this for error reporting. */
     TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Obj *idxObj;	        /* Object containing textual description 
-				 * of position. */
+    Tcl_Obj *idxObj;		/* Object containing textual description of
+				 * position. */
     TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index structure to fill in. */
 {
-    return GetIndex(interp, NULL, textPtr, Tcl_GetString(idxObj), indexPtr, NULL);
+    return GetIndex(interp, NULL, textPtr, Tcl_GetString(idxObj), indexPtr,
+	    NULL);
 }
 
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkTextSharedGetObjIndex --
- * 
- *    Simpler wrapper around the string based function, but could be
- *    enhanced with a new object type in the future.
+ *
+ *	Simpler wrapper around the string based function, but could be
+ *	enhanced with a new object type in the future.
  *
  * Results:
- *    see TkTextGetIndex
+ *	see TkTextGetIndex
  *
  * Side effects:
- *    None.
- *    
+ *	None.
+ *
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
@@ -660,12 +677,12 @@ int
 TkTextSharedGetObjIndex(interp, sharedTextPtr, idxObj, indexPtr)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Use this for error reporting. */
     TkSharedText *sharedTextPtr;/* Information about text widget. */
-    Tcl_Obj *idxObj;	        /* Object containing textual description 
-				 * of position. */
+    Tcl_Obj *idxObj;		/* Object containing textual description of
+				 * position. */
     TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index structure to fill in. */
 {
-    return GetIndex(interp, sharedTextPtr, NULL, 
-		    Tcl_GetString(idxObj), indexPtr, NULL);
+    return GetIndex(interp, sharedTextPtr, NULL, Tcl_GetString(idxObj),
+	    indexPtr, NULL);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -676,10 +693,10 @@ TkTextSharedGetObjIndex(interp, sharedTextPtr, idxObj, indexPtr)
  *	Given a string, return the index that is described.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result.  If TCL_OK is
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result. If TCL_OK is
  *	returned, then everything went well and the index at *indexPtr is
- *	filled in; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message
- *	is left in the interp's result.
+ *	filled in; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is
+ *	left in the interp's result.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -705,14 +722,14 @@ TkTextGetIndex(interp, textPtr, string, indexPtr)
  *	Given a string, return the index that is described.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result.  If TCL_OK is
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return result. If TCL_OK is
  *	returned, then everything went well and the index at *indexPtr is
- *	filled in; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message
- *	is left in the interp's result.
- *	
- *	If *canCachePtr is non-NULL, and everything went well, the
- *	integer it points to is set to 1 if the indexPtr is something
- *	which can be cached, and zero otherwise.
+ *	filled in; otherwise TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is
+ *	left in the interp's result.
+ *
+ *	If *canCachePtr is non-NULL, and everything went well, the integer it
+ *	points to is set to 1 if the indexPtr is something which can be
+ *	cached, and zero otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -727,8 +744,8 @@ GetIndex(interp, sharedPtr, textPtr, string, indexPtr, canCachePtr)
     TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget. */
     CONST char *string;		/* Textual description of position. */
     TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index structure to fill in. */
-    int *canCachePtr;           /* Pointer to integer to store whether
-                                 * we can cache the index (or NULL) */
+    int *canCachePtr;		/* Pointer to integer to store whether we can
+				 * cache the index (or NULL). */
 {
     char *p, *end, *endOfBase;
     TkTextIndex first, last;
@@ -737,17 +754,16 @@ GetIndex(interp, sharedPtr, textPtr, string, indexPtr, canCachePtr)
     CONST char *cp;
     Tcl_DString copy;
     int canCache = 0;
-    
+
     if (sharedPtr == NULL) {
 	sharedPtr = textPtr->sharedTextPtr;
     }
-    
+
     /*
      *---------------------------------------------------------------------
-     * Stage 1: check to see if the index consists of nothing but a mark
-     * name.  We do this check now even though it's also done later, in
-     * order to allow mark names that include funny characters such as
-     * spaces or "+1c".
+     * Stage 1: check to see if the index consists of nothing but a mark name.
+     * We do this check now even though it's also done later, in order to
+     * allow mark names that include funny characters such as spaces or "+1c".
      *---------------------------------------------------------------------
      */
 
@@ -764,11 +780,11 @@ GetIndex(interp, sharedPtr, textPtr, string, indexPtr, canCachePtr)
     indexPtr->tree = sharedPtr->tree;
 
     /*
-     * First look for the form "tag.first" or "tag.last" where "tag"
-     * is the name of a valid tag.  Try to use up as much as possible
-     * of the string in this check (strrchr instead of strchr below).
-     * Doing the check now, and in this way, allows tag names to include
-     * funny characters like "@" or "+1c".
+     * First look for the form "tag.first" or "tag.last" where "tag" is the
+     * name of a valid tag. Try to use up as much as possible of the string in
+     * this check (strrchr instead of strchr below). Doing the check now, and
+     * in this way, allows tag names to include funny characters like "@" or
+     * "+1c".
      */
 
     Tcl_DStringInit(&copy);
@@ -778,7 +794,7 @@ GetIndex(interp, sharedPtr, textPtr, string, indexPtr, canCachePtr)
 	TkTextTag *tagPtr;
 	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = NULL;
 	CONST char *tagName;
-	
+
 	if ((p[1] == 'f') && (strncmp(p+1, "first", 5) == 0)) {
 	    wantLast = 0;
 	    endOfBase = p+6;
@@ -788,13 +804,14 @@ GetIndex(interp, sharedPtr, textPtr, string, indexPtr, canCachePtr)
 	} else {
 	    goto tryxy;
 	}
+
 	tagPtr = NULL;
 	tagName = Tcl_DStringValue(&copy);
 	if (((p - tagName) == 3) && !strncmp(tagName, "sel", 3)) {
-	    /* 
-	     * Special case for sel tag which is not stored in
-	     * the hash table.
+	    /*
+	     * Special case for sel tag which is not stored in the hash table.
 	     */
+
 	    tagPtr = textPtr->selTagPtr;
 	} else {
 	    *p = 0;
@@ -804,17 +821,18 @@ GetIndex(interp, sharedPtr, textPtr, string, indexPtr, canCachePtr)
 		tagPtr = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
 	    }
 	}
+
 	if (tagPtr == NULL) {
 	    goto tryxy;
 	}
+
 	TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0, &first);
-	TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr, 
-		    TkBTreeNumLines(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr), 
-		    0, &last);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		TkBTreeNumLines(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr), 0, &last);
 	TkBTreeStartSearch(&first, &last, tagPtr, &search);
 	if (!TkBTreeCharTagged(&first, tagPtr) && !TkBTreeNextTag(&search)) {
 	    if (tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) {
-	        tagName = "sel";
+		tagName = "sel";
 	    } else {
 		tagName = Tcl_GetHashKey(&sharedPtr->tagTable, hPtr);
 	    }
@@ -834,7 +852,7 @@ GetIndex(interp, sharedPtr, textPtr, string, indexPtr, canCachePtr)
 	goto gotBase;
     }
 
-    tryxy:
+  tryxy:
     if (string[0] == '@') {
 	/*
 	 * Find character at a given x,y location in the window.
@@ -854,7 +872,7 @@ GetIndex(interp, sharedPtr, textPtr, string, indexPtr, canCachePtr)
 	}
 	TkTextPixelIndex(textPtr, x, y, indexPtr, NULL);
 	endOfBase = end;
-	goto gotBase; 
+	goto gotBase;
     }
 
     if (isdigit(UCHAR(string[0])) || (string[0] == '-')) {
@@ -879,8 +897,8 @@ GetIndex(interp, sharedPtr, textPtr, string, indexPtr, canCachePtr)
 	    }
 	    endOfBase = end;
 	}
-	TkTextMakeCharIndex(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr, lineIndex, 
-			    charIndex, indexPtr);
+	TkTextMakeCharIndex(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr, lineIndex, charIndex,
+		indexPtr);
 	canCache = 1;
 	goto gotBase;
     }
@@ -912,8 +930,7 @@ GetIndex(interp, sharedPtr, textPtr, string, indexPtr, canCachePtr)
 	 */
 
 	TkTextMakeByteIndex(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr,
-		    TkBTreeNumLines(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr),
-		    0, indexPtr);
+		TkBTreeNumLines(sharedPtr->tree, textPtr), 0, indexPtr);
 	canCache = 1;
 	goto gotBase;
     } else {
@@ -946,14 +963,14 @@ GetIndex(interp, sharedPtr, textPtr, string, indexPtr, canCachePtr)
 
     /*
      *-------------------------------------------------------------------
-     * Stage 3: process zero or more modifiers.  Each modifier is either
-     * a keyword like "wordend" or "linestart", or it has the form
-     * "op count units" where op is + or -, count is a number, and units
-     * is "chars" or "lines".
+     * Stage 3: process zero or more modifiers. Each modifier is either a
+     * keyword like "wordend" or "linestart", or it has the form "op count
+     * units" where op is + or -, count is a number, and units is "chars" or
+     * "lines".
      *-------------------------------------------------------------------
      */
 
-    gotBase:
+  gotBase:
     cp = endOfBase;
     while (1) {
 	while (isspace(UCHAR(*cp))) {
@@ -962,7 +979,7 @@ GetIndex(interp, sharedPtr, textPtr, string, indexPtr, canCachePtr)
 	if (*cp == 0) {
 	    break;
 	}
-    
+
 	if ((*cp == '+') || (*cp == '-')) {
 	    cp = ForwBack(textPtr, cp, indexPtr);
 	} else {
@@ -973,7 +990,8 @@ GetIndex(interp, sharedPtr, textPtr, string, indexPtr, canCachePtr)
 	}
     }
     Tcl_DStringFree(&copy);
-    done:
+
+  done:
     if (canCachePtr != NULL) {
 	*canCachePtr = canCache;
     }
@@ -982,11 +1000,10 @@ GetIndex(interp, sharedPtr, textPtr, string, indexPtr, canCachePtr)
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 
-    error:
+  error:
     Tcl_DStringFree(&copy);
     Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad text index \"", string, "\"",
-	    (char *) NULL);
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad text index \"", string, "\"", (char *)NULL);
     return TCL_ERROR;
 }
 
@@ -994,13 +1011,13 @@ GetIndex(interp, sharedPtr, textPtr, string, indexPtr, canCachePtr)
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkTextPrintIndex --
- *	
- *	This procedure generates a string description of an index, suitable
- *	for reading in again later.
+ *
+ *	This function generates a string description of an index, suitable for
+ *	reading in again later.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The characters pointed to by string are modified.  Returns the
- *	number of characters in the string.
+ *	The characters pointed to by string are modified. Returns the number
+ *	of characters in the string.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1012,8 +1029,8 @@ int
 TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, indexPtr, string)
     CONST TkText *textPtr;
     CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr;/* Pointer to index. */
-    char *string;		/* Place to store the position.  Must have
-				 * at least TK_POS_CHARS characters. */
+    char *string;		/* Place to store the position. Must have at
+				 * least TK_POS_CHARS characters. */
 {
     TkTextSegment *segPtr;
     TkTextLine *linePtr;
@@ -1022,12 +1039,14 @@ TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, indexPtr, string)
     numBytes = indexPtr->byteIndex;
     charIndex = 0;
     linePtr = indexPtr->linePtr;
+
     for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr; ; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
 	if (segPtr == NULL) {
-	    /* 
-	     * Two logical lines merged into one display line 
-	     * through eliding of a newline
+	    /*
+	     * Two logical lines merged into one display line through eliding
+	     * of a newline.
 	     */
+
 	    linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(NULL, linePtr);
 	    segPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
 	}
@@ -1041,14 +1060,15 @@ TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, indexPtr, string)
 	}
 	numBytes -= segPtr->size;
     }
+
     if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
 	charIndex += Tcl_NumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars, numBytes);
     } else {
 	charIndex += numBytes;
     }
-    return sprintf(string, "%d.%d", 
-		   TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexPtr->linePtr) + 1,
-		   charIndex);
+
+    return sprintf(string, "%d.%d",
+	    TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexPtr->linePtr) + 1, charIndex);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1085,13 +1105,14 @@ TkTextIndexCmp(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
 	    return 0;
 	}
     }
-    /* 
-     * Assumption here that it is ok for comparisons to reflect
-     * the full B-tree and not just the portion that is available
-     * to any client.  This should be true because the only
-     * indexPtr's we should be given are ones which are valid
-     * for the current client.
+
+    /*
+     * Assumption here that it is ok for comparisons to reflect the full
+     * B-tree and not just the portion that is available to any client. This
+     * should be true because the only indexPtr's we should be given are ones
+     * which are valid for the current client.
      */
+
     line1 = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, index1Ptr->linePtr);
     line2 = TkBTreeLinesTo(NULL, index2Ptr->linePtr);
     if (line1 < line2) {
@@ -1108,14 +1129,14 @@ TkTextIndexCmp(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
  *
  * ForwBack --
  *
- *	This procedure handles +/- modifiers for indices to adjust the
- *	index forwards or backwards.
+ *	This function handles +/- modifiers for indices to adjust the index
+ *	forwards or backwards.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If the modifier in string is successfully parsed then the return
- *	value is the address of the first character after the modifier,
- *	and *indexPtr is updated to reflect the modifier.  If there is a
- *	syntax error in the modifier then NULL is returned.
+ *	If the modifier in string is successfully parsed then the return value
+ *	is the address of the first character after the modifier, and
+ *	*indexPtr is updated to reflect the modifier. If there is a syntax
+ *	error in the modifier then NULL is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1126,10 +1147,9 @@ TkTextIndexCmp(index1Ptr, index2Ptr)
 static CONST char *
 ForwBack(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
     TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* String to parse for additional info
-				 * about modifier (count and units). 
-				 * Points to "+" or "-" that starts
-				 * modifier. */
+    CONST char *string;		/* String to parse for additional info about
+				 * modifier (count and units). Points to "+"
+				 * or "-" that starts modifier. */
     TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index to update as specified in string. */
 {
     register CONST char *p, *units;
@@ -1155,28 +1175,27 @@ ForwBack(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find the end of this modifier (next space or + or - character),
-     * then check if there is a textual 'display' or 'any' modifier.
-     * These modifiers can be their own word (in which case they can 
-     * be abbreviated) or they can follow on to the actual unit in
-     * a single word (in which case no abbreviation is allowed).  So,
-     * 'display lines', 'd lines', 'displaylin' are all ok, but 'dline'
-     * is not.
+     * Find the end of this modifier (next space or + or - character), then
+     * check if there is a textual 'display' or 'any' modifier. These
+     * modifiers can be their own word (in which case they can be abbreviated)
+     * or they can follow on to the actual unit in a single word (in which
+     * case no abbreviation is allowed). So, 'display lines', 'd lines',
+     * 'displaylin' are all ok, but 'dline' is not.
      */
 
-    units = p; 
+    units = p;
     while ((*p != '\0') && !isspace(UCHAR(*p)) && (*p != '+') && (*p != '-')) {
 	p++;
     }
     length = p - units;
-    if ((*units == 'd') && (strncmp(units, "display", 
+    if ((*units == 'd') && (strncmp(units, "display",
 				    (length > 7 ? 7 : length)) == 0)) {
 	modifier = TKINDEX_DISPLAY;
 	if (length > 7) {
 	    p -= (length - 7);
 	}
-    } else if ((*units == 'a') && (strncmp(units, "any", 
-					   (length > 3 ? 3 : length)) == 0)) {
+    } else if ((*units == 'a') &&
+	    (strncmp(units, "any", (length > 3 ? 3 : length)) == 0)) {
 	modifier = TKINDEX_ANY;
 	if (length > 3) {
 	    p -= (length - 3);
@@ -1185,16 +1204,17 @@ ForwBack(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	modifier = TKINDEX_NONE;
     }
 
-    /* 
-     * If we had a modifier, which we interpreted ok, so now forward
-     * to the actual units.
+    /*
+     * If we had a modifier, which we interpreted ok, so now forward to the
+     * actual units.
      */
+
     if (modifier != TKINDEX_NONE) {
 	while (isspace(UCHAR(*p))) {
 	    p++;
 	}
-	units = p; 
-	while ((*p != '\0') && !isspace(UCHAR(*p)) && (*p != '+') && (*p != '-')) {
+	units = p;
+	while (*p!='\0' && !isspace(UCHAR(*p)) && *p!='+' && *p!='-') {
 	    p++;
 	}
 	length = p - units;
@@ -1203,8 +1223,10 @@ ForwBack(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
     /*
      * Finally parse the units.
      */
+
     if ((*units == 'c') && (strncmp(units, "chars", length) == 0)) {
 	TkTextCountType type;
+
 	if (modifier == TKINDEX_NONE) {
 	    type = COUNT_INDICES;
 	} else if (modifier == TKINDEX_ANY) {
@@ -1212,6 +1234,7 @@ ForwBack(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	} else {
 	    type = COUNT_DISPLAY_CHARS;
 	}
+
 	if (*string == '+') {
 	    TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, count, indexPtr, type);
 	} else {
@@ -1219,11 +1242,13 @@ ForwBack(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	}
     } else if ((*units == 'i') && (strncmp(units, "indices", length) == 0)) {
 	TkTextCountType type;
+
 	if (modifier == TKINDEX_DISPLAY) {
 	    type = COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES;
 	} else {
 	    type = COUNT_INDICES;
 	}
+
 	if (*string == '+') {
 	    TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, count, indexPtr, type);
 	} else {
@@ -1231,68 +1256,79 @@ ForwBack(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	}
     } else if ((*units == 'l') && (strncmp(units, "lines", length) == 0)) {
 	if (modifier == TKINDEX_DISPLAY) {
-	    /* 
+	    /*
 	     * Find the appropriate pixel offset of the current position
-	     * within its display line.  This also has the side-effect of
-	     * moving indexPtr, but that doesn't matter since we will do
-	     * it again below.
-	     * 
-	     * Then find the right display line, and finally calculated
-	     * the index we want in that display line, based on the
-	     * original pixel offset.
+	     * within its display line. This also has the side-effect of
+	     * moving indexPtr, but that doesn't matter since we will do it
+	     * again below.
+	     *
+	     * Then find the right display line, and finally calculated the
+	     * index we want in that display line, based on the original pixel
+	     * offset.
 	     */
+
 	    int xOffset, forward;
+
 	    if (TkTextIsElided(textPtr, indexPtr, NULL)) {
-	        /* Go forward to the first non-elided index */
-		TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, indexPtr, 
-				     COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
+		/*
+		 * Go forward to the first non-elided index.
+		 */
+
+		TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, indexPtr,
+			COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
 	    }
-	    /* 
-	     * Unlike the Forw/BackChars code, the display line code
-	     * is sensitive to whether we are genuinely going
-	     * forwards or backwards.  So, we need to determine that.
-	     * This is important in the case where we have "+ -3
-	     * displaylines", for example.
+
+	    /*
+	     * Unlike the Forw/BackChars code, the display line code is
+	     * sensitive to whether we are genuinely going forwards or
+	     * backwards. So, we need to determine that. This is important in
+	     * the case where we have "+ -3 displaylines", for example.
 	     */
+
 	    if ((count < 0) ^ (*string == '-')) {
 		forward = 0;
 	    } else {
 		forward = 1;
 	    }
+
 	    count = abs(count);
 	    if (count == 0) {
 		return p;
 	    }
+
 	    if (forward) {
 		TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, &xOffset);
 		while (count-- > 0) {
-		    /* 
-		     * Go to the end of the line, then forward one
-		     * char/byte to get to the beginning of the next
-		     * line.
+		    /*
+		     * Go to the end of the line, then forward one char/byte
+		     * to get to the beginning of the next line.
 		     */
+
 		    TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, NULL);
-		    TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr, 
-					 COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
+		    TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr,
+			    COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
 		}
 	    } else {
 		TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, &xOffset);
 		while (count-- > 0) {
-		    /* 
+		    /*
 		     * Go to the beginning of the line, then backward one
 		     * char/byte to get to the end of the previous line
 		     */
+
 		    TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, NULL);
-		    TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr, 
-					 COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
+		    TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr,
+			    COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
 		}
 		TkTextFindDisplayLineEnd(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, NULL);
 	    }
-	    /* 
+
+	    /*
 	     * This call assumes indexPtr is the beginning of a display line
 	     * and moves it to the 'xOffset' position of that line, which is
 	     * just what we want.
 	     */
+
 	    TkTextIndexOfX(textPtr, xOffset, indexPtr);
 	} else {
 	    lineIndex = TkBTreeLinesTo(textPtr, indexPtr->linePtr);
@@ -1302,31 +1338,29 @@ ForwBack(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 		lineIndex -= count;
 
 		/*
-		 * The check below retains the character position, even
-		 * if the line runs off the start of the file.  Without
-		 * it, the character position will get reset to 0 by
-		 * TkTextMakeIndex.
+		 * The check below retains the character position, even if the
+		 * line runs off the start of the file. Without it, the
+		 * character position will get reset to 0 by TkTextMakeIndex.
 		 */
 
 		if (lineIndex < 0) {
 		    lineIndex = 0;
 		}
 	    }
+
 	    /*
 	     * This doesn't work quite right if using a proportional font or
-	     * UTF-8 characters with varying numbers of bytes, or if there
-	     * are embedded windows, images, etc.  The cursor will bop
-	     * around, keeping a constant number of bytes (not characters)
-	     * from the left edge (but making sure not to split any UTF-8
-	     * characters), regardless of the x-position the index
-	     * corresponds to.  The proper way to do this is to get the
-	     * x-position of the index and then pick the character at the
-	     * same x-position in the new line.
+	     * UTF-8 characters with varying numbers of bytes, or if there are
+	     * embedded windows, images, etc. The cursor will bop around,
+	     * keeping a constant number of bytes (not characters) from the
+	     * left edge (but making sure not to split any UTF-8 characters),
+	     * regardless of the x-position the index corresponds to. The
+	     * proper way to do this is to get the x-position of the index and
+	     * then pick the character at the same x-position in the new line.
 	     */
 
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(indexPtr->tree, textPtr, 
-				lineIndex, indexPtr->byteIndex,
-				indexPtr);
+	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(indexPtr->tree, textPtr, lineIndex,
+		    indexPtr->byteIndex, indexPtr);
 	}
     } else {
 	return NULL;
@@ -1339,16 +1373,16 @@ ForwBack(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
  *
  * TkTextIndexForwBytes --
  *
- *	Given an index for a text widget, this procedure creates a new
- *	index that points "count" bytes ahead of the source index.
+ *	Given an index for a text widget, this function creates a new index
+ *	that points "count" bytes ahead of the source index.
  *
  * Results:
  *	*dstPtr is modified to refer to the character "count" bytes after
- *	srcPtr, or to the last character in the TkText if there aren't
- *	"count" bytes left.
- *	
- *	In this latter case, the function returns '1' to indicate
- *	that not all of 'byteCount' could be used.
+ *	srcPtr, or to the last character in the TkText if there aren't "count"
+ *	bytes left.
+ *
+ *	In this latter case, the function returns '1' to indicate that not all
+ *	of 'byteCount' could be used.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1360,7 +1394,7 @@ int
 TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
     CONST TkText *textPtr;
     CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr;	/* Source index. */
-    int byteCount;		/* How many bytes forward to move.  May be
+    int byteCount;		/* How many bytes forward to move. May be
 				 * negative. */
     TkTextIndex *dstPtr;	/* Destination index: gets modified. */
 {
@@ -1387,8 +1421,8 @@ TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * If the new index is in the same line then we're done.
-	 * Otherwise go on to the next line.
+	 * If the new index is in the same line then we're done. Otherwise go
+	 * on to the next line.
 	 */
 
 	if (dstPtr->byteIndex < lineLength) {
@@ -1409,19 +1443,18 @@ TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
  *
  * TkTextIndexForwChars --
  *
- *	Given an index for a text widget, this procedure creates a new
- *	index that points "count" items of type given by "type" ahead of
- *	the source index.  "count" can be zero, which is useful in
- *	the case where one wishes to move forward by display
- *	(non-elided) chars or indices or one wishes to move forward
- *	by chars, skipping any intervening indices.  In this case
- *	dstPtr will point to the first acceptable index which is
+ *	Given an index for a text widget, this function creates a new index
+ *	that points "count" items of type given by "type" ahead of the source
+ *	index. "count" can be zero, which is useful in the case where one
+ *	wishes to move forward by display (non-elided) chars or indices or one
+ *	wishes to move forward by chars, skipping any intervening indices. In
+ *	this case dstPtr will point to the first acceptable index which is
  *	encountered.
  *
  * Results:
- *	*dstPtr is modified to refer to the character "count" items
- *	after srcPtr, or to the last character in the TkText if there
- *	aren't sufficient items left in the widget.
+ *	*dstPtr is modified to refer to the character "count" items after
+ *	srcPtr, or to the last character in the TkText if there aren't
+ *	sufficient items left in the widget.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1431,12 +1464,12 @@ TkTextIndexForwBytes(textPtr, srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
 
 void
 TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr, type)
-    CONST TkText *textPtr;      /* Overall information about text widget. */
+    CONST TkText *textPtr;	/* Overall information about text widget. */
     CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr;	/* Source index. */
-    int charCount;		/* How many characters forward to move.
-				 * May be negative. */
+    int charCount;		/* How many characters forward to move. May
+				 * be negative. */
     TkTextIndex *dstPtr;	/* Destination index: gets modified. */
-    TkTextCountType type;       /* The type of item to count */
+    TkTextCountType type;	/* The type of item to count */
 {
     TkTextLine *linePtr;
     TkTextSegment *segPtr;
@@ -1446,7 +1479,7 @@ TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr, type)
     Tcl_UniChar ch;
     int elide = 0;
     int checkElided = (type & COUNT_DISPLAY);
-    
+
     if (charCount < 0) {
 	TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, srcPtr, -charCount, dstPtr, type);
 	return;
@@ -1459,21 +1492,22 @@ TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr, type)
     *dstPtr = *srcPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Find seg that contains src byteIndex.
-     * Move forward specified number of chars.
+     * Find seg that contains src byteIndex. Move forward specified number of
+     * chars.
      */
 
     if (checkElided) {
-	/* 
-	 * In this case we have already calculated the information
-	 * we need, so no need to use TkTextIndexToSeg()
+	/*
+	 * In this case we have already calculated the information we need, so
+	 * no need to use TkTextIndexToSeg()
 	 */
+
 	segPtr = infoPtr->segPtr;
 	byteOffset = dstPtr->byteIndex - infoPtr->segOffset;
     } else {
 	segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(dstPtr, &byteOffset);
     }
-    
+
     while (1) {
 	/*
 	 * Go through each segment in line looking for specified character
@@ -1483,61 +1517,62 @@ TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr, type)
 	for ( ; segPtr != NULL; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    /*
 	     * If we do need to pay attention to the visibility of
-	     * characters/indices, check that first.  If the current
-	     * segment isn't visible, then we simply continue the
-	     * loop
+	     * characters/indices, check that first. If the current segment
+	     * isn't visible, then we simply continue the loop
 	     */
-	    if (checkElided) {
-		if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)
-		    || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) {		
-		    TkTextTag *tagPtr = segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr;
-		    /*
-		     * The elide state only changes if this tag is
-		     * either the current highest priority tag
-		     * (and is therefore being toggled off), or it's
-		     * a new tag with higher priority.
-		     */
-		    if (tagPtr->elideString != NULL) {
-			infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++;
-			if (infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority] & 1) {
-			    infoPtr->tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr;
-			}
-			if (tagPtr->priority >= infoPtr->elidePriority) {
-			    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) {
-				/* 
-				 * If it is being toggled off, and it has
-				 * an elide string, it must actually be the
-				 * current highest priority tag, so this
-				 * check is redundant:
-				 */
-				if (tagPtr->priority != infoPtr->elidePriority) {
-				    Tcl_Panic("Bad tag priority being toggled off");
-				}
-			    
-				/* 
-				 * Find previous elide tag, if any (if not
-				 * then elide will be zero, of course).
-				 */
-				elide = 0;
-				while (--infoPtr->elidePriority > 0) {
-				    if (infoPtr->tagCnts[infoPtr->elidePriority] 
+
+	    if (checkElided && ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)
+		    || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType))) {
+		TkTextTag *tagPtr = segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr;
+
+		/*
+		 * The elide state only changes if this tag is either the
+		 * current highest priority tag (and is therefore being
+		 * toggled off), or it's a new tag with higher priority.
+		 */
+
+		if (tagPtr->elideString != NULL) {
+		    infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++;
+		    if (infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority] & 1) {
+			infoPtr->tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr;
+		    }
+
+		    if (tagPtr->priority >= infoPtr->elidePriority) {
+			if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) {
+			    /*
+			     * If it is being toggled off, and it has an elide
+			     * string, it must actually be the current highest
+			     * priority tag, so this check is redundant:
+			     */
+
+			    if (tagPtr->priority != infoPtr->elidePriority) {
+				Tcl_Panic("Bad tag priority being toggled off");
+			    }
+
+			    /*
+			     * Find previous elide tag, if any (if not then
+			     * elide will be zero, of course).
+			     */
+
+			    elide = 0;
+			    while (--infoPtr->elidePriority > 0) {
+				if (infoPtr->tagCnts[infoPtr->elidePriority]
 					& 1) {
-					elide = infoPtr->tagPtrs
+				    elide = infoPtr->tagPtrs
 					    [infoPtr->elidePriority]->elide;
-					break;
-				    }
+				    break;
 				}
-			    } else {
-				elide = tagPtr->elide;
-				infoPtr->elidePriority = tagPtr->priority;
 			    }
+			} else {
+			    elide = tagPtr->elide;
+			    infoPtr->elidePriority = tagPtr->priority;
 			}
 		    }
 		}
 	    }
 
 	    if (!elide) {
-	        if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
+		if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
 		    start = segPtr->body.chars + byteOffset;
 		    end = segPtr->body.chars + segPtr->size;
 		    for (p = start; p < end; p += Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch)) {
@@ -1547,27 +1582,24 @@ TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr, type)
 			}
 			charCount--;
 		    }
-		} else {
-		    if (type & COUNT_INDICES) {
-			if (charCount < segPtr->size - byteOffset) {
-			    dstPtr->byteIndex += charCount;
-			    goto forwardCharDone;
-			}
-			charCount -= segPtr->size - byteOffset;
+		} else if (type & COUNT_INDICES) {
+		    if (charCount < segPtr->size - byteOffset) {
+			dstPtr->byteIndex += charCount;
+			goto forwardCharDone;
 		    }
+		    charCount -= segPtr->size - byteOffset;
 		}
 	    }
-	    
+
 	    dstPtr->byteIndex += segPtr->size - byteOffset;
 	    byteOffset = 0;
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Go to the next line.  If we are at the end of the text item,
-	 * back up one byte (for the terminal '\n' character) and return
-	 * that index.
+	 * Go to the next line. If we are at the end of the text item, back up
+	 * one byte (for the terminal '\n' character) and return that index.
 	 */
-	 
+
 	linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, dstPtr->linePtr);
 	if (linePtr == NULL) {
 	    dstPtr->byteIndex -= sizeof(char);
@@ -1577,6 +1609,7 @@ TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr, type)
 	dstPtr->byteIndex = 0;
 	segPtr = dstPtr->linePtr->segPtr;
     }
+
   forwardCharDone:
     if (infoPtr != NULL) {
 	TkTextFreeElideInfo(infoPtr);
@@ -1589,19 +1622,18 @@ TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr, type)
  *
  * TkTextIndexCount --
  *
- *	Given an ordered pair of indices in a text widget, this
- *	procedure counts how many characters (not bytes) are between 
- *	the two indices.
- *	
- *	It is illegal to call this procedure with unordered indices.
- *	
- *	Note that 'textPtr' is only used if we need to check for
- *	elided attributes, i.e. if type is COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES or
+ *	Given an ordered pair of indices in a text widget, this function
+ *	counts how many characters (not bytes) are between the two indices.
+ *
+ *	It is illegal to call this function with unordered indices.
+ *
+ *	Note that 'textPtr' is only used if we need to check for elided
+ *	attributes, i.e. if type is COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES or
  *	COUNT_DISPLAY_CHARS.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The number of characters in the given range, which meet
- *	the appropriate 'type' attributes.
+ *	The number of characters in the given range, which meet the
+ *	appropriate 'type' attributes.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1611,13 +1643,14 @@ TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr, type)
 
 int
 TkTextIndexCount(textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, type)
-    CONST TkText *textPtr;	 /* Overall information about text widget. */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr1;/* Index describing location of
-                                  * character from which to count. */
-    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr2;/* Index describing location of last
-				  * character at which to stop the
-				  * count. */
-    TkTextCountType type;        /* The kind of indices to count */
+    CONST TkText *textPtr;	/* Overall information about text widget. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr1;
+				/* Index describing location of character from
+				 * which to count. */
+    CONST TkTextIndex *indexPtr2;
+				/* Index describing location of last character
+				 * at which to stop the count. */
+    TkTextCountType type;	/* The kind of indices to count. */
 {
     TkTextLine *linePtr1;
     TkTextSegment *segPtr, *seg2Ptr = NULL;
@@ -1628,43 +1661,43 @@ TkTextIndexCount(textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, type)
     int checkElided = (type & COUNT_DISPLAY);
 
     /*
-     * Find seg that contains src index, and remember
-     * how many bytes not to count in the given segment.
+     * Find seg that contains src index, and remember how many bytes not to
+     * count in the given segment.
      */
 
     segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr1, &byteOffset);
     linePtr1 = indexPtr1->linePtr;
-    
+
     seg2Ptr = TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr2, &maxBytes);
 
     if (checkElided) {
 	infoPtr = (TkTextElideInfo*)ckalloc((unsigned)sizeof(TkTextElideInfo));
 	elide = TkTextIsElided(textPtr, indexPtr1, infoPtr);
     }
-	
+
     while (1) {
 	/*
-	 * Go through each segment in line adding up the number
-	 * of characters.
+	 * Go through each segment in line adding up the number of characters.
 	 */
-	
+
 	for ( ; segPtr != NULL; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    /*
 	     * If we do need to pay attention to the visibility of
-	     * characters/indices, check that first.  If the current
-	     * segment isn't visible, then we simply continue the
-	     * loop
+	     * characters/indices, check that first. If the current segment
+	     * isn't visible, then we simply continue the loop.
 	     */
+
 	    if (checkElided) {
 		if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)
-		  || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) {
+			|| (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) {
 		    TkTextTag *tagPtr = segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr;
+
 		    /*
-		     * The elide state only changes if this tag is
-		     * either the current highest priority tag
-		     * (and is therefore being toggled off), or it's
-		     * a new tag with higher priority.
+		     * The elide state only changes if this tag is either the
+		     * current highest priority tag (and is therefore being
+		     * toggled off), or it's a new tag with higher priority.
 		     */
+
 		    if (tagPtr->elideString != NULL) {
 			infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++;
 			if (infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority] & 1) {
@@ -1672,26 +1705,28 @@ TkTextIndexCount(textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, type)
 			}
 			if (tagPtr->priority >= infoPtr->elidePriority) {
 			    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType) {
-				/* 
-				 * If it is being toggled off, and it has
-				 * an elide string, it must actually be the
-				 * current highest priority tag, so this
-				 * check is redundant:
+				/*
+				 * If it is being toggled off, and it has an
+				 * elide string, it must actually be the
+				 * current highest priority tag, so this check
+				 * is redundant:
 				 */
-				if (tagPtr->priority != infoPtr->elidePriority) {
+
+				if (tagPtr->priority!=infoPtr->elidePriority) {
 				    Tcl_Panic("Bad tag priority being toggled off");
 				}
-				
-				/* 
+
+				/*
 				 * Find previous elide tag, if any (if not
 				 * then elide will be zero, of course).
 				 */
+
 				elide = 0;
 				while (--infoPtr->elidePriority > 0) {
-				    if (infoPtr->tagCnts[infoPtr->elidePriority] 
-					& 1) {
-					elide = infoPtr->tagPtrs
-					  [infoPtr->elidePriority]->elide;
+				    if (infoPtr->tagCnts[
+					    infoPtr->elidePriority] & 1) {
+					elide = infoPtr->tagPtrs[
+						infoPtr->elidePriority]->elide;
 					break;
 				    }
 				}
@@ -1710,29 +1745,34 @@ TkTextIndexCount(textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, type)
 		    continue;
 		}
 	    }
-	    
+
 	    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
 		int byteLen = segPtr->size - byteOffset;
-		register unsigned char *str = 
-                  (unsigned char *) segPtr->body.chars + byteOffset;
+		register unsigned char *str = (unsigned char *)
+			segPtr->body.chars + byteOffset;
 		register int i;
 
 		if (segPtr == seg2Ptr) {
 		    if (byteLen > (maxBytes - byteOffset)) {
-		        byteLen = maxBytes - byteOffset;
+			byteLen = maxBytes - byteOffset;
 		    }
 		}
 		i = byteLen;
-		
+
 		/*
-		 * This is a speed sensitive function, so run specially over the
-		 * string to count continuous ascii characters before resorting
-		 * to the Tcl_NumUtfChars call.  This is a long form of:
-		 * stringPtr->numChars = 
-		 *   Tcl_NumUtfChars(objPtr->bytes, objPtr->length);
+		 * This is a speed sensitive function, so run specially over
+		 * the string to count continuous ascii characters before
+		 * resorting to the Tcl_NumUtfChars call. This is a long form
+		 * of:
+		 *
+		 *   stringPtr->numChars =
+		 *	     Tcl_NumUtfChars(objPtr->bytes, objPtr->length);
 		 */
 
-		while (i && (*str < 0xC0)) { i--; str++; }
+		while (i && (*str < 0xC0)) {
+		    i--;
+		    str++;
+		}
 		count += byteLen - i;
 		if (i) {
 		    count += Tcl_NumUtfChars(segPtr->body.chars + byteOffset
@@ -1741,6 +1781,7 @@ TkTextIndexCount(textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, type)
 	    } else {
 		if (type & COUNT_INDICES) {
 		    int byteLen = segPtr->size - byteOffset;
+
 		    if (segPtr == seg2Ptr) {
 			if (byteLen > (maxBytes - byteOffset)) {
 			    byteLen = maxBytes - byteOffset;
@@ -1756,17 +1797,17 @@ TkTextIndexCount(textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, type)
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Go to the next line.  If we are at the end of the text item,
-	 * back up one byte (for the terminal '\n' character) and return
-	 * that index.
+	 * Go to the next line. If we are at the end of the text item, back up
+	 * one byte (for the terminal '\n' character) and return that index.
 	 */
-	 
+
 	linePtr1 = TkBTreeNextLine(textPtr, linePtr1);
 	if (linePtr1 == NULL) {
 	    Tcl_Panic("Reached end of text widget when counting characters");
 	}
 	segPtr = linePtr1->segPtr;
     }
+
   countDone:
     if (infoPtr != NULL) {
 	TkTextFreeElideInfo(infoPtr);
@@ -1774,22 +1815,22 @@ TkTextIndexCount(textPtr, indexPtr1, indexPtr2, type)
     }
     return count;
 }
-	
+
 /*
  *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkTextIndexBackBytes --
  *
- *	Given an index for a text widget, this procedure creates a new
- *	index that points "count" bytes earlier than the source index.
+ *	Given an index for a text widget, this function creates a new index
+ *	that points "count" bytes earlier than the source index.
  *
  * Results:
  *	*dstPtr is modified to refer to the character "count" bytes before
  *	srcPtr, or to the first character in the TkText if there aren't
  *	"count" bytes earlier than srcPtr.
- *	
- *	Returns 1 if we couldn't use all of 'byteCount' because we 
- *	have run into the beginning or end of the text, and zero otherwise.
+ *
+ *	Returns 1 if we couldn't use all of 'byteCount' because we have run
+ *	into the beginning or end of the text, and zero otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1801,7 +1842,7 @@ int
 TkTextIndexBackBytes(textPtr, srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
     CONST TkText *textPtr;
     CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr;	/* Source index. */
-    int byteCount;		/* How many bytes backward to move.  May be
+    int byteCount;		/* How many bytes backward to move. May be
 				 * negative. */
     TkTextIndex *dstPtr;	/* Destination index: gets modified. */
 {
@@ -1817,8 +1858,8 @@ TkTextIndexBackBytes(textPtr, srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
     lineIndex = -1;
     while (dstPtr->byteIndex < 0) {
 	/*
-	 * Move back one line in the text.  If we run off the beginning
-	 * of the file then just return the first character in the text.
+	 * Move back one line in the text. If we run off the beginning of the
+	 * file then just return the first character in the text.
 	 */
 
 	if (lineIndex < 0) {
@@ -1848,19 +1889,18 @@ TkTextIndexBackBytes(textPtr, srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
  *
  * TkTextIndexBackChars --
  *
- *	Given an index for a text widget, this procedure creates a new
- *	index that points "count" items of type given by "type" earlier
- *	than the source index.  "count" can be zero, which is useful in
- *	the case where one wishes to move backward by display
- *	(non-elided) chars or indices or one wishes to move backward by
- *	chars, skipping any intervening indices.  In this case the
- *	returned index *dstPtr will point just _after_ the first
- *	acceptable index which is encountered.
+ *	Given an index for a text widget, this function creates a new index
+ *	that points "count" items of type given by "type" earlier than the
+ *	source index. "count" can be zero, which is useful in the case where
+ *	one wishes to move backward by display (non-elided) chars or indices
+ *	or one wishes to move backward by chars, skipping any intervening
+ *	indices. In this case the returned index *dstPtr will point just
+ *	_after_ the first acceptable index which is encountered.
  *
  * Results:
- *	*dstPtr is modified to refer to the character "count" items
- *	before srcPtr, or to the first index in the window if there
- *	aren't sufficient items earlier than srcPtr.
+ *	*dstPtr is modified to refer to the character "count" items before
+ *	srcPtr, or to the first index in the window if there aren't sufficient
+ *	items earlier than srcPtr.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1870,12 +1910,12 @@ TkTextIndexBackBytes(textPtr, srcPtr, byteCount, dstPtr)
 
 void
 TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr, type)
-    CONST TkText *textPtr;      /* Overall information about text widget. */
+    CONST TkText *textPtr;	/* Overall information about text widget. */
     CONST TkTextIndex *srcPtr;	/* Source index. */
-    int charCount;		/* How many characters backward to move.
-				 * May be negative. */
+    int charCount;		/* How many characters backward to move. May
+				 * be negative. */
     TkTextIndex *dstPtr;	/* Destination index: gets modified. */
-    TkTextCountType type;       /* The type of item to count */
+    TkTextCountType type;	/* The type of item to count */
 {
     TkTextSegment *segPtr, *oldPtr;
     TkTextElideInfo *infoPtr = NULL;
@@ -1889,21 +1929,21 @@ TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr, type)
 	return;
     }
     if (checkElided) {
-	infoPtr = (TkTextElideInfo*)ckalloc((unsigned)sizeof(TkTextElideInfo));
+	infoPtr = (TkTextElideInfo *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextElideInfo));
 	elide = TkTextIsElided(textPtr, srcPtr, infoPtr);
     }
-    
+
     *dstPtr = *srcPtr;
 
     /*
-     * Find offset within seg that contains byteIndex.
-     * Move backward specified number of chars.
+     * Find offset within seg that contains byteIndex. Move backward specified
+     * number of chars.
      */
 
     lineIndex = -1;
-    
+
     segSize = dstPtr->byteIndex;
-    
+
     if (checkElided) {
 	segPtr = infoPtr->segPtr;
 	segSize -= infoPtr->segOffset;
@@ -1911,10 +1951,11 @@ TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr, type)
 	TkTextLine *linePtr = dstPtr->linePtr;
 	for (segPtr = linePtr->segPtr; ; segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
 	    if (segPtr == NULL) {
-		/* 
-		 * Two logical lines merged into one display line 
-		 * through eliding of a newline
+		/*
+		 * Two logical lines merged into one display line through
+		 * eliding of a newline.
 		 */
+
 		linePtr = TkBTreeNextLine(NULL, linePtr);
 		segPtr = linePtr->segPtr;
 	    }
@@ -1924,59 +1965,61 @@ TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr, type)
 	    segSize -= segPtr->size;
 	}
     }
-    /* 
+
+    /*
      * Now segPtr points to the segment containing the starting index
      */
+
     while (1) {
 	/*
 	 * If we do need to pay attention to the visibility of
-	 * characters/indices, check that first.  If the current
-	 * segment isn't visible, then we simply continue the
-	 * loop
+	 * characters/indices, check that first. If the current segment isn't
+	 * visible, then we simply continue the loop.
 	 */
-	if (checkElided) {
-	    if ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)
-	      || (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)) {		
-		TkTextTag *tagPtr = segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr;
-		/*
-		 * The elide state only changes if this tag is
-		 * either the current highest priority tag
-		 * (and is therefore being toggled off), or it's
-		 * a new tag with higher priority.
-		 */
-		if (tagPtr->elideString != NULL) {
-		    infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++;
-		    if (infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority] & 1) {
-			infoPtr->tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr;
-		    }
-		    if (tagPtr->priority >= infoPtr->elidePriority) {
-			if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType) {
-			    /* 
-			     * If it is being toggled on, and it has
-			     * an elide string, it must actually be the
-			     * current highest priority tag, so this
-			     * check is redundant:
-			     */
-			    if (tagPtr->priority != infoPtr->elidePriority) {
-				Tcl_Panic("Bad tag priority being toggled on");
-			    }
-						    
-			    /* 
-			     * Find previous elide tag, if any (if not
-			     * then elide will be zero, of course).
-			     */
-			    elide = 0;
-			    while (--infoPtr->elidePriority > 0) {
-				if (infoPtr->tagCnts[infoPtr->elidePriority] & 1) {
-				    elide = infoPtr->tagPtrs
-				              [infoPtr->elidePriority]->elide;
-				    break;
-				}
+
+	if (checkElided && ((segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOffType)
+		|| (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType))) {
+	    TkTextTag *tagPtr = segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr;
+
+	    /*
+	     * The elide state only changes if this tag is either the current
+	     * highest priority tag (and is therefore being toggled off), or
+	     * it's a new tag with higher priority.
+	     */
+
+	    if (tagPtr->elideString != NULL) {
+		infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority]++;
+		if (infoPtr->tagCnts[tagPtr->priority] & 1) {
+		    infoPtr->tagPtrs[tagPtr->priority] = tagPtr;
+		}
+		if (tagPtr->priority >= infoPtr->elidePriority) {
+		    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType) {
+			/*
+			 * If it is being toggled on, and it has an elide
+			 * string, it must actually be the current highest
+			 * priority tag, so this check is redundant:
+			 */
+
+			if (tagPtr->priority != infoPtr->elidePriority) {
+			    Tcl_Panic("Bad tag priority being toggled on");
+			}
+
+			/*
+			 * Find previous elide tag, if any (if not then elide
+			 * will be zero, of course).
+			 */
+
+			elide = 0;
+			while (--infoPtr->elidePriority > 0) {
+			    if (infoPtr->tagCnts[infoPtr->elidePriority] & 1) {
+				elide = infoPtr->tagPtrs[
+					infoPtr->elidePriority]->elide;
+				break;
 			    }
-			} else {
-			    elide = tagPtr->elide;
-			    infoPtr->elidePriority = tagPtr->priority;
 			}
+		    } else {
+			elide = tagPtr->elide;
+			infoPtr->elidePriority = tagPtr->priority;
 		    }
 		}
 	    }
@@ -2048,6 +2091,7 @@ TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr, type)
 	segPtr = oldPtr;
 	segSize = segPtr->size;
     }
+
   backwardCharDone:
     if (infoPtr != NULL) {
 	TkTextFreeElideInfo(infoPtr);
@@ -2060,14 +2104,14 @@ TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr, type)
  *
  * StartEnd --
  *
- *	This procedure handles modifiers like "wordstart" and "lineend"
- *	to adjust indices forwards or backwards.
+ *	This function handles modifiers like "wordstart" and "lineend" to
+ *	adjust indices forwards or backwards.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If the modifier is successfully parsed then the return value
- *	is the address of the first character after the modifier, and
- *	*indexPtr is updated to reflect the modifier. If there is a
- *	syntax error in the modifier then NULL is returned.
+ *	If the modifier is successfully parsed then the return value is the
+ *	address of the first character after the modifier, and *indexPtr is
+ *	updated to reflect the modifier. If there is a syntax error in the
+ *	modifier then NULL is returned.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -2078,17 +2122,16 @@ TkTextIndexBackChars(textPtr, srcPtr, charCount, dstPtr, type)
 static CONST char *
 StartEnd(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
     TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget. */
-    CONST char *string;		/* String to parse for additional info
-				 * about modifier (count and units). 
-				 * Points to first character of modifer
-				 * word. */
+    CONST char *string;		/* String to parse for additional info about
+				 * modifier (count and units). Points to first
+				 * character of modifer word. */
     TkTextIndex *indexPtr;	/* Index to modify based on string. */
 {
     CONST char *p;
     size_t length;
     register TkTextSegment *segPtr;
     int modifier;
-    
+
     /*
      * Find the end of the modifier word.
      */
@@ -2096,15 +2139,16 @@ StartEnd(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
     for (p = string; isalnum(UCHAR(*p)); p++) {
 	/* Empty loop body. */
     }
+
     length = p-string;
-    if ((*string == 'd') && (strncmp(string, "display", 
-				     (length > 7 ? 7 : length)) == 0)) {
+    if ((*string == 'd') &&
+	    (strncmp(string, "display", (length > 7 ? 7 : length)) == 0)) {
 	modifier = TKINDEX_DISPLAY;
 	if (length > 7) {
 	    p -= (length - 7);
 	}
-    } else if ((*string == 'a') && (strncmp(string, "any", 
-					    (length > 3 ? 3 : length)) == 0)) {
+    } else if ((*string == 'a') &&
+	    (strncmp(string, "any", (length > 3 ? 3 : length)) == 0)) {
 	modifier = TKINDEX_ANY;
 	if (length > 3) {
 	    p -= (length - 3);
@@ -2112,17 +2156,18 @@ StartEnd(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
     } else {
 	modifier = TKINDEX_NONE;
     }
-    
-    /* 
-     * If we had a modifier, which we interpreted ok, so now forward
-     * to the actual units.
+
+    /*
+     * If we had a modifier, which we interpreted ok, so now forward to the
+     * actual units.
      */
+
     if (modifier != TKINDEX_NONE) {
 	while (isspace(UCHAR(*p))) {
 	    p++;
 	}
-	string = p; 
-	while ((*p != '\0') && !isspace(UCHAR(*p)) && (*p != '+') && (*p != '-')) {
+	string = p;
+	while ((*p!='\0') && !isspace(UCHAR(*p)) && (*p!='+') && (*p!='-')) {
 	    p++;
 	}
 	length = p - string;
@@ -2138,7 +2183,11 @@ StartEnd(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 		    segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
 		indexPtr->byteIndex += segPtr->size;
 	    }
-	    /* We know '\n' is encoded with a single byte index */
+
+	    /*
+	     * We know '\n' is encoded with a single byte index.
+	     */
+
 	    indexPtr->byteIndex -= sizeof(char);
 	}
     } else if ((*string == 'l') && (strncmp(string, "linestart", length) == 0)
@@ -2155,19 +2204,21 @@ StartEnd(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 
 	/*
 	 * If the current character isn't part of a word then just move
-	 * forward one character.  Otherwise move forward until finding
-	 * a character that isn't part of a word and stop there.
+	 * forward one character. Otherwise move forward until finding a
+	 * character that isn't part of a word and stop there.
 	 */
 
 	if (modifier == TKINDEX_DISPLAY) {
-	    TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, indexPtr, 
-				 COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
+	    TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 0, indexPtr,
+		    COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
 	}
 	segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr, &offset);
 	while (1) {
 	    int chSize = 1;
+
 	    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
 		Tcl_UniChar ch;
+
 		chSize = Tcl_UtfToUniChar(segPtr->body.chars + offset, &ch);
 		if (!Tcl_UniCharIsWordChar(ch)) {
 		    break;
@@ -2182,11 +2233,11 @@ StartEnd(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	}
 	if (firstChar) {
 	    if (modifier == TKINDEX_DISPLAY) {
-		TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr, 
-				     COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
+		TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr,
+			COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
 	    } else {
-		TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr, 
-				     COUNT_INDICES);
+		TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr,
+			COUNT_INDICES);
 	    }
 	}
     } else if ((*string == 'w') && (strncmp(string, "wordstart", length) == 0)
@@ -2195,29 +2246,32 @@ StartEnd(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 	int offset;
 
 	if (modifier == TKINDEX_DISPLAY) {
-	    TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, indexPtr, 0, indexPtr, 
-				 COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
+	    TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, indexPtr, 0, indexPtr,
+		    COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
 	}
+
 	/*
-	 * Starting with the current character, look for one that's not
-	 * part of a word and keep moving backward until you find one.
-	 * Then if the character found wasn't the first one, move forward
-	 * again one position.
+	 * Starting with the current character, look for one that's not part
+	 * of a word and keep moving backward until you find one. Then if the
+	 * character found wasn't the first one, move forward again one
+	 * position.
 	 */
 
 	segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr, &offset);
 	while (1) {
 	    int chSize = 1;
+
 	    if (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextCharType) {
 		Tcl_UniChar ch;
+
 		Tcl_UtfToUniChar(segPtr->body.chars + offset, &ch);
 		if (!Tcl_UniCharIsWordChar(ch)) {
 		    break;
 		}
 		if (offset > 0) {
-		    chSize = (segPtr->body.chars + offset 
-			      - Tcl_UtfPrev(segPtr->body.chars + offset, 
-					    segPtr->body.chars));
+		    chSize = (segPtr->body.chars + offset
+			    - Tcl_UtfPrev(segPtr->body.chars + offset,
+			    segPtr->body.chars));
 		}
 		firstChar = 0;
 	    } else {
@@ -2232,18 +2286,28 @@ StartEnd(textPtr, string, indexPtr)
 		segPtr = TkTextIndexToSeg(indexPtr, &offset);
 	    }
 	}
+
 	if (!firstChar) {
 	    if (modifier == TKINDEX_DISPLAY) {
-		TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr, 
-				     COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
+		TkTextIndexForwChars(textPtr, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr,
+			COUNT_DISPLAY_INDICES);
 	    } else {
-		TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr, 
-				     COUNT_INDICES);
+		TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL, indexPtr, 1, indexPtr,
+			COUNT_INDICES);
 	    }
 	}
     } else {
 	return NULL;
     }
-    done:
+
+  done:
     return p;
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/generic/tkTextTag.c b/generic/tkTextTag.c
index eb09566..00d350a 100644
--- a/generic/tkTextTag.c
+++ b/generic/tkTextTag.c
@@ -1,17 +1,17 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkTextTag.c --
  *
- *	This module implements the "tag" subcommand of the widget command
- *	for text widgets, plus most of the other high-level functions
- *	related to tags.
+ *	This module implements the "tag" subcommand of the widget command for
+ *	text widgets, plus most of the other high-level functions related to
+ *	tags.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
  * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkTextTag.c,v 1.19 2004/10/05 01:26:10 hobbs Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkTextTag.c,v 1.20 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include "default.h"
@@ -20,10 +20,10 @@
 #include "tkText.h"
 
 /*
- * The 'TkWrapMode' enum in tkText.h is used to define a type for the
- * -wrap option of tags in a Text widget.  These values are used as
- * indices into the string table below.  Tags are allowed an empty wrap
- * value, but the widget as a whole is not.
+ * The 'TkWrapMode' enum in tkText.h is used to define a type for the -wrap
+ * option of tags in a Text widget. These values are used as indices into the
+ * string table below. Tags are allowed an empty wrap value, but the widget as
+ * a whole is not.
  */
 
 static char *wrapStrings[] = {
@@ -32,9 +32,9 @@ static char *wrapStrings[] = {
 
 static Tk_OptionSpec tagOptionSpecs[] = {
     {TK_OPTION_BORDER, "-background", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, border), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, border), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-bgstipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, bgStipple), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, bgStipple), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_PIXELS, "-borderwidth", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
 	"0", Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, borderWidthPtr), Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, borderWidth),
 	TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT|TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
@@ -42,34 +42,34 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec tagOptionSpecs[] = {
 	"0", -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, elideString),
 	TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT|TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_BITMAP, "-fgstipple", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, fgStipple), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, fgStipple), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_FONT, "-font", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, tkfont), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, tkfont), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_COLOR, "-foreground", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, fgColor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, fgColor), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-justify", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, justifyString), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, justifyString), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0,0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-lmargin1", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, lMargin1String), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, lMargin1String), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-lmargin2", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, lMargin2String), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, lMargin2String), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-offset", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, offsetString), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, offsetString), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-overstrike", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
 	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, overstrikeString),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-relief", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, reliefString), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, reliefString), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-rmargin", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, rMarginString), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, rMarginString), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0,0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-spacing1", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, spacing1String), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, spacing1String), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-spacing2", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, spacing2String), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, spacing2String), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-spacing3", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, spacing3String), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, spacing3String), TK_OPTION_NULL_OK,0,0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-tabs", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
-	(char *) NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, tabStringPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
+	NULL, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, tabStringPtr), -1, TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
     {TK_OPTION_STRING, "-underline", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL,
 	(char *) NULL, -1, Tk_Offset(TkTextTag, underlineString),
 	TK_OPTION_NULL_OK, 0, 0},
@@ -80,29 +80,26 @@ static Tk_OptionSpec tagOptionSpecs[] = {
 };
 
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		ChangeTagPriority _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr,
-			    TkTextTag *tagPtr, int prio));
-static TkTextTag *	FindTag _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
-			    TkText *textPtr, Tcl_Obj *tagName));
-static void		SortTags _ANSI_ARGS_((int numTags,
-			    TkTextTag **tagArrayPtr));
-static int		TagSortProc _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST VOID *first,
-			    CONST VOID *second));
-static void             TagBindEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((TkText *textPtr, XEvent *eventPtr, 
-						  int numTags, TkTextTag **tagArrayPtr));
-
+static void		ChangeTagPriority(TkText *textPtr, TkTextTag *tagPtr,
+			    int prio);
+static TkTextTag *	FindTag(Tcl_Interp *interp, TkText *textPtr,
+			    Tcl_Obj *tagName);
+static void		SortTags(int numTags, TkTextTag **tagArrayPtr);
+static int		TagSortProc(CONST VOID *first, CONST VOID *second);
+static void             TagBindEvent(TkText *textPtr, XEvent *eventPtr,
+			    int numTags, TkTextTag **tagArrayPtr);
 
 /*
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  *
  * TkTextTagCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to process the "tag" options of
- *	the widget command for text widgets. See the user documentation
- *	for details on what it does.
+ *	This function is invoked to process the "tag" options of the widget
+ *	command for text widgets. See the user documentation for details on
+ *	what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard Tcl result.
@@ -123,11 +120,11 @@ TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 				 * objv[1] is "tag". */
 {
     int optionIndex;
-    
+
     static CONST char *tagOptionStrings[] = {
 	"add", "bind", "cget", "configure", "delete", "lower",
-	"names", "nextrange", "prevrange", "raise", "ranges", 
-	"remove", (char *) NULL 
+	"names", "nextrange", "prevrange", "raise", "ranges",
+	"remove", (char *) NULL
     };
     enum tagOptions {
 	TAG_ADD, TAG_BIND, TAG_CGET, TAG_CONFIGURE, TAG_DELETE,
@@ -143,753 +140,764 @@ TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
 	Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "option ?arg arg ...?");
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
-    
-    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], tagOptionStrings, 
-			    "tag option", 0, &optionIndex) != TCL_OK) {
+
+    if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[2], tagOptionStrings,
+	    "tag option", 0, &optionIndex) != TCL_OK) {
 	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     switch ((enum tagOptions)optionIndex) {
-	case TAG_ADD: 
-	case TAG_REMOVE: {
-	    int addTag;
-	    if (((enum tagOptions)optionIndex) == TAG_ADD) {
-	        addTag = 1;
-	    } else {
-		addTag = 0;
-	    }
-	    if (objc < 5) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, 
-				 "tagName index1 ?index2 index1 index2 ...?");
+    case TAG_ADD:
+    case TAG_REMOVE: {
+	int addTag;
+
+	if (((enum tagOptions)optionIndex) == TAG_ADD) {
+	    addTag = 1;
+	} else {
+	    addTag = 0;
+	}
+	if (objc < 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv,
+		    "tagName index1 ?index2 index1 index2 ...?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	tagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), NULL);
+	for (i = 4; i < objc; i += 2) {
+	    if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[i],
+		    &index1) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    tagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), NULL);
-	    for (i = 4; i < objc; i += 2) {
-		if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[i], 
-				      &index1) != TCL_OK) {
+	    if (objc > (i+1)) {
+		if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[i+1],
+			&index2) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (objc > (i+1)) {
-		    if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[i+1], &index2)
-			    != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index1, &index2) >= 0) {
-			return TCL_OK;
-		    }
-		} else {
-		    index2 = index1;
-		    TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL,&index2, 1, &index2, 
-					 COUNT_INDICES);
+		if (TkTextIndexCmp(&index1, &index2) >= 0) {
+		    return TCL_OK;
 		}
+	    } else {
+		index2 = index1;
+		TkTextIndexForwChars(NULL,&index2, 1, &index2, COUNT_INDICES);
+	    }
 
-		if (tagPtr->affectsDisplay) {
-		    TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, 
-				    &index1, &index2, tagPtr, !addTag);
-		} else {
-		    /*
-		     * Still need to trigger enter/leave events on tags that
-		     * have changed.
-		     */
+	    if (tagPtr->affectsDisplay) {
+		TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, &index1, &index2,
+			tagPtr, !addTag);
+	    } else {
+		/*
+		 * Still need to trigger enter/leave events on tags that have
+		 * changed.
+		 */
 
-		    TkTextEventuallyRepick(textPtr);
-		}
-		if (TkBTreeTag(&index1, &index2, tagPtr, addTag)) {
+		TkTextEventuallyRepick(textPtr);
+	    }
+	    if (TkBTreeTag(&index1, &index2, tagPtr, addTag)) {
+		/*
+		 * If the tag is "sel", and we actually adjusted something
+		 * then grab the selection if we're supposed to export it and
+		 * don't already have it.
+		 *
+		 * Also, invalidate partially-completed selection retrievals.
+		 * We only need to check whether the tag is "sel" for this
+		 * textPtr (not for other peer widget's "sel" tags) because we
+		 * cannot reach this code path with a different widget's "sel"
+		 * tag.
+		 */
+
+		if (tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) {
 		    /*
-		     * If the tag is "sel", and we actually adjusted
-		     * something then grab the selection if we're
-		     * supposed to export it and don't already have it.
-		     * 
-		     * Also, invalidate partially-completed selection
-		     * retrievals.  We only need to check whether the
-		     * tag is "sel" for this textPtr (not for other peer
-		     * widget's "sel" tags) because we cannot reach this
-		     * code path with a different widget's "sel" tag.
+		     * Send an event that the selection changed.  This is
+		     * equivalent to:
+		     *	   event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>
 		     */
 
-		    if (tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) {
-			/*
-			 * Send an event that the selection changed.
-			 * This is equivalent to
-			 * "event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>"
-			 */
-
-			TkTextSelectionEvent(textPtr);
+		    TkTextSelectionEvent(textPtr);
 
-			if (addTag && textPtr->exportSelection
-				&& !(textPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)) {
-			    Tk_OwnSelection(textPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY,
-				    TkTextLostSelection, (ClientData) textPtr);
-			    textPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
-			}
-			textPtr->abortSelections = 1;
+		    if (addTag && textPtr->exportSelection
+			    && !(textPtr->flags & GOT_SELECTION)) {
+			Tk_OwnSelection(textPtr->tkwin, XA_PRIMARY,
+				TkTextLostSelection, (ClientData) textPtr);
+			textPtr->flags |= GOT_SELECTION;
 		    }
+		    textPtr->abortSelections = 1;
 		}
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TAG_BIND: {
-	    if ((objc < 4) || (objc > 6)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, 
-				 "tagName ?sequence? ?command?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    tagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), NULL);
+	break;
+    }
+    case TAG_BIND:
+	if ((objc < 4) || (objc > 6)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?sequence? ?command?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	tagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), NULL);
 
-	    /*
-	     * Make a binding table if the widget doesn't already have
-	     * one.
-	     */
+	/*
+	 * Make a binding table if the widget doesn't already have one.
+	 */
 
-	    if (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable == NULL) {
-		textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable = Tk_CreateBindingTable(interp);
-	    }
+	if (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable == NULL) {
+	    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable =
+		    Tk_CreateBindingTable(interp);
+	}
 
-	    if (objc == 6) {
-		int append = 0;
-		unsigned long mask;
-		char *fifth = Tcl_GetString(objv[5]);
+	if (objc == 6) {
+	    int append = 0;
+	    unsigned long mask;
+	    char *fifth = Tcl_GetString(objv[5]);
 
-		if (fifth[0] == 0) {
-		    return Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
-			    (ClientData) tagPtr->name, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
-		}
-		if (fifth[0] == '+') {
-		    fifth++;
-		    append = 1;
-		}
-		mask = Tk_CreateBinding(interp, textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
-			(ClientData) tagPtr->name, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]), 
-					fifth, append);
-		if (mask == 0) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (mask & (unsigned) ~(ButtonMotionMask|Button1MotionMask
-			|Button2MotionMask|Button3MotionMask|Button4MotionMask
-			|Button5MotionMask|ButtonPressMask|ButtonReleaseMask
-			|EnterWindowMask|LeaveWindowMask|KeyPressMask
-			|KeyReleaseMask|PointerMotionMask|VirtualEventMask)) {
-		    Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
-			    (ClientData) tagPtr->name, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
-		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "requested illegal events; ",
-			 "only key, button, motion, enter, leave, and virtual ",
-			 "events may be used", (char *) NULL);
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-	    } else if (objc == 5) {
-		CONST char *command;
-	
-		command = Tk_GetBinding(interp, textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
+	    if (fifth[0] == 0) {
+		return Tk_DeleteBinding(interp,
+			textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
+			(ClientData) tagPtr->name, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
+	    }
+	    if (fifth[0] == '+') {
+		fifth++;
+		append = 1;
+	    }
+	    mask = Tk_CreateBinding(interp,
+		    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
+		    (ClientData) tagPtr->name, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]), fifth,
+		    append);
+	    if (mask == 0) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (mask & (unsigned) ~(ButtonMotionMask|Button1MotionMask
+		    |Button2MotionMask|Button3MotionMask|Button4MotionMask
+		    |Button5MotionMask|ButtonPressMask|ButtonReleaseMask
+		    |EnterWindowMask|LeaveWindowMask|KeyPressMask
+		    |KeyReleaseMask|PointerMotionMask|VirtualEventMask)) {
+		Tk_DeleteBinding(interp, textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
 			(ClientData) tagPtr->name, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
-		if (command == NULL) {
-		    CONST char *string = Tcl_GetStringResult(interp); 
+		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "requested illegal events; ",
+			"only key, button, motion, enter, leave, and virtual ",
+			"events may be used", (char *) NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	} else if (objc == 5) {
+	    CONST char *command;
 
-		    /*
-		     * Ignore missing binding errors.  This is a special hack
-		     * that relies on the error message returned by FindSequence
-		     * in tkBind.c.
-		     */
+	    command = Tk_GetBinding(interp,
+		    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
+		    (ClientData) tagPtr->name, Tcl_GetString(objv[4]));
+	    if (command == NULL) {
+		CONST char *string = Tcl_GetStringResult(interp);
 
-		    if (string[0] != '\0') {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    } else {
-			Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
-		    }
+		/*
+		 * Ignore missing binding errors. This is a special hack that
+		 * relies on the error message returned by FindSequence in
+		 * tkBind.c.
+		 */
+
+		if (string[0] != '\0') {
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *) command, TCL_STATIC);
+		    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
 		}
 	    } else {
-		Tk_GetAllBindings(interp, textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
-			(ClientData) tagPtr->name);
+		Tcl_SetResult(interp, (char *) command, TCL_STATIC);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    Tk_GetAllBindings(interp, textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
+		    (ClientData) tagPtr->name);
 	}
-	case TAG_CGET: {
-	    if (objc != 5) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "tag cget tagName option");
+	break;
+    case TAG_CGET:
+	if (objc != 5) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "tag cget tagName option");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
+
+	    tagPtr = FindTag(interp, textPtr, objv[3]);
+	    if (tagPtr == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) tagPtr,
+		    tagPtr->optionTable, objv[4], textPtr->tkwin);
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    } else {
-		Tcl_Obj *objPtr;
-		
-		tagPtr = FindTag(interp, textPtr, objv[3]);
-		if (tagPtr == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		objPtr = Tk_GetOptionValue(interp, (char *) tagPtr,
-					   tagPtr->optionTable, objv[4], 
-					   textPtr->tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		    return TCL_OK;
-		}
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+		return TCL_OK;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TAG_CONFIGURE: {
-	    int newTag;
-	    if (objc < 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, 
-				 "tagName ?option? ?value? ?option value ...?");
+	break;
+    case TAG_CONFIGURE: {
+	int newTag;
+
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv,
+		    "tagName ?option? ?value? ?option value ...?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	tagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &newTag);
+	if (objc <= 5) {
+	    Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) tagPtr,
+		    tagPtr->optionTable,
+		    (objc == 5) ? objv[4] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL, textPtr->tkwin);
+
+	    if (objPtr == NULL) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    tagPtr = TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, Tcl_GetString(objv[3]), &newTag);
-	    if (objc <= 5) {
-		Tcl_Obj* objPtr = Tk_GetOptionInfo(interp, (char *) tagPtr,
-						   tagPtr->optionTable,
-			(objc == 5) ? objv[4] : (Tcl_Obj *) NULL,
-					  textPtr->tkwin);
-		if (objPtr == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		} else {
-		    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
-		    return TCL_OK;
-		}
 	    } else {
-		int result = TCL_OK;
+		Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objPtr);
+		return TCL_OK;
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    int result = TCL_OK;
+
+	    if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char*)tagPtr, tagPtr->optionTable,
+		    objc-4, objv+4, textPtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
 
-		if (Tk_SetOptions(interp, (char*)tagPtr, tagPtr->optionTable,
-			objc-4, objv+4, textPtr->tkwin, NULL, NULL) != TCL_OK) {
+	    /*
+	     * Some of the configuration options, like -underline and
+	     * -justify, require additional translation (this is needed
+	     * because we need to distinguish a particular value of an option
+	     * from "unspecified").
+	     */
+
+	    if (tagPtr->borderWidth < 0) {
+		tagPtr->borderWidth = 0;
+	    }
+	    if (tagPtr->reliefString != NULL) {
+		if (Tk_GetRelief(interp, tagPtr->reliefString,
+			&tagPtr->relief) != TCL_OK) {
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		/*
-		 * Some of the configuration options, like -underline
-		 * and -justify, require additional translation (this is
-		 * needed because we need to distinguish a particular value
-		 * of an option from "unspecified").
-		 */
-
-		if (tagPtr->borderWidth < 0) {
-		    tagPtr->borderWidth = 0;
+	    }
+	    if (tagPtr->justifyString != NULL) {
+		if (Tk_GetJustify(interp, tagPtr->justifyString,
+			&tagPtr->justify) != TCL_OK) {
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (tagPtr->reliefString != NULL) {
-		    if (Tk_GetRelief(interp, tagPtr->reliefString,
-			    &tagPtr->relief) != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
+	    }
+	    if (tagPtr->lMargin1String != NULL) {
+		if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, textPtr->tkwin,
+			tagPtr->lMargin1String, &tagPtr->lMargin1) != TCL_OK) {
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (tagPtr->justifyString != NULL) {
-		    if (Tk_GetJustify(interp, tagPtr->justifyString,
-			    &tagPtr->justify) != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
+	    }
+	    if (tagPtr->lMargin2String != NULL) {
+		if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, textPtr->tkwin,
+			tagPtr->lMargin2String, &tagPtr->lMargin2) != TCL_OK) {
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (tagPtr->lMargin1String != NULL) {
-		    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, textPtr->tkwin,
-		      tagPtr->lMargin1String, &tagPtr->lMargin1) != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
+	    }
+	    if (tagPtr->offsetString != NULL) {
+		if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, textPtr->tkwin, tagPtr->offsetString,
+			&tagPtr->offset) != TCL_OK) {
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (tagPtr->lMargin2String != NULL) {
-		    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, textPtr->tkwin,
-		      tagPtr->lMargin2String, &tagPtr->lMargin2) != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
+	    }
+	    if (tagPtr->overstrikeString != NULL) {
+		if (Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, tagPtr->overstrikeString,
+			&tagPtr->overstrike) != TCL_OK) {
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (tagPtr->offsetString != NULL) {
-		    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, textPtr->tkwin, 
-				     tagPtr->offsetString,
-			    &tagPtr->offset) != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
+	    }
+	    if (tagPtr->rMarginString != NULL) {
+		if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, textPtr->tkwin,
+			tagPtr->rMarginString, &tagPtr->rMargin) != TCL_OK) {
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (tagPtr->overstrikeString != NULL) {
-		    if (Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, tagPtr->overstrikeString,
-			    &tagPtr->overstrike) != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
+	    }
+	    if (tagPtr->spacing1String != NULL) {
+		if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, textPtr->tkwin,
+			tagPtr->spacing1String, &tagPtr->spacing1) != TCL_OK) {
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (tagPtr->rMarginString != NULL) {
-		    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, textPtr->tkwin,
-			  tagPtr->rMarginString, &tagPtr->rMargin) != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
+		if (tagPtr->spacing1 < 0) {
+		    tagPtr->spacing1 = 0;
 		}
-		if (tagPtr->spacing1String != NULL) {
-		    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, textPtr->tkwin,
-		      tagPtr->spacing1String, &tagPtr->spacing1) != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    if (tagPtr->spacing1 < 0) {
-			tagPtr->spacing1 = 0;
-		    }
+	    }
+	    if (tagPtr->spacing2String != NULL) {
+		if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, textPtr->tkwin,
+			tagPtr->spacing2String, &tagPtr->spacing2) != TCL_OK) {
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (tagPtr->spacing2String != NULL) {
-		    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, textPtr->tkwin,
-		      tagPtr->spacing2String, &tagPtr->spacing2) != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    if (tagPtr->spacing2 < 0) {
-			tagPtr->spacing2 = 0;
-		    }
+		if (tagPtr->spacing2 < 0) {
+		    tagPtr->spacing2 = 0;
 		}
-		if (tagPtr->spacing3String != NULL) {
-		    if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, textPtr->tkwin,
-		      tagPtr->spacing3String, &tagPtr->spacing3) != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
-		    if (tagPtr->spacing3 < 0) {
-			tagPtr->spacing3 = 0;
-		    }
+	    }
+	    if (tagPtr->spacing3String != NULL) {
+		if (Tk_GetPixels(interp, textPtr->tkwin,
+			tagPtr->spacing3String, &tagPtr->spacing3) != TCL_OK) {
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (tagPtr->tabArrayPtr != NULL) {
-		    ckfree((char *) tagPtr->tabArrayPtr);
-		    tagPtr->tabArrayPtr = NULL;
+		if (tagPtr->spacing3 < 0) {
+		    tagPtr->spacing3 = 0;
 		}
-		if (tagPtr->tabStringPtr != NULL) {
-		    tagPtr->tabArrayPtr = TkTextGetTabs(interp, textPtr,
-			    tagPtr->tabStringPtr);
-		    if (tagPtr->tabArrayPtr == NULL) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
+	    }
+	    if (tagPtr->tabArrayPtr != NULL) {
+		ckfree((char *) tagPtr->tabArrayPtr);
+		tagPtr->tabArrayPtr = NULL;
+	    }
+	    if (tagPtr->tabStringPtr != NULL) {
+		tagPtr->tabArrayPtr =
+			TkTextGetTabs(interp, textPtr, tagPtr->tabStringPtr);
+		if (tagPtr->tabArrayPtr == NULL) {
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (tagPtr->underlineString != NULL) {
-		    if (Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, tagPtr->underlineString,
-			    &tagPtr->underline) != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
+	    }
+	    if (tagPtr->underlineString != NULL) {
+		if (Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, tagPtr->underlineString,
+			&tagPtr->underline) != TCL_OK) {
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
-		if (tagPtr->elideString != NULL) {
-		    if (Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, tagPtr->elideString,
-			    &tagPtr->elide) != TCL_OK) {
-			return TCL_ERROR;
-		    }
+	    }
+	    if (tagPtr->elideString != NULL) {
+		if (Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, tagPtr->elideString,
+			&tagPtr->elide) != TCL_OK) {
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * If the "sel" tag was changed, be sure to mirror information
+	     * from the tag back into the text widget record. NOTE: we don't
+	     * have to free up information in the widget record before
+	     * overwriting it, because it was mirrored in the tag and hence
+	     * freed when the tag field was overwritten.
+	     */
+
+	    if (tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) {
+		textPtr->selBorder = tagPtr->border;
+		textPtr->selBorderWidth = tagPtr->borderWidth;
+		textPtr->selBorderWidthPtr = tagPtr->borderWidthPtr;
+		textPtr->selFgColorPtr = tagPtr->fgColor;
+	    }
 
+	    tagPtr->affectsDisplay = 0;
+	    tagPtr->affectsDisplayGeometry = 0;
+	    if ((tagPtr->elideString != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->tkfont != None)
+		    || (tagPtr->justifyString != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->lMargin1String != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->lMargin2String != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->offsetString != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->rMarginString != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->spacing1String != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->spacing2String != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->spacing3String != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->tabStringPtr != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->wrapMode != TEXT_WRAPMODE_NULL)) {
+		tagPtr->affectsDisplay = 1;
+		tagPtr->affectsDisplayGeometry = 1;
+	    }
+	    if ((tagPtr->border != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->reliefString != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->bgStipple != None)
+		    || (tagPtr->fgColor != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->fgStipple != None)
+		    || (tagPtr->overstrikeString != NULL)
+		    || (tagPtr->underlineString != NULL)) {
+		tagPtr->affectsDisplay = 1;
+	    }
+	    if (!newTag) {
 		/*
-		 * If the "sel" tag was changed, be sure to mirror information
-		 * from the tag back into the text widget record.   NOTE: we
-		 * don't have to free up information in the widget record
-		 * before overwriting it, because it was mirrored in the tag
-		 * and hence freed when the tag field was overwritten.
+		 * This line is not necessary if this is a new tag, since it
+		 * can't possibly have been applied to anything yet.
 		 */
 
-		if (tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) {
-		    textPtr->selBorder = tagPtr->border;
-		    textPtr->selBorderWidth = tagPtr->borderWidth;
-		    textPtr->selBorderWidthPtr = tagPtr->borderWidthPtr;
-		    textPtr->selFgColorPtr = tagPtr->fgColor;
-		}
-		tagPtr->affectsDisplay = 0;
-		tagPtr->affectsDisplayGeometry = 0;
-		if ((tagPtr->elideString != NULL)
-			|| (tagPtr->tkfont != None)
-			|| (tagPtr->justifyString != NULL)
-			|| (tagPtr->lMargin1String != NULL)
-			|| (tagPtr->lMargin2String != NULL)
-			|| (tagPtr->offsetString != NULL)
-			|| (tagPtr->rMarginString != NULL)
-			|| (tagPtr->spacing1String != NULL)
-			|| (tagPtr->spacing2String != NULL)
-			|| (tagPtr->spacing3String != NULL)
-			|| (tagPtr->tabStringPtr != NULL)
-			|| (tagPtr->wrapMode != TEXT_WRAPMODE_NULL)) {
-		    tagPtr->affectsDisplay = 1;
-		    tagPtr->affectsDisplayGeometry = 1;
-		}
-		if ((tagPtr->border != NULL)
-			|| (tagPtr->reliefString != NULL)
-			|| (tagPtr->bgStipple != None)
-			|| (tagPtr->fgColor != NULL)
-			|| (tagPtr->fgStipple != None)
-			|| (tagPtr->overstrikeString != NULL)
-			|| (tagPtr->underlineString != NULL)) {
-		    tagPtr->affectsDisplay = 1;
-		}
-		if (!newTag) {
-		    /* 
-		     * This line is not necessary if this is a new tag,
-		     * since it can't possibly have been applied to
-		     * anything yet.
-		     */
-		    
-		    /*
-		     * VMD: If this is the 'sel' tag, then we don't
-		     * need to call this for all peers, unless we 
-		     * actually want to synchronize sel-style changes
-		     * across the peers.
-		     */
-		    TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, 
-				    (TkTextIndex *) NULL,
-				    (TkTextIndex *) NULL, tagPtr, 1);
-		}
-		return result;
+		/*
+		 * VMD: If this is the 'sel' tag, then we don't need to call
+		 * this for all peers, unless we actually want to synchronize
+		 * sel-style changes across the peers.
+		 */
+
+		TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+			(TkTextIndex *) NULL, (TkTextIndex *) NULL, tagPtr, 1);
 	    }
-	    break;
+	    return result;
 	}
-	case TAG_DELETE: {
-	    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+	break;
+    }
+    case TAG_DELETE: {
+	Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
 
-	    if (objc < 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?tagName ...?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    for (i = 3; i < objc; i++) {
-		hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable, 
-					 Tcl_GetString(objv[i]));
-		if (hPtr == NULL) {
-		    /* Either this tag doesn't exist or it's the 'sel'
-		     * tag (which is not in the hash table).  Either
-		     * way we don't want to delete it.
-		     */
-		    continue;
-		}
-		tagPtr = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-		if (tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) {
-		    continue;
-		}
-		if (tagPtr->affectsDisplay) {
-		    TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, 
-				    (TkTextIndex *) NULL,
-				    (TkTextIndex *) NULL, tagPtr, 1);
-		}
-		TkTextDeleteTag(textPtr, tagPtr);
-		Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hPtr);
-	    }
-	    break;
+	if (objc < 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?tagName ...?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
-	case TAG_LOWER: {
-	    TkTextTag *tagPtr2;
-	    int prio;
+	for (i = 3; i < objc; i++) {
+	    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable,
+		    Tcl_GetString(objv[i]));
+	    if (hPtr == NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * Either this tag doesn't exist or it's the 'sel' tag (which
+		 * is not in the hash table). Either way we don't want to
+		 * delete it.
+		 */
 
-	    if ((objc != 4) && (objc != 5)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?belowThis?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+		continue;
 	    }
-	    tagPtr = FindTag(interp, textPtr, objv[3]);
-	    if (tagPtr == NULL) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    tagPtr = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
+	    if (tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) {
+		continue;
 	    }
-	    if (objc == 5) {
-		tagPtr2 = FindTag(interp, textPtr, objv[4]);
-		if (tagPtr2 == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (tagPtr->priority < tagPtr2->priority) {
-		    prio = tagPtr2->priority - 1;
-		} else {
-		    prio = tagPtr2->priority;
-		}
-	    } else {
-		prio = 0;
+	    if (tagPtr->affectsDisplay) {
+		TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL,
+			(TkTextIndex *) NULL, (TkTextIndex *) NULL, tagPtr, 1);
 	    }
-	    ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr, prio);
-	    /* 
-	     * If this is the 'sel' tag, then we don't actually need
-	     * to call this for all peers.
-	     */
-	    TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, 
-			    (TkTextIndex *) NULL, 
-			    (TkTextIndex *) NULL,
-			    tagPtr, 1);
-	    break;
+	    TkTextDeleteTag(textPtr, tagPtr);
+	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hPtr);
 	}
-	case TAG_NAMES: {
-	    TkTextTag **arrayPtr;
-	    int arraySize;
-	    Tcl_Obj *listObj;
-	    
-	    if ((objc != 3) && (objc != 4)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "?index?");
+	break;
+    }
+    case TAG_LOWER: {
+	TkTextTag *tagPtr2;
+	int prio;
+
+	if ((objc != 4) && (objc != 5)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?belowThis?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	tagPtr = FindTag(interp, textPtr, objv[3]);
+	if (tagPtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (objc == 5) {
+	    tagPtr2 = FindTag(interp, textPtr, objv[4]);
+	    if (tagPtr2 == NULL) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (objc == 3) {
-		Tcl_HashSearch search;
-		Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
-
-		arrayPtr = (TkTextTag **) ckalloc((unsigned)
-			(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags * sizeof(TkTextTag *)));
-		for (i = 0, 
-		     hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable, 
-					       &search);
-		     hPtr != NULL; i++, hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
-		    arrayPtr[i] = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
-		}
-		/* The 'sel' tag is not in the hash table */
-		arrayPtr[i] = textPtr->selTagPtr;
-		arraySize = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags;
+	    if (tagPtr->priority < tagPtr2->priority) {
+		prio = tagPtr2->priority - 1;
 	    } else {
-		if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[3], &index1)
-			!= TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		arrayPtr = TkBTreeGetTags(&index1, textPtr, &arraySize);
-		if (arrayPtr == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_OK;
-		}
-	    }
-	    SortTags(arraySize, arrayPtr);
-	    listObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
-	    for (i = 0; i < arraySize; i++) {
-		tagPtr = arrayPtr[i];
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, 
-					 Tcl_NewStringObj(tagPtr->name,-1));
+		prio = tagPtr2->priority;
 	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObj);
-	    ckfree((char *) arrayPtr);
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    prio = 0;
 	}
-	case TAG_NEXTRANGE: {
-	    TkTextIndex last;
-	    TkTextSearch tSearch;
-	    char position[TK_POS_CHARS];
+	ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr, prio);
 
-	    if ((objc != 5) && (objc != 6)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName index1 ?index2?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    tagPtr = FindTag((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, textPtr, objv[3]);
-	    if (tagPtr == NULL) {
-		return TCL_OK;
+	/*
+	 * If this is the 'sel' tag, then we don't actually need to call this
+	 * for all peers.
+	 */
+
+	TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, (TkTextIndex *) NULL,
+		(TkTextIndex *) NULL, tagPtr, 1);
+	break;
+    }
+    case TAG_NAMES: {
+	TkTextTag **arrayPtr;
+	int arraySize;
+	Tcl_Obj *listObj;
+
+	if ((objc != 3) && (objc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "?index?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (objc == 3) {
+	    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+	    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+
+	    arrayPtr = (TkTextTag **) ckalloc((unsigned)
+		    (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags * sizeof(TkTextTag *)));
+	    for (i=0, hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(
+		    &textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable, &search);
+		    hPtr != NULL; i++, hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) {
+		arrayPtr[i] = (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
 	    }
-	    if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[4], &index1) != TCL_OK) {
+
+	    /*
+	     * The 'sel' tag is not in the hash table.
+	     */
+
+	    arrayPtr[i] = textPtr->selTagPtr;
+	    arraySize = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags;
+	} else {
+	    if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[3],
+		    &index1) != TCL_OK) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
-			TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr),
-			0, &last);
-	    if (objc == 5) {
-		index2 = last;
-	    } else if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[5], &index2)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    arrayPtr = TkBTreeGetTags(&index1, textPtr, &arraySize);
+	    if (arrayPtr == NULL) {
+		return TCL_OK;
 	    }
+	}
 
-	    /*
-	     * The search below is a bit tricky.  Rather than use the B-tree
-	     * facilities to stop the search at index2, let it search up
-	     * until the end of the file but check for a position past index2
-	     * ourselves.  The reason for doing it this way is that we only
-	     * care whether the *start* of the range is before index2;  once
-	     * we find the start, we don't want TkBTreeNextTag to abort the
-	     * search because the end of the range is after index2.
-	     */
+	SortTags(arraySize, arrayPtr);
+	listObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
 
-	    TkBTreeStartSearch(&index1, &last, tagPtr, &tSearch);
-	    if (TkBTreeCharTagged(&index1, tagPtr)) {
-		TkTextSegment *segPtr;
-		int offset;
+	for (i = 0; i < arraySize; i++) {
+	    tagPtr = arrayPtr[i];
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj,
+		    Tcl_NewStringObj(tagPtr->name,-1));
+	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObj);
+	ckfree((char *) arrayPtr);
+	break;
+    }
+    case TAG_NEXTRANGE: {
+	TkTextIndex last;
+	TkTextSearch tSearch;
+	char position[TK_POS_CHARS];
+
+	if ((objc != 5) && (objc != 6)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName index1 ?index2?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	tagPtr = FindTag((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, textPtr, objv[3]);
+	if (tagPtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[4], &index1) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr),
+		0, &last);
+	if (objc == 5) {
+	    index2 = last;
+	} else if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[5],
+		&index2) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
 
-		/*
-		 * The first character is tagged.  See if there is an
-		 * on-toggle just before the character.  If not, then
-		 * skip to the end of this tagged range.
-		 */
+	/*
+	 * The search below is a bit tricky. Rather than use the B-tree
+	 * facilities to stop the search at index2, let it search up until the
+	 * end of the file but check for a position past index2 ourselves.
+	 * The reason for doing it this way is that we only care whether the
+	 * *start* of the range is before index2; once we find the start, we
+	 * don't want TkBTreeNextTag to abort the search because the end of
+	 * the range is after index2.
+	 */
 
-		for (segPtr = index1.linePtr->segPtr, offset = index1.byteIndex; 
-			offset >= 0;
-			offset -= segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
-		    if ((offset == 0) && (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)
-			    && (segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr == tagPtr)) {
-			goto gotStart;
-		    }
-		}
-		if (!TkBTreeNextTag(&tSearch)) {
-		     return TCL_OK;
-		}
-	    }
+	TkBTreeStartSearch(&index1, &last, tagPtr, &tSearch);
+	if (TkBTreeCharTagged(&index1, tagPtr)) {
+	    TkTextSegment *segPtr;
+	    int offset;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Find the start of the tagged range.
+	     * The first character is tagged. See if there is an on-toggle
+	     * just before the character. If not, then skip to the end of this
+	     * tagged range.
 	     */
 
-	    if (!TkBTreeNextTag(&tSearch)) {
-		return TCL_OK;
+	    for (segPtr = index1.linePtr->segPtr, offset = index1.byteIndex;
+		    offset >= 0;
+		    offset -= segPtr->size, segPtr = segPtr->nextPtr) {
+		if ((offset == 0) && (segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType)
+			&& (segPtr->body.toggle.tagPtr == tagPtr)) {
+		    goto gotStart;
+		}
 	    }
-	    gotStart:
-	    if (TkTextIndexCmp(&tSearch.curIndex, &index2) >= 0) {
+	    if (!TkBTreeNextTag(&tSearch)) {
 		return TCL_OK;
 	    }
-	    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position);
-	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position);
-	    TkBTreeNextTag(&tSearch);
-	    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position);
-	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position);
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TAG_PREVRANGE: {
-	    TkTextIndex last;
-	    TkTextSearch tSearch;
-	    char position1[TK_POS_CHARS];
-	    char position2[TK_POS_CHARS];
-
-	    if ((objc != 5) && (objc != 6)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName index1 ?index2?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    tagPtr = FindTag((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, textPtr, objv[3]);
-	    if (tagPtr == NULL) {
-		return TCL_OK;
-	    }
-	    if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[4], &index1) != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    if (objc == 5) {
-		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 
-				    0, 0, &index2);
-	    } else if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[5], &index2)
-		    != TCL_OK) {
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
 
+	/*
+	 * Find the start of the tagged range.
+	 */
+
+	if (!TkBTreeNextTag(&tSearch)) {
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+
+    gotStart:
+	if (TkTextIndexCmp(&tSearch.curIndex, &index2) >= 0) {
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position);
+	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position);
+	TkBTreeNextTag(&tSearch);
+	TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position);
+	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position);
+	break;
+    }
+    case TAG_PREVRANGE: {
+	TkTextIndex last;
+	TkTextSearch tSearch;
+	char position1[TK_POS_CHARS];
+	char position2[TK_POS_CHARS];
+
+	if ((objc != 5) && (objc != 6)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName index1 ?index2?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	tagPtr = FindTag((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, textPtr, objv[3]);
+	if (tagPtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[4], &index1) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (objc == 5) {
+	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0,
+		    &index2);
+	} else if (TkTextGetObjIndex(interp, textPtr, objv[5],
+		&index2) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * The search below is a bit weird. The previous toggle can be either
+	 * an on or off toggle. If it is an on toggle, then we need to turn
+	 * around and search forward for the end toggle. Otherwise we keep
+	 * searching backwards.
+	 */
+
+	TkBTreeStartSearchBack(&index1, &index2, tagPtr, &tSearch);
+
+	if (!TkBTreePrevTag(&tSearch)) {
 	    /*
-	     * The search below is a bit weird.  The previous toggle can be
-	     * either an on or off toggle. If it is an on toggle, then we
-	     * need to turn around and search forward for the end toggle.
-	     * Otherwise we keep searching backwards.
+	     * Special case, there may be a tag off toggle at index1, and a
+	     * tag on toggle before the start of a partial peer widget. In
+	     * this case we missed it.
 	     */
 
-	    TkBTreeStartSearchBack(&index1, &index2, tagPtr, &tSearch);
-
-	    if (!TkBTreePrevTag(&tSearch)) {
-		/* 
-		 * Special case, there may be a tag off toggle at
-		 * index1, and a tag on toggle before the start of a
-		 * partial peer widget.  In this case we missed it.
-		 */
-		if (textPtr->start != NULL && (textPtr->start == index2.linePtr)
-		    && (index2.byteIndex == 0) && TkBTreeCharTagged(&index2, tagPtr)
+	    if (textPtr->start != NULL && (textPtr->start == index2.linePtr)
+		    && (index2.byteIndex == 0)
+		    && TkBTreeCharTagged(&index2, tagPtr)
 		    && (TkTextIndexCmp(&index2, &index1) < 0)) {
-		    /* 
-		     * The first character is tagged, so just add the 
-		     * range from the first char to the start of the
-		     * range.
-		     */
-		    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &index2, position1);
-		    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &index1, position2);
-		    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position1);
-		    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position2);
-		}
-		return TCL_OK;
+		/*
+		 * The first character is tagged, so just add the range from
+		 * the first char to the start of the range.
+		 */
+
+		TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &index2, position1);
+		TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &index1, position2);
+		Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position1);
+		Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position2);
 	    }
-	    if (tSearch.segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType) {
-		TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position1);
-		if (textPtr->start != NULL) {
-		    /* 
-		     * Make sure the first index is not before the
-		     * first allowed text index in this widget.
-		     */
-		    TkTextIndex firstIndex;
-		    firstIndex.linePtr = textPtr->start;
-		    firstIndex.byteIndex = 0;
-		    firstIndex.textPtr = NULL;
-		    if (TkTextIndexCmp(&tSearch.curIndex, &firstIndex) < 0) {
-			if (TkTextIndexCmp(&firstIndex, &index1) >= 0) {
-			    /* 
-			     * But now the new first index is actually
-			     * too far along in the text, so nothing
-			     * is returned.
-			     */
-			    return TCL_OK;
-			}
-			TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &firstIndex, position1);
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+
+	if (tSearch.segPtr->typePtr == &tkTextToggleOnType) {
+	    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position1);
+	    if (textPtr->start != NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * Make sure the first index is not before the first allowed
+		 * text index in this widget.
+		 */
+
+		TkTextIndex firstIndex;
+
+		firstIndex.linePtr = textPtr->start;
+		firstIndex.byteIndex = 0;
+		firstIndex.textPtr = NULL;
+		if (TkTextIndexCmp(&tSearch.curIndex, &firstIndex) < 0) {
+		    if (TkTextIndexCmp(&firstIndex, &index1) >= 0) {
+			/*
+			 * But now the new first index is actually too far
+			 * along in the text, so nothing is returned.
+			 */
+
+			return TCL_OK;
 		    }
+		    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &firstIndex, position1);
 		}
-		TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
-			TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr),
-			0, &last);
-		TkBTreeStartSearch(&tSearch.curIndex, &last, tagPtr, &tSearch);
-		TkBTreeNextTag(&tSearch);
-		TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position2);
-	    } else {
-		TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position2);
-		TkBTreePrevTag(&tSearch);
-		TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position1);
-		if (TkTextIndexCmp(&tSearch.curIndex, &index2) < 0) {
-		    if (textPtr->start != NULL 
-			&& index2.linePtr == textPtr->start
+	    }
+	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		    TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr),
+		    0, &last);
+	    TkBTreeStartSearch(&tSearch.curIndex, &last, tagPtr, &tSearch);
+	    TkBTreeNextTag(&tSearch);
+	    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position2);
+	} else {
+	    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position2);
+	    TkBTreePrevTag(&tSearch);
+	    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex, position1);
+	    if (TkTextIndexCmp(&tSearch.curIndex, &index2) < 0) {
+		if (textPtr->start != NULL && index2.linePtr == textPtr->start
 			&& index2.byteIndex == 0) {
-			/* It's ok */
-			TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &index2, position1);
-		    } else {
-			return TCL_OK;
-		    }
+		    /* It's ok */
+		    TkTextPrintIndex(textPtr, &index2, position1);
+		} else {
+		    return TCL_OK;
 		}
 	    }
-	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position1);
-	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position2);
-	    break;
 	}
-	case TAG_RAISE: {
-	    TkTextTag *tagPtr2;
-	    int prio;
+	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position1);
+	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, position2);
+	break;
+    }
+    case TAG_RAISE: {
+	TkTextTag *tagPtr2;
+	int prio;
 
-	    if ((objc != 4) && (objc != 5)) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?aboveThis?");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    tagPtr = FindTag(interp, textPtr, objv[3]);
-	    if (tagPtr == NULL) {
+	if ((objc != 4) && (objc != 5)) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName ?aboveThis?");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	tagPtr = FindTag(interp, textPtr, objv[3]);
+	if (tagPtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (objc == 5) {
+	    tagPtr2 = FindTag(interp, textPtr, objv[4]);
+	    if (tagPtr2 == NULL) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    if (objc == 5) {
-		tagPtr2 = FindTag(interp, textPtr, objv[4]);
-		if (tagPtr2 == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		if (tagPtr->priority <= tagPtr2->priority) {
-		    prio = tagPtr2->priority;
-		} else {
-		    prio = tagPtr2->priority + 1;
-		}
+	    if (tagPtr->priority <= tagPtr2->priority) {
+		prio = tagPtr2->priority;
 	    } else {
-		prio = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags-1;
+		prio = tagPtr2->priority + 1;
 	    }
-	    ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr, prio);
-	    /* 
-	     * If this is the 'sel' tag, then we don't actually need
-	     * to call this for all peers.
-	     */
-	    TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, 
-			    (TkTextIndex *) NULL, (TkTextIndex *) NULL,
-			    tagPtr, 1);
-	    break;
+	} else {
+	    prio = textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags-1;
 	}
-	case TAG_RANGES: {
-	    TkTextIndex first, last;
-	    TkTextSearch tSearch;
-	    Tcl_Obj *listObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
-	    int count = 0;
-	    
-	    if (objc != 4) {
-		Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName");
-		return TCL_ERROR;
-	    }
-	    tagPtr = FindTag((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, textPtr, objv[3]);
-	    if (tagPtr == NULL) {
-		return TCL_OK;
-	    }
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 
-				0, 0, &first);
-	    TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
-		    TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr),
-		    0, &last);
-	    TkBTreeStartSearch(&first, &last, tagPtr, &tSearch);
-	    if (TkBTreeCharTagged(&first, tagPtr)) {
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj, 
+	ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr, prio);
+
+	/*
+	 * If this is the 'sel' tag, then we don't actually need to call this
+	 * for all peers.
+	 */
+
+	TkTextRedrawTag(textPtr->sharedTextPtr, NULL, (TkTextIndex *) NULL,
+		(TkTextIndex *) NULL, tagPtr, 1);
+	break;
+    }
+    case TAG_RANGES: {
+	TkTextIndex first, last;
+	TkTextSearch tSearch;
+	Tcl_Obj *listObj = Tcl_NewListObj(0, NULL);
+	int count = 0;
+
+	if (objc != 4) {
+	    Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 3, objv, "tagName");
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	tagPtr = FindTag((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, textPtr, objv[3]);
+	if (tagPtr == NULL) {
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0,
+		&first);
+	TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
+		TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr),
+		0, &last);
+	TkBTreeStartSearch(&first, &last, tagPtr, &tSearch);
+	if (TkBTreeCharTagged(&first, tagPtr)) {
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj,
 		    TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, &first));
-		count++;
-	    }
-	    while (TkBTreeNextTag(&tSearch)) {
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj,
+	    count++;
+	}
+	while (TkBTreeNextTag(&tSearch)) {
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj,
 		    TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, &tSearch.curIndex));
-		count++;
-	    }
-	    if (count % 2 == 1) {
-		/* 
-		 * If a text widget uses '-end', it won't necessarily
-		 * run to the end of the B-tree, and therefore the
-		 * tag range might not be closed.  In this case we
-		 * add the end of the range.
-		 */
-		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj,
+	    count++;
+	}
+	if (count % 2 == 1) {
+	    /*
+	     * If a text widget uses '-end', it won't necessarily run to the
+	     * end of the B-tree, and therefore the tag range might not be
+	     * closed. In this case we add the end of the range.
+	     */
+
+	    Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, listObj,
 		    TkTextNewIndexObj(textPtr, &last));
-	    }
-	    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObj);
-	    break;
 	}
+	Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, listObj);
+	break;
+    }
     }
     return TCL_OK;
 }
@@ -899,15 +907,15 @@ TkTextTagCmd(textPtr, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkTextCreateTag --
  *
- *	Find the record describing a tag within a given text widget,
- *	creating a new record if one doesn't already exist.
+ *	Find the record describing a tag within a given text widget, creating
+ *	a new record if one doesn't already exist.
  *
  * Results:
  *	The return value is a pointer to the TkTextTag record for tagName.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A new tag record is created if there isn't one already defined
- *	for tagName.
+ *	A new tag record is created if there isn't one already defined for
+ *	tagName.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -916,14 +924,14 @@ TkTextTag *
 TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, tagName, newTag)
     TkText *textPtr;		/* Widget in which tag is being used. */
     CONST char *tagName;	/* Name of desired tag. */
-    int *newTag;                /* If non-NULL, then return 1 if new,
-                                 * or 0 if already exists. */
+    int *newTag;		/* If non-NULL, then return 1 if new, or 0 if
+				 * already exists. */
 {
     register TkTextTag *tagPtr;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr = NULL;
     int new;
     CONST char *name;
-    
+
     if (!strcmp(tagName, "sel")) {
         if (textPtr->selTagPtr != NULL) {
 	    if (newTag != NULL) {
@@ -937,8 +945,8 @@ TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, tagName, newTag)
         }
 	name = "sel";
     } else {
-	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable, 
-				   tagName, &new);
+	hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable,
+		tagName, &new);
 	if (newTag != NULL) {
 	    *newTag = new;
 	}
@@ -949,8 +957,8 @@ TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, tagName, newTag)
     }
 
     /*
-     * No existing entry.  Create a new one, initialize it, and add a
-     * pointer to it to the hash table entry.
+     * No existing entry. Create a new one, initialize it, and add a pointer
+     * to it to the hash table entry.
      */
 
     tagPtr = (TkTextTag *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkTextTag));
@@ -1002,7 +1010,8 @@ TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, tagName, newTag)
     } else {
 	Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, tagPtr);
     }
-    tagPtr->optionTable = Tk_CreateOptionTable(textPtr->interp, tagOptionSpecs);
+    tagPtr->optionTable =
+	    Tk_CreateOptionTable(textPtr->interp, tagOptionSpecs);
     return tagPtr;
 }
 
@@ -1014,10 +1023,9 @@ TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, tagName, newTag)
  *	See if tag is defined for a given widget.
  *
  * Results:
- *	If tagName is defined in textPtr, a pointer to its TkTextTag
- *	structure is returned.  Otherwise NULL is returned and an
- *	error message is recorded in the interp's result unless interp
- *	is NULL.
+ *	If tagName is defined in textPtr, a pointer to its TkTextTag structure
+ *	is returned. Otherwise NULL is returned and an error message is
+ *	recorded in the interp's result unless interp is NULL.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1027,8 +1035,8 @@ TkTextCreateTag(textPtr, tagName, newTag)
 
 static TkTextTag *
 FindTag(interp, textPtr, tagName)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error message;
-				 * if NULL, then don't record an error
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error message; if
+				 * NULL, then don't record an error
 				 * message. */
     TkText *textPtr;		/* Widget in which tag is being used. */
     Tcl_Obj *tagName;	        /* Name of desired tag. */
@@ -1036,12 +1044,13 @@ FindTag(interp, textPtr, tagName)
     Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
     int len;
     CONST char *str;
+
     str = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(tagName, &len);
     if (len == 3 && !strcmp(str,"sel")) {
         return textPtr->selTagPtr;
     }
-    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable, 
-			     Tcl_GetString(tagName));
+    hPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable,
+	    Tcl_GetString(tagName));
     if (hPtr != NULL) {
 	return (TkTextTag *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr);
     }
@@ -1057,47 +1066,44 @@ FindTag(interp, textPtr, tagName)
  *
  * TkTextDeleteTag --
  *
- *	This procedure is called to carry out most actions associated
- *	with the 'tag delete' sub-command.  It will remove all 
- *	evidence of the tag from the B-tree, and then call
- *	TkTextFreeTag to clean up the tag structure itself.
- *	
- *	The only actions this doesn't carry out it to check if
- *	the deletion of the tag requires something to be
- *	re-displayed, and to remove the tag from the tagTable
- *	(hash table) if that is necessary (i.e. if it's not the
- *	'sel' tag).  It is expected that the caller carry out both
- *	of these actions.
+ *	This function is called to carry out most actions associated with the
+ *	'tag delete' sub-command. It will remove all evidence of the tag from
+ *	the B-tree, and then call TkTextFreeTag to clean up the tag structure
+ *	itself.
+ *
+ *	The only actions this doesn't carry out it to check if the deletion of
+ *	the tag requires something to be re-displayed, and to remove the tag
+ *	from the tagTable (hash table) if that is necessary (i.e. if it's not
+ *	the 'sel' tag). It is expected that the caller carry out both of these
+ *	actions.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Memory and other resources are freed, the B-tree is
- *	manipulated.
+ *	Memory and other resources are freed, the B-tree is manipulated.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
 TkTextDeleteTag(textPtr, tagPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Info about overall widget. */
-    register TkTextTag *tagPtr;		/* Tag being deleted. */
+    TkText *textPtr;		/* Info about overall widget. */
+    register TkTextTag *tagPtr;	/* Tag being deleted. */
 {
     TkTextIndex first, last;
 
     TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr, 0, 0, &first);
     TkTextMakeByteIndex(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr,
-			TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr),
-			0, &last),
+	    TkBTreeNumLines(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tree, textPtr), 0, &last),
     TkBTreeTag(&first, &last, tagPtr, 0);
-    
+
     if (tagPtr == textPtr->selTagPtr) {
 	/*
-	 * Send an event that the selection changed.
-	 * This is equivalent to
-	 * "event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>"
+	 * Send an event that the selection changed. This is equivalent to:
+	 *	event generate $textWidget <<Selection>>
 	 */
+
 	TkTextSelectionEvent(textPtr);
     } else {
 	/*
@@ -1105,6 +1111,7 @@ TkTextDeleteTag(textPtr, tagPtr)
 	 * don't want removal of one sel tag to remove bindings which
 	 * are still valid in other peer widgets.
 	 */
+
 	if (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable != NULL) {
 	    Tk_DeleteAllBindings(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable,
 		    (ClientData) tagPtr->name);
@@ -1115,11 +1122,10 @@ TkTextDeleteTag(textPtr, tagPtr)
      * Update the tag priorities to reflect the deletion of this tag.
      */
 
-    ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr, 
-		      textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags-1);
+    ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr,
+	    textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags-1);
     textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags -= 1;
     TkTextFreeTag(textPtr, tagPtr);
-
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1127,8 +1133,8 @@ TkTextDeleteTag(textPtr, tagPtr)
  *
  * TkTextFreeTag --
  *
- *	This procedure is called when a tag is deleted to free up the
- *	memory and other resources associated with the tag.
+ *	This function is called when a tag is deleted to free up the memory
+ *	and other resources associated with the tag.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1141,19 +1147,30 @@ TkTextDeleteTag(textPtr, tagPtr)
 
 void
 TkTextFreeTag(textPtr, tagPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Info about overall widget. */
-    register TkTextTag *tagPtr;		/* Tag being deleted. */
+    TkText *textPtr;		/* Info about overall widget. */
+    register TkTextTag *tagPtr;	/* Tag being deleted. */
 {
     int i;
-    
-    /* Let Tk do most of the hard work for us */
+
+    /*
+     * Let Tk do most of the hard work for us.
+     */
+
     Tk_FreeConfigOptions((char *) tagPtr, tagPtr->optionTable,
-			 textPtr->tkwin);
-    /* This associated information is managed by us */
+	    textPtr->tkwin);
+
+    /*
+     * This associated information is managed by us.
+     */
+
     if (tagPtr->tabArrayPtr != NULL) {
 	ckfree((char *) tagPtr->tabArrayPtr);
     }
-    /* Make sure this tag isn't referenced from the 'current' tag array */
+
+    /*
+     * Make sure this tag isn't referenced from the 'current' tag array.
+     */
+
     for (i = 0; i < textPtr->numCurTags; i++) {
 	if (textPtr->curTagArrayPtr[i] == tagPtr) {
 	    for (; i < textPtr->numCurTags-1; i++) {
@@ -1164,10 +1181,12 @@ TkTextFreeTag(textPtr, tagPtr)
 	    break;
 	}
     }
-    /* 
-     * If this tag is widget-specific (peer widgets) then clean
-     * up the refCount it holds.
+
+    /*
+     * If this tag is widget-specific (peer widgets) then clean up the
+     * refCount it holds.
      */
+
     if (tagPtr->textPtr != NULL) {
 	if (textPtr != tagPtr->textPtr) {
 	    Tcl_Panic("Tag being deleted from wrong widget");
@@ -1178,7 +1197,11 @@ TkTextFreeTag(textPtr, tagPtr)
 	}
 	tagPtr->textPtr = NULL;
     }
-    /* Finally free the tag's memory */
+
+    /*
+     * Finally free the tag's memory.
+     */
+
     ckfree((char *) tagPtr);
 }
 
@@ -1187,9 +1210,8 @@ TkTextFreeTag(textPtr, tagPtr)
  *
  * SortTags --
  *
- *	This procedure sorts an array of tag pointers in increasing
- *	order of priority, optimizing for the common case where the
- *	array is small.
+ *	This function sorts an array of tag pointers in increasing order of
+ *	priority, optimizing for the common case where the array is small.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1228,7 +1250,7 @@ SortTags(numTags, tagArrayPtr)
 	}
     } else {
 	qsort((VOID *) tagArrayPtr, (unsigned) numTags, sizeof (TkTextTag *),
-		    TagSortProc);
+		TagSortProc);
     }
 }
 
@@ -1237,14 +1259,14 @@ SortTags(numTags, tagArrayPtr)
  *
  * TagSortProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is called by qsort when sorting an array of
- *	tags in priority order.
+ *	This function is called by qsort() when sorting an array of tags in
+ *	priority order.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is -1 if the first argument should be before
- *	the second element (i.e. it has lower priority), 0 if it's
- *	equivalent (this should never happen!), and 1 if it should be
- *	after the second element.
+ *	The return value is -1 if the first argument should be before the
+ *	second element (i.e. it has lower priority), 0 if it's equivalent
+ *	(this should never happen!), and 1 if it should be after the second
+ *	element.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	None.
@@ -1268,29 +1290,26 @@ TagSortProc(first, second)
  *
  * ChangeTagPriority --
  *
- *	This procedure changes the priority of a tag by modifying
- *	its priority and the priorities of other tags that are affected
- *	by the change.
+ *	This function changes the priority of a tag by modifying its priority
+ *	and the priorities of other tags that are affected by the change.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Priorities may be changed for some or all of the tags in
- *	textPtr.  The tags will be arranged so that there is exactly one
- *	tag at each priority level between 0 and
- *	textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags-1, with tagPtr at priority
- *	"prio".
+ *	Priorities may be changed for some or all of the tags in textPtr. The
+ *	tags will be arranged so that there is exactly one tag at each
+ *	priority level between 0 and textPtr->sharedTextPtr->numTags-1, with
+ *	tagPtr at priority "prio".
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr, prio)
-    TkText *textPtr;			/* Information about text widget. */
-    TkTextTag *tagPtr;			/* Tag whose priority is to be
-					 * changed. */
-    int prio;				/* New priority for tag. */
+    TkText *textPtr;		/* Information about text widget. */
+    TkTextTag *tagPtr;		/* Tag whose priority is to be changed. */
+    int prio;			/* New priority for tag. */
 {
     int low, high, delta;
     register TkTextTag *tagPtr2;
@@ -1314,11 +1333,13 @@ ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr, prio)
 	high = prio;
 	delta = -1;
     }
-    /* 
+
+    /*
      * Adjust first the 'sel' tag, then all others from the hash table
      */
-    if ((textPtr->selTagPtr->priority >= low) 
-      && (textPtr->selTagPtr->priority <= high)) {
+
+    if ((textPtr->selTagPtr->priority >= low)
+	    && (textPtr->selTagPtr->priority <= high)) {
 	textPtr->selTagPtr->priority += delta;
     }
     for (hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&textPtr->sharedTextPtr->tagTable, &search);
@@ -1336,37 +1357,36 @@ ChangeTagPriority(textPtr, tagPtr, prio)
  *
  * TkTextBindProc --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk dispatcher to handle
- *	events associated with bindings on items.
+ *	This function is invoked by the Tk dispatcher to handle events
+ *	associated with bindings on items.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Depends on the command invoked as part of the binding
- *	(if there was any).
+ *	Depends on the command invoked as part of the binding (if there was
+ *	any).
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
 TkTextBindProc(clientData, eventPtr)
-    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to canvas structure. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Pointer to X event that just
-					 * happened. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to canvas structure. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Pointer to X event that just happened. */
 {
     TkText *textPtr = (TkText *) clientData;
     int repick  = 0;
 
-# define AnyButtonMask (Button1Mask|Button2Mask|Button3Mask\
-	|Button4Mask|Button5Mask)
+# define AnyButtonMask \
+	(Button1Mask|Button2Mask|Button3Mask|Button4Mask|Button5Mask)
 
     textPtr->refCount++;
 
     /*
-     * This code simulates grabs for mouse buttons by keeping track
-     * of whether a button is pressed and refusing to pick a new current
-     * character while a button is pressed.
+     * This code simulates grabs for mouse buttons by keeping track of whether
+     * a button is pressed and refusing to pick a new current character while
+     * a button is pressed.
      */
 
     if (eventPtr->type == ButtonPress) {
@@ -1375,24 +1395,24 @@ TkTextBindProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	int mask;
 
 	switch (eventPtr->xbutton.button) {
-	    case Button1:
-		mask = Button1Mask;
-		break;
-	    case Button2:
-		mask = Button2Mask;
-		break;
-	    case Button3:
-		mask = Button3Mask;
-		break;
-	    case Button4:
-		mask = Button4Mask;
-		break;
-	    case Button5:
-		mask = Button5Mask;
-		break;
-	    default:
-		mask = 0;
-		break;
+	case Button1:
+	    mask = Button1Mask;
+	    break;
+	case Button2:
+	    mask = Button2Mask;
+	    break;
+	case Button3:
+	    mask = Button3Mask;
+	    break;
+	case Button4:
+	    mask = Button4Mask;
+	    break;
+	case Button5:
+	    mask = Button5Mask;
+	    break;
+	default:
+	    mask = 0;
+	    break;
 	}
 	if ((eventPtr->xbutton.state & AnyButtonMask) == (unsigned) mask) {
 	    textPtr->flags &= ~BUTTON_DOWN;
@@ -1415,10 +1435,11 @@ TkTextBindProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	}
 	TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr);
     }
-    if ((textPtr->numCurTags > 0) && (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable != NULL)
+    if ((textPtr->numCurTags > 0)
+	    && (textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable != NULL)
 	    && (textPtr->tkwin != NULL) && !(textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) {
-	TagBindEvent(textPtr, eventPtr, textPtr->numCurTags, 
-		     textPtr->curTagArrayPtr);
+	TagBindEvent(textPtr, eventPtr, textPtr->numCurTags,
+		textPtr->curTagArrayPtr);
     }
     if (repick) {
 	unsigned int oldState;
@@ -1432,7 +1453,7 @@ TkTextBindProc(clientData, eventPtr)
 	eventPtr->xbutton.state = oldState;
     }
 
-    done:
+  done:
     if (--textPtr->refCount == 0) {
 	ckfree((char *) textPtr);
     }
@@ -1443,57 +1464,55 @@ TkTextBindProc(clientData, eventPtr)
  *
  * TkTextPickCurrent --
  *
- *	Find the character containing the coordinates in an event
- *	and place the "current" mark on that character.  If the
- *	"current" mark has moved then generate a fake leave event
- *	on the old current character and a fake enter event on the new
- *	current character.
+ *	Find the character containing the coordinates in an event and place
+ *	the "current" mark on that character. If the "current" mark has moved
+ *	then generate a fake leave event on the old current character and a
+ *	fake enter event on the new current character.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The current mark for textPtr may change.  If it does,
- *	then the commands associated with character entry and leave
- *	could do just about anything.  For example, the text widget
- *	might be deleted.  It is up to the caller to protect itself
- *	by incrementing the refCount of the text widget.
+ *	The current mark for textPtr may change. If it does, then the commands
+ *	associated with character entry and leave could do just about
+ *	anything. For example, the text widget might be deleted. It is up to
+ *	the caller to protect itself by incrementing the refCount of the text
+ *	widget.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
 TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr)
-    register TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget in which to select
-					 * current character. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Event describing location of
-					 * mouse cursor.  Must be EnterWindow,
-					 * LeaveWindow, ButtonRelease, or
-					 * MotionNotify. */
+    register TkText *textPtr;	/* Text widget in which to select current
+				 * character. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Event describing location of mouse cursor.
+				 * Must be EnterWindow, LeaveWindow,
+				 * ButtonRelease, or MotionNotify. */
 {
     TkTextIndex index;
     TkTextTag **oldArrayPtr, **newArrayPtr;
-    TkTextTag **copyArrayPtr = NULL;	/* Initialization needed to prevent
-					 * compiler warning. */
-
+    TkTextTag **copyArrayPtr = NULL;
+				/* Initialization needed to prevent compiler
+				 * warning. */
     int numOldTags, numNewTags, i, j, size, nearby;
     XEvent event;
 
     /*
-     * If a button is down, then don't do anything at all;  we'll be
-     * called again when all buttons are up, and we can repick then.
-     * This implements a form of mouse grabbing.
+     * If a button is down, then don't do anything at all; we'll be called
+     * again when all buttons are up, and we can repick then. This implements
+     * a form of mouse grabbing.
      */
 
     if (textPtr->flags & BUTTON_DOWN) {
-	if (((eventPtr->type == EnterNotify) || (eventPtr->type == LeaveNotify))
+	if (((eventPtr->type == EnterNotify)
+		|| (eventPtr->type == LeaveNotify))
 		&& ((eventPtr->xcrossing.mode == NotifyGrab)
 		|| (eventPtr->xcrossing.mode == NotifyUngrab))) {
 	    /*
-	     * Special case:  the window is being entered or left because
-	     * of a grab or ungrab.  In this case, repick after all.
-	     * Furthermore, clear BUTTON_DOWN to release the simulated
-	     * grab.
+	     * Special case: the window is being entered or left because of a
+	     * grab or ungrab. In this case, repick after all. Furthermore,
+	     * clear BUTTON_DOWN to release the simulated grab.
 	     */
 
 	    textPtr->flags &= ~BUTTON_DOWN;
@@ -1503,12 +1522,12 @@ TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Save information about this event in the widget in case we have
-     * to synthesize more enter and leave events later (e.g. because a
-     * character was deleted, causing a new character to be underneath
-     * the mouse cursor).  Also translate MotionNotify events into
-     * EnterNotify events, since that's what gets reported to event
-     * handlers when the current character changes.
+     * Save information about this event in the widget in case we have to
+     * synthesize more enter and leave events later (e.g. because a character
+     * was deleted, causing a new character to be underneath the mouse
+     * cursor). Also translate MotionNotify events into EnterNotify events,
+     * since that's what gets reported to event handlers when the current
+     * character changes.
      */
 
     if (eventPtr != &textPtr->pickEvent) {
@@ -1539,8 +1558,8 @@ TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Find the new current character, then find and sort all of the
-     * tags associated with it.
+     * Find the new current character, then find and sort all of the tags
+     * associated with it.
      */
 
     if (textPtr->pickEvent.type != LeaveNotify) {
@@ -1559,11 +1578,10 @@ TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Resort the tags associated with the previous marked character
-     * (the priorities might have changed), then make a copy of the
-     * new tags, and compare the old tags to the copy, nullifying
-     * any tags that are present in both groups (i.e. the tags that
-     * haven't changed).
+     * Resort the tags associated with the previous marked character (the
+     * priorities might have changed), then make a copy of the new tags, and
+     * compare the old tags to the copy, nullifying any tags that are present
+     * in both groups (i.e. the tags that haven't changed).
      */
 
     SortTags(textPtr->numCurTags, textPtr->curTagArrayPtr);
@@ -1583,13 +1601,12 @@ TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Invoke the binding system with a LeaveNotify event for all of
-     * the tags that have gone away.  We have to be careful here,
-     * because it's possible that the binding could do something
-     * (like calling tkwait) that eventually modifies
-     * textPtr->curTagArrayPtr.  To avoid problems in situations like
-     * this, update curTagArrayPtr to its new value before invoking
-     * any bindings, and don't use it any more here.
+     * Invoke the binding system with a LeaveNotify event for all of the tags
+     * that have gone away. We have to be careful here, because it's possible
+     * that the binding could do something (like calling tkwait) that
+     * eventually modifies textPtr->curTagArrayPtr. To avoid problems in
+     * situations like this, update curTagArrayPtr to its new value before
+     * invoking any bindings, and don't use it any more here.
      */
 
     numOldTags = textPtr->numCurTags;
@@ -1597,15 +1614,16 @@ TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr)
     oldArrayPtr = textPtr->curTagArrayPtr;
     textPtr->curTagArrayPtr = newArrayPtr;
     if (numOldTags != 0) {
-	if ((textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable != NULL) && (textPtr->tkwin != NULL)
-	  && !(textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) {
+	if ((textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable != NULL)
+		&& (textPtr->tkwin != NULL)
+		&& !(textPtr->flags & DESTROYED)) {
 	    event = textPtr->pickEvent;
 	    event.type = LeaveNotify;
 
 	    /*
-	     * Always use a detail of NotifyAncestor.  Besides being
-	     * consistent, this avoids problems where the binding code
-	     * will discard NotifyInferior events.
+	     * Always use a detail of NotifyAncestor. Besides being
+	     * consistent, this avoids problems where the binding code will
+	     * discard NotifyInferior events.
 	     */
 
 	    event.xcrossing.detail = NotifyAncestor;
@@ -1615,18 +1633,19 @@ TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Reset the "current" mark (be careful to recompute its location,
-     * since it might have changed during an event binding).  Then
-     * invoke the binding system with an EnterNotify event for all of
-     * the tags that have just appeared.
+     * Reset the "current" mark (be careful to recompute its location, since
+     * it might have changed during an event binding). Then invoke the binding
+     * system with an EnterNotify event for all of the tags that have just
+     * appeared.
      */
 
     TkTextPixelIndex(textPtr, textPtr->pickEvent.xcrossing.x,
 	    textPtr->pickEvent.xcrossing.y, &index, &nearby);
     TkTextSetMark(textPtr, "current", &index);
     if (numNewTags != 0) {
-	if ((textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable != NULL) && (textPtr->tkwin != NULL)
-	  && !(textPtr->flags & DESTROYED) && !nearby) {
+	if ((textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable != NULL)
+		&& (textPtr->tkwin != NULL)
+		&& !(textPtr->flags & DESTROYED) && !nearby) {
 	    event = textPtr->pickEvent;
 	    event.type = EnterNotify;
 	    event.xcrossing.detail = NotifyAncestor;
@@ -1641,65 +1660,74 @@ TkTextPickCurrent(textPtr, eventPtr)
  *
  * TagBindEvent --
  *
- *	Trigger given events for all tags that match the
- *	relevant bindings.  To handle the "sel" tag 
- *	correctly in all peer widgets, we must use the
+ *	Trigger given events for all tags that match the relevant bindings.
+ *	To handle the "sel" tag correctly in all peer widgets, we must use the
  *	name of the tags as the binding table element.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Almost anything can be triggered by tag bindings,
- *	including deletion of the text widget.
+ *	Almost anything can be triggered by tag bindings, including deletion
+ *	of the text widget.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 TagBindEvent(textPtr, eventPtr, numTags, tagArrayPtr)
-    TkText *textPtr;                    /* Text widget to fire bindings 
-                                         * in. */
-    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* What actually happened. */
-    int numTags;			/* Number of relevant tags. */
-    TkTextTag **tagArrayPtr;		/* Array of relevant tags. */
+    TkText *textPtr;		/* Text widget to fire bindings in. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* What actually happened. */
+    int numTags;		/* Number of relevant tags. */
+    TkTextTag **tagArrayPtr;	/* Array of relevant tags. */
 {
     #define NUM_BIND_TAGS 10
     CONST char *nameArray[NUM_BIND_TAGS];
     CONST char **nameArrPtr;
     int i;
-    
-    /* 
-     * Try to avoid allocation unless there are lots of tags 
+
+    /*
+     * Try to avoid allocation unless there are lots of tags.
      */
+
     if (numTags > NUM_BIND_TAGS) {
 	nameArrPtr = (CONST char**) ckalloc (numTags * sizeof(CONST char*));
     } else {
 	nameArrPtr = nameArray;
     }
-    /* 
-     * We use tag names as keys in the hash table.  We do this instead
-     * of using the actual tagPtr objects because we want one "sel" tag
-     * binding for all peer widgets, despite the fact that each has its
-     * own tagPtr object.
+
+    /*
+     * We use tag names as keys in the hash table. We do this instead of using
+     * the actual tagPtr objects because we want one "sel" tag binding for all
+     * peer widgets, despite the fact that each has its own tagPtr object.
      */
+
     for (i = 0; i < numTags; i++) {
 	TkTextTag *tagPtr = tagArrayPtr[i];
 	if (tagPtr != NULL) {
 	    nameArrPtr[i] = tagPtr->name;
 	} else {
-	    /* 
-	     * Tag has been deleted elsewhere, and therefore nulled
-	     * out in this array.  Tk_BindEvent is clever enough to
-	     * cope with NULLs being thrown at it.
+	    /*
+	     * Tag has been deleted elsewhere, and therefore nulled out in
+	     * this array. Tk_BindEvent is clever enough to cope with NULLs
+	     * being thrown at it.
 	     */
+
 	    nameArrPtr[i] = NULL;
 	}
     }
-    Tk_BindEvent(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable, eventPtr, textPtr->tkwin,
-		 numTags, (ClientData *) nameArrPtr);
+    Tk_BindEvent(textPtr->sharedTextPtr->bindingTable, eventPtr,
+	    textPtr->tkwin, numTags, (ClientData *) nameArrPtr);
 
     if (numTags > NUM_BIND_TAGS) {
 	ckfree((char*)nameArrPtr);
     }
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/unix/tkUnix.c b/unix/tkUnix.c
index 0f93e93..677569e 100644
--- a/unix/tkUnix.c
+++ b/unix/tkUnix.c
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
  * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
  * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkUnix.c,v 1.10 2005/06/02 10:08:07 rmax Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkUnix.c,v 1.11 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #include <tkInt.h>
@@ -115,8 +115,8 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
  *
  * TkpBuildRegionFromAlphaData --
  *
- *	Set up a rectangle of the given region based on the supplied
- *	alpha data.
+ *	Set up a rectangle of the given region based on the supplied alpha
+ *	data.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None
@@ -130,14 +130,14 @@ Tk_UpdatePointer(tkwin, x, y, state)
 void
 TkpBuildRegionFromAlphaData(region, x, y, width, height, dataPtr,
 	pixelStride, lineStride)
-    TkRegion region;
-    unsigned int x, y;			/* Where in region to update. */
-    unsigned int width, height;		/* Size of rectangle to update. */
-    unsigned char *dataPtr;		/* Data to read from. */
-    unsigned int pixelStride;		/* num bytes from one piece of alpha
-					 * data to the next in the line. */
-    unsigned int lineStride;		/* num bytes from one line of alpha
-					 * data to the next line. */
+     TkRegion region;		/* Region to be updated. */
+    unsigned int x, y;		/* Where in region to update. */
+    unsigned int width, height;	/* Size of rectangle to update. */
+    unsigned char *dataPtr;	/* Data to read from. */
+    unsigned int pixelStride;	/* Num bytes from one piece of alpha data to
+				 * the next in the line. */
+    unsigned int lineStride;	/* Num bytes from one line of alpha data to
+				 * the next line. */
 {
     unsigned char *lineDataPtr;
     unsigned int x1, y1, end;
@@ -146,13 +146,20 @@ TkpBuildRegionFromAlphaData(region, x, y, width, height, dataPtr,
     for (y1 = 0; y1 < height; y1++) {
 	lineDataPtr = dataPtr;
 	for (x1 = 0; x1 < width; x1 = end) {
-	    /* search for first non-transparent pixel */
+	    /*
+	     * Search for first non-transparent pixel.
+	     */
+
 	    while ((x1 < width) && !*lineDataPtr) {
 		x1++;
 		lineDataPtr += pixelStride;
 	    }
 	    end = x1;
-	    /* search for first transparent pixel */
+
+	    /*
+	     * Search for first transparent pixel.
+	     */
+
 	    while ((end < width) && *lineDataPtr) {
 		end++;
 		lineDataPtr += pixelStride;
diff --git a/win/tkWinDialog.c b/win/tkWinDialog.c
index f794174..4d56b69 100644
--- a/win/tkWinDialog.c
+++ b/win/tkWinDialog.c
@@ -5,29 +5,30 @@
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinDialog.c,v 1.37 2004/12/20 10:34:21 vincentdarley Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinDialog.c,v 1.38 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  *
  */
 
 #include "tkWinInt.h"
 #include "tkFileFilter.h"
 
-#include <commdlg.h>    /* includes common dialog functionality */
+#include <commdlg.h>		/* includes common dialog functionality */
 #ifdef _MSC_VER
 #   pragma comment (lib, "comdlg32.lib")
 #endif
-#include <dlgs.h>       /* includes common dialog template defines */
-#include <cderr.h>      /* includes the common dialog error codes */
+#include <dlgs.h>		/* includes common dialog template defines */
+#include <cderr.h>		/* includes the common dialog error codes */
 
 /*
  * This controls the use of the new style tk_chooseDirectory dialog.
  */
+
 #define USE_NEW_CHOOSEDIR 1
 #ifdef USE_NEW_CHOOSEDIR
-#include <shlobj.h>     /* includes SHBrowseForFolder */
+#include <shlobj.h>		/* includes SHBrowseForFolder */
 #ifdef _MSC_VER
 #   pragma comment (lib, "shell32.lib")
 #endif
@@ -36,47 +37,50 @@
 #ifndef BIF_EDITBOX
 #define BIF_EDITBOX 0x10
 #endif
+
 #ifndef BIF_VALIDATE
 #define BIF_VALIDATE 0x0020
 #endif
+
 #ifndef BFFM_VALIDATEFAILED
 #ifdef UNICODE
 #define BFFM_VALIDATEFAILED 4
 #else
 #define BFFM_VALIDATEFAILED 3
 #endif
-#endif 
+#endif /* BFFM_VALIDATEFAILED */
 
 /*
- * The following structure is used by the new Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd
- * to pass data between it and its callback. Unqiue to Winodws platform.
+ * The following structure is used by the new Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd to pass
+ * data between it and its callback. Unqiue to Winodws platform.
  */
+
 typedef struct ChooseDirData {
-   TCHAR utfInitDir[MAX_PATH];       /* Initial folder to use */
-   TCHAR utfRetDir[MAX_PATH];        /* Returned folder to use */
+   TCHAR utfInitDir[MAX_PATH];	/* Initial folder to use */
+   TCHAR utfRetDir[MAX_PATH];	/* Returned folder to use */
    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-   int mustExist;                    /* true if file must exist to return from
-				      * callback */
+   int mustExist;		/* True if file must exist to return from
+				 * callback */
 } CHOOSEDIRDATA;
 #endif
 
-typedef struct ThreadSpecificData { 
-    int debugFlag;            /* Flags whether we should output debugging 
-			       * information while displaying a builtin 
-			       * dialog. */
-    Tcl_Interp *debugInterp;  /* Interpreter to used for debugging. */
-    UINT WM_LBSELCHANGED;     /* Holds a registered windows event used for
-			       * communicating between the Directory
-			       * Chooser dialog and its hook proc. */
-    HHOOK hMsgBoxHook;        /* Hook proc for tk_messageBox and the */
-    HICON hSmallIcon;         /* icons used by a parent to be used in */
-    HICON hBigIcon;           /* the message box */
+typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
+    int debugFlag;		/* Flags whether we should output debugging
+				 * information while displaying a builtin
+				 * dialog. */
+    Tcl_Interp *debugInterp;	/* Interpreter to used for debugging. */
+    UINT WM_LBSELCHANGED;	/* Holds a registered windows event used for
+				 * communicating between the Directory Chooser
+				 * dialog and its hook proc. */
+    HHOOK hMsgBoxHook;		/* Hook proc for tk_messageBox and the */
+    HICON hSmallIcon;		/* icons used by a parent to be used in */
+    HICON hBigIcon;		/* the message box */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
 static Tcl_ThreadDataKey dataKey;
 
 /*
- * The following structures are used by Tk_MessageBoxCmd() to parse 
- * arguments and return results.
+ * The following structures are used by Tk_MessageBoxCmd() to parse arguments
+ * and return results.
  */
 
 static const TkStateMap iconMap[] = {
@@ -86,10 +90,10 @@ static const TkStateMap iconMap[] = {
     {MB_ICONWARNING,		"warning"},
     {-1,			NULL}
 };
-	  
+
 static const TkStateMap typeMap[] = {
     {MB_ABORTRETRYIGNORE,	"abortretryignore"},
-    {MB_OK, 			"ok"},
+    {MB_OK,			"ok"},
     {MB_OKCANCEL,		"okcancel"},
     {MB_RETRYCANCEL,		"retrycancel"},
     {MB_YESNO,			"yesno"},
@@ -114,72 +118,73 @@ static const int buttonFlagMap[] = {
 
 static const struct {int type; int btnIds[3];} allowedTypes[] = {
     {MB_ABORTRETRYIGNORE,	{IDABORT, IDRETRY,  IDIGNORE}},
-    {MB_OK, 			{IDOK,    -1,       -1      }},
-    {MB_OKCANCEL,		{IDOK,    IDCANCEL, -1      }},
-    {MB_RETRYCANCEL,		{IDRETRY, IDCANCEL, -1      }},
-    {MB_YESNO,			{IDYES,   IDNO,     -1      }},
-    {MB_YESNOCANCEL,		{IDYES,   IDNO,     IDCANCEL}}
+    {MB_OK,			{IDOK,	  -1,	    -1	    }},
+    {MB_OKCANCEL,		{IDOK,	  IDCANCEL, -1	    }},
+    {MB_RETRYCANCEL,		{IDRETRY, IDCANCEL, -1	    }},
+    {MB_YESNO,			{IDYES,	  IDNO,	    -1	    }},
+    {MB_YESNOCANCEL,		{IDYES,	  IDNO,	    IDCANCEL}}
 };
 
 #define NUM_TYPES (sizeof(allowedTypes) / sizeof(allowedTypes[0]))
 
 /*
- * The value of TK_MULTI_MAX_PATH dictactes how many files can
- * be retrieved with tk_get*File -multiple 1.  It must be allocated
- * on the stack, so make it large enough but not too large.  -- hobbs
- * The data is stored as <dir>\0<file1>\0<file2>\0...<fileN>\0\0.
- * MAX_PATH == 260 on Win2K/NT, so *40 is ~10K.
+ * The value of TK_MULTI_MAX_PATH dictactes how many files can be retrieved
+ * with tk_get*File -multiple 1. It must be allocated on the stack, so make it
+ * large enough but not too large. - hobbs
+ *
+ * The data is stored as <dir>\0<file1>\0<file2>\0...<fileN>\0\0. Since
+ * MAX_PATH == 260 on Win2K/NT, *40 is ~10Kbytes.
  */
 
 #define TK_MULTI_MAX_PATH	(MAX_PATH*40)
 
 /*
  * The following structure is used to pass information between the directory
- * chooser procedure, Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd(), and its dialog hook proc.
+ * chooser function, Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd(), and its dialog hook proc.
  */
 
 typedef struct ChooseDir {
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp, used only if debug is turned on, 
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp, used only if debug is turned on,
 				 * for setting the "tk_dialog" variable. */
     int lastCtrl;		/* Used by hook proc to keep track of last
-				 * control that had input focus, so when OK
-				 * is pressed we know whether to browse a
-				 * new directory or return. */
-    int lastIdx;		/* Last item that was selected in directory 
+				 * control that had input focus, so when OK is
+				 * pressed we know whether to browse a new
+				 * directory or return. */
+    int lastIdx;		/* Last item that was selected in directory
 				 * browser listbox. */
-    TCHAR path[MAX_PATH];	/* On return from choose directory dialog, 
-				 * holds the selected path.  Cannot return 
+    TCHAR path[MAX_PATH];	/* On return from choose directory dialog,
+				 * holds the selected path. Cannot return
 				 * selected path in ofnPtr->lpstrFile because
-				 * the default dialog proc stores a '\0' in 
-				 * it, since, of course, no _file_ was 
+				 * the default dialog proc stores a '\0' in
+				 * it, since, of course, no _file_ was
 				 * selected. */
     OPENFILENAME *ofnPtr;	/* pointer to the OFN structure */
 } ChooseDir;
 
 /*
- * Definitions of procedures used only in this file.
+ * Definitions of functions used only in this file.
  */
 
 #ifdef USE_NEW_CHOOSEDIR
 static UINT APIENTRY	ChooseDirectoryValidateProc(HWND hdlg, UINT uMsg,
 			    LPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
 #else
-static UINT APIENTRY	ChooseDirectoryHookProc(HWND hdlg, UINT uMsg, 
+static UINT APIENTRY	ChooseDirectoryHookProc(HWND hdlg, UINT uMsg,
 			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
 #endif
 static UINT CALLBACK	ColorDlgHookProc(HWND hDlg, UINT uMsg, WPARAM wParam,
 			    LPARAM lParam);
-static int 		GetFileNameA(ClientData clientData, 
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
+static int 		GetFileNameA(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
 			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int isOpen);
-static int 		GetFileNameW(ClientData clientData, 
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
+static int 		GetFileNameW(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
 			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], int isOpen);
-static int 		MakeFilter(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *valuePtr, 
+static int 		MakeFilter(Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *valuePtr,
 			    Tcl_DString *dsPtr);
-static UINT APIENTRY	OFNHookProc(HWND hdlg, UINT uMsg, WPARAM wParam, 
+static UINT APIENTRY	OFNHookProc(HWND hdlg, UINT uMsg, WPARAM wParam,
 			    LPARAM lParam);
-static UINT APIENTRY	OFNHookProcW(HWND hdlg, UINT uMsg, WPARAM wParam, 
+static UINT APIENTRY	OFNHookProcW(HWND hdlg, UINT uMsg, WPARAM wParam,
 			    LPARAM lParam);
 static LRESULT CALLBACK MsgBoxCBTProc(int nCode, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
 static void		SetTkDialog(ClientData clientData);
@@ -189,24 +194,23 @@ static void		SetTkDialog(ClientData clientData);
  *
  * EatSpuriousMessageBugFix --
  *
- *	In the file open/save dialog, double clicking on a list item
- *	causes the dialog box to close, but an unwanted WM_LBUTTONUP
- * 	message is sent to the window underneath. If the window underneath
- * 	happens to be a windows control (eg a button) then it will be
- * 	activated by accident.
- *
- * 	This problem does not occur in dialog boxes, because windows
- * 	must do some special processing to solve the problem. (separate
- * 	message processing functions are used to cope with keyboard
- * 	navigation of controls.)
- *
- * 	Here is one solution. After returning, we poll the message queue
- * 	for 1/4s looking for WM_LBUTTON up messages. If we see one it's
- * 	consumed. If we get a WM_LBUTTONDOWN message, then we exit early,
- * 	since the user must be doing something new. This fix only works
- * 	for the current application, so the problem will still occur if
- * 	the open dialog happens to be over another applications button.
- * 	However this is a fairly rare occurrance.
+ *	In the file open/save dialog, double clicking on a list item causes
+ *	the dialog box to close, but an unwanted WM_LBUTTONUP message is sent
+ *	to the window underneath. If the window underneath happens to be a
+ *	windows control (eg a button) then it will be activated by accident.
+ *
+ * 	This problem does not occur in dialog boxes, because windows must do
+ * 	some special processing to solve the problem. (separate message
+ * 	processing functions are used to cope with keyboard navigation of
+ * 	controls.)
+ *
+ * 	Here is one solution. After returning, we poll the message queue for
+ * 	1/4s looking for WM_LBUTTON up messages. If we see one it's consumed.
+ * 	If we get a WM_LBUTTONDOWN message, then we exit early, since the user
+ * 	must be doing something new. This fix only works for the current
+ * 	application, so the problem will still occur if the open dialog
+ * 	happens to be over another applications button. However this is a
+ * 	fairly rare occurrance.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -217,15 +221,16 @@ static void		SetTkDialog(ClientData clientData);
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static void EatSpuriousMessageBugFix( void )
+static void EatSpuriousMessageBugFix(void)
 {
     MSG msg;
     DWORD nTime = GetTickCount() + 250;
-    while( GetTickCount() < nTime )
-    {
-	if( PeekMessage(&msg,0,WM_LBUTTONDOWN,WM_LBUTTONDOWN,PM_NOREMOVE) )
+
+    while (GetTickCount() < nTime) {
+	if (PeekMessage(&msg, 0, WM_LBUTTONDOWN, WM_LBUTTONDOWN, PM_NOREMOVE)){
 	    break;
-	PeekMessage(&msg,0,WM_LBUTTONUP,WM_LBUTTONUP,PM_REMOVE);
+	}
+	PeekMessage(&msg, 0, WM_LBUTTONUP, WM_LBUTTONUP, PM_REMOVE);
     }
 }
 
@@ -235,8 +240,8 @@ static void EatSpuriousMessageBugFix( void )
  * TkWinDialogDebug --
  *
  *	Function to turn on/off debugging support for common dialogs under
- *	windows.  The variable "tk_debug" is set to the identifier of the
- *	dialog window when the modal dialog window pops up and it is safe to 
+ *	windows. The variable "tk_debug" is set to the identifier of the
+ *	dialog window when the modal dialog window pops up and it is safe to
  *	send messages to the dialog.
  *
  * Results:
@@ -248,12 +253,12 @@ static void EatSpuriousMessageBugFix( void )
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-void	    	
+void
 TkWinDialogDebug(
     int debug)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     tsdPtr->debugFlag = debug;
 }
@@ -263,15 +268,14 @@ TkWinDialogDebug(
  *
  * Tk_ChooseColorObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the color dialog box for the Windows
- *	platform. See the user documentation for details on what it
- *	does.
+ *	This function implements the color dialog box for the Windows
+ *	platform. See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	See user documentation.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A dialog window is created the first time this procedure is called.
+ *	A dialog window is created the first time this function is called.
  *	This window is not destroyed and will be reused the next time the
  *	application invokes the "tk_chooseColor" command.
  *
@@ -302,11 +306,12 @@ Tk_ChooseColorObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     result = TCL_OK;
     if (inited == 0) {
 	/*
-	 * dwCustColors stores the custom color which the user can
-	 * modify. We store these colors in a static array so that the next
-	 * time the color dialog pops up, the same set of custom colors
-	 * remain in the dialog.
+	 * dwCustColors stores the custom color which the user can modify. We
+	 * store these colors in a static array so that the next time the
+	 * color dialog pops up, the same set of custom colors remain in the
+	 * dialog.
 	 */
+
 	for (i = 0; i < 16; i++) {
 	    dwCustColors[i] = RGB(255-i * 10, i, i * 10);
 	}
@@ -318,7 +323,7 @@ Tk_ChooseColorObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 
     parent			= tkwin;
     chooseColor.lStructSize	= sizeof(CHOOSECOLOR);
-    chooseColor.hwndOwner	= NULL;			
+    chooseColor.hwndOwner	= NULL;
     chooseColor.hInstance	= NULL;
     chooseColor.rgbResult	= oldColor;
     chooseColor.lpCustColors	= dwCustColors;
@@ -340,36 +345,34 @@ Tk_ChooseColorObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (i + 1 == objc) {
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(optionPtr, NULL);
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string, "\" missing", 
+	    string = Tcl_GetString(optionPtr);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string, "\" missing",
 		    (char *) NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
-	string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, NULL);
+	string = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr);
 	switch ((enum options) index) {
-	    case COLOR_INITIAL: {
-		XColor *colorPtr;
+	case COLOR_INITIAL: {
+	    XColor *colorPtr;
 
-		colorPtr = Tk_GetColor(interp, tkwin, string);
-		if (colorPtr == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		chooseColor.rgbResult = RGB(colorPtr->red / 0x100, 
-			colorPtr->green / 0x100, colorPtr->blue / 0x100);
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case COLOR_PARENT: {
-		parent = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
-		if (parent == NULL) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		break;
+	    colorPtr = Tk_GetColor(interp, tkwin, string);
+	    if (colorPtr == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case COLOR_TITLE: {
-		chooseColor.lCustData = (LPARAM) string;
-		break;
+	    chooseColor.rgbResult = RGB(colorPtr->red / 0x100,
+		    colorPtr->green / 0x100, colorPtr->blue / 0x100);
+	    break;
+	}
+	case COLOR_PARENT:
+	    parent = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
+	    if (parent == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
+	    break;
+	case COLOR_TITLE:
+	    chooseColor.lCustData = (LPARAM) string;
+	    break;
 	}
     }
 
@@ -377,16 +380,17 @@ Tk_ChooseColorObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     chooseColor.hwndOwner = NULL;
     hWnd = Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(parent));
     chooseColor.hwndOwner = hWnd;
-    
+
     oldMode = Tcl_SetServiceMode(TCL_SERVICE_ALL);
     winCode = ChooseColor(&chooseColor);
     (void) Tcl_SetServiceMode(oldMode);
 
     /*
-     * Ensure that hWnd is enabled, because it can happen that we
-     * have updated the wrapper of the parent, which causes us to
-     * leave this child disabled (Windows loses sync).
+     * Ensure that hWnd is enabled, because it can happen that we have updated
+     * the wrapper of the parent, which causes us to leave this child disabled
+     * (Windows loses sync).
      */
+
     EnableWindow(hWnd, 1);
 
     /*
@@ -407,10 +411,10 @@ Tk_ChooseColorObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	char color[100];
 
 	sprintf(color, "#%02x%02x%02x",
-		GetRValue(chooseColor.rgbResult), 
-	        GetGValue(chooseColor.rgbResult), 
+		GetRValue(chooseColor.rgbResult),
+		GetGValue(chooseColor.rgbResult),
 		GetBValue(chooseColor.rgbResult));
-        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, color, NULL);
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, color, NULL);
 	oldColor = chooseColor.rgbResult;
 	result = TCL_OK;
     }
@@ -423,12 +427,12 @@ Tk_ChooseColorObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ColorDlgHookProc --
  *
- *	Provides special handling of messages for the Color common dialog
- *	box.  Used to set the title when the dialog first appears.
+ *	Provides special handling of messages for the Color common dialog box.
+ *	Used to set the title when the dialog first appears.
  *
  * Results:
- *	The return value is 0 if the default dialog box procedure should
- *	handle the message, non-zero otherwise. 
+ *	The return value is 0 if the default dialog box function should handle
+ *	the message, non-zero otherwise.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Changes the title of the dialog window.
@@ -436,39 +440,38 @@ Tk_ChooseColorObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static UINT CALLBACK 
+static UINT CALLBACK
 ColorDlgHookProc(hDlg, uMsg, wParam, lParam)
     HWND hDlg;			/* Handle to the color dialog. */
     UINT uMsg;			/* Type of message. */
     WPARAM wParam;		/* First message parameter. */
     LPARAM lParam;		/* Second message parameter. */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     switch (uMsg) {
-	case WM_INITDIALOG: {
-	    const char *title;
-	    CHOOSECOLOR *ccPtr;
-	    Tcl_DString ds;
+    case WM_INITDIALOG: {
+	const char *title;
+	CHOOSECOLOR *ccPtr;
+	Tcl_DString ds;
 
-	    /* 
-	     * Set the title string of the dialog.
-	     */
+	/*
+	 * Set the title string of the dialog.
+	 */
 
-	    ccPtr = (CHOOSECOLOR *) lParam;
-	    title = (const char *) ccPtr->lCustData;
-	    if ((title != NULL) && (title[0] != '\0')) {
-		(*tkWinProcs->setWindowText)(hDlg,
-			Tcl_WinUtfToTChar(title, -1, &ds));
-		Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
-	    }
-	    if (tsdPtr->debugFlag) {
-		tsdPtr->debugInterp = (Tcl_Interp *) ccPtr->lpTemplateName;
-		Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SetTkDialog, (ClientData) hDlg);
-	    }
-	    return TRUE;
+	ccPtr = (CHOOSECOLOR *) lParam;
+	title = (const char *) ccPtr->lCustData;
+	if ((title != NULL) && (title[0] != '\0')) {
+	    (*tkWinProcs->setWindowText)(hDlg,Tcl_WinUtfToTChar(title,-1,&ds));
+	    Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
+	}
+	if (tsdPtr->debugFlag) {
+	    tsdPtr->debugInterp = (Tcl_Interp *) ccPtr->lpTemplateName;
+	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SetTkDialog, (ClientData) hDlg);
 	}
+	return TRUE;
+    }
     }
     return FALSE;
 }
@@ -478,15 +481,14 @@ ColorDlgHookProc(hDlg, uMsg, wParam, lParam)
  *
  * Tk_GetOpenFileCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "open file" dialog box for the
- *	Windows platform. See the user documentation for details on what
- *	it does.
+ *	This function implements the "open file" dialog box for the Windows
+ *	platform. See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	See user documentation.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A dialog window is created the first this procedure is called.
+ *	A dialog window is created the first this function is called.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -552,14 +554,14 @@ Tk_GetSaveFileObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static int 
+static int
 GetFileNameW(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
     ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
     int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
-    int open;			/* 1 to call GetOpenFileName(), 0 to 
-				 * call GetSaveFileName(). */
+    int open;			/* 1 to call GetOpenFileName(), 0 to call
+				 * GetSaveFileName(). */
 {
     OPENFILENAMEW ofn;
     WCHAR file[TK_MULTI_MAX_PATH];
@@ -570,8 +572,8 @@ GetFileNameW(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
     Tcl_DString utfFilterString, utfDirString;
     Tcl_DString extString, filterString, dirString, titleString;
     Tcl_Encoding unicodeEncoding = TkWinGetUnicodeEncoding();
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     static CONST char *saveOptionStrings[] = {
 	"-defaultextension", "-filetypes", "-initialdir", "-initialfile",
 	"-parent", "-title", NULL
@@ -619,81 +621,76 @@ GetFileNameW(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 		"option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	    goto end;
 	}
+
 	/*
 	 * We want to maximize code sharing between the open and save file
 	 * dialog implementations; in particular, the switch statement below.
 	 * We use different sets of option strings from the GetIndexFromObj
-	 * call above, but a single enumeration for both.  The save file
-	 * dialog doesn't support -multiple, but it falls in the middle of
-	 * the enumeration.  Ultimately, this means that when the index found
-	 * by GetIndexFromObj is >= FILE_MULTIPLE, when doing a save file
-	 * dialog, we have to increment the index, so that it matches the
-	 * open file dialog enumeration.
+	 * call above, but a single enumeration for both. The save file dialog
+	 * doesn't support -multiple, but it falls in the middle of the
+	 * enumeration. Ultimately, this means that when the index found by
+	 * GetIndexFromObj is >= FILE_MULTIPLE, when doing a save file dialog,
+	 * we have to increment the index, so that it matches the open file
+	 * dialog enumeration.
 	 */
+
 	if (!open && index >= FILE_MULTIPLE) {
 	    index++;
 	}
 	if (i + 1 == objc) {
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(optionPtr, NULL);
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string, "\" missing", 
+	    string = Tcl_GetString(optionPtr);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string, "\" missing",
 		    (char *) NULL);
 	    goto end;
 	}
 
-	string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, NULL);
+	string = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr);
 	switch ((enum options) index) {
-	    case FILE_DEFAULT: {
-		if (string[0] == '.') {
-		    string++;
-		}
-		extension = string;
-		break;
+	case FILE_DEFAULT:
+	    if (string[0] == '.') {
+		string++;
 	    }
-	    case FILE_TYPES: {
-		Tcl_DStringFree(&utfFilterString);
-		if (MakeFilter(interp, valuePtr, &utfFilterString) != TCL_OK) {
-		    goto end;
-		}
-		filter = Tcl_DStringValue(&utfFilterString);
-		break;
+	    extension = string;
+	    break;
+	case FILE_TYPES:
+	    Tcl_DStringFree(&utfFilterString);
+	    if (MakeFilter(interp, valuePtr, &utfFilterString) != TCL_OK) {
+		goto end;
 	    }
-	    case FILE_INITDIR: {
-		Tcl_DStringFree(&utfDirString);
-		if (Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, string,
-			&utfDirString) == NULL) {
-		    goto end;
-		}
-		break;
+	    filter = Tcl_DStringValue(&utfFilterString);
+	    break;
+	case FILE_INITDIR:
+	    Tcl_DStringFree(&utfDirString);
+	    if (Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, string,
+		    &utfDirString) == NULL) {
+		goto end;
 	    }
-	    case FILE_INITFILE: {
-		Tcl_DString ds;
+	    break;
+	case FILE_INITFILE: {
+	    Tcl_DString ds;
 
-		if (Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, string, &ds) == NULL) {
-		    goto end;
-		}
-		Tcl_UtfToExternal(NULL, unicodeEncoding, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds),
-			Tcl_DStringLength(&ds), 0, NULL, (char *) file,
-			sizeof(file), NULL, NULL, NULL);
-		break;
+	    if (Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, string, &ds) == NULL) {
+		goto end;
 	    }
-	    case FILE_MULTIPLE: {
-		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr,
-			&multi) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case FILE_PARENT: {
-		tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
-		if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		    goto end;
-		}
-		break;
+	    Tcl_UtfToExternal(NULL, unicodeEncoding, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds),
+		    Tcl_DStringLength(&ds), 0, NULL, (char *) file,
+		    sizeof(file), NULL, NULL, NULL);
+	    break;
+	}
+	case FILE_MULTIPLE:
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &multi) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case FILE_TITLE: {
-		title = string;
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case FILE_PARENT:
+	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
+	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
+		goto end;
 	    }
+	    break;
+	case FILE_TITLE:
+	    title = string;
+	    break;
 	}
     }
 
@@ -707,21 +704,19 @@ GetFileNameW(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
     hWnd = Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
 
     ZeroMemory(&ofn, sizeof(OPENFILENAMEW));
-    ofn.lStructSize		= sizeof(OPENFILENAMEW);
-    ofn.hwndOwner		= hWnd;
+    ofn.lStructSize = sizeof(OPENFILENAMEW);
+    ofn.hwndOwner = hWnd;
 #ifdef _WIN64
-    ofn.hInstance		= (HINSTANCE) GetWindowLongPtr(ofn.hwndOwner, 
-					GWLP_HINSTANCE);
+    ofn.hInstance = (HINSTANCE) GetWindowLongPtr(ofn.hwndOwner,GWLP_HINSTANCE);
 #else
-    ofn.hInstance		= (HINSTANCE) GetWindowLong(ofn.hwndOwner, 
-					GWL_HINSTANCE);
+    ofn.hInstance = (HINSTANCE) GetWindowLong(ofn.hwndOwner, GWL_HINSTANCE);
 #endif
-    ofn.lpstrFile		= (WCHAR *) file;
-    ofn.nMaxFile		= TK_MULTI_MAX_PATH;
-    ofn.Flags			= OFN_HIDEREADONLY | OFN_PATHMUSTEXIST 
-				  | OFN_NOCHANGEDIR | OFN_EXPLORER;
-    ofn.lpfnHook		= (LPOFNHOOKPROC) OFNHookProcW;
-    ofn.lCustData		= (LPARAM) interp;
+    ofn.lpstrFile = (WCHAR *) file;
+    ofn.nMaxFile = TK_MULTI_MAX_PATH;
+    ofn.Flags = OFN_HIDEREADONLY | OFN_PATHMUSTEXIST | OFN_NOCHANGEDIR
+	    | OFN_EXPLORER;
+    ofn.lpfnHook = (LPOFNHOOKPROC) OFNHookProcW;
+    ofn.lCustData = (LPARAM) interp;
 
     if (open != 0) {
 	ofn.Flags |= OFN_FILEMUSTEXIST;
@@ -753,10 +748,10 @@ GetFileNameW(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 		Tcl_DStringLength(&utfDirString), &dirString);
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * NT 5.0 changed the meaning of lpstrInitialDir, so we have
-	 * to ensure that we set the [pwd] if the user didn't specify
-	 * anything else.
+	 * NT 5.0 changed the meaning of lpstrInitialDir, so we have to ensure
+	 * that we set the [pwd] if the user didn't specify anything else.
 	 */
+
 	Tcl_DString cwd;
 
 	Tcl_DStringFree(&utfDirString);
@@ -791,10 +786,11 @@ GetFileNameW(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
     EatSpuriousMessageBugFix();
 
     /*
-     * Ensure that hWnd is enabled, because it can happen that we
-     * have updated the wrapper of the parent, which causes us to
-     * leave this child disabled (Windows loses sync).
+     * Ensure that hWnd is enabled, because it can happen that we have updated
+     * the wrapper of the parent, which causes us to leave this child disabled
+     * (Windows loses sync).
      */
+
     EnableWindow(hWnd, 1);
 
     /*
@@ -810,12 +806,12 @@ GetFileNameW(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 
     if (winCode != 0) {
 	if (ofn.Flags & OFN_ALLOWMULTISELECT) {
-            /*
-	     * The result in custData->szFile contains many items,
-	     * separated with null characters.  It is terminated with
-	     * two nulls in a row.  The first element is the directory
-	     * path.
+	    /*
+	     * The result in custData->szFile contains many items, separated
+	     * with null characters. It is terminated with two nulls in a row.
+	     * The first element is the directory path.
 	     */
+
 	    char *dir;
 	    char *p;
 	    char *file;
@@ -831,13 +827,17 @@ GetFileNameW(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 	    files = ofn.lpstrFile;
 	    Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString(unicodeEncoding, (char *) files, -1, &ds);
 
-	    /* Get directory */
+	    /*
+	     * Get directory.
+	     */
+
 	    dir = Tcl_DStringValue(&ds);
 	    for (p = dir; p && *p; p++) {
 		/*
 		 * Change the pathname to the Tcl "normalized" pathname, where
 		 * back slashes are used instead of forward slashes
 		 */
+
 		if (*p == '\\') {
 		    *p = '/';
 		}
@@ -868,10 +868,12 @@ GetFileNameW(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 		    Tcl_DStringFree(&filename);
 		}
 	    }
+
 	    if (count == 0) {
 		/*
 		 * Only one file was returned.
 		 */
+
 		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, returnList,
 			Tcl_NewStringObj(dir, -1));
 	    }
@@ -881,7 +883,7 @@ GetFileNameW(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 	} else {
 	    char *p;
 	    Tcl_DString ds;
-	    
+
 	    Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString(unicodeEncoding,
 		    (char *) ofn.lpstrFile, -1, &ds);
 	    for (p = Tcl_DStringValue(&ds); *p != '\0'; p++) {
@@ -902,25 +904,26 @@ GetFileNameW(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 	 * Use the CommDlgExtendedError() function to retrieve the error code.
 	 * This function can return one of about two dozen codes; most of
 	 * these indicate some sort of gross system failure (insufficient
-	 * memory, bad window handles, etc.).  Most of the error codes will be
+	 * memory, bad window handles, etc.). Most of the error codes will be
 	 * ignored; as we find we want more specific error messages for
 	 * particular errors, we can extend the code as needed.
 	 *
-	 * We could also check for FNERR_BUFFERTOOSMALL, but we can't
-	 * really do anything about it when it happens.
+	 * We could also check for FNERR_BUFFERTOOSMALL, but we can't really
+	 * do anything about it when it happens.
 	 */
 
 	if (CommDlgExtendedError() == FNERR_INVALIDFILENAME) {
 	    char *p;
 	    Tcl_DString ds;
-	    
+
 	    Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString(unicodeEncoding,
 		    (char *) ofn.lpstrFile, -1, &ds);
 	    for (p = Tcl_DStringValue(&ds); *p != '\0'; p++) {
 		/*
-		 * Change the pathname to the Tcl "normalized" pathname,
-		 * where back slashes are used instead of forward slashes
+		 * Change the pathname to the Tcl "normalized" pathname, where
+		 * back slashes are used instead of forward slashes
 		 */
+
 		if (*p == '\\') {
 		    *p = '/';
 		}
@@ -932,7 +935,7 @@ GetFileNameW(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 	    result = TCL_OK;
 	}
     }
-    
+
     if (ofn.lpstrTitle != NULL) {
 	Tcl_DStringFree(&titleString);
     }
@@ -944,7 +947,7 @@ GetFileNameW(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 	Tcl_DStringFree(&extString);
     }
 
-    end:
+  end:
     Tcl_DStringFree(&utfDirString);
     Tcl_DStringFree(&utfFilterString);
 
@@ -956,9 +959,8 @@ GetFileNameW(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
  *
  * OFNHookProcW --
  *
- *	Hook procedure called only if debugging is turned on.  Sets
- *	the "tk_dialog" variable when the dialog is ready to receive
- *	messages.
+ *	Hook function called only if debugging is turned on. Sets the
+ *	"tk_dialog" variable when the dialog is ready to receive messages.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns 0 to allow default processing of messages to occur.
@@ -969,15 +971,15 @@ GetFileNameW(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static UINT APIENTRY 
+static UINT APIENTRY
 OFNHookProcW(
-    HWND hdlg,		// handle to child dialog window
-    UINT uMsg,		// message identifier
-    WPARAM wParam,	// message parameter
-    LPARAM lParam) 	// message parameter
+    HWND hdlg,			/* Handle to child dialog window. */
+    UINT uMsg,			/* Message identifier */
+    WPARAM wParam,		/* Message parameter */
+    LPARAM lParam)		/* Message parameter */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     OPENFILENAMEW *ofnPtr;
 
     if (uMsg == WM_INITDIALOG) {
@@ -988,16 +990,15 @@ OFNHookProcW(
 #endif
     } else if (uMsg == WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED) {
 	/*
-	 * This message is delivered at the right time to enable Tk
-	 * to set the debug information.  Unhooks itself so it 
-	 * won't set the debug information every time it gets a 
-	 * WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED message.
+	 * This message is delivered at the right time to enable Tk to set the
+	 * debug information. Unhooks itself so it won't set the debug
+	 * information every time it gets a WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED message.
 	 */
 
 #ifdef _WIN64
-        ofnPtr = (OPENFILENAMEW *) GetWindowLongPtr(hdlg, GWLP_USERDATA);
+	ofnPtr = (OPENFILENAMEW *) GetWindowLongPtr(hdlg, GWLP_USERDATA);
 #else
-        ofnPtr = (OPENFILENAMEW *) GetWindowLong(hdlg, GWL_USERDATA);
+	ofnPtr = (OPENFILENAMEW *) GetWindowLong(hdlg, GWL_USERDATA);
 #endif
 	if (ofnPtr != NULL) {
 	    hdlg = GetParent(hdlg);
@@ -1029,14 +1030,14 @@ OFNHookProcW(
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static int 
+static int
 GetFileNameA(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
     ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
     int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
-    int open;			/* 1 to call GetOpenFileName(), 0 to 
-				 * call GetSaveFileName(). */
+    int open;			/* 1 to call GetOpenFileName(), 0 to call
+				 * GetSaveFileName(). */
 {
     OPENFILENAME ofn;
     TCHAR file[TK_MULTI_MAX_PATH], savePath[MAX_PATH];
@@ -1046,8 +1047,8 @@ GetFileNameA(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
     HWND hWnd;
     Tcl_DString utfFilterString, utfDirString;
     Tcl_DString extString, filterString, dirString, titleString;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     static CONST char *saveOptionStrings[] = {
 	"-defaultextension", "-filetypes", "-initialdir", "-initialfile",
 	"-parent", "-title", NULL
@@ -1095,81 +1096,75 @@ GetFileNameA(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 		"option", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
 	    goto end;
 	}
+
 	/*
 	 * We want to maximize code sharing between the open and save file
 	 * dialog implementations; in particular, the switch statement below.
 	 * We use different sets of option strings from the GetIndexFromObj
-	 * call above, but a single enumeration for both.  The save file
-	 * dialog doesn't support -multiple, but it falls in the middle of
-	 * the enumeration.  Ultimately, this means that when the index found
-	 * by GetIndexFromObj is >= FILE_MULTIPLE, when doing a save file
-	 * dialog, we have to increment the index, so that it matches the
-	 * open file dialog enumeration.
+	 * call above, but a single enumeration for both. The save file dialog
+	 * doesn't support -multiple, but it falls in the middle of the
+	 * enumeration. Ultimately, this means that when the index found by
+	 * GetIndexFromObj is >= FILE_MULTIPLE, when doing a save file dialog,
+	 * we have to increment the index, so that it matches the open file
+	 * dialog enumeration.
 	 */
+
 	if (!open && index >= FILE_MULTIPLE) {
 	    index++;
 	}
 	if (i + 1 == objc) {
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(optionPtr, NULL);
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string, "\" missing", 
+	    string = Tcl_GetString(optionPtr);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string, "\" missing",
 		    (char *) NULL);
 	    goto end;
 	}
 
-	string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, NULL);
+	string = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr);
 	switch ((enum options) index) {
-	    case FILE_DEFAULT: {
-		if (string[0] == '.') {
-		    string++;
-		}
-		extension = string;
-		break;
+	case FILE_DEFAULT:
+	    if (string[0] == '.') {
+		string++;
 	    }
-	    case FILE_TYPES: {
-		Tcl_DStringFree(&utfFilterString);
-		if (MakeFilter(interp, valuePtr, &utfFilterString) != TCL_OK) {
-		    goto end;
-		}
-		filter = Tcl_DStringValue(&utfFilterString);
-		break;
+	    extension = string;
+	    break;
+	case FILE_TYPES:
+	    Tcl_DStringFree(&utfFilterString);
+	    if (MakeFilter(interp, valuePtr, &utfFilterString) != TCL_OK) {
+		goto end;
 	    }
-	    case FILE_INITDIR: {
-		Tcl_DStringFree(&utfDirString);
-		if (Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, string,
-			&utfDirString) == NULL) {
-		    goto end;
-		}
-		break;
+	    filter = Tcl_DStringValue(&utfFilterString);
+	    break;
+	case FILE_INITDIR:
+	    Tcl_DStringFree(&utfDirString);
+	    if (Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, string, &utfDirString) == NULL) {
+		goto end;
 	    }
-	    case FILE_INITFILE: {
-		Tcl_DString ds;
+	    break;
+	case FILE_INITFILE: {
+	    Tcl_DString ds;
 
-		if (Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, string, &ds) == NULL) {
-		    goto end;
-		}
-		Tcl_UtfToExternal(NULL, NULL, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds), 
-			Tcl_DStringLength(&ds), 0, NULL, (char *) file, 
-			sizeof(file), NULL, NULL, NULL);
-		break;
+	    if (Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, string, &ds) == NULL) {
+		goto end;
 	    }
-	    case FILE_MULTIPLE: {
-		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr,
-			&multi) != TCL_OK) {
-		    return TCL_ERROR;
-		}
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case FILE_PARENT: {
-		tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
-		if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		    goto end;
-		}
-		break;
+	    Tcl_UtfToExternal(NULL, NULL, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds),
+		    Tcl_DStringLength(&ds), 0, NULL, (char *) file,
+		    sizeof(file), NULL, NULL, NULL);
+	    break;
+	}
+	case FILE_MULTIPLE:
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &multi) != TCL_OK) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
-	    case FILE_TITLE: {
-		title = string;
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case FILE_PARENT:
+	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
+	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
+		goto end;
 	    }
+	    break;
+	case FILE_TITLE:
+	    title = string;
+	    break;
 	}
     }
 
@@ -1182,33 +1177,31 @@ GetFileNameA(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
     Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin);
     hWnd = Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin));
 
-    ofn.lStructSize		= sizeof(ofn);
-    ofn.hwndOwner		= hWnd;
+    ofn.lStructSize = sizeof(ofn);
+    ofn.hwndOwner = hWnd;
 #ifdef _WIN64
-    ofn.hInstance		= (HINSTANCE) GetWindowLongPtr(ofn.hwndOwner, 
-					GWLP_HINSTANCE);
+    ofn.hInstance = (HINSTANCE) GetWindowLongPtr(ofn.hwndOwner,GWLP_HINSTANCE);
 #else
-    ofn.hInstance		= (HINSTANCE) GetWindowLong(ofn.hwndOwner, 
-					GWL_HINSTANCE);
+    ofn.hInstance = (HINSTANCE) GetWindowLong(ofn.hwndOwner, GWL_HINSTANCE);
 #endif
-    ofn.lpstrFilter		= NULL;
-    ofn.lpstrCustomFilter	= NULL;
-    ofn.nMaxCustFilter		= 0;
-    ofn.nFilterIndex		= 0;
-    ofn.lpstrFile		= (LPTSTR) file;
-    ofn.nMaxFile		= TK_MULTI_MAX_PATH;
-    ofn.lpstrFileTitle		= NULL;
-    ofn.nMaxFileTitle		= 0;
-    ofn.lpstrInitialDir		= NULL;
-    ofn.lpstrTitle		= NULL;
-    ofn.Flags			= OFN_HIDEREADONLY | OFN_PATHMUSTEXIST 
-				  | OFN_NOCHANGEDIR | OFN_EXPLORER;
-    ofn.nFileOffset		= 0;
-    ofn.nFileExtension		= 0;
-    ofn.lpstrDefExt		= NULL;
-    ofn.lpfnHook		= (LPOFNHOOKPROC) OFNHookProc;
-    ofn.lCustData		= (LPARAM) interp;
-    ofn.lpTemplateName		= NULL;
+    ofn.lpstrFilter = NULL;
+    ofn.lpstrCustomFilter = NULL;
+    ofn.nMaxCustFilter = 0;
+    ofn.nFilterIndex = 0;
+    ofn.lpstrFile = (LPTSTR) file;
+    ofn.nMaxFile = TK_MULTI_MAX_PATH;
+    ofn.lpstrFileTitle = NULL;
+    ofn.nMaxFileTitle = 0;
+    ofn.lpstrInitialDir = NULL;
+    ofn.lpstrTitle = NULL;
+    ofn.Flags = OFN_HIDEREADONLY | OFN_PATHMUSTEXIST | OFN_NOCHANGEDIR
+	    | OFN_EXPLORER;
+    ofn.nFileOffset = 0;
+    ofn.nFileExtension = 0;
+    ofn.lpstrDefExt = NULL;
+    ofn.lpfnHook = (LPOFNHOOKPROC) OFNHookProc;
+    ofn.lCustData = (LPARAM) interp;
+    ofn.lpTemplateName = NULL;
 
     if (open != 0) {
 	ofn.Flags |= OFN_FILEMUSTEXIST;
@@ -1237,10 +1230,10 @@ GetFileNameA(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 		Tcl_DStringLength(&utfDirString), &dirString);
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * NT 5.0 changed the meaning of lpstrInitialDir, so we have
-	 * to ensure that we set the [pwd] if the user didn't specify
-	 * anything else.
+	 * NT 5.0 changed the meaning of lpstrInitialDir, so we have to ensure
+	 * that we set the [pwd] if the user didn't specify anything else.
 	 */
+
 	Tcl_DString cwd;
 
 	Tcl_DStringFree(&utfDirString);
@@ -1277,10 +1270,11 @@ GetFileNameA(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
     SetCurrentDirectory(savePath);
 
     /*
-     * Ensure that hWnd is enabled, because it can happen that we
-     * have updated the wrapper of the parent, which causes us to
-     * leave this child disabled (Windows loses sync).
+     * Ensure that hWnd is enabled, because it can happen that we have updated
+     * the wrapper of the parent, which causes us to leave this child disabled
+     * (Windows loses sync).
      */
+
     EnableWindow(hWnd, 1);
 
     /*
@@ -1296,12 +1290,12 @@ GetFileNameA(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 
     if (winCode != 0) {
 	if (ofn.Flags & OFN_ALLOWMULTISELECT) {
-            /*
-	     * The result in custData->szFile contains many items,
-	     * separated with null characters.  It is terminated with
-	     * two nulls in a row.  The first element is the directory
-	     * path.
+	    /*
+	     * The result in custData->szFile contains many items, separated
+	     * with null characters. It is terminated with two nulls in a row.
+	     * The first element is the directory path.
 	     */
+
 	    char *dir;
 	    char *p;
 	    char *file;
@@ -1317,13 +1311,17 @@ GetFileNameA(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 	    files = ofn.lpstrFile;
 	    Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString(NULL, (char *) files, -1, &ds);
 
-	    /* Get directory */
+	    /*
+	     * Get directory.
+	     */
+
 	    dir = Tcl_DStringValue(&ds);
 	    for (p = dir; p && *p; p++) {
 		/*
 		 * Change the pathname to the Tcl "normalized" pathname, where
 		 * back slashes are used instead of forward slashes
 		 */
+
 		if (*p == '\\') {
 		    *p = '/';
 		}
@@ -1358,6 +1356,7 @@ GetFileNameA(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 		/*
 		 * Only one file was returned.
 		 */
+
 		Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(interp, returnList,
 			Tcl_NewStringObj(dir, -1));
 	    }
@@ -1374,6 +1373,7 @@ GetFileNameA(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 		 * Change the pathname to the Tcl "normalized" pathname, where
 		 * back slashes are used instead of forward slashes
 		 */
+
 		if (*p == '\\') {
 		    *p = '/';
 		}
@@ -1387,13 +1387,14 @@ GetFileNameA(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 	 * Use the CommDlgExtendedError() function to retrieve the error code.
 	 * This function can return one of about two dozen codes; most of
 	 * these indicate some sort of gross system failure (insufficient
-	 * memory, bad window handles, etc.).  Most of the error codes will be
-	 * ignored;; as we find we want specific error messages for particular
+	 * memory, bad window handles, etc.) Most of the error codes will be
+	 * ignored; as we find we want specific error messages for particular
 	 * errors, we can extend the code as needed.
 	 *
-	 * We could also check for FNERR_BUFFERTOOSMALL, but we can't
-	 * really do anything about it when it happens.
+	 * We could also check for FNERR_BUFFERTOOSMALL, but we can't really
+	 * do anything about it when it happens.
 	 */
+
 	if (CommDlgExtendedError() == FNERR_INVALIDFILENAME) {
 	    char *p;
 	    Tcl_DString ds;
@@ -1401,9 +1402,10 @@ GetFileNameA(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 	    Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString(NULL, (char *) ofn.lpstrFile, -1, &ds);
 	    for (p = Tcl_DStringValue(&ds); *p != '\0'; p++) {
 		/*
-		 * Change the pathname to the Tcl "normalized" pathname,
-		 * where back slashes are used instead of forward slashes
+		 * Change the pathname to the Tcl "normalized" pathname, where
+		 * back slashes are used instead of forward slashes
 		 */
+
 		if (*p == '\\') {
 		    *p = '/';
 		}
@@ -1427,7 +1429,7 @@ GetFileNameA(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
 	Tcl_DStringFree(&extString);
     }
 
-    end:
+  end:
     Tcl_DStringFree(&utfDirString);
     Tcl_DStringFree(&utfFilterString);
 
@@ -1439,9 +1441,8 @@ GetFileNameA(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
  *
  * OFNHookProc --
  *
- *	Hook procedure called only if debugging is turned on.  Sets
- *	the "tk_dialog" variable when the dialog is ready to receive
- *	messages.
+ *	Hook function called only if debugging is turned on. Sets the
+ *	"tk_dialog" variable when the dialog is ready to receive messages.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns 0 to allow default processing of messages to occur.
@@ -1452,15 +1453,15 @@ GetFileNameA(clientData, interp, objc, objv, open)
  *-------------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static UINT APIENTRY 
+static UINT APIENTRY
 OFNHookProc(
-    HWND hdlg,		// handle to child dialog window
-    UINT uMsg,		// message identifier
-    WPARAM wParam,	// message parameter
-    LPARAM lParam) 	// message parameter
+    HWND hdlg,			/* handle to child dialog window */
+    UINT uMsg,			/* message identifier */
+    WPARAM wParam,		/* message parameter */
+    LPARAM lParam)		/* message parameter */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     OPENFILENAME *ofnPtr;
 
     if (uMsg == WM_INITDIALOG) {
@@ -1471,17 +1472,16 @@ OFNHookProc(
 #endif
     } else if (uMsg == WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED) {
 	/*
-	 * This message is delivered at the right time to both 
-	 * old-style and explorer-style hook procs to enable Tk
-	 * to set the debug information.  Unhooks itself so it 
-	 * won't set the debug information every time it gets a 
-	 * WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED message.
+	 * This message is delivered at the right time to both old-style and
+	 * explorer-style hook procs to enable Tk to set the debug
+	 * information. Unhooks itself so it won't set the debug information
+	 * every time it gets a WM_WINDOWPOSCHANGED message.
 	 */
 
 #ifdef _WIN64
-        ofnPtr = (OPENFILENAME *) GetWindowLongPtr(hdlg, GWLP_USERDATA);
+	ofnPtr = (OPENFILENAME *) GetWindowLongPtr(hdlg, GWLP_USERDATA);
 #else
-        ofnPtr = (OPENFILENAME *) GetWindowLong(hdlg, GWL_USERDATA);
+	ofnPtr = (OPENFILENAME *) GetWindowLong(hdlg, GWL_USERDATA);
 #endif
 	if (ofnPtr != NULL) {
 	    if (ofnPtr->Flags & OFN_EXPLORER) {
@@ -1505,7 +1505,7 @@ OFNHookProc(
  * MakeFilter --
  *
  *	Allocate a buffer to store the filters in a format understood by
- *	Windows
+ *	Windows.
  *
  * Results:
  *	A standard TCL return value.
@@ -1515,8 +1515,9 @@ OFNHookProc(
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
-static int 
-MakeFilter(interp, valuePtr, dsPtr) 
+
+static int
+MakeFilter(interp, valuePtr, dsPtr)
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
     Tcl_Obj *valuePtr;		/* Value of the -filetypes option */
     Tcl_DString *dsPtr;		/* Filled with windows filter string. */
@@ -1553,15 +1554,17 @@ MakeFilter(interp, valuePtr, dsPtr)
 
     } else {
 	int len;
+
 	if (valuePtr == NULL) {
 	    len = 0;
 	} else {
 	    CONST char* string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, &len);
 	}
-	
-	/* We format the filetype into a string understood by Windows:
-	 * {"Text Documents" {.doc .txt} {TEXT}} becomes
-	 * "Text Documents (*.doc,*.txt)\0*.doc;*.txt\0"
+
+	/*
+	 * We format the filetype into a string understood by Windows: {"Text
+	 * Documents" {.doc .txt} {TEXT}} becomes "Text Documents
+	 * (*.doc,*.txt)\0*.doc;*.txt\0"
 	 *
 	 * See the Windows OPENFILENAME manual page for details on the filter
 	 * string format.
@@ -1571,16 +1574,18 @@ MakeFilter(interp, valuePtr, dsPtr)
 	 * Since we may only add asterisks (*) to the filter, we need at most
 	 * twice the size of the string to format the filter
 	 */
+
 	filterStr = ckalloc((unsigned int) len * 3);
 
 	for (filterPtr = flist.filters, p = filterStr; filterPtr;
-	        filterPtr = filterPtr->next) {
+		filterPtr = filterPtr->next) {
 	    char *sep;
 	    FileFilterClause *clausePtr;
 
 	    /*
-	     *  First, put in the name of the file type
+	     * First, put in the name of the file type.
 	     */
+
 	    strcpy(p, filterPtr->name);
 	    p+= strlen(filterPtr->name);
 	    *p++ = ' ';
@@ -1588,24 +1593,24 @@ MakeFilter(interp, valuePtr, dsPtr)
 
 	    for (pass = 1; pass <= 2; pass++) {
 		/*
-		 * In the first pass, we format the extensions in the 
-		 * name field. In the second pass, we format the extensions in
-		 * the filter pattern field
+		 * In the first pass, we format the extensions in the name
+		 * field. In the second pass, we format the extensions in the
+		 * filter pattern field
 		 */
+
 		sep = "";
 		for (clausePtr=filterPtr->clauses;clausePtr;
-		         clausePtr=clausePtr->next) {
+			clausePtr=clausePtr->next) {
 		    GlobPattern *globPtr;
-		
 
 		    for (globPtr=clausePtr->patterns; globPtr;
 			    globPtr=globPtr->next) {
 			strcpy(p, sep);
-			p+= strlen(sep);
+			p += strlen(sep);
 			strcpy(p, globPtr->pattern);
-			p+= strlen(globPtr->pattern);
+			p += strlen(globPtr->pattern);
 
-			if (pass==1) {
+			if (pass == 1) {
 			    sep = ",";
 			} else {
 			    sep = ";";
@@ -1613,11 +1618,9 @@ MakeFilter(interp, valuePtr, dsPtr)
 		    }
 		}
 		if (pass == 1) {
-		    if (pass == 1) {
-			*p ++ = ')';
-		    }
+		    *p ++ = ')';
 		}
-		*p ++ = '\0';
+		*p++ = '\0';
 	    }
 	}
 
@@ -1625,6 +1628,7 @@ MakeFilter(interp, valuePtr, dsPtr)
 	 * Windows requires the filter string to be ended by two NULL
 	 * characters.
 	 */
+
 	*p++ = '\0';
 	*p = '\0';
     }
@@ -1642,77 +1646,78 @@ MakeFilter(interp, valuePtr, dsPtr)
  *
  * Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd --
  *
- * This procedure implements the "tk_chooseDirectory" dialog box
- * for the Windows platform. See the user documentation for details
- * on what it does. Uses the newer SHBrowseForFolder explorer type
- * interface.
+ *	This function implements the "tk_chooseDirectory" dialog box for the
+ *	Windows platform. See the user documentation for details on what it
+ *	does. Uses the newer SHBrowseForFolder explorer type interface.
  *
  * Results:
- * See user documentation.
+ *	See user documentation.
  *
  * Side effects:
- * A modal dialog window is created.  Tcl_SetServiceMode() is
- * called to allow background events to be processed
+ *	A modal dialog window is created. Tcl_SetServiceMode() is called to
+ *	allow background events to be processed
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-The procedure tk_chooseDirectory pops up a dialog box for the user to
-select a directory.  The following option-value pairs are possible as
-command line arguments:
-
--initialdir dirname
-
-Specifies that the directories in directory should be displayed when the
-dialog pops up.  If this parameter is not specified, then the directories
-in the current working directory are displayed.  If the parameter specifies
-a relative path, the return value will convert the relative path to an
-absolute path.  This option may not always work on the Macintosh.  This is
-not a bug.  Rather, the General Controls control panel on the Mac allows
-the end user to override the application default directory.
-
--parent window
-
-Makes window the logical parent of the dialog.  The dialog is displayed on
-top of its parent window.
-
--title titleString
-
-Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box.  If this
-option is not specified, then a default title will be displayed.
-
--mustexist boolean
-
-Specifies whether the user may specify non-existant directories.  If this
-parameter is true, then the user may only select directories that already
-exist.  The default value is false.
-
-New Behaviour:
-
-- If mustexist = 0 and a user entered folder does not exist, a prompt will
-  pop-up asking if the user wants another chance to change it. The old
-  dialog just returned the bogus entry. On mustexist = 1, the entries MUST
-  exist before exiting the box with OK.
-
-  Bugs:
-
-- If valid abs directory name is entered into the entry box and Enter
-  pressed, the box will close returning the name. This is inconsistent when
-  entering relative names or names with forward slashes, which are
-  invalidated then corrected in the callback. After correction, the box is
-  held open to allow further modification by the user.
-
-- Not sure how to implement localization of message prompts.
-
-- -title is really -message.
-ToDo:
-- Fix bugs.
-- test to see what platforms this really works on.  May require v4.71
-  of shell32.dll everywhere (what is standard?).
  *
+ * The function tk_chooseDirectory pops up a dialog box for the user to select
+ * a directory. The following option-value pairs are possible as command line
+ * arguments:
+ *
+ * -initialdir dirname
+ *
+ * Specifies that the directories in directory should be displayed when the
+ * dialog pops up. If this parameter is not specified, then the directories in
+ * the current working directory are displayed. If the parameter specifies a
+ * relative path, the return value will convert the relative path to an
+ * absolute path. This option may not always work on the Macintosh. This is
+ * not a bug. Rather, the General Controls control panel on the Mac allows the
+ * end user to override the application default directory.
+ *
+ * -parent window
+ *
+ * Makes window the logical parent of the dialog. The dialog is displayed on
+ * top of its parent window.
+ *
+ * -title titleString
+ *
+ * Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
+ * option is not specified, then a default title will be displayed.
+ *
+ * -mustexist boolean
+ *
+ * Specifies whether the user may specify non-existant directories. If this
+ * parameter is true, then the user may only select directories that already
+ * exist. The default value is false.
+ *
+ * New Behaviour:
+ *
+ * - If mustexist = 0 and a user entered folder does not exist, a prompt will
+ *   pop-up asking if the user wants another chance to change it. The old
+ *   dialog just returned the bogus entry. On mustexist = 1, the entries MUST
+ *   exist before exiting the box with OK.
+ *
+ *   Bugs:
+ *
+ * - If valid abs directory name is entered into the entry box and Enter
+ *   pressed, the box will close returning the name. This is inconsistent when
+ *   entering relative names or names with forward slashes, which are
+ *   invalidated then corrected in the callback. After correction, the box is
+ *   held open to allow further modification by the user.
+ *
+ * - Not sure how to implement localization of message prompts.
+ *
+ * - -title is really -message.
+ * ToDo:
+ * - Fix bugs.
+ * - test to see what platforms this really works on. May require v4.71 of
+ *   shell32.dll everywhere (what is standard?).
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 int
 Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
-    ClientData clientData;      /* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
     Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
     int objc;			/* Number of arguments. */
     Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[];	/* Argument objects. */
@@ -1731,81 +1736,81 @@ Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     Tcl_DString titleString;	/* UTF Title */
     Tcl_DString initDirString;	/* Initial directory */
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
-        "-initialdir", "-mustexist",  "-parent",  "-title", (char *) NULL
+	"-initialdir", "-mustexist",  "-parent",  "-title", (char *) NULL
     };
     enum options {
-        DIR_INITIAL,   DIR_EXIST,  DIR_PARENT, FILE_TITLE
+	DIR_INITIAL,   DIR_EXIST,  DIR_PARENT, FILE_TITLE
     };
 
     /*
      * Initialize
      */
-    result		= TCL_ERROR;
-    path[0]		= '\0';
-    utfTitle		= NULL;
+
+    result = TCL_ERROR;
+    path[0] = '\0';
+    utfTitle = NULL;
 
     ZeroMemory(&cdCBData, sizeof(CHOOSEDIRDATA));
-    cdCBData.interp	= interp;
+    cdCBData.interp = interp;
 
     tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
+
     /*
      * Process the command line options
      */
+
     for (i = 1; i < objc; i += 2) {
-        int index;
-        char *string;
-        Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, *valuePtr;
-
-        optionPtr = objv[i];
-        valuePtr = objv[i + 1];
-
-        if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, optionPtr, optionStrings, "option",
-                0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
-            goto cleanup;
-        }
-        if (i + 1 == objc) {
-            string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(optionPtr, NULL);
-            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string, "\" missing",
-                    (char *) NULL);
-            goto cleanup;
-        }
+	int index;
+	char *string;
+	Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, *valuePtr;
+
+	optionPtr = objv[i];
+	valuePtr = objv[i + 1];
+
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, optionPtr, optionStrings, "option", 0,
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
+	    goto cleanup;
+	}
+	if (i + 1 == objc) {
+	    string = Tcl_GetString(optionPtr);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string, "\" missing",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    goto cleanup;
+	}
 
 	string = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr);
-        switch ((enum options) index) {
-            case DIR_INITIAL: {
-                if (Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, string,
-			&initDirString) == NULL) {
-		    goto cleanup;
-		}
-                string = Tcl_DStringValue(&initDirString);
-                /*
-                 * Convert possible relative path to full path to keep
-                 * dialog happy
-                 */
-                GetFullPathName(string, MAX_PATH, saveDir, NULL);
-                lstrcpyn(cdCBData.utfInitDir, saveDir, MAX_PATH);
-                Tcl_DStringFree(&initDirString);
-                break;
-            }
-            case DIR_EXIST: {
-                if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr,
-                        &cdCBData.mustExist) != TCL_OK) {
-                    goto cleanup;
-                }
-                break;
-            }
-            case DIR_PARENT: {
-                tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
-                if (tkwin == NULL) {
-                    goto cleanup;
-                }
-                break;
-            }
-            case FILE_TITLE: {
-                utfTitle = string;
-                break;
-            }
-        }
+	switch ((enum options) index) {
+	case DIR_INITIAL:
+	    if (Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp,string,&initDirString) == NULL) {
+		goto cleanup;
+	    }
+	    string = Tcl_DStringValue(&initDirString);
+
+	    /*
+	     * Convert possible relative path to full path to keep dialog
+	     * happy.
+	     */
+
+	    GetFullPathName(string, MAX_PATH, saveDir, NULL);
+	    lstrcpyn(cdCBData.utfInitDir, saveDir, MAX_PATH);
+	    Tcl_DStringFree(&initDirString);
+	    break;
+	case DIR_EXIST:
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr,
+		    &cdCBData.mustExist) != TCL_OK) {
+		goto cleanup;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case DIR_PARENT:
+	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
+	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
+		goto cleanup;
+	    }
+	    break;
+	case FILE_TITLE:
+	    utfTitle = string;
+	    break;
+	}
     }
 
     /*
@@ -1819,44 +1824,50 @@ Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
      * Setup the parameters used by SHBrowseForFolder
      */
 
-    bInfo.hwndOwner      = hWnd;
+    bInfo.hwndOwner = hWnd;
     bInfo.pszDisplayName = path;
-    bInfo.pidlRoot       = NULL;
+    bInfo.pidlRoot = NULL;
     if (lstrlen(cdCBData.utfInitDir) == 0) {
-        GetCurrentDirectory(MAX_PATH, cdCBData.utfInitDir);
+	GetCurrentDirectory(MAX_PATH, cdCBData.utfInitDir);
     }
     bInfo.lParam = (LPARAM) &cdCBData;
 
     if (utfTitle != NULL) {
-        Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(NULL, utfTitle, -1, &titleString);
-        bInfo.lpszTitle = (LPTSTR) Tcl_DStringValue(&titleString);
+	Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(NULL, utfTitle, -1, &titleString);
+	bInfo.lpszTitle = (LPTSTR) Tcl_DStringValue(&titleString);
     } else {
-        bInfo.lpszTitle = "Please choose a directory, then select OK.";
+	bInfo.lpszTitle = "Please choose a directory, then select OK.";
     }
 
     /*
      * Set flags to add edit box (needs 4.71 Shell DLLs), status text line,
      * validate edit box and
      */
-    bInfo.ulFlags  =  BIF_EDITBOX | BIF_STATUSTEXT | BIF_RETURNFSANCESTORS
-        | BIF_VALIDATE;
+
+    bInfo.ulFlags = BIF_EDITBOX | BIF_STATUSTEXT | BIF_RETURNFSANCESTORS
+	    | BIF_VALIDATE;
 
     /*
      * Callback to handle events
      */
-    bInfo.lpfn     = (BFFCALLBACK) ChooseDirectoryValidateProc;
+
+    bInfo.lpfn = (BFFCALLBACK) ChooseDirectoryValidateProc;
 
     /*
-     * Display dialog in background and process result.
-     * We look to give the user a chance to change their mind
-     * on an invalid folder if mustexist is 0;
+     * Display dialog in background and process result. We look to give the
+     * user a chance to change their mind on an invalid folder if mustexist is
+     * 0;
      */
 
     oldMode = Tcl_SetServiceMode(TCL_SERVICE_ALL);
     GetCurrentDirectory(MAX_PATH, saveDir);
     if (SHGetMalloc(&pMalloc) == NOERROR) {
 	pidl = SHBrowseForFolder(&bInfo);
-	/* Null for cancel button or invalid dir, otherwise valid*/
+
+	/*
+	 * Null for cancel button or invalid dir, otherwise valid.
+	 */
+
 	if (pidl != NULL) {
 	    if (!SHGetPathFromIDList(pidl, path)) {
 		Tcl_SetResult(interp, "Error: Not a file system folder\n",
@@ -1872,38 +1883,40 @@ Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     Tcl_SetServiceMode(oldMode);
 
     /*
-     * Ensure that hWnd is enabled, because it can happen that we
-     * have updated the wrapper of the parent, which causes us to
-     * leave this child disabled (Windows loses sync).
+     * Ensure that hWnd is enabled, because it can happen that we have updated
+     * the wrapper of the parent, which causes us to leave this child disabled
+     * (Windows loses sync).
      */
+
     EnableWindow(hWnd, 1);
 
     /*
-     * Change the pathname to the Tcl "normalized" pathname, where
-     * back slashes are used instead of forward slashes
+     * Change the pathname to the Tcl "normalized" pathname, where back
+     * slashes are used instead of forward slashes
      */
+
     Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
     if (*path) {
-        char *p;
-        Tcl_DString ds;
+	char *p;
+	Tcl_DString ds;
 
-        Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString(NULL, (char *) path, -1, &ds);
-        for (p = Tcl_DStringValue(&ds); *p != '\0'; p++) {
-            if (*p == '\\') {
-                *p = '/';
-            }
-        }
-        Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds), NULL);
-        Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
+	Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString(NULL, (char *) path, -1, &ds);
+	for (p = Tcl_DStringValue(&ds); *p != '\0'; p++) {
+	    if (*p == '\\') {
+		*p = '/';
+	    }
+	}
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, Tcl_DStringValue(&ds), NULL);
+	Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
     }
 
     result = TCL_OK;
 
     if (utfTitle != NULL) {
-        Tcl_DStringFree(&titleString);
+	Tcl_DStringFree(&titleString);
     }
 
-    cleanup:
+  cleanup:
     return result;
 }
 
@@ -1912,15 +1925,17 @@ Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ChooseDirectoryValidateProc --
  *
- * Hook procedure called by the explorer ChooseDirectory dialog when events
- * occur.  It is used to validate the text entry the user may have entered.
+ *	Hook function called by the explorer ChooseDirectory dialog when
+ *	events occur. It is used to validate the text entry the user may have
+ *	entered.
  *
  * Results:
- * Returns 0 to allow default processing of message, or 1 to
- * tell default dialog procedure not to close.
+ *	Returns 0 to allow default processing of message, or 1 to
+ *	tell default dialog function not to close.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static UINT APIENTRY
 ChooseDirectoryValidateProc (
     HWND hwnd,
@@ -1933,7 +1948,7 @@ ChooseDirectoryValidateProc (
     Tcl_DString initDirString;
     char string[MAX_PATH];
     ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
-        Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     chooseDirSharedData = (CHOOSEDIRDATA *)lpData;
 
@@ -1944,120 +1959,123 @@ ChooseDirectoryValidateProc (
 #endif
 
     if (tsdPtr->debugFlag) {
-        tsdPtr->debugInterp = (Tcl_Interp *) chooseDirSharedData->interp;
-        Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SetTkDialog, (ClientData) hwnd);
+	tsdPtr->debugInterp = (Tcl_Interp *) chooseDirSharedData->interp;
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(SetTkDialog, (ClientData) hwnd);
     }
     chooseDirSharedData->utfRetDir[0] = '\0';
     switch (message) {
-        case BFFM_VALIDATEFAILED:
-            /*
-             * First save and check to see if it is a valid path name, if
-             * so then make that path the one shown in the
-             * window. Otherwise, it failed the check and should be treated
-             * as such. Use Set/GetCurrentDirectory which allows relative
-             * path names and names with forward slashes. Use
-             * Tcl_TranslateFileName to make sure names like ~ are
-             * converted correctly.
-             */
-            Tcl_TranslateFileName(chooseDirSharedData->interp,
-                    (char *)lParam, &initDirString);
-            lstrcpyn (string, Tcl_DStringValue(&initDirString), MAX_PATH);
-            Tcl_DStringFree(&initDirString);
-
-            if (SetCurrentDirectory((char *)string) == 0) {
-                LPTSTR lpFilePart[MAX_PATH];
-                /*
-                 * Get the full path name to the user entry,
-                 * at this point it doesn't exist so see if
-                 * it is supposed to. Otherwise just return it.
-                 */
-                GetFullPathName(string, MAX_PATH,
-			chooseDirSharedData->utfRetDir, /*unused*/ lpFilePart);
-                if (chooseDirSharedData->mustExist) {
-                    /*
-                     * User HAS to select a valid directory.
-                     */
-                    wsprintf(selDir, TEXT("Directory '%.200s' does not exist,\nplease select or enter an existing directory."), chooseDirSharedData->utfRetDir);
-                    MessageBox(NULL, selDir, NULL, MB_ICONEXCLAMATION|MB_OK);
-                    return 1;
-                }
-            } else {
-                /*
-                 * Changed to new folder OK, return immediatly with the
-                 * current directory in utfRetDir.
-                 */
-                GetCurrentDirectory(MAX_PATH, chooseDirSharedData->utfRetDir);
-                return 0;
-            }
-            return 0;
-
-        case BFFM_SELCHANGED:
-            /*
-             * Set the status window to the currently selected path.
-             * And enable the OK button if a file system folder, otherwise
-             * disable the OK button for things like server names.
-             * perhaps a new switch -enablenonfolders can be used to allow
-             * non folders to be selected.
-             *
-             * Not called when user changes edit box directly.
-             */
-
-            if (SHGetPathFromIDList((LPITEMIDLIST) lParam, selDir)) {
-                SendMessage(hwnd, BFFM_SETSTATUSTEXT, 0, (LPARAM) selDir);
-                // enable the OK button
-                SendMessage(hwnd, BFFM_ENABLEOK, 0, (LPARAM) 1);
-                SetCurrentDirectory(selDir);
-            } else {
-                // disable the OK button
-                SendMessage(hwnd, BFFM_ENABLEOK, 0, (LPARAM) 0);
-            }
-            UpdateWindow(hwnd);
-            return 1;
-
-        case BFFM_INITIALIZED: {
-            /*
-             * Directory browser intializing - tell it where to start from,
-             * user specified parameter.
-             */
-	    char *initDir = chooseDirSharedData->utfInitDir;
-
-	    SetCurrentDirectory(initDir);
-	    if (*initDir == '\\') {
+    case BFFM_VALIDATEFAILED:
+	/*
+	 * First save and check to see if it is a valid path name, if so then
+	 * make that path the one shown in the window. Otherwise, it failed
+	 * the check and should be treated as such. Use
+	 * Set/GetCurrentDirectory which allows relative path names and names
+	 * with forward slashes. Use Tcl_TranslateFileName to make sure names
+	 * like ~ are converted correctly.
+	 */
+
+	Tcl_TranslateFileName(chooseDirSharedData->interp,
+		(char *)lParam, &initDirString);
+	lstrcpyn (string, Tcl_DStringValue(&initDirString), MAX_PATH);
+	Tcl_DStringFree(&initDirString);
+
+	if (SetCurrentDirectory((char *)string) == 0) {
+	    LPTSTR lpFilePart[MAX_PATH];
+
+	    /*
+	     * Get the full path name to the user entry, at this point it
+	     * doesn't exist so see if it is supposed to. Otherwise just
+	     * return it.
+	     */
+
+	    GetFullPathName(string, MAX_PATH,
+		    chooseDirSharedData->utfRetDir, /*unused*/ lpFilePart);
+	    if (chooseDirSharedData->mustExist) {
 		/*
-		 * BFFM_SETSELECTION only understands UNC paths as pidls,
-		 * so convert path to pidl using IShellFolder interface.
+		 * User HAS to select a valid directory.
 		 */
-		LPMALLOC pMalloc;
-		LPSHELLFOLDER psfFolder;
-
-		if (SUCCEEDED(SHGetMalloc(&pMalloc))) {
-		    if (SUCCEEDED(SHGetDesktopFolder(&psfFolder))) {
-			LPITEMIDLIST pidlMain;
-			ULONG ulCount, ulAttr;
-			Tcl_DString ds;
-
-			Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(TkWinGetUnicodeEncoding(),
-				initDir, -1, &ds);
-			if (SUCCEEDED(psfFolder->lpVtbl->ParseDisplayName(
-					  psfFolder, hwnd, NULL,
-					  (WCHAR *) Tcl_DStringValue(&ds),
-					  &ulCount, &pidlMain, &ulAttr))
-				&& (pidlMain != NULL)) {
-			    SendMessage(hwnd, BFFM_SETSELECTION, FALSE,
-				    (LPARAM)pidlMain);
-			    pMalloc->lpVtbl->Free(pMalloc, pidlMain);
-			}
-			psfFolder->lpVtbl->Release(psfFolder);
-			Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
+
+		wsprintf(selDir, TEXT("Directory '%.200s' does not exist,\nplease select or enter an existing directory."), chooseDirSharedData->utfRetDir);
+		MessageBox(NULL, selDir, NULL, MB_ICONEXCLAMATION|MB_OK);
+		return 1;
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    /*
+	     * Changed to new folder OK, return immediatly with the
+	     * current directory in utfRetDir.
+	     */
+	    GetCurrentDirectory(MAX_PATH, chooseDirSharedData->utfRetDir);
+	    return 0;
+	}
+	return 0;
+
+    case BFFM_SELCHANGED:
+	/*
+	 * Set the status window to the currently selected path. And enable
+	 * the OK button if a file system folder, otherwise disable the OK
+	 * button for things like server names. Perhaps a new switch
+	 * -enablenonfolders can be used to allow non folders to be selected.
+	 *
+	 * Not called when user changes edit box directly.
+	 */
+
+	if (SHGetPathFromIDList((LPITEMIDLIST) lParam, selDir)) {
+	    SendMessage(hwnd, BFFM_SETSTATUSTEXT, 0, (LPARAM) selDir);
+	    // enable the OK button
+	    SendMessage(hwnd, BFFM_ENABLEOK, 0, (LPARAM) 1);
+	    SetCurrentDirectory(selDir);
+	} else {
+	    // disable the OK button
+	    SendMessage(hwnd, BFFM_ENABLEOK, 0, (LPARAM) 0);
+	}
+	UpdateWindow(hwnd);
+	return 1;
+
+    case BFFM_INITIALIZED: {
+	/*
+	 * Directory browser intializing - tell it where to start from, user
+	 * specified parameter.
+	 */
+
+	char *initDir = chooseDirSharedData->utfInitDir;
+
+	SetCurrentDirectory(initDir);
+	if (*initDir == '\\') {
+	    /*
+	     * BFFM_SETSELECTION only understands UNC paths as pidls,
+	     * so convert path to pidl using IShellFolder interface.
+	     */
+
+	    LPMALLOC pMalloc;
+	    LPSHELLFOLDER psfFolder;
+
+	    if (SUCCEEDED(SHGetMalloc(&pMalloc))) {
+		if (SUCCEEDED(SHGetDesktopFolder(&psfFolder))) {
+		    LPITEMIDLIST pidlMain;
+		    ULONG ulCount, ulAttr;
+		    Tcl_DString ds;
+
+		    Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(TkWinGetUnicodeEncoding(),
+			    initDir, -1, &ds);
+		    if (SUCCEEDED(psfFolder->lpVtbl->ParseDisplayName(
+			    psfFolder, hwnd, NULL, (WCHAR *)
+			    Tcl_DStringValue(&ds), &ulCount,&pidlMain,&ulAttr))
+			    && (pidlMain != NULL)) {
+			SendMessage(hwnd, BFFM_SETSELECTION, FALSE,
+				(LPARAM)pidlMain);
+			pMalloc->lpVtbl->Free(pMalloc, pidlMain);
 		    }
-		    pMalloc->lpVtbl->Release(pMalloc);
+		    psfFolder->lpVtbl->Release(psfFolder);
+		    Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
 		}
-	    } else {
-		SendMessage(hwnd, BFFM_SETSELECTION, TRUE, (LPARAM)initDir);
+		pMalloc->lpVtbl->Release(pMalloc);
 	    }
-	    SendMessage(hwnd, BFFM_ENABLEOK, 0, (LPARAM) 1);
-            break;
+	} else {
+	    SendMessage(hwnd, BFFM_SETSELECTION, TRUE, (LPARAM)initDir);
 	}
+	SendMessage(hwnd, BFFM_ENABLEOK, 0, (LPARAM) 1);
+	break;
+    }
 
     }
     return 0;
@@ -2068,16 +2086,16 @@ ChooseDirectoryValidateProc (
  *
  * Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the "tk_chooseDirectory" dialog box 
- *	for the Windows platform. See the user documentation for details 
- *	on what it does.
+ *	This function implements the "tk_chooseDirectory" dialog box for the
+ *	Windows platform. See the user documentation for details on what it
+ *	does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	See user documentation.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A modal dialog window is created.  Tcl_SetServiceMode() is
- *	called to allow background events to be processed
+ *	A modal dialog window is created. Tcl_SetServiceMode() is called to
+ *	allow background events to be processed
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -2098,8 +2116,8 @@ Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     char *utfTitle;
     Tcl_DString utfDirString;
     Tcl_DString titleString, dirString;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     static CONST char *optionStrings[] = {
 	"-initialdir",	"-mustexist",	"-parent",	"-title",
 	NULL
@@ -2109,9 +2127,9 @@ Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     };
 
     if (tsdPtr->WM_LBSELCHANGED == 0) {
-        tsdPtr->WM_LBSELCHANGED = RegisterWindowMessage(LBSELCHSTRING);
+	tsdPtr->WM_LBSELCHANGED = RegisterWindowMessage(LBSELCHSTRING);
     }
-   
+
     result = TCL_ERROR;
     path[0] = '\0';
 
@@ -2128,44 +2146,39 @@ Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	optionPtr = objv[i];
 	valuePtr = objv[i + 1];
 
-	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, optionPtr, optionStrings, "option",
-		0, &index) != TCL_OK) {
+	if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, optionPtr, optionStrings, "option", 0,
+		&index) != TCL_OK) {
 	    goto cleanup;
 	}
 	if (i + 1 == objc) {
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(optionPtr, NULL);
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string, "\" missing", 
+	    string = Tcl_GetString(optionPtr);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string, "\" missing",
 		    (char *) NULL);
 	    goto cleanup;
 	}
 
-	string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, NULL);
+	string = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr);
 	switch ((enum options) index) {
-	    case DIR_INITIAL: {
-		Tcl_DStringFree(&utfDirString);
-		if (Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, string, 
-			&utfDirString) == NULL) {
-		    goto cleanup;
-		}
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case DIR_EXIST: {
-		if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &mustExist) != TCL_OK) {
-		    goto cleanup;
-		}
-		break;
+	case DIR_INITIAL:
+	    Tcl_DStringFree(&utfDirString);
+	    if (Tcl_TranslateFileName(interp, string, &utfDirString) == NULL) {
+		goto cleanup;
 	    }
-	    case DIR_PARENT: {
-		tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
-		if (tkwin == NULL) {
-		    goto cleanup;
-		}
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case DIR_EXIST:
+	    if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp,valuePtr,&mustExist) != TCL_OK) {
+		goto cleanup;
 	    }
-	    case FILE_TITLE: {
-		utfTitle = string;
-		break;
+	    break;
+	case DIR_PARENT:
+	    tkwin = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
+	    if (tkwin == NULL) {
+		goto cleanup;
 	    }
+	    break;
+	case FILE_TITLE:
+	    utfTitle = string;
+	    break;
 	}
     }
 
@@ -2175,43 +2188,40 @@ Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     cd.interp = interp;
     cd.ofnPtr = &ofn;
 
-    ofn.lStructSize		= sizeof(ofn);
-    ofn.hwndOwner		= hWnd;
+    ofn.lStructSize = sizeof(ofn);
+    ofn.hwndOwner = hWnd;
 #ifdef _WIN64
-    ofn.hInstance		= (HINSTANCE) GetWindowLongPtr(ofn.hwndOwner, 
-					GWLP_HINSTANCE);
+    ofn.hInstance = (HINSTANCE) GetWindowLongPtr(ofn.hwndOwner,GWLP_HINSTANCE);
 #else
-    ofn.hInstance		= (HINSTANCE) GetWindowLong(ofn.hwndOwner, 
-					GWL_HINSTANCE);
+    ofn.hInstance = (HINSTANCE) GetWindowLong(ofn.hwndOwner, GWL_HINSTANCE);
 #endif
-    ofn.lpstrFilter		= NULL;
-    ofn.lpstrCustomFilter	= NULL;
-    ofn.nMaxCustFilter		= 0;
-    ofn.nFilterIndex		= 0;
-    ofn.lpstrFile		= NULL; //(TCHAR *) path;
-    ofn.nMaxFile		= MAX_PATH;
-    ofn.lpstrFileTitle		= NULL;
-    ofn.nMaxFileTitle		= 0;
-    ofn.lpstrInitialDir		= NULL;
-    ofn.lpstrTitle		= NULL;
-    ofn.Flags			= OFN_HIDEREADONLY
-				  | OFN_ENABLEHOOK | OFN_ENABLETEMPLATE;
-    ofn.nFileOffset		= 0;
-    ofn.nFileExtension		= 0;
-    ofn.lpstrDefExt		= NULL;
-    ofn.lCustData		= (LPARAM) &cd;
-    ofn.lpfnHook		= (LPOFNHOOKPROC) ChooseDirectoryHookProc;
-    ofn.lpTemplateName		= MAKEINTRESOURCE(FILEOPENORD);
+    ofn.lpstrFilter = NULL;
+    ofn.lpstrCustomFilter = NULL;
+    ofn.nMaxCustFilter = 0;
+    ofn.nFilterIndex = 0;
+    ofn.lpstrFile = NULL; //(TCHAR *) path;
+    ofn.nMaxFile = MAX_PATH;
+    ofn.lpstrFileTitle = NULL;
+    ofn.nMaxFileTitle = 0;
+    ofn.lpstrInitialDir = NULL;
+    ofn.lpstrTitle = NULL;
+    ofn.Flags = OFN_HIDEREADONLY | OFN_ENABLEHOOK | OFN_ENABLETEMPLATE;
+    ofn.nFileOffset = 0;
+    ofn.nFileExtension = 0;
+    ofn.lpstrDefExt = NULL;
+    ofn.lCustData = (LPARAM) &cd;
+    ofn.lpfnHook = (LPOFNHOOKPROC) ChooseDirectoryHookProc;
+    ofn.lpTemplateName = MAKEINTRESOURCE(FILEOPENORD);
 
     if (Tcl_DStringValue(&utfDirString)[0] != '\0') {
-	Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(NULL, Tcl_DStringValue(&utfDirString), 
+	Tcl_UtfToExternalDString(NULL, Tcl_DStringValue(&utfDirString),
 		Tcl_DStringLength(&utfDirString), &dirString);
     } else {
 	/*
-	 * NT 5.0 changed the meaning of lpstrInitialDir, so we have
-	 * to ensure that we set the [pwd] if the user didn't specify
-	 * anything else.
+	 * NT 5.0 changed the meaning of lpstrInitialDir, so we have to ensure
+	 * that we set the [pwd] if the user didn't specify anything else.
 	 */
+
 	Tcl_DString cwd;
 
 	Tcl_DStringFree(&utfDirString);
@@ -2236,10 +2246,10 @@ Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
 
     /*
-     * Display dialog.  The choose directory dialog doesn't preserve the
+     * Display dialog. The choose directory dialog doesn't preserve the
      * current directory, so it must be saved and restored here.
      */
-    
+
     GetCurrentDirectory(MAX_PATH, savePath);
     mode = Tcl_SetServiceMode(TCL_SERVICE_ALL);
     code = GetOpenFileName(&ofn);
@@ -2247,17 +2257,18 @@ Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     SetCurrentDirectory(savePath);
 
     /*
-     * Ensure that hWnd is enabled, because it can happen that we
-     * have updated the wrapper of the parent, which causes us to
-     * leave this child disabled (Windows loses sync).
+     * Ensure that hWnd is enabled, because it can happen that we have updated
+     * the wrapper of the parent, which causes us to leave this child disabled
+     * (Windows loses sync).
      */
+
     EnableWindow(hWnd, 1);
 
     Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
     if (code != 0) {
 	/*
-	 * Change the pathname to the Tcl "normalized" pathname, where
-	 * back slashes are used instead of forward slashes
+	 * Change the pathname to the Tcl "normalized" pathname, where back
+	 * slashes are used instead of forward slashes
 	 */
 
 	char *p;
@@ -2281,7 +2292,7 @@ Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     }
     result = TCL_OK;
 
-    cleanup:
+  cleanup:
     Tcl_DStringFree(&utfDirString);
 
     return result;
@@ -2292,35 +2303,33 @@ Tk_ChooseDirectoryObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * ChooseDirectoryHookProc --
  *
- *	Hook procedure called by the ChooseDirectory dialog to modify
- *	its default behavior.  The ChooseDirectory dialog is really an
- *	OpenFile dialog with certain controls rearranged and certain
- *	behaviors changed.  For instance, typing a name in the 
- *	ChooseDirectory dialog selects a directory, rather than 
- *	selecting a file.
+ *	Hook function called by the ChooseDirectory dialog to modify its
+ *	default behavior. The ChooseDirectory dialog is really an OpenFile
+ *	dialog with certain controls rearranged and certain behaviors changed.
+ *	For instance, typing a name in the ChooseDirectory dialog selects a
+ *	directory, rather than selecting a file.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns 0 to allow default processing of message, or 1 to 
- *	tell default dialog procedure not to process the message.
+ *	Returns 0 to allow default processing of message, or 1 to tell default
+ *	dialog function not to process the message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	A dialog window is created the first this procedure is called.
- *	This window is not destroyed and will be reused the next time
- *	the application invokes the "tk_getOpenFile" or
- *	"tk_getSaveFile" command.
+ *	A dialog window is created the first this function is called. This
+ *	window is not destroyed and will be reused the next time the
+ *	application invokes the "tk_getOpenFile" or "tk_getSaveFile" command.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
-static UINT APIENTRY 
+static UINT APIENTRY
 ChooseDirectoryHookProc(
     HWND hwnd,
     UINT message,
     WPARAM wParam,
     LPARAM lParam)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     OPENFILENAME *ofnPtr;
     ChooseDir *cdPtr;
 
@@ -2353,7 +2362,7 @@ ChooseDirectoryHookProc(
     /*
      * GWL_USERDATA keeps track of cdPtr.
      */
-    
+
 #ifdef _WIN64
     cdPtr = (ChooseDir *) GetWindowLongPtr(hwnd, GWLP_USERDATA);
 #else
@@ -2366,15 +2375,15 @@ ChooseDirectoryHookProc(
 
     if (message == tsdPtr->WM_LBSELCHANGED) {
 	/*
-	 * Called when double-clicking on directory.
-	 * If directory wasn't already open, browse that directory.
-	 * If directory was already open, return selected directory.
+	 * Called when double-clicking on directory. If directory wasn't
+	 * already open, browse that directory. If directory was already open,
+	 * return selected directory.
 	 */
 
 	int idCtrl, thisItem;
 
 	idCtrl = (int) wParam;
-        thisItem = LOWORD(lParam);
+	thisItem = LOWORD(lParam);
 
 	GetCurrentDirectory(MAX_PATH, cdPtr->path);
 	if (idCtrl == lst2) {
@@ -2404,18 +2413,17 @@ ChooseDirectoryHookProc(
 	}
 
 	/*
-	 * Dialogs also get the message that OK was clicked when Enter 
-	 * is pressed in some other control.  Find out what window
-	 * we were really in when we got the supposed "OK", because the 
-	 * behavior is different.
+	 * Dialogs also get the message that OK was clicked when Enter is
+	 * pressed in some other control. Find out what window we were really
+	 * in when we got the supposed "OK", because the behavior is
+	 * different.
 	 */
 
 	if (cdPtr->lastCtrl == edt10) {
 	    /*
-	     * Hit Enter or clicked OK while typing a directory name in the 
-	     * edit control.
-	     * If it's a new name, try to go to that directory.
-	     * If the name hasn't changed since last time, return selected 
+	     * Hit Enter or clicked OK while typing a directory name in the
+	     * edit control. If it's a new name, try to go to that directory.
+	     * If the name hasn't changed since last time, return selected
 	     * directory.
 	     */
 
@@ -2436,7 +2444,7 @@ ChooseDirectoryHookProc(
 
 		if (ofnPtr->Flags & OFN_PATHMUSTEXIST) {
 		    /*
-		     * Directory must exist.  Complain, then rehighlight text.
+		     * Directory must exist. Complain, then rehighlight text.
 		     */
 
 		    wsprintf(tmp, _T("Cannot change directory to \"%.200s\"."),
@@ -2444,46 +2452,45 @@ ChooseDirectoryHookProc(
 		    MessageBox(hwnd, tmp, NULL, MB_OK);
 		    SendDlgItemMessage(hwnd, edt10, EM_SETSEL, 0, -1);
 		    return 0;
-		} 
+		}
 		if (changed) {
 		    /*
 		     * Directory was invalid, but we want to keep displaying
-		     * this name.  Don't update the listbox that displays the 
+		     * this name. Don't update the listbox that displays the
 		     * current directory heirarchy, or it'll erase the name.
 		     */
-		    
+
 		    SendDlgItemMessage(hwnd, edt10, EM_SETSEL, 0, -1);
 		    return 0;
 		}
 	    }
 	    if (changed == 0) {
 		/*
-		 * Name hasn't changed since the last time we hit return
-		 * or double-clicked on a directory, so return this.
+		 * Name hasn't changed since the last time we hit return or
+		 * double-clicked on a directory, so return this.
 		 */
 
 		EndDialog(hwnd, IDOK);
 		return 1;
 	    }
-	    
+
 	    cdPtr->lastCtrl = IDOK;
 
 	    /*
-	     * The following is the magic code, determined by running 
-	     * Spy++ on some other directory chooser, that it takes to 
-	     * get this dialog to update the listbox to display the 
-	     * current directory.
+	     * The following is the magic code, determined by running Spy++ on
+	     * some other directory chooser, that it takes to get this dialog
+	     * to update the listbox to display the current directory.
 	     */
 
 	    SetDlgItemText(hwnd, edt1, cdPtr->path);
-	    SendMessage(hwnd, WM_COMMAND, (WPARAM) MAKELONG(cmb2, 0x8003), 
+	    SendMessage(hwnd, WM_COMMAND, (WPARAM) MAKELONG(cmb2, 0x8003),
 		    (LPARAM) GetDlgItem(hwnd, cmb2));
 	    return 0;
 	} else if (idCtrl == lst2) {
 	    /*
-	     * Enter key was pressed while in listbox.  
-	     * If it's a new directory, allow default behavior to open dir.
-	     * If the directory hasn't changed, return selected directory.
+	     * Enter key was pressed while in listbox. If it's a new
+	     * directory, allow default behavior to open dir. If the directory
+	     * hasn't changed, return selected directory.
 	     */
 
 	    int thisItem;
@@ -2495,9 +2502,9 @@ ChooseDirectoryHookProc(
 		return 1;
 	    }
 	} else if (idCtrl == IDOK) {
-	    /* 
+	    /*
 	     * The OK button was clicked. Return the value currently selected
-             * in the entry.
+	     * in the entry.
 	     */
 
 	    GetCurrentDirectory(MAX_PATH, cdPtr->path);
@@ -2514,15 +2521,14 @@ ChooseDirectoryHookProc(
  *
  * Tk_MessageBoxObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure implements the MessageBox window for the
- *	Windows platform. See the user documentation for details on what
- *	it does.
+ *	This function implements the MessageBox window for the Windows
+ *	platform. See the user documentation for details on what it does.
  *
  * Results:
  *	See user documentation.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	None. The MessageBox window will be destroy before this procedure
+ *	None. The MessageBox window will be destroy before this function
  *	returns.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -2551,18 +2557,18 @@ Tk_MessageBoxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	MSG_DEFAULT,	MSG_DETAIL,	MSG_ICON,	MSG_MESSAGE,
 	MSG_PARENT,	MSG_TITLE,	MSG_TYPE
     };
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
 
-    defaultBtn	= -1;
-    detail	= NULL;
-    icon	= MB_ICONINFORMATION;
-    message	= NULL;
-    parent	= tkwin;
-    title	= NULL;
-    type	= MB_OK;
+    defaultBtn = -1;
+    detail = NULL;
+    icon = MB_ICONINFORMATION;
+    message = NULL;
+    parent = tkwin;
+    title = NULL;
+    type = MB_OK;
 
     for (i = 1; i < objc; i += 2) {
 	int index;
@@ -2577,16 +2583,16 @@ Tk_MessageBoxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 	if (i + 1 == objc) {
-	    string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(optionPtr, NULL);
-	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string, "\" missing", 
+	    string = Tcl_GetString(optionPtr);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", string, "\" missing",
 		    (char *) NULL);
 	    return TCL_ERROR;
 	}
 
-        string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(valuePtr, NULL);
+	string = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr);
 	switch ((enum options) index) {
-        case MSG_DEFAULT:
-	    defaultBtn = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, buttonMap, 
+	case MSG_DEFAULT:
+	    defaultBtn = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, buttonMap,
 		    valuePtr);
 	    if (defaultBtn < 0) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -2608,7 +2614,7 @@ Tk_MessageBoxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	    message = string;
 	    break;
 
-	case MSG_PARENT: 
+	case MSG_PARENT:
 	    parent = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, string, tkwin);
 	    if (parent == NULL) {
 		return TCL_ERROR;
@@ -2625,13 +2631,12 @@ Tk_MessageBoxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		return TCL_ERROR;
 	    }
 	    break;
-
 	}
     }
 
     Tk_MakeWindowExist(parent);
     hWnd = Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(parent));
-    
+
     flags = 0;
     if (defaultBtn >= 0) {
 	int defaultBtnIdx;
@@ -2649,7 +2654,7 @@ Tk_MessageBoxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		}
 		if (defaultBtnIdx < 0) {
 		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid default button \"",
-			    TkFindStateString(buttonMap, defaultBtn), 
+			    TkFindStateString(buttonMap, defaultBtn),
 			    "\"", NULL);
 		    return TCL_ERROR;
 		}
@@ -2683,13 +2688,14 @@ Tk_MessageBoxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     oldMode = Tcl_SetServiceMode(TCL_SERVICE_ALL);
 
     /*
-     * MessageBoxW exists for all platforms.  Use it to allow unicode
-     * error message to be displayed correctly where possible by the OS.
+     * MessageBoxW exists for all platforms. Use it to allow unicode error
+     * message to be displayed correctly where possible by the OS.
      *
-     * In order to have the parent window icon reflected in a MessageBox,
-     * we have to create a hook that will trigger when the MessageBox is
-     * being created.
+     * In order to have the parent window icon reflected in a MessageBox, we
+     * have to create a hook that will trigger when the MessageBox is being
+     * created.
      */
+
     tsdPtr->hSmallIcon = TkWinGetIcon(parent, ICON_SMALL);
     tsdPtr->hBigIcon   = TkWinGetIcon(parent, ICON_BIG);
     tsdPtr->hMsgBoxHook = SetWindowsHookEx(WH_CBT, MsgBoxCBTProc, NULL,
@@ -2700,10 +2706,11 @@ Tk_MessageBoxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
     (void) Tcl_SetServiceMode(oldMode);
 
     /*
-     * Ensure that hWnd is enabled, because it can happen that we
-     * have updated the wrapper of the parent, which causes us to
-     * leave this child disabled (Windows loses sync).
+     * Ensure that hWnd is enabled, because it can happen that we have updated
+     * the wrapper of the parent, which causes us to leave this child disabled
+     * (Windows loses sync).
      */
+
     EnableWindow(hWnd, 1);
 
     Tcl_DStringFree(&messageString);
@@ -2716,41 +2723,50 @@ Tk_MessageBoxObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 static LRESULT CALLBACK
 MsgBoxCBTProc(int nCode, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
 	Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (nCode == HCBT_CREATEWND) {
 	/*
-	 * Window owned by our task is being created.  Since the hook is
+	 * Window owned by our task is being created. Since the hook is
 	 * installed just before the MessageBox call and removed after the
-	 * MessageBox call, the window being created is either the message
-	 * box or one of its controls.  Check that the class is WC_DIALOG
-	 * to ensure that it's the one we want.
+	 * MessageBox call, the window being created is either the message box
+	 * or one of its controls. Check that the class is WC_DIALOG to ensure
+	 * that it's the one we want.
 	 */
+
 	LPCBT_CREATEWND lpcbtcreate = (LPCBT_CREATEWND)lParam;
 
 	if (WC_DIALOG == lpcbtcreate->lpcs->lpszClass) {
 	    HWND hwnd = (HWND) wParam;
 	    SendMessage(hwnd, WM_SETICON, ICON_SMALL,
 		    (LPARAM) tsdPtr->hSmallIcon);
-	    SendMessage(hwnd, WM_SETICON, ICON_BIG,
-		    (LPARAM) tsdPtr->hBigIcon);
+	    SendMessage(hwnd, WM_SETICON, ICON_BIG, (LPARAM) tsdPtr->hBigIcon);
 	}
     }
 
     /*
      * Call the next hook proc, if there is one
      */
+
     return CallNextHookEx(tsdPtr->hMsgBoxHook, nCode, wParam, lParam);
 }
 
-static void 
+static void
 SetTkDialog(ClientData clientData)
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     char buf[32];
 
     sprintf(buf, "0x%p", (HWND) clientData);
     Tcl_SetVar(tsdPtr->debugInterp, "tk_dialog", buf, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */
diff --git a/win/tkWinMenu.c b/win/tkWinMenu.c
index a33ddb8..0234f5a 100644
--- a/win/tkWinMenu.c
+++ b/win/tkWinMenu.c
@@ -1,15 +1,16 @@
-/* 
+/*
  * tkWinMenu.c --
  *
- *	This module implements the Windows platform-specific features of menus.
+ *	This module implements the Windows platform-specific features of
+ *	menus.
  *
  * Copyright (c) 1996-1998 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
  * Copyright (c) 1998-1999 by Scriptics Corporation.
  *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of
+ * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
  *
- * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinMenu.c,v 1.44 2005/04/28 02:40:19 chengyemao Exp $
+ * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkWinMenu.c,v 1.45 2005/08/10 22:02:22 dkf Exp $
  */
 
 #define OEMRESOURCE
@@ -22,55 +23,55 @@
  * The class of the window for popup menus.
  */
 
-#define MENU_CLASS_NAME "MenuWindowClass"
-#define EMBEDDED_MENU_CLASS_NAME "EmbeddedMenuWindowClass"
+#define MENU_CLASS_NAME			"MenuWindowClass"
+#define EMBEDDED_MENU_CLASS_NAME	"EmbeddedMenuWindowClass"
 
 /*
  * Used to align a windows bitmap inside a rectangle
  */
 
-#define ALIGN_BITMAP_LEFT   0x00000001
-#define ALIGN_BITMAP_RIGHT  0x00000002
-#define ALIGN_BITMAP_TOP    0x00000004
-#define ALIGN_BITMAP_BOTTOM 0x00000008
+#define ALIGN_BITMAP_LEFT	0x00000001
+#define ALIGN_BITMAP_RIGHT	0x00000002
+#define ALIGN_BITMAP_TOP	0x00000004
+#define ALIGN_BITMAP_BOTTOM	0x00000008
 
 /*
  * Platform-specific menu flags:
  *
- * MENU_SYSTEM_MENU	Non-zero means that the Windows menu handle
- *			was retrieved with GetSystemMenu and needs
- *			to be disposed of specially.
+ * MENU_SYSTEM_MENU	Non-zero means that the Windows menu handle was
+ *			retrieved with GetSystemMenu and needs to be disposed
+ *			of specially.
  * MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING
- *			Non-zero means that an idle handler has
- *			been set up to reconfigure the Windows menu
- *			handle for this menu.
+ *			Non-zero means that an idle handler has been set up to
+ *			reconfigure the Windows menu handle for this menu.
  */
 
-#define MENU_SYSTEM_MENU	    MENU_PLATFORM_FLAG1
-#define MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING    MENU_PLATFORM_FLAG2
+#define MENU_SYSTEM_MENU		MENU_PLATFORM_FLAG1
+#define MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING	MENU_PLATFORM_FLAG2
 
 static int indicatorDimensions[2];
-				/* The dimensions of the indicator space
-				 * in a menu entry. Calculated at init
-				 * time to save time. */
+				/* The dimensions of the indicator space in a
+				 * menu entry. Calculated at init time to save
+				 * time. */
 
 typedef struct ThreadSpecificData {
     Tcl_HashTable commandTable;
 				/* A map of command ids to menu entries */
     int inPostMenu;		/* We cannot be re-entrant like X Windows. */
-    WORD lastCommandID;	        /* The last command ID we allocated. */
+    WORD lastCommandID;		/* The last command ID we allocated. */
     HWND menuHWND;		/* A window to service popup-menu messages
 				 * in. */
-    HWND embeddedMenuHWND;	/* A window to service embedded menu messages */
-    int oldServiceMode;	        /* Used while processing a menu; we need
-				 * to set the event mode specially when we
-				 * enter the menu processing modal loop
-				 * and reset it when menus go away. */
+    HWND embeddedMenuHWND;	/* A window to service embedded menu
+				 * messages */
+    int oldServiceMode;		/* Used while processing a menu; we need to
+				 * set the event mode specially when we enter
+				 * the menu processing modal loop and reset it
+				 * when menus go away. */
     TkMenu *modalMenuPtr;	/* The menu we are processing inside the modal
-				 * loop. We need this to reset all of the 
+				 * loop. We need this to reset all of the
 				 * active items when menus go away since
-				 * Windows does not see fit to give this
-				 * to us when it sends its WM_MENUSELECT. */
+				 * Windows does not see fit to give this to us
+				 * when it sends its WM_MENUSELECT. */
     Tcl_HashTable winMenuTable;
 				/* Need this to map HMENUs back to menuPtrs */
 } ThreadSpecificData;
@@ -85,91 +86,78 @@ static Tcl_DString menuFontDString;
 				/* A buffer to store the default menu font
 				 * string. */
 /*
- * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ * Forward declarations for functions defined later in this file:
  */
 
-static void		DrawMenuEntryAccelerator _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr, 
-			    Drawable d, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont,
-			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,
-			    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder, int x, int y,
-			    int width, int height));
-static void		DrawMenuEntryArrow _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr, 
-			    Drawable d, GC gc,
+static void		DrawMenuEntryAccelerator(TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Drawable d, GC gc,
+			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,
 			    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder, int x, int y,
-			    int width, int height, int drawArrow));
-static void		DrawMenuEntryBackground _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
-			    Drawable d, Tk_3DBorder activeBorder,
-			    Tk_3DBorder bgBorder, int x, int y,
-			    int width, int heigth));
-static void		DrawMenuEntryIndicator _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
-			    Drawable d, GC gc, GC indicatorGC, 
-			    Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    int width, int height);
+static void		DrawMenuEntryArrow(TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    Drawable d, GC gc, Tk_3DBorder activeBorder,
+			    int x,int y, int width, int height, int drawArrow);
+static void		DrawMenuEntryBackground(TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Drawable d,
+			    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder, Tk_3DBorder bgBorder,
+			    int x, int y, int width, int heigth);
+static void		DrawMenuEntryIndicator(TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Drawable d, GC gc,
+			    GC indicatorGC, Tk_Font tkfont,
 			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, int x, int y,
-			    int width, int height));
-static void		DrawMenuEntryLabel _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenu * menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Drawable d,
-			    GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    int width, int height);
+static void		DrawMenuEntryLabel(TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    Drawable d, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont,
 			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, int x, int y,
-			    int width, int height));
-static void		DrawMenuSeparator _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
-			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Drawable d, GC gc, 
-			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, 
-			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
-static void		DrawTearoffEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
-			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Drawable d, GC gc, 
-			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, 
-			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
-static void		DrawMenuUnderline _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    int width, int height);
+static void		DrawMenuSeparator(TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    Drawable d, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,
+			    int x, int y, int width, int height);
+static void		DrawTearoffEntry(TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Drawable d, GC gc,
+			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,
+			    int x, int y, int width, int height);
+static void		DrawMenuUnderline(TkMenu *menuPtr,
 			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Drawable d, GC gc,
 			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, int x,
-			    int y, int width, int height));
-static void		DrawWindowsSystemBitmap _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    Display *display, Drawable drawable, 
-			    GC gc, CONST RECT *rectPtr, int bitmapID,
-			    int alignFlags));
-static void		FreeID _ANSI_ARGS_((WORD commandID));
-static TCHAR *		GetEntryText _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenuEntry *mePtr));
-static void		GetMenuAccelGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    int y, int width, int height);
+static void		DrawWindowsSystemBitmap(Display *display,
+			    Drawable drawable, GC gc, CONST RECT *rectPtr,
+			    int bitmapID, int alignFlags);
+static void		FreeID(WORD commandID);
+static TCHAR *		GetEntryText(TkMenuEntry *mePtr);
+static void		GetMenuAccelGeometry(TkMenu *menuPtr,
 			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Tk_Font tkfont,
 			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, int *widthPtr,
-			    int *heightPtr));
-static void		GetMenuLabelGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    int *heightPtr);
+static void		GetMenuLabelGeometry(TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
 			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,
-			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
-static void		GetMenuIndicatorGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr, 
-			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, 
-			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
-static void		GetMenuSeparatorGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
-			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,
-			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
-static void		GetTearoffEntryGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+static void		GetMenuIndicatorGeometry(TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+static void		GetMenuSeparatorGeometry(TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr);
+static void		GetTearoffEntryGeometry(TkMenu *menuPtr,
 			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Tk_Font tkfont,
 			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, int *widthPtr,
-			    int *heightPtr));
-static int		GetNewID _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
-			    WORD *menuIDPtr));
-static int		TkWinMenuKeyObjCmd _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
-			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, 
-			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]));
-static void		MenuSelectEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr));
-static void		ReconfigureWindowsMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    ClientData clientData));
-static void		RecursivelyClearActiveMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((
-			    TkMenu *menuPtr));
-static void		SetDefaults _ANSI_ARGS_((int firstTime));
-static LRESULT CALLBACK	TkWinMenuProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd,
-			    UINT message, WPARAM wParam,
-			    LPARAM lParam));
-static LRESULT CALLBACK	TkWinEmbeddedMenuProc _ANSI_ARGS_((HWND hwnd,
-			    UINT message, WPARAM wParam,
-			    LPARAM lParam));
-
+			    int *heightPtr);
+static int		GetNewID(TkMenuEntry *mePtr, WORD *menuIDPtr);
+static int		TkWinMenuKeyObjCmd(ClientData clientData,
+			    Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc,
+			    Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]);
+static void		MenuSelectEvent(TkMenu *menuPtr);
+static void		ReconfigureWindowsMenu(ClientData clientData);
+static void		RecursivelyClearActiveMenu(TkMenu *menuPtr);
+static void		SetDefaults(int firstTime);
+static LRESULT CALLBACK	TkWinMenuProc(HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam,
+			    LPARAM lParam);
+static LRESULT CALLBACK	TkWinEmbeddedMenuProc(HWND hwnd, UINT message,
+			    WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
 
 /*
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -200,8 +188,8 @@ GetNewID(mePtr, menuIDPtr)
     int newEntry;
     Tcl_HashEntry *commandEntryPtr;
     WORD returnID;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     WORD curID = tsdPtr->lastCommandID + 1;
 
@@ -209,7 +197,7 @@ GetNewID(mePtr, menuIDPtr)
      * The following code relies on WORD wrapping when the highest value is
      * incremented.
      */
-    
+
     while (curID != tsdPtr->lastCommandID) {
     	commandEntryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tsdPtr->commandTable,
 		(char *) curID, &newEntry);
@@ -251,12 +239,12 @@ static void
 FreeID(commandID)
     WORD commandID;
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     Tcl_HashEntry *entryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->commandTable,
 	    (char *) commandID);
-    
+
     if (entryPtr != NULL) {
     	 Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(entryPtr);
     }
@@ -282,17 +270,17 @@ FreeID(commandID)
 
 int
 TkpNewMenu(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;	/* The common structure we are making the
-			 * platform structure for. */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The common structure we are making the
+				 * platform structure for. */
 {
     HMENU winMenuHdl;
     Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;
     int newEntry;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     winMenuHdl = CreatePopupMenu();
-    
+
     if (winMenuHdl == NULL) {
     	Tcl_AppendResult(menuPtr->interp, "No more menus can be allocated.",
     		(char *) NULL);
@@ -300,12 +288,12 @@ TkpNewMenu(menuPtr)
     }
 
     /*
-     * We hash all of the HMENU's so that we can get their menu ptrs
-     * back when dispatch messages.
+     * We hash all of the HMENU's so that we can get their menu ptrs back when
+     * dispatch messages.
      */
 
-    hashEntryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tsdPtr->winMenuTable, (char *) winMenuHdl,
-	    &newEntry);
+    hashEntryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tsdPtr->winMenuTable,
+	    (char *) winMenuHdl, &newEntry);
     Tcl_SetHashValue(hashEntryPtr, (char *) menuPtr);
 
     menuPtr->platformData = (TkMenuPlatformData) winMenuHdl;
@@ -330,17 +318,17 @@ TkpNewMenu(menuPtr)
 
 void
 TkpDestroyMenu(menuPtr)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;	    /* The common menu structure */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The common menu structure */
 {
     HMENU winMenuHdl = (HMENU) menuPtr->platformData;
     char *searchName;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING) {
 	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ReconfigureWindowsMenu, (ClientData) menuPtr);
     }
-    
+
     if (winMenuHdl == NULL) {
 	return;
     }
@@ -348,7 +336,7 @@ TkpDestroyMenu(menuPtr)
     if (menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_SYSTEM_MENU) {
 	TkMenuEntry *searchEntryPtr;
 	Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr = TkGetMenuHashTable(menuPtr->interp);
-	char *menuName = Tcl_GetHashKey(tablePtr, 
+	char *menuName = Tcl_GetHashKey(tablePtr,
 		menuPtr->menuRefPtr->hashEntryPtr);
 
 	/*
@@ -358,29 +346,29 @@ TkpDestroyMenu(menuPtr)
 	 */
 
 	for (searchEntryPtr = menuPtr->menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr;
-	     searchEntryPtr != NULL;
-	     searchEntryPtr = searchEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr) {
-	    searchName = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(searchEntryPtr->namePtr, NULL);
+		searchEntryPtr != NULL;
+		searchEntryPtr = searchEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr) {
+	    searchName = Tcl_GetString(searchEntryPtr->namePtr);
 	    if (strcmp(searchName, menuName) == 0) {
 		Tk_Window parentTopLevelPtr = searchEntryPtr
-		    ->menuPtr->parentTopLevelPtr;
+			->menuPtr->parentTopLevelPtr;
 
 		if (parentTopLevelPtr != NULL) {
-		    GetSystemMenu(TkWinGetWrapperWindow(parentTopLevelPtr),
-			    TRUE);
+		    GetSystemMenu(
+			    TkWinGetWrapperWindow(parentTopLevelPtr), TRUE);
 		}
 		break;
 	    }
 	}
     } else {
 	Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;
- 
+
 	/*
 	 * Remove the menu from the menu hash table, then destroy the handle.
 	 */
 
-	hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->winMenuTable, 
-                (char *) winMenuHdl);
+	hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->winMenuTable,
+		(char *) winMenuHdl);
 	if (hashEntryPtr != NULL) {
 	    Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hashEntryPtr);
 	}
@@ -411,13 +399,13 @@ TkpDestroyMenu(menuPtr)
 
 void
 TkpDestroyMenuEntry(mePtr)
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		    /* The entry to destroy */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		/* The entry to destroy */
 {
     TkMenu *menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
     HMENU winMenuHdl = (HMENU) menuPtr->platformData;
 
     if (NULL != winMenuHdl) {
-        if (!(menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING)) {
+	if (!(menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING)) {
 	    menuPtr->menuFlags |= MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING;
 	    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ReconfigureWindowsMenu, (ClientData) menuPtr);
 	}
@@ -432,9 +420,9 @@ TkpDestroyMenuEntry(mePtr)
  * GetEntryText --
  *
  *	Given a menu entry, gives back the text that should go in it.
- *	Separators should be done by the caller, as they have to be
- *	handled specially. Allocates the memory with alloc. The caller
- *	should free the memory.
+ *	Separators should be done by the caller, as they have to be handled
+ *	specially. Allocates the memory with alloc. The caller should free the
+ *	memory.
  *
  * Results:
  *	itemText points to the new text for the item.
@@ -465,18 +453,17 @@ GetEntryText(mePtr)
 	strcpy(itemText, "( )");
     } else {
 	int i;
-	char *label = (mePtr->labelPtr == NULL) ? "" 
-		: Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->labelPtr, NULL);
-	char *accel = (mePtr->accelPtr == NULL) ? "" 
-		: Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->accelPtr, NULL);
+	char *label = (mePtr->labelPtr == NULL) ? ""
+		: Tcl_GetString(mePtr->labelPtr);
+	char *accel = (mePtr->accelPtr == NULL) ? ""
+		: Tcl_GetString(mePtr->accelPtr);
 	CONST char *p, *next;
 	Tcl_DString itemString;
 
 	/*
-	 * We have to construct the string with an ampersand
-	 * preceeding the underline character, and a tab seperating
-	 * the text and the accel text. We have to be careful with
-	 * ampersands in the string.
+	 * We have to construct the string with an ampersand preceeding the
+	 * underline character, and a tab seperating the text and the accel
+	 * text. We have to be careful with ampersands in the string.
 	 */
 
 	Tcl_DStringInit(&itemString);
@@ -491,7 +478,7 @@ GetEntryText(mePtr)
 	    next = Tcl_UtfNext(p);
 	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&itemString, p, (int) (next - p));
 	}
-        if (mePtr->accelLength > 0) {
+	if (mePtr->accelLength > 0) {
 	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&itemString, "\t", 1);
 	    for (p = accel, i = 0; *p != '\0'; i++, p = next) {
 		if (*p == '&') {
@@ -500,7 +487,7 @@ GetEntryText(mePtr)
 		next = Tcl_UtfNext(p);
 		Tcl_DStringAppend(&itemString, p, (int) (next - p));
 	    }
-	} 	    
+	}
 
 	itemText = ckalloc(Tcl_DStringLength(&itemString) + 1);
 	strcpy(itemText, Tcl_DStringValue(&itemString));
@@ -520,15 +507,15 @@ GetEntryText(mePtr)
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information get set for mePtr; old resources
- *	get freed, if any need it.
+ *	Configuration information get set for mePtr; old resources get freed,
+ *	if any need it.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 ReconfigureWindowsMenu(
-    ClientData clientData)	    /* The menu we are rebuilding */
+    ClientData clientData)	/* The menu we are rebuilding */
 {
     TkMenu *menuPtr = (TkMenu *) clientData;
     TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
@@ -539,7 +526,7 @@ ReconfigureWindowsMenu(
     UINT itemID;
     int i, count, systemMenu = 0, base;
     Tcl_DString translatedText;
-  
+
     if (NULL == winMenuHdl) {
     	return;
     }
@@ -547,7 +534,6 @@ ReconfigureWindowsMenu(
     /*
      * Reconstruct the entire menu. Takes care of nasty system menu and index
      * problem.
-     *
      */
 
     base = (menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_SYSTEM_MENU) ? 7 : 0;
@@ -582,37 +568,37 @@ ReconfigureWindowsMenu(
 	/*
 	 * Set enabling and disabling correctly.
 	 */
-	
+
 	if (mePtr->state == ENTRY_DISABLED) {
 	    flags |= MF_DISABLED | MF_GRAYED;
 	}
-	
+
 	/*
 	 * Set the check mark for check entries and radio entries.
 	 */
-	
+
 	if (((mePtr->type == CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY)
 		|| (mePtr->type == RADIO_BUTTON_ENTRY))
 		&& (mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_SELECTED)) {
 	    flags |= MF_CHECKED;
 	}
-	
+
 	/*
-	 * Set the SEPARATOR bit for separator entries.  This bit is not
-	 * used by our internal drawing functions, but it is used by the
-	 * system when drawing the system menu (we do not draw the system menu
-	 * ourselves).  If this bit is not set, separator entries on the system
+	 * Set the SEPARATOR bit for separator entries. This bit is not used
+	 * by our internal drawing functions, but it is used by the system
+	 * when drawing the system menu (we do not draw the system menu
+	 * ourselves). If this bit is not set, separator entries on the system
 	 * menu will not be drawn correctly.
 	 */
 
 	if (mePtr->type == SEPARATOR_ENTRY) {
 	    flags |= MF_SEPARATOR;
 	}
-	
+
 	if (mePtr->columnBreak) {
 	    flags |= MF_MENUBREAK;
 	}
-	
+
 	itemID = (UINT) mePtr->platformEntryData;
 	if ((mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY)
 		&& (mePtr->childMenuRefPtr != NULL)
@@ -620,44 +606,45 @@ ReconfigureWindowsMenu(
 	    HMENU childMenuHdl = (HMENU) mePtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr
 		->platformData;
 	    if (childMenuHdl != NULL) {
-		/* 
-		 * Win32 draws the popup arrow in the wrong color 
-		 * for a disabled cascade menu, so do it by hand.
-		 * Given it is disabled, there's no need for it to
-		 * be connected to its child.
+		/*
+		 * Win32 draws the popup arrow in the wrong color for a
+		 * disabled cascade menu, so do it by hand. Given it is
+		 * disabled, there's no need for it to be connected to its
+		 * child.
 		 */
+
 		if (mePtr->state != ENTRY_DISABLED) {
 		    flags |= MF_POPUP;
 		    /*
-		     * If the MF_POPUP flag is set, then the id
-		     * is interpreted as the handle of a submenu.
+		     * If the MF_POPUP flag is set, then the id is interpreted
+		     * as the handle of a submenu.
 		     */
 		    itemID = (UINT) childMenuHdl;
-		}	
+		}
 	    }
-	    if ((menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) 
+	    if ((menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR)
 		    && !(mePtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr->menuFlags
 			    & MENU_SYSTEM_MENU)) {
 		Tcl_DString ds;
 		TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
 		TkMenu *systemMenuPtr = mePtr->childMenuRefPtr->menuPtr;
-		
+
 		Tcl_DStringInit(&ds);
 		Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds,
 			Tk_PathName(menuPtr->masterMenuPtr->tkwin), -1);
 		Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, ".system", 7);
-		
+
 		menuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferences(menuPtr->interp,
 			Tcl_DStringValue(&ds));
-		
+
 		Tcl_DStringFree(&ds);
-		
-		if ((menuRefPtr != NULL) 
+
+		if ((menuRefPtr != NULL)
 			&& (menuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL)
 			&& (menuPtr->parentTopLevelPtr != NULL)
 			&& (systemMenuPtr->masterMenuPtr
 				== menuRefPtr->menuPtr)) {
-		    HMENU systemMenuHdl = 
+		    HMENU systemMenuHdl =
 			(HMENU) systemMenuPtr->platformData;
 		    HWND wrapper = TkWinGetWrapperWindow(menuPtr
 			    ->parentTopLevelPtr);
@@ -665,12 +652,12 @@ ReconfigureWindowsMenu(
 			DestroyMenu(systemMenuHdl);
 			systemMenuHdl = GetSystemMenu(wrapper, FALSE);
 			systemMenuPtr->menuFlags |= MENU_SYSTEM_MENU;
-			systemMenuPtr->platformData = 
-			    (TkMenuPlatformData) systemMenuHdl;
-			if (!(systemMenuPtr->menuFlags 
+			systemMenuPtr->platformData =
+				(TkMenuPlatformData) systemMenuHdl;
+			if (!(systemMenuPtr->menuFlags
 				& MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING)) {
-			    systemMenuPtr->menuFlags 
-				|= MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING;
+			    systemMenuPtr->menuFlags
+				    |= MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING;
 			    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ReconfigureWindowsMenu,
 				    (ClientData) systemMenuPtr);
 			}
@@ -694,7 +681,7 @@ ReconfigureWindowsMenu(
     }
 
 
-    if ((menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) 
+    if ((menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR)
 	    && (menuPtr->parentTopLevelPtr != NULL)) {
 	HANDLE bar;
 	bar = TkWinGetWrapperWindow(menuPtr->parentTopLevelPtr);
@@ -702,7 +689,7 @@ ReconfigureWindowsMenu(
 	    DrawMenuBar(bar);
 	}
     }
-    
+
     menuPtr->menuFlags &= ~(MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING);
 }
 
@@ -735,8 +722,8 @@ TkpPostMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y)
     POINT point;
     Tk_Window parentWindow = Tk_Parent(menuPtr->tkwin);
     int oldServiceMode = Tcl_GetServiceMode();
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     tsdPtr->inPostMenu++;
 
@@ -755,7 +742,7 @@ TkpPostMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y)
      * The post commands could have deleted the menu, which means
      * we are dead and should go away.
      */
-    
+
     if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
 	tsdPtr->inPostMenu--;
     	return TCL_OK;
@@ -776,7 +763,7 @@ TkpPostMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y)
     }
 
     Tcl_SetServiceMode(TCL_SERVICE_NONE);
-    
+
     /*
      * Make an assumption here. If the right button is down,
      * then we want to track it. Otherwise, track the left mouse button.
@@ -797,7 +784,7 @@ TkpPostMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y)
 	}
     }
 
-    TrackPopupMenu(winMenuHdl, flags, x, y, 0, 
+    TrackPopupMenu(winMenuHdl, flags, x, y, 0,
 	    tsdPtr->menuHWND, &noGoawayRect);
     Tcl_SetServiceMode(oldServiceMode);
 
@@ -843,7 +830,7 @@ TkpMenuNewEntry(mePtr)
     	menuPtr->menuFlags |= MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING;
     	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ReconfigureWindowsMenu, (ClientData) menuPtr);
     }
-    
+
     mePtr->platformEntryData = (TkMenuPlatformEntryData) commandID;
 
     return TCL_OK;
@@ -887,11 +874,11 @@ TkWinMenuProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
  *
  * UpdateEmbeddedMenu --
  *
- *	This function is used as work-around for updating the pull-down 
- *	window of an embedded menu which may show as a blank popup window.
+ *	This function is used as work-around for updating the pull-down window
+ *	of an embedded menu which may show as a blank popup window.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Invalidate the client area of the embedded pull-down menu and 
+ *	Invalidate the client area of the embedded pull-down menu and
  *	redraw it.
  *
  * Side effects:
@@ -934,32 +921,37 @@ TkWinEmbeddedMenuProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
 {
     static nIdles = 0;
     LRESULT lResult = 1;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     switch(message) {
-	case WM_ENTERIDLE: 
-        if((wParam == MSGF_MENU) && (nIdles < 1) && (hwnd == tsdPtr->embeddedMenuHWND)) {
-	    Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(200, UpdateEmbeddedMenu, (ClientData)lParam);
+    case WM_ENTERIDLE:
+	if ((wParam == MSGF_MENU) && (nIdles < 1)
+		&& (hwnd == tsdPtr->embeddedMenuHWND)) {
+	    Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(200, UpdateEmbeddedMenu,
+		    (ClientData) lParam);
 	    nIdles++;
 	}
 	break;
-	
-	case WM_INITMENUPOPUP:
+
+    case WM_INITMENUPOPUP:
 	nIdles = 0;
 	break;
 
-	case WM_INITMENU:
-	case WM_SYSCOMMAND:
-	case WM_COMMAND:
-	case WM_MENUCHAR:
-	case WM_MEASUREITEM:
-	case WM_DRAWITEM:
-	case WM_MENUSELECT:
-	lResult = TkWinHandleMenuEvent(&hwnd, &message, &wParam, &lParam, &lResult);
-	if(lResult || (GetCapture() != hwnd)) break;
+    case WM_INITMENU:
+    case WM_SYSCOMMAND:
+    case WM_COMMAND:
+    case WM_MENUCHAR:
+    case WM_MEASUREITEM:
+    case WM_DRAWITEM:
+    case WM_MENUSELECT:
+	lResult = TkWinHandleMenuEvent(&hwnd, &message, &wParam, &lParam,
+		&lResult);
+	if (lResult || (GetCapture() != hwnd)) {
+	    break;
+	}
 
-	default:
+    default:
 	lResult = DefWindowProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
 	break;
     }
@@ -971,17 +963,17 @@ TkWinEmbeddedMenuProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam)
  *
  * TkWinHandleMenuEvent --
  *
- *	Filters out menu messages from messages passed to a top-level.
- *	Will respond appropriately to WM_COMMAND, WM_MENUSELECT,
- *	WM_MEASUREITEM, WM_DRAWITEM
+ *	Filters out menu messages from messages passed to a top-level. Will
+ *	respond appropriately to WM_COMMAND, WM_MENUSELECT, WM_MEASUREITEM,
+ *	WM_DRAWITEM
  *
  * Result:
  *	Returns 1 if this handled the message; 0 if it did not.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	All of the parameters may be modified so that the caller can
- *	think it is getting a different message. plResult points to
- *	the result that should be returned to windows from this message.
+ *	All of the parameters may be modified so that the caller can think it
+ *	is getting a different message. plResult points to the result that
+ *	should be returned to windows from this message.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -998,277 +990,270 @@ TkWinHandleMenuEvent(phwnd, pMessage, pwParam, plParam, plResult)
     int returnResult = 0;
     TkMenu *menuPtr;
     TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     switch (*pMessage) {
-	case WM_INITMENU:
-	    TkMenuInit();
-	    hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->winMenuTable, 
-                    (char *) *pwParam);
-	    if (hashEntryPtr != NULL) {
-		tsdPtr->oldServiceMode = Tcl_SetServiceMode(TCL_SERVICE_ALL);
-		menuPtr = (TkMenu *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr);
-		tsdPtr->modalMenuPtr = menuPtr;
-		if (menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING) {
-		    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ReconfigureWindowsMenu, 
-			    (ClientData) menuPtr);
-		    ReconfigureWindowsMenu((ClientData) menuPtr);
-		}
-		RecursivelyClearActiveMenu(menuPtr);
-		if (!tsdPtr->inPostMenu) {
-		    Tcl_Interp *interp;
-		    int code;
-
-		    interp = menuPtr->interp;
-		    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData)interp);
-		    code = TkPreprocessMenu(menuPtr);
-		    if ((code != TCL_OK) && (code != TCL_CONTINUE)
-			    && (code != TCL_BREAK)) {
-			Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (menu preprocess)");
-			Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
-		    }
-		    Tcl_Release((ClientData)interp);
-		}
-		TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, -1);
-		*plResult = 0;
-		returnResult = 1;
-	    } else {
-		tsdPtr->modalMenuPtr = NULL;
-	    }
-	    break;
-
-	case WM_SYSCOMMAND:
-	case WM_COMMAND: {
-	    TkMenuInit();
-	    if (HIWORD(*pwParam) != 0) {
-		break;
-	    }
-	    hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->commandTable,
-		    (char *)LOWORD(*pwParam));
-	    if (hashEntryPtr == NULL) {
-		break;
+    case WM_INITMENU:
+	TkMenuInit();
+	hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->winMenuTable,
+		(char *) *pwParam);
+	if (hashEntryPtr != NULL) {
+	    tsdPtr->oldServiceMode = Tcl_SetServiceMode(TCL_SERVICE_ALL);
+	    menuPtr = (TkMenu *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr);
+	    tsdPtr->modalMenuPtr = menuPtr;
+	    if (menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING) {
+		Tcl_CancelIdleCall(ReconfigureWindowsMenu,
+			(ClientData) menuPtr);
+		ReconfigureWindowsMenu((ClientData) menuPtr);
 	    }
-	    mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr);
-	    if (mePtr != NULL) {
-		TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
-		TkMenuEntry *parentEntryPtr;
+	    RecursivelyClearActiveMenu(menuPtr);
+	    if (!tsdPtr->inPostMenu) {
 		Tcl_Interp *interp;
 		int code;
 
-		/*
-		 * We have to set the parent of this menu to be active
-		 * if this is a submenu so that tearoffs will get the
-		 * correct title.
-		 */
-
-		menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
-		menuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferences(menuPtr->interp,
-			Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin));
-		if ((menuRefPtr != NULL)
-			&& (menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr != NULL)) {
-		    char *name;
-
-		    for (parentEntryPtr = menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr;
-			 ; 
-			 parentEntryPtr = 
-			     parentEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr) {
-			name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(
-			    parentEntryPtr->namePtr, NULL);
-			if (strcmp(name, Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin))
-				== 0) {
-			    break;
-			}
-		    }
-		    if (parentEntryPtr->menuPtr->entries[parentEntryPtr->index]
-			    ->state != ENTRY_DISABLED) {
-			TkActivateMenuEntry(parentEntryPtr->menuPtr, 
-				parentEntryPtr->index);
-		    }
-		}
-
 		interp = menuPtr->interp;
 		Tcl_Preserve((ClientData)interp);
-		code = TkInvokeMenu(interp, menuPtr, mePtr->index);
-		if (code != TCL_OK && code != TCL_CONTINUE
-			&& code != TCL_BREAK) {
-		    Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (menu invoke)");
+		code = TkPreprocessMenu(menuPtr);
+		if ((code != TCL_OK) && (code != TCL_CONTINUE)
+			&& (code != TCL_BREAK)) {
+		    Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (menu preprocess)");
 		    Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
 		}
 		Tcl_Release((ClientData)interp);
-		*plResult = 0;
-		returnResult = 1;
 	    }
+	    TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, -1);
+	    *plResult = 0;
+	    returnResult = 1;
+	} else {
+	    tsdPtr->modalMenuPtr = NULL;
+	}
+	break;
+
+    case WM_SYSCOMMAND:
+    case WM_COMMAND:
+	TkMenuInit();
+	if (HIWORD(*pwParam) != 0) {
+	    break;
+	}
+	hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->commandTable,
+		(char *) LOWORD(*pwParam));
+	if (hashEntryPtr == NULL) {
 	    break;
 	}
+	mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr);
+	if (mePtr != NULL) {
+	    TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
+	    TkMenuEntry *parentEntryPtr;
+	    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+	    int code;
 
-	case WM_MENUCHAR: {
-	    unsigned char menuChar = (unsigned char) LOWORD(*pwParam);
-	    hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->winMenuTable, 
-                    (char *) *plParam);
-	    if (hashEntryPtr != NULL) {
-		int i;
+	    /*
+	     * We have to set the parent of this menu to be active if this is
+	     * a submenu so that tearoffs will get the correct title.
+	     */
 
-		*plResult = 0;
-		menuPtr = (TkMenu *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr);
-		for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
-		    int underline;
-		    char *label;
-
-		    underline = menuPtr->entries[i]->underline;
-		    if (menuPtr->entries[i]->labelPtr != NULL) {
-			label = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(
-				menuPtr->entries[i]->labelPtr, NULL);
-		    }
-		    if ((-1 != underline) 
-			    && (NULL != menuPtr->entries[i]->labelPtr)
-			    && (CharUpper((LPTSTR) menuChar) 
-			    == CharUpper((LPTSTR) (unsigned char) 
-			    label[underline]))) {
-			*plResult = (2 << 16) | i;
-			returnResult = 1;
+	    menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
+	    menuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferences(menuPtr->interp,
+		    Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin));
+	    if ((menuRefPtr != NULL) && (menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr != NULL)) {
+		for (parentEntryPtr = menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr ; ;
+			parentEntryPtr = parentEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr) {
+		    char *name = Tcl_GetString(parentEntryPtr->namePtr);
+
+		    if (strcmp(name, Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin)) == 0) {
 			break;
 		    }
 		}
+		if (parentEntryPtr->menuPtr->entries[parentEntryPtr->index]
+			->state != ENTRY_DISABLED) {
+		    TkActivateMenuEntry(parentEntryPtr->menuPtr,
+			    parentEntryPtr->index);
+		}
 	    }
-	    break;
+
+	    interp = menuPtr->interp;
+	    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData)interp);
+	    code = TkInvokeMenu(interp, menuPtr, mePtr->index);
+	    if (code != TCL_OK && code != TCL_CONTINUE && code != TCL_BREAK) {
+		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (menu invoke)");
+		Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+	    }
+	    Tcl_Release((ClientData)interp);
+	    *plResult = 0;
+	    returnResult = 1;
 	}
+	break;
 
-	case WM_MEASUREITEM: {
-	    LPMEASUREITEMSTRUCT itemPtr = (LPMEASUREITEMSTRUCT) *plParam;
-    
-	    if (itemPtr != NULL && tsdPtr->modalMenuPtr != NULL) {
-		mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *) itemPtr->itemData;
-		menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
-
-		TkRecomputeMenu(menuPtr);
-		itemPtr->itemHeight = mePtr->height;
-		itemPtr->itemWidth = mePtr->width;
-		if (mePtr->hideMargin) {
-		    itemPtr->itemWidth += 2 - indicatorDimensions[1];
-		} else {
-		    int activeBorderWidth;
-		    
-		    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr->tkwin,
-			    menuPtr->activeBorderWidthPtr, 
-			    &activeBorderWidth);
-		    itemPtr->itemWidth += 2 * activeBorderWidth;
+    case WM_MENUCHAR: {
+	unsigned char menuChar = (unsigned char) LOWORD(*pwParam);
+
+	hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->winMenuTable,
+		(char *) *plParam);
+	if (hashEntryPtr != NULL) {
+	    int i;
+
+	    *plResult = 0;
+	    menuPtr = (TkMenu *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr);
+	    for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
+		int underline;
+		char *label;
+
+		underline = menuPtr->entries[i]->underline;
+		if (menuPtr->entries[i]->labelPtr != NULL) {
+		    label = Tcl_GetString(menuPtr->entries[i]->labelPtr);
+		}
+		if ((-1 != underline)
+			&& (NULL != menuPtr->entries[i]->labelPtr)
+			&& (CharUpper((LPTSTR) menuChar)
+			== CharUpper((LPTSTR) UCHAR(label[underline])))) {
+		    *plResult = (2 << 16) | i;
+		    returnResult = 1;
+		    break;
 		}
-		*plResult = 1;
-		returnResult = 1;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
-	
-	case WM_DRAWITEM: {
-	    TkWinDrawable *twdPtr;
-	    LPDRAWITEMSTRUCT itemPtr = (LPDRAWITEMSTRUCT) *plParam;
-	    Tk_FontMetrics fontMetrics;
-	    int drawArrow = 0;
-
-	    if (itemPtr != NULL && tsdPtr->modalMenuPtr != NULL) {
-		Tk_Font tkfont;
-
-		mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *) itemPtr->itemData;
-		menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
-		twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkWinDrawable));
-		twdPtr->type = TWD_WINDC;
-		twdPtr->winDC.hdc = itemPtr->hDC;
+	break;
+    }
 
-		if (mePtr->state != ENTRY_DISABLED) {
-		    if (itemPtr->itemState & ODS_SELECTED) {
-			TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, mePtr->index);
-		    } else {
-			TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, -1);
-		    }
-		} else {
-		    /* On windows, menu entries should highlight even if they
-		    ** are disabled. (I know this seems dumb, but it is the way
-		    ** native windows menus works so we ought to mimic it.)
-		    ** The ENTRY_PLATFORM_FLAG1 flag will indicate that the
-		    ** entry should be highlighted even though it is disabled.
-		    */
-		    if (itemPtr->itemState & ODS_SELECTED) {
-			mePtr->entryFlags |= ENTRY_PLATFORM_FLAG1;
-		    } else {
-			mePtr->entryFlags &= ~ENTRY_PLATFORM_FLAG1;
-		    }
-		    /* Also, set the drawArrow flag for a disabled cascade
-		    ** menu since we need to draw the arrow ourselves.
-		    */
-		    if (mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY) {
-		        drawArrow = 1;
-		    }
-		}
+    case WM_MEASUREITEM: {
+	LPMEASUREITEMSTRUCT itemPtr = (LPMEASUREITEMSTRUCT) *plParam;
 
-		tkfont = Tk_GetFontFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->fontPtr);
-		Tk_GetFontMetrics(tkfont, &fontMetrics);
-		TkpDrawMenuEntry(mePtr, (Drawable) twdPtr, tkfont,
-			&fontMetrics, itemPtr->rcItem.left,
-			itemPtr->rcItem.top, itemPtr->rcItem.right
-			- itemPtr->rcItem.left, itemPtr->rcItem.bottom
-			- itemPtr->rcItem.top, 0, drawArrow);
+	if (itemPtr != NULL && tsdPtr->modalMenuPtr != NULL) {
+	    mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *) itemPtr->itemData;
+	    menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
 
-		ckfree((char *) twdPtr);
+	    TkRecomputeMenu(menuPtr);
+	    itemPtr->itemHeight = mePtr->height;
+	    itemPtr->itemWidth = mePtr->width;
+	    if (mePtr->hideMargin) {
+		itemPtr->itemWidth += 2 - indicatorDimensions[1];
+	    } else {
+		int activeBorderWidth;
+
+		Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr->tkwin,
+			menuPtr->activeBorderWidthPtr, &activeBorderWidth);
+		itemPtr->itemWidth += 2 * activeBorderWidth;
 	    }
-    	    *plResult = 1;
+	    *plResult = 1;
 	    returnResult = 1;
-	    break;
 	}
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case WM_DRAWITEM: {
+	TkWinDrawable *twdPtr;
+	LPDRAWITEMSTRUCT itemPtr = (LPDRAWITEMSTRUCT) *plParam;
+	Tk_FontMetrics fontMetrics;
+	int drawArrow = 0;
 
-	case WM_MENUSELECT: {
-	    UINT flags = HIWORD(*pwParam);
+	if (itemPtr != NULL && tsdPtr->modalMenuPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tk_Font tkfont;
 
-	    TkMenuInit();
+	    mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *) itemPtr->itemData;
+	    menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
+	    twdPtr = (TkWinDrawable *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkWinDrawable));
+	    twdPtr->type = TWD_WINDC;
+	    twdPtr->winDC.hdc = itemPtr->hDC;
 
-	    if ((flags == 0xFFFF) && (*plParam == 0)) {
-		if (tsdPtr->modalMenuPtr != NULL) {
-		    Tcl_SetServiceMode(tsdPtr->oldServiceMode);
-		    RecursivelyClearActiveMenu(tsdPtr->modalMenuPtr);
+	    if (mePtr->state != ENTRY_DISABLED) {
+		if (itemPtr->itemState & ODS_SELECTED) {
+		    TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, mePtr->index);
+		} else {
+		    TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, -1);
 		}
 	    } else {
-		menuPtr = NULL;
- 		if (*plParam != 0) {
-		    hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->winMenuTable,
-			    (char *) *plParam);
-		    if (hashEntryPtr != NULL) {
-			menuPtr = (TkMenu *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr);
-		    }
+		/*
+		 * On windows, menu entries should highlight even if they are
+		 * disabled. (I know this seems dumb, but it is the way native
+		 * windows menus works so we ought to mimic it.) The
+		 * ENTRY_PLATFORM_FLAG1 flag will indicate that the entry
+		 * should be highlighted even though it is disabled.
+		 */
+
+		if (itemPtr->itemState & ODS_SELECTED) {
+		    mePtr->entryFlags |= ENTRY_PLATFORM_FLAG1;
+		} else {
+		    mePtr->entryFlags &= ~ENTRY_PLATFORM_FLAG1;
 		}
 
-		if (menuPtr != NULL) {
-		    long entryIndex = LOWORD(*pwParam);
-	    	    mePtr = NULL;
-		    if (flags != 0xFFFF) {
-			if ((flags & MF_POPUP) && (entryIndex < menuPtr->numEntries)) {
-			    mePtr = menuPtr->entries[entryIndex];
-			} else {
-			    hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(
-                                    &tsdPtr->commandTable,
-				    (char *) entryIndex);
-			    if (hashEntryPtr != NULL) {
-				mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *) 
-					Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr);
-			    }
-			}
-		    }	 
+		/*
+		 * Also, set the drawArrow flag for a disabled cascade menu
+		 * since we need to draw the arrow ourselves.
+		 */
+
+		if (mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY) {
+		    drawArrow = 1;
+		}
+	    }
+
+	    tkfont = Tk_GetFontFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->fontPtr);
+	    Tk_GetFontMetrics(tkfont, &fontMetrics);
+	    TkpDrawMenuEntry(mePtr, (Drawable) twdPtr, tkfont, &fontMetrics,
+		    itemPtr->rcItem.left, itemPtr->rcItem.top,
+		    itemPtr->rcItem.right - itemPtr->rcItem.left,
+		    itemPtr->rcItem.bottom - itemPtr->rcItem.top, 0,drawArrow);
+
+	    ckfree((char *) twdPtr);
+	}
+	*plResult = 1;
+	returnResult = 1;
+	break;
+    }
+
+    case WM_MENUSELECT: {
+	UINT flags = HIWORD(*pwParam);
+
+	TkMenuInit();
 
-		    if ((mePtr == NULL) || (mePtr->state == ENTRY_DISABLED)) {
-			TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, -1);
+	if ((flags == 0xFFFF) && (*plParam == 0)) {
+	    if (tsdPtr->modalMenuPtr != NULL) {
+		Tcl_SetServiceMode(tsdPtr->oldServiceMode);
+		RecursivelyClearActiveMenu(tsdPtr->modalMenuPtr);
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    menuPtr = NULL;
+	    if (*plParam != 0) {
+		hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->winMenuTable,
+			(char *) *plParam);
+		if (hashEntryPtr != NULL) {
+		    menuPtr = (TkMenu *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr);
+		}
+	    }
+
+	    if (menuPtr != NULL) {
+		long entryIndex = LOWORD(*pwParam);
+
+		mePtr = NULL;
+		if (flags != 0xFFFF) {
+		    if ((flags&MF_POPUP) && (entryIndex<menuPtr->numEntries)) {
+			mePtr = menuPtr->entries[entryIndex];
 		    } else {
-			if (mePtr->index >= menuPtr->numEntries) {
-			    Tcl_Panic("Trying to activate an entry which doesn't exist.");
+			hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->commandTable,
+				(char *) entryIndex);
+			if (hashEntryPtr != NULL) {
+			    mePtr = (TkMenuEntry *)
+				    Tcl_GetHashValue(hashEntryPtr);
 			}
-			TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, mePtr->index);
 		    }
-		    MenuSelectEvent(menuPtr);
-		    Tcl_ServiceAll();
-		    *plResult = 0;
-		    returnResult = 1;
 		}
+
+		if ((mePtr == NULL) || (mePtr->state == ENTRY_DISABLED)) {
+		    TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, -1);
+		} else {
+		    if (mePtr->index >= menuPtr->numEntries) {
+			Tcl_Panic("Trying to activate an entry which doesn't exist.");
+		    }
+		    TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, mePtr->index);
+		}
+		MenuSelectEvent(menuPtr);
+		Tcl_ServiceAll();
+		*plResult = 0;
+		returnResult = 1;
 	    }
-	    break;
 	}
+	break;
+    }
     }
     return returnResult;
 }
@@ -1295,7 +1280,7 @@ RecursivelyClearActiveMenu(
 {
     int i;
     TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
-    
+
     TkActivateMenuEntry(menuPtr, -1);
     MenuSelectEvent(menuPtr);
     for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
@@ -1332,25 +1317,26 @@ RecursivelyClearActiveMenu(
 
 void
 TkpSetWindowMenuBar(tkwin, menuPtr)
-    Tk_Window tkwin;	    /* The window we are putting the menubar into.*/
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;	    /* The menu we are inserting */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window we are putting the menubar
+				 * into.*/
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menu we are inserting */
 {
     HMENU winMenuHdl;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     if (menuPtr != NULL) {
 	Tcl_HashEntry *hashEntryPtr;
 	int newEntry;
 
 	winMenuHdl = (HMENU) menuPtr->platformData;
-	hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->winMenuTable, 
-                (char *) winMenuHdl);
+	hashEntryPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&tsdPtr->winMenuTable,
+		(char *) winMenuHdl);
 	Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(hashEntryPtr);
 	DestroyMenu(winMenuHdl);
 	winMenuHdl = CreateMenu();
-	hashEntryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tsdPtr->winMenuTable, 
-                (char *) winMenuHdl, &newEntry);
+	hashEntryPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&tsdPtr->winMenuTable,
+		(char *) winMenuHdl, &newEntry);
 	Tcl_SetHashValue(hashEntryPtr, (char *) menuPtr);
 	menuPtr->platformData = (TkMenuPlatformData) winMenuHdl;
 	TkWinSetMenu(tkwin, winMenuHdl);
@@ -1368,8 +1354,8 @@ TkpSetWindowMenuBar(tkwin, menuPtr)
  *
  * TkpSetMainMenubar --
  *
- *	Puts the menu associated with a window into the menubar. Should
- *	only be called when the window is in front.
+ *	Puts the menu associated with a window into the menubar. Should only
+ *	be called when the window is in front.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1379,13 +1365,13 @@ TkpSetWindowMenuBar(tkwin, menuPtr)
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 void
 TkpSetMainMenubar(
     Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interpreter of the application */
     Tk_Window tkwin,		/* The frame we are setting up */
-    char *menuName)		/* The name of the menu to put in front.
-    				 * If NULL, use the default menu bar.
-    				 */
+    char *menuName)		/* The name of the menu to put in front. If
+    				 * NULL, use the default menu bar. */
 {
     /*
      * Nothing to do.
@@ -1410,12 +1396,12 @@ TkpSetMainMenubar(
 
 void
 GetMenuIndicatorGeometry (
-    TkMenu *menuPtr,			/* The menu we are measuring */
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,			/* The entry we are measuring */
-    Tk_Font tkfont,			/* Precalculated font */
-    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,	/* Precalculated font metrics */
-    int *widthPtr,			/* The resulting width */
-    int *heightPtr)			/* The resulting height */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* The menu we are measuring */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,		/* The entry we are measuring */
+    Tk_Font tkfont,		/* Precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,/* Precalculated font metrics */
+    int *widthPtr,		/* The resulting width */
+    int *heightPtr)		/* The resulting height */
 {
     *heightPtr = indicatorDimensions[0];
     if (mePtr->hideMargin) {
@@ -1447,12 +1433,12 @@ GetMenuIndicatorGeometry (
 
 void
 GetMenuAccelGeometry (
-    TkMenu *menuPtr,			/* The menu we are measuring */
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,			/* The entry we are measuring */
-    Tk_Font tkfont,			/* The precalculated font */
-    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,	/* The precalculated font metrics */
-    int *widthPtr,			/* The resulting width */
-    int *heightPtr)			/* The resulting height */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* The menu we are measuring */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,		/* The entry we are measuring */
+    Tk_Font tkfont,		/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    int *widthPtr,		/* The resulting width */
+    int *heightPtr)		/* The resulting height */
 {
     *heightPtr = fmPtr->linespace;
     if (mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY) {
@@ -1460,7 +1446,8 @@ GetMenuAccelGeometry (
     } else if (mePtr->accelPtr == NULL) {
 	*widthPtr = 0;
     } else {
-	char *accel = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->accelPtr, NULL);
+	char *accel = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->accelPtr);
+
 	*widthPtr = Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, accel, mePtr->accelLength);
     }
 }
@@ -1483,12 +1470,12 @@ GetMenuAccelGeometry (
 
 void
 GetTearoffEntryGeometry (
-    TkMenu *menuPtr,			/* The menu we are measuring */
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,			/* The entry we are measuring */
-    Tk_Font tkfont,			/* The precalculated font */
-    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,	/* The precalculated font metrics */
-    int *widthPtr,			/* The resulting width */
-    int *heightPtr)			/* The resulting height */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* The menu we are measuring */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,		/* The entry we are measuring */
+    Tk_Font tkfont,		/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    int *widthPtr,		/* The resulting width */
+    int *heightPtr)		/* The resulting height */
 {
     if (menuPtr->menuType != MASTER_MENU) {
 	*heightPtr = 0;
@@ -1516,12 +1503,12 @@ GetTearoffEntryGeometry (
 
 void
 GetMenuSeparatorGeometry (
-    TkMenu *menuPtr,			/* The menu we are measuring */
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,			/* The entry we are measuring */
-    Tk_Font tkfont,			/* The precalculated font */
-    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,	/* The precalcualted font metrics */
-    int *widthPtr,			/* The resulting width */
-    int *heightPtr)			/* The resulting height */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* The menu we are measuring */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,		/* The entry we are measuring */
+    Tk_Font tkfont,		/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,/* The precalcualted font metrics */
+    int *widthPtr,		/* The resulting width */
+    int *heightPtr)		/* The resulting height */
 {
     *widthPtr = 0;
     *heightPtr = fmPtr->linespace - (2 * fmPtr->descent);
@@ -1532,10 +1519,10 @@ GetMenuSeparatorGeometry (
  *
  * DrawWindowsSystemBitmap --
  *
- *	Draws the windows system bitmap given by bitmapID into the rect
- *	given by rectPtr in the drawable. The bitmap is centered in the
- *	rectangle. It is not clipped, so if the bitmap is bigger than
- *	the rect it will bleed.
+ *	Draws the windows system bitmap given by bitmapID into the rect given
+ *	by rectPtr in the drawable. The bitmap is centered in the rectangle.
+ *	It is not clipped, so if the bitmap is bigger than the rect it will
+ *	bleed.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1548,14 +1535,14 @@ GetMenuSeparatorGeometry (
 
 static void
 DrawWindowsSystemBitmap(display, drawable, gc, rectPtr, bitmapID, alignFlags)
-    Display *display;			/* The display we are drawing into */
-    Drawable drawable;			/* The drawable we are working with */
-    GC gc;				/* The GC to draw with */
-    CONST RECT *rectPtr;		/* The rectangle to draw into */
-    int bitmapID;			/* The windows id of the system
-					 * bitmap to draw. */
-    int alignFlags;			/* How to align the bitmap inside the
-					 * rectangle. */
+    Display *display;		/* The display we are drawing into */
+    Drawable drawable;		/* The drawable we are working with */
+    GC gc;			/* The GC to draw with */
+    CONST RECT *rectPtr;	/* The rectangle to draw into */
+    int bitmapID;		/* The windows id of the system bitmap to
+				 * draw. */
+    int alignFlags;		/* How to align the bitmap inside the
+				 * rectangle. */
 {
     TkWinDCState state;
     HDC hdc = TkWinGetDrawableDC(display, drawable, &state);
@@ -1565,7 +1552,7 @@ DrawWindowsSystemBitmap(display, drawable, gc, rectPtr, bitmapID, alignFlags)
     POINT ptSize;
     POINT ptOrg;
     int topOffset, leftOffset;
-    
+
     SetBkColor(hdc, gc->background);
     SetTextColor(hdc, gc->foreground);
 
@@ -1597,7 +1584,7 @@ DrawWindowsSystemBitmap(display, drawable, gc, rectPtr, bitmapID, alignFlags)
     } else {
 	leftOffset = (rectPtr->right - rectPtr->left) / 2 - (ptSize.x / 2);
     }
-    
+
     BitBlt(hdc, rectPtr->left + leftOffset, rectPtr->top + topOffset, ptSize.x,
 	    ptSize.y, scratchDC, ptOrg.x, ptOrg.y, SRCCOPY);
     DeleteDC(scratchDC);
@@ -1611,38 +1598,39 @@ DrawWindowsSystemBitmap(display, drawable, gc, rectPtr, bitmapID, alignFlags)
  *
  * DrawMenuEntryIndicator --
  *
- *	This procedure draws the indicator part of a menu.
+ *	This function draws the indicator part of a menu.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
- *	current mode.
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its current mode.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 void
 DrawMenuEntryIndicator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, indicatorGC, tkfont, fmPtr, x,
 	y, width, height)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;		    /* The menu we are drawing */
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		    /* The entry we are drawing */
-    Drawable d;			    /* What we are drawing into */
-    GC gc;			    /* The gc we are drawing with */
-    GC indicatorGC;		    /* The gc for indicator objects */
-    Tk_Font tkfont;		    /* The precalculated font */
-    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;    /* The precalculated font metrics */
-    int x;			    /* Left edge */
-    int y;			    /* Top edge */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d;			/* What we are drawing into */
+    GC gc;			/* The gc we are drawing with */
+    GC indicatorGC;		/* The gc for indicator objects */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    int x;			/* Left edge */
+    int y;			/* Top edge */
     int width;
     int height;
 {
-    if ((mePtr->type == CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY) 
+    if ((mePtr->type == CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY)
 	    || (mePtr->type == RADIO_BUTTON_ENTRY)) {
     	if (mePtr->indicatorOn && (mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_SELECTED)) {
 	    RECT rect;
 	    GC whichGC;
 	    int borderWidth, activeBorderWidth;
+
 	    if (mePtr->state != ENTRY_NORMAL) {
 		whichGC = gc;
 	    } else {
@@ -1662,21 +1650,21 @@ DrawMenuEntryIndicator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, indicatorGC, tkfont, fmPtr, x,
 		    && (menuPtr->disabledFgPtr != NULL)) {
 		RECT hilightRect;
 		COLORREF oldFgColor = whichGC->foreground;
-	    
+
 		whichGC->foreground = GetSysColor(COLOR_3DHILIGHT);
 		hilightRect.top = rect.top + 1;
 		hilightRect.bottom = rect.bottom + 1;
 		hilightRect.left = rect.left + 1;
 		hilightRect.right = rect.right + 1;
-		DrawWindowsSystemBitmap(menuPtr->display, d, whichGC, 
+		DrawWindowsSystemBitmap(menuPtr->display, d, whichGC,
 			&hilightRect, OBM_CHECK, 0);
 		whichGC->foreground = oldFgColor;
 	    }
 
-	    DrawWindowsSystemBitmap(menuPtr->display, d, whichGC, &rect, 
+	    DrawWindowsSystemBitmap(menuPtr->display, d, whichGC, &rect,
 		    OBM_CHECK, 0);
 	}
-    }    
+    }
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1684,11 +1672,10 @@ DrawMenuEntryIndicator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, indicatorGC, tkfont, fmPtr, x,
  *
  * DrawMenuEntryAccelerator --
  *
- *	This procedure draws the accelerator part of a menu.
- *	For example, the string "CTRL-Z" could be drawn to
- *	to the right of the label text for an Undo menu entry.
- *	Need to decide what to draw here. Should we replace strings
- *	like "Control", "Command", etc?
+ *	This function draws the accelerator part of a menu. For example, the
+ *	string "CTRL-Z" could be drawn to to the right of the label text for
+ *	an Undo menu entry. Need to decide what to draw here. Should we
+ *	replace strings like "Control", "Command", etc?
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1701,49 +1688,52 @@ DrawMenuEntryIndicator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, indicatorGC, tkfont, fmPtr, x,
  */
 
 void
-DrawMenuEntryAccelerator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr,
-	activeBorder, x, y, width, height)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are drawing */
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are drawing */
-    Drawable d;				/* What we are drawing into */
-    GC gc;				/* The gc we are drawing with */
-    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The precalculated font */
-    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The precalculated font metrics */
-    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder;		/* The border when an item is active */
-    int x;				/* left edge */
-    int y;				/* top edge */
-    int width;				/* Width of menu entry */
-    int height;				/* Height of menu entry */
+DrawMenuEntryAccelerator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, activeBorder,
+	x, y, width, height)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d;			/* What we are drawing into */
+    GC gc;			/* The gc we are drawing with */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder;	/* The border when an item is active */
+    int x;			/* left edge */
+    int y;			/* top edge */
+    int width;			/* Width of menu entry */
+    int height;			/* Height of menu entry */
 {
     int baseline;
     int leftEdge = x + mePtr->indicatorSpace + mePtr->labelWidth;
     char *accel;
-    
+
     if (mePtr->accelPtr != NULL) {
-	accel = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->accelPtr, NULL);
+	accel = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->accelPtr);
     }
 
     baseline = y + (height + fmPtr->ascent - fmPtr->descent) / 2;
 
-    /* Draw disabled 3D text highlight only with the Win95/98 look. */
+    /*
+     * Draw disabled 3D text highlight only with the Win95/98 look.
+     */
 
     if (TkWinGetPlatformTheme() == TK_THEME_WIN_CLASSIC) {
-	if ((mePtr->state == ENTRY_DISABLED) && (menuPtr->disabledFgPtr != NULL)
-	        && (mePtr->accelPtr != NULL)) {
+	if ((mePtr->state == ENTRY_DISABLED)
+		&& (menuPtr->disabledFgPtr != NULL)
+		&& (mePtr->accelPtr != NULL)) {
 	    COLORREF oldFgColor = gc->foreground;
 
 	    gc->foreground = GetSysColor(COLOR_3DHILIGHT);
 	    if ((mePtr->accelPtr != NULL) &&
-	            ((mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_PLATFORM_FLAG1) == 0)) {
-	        Tk_DrawChars(menuPtr->display, d, gc, tkfont, accel,
-		        mePtr->accelLength, leftEdge + 1, baseline + 1);
+		    ((mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_PLATFORM_FLAG1) == 0)) {
+		Tk_DrawChars(menuPtr->display, d, gc, tkfont, accel,
+			mePtr->accelLength, leftEdge + 1, baseline + 1);
 	    }
 	    gc->foreground = oldFgColor;
 	}
     }
 
     if (mePtr->accelPtr != NULL) {
-	Tk_DrawChars(menuPtr->display, d, gc, tkfont, accel, 
+	Tk_DrawChars(menuPtr->display, d, gc, tkfont, accel,
 		mePtr->accelLength, leftEdge, baseline);
     }
 }
@@ -1753,8 +1743,8 @@ DrawMenuEntryAccelerator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr,
  *
  * DrawMenuEntryArrow --
  *
- *	This function draws the arrow bitmap on the right side of a
- *	a menu entry. This function is currently unused.
+ *	This function draws the arrow bitmap on the right side of a menu
+ *	entry. This function is currently unused.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -1766,41 +1756,43 @@ DrawMenuEntryAccelerator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr,
  */
 
 void
-DrawMenuEntryArrow(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc,
-	activeBorder, x, y, width, height, drawArrow)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are drawing */
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are drawing */
-    Drawable d;				/* What we are drawing into */
-    GC gc;				/* The gc we are drawing with */
-    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder;		/* The border when an item is active */
-    int x;				/* left edge */
-    int y;				/* top edge */
-    int width;				/* Width of menu entry */
-    int height;				/* Height of menu entry */
-    int drawArrow;			/* For cascade menus, whether of not
-					 * to draw the arraw. I cannot figure
-					 * out Windows' algorithm for where
-					 * to draw this. */
+DrawMenuEntryArrow(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, activeBorder, x, y, width, height,
+	drawArrow)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d;			/* What we are drawing into */
+    GC gc;			/* The gc we are drawing with */
+    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder;	/* The border when an item is active */
+    int x;			/* left edge */
+    int y;			/* top edge */
+    int width;			/* Width of menu entry */
+    int height;			/* Height of menu entry */
+    int drawArrow;		/* For cascade menus, whether of not to draw
+				 * the arraw. I cannot figure out Windows'
+				 * algorithm for where to draw this. */
 {
     COLORREF oldFgColor;
     COLORREF oldBgColor;
     RECT rect;
 
-    if (!drawArrow || (mePtr->type != CASCADE_ENTRY) ||
-            (mePtr->state != ENTRY_DISABLED))
-        return;
+    if (!drawArrow || (mePtr->type != CASCADE_ENTRY)
+	    || (mePtr->state != ENTRY_DISABLED)) {
+	return;
+    }
 
     oldFgColor = gc->foreground;
     oldBgColor = gc->background;
 
-    /* Set bitmap bg to highlight color if the menu is highlighted */
+    /*
+     * Set bitmap bg to highlight color if the menu is highlighted.
+     */
+
     if (mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_PLATFORM_FLAG1) {
-        XColor *activeBgColor = Tk_3DBorderColor(Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(
-                mePtr->menuPtr->tkwin,
-                (mePtr->activeBorderPtr == NULL) ?
-                mePtr->menuPtr->activeBorderPtr :
-                mePtr->activeBorderPtr));
-        gc->background = activeBgColor->pixel;
+	XColor *activeBgColor = Tk_3DBorderColor(Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(
+		mePtr->menuPtr->tkwin, (mePtr->activeBorderPtr == NULL)
+		? mePtr->menuPtr->activeBorderPtr
+		: mePtr->activeBorderPtr));
+	gc->background = activeBgColor->pixel;
     }
 
     gc->foreground = GetSysColor(COLOR_GRAYTEXT);
@@ -1811,7 +1803,7 @@ DrawMenuEntryArrow(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc,
     rect.right = x + width;
 
     DrawWindowsSystemBitmap(menuPtr->display, d, gc, &rect, OBM_MNARROW,
-            ALIGN_BITMAP_RIGHT);
+	    ALIGN_BITMAP_RIGHT);
 
     gc->foreground = oldFgColor;
     gc->background = oldBgColor;
@@ -1829,23 +1821,23 @@ DrawMenuEntryArrow(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc,
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
- *	current mode.
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its current mode.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 void
 DrawMenuSeparator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, y, width, height)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are drawing */
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are drawing */
-    Drawable d;				/* What we are drawing into */
-    GC gc;				/* The gc we are drawing with */
-    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The precalculated font */
-    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The precalculated font metrics */
-    int x;				/* left edge */
-    int y;				/* top edge */
-    int width;				/* width of item */
-    int height;				/* height of item */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d;			/* What we are drawing into */
+    GC gc;			/* The gc we are drawing with */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    int x;			/* left edge */
+    int y;			/* top edge */
+    int width;			/* width of item */
+    int height;			/* height of item */
 {
     XPoint points[2];
     Tk_3DBorder border;
@@ -1855,7 +1847,7 @@ DrawMenuSeparator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, y, width, height)
     points[1].x = x + width - 1;
     points[1].y = points[0].y;
     border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderPtr);
-    Tk_Draw3DPolygon(menuPtr->tkwin, d, border, points, 2, 1, 
+    Tk_Draw3DPolygon(menuPtr->tkwin, d, border, points, 2, 1,
 	    TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
 }
 
@@ -1864,41 +1856,40 @@ DrawMenuSeparator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, y, width, height)
  *
  * DrawMenuUnderline --
  *
- *	On appropriate platforms, draw the underline character for the
- *	menu.
+ *	On appropriate platforms, draw the underline character for the menu.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
- *	current mode.
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its current mode.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static void
 DrawMenuUnderline(
-    TkMenu *menuPtr,			/* The menu to draw into */
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,			/* The entry we are drawing */
-    Drawable d,				/* What we are drawing into */
-    GC gc,				/* The gc to draw into */
-    Tk_Font tkfont,			/* The precalculated font */
-    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,	/* The precalculated font metrics */
-    int x,				/* Left Edge */
-    int y,				/* Top Edge */
-    int width,				/* Width of entry */
-    int height)				/* Height of entry */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* The menu to draw into */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,		/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d,			/* What we are drawing into */
+    GC gc,			/* The gc to draw into */
+    Tk_Font tkfont,		/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    int x,			/* Left Edge */
+    int y,			/* Top Edge */
+    int width,			/* Width of entry */
+    int height)			/* Height of entry */
 {
     if (mePtr->underline >= 0) {
-	char *label = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->labelPtr, NULL);
+	char *label = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->labelPtr);
 	CONST char *start = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(label, mePtr->underline);
 	CONST char *end = Tcl_UtfNext(start);
 
     	Tk_UnderlineChars(menuPtr->display, d,
     		gc, tkfont, label, x + mePtr->indicatorSpace,
-    		y + (height + fmPtr->ascent - fmPtr->descent) / 2, 
+    		y + (height + fmPtr->ascent - fmPtr->descent) / 2,
 		(int) (start - label), (int) (end - label));
-    }		
+    }
 }
 
 /*
@@ -1906,17 +1897,16 @@ DrawMenuUnderline(
  *
  * TkWinMenuKeyObjCmd --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked when keys related to pulling
- *	down menus is pressed. The corresponding Windows events
- *	are generated and passed to DefWindowProc if appropriate.
- *	This cmd is registered as tk::WinMenuKey in the interp.
+ *	This function is invoked when keys related to pulling down menus is
+ *	pressed. The corresponding Windows events are generated and passed to
+ *	DefWindowProc if appropriate. This cmd is registered as tk::WinMenuKey
+ *	in the interp.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Always returns TCL_OK.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	The menu system may take over and process user events
- *	for menu input.
+ *	The menu system may take over and process user events for menu input.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -1948,13 +1938,13 @@ TkWinMenuKeyObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	Tk_MainWindow(interp));
 
     if (tkwin == NULL) {
-        return TCL_ERROR;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
 
     winPtr = (TkWindow *)tkwin;
 
     if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[2], &i) != TCL_OK) {
-        return TCL_ERROR;
+	return TCL_ERROR;
     }
     keySym = i;
 
@@ -1963,8 +1953,7 @@ TkWinMenuKeyObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 	case XK_Alt_L:
 	    scanCode = MapVirtualKey(VK_LMENU, 0);
 	    CallWindowProc(DefWindowProc, Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin)),
-		    WM_SYSKEYDOWN, VK_MENU, (scanCode << 16)
-		    | (1 << 29));
+		    WM_SYSKEYDOWN, VK_MENU, (scanCode << 16) | (1 << 29));
 	    break;
 	case XK_Alt_R:
 	    scanCode = MapVirtualKey(VK_RMENU, 0);
@@ -1987,8 +1976,7 @@ TkWinMenuKeyObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
 		if (eventPtr->xkey.nbytes > 0) {
 		    for (i = 0; i < eventPtr->xkey.nbytes; i++) {
 			CallWindowProc(DefWindowProc,
-				Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin)),
-				WM_SYSCHAR,
+				Tk_GetHWND(Tk_WindowId(tkwin)), WM_SYSCHAR,
 				eventPtr->xkey.trans_chars[i],
 				((scanCode << 16) | (1 << 29)));
 		    }
@@ -2033,86 +2021,63 @@ TkWinMenuKeyObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv)
  *
  * TkpInitializeMenuBindings --
  *
- *	For every interp, initializes the bindings for Windows
- *	menus. Does nothing on Mac or XWindows.
+ *	For every interp, initializes the bindings for Windows menus. Does
+ *	nothing on Mac or XWindows.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	bindings are setup for the interp which will
- *	handle Alt-key sequences for menus without beeping
- *	or interfering with user-defined Alt-key bindings.
+ *	bindings are setup for the interp which will handle Alt-key sequences
+ *	for menus without beeping or interfering with user-defined Alt-key
+ *	bindings.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
 TkpInitializeMenuBindings(interp, bindingTable)
-    Tcl_Interp *interp;		    /* The interpreter to set. */
-    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;   /* The table to add to. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The interpreter to set. */
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;
+				/* The table to add to. */
 {
     Tk_Uid uid = Tk_GetUid("all");
 
     /*
-     * We need to set up the bindings for menubars. These have to
-     * recreate windows events, so we need to invoke C code to
-     * generate the WM_SYSKEYDOWNS and WM_SYSKEYUPs appropriately.
-     * Trick is, we can't create a C level binding directly since
-     * we may want to modify the binding in Tcl code.
+     * We need to set up the bindings for menubars. These have to recreate
+     * windows events, so we need to invoke C code to generate the
+     * WM_SYSKEYDOWNS and WM_SYSKEYUPs appropriately. Trick is, we can't
+     * create a C level binding directly since we may want to modify the
+     * binding in Tcl code.
      */
 
     (void) Tcl_CreateObjCommand(interp, "tk::WinMenuKey",
 	    TkWinMenuKeyObjCmd,
 	    (ClientData) Tk_MainWindow(interp), (Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *) NULL);
 
-    (void) Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable,
-        (ClientData) uid,
-        "<Alt_L>",
-        "tk::WinMenuKey %W %N",
-        0);
-
-    (void) Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable,
-        (ClientData) uid,
-        "<KeyRelease-Alt_L>",
-        "tk::WinMenuKey %W %N",
-        0);
-
-    (void) Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable,
-        (ClientData) uid,
-        "<Alt_R>",
-        "tk::WinMenuKey %W %N",
-        0);
-
-    (void) Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable,
-        (ClientData) uid,
-        "<KeyRelease-Alt_R>",
-        "tk::WinMenuKey %W %N",
-        0);
-
-    (void) Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable,
-        (ClientData) uid,
-        "<Alt-KeyPress>",
-        "tk::WinMenuKey %W %N",
-        0);
-
-    (void) Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable,
-        (ClientData) uid,
-        "<Alt-KeyRelease>",
-        "tk::WinMenuKey %W %N",
-        0);
-
-    (void) Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable,
-        (ClientData) uid,
-        "<KeyPress-F10>",
-        "tk::WinMenuKey %W %N",
-        0);
-
-    (void) Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable,
-        (ClientData) uid,
-        "<KeyRelease-F10>",
-        "tk::WinMenuKey %W %N",
-        0);
+    (void) Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable, (ClientData) uid,
+	    "<Alt_L>", "tk::WinMenuKey %W %N", 0);
+
+    (void) Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable, (ClientData) uid,
+	    "<KeyRelease-Alt_L>", "tk::WinMenuKey %W %N", 0);
+
+    (void) Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable, (ClientData) uid,
+	    "<Alt_R>", "tk::WinMenuKey %W %N", 0);
+
+    (void) Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable, (ClientData) uid,
+	    "<KeyRelease-Alt_R>", "tk::WinMenuKey %W %N", 0);
+
+    (void) Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable, (ClientData) uid,
+	    "<Alt-KeyPress>", "tk::WinMenuKey %W %N", 0);
+
+    (void) Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable, (ClientData) uid,
+	    "<Alt-KeyRelease>", "tk::WinMenuKey %W %N", 0);
+
+    (void) Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable, (ClientData) uid,
+	    "<KeyPress-F10>", "tk::WinMenuKey %W %N", 0);
+
+    (void) Tk_CreateBinding(interp, bindingTable, (ClientData) uid,
+	    "<KeyRelease-F10>", "tk::WinMenuKey %W %N", 0);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -2120,7 +2085,7 @@ TkpInitializeMenuBindings(interp, bindingTable)
  *
  * DrawMenuEntryLabel --
  *
- *	This procedure draws the label part of a menu.
+ *	This function draws the label part of a menu.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2131,20 +2096,21 @@ TkpInitializeMenuBindings(interp, bindingTable)
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
+
 static void
 DrawMenuEntryLabel(
-    TkMenu *menuPtr,			/* The menu we are drawing */
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,			/* The entry we are drawing */
-    Drawable d,				/* What we are drawing into */
-    GC gc,				/* The gc we are drawing into */
-    Tk_Font tkfont,			/* The precalculated font */
-    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,	/* The precalculated font metrics */
-    int x,				/* left edge */
-    int y,				/* right edge */
-    int width,				/* width of entry */
-    int height)				/* height of entry */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,		/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d,			/* What we are drawing into */
+    GC gc,			/* The gc we are drawing into */
+    Tk_Font tkfont,		/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    int x,			/* left edge */
+    int y,			/* right edge */
+    int width,			/* width of entry */
+    int height)			/* height of entry */
 {
-    int indicatorSpace =  mePtr->indicatorSpace;
+    int indicatorSpace = mePtr->indicatorSpace;
     int activeBorderWidth;
     int leftEdge;
     int imageHeight, imageWidth;
@@ -2163,21 +2129,22 @@ DrawMenuEntryLabel(
 
     if (mePtr->image != NULL) {
     	Tk_SizeOfImage(mePtr->image, &imageWidth, &imageHeight);
-        haveImage = 1;
+	haveImage = 1;
     } else if (mePtr->bitmapPtr != NULL) {
 	Pixmap bitmap = Tk_GetBitmapFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, mePtr->bitmapPtr);
 	Tk_SizeOfBitmap(menuPtr->display, bitmap, &imageWidth, &imageHeight);
 	haveImage = 1;
     }
     if (!haveImage || (mePtr->compound != COMPOUND_NONE)) {
-        if (mePtr->labelLength > 0) {
-	    char *label = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->labelPtr, NULL);
+	if (mePtr->labelLength > 0) {
+	    char *label = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->labelPtr);
+
 	    textWidth = Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, label, mePtr->labelLength);
 	    textHeight = fmPtr->linespace;
 	    haveText = 1;
-        }
+	}
     }
-    
+
     /*
      * Now work out what the relative positions are.
      */
@@ -2185,56 +2152,53 @@ DrawMenuEntryLabel(
     if (haveImage && haveText) {
 	int fullWidth = (imageWidth > textWidth ? imageWidth : textWidth);
 	switch ((enum compound) mePtr->compound) {
-	    case COMPOUND_TOP: {
-		textXOffset = (fullWidth - textWidth)/2;
-		textYOffset = imageHeight/2 + 2;
-		imageXOffset = (fullWidth - imageWidth)/2;
-		imageYOffset = -textHeight/2;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: {
-		textXOffset = (fullWidth - textWidth)/2;
-		textYOffset = -imageHeight/2;
-		imageXOffset = (fullWidth - imageWidth)/2;
-		imageYOffset = textHeight/2 + 2;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case COMPOUND_LEFT: {
-		/*
-		 * The standard image position on Windows is in the indicator
-		 * space to the left of the entries, unless this entry is a
-		 * radio|check button because then the indicator space will
-		 * be used.
-		 */
-		textXOffset = imageWidth + 2;
-		textYOffset = 0;
-		imageXOffset = 0;
-		imageYOffset = 0;
-		if ((mePtr->type != CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY) 
-			&& (mePtr->type != RADIO_BUTTON_ENTRY)) {
-		    textXOffset -= indicatorSpace;
-		    if (textXOffset < 0) {
-			textXOffset = 0;
-		    }
-		    imageXOffset = -indicatorSpace;
+	case COMPOUND_TOP:
+	    textXOffset = (fullWidth - textWidth)/2;
+	    textYOffset = imageHeight/2 + 2;
+	    imageXOffset = (fullWidth - imageWidth)/2;
+	    imageYOffset = -textHeight/2;
+	    break;
+	case COMPOUND_BOTTOM:
+	    textXOffset = (fullWidth - textWidth)/2;
+	    textYOffset = -imageHeight/2;
+	    imageXOffset = (fullWidth - imageWidth)/2;
+	    imageYOffset = textHeight/2 + 2;
+	    break;
+	case COMPOUND_LEFT:
+	    /*
+	     * The standard image position on Windows is in the indicator
+	     * space to the left of the entries, unless this entry is a
+	     * radio|check button because then the indicator space will be
+	     * used.
+	     */
+
+	    textXOffset = imageWidth + 2;
+	    textYOffset = 0;
+	    imageXOffset = 0;
+	    imageYOffset = 0;
+	    if ((mePtr->type != CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY)
+		    && (mePtr->type != RADIO_BUTTON_ENTRY)) {
+		textXOffset -= indicatorSpace;
+		if (textXOffset < 0) {
+		    textXOffset = 0;
 		}
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case COMPOUND_RIGHT: {
-		textXOffset = 0;
-		textYOffset = 0;
-		imageXOffset = textWidth + 2;
-		imageYOffset = 0;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    case COMPOUND_CENTER: {
-		textXOffset = (fullWidth - textWidth)/2;
-		textYOffset = 0;
-		imageXOffset = (fullWidth - imageWidth)/2;
-		imageYOffset = 0;
-		break;
+		imageXOffset = -indicatorSpace;
 	    }
-	    case COMPOUND_NONE: {break;}
+	    break;
+	case COMPOUND_RIGHT:
+	    textXOffset = 0;
+	    textYOffset = 0;
+	    imageXOffset = textWidth + 2;
+	    imageYOffset = 0;
+	    break;
+	case COMPOUND_CENTER:
+	    textXOffset = (fullWidth - textWidth)/2;
+	    textYOffset = 0;
+	    imageXOffset = (fullWidth - imageWidth)/2;
+	    imageYOffset = 0;
+	    break;
+	case COMPOUND_NONE:
+	    break;
 	}
     } else {
 	textXOffset = 0;
@@ -2242,7 +2206,7 @@ DrawMenuEntryLabel(
 	imageXOffset = 0;
 	imageYOffset = 0;
     }
-    
+
     /*
      * Draw label and/or bitmap or image for entry.
      */
@@ -2252,42 +2216,45 @@ DrawMenuEntryLabel(
 	    	&& (mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_SELECTED)) {
 	    Tk_RedrawImage(mePtr->selectImage, 0, 0,
 		    imageWidth, imageHeight, d, leftEdge + imageXOffset,
-	            (int) (y + (mePtr->height - imageHeight)/2 + imageYOffset));
+		    (int) (y + (mePtr->height-imageHeight)/2 + imageYOffset));
     	} else {
 	    Tk_RedrawImage(mePtr->image, 0, 0, imageWidth,
 		    imageHeight, d, leftEdge + imageXOffset,
-		    (int) (y + (mePtr->height - imageHeight)/2 + imageYOffset));
+		    (int) (y + (mePtr->height-imageHeight)/2 + imageYOffset));
     	}
     } else if (mePtr->bitmapPtr != NULL) {
 	Pixmap bitmap = Tk_GetBitmapFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, mePtr->bitmapPtr);
-    	XCopyPlane(menuPtr->display, bitmap, d,	gc, 0, 0, 
-		(unsigned) imageWidth, (unsigned) imageHeight, 
+    	XCopyPlane(menuPtr->display, bitmap, d,	gc, 0, 0,
+		(unsigned) imageWidth, (unsigned) imageHeight,
 		leftEdge + imageXOffset,
 		(int) (y + (mePtr->height - imageHeight)/2 + imageYOffset), 1);
     }
     if ((mePtr->compound != COMPOUND_NONE) || !haveImage) {
     	if (mePtr->labelLength > 0) {
 	    int baseline = y + (height + fmPtr->ascent - fmPtr->descent) / 2;
-	    char *label = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->labelPtr, NULL);
+	    char *label = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->labelPtr);
+
 	    if (TkWinGetPlatformTheme() == TK_THEME_WIN_CLASSIC) {
-	        /* Win 95/98 systems draw disabled menu text with a
-	         * 3D highlight, unless the menu item is highlighted */
-	        if ((mePtr->state == ENTRY_DISABLED) &&
-	                ((mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_PLATFORM_FLAG1) == 0)) {
-	            COLORREF oldFgColor = gc->foreground;
+		/*
+		 * Win 95/98 systems draw disabled menu text with a 3D
+		 * highlight, unless the menu item is highlighted,
+		 */
+
+		if ((mePtr->state == ENTRY_DISABLED) &&
+			((mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_PLATFORM_FLAG1) == 0)) {
+		    COLORREF oldFgColor = gc->foreground;
 		    gc->foreground = GetSysColor(COLOR_3DHILIGHT);
-	            Tk_DrawChars(menuPtr->display, d, gc, tkfont, label, 
-		            mePtr->labelLength, leftEdge + textXOffset + 1, 
-		            baseline + textYOffset + 1);
+		    Tk_DrawChars(menuPtr->display, d, gc, tkfont, label,
+			    mePtr->labelLength, leftEdge + textXOffset + 1,
+			    baseline + textYOffset + 1);
 		    gc->foreground = oldFgColor;
-	        }
+		}
 	    }
-	    Tk_DrawChars(menuPtr->display, d, gc, tkfont, label, 
-		    mePtr->labelLength, leftEdge + textXOffset, 
+	    Tk_DrawChars(menuPtr->display, d, gc, tkfont, label,
+		    mePtr->labelLength, leftEdge + textXOffset,
 		    baseline + textYOffset);
-	    DrawMenuUnderline(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, 
-	            x + textXOffset, y + textYOffset,
-		    width, height);
+	    DrawMenuUnderline(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr,
+		    x + textXOffset, y + textYOffset, width, height);
 	}
     }
 
@@ -2295,7 +2262,7 @@ DrawMenuEntryLabel(
 	if (menuPtr->disabledFgPtr == NULL) {
 	    XFillRectangle(menuPtr->display, d, menuPtr->disabledGC, x, y,
 		    (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height);
-	} else if ((mePtr->image != NULL) 
+	} else if ((mePtr->image != NULL)
 		&& (menuPtr->disabledImageGC != None)) {
 	    XFillRectangle(menuPtr->display, d, menuPtr->disabledImageGC,
 		    leftEdge + imageXOffset,
@@ -2310,16 +2277,15 @@ DrawMenuEntryLabel(
  *
  * TkpComputeMenubarGeometry --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to recompute the size and
- *	layout of a menu that is a menubar clone.
+ *	This function is invoked to recompute the size and layout of a menu
+ *	that is a menubar clone.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Fields of menu entries are changed to reflect their
- *	current positions, and the size of the menu window
- *	itself may be changed.
+ *	Fields of menu entries are changed to reflect their current positions,
+ *	and the size of the menu window itself may be changed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -2336,26 +2302,25 @@ TkpComputeMenubarGeometry(menuPtr)
  *
  * DrawTearoffEntry --
  *
- *	This procedure draws the background part of a menu.
+ *	This function draws the background part of a menu.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
- *	current mode.
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its current mode.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 void
 DrawTearoffEntry(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, y, width, height)
-    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are drawing */
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are drawing */
-    Drawable d;				/* The drawable we are drawing into */
-    GC gc;				/* The gc we are drawing with */
-    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The font we are drawing with */
-    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The metrics we are drawing with */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d;			/* The drawable we are drawing into */
+    GC gc;			/* The gc we are drawing with */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* The font we are drawing with */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;/* The metrics we are drawing with */
     int x;
     int y;
     int width;
@@ -2368,12 +2333,12 @@ DrawTearoffEntry(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, y, width, height)
     if (menuPtr->menuType != MASTER_MENU) {
 	return;
     }
-    
+
     points[0].x = x;
     points[0].y = y + height/2;
     points[1].y = points[0].y;
     segmentWidth = 6;
-    maxX  = width - 1;
+    maxX = width - 1;
     border = Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->borderPtr);
 
     while (points[0].x < maxX) {
@@ -2395,21 +2360,20 @@ DrawTearoffEntry(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, y, width, height)
  *	Processes configurations for menu entries.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns standard TCL result. If TCL_ERROR is returned, then
- *	the interp's result contains an error message.
+ *	Returns standard TCL result. If TCL_ERROR is returned, then the
+ *	interp's result contains an error message.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Configuration information get set for mePtr; old resources
- *	get freed, if any need it.
+ *	Configuration information get set for mePtr; old resources get freed,
+ *	if any need it.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 int
 TkpConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr)
-    register TkMenuEntry *mePtr;	/* Information about menu entry;  may
-					 * or may not already have values for
-					 * some fields. */
+    register TkMenuEntry *mePtr;/* Information about menu entry; may or may
+				 * not already have values for some fields. */
 {
     TkMenu *menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
 
@@ -2425,8 +2389,8 @@ TkpConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr)
  *
  * TkpDrawMenuEntry --
  *
- *	Draws the given menu entry at the given coordinates with the
- *	given attributes.
+ *	Draws the given menu entry at the given coordinates with the given
+ *	attributes.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2438,21 +2402,21 @@ TkpConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr)
  */
 
 void
-TkpDrawMenuEntry(mePtr, d, tkfont, menuMetricsPtr, x, y, width, height, 
+TkpDrawMenuEntry(mePtr, d, tkfont, menuMetricsPtr, x, y, width, height,
 	strictMotif, drawArrow)
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		    /* The entry to draw */
-    Drawable d;			    /* What to draw into */
-    Tk_Font tkfont;		    /* Precalculated font for menu */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		/* The entry to draw */
+    Drawable d;			/* What to draw into */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Precalculated font for menu */
     CONST Tk_FontMetrics *menuMetricsPtr;
-				    /* Precalculated metrics for menu */
-    int x;			    /* X-coordinate of topleft of entry */
-    int y;			    /* Y-coordinate of topleft of entry */
-    int width;			    /* Width of the entry rectangle */
-    int height;			    /* Height of the current rectangle */
-    int strictMotif;		    /* Boolean flag */
-    int drawArrow;		    /* Whether or not to draw the cascade
-				     * arrow for cascade items. Only applies
-				     * to Windows. */
+				/* Precalculated metrics for menu */
+    int x;			/* X-coordinate of topleft of entry */
+    int y;			/* Y-coordinate of topleft of entry */
+    int width;			/* Width of the entry rectangle */
+    int height;			/* Height of the current rectangle */
+    int strictMotif;		/* Boolean flag */
+    int drawArrow;		/* Whether or not to draw the cascade arrow
+				 * for cascade items. Only applies to
+				 * Windows. */
 {
     GC gc, indicatorGC;
     TkMenu *menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
@@ -2476,11 +2440,11 @@ TkpDrawMenuEntry(mePtr, d, tkfont, menuMetricsPtr, x, y, width, height,
     	TkMenuEntry *cascadeEntryPtr;
     	int parentDisabled = 0;
 	char *name;
-    	
+
     	for (cascadeEntryPtr = menuPtr->menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr;
     		cascadeEntryPtr != NULL;
     		cascadeEntryPtr = cascadeEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr) {
-	    name = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(cascadeEntryPtr->namePtr, NULL);
+	    name = Tcl_GetString(cascadeEntryPtr->namePtr);
     	    if (strcmp(name, Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin)) == 0) {
     	    	if (mePtr->state == ENTRY_DISABLED) {
     	    	    parentDisabled = 1;
@@ -2527,16 +2491,16 @@ TkpDrawMenuEntry(mePtr, d, tkfont, menuMetricsPtr, x, y, width, height,
     }
 
     /*
-     * Need to draw the entire background, including padding. On Unix,
-     * for menubars, we have to draw the rest of the entry taking
-     * into account the padding.
+     * Need to draw the entire background, including padding. On Unix, for
+     * menubars, we have to draw the rest of the entry taking into account the
+     * padding.
      */
-    
-    DrawMenuEntryBackground(menuPtr, mePtr, d, activeBorder, 
+
+    DrawMenuEntryBackground(menuPtr, mePtr, d, activeBorder,
 	    bgBorder, x, y, width, height);
-    
+
     if (mePtr->type == SEPARATOR_ENTRY) {
-	DrawMenuSeparator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, 
+	DrawMenuSeparator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont,
 		fmPtr, x, adjustedY, width, adjustedHeight);
     } else if (mePtr->type == TEAROFF_ENTRY) {
 	DrawTearoffEntry(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, adjustedY,
@@ -2574,17 +2538,16 @@ TkpDrawMenuEntry(mePtr, d, tkfont, menuMetricsPtr, x, y, width, height,
 
 static void
 GetMenuLabelGeometry(mePtr, tkfont, fmPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are computing */
-    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The precalculated font */
-    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The precalculated metrics */
-    int *widthPtr;			/* The resulting width of the label
-					 * portion */
-    int *heightPtr;			/* The resulting height of the label
-					 * portion */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		/* The entry we are computing */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;/* The precalculated metrics */
+    int *widthPtr;		/* The resulting width of the label portion */
+    int *heightPtr;		/* The resulting height of the label
+				 * portion */
 {
     TkMenu *menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
     int haveImage = 0, haveText = 0;
- 
+
     if (mePtr->image != NULL) {
     	Tk_SizeOfImage(mePtr->image, widthPtr, heightPtr);
 	haveImage = 1;
@@ -2596,54 +2559,72 @@ GetMenuLabelGeometry(mePtr, tkfont, fmPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
 	*heightPtr = 0;
 	*widthPtr = 0;
     }
-    	
+
     if (haveImage && (mePtr->compound == COMPOUND_NONE)) {
-	/* We don't care about the text in this case */
+	/*
+	 * We don't care about the text in this case.
+	 */
     } else {
-	/* Either it is compound or we don't have an image */
+	/*
+	 * Either it is compound or we don't have an image,
+	 */
+
     	if (mePtr->labelPtr != NULL) {
 	    int textWidth;
-	    char *label = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(mePtr->labelPtr, NULL);
+	    char *label = Tcl_GetString(mePtr->labelPtr);
+
 	    textWidth = Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, label, mePtr->labelLength);
 
 	    if ((mePtr->compound != COMPOUND_NONE) && haveImage) {
 		switch ((enum compound) mePtr->compound) {
-		    case COMPOUND_TOP:
-		    case COMPOUND_BOTTOM: {
-			if (textWidth > *widthPtr) {
-			    *widthPtr = textWidth;
-			}
-			/* Add text and padding */
-			*heightPtr += fmPtr->linespace + 2;
-			break;
+		case COMPOUND_TOP:
+		case COMPOUND_BOTTOM:
+		    if (textWidth > *widthPtr) {
+			*widthPtr = textWidth;
 		    }
-		    case COMPOUND_LEFT:
-		    case COMPOUND_RIGHT: {
-			if (fmPtr->linespace > *heightPtr) {
-			    *heightPtr = fmPtr->linespace;
-			}
-			/* Add text and padding */
-			*widthPtr += textWidth + 2;
-			break;
+
+		    /*
+		     * Add text and padding.
+		     */
+
+		    *heightPtr += fmPtr->linespace + 2;
+		    break;
+		case COMPOUND_LEFT:
+		case COMPOUND_RIGHT:
+		    if (fmPtr->linespace > *heightPtr) {
+			*heightPtr = fmPtr->linespace;
 		    }
-		    case COMPOUND_CENTER: {
-			if (fmPtr->linespace > *heightPtr) {
-			    *heightPtr = fmPtr->linespace;
-			}
-			if (textWidth > *widthPtr) {
-			    *widthPtr = textWidth;
-			}
-			break;
+
+		    /*
+		     * Add text and padding.
+		     */
+
+		    *widthPtr += textWidth + 2;
+		    break;
+		case COMPOUND_CENTER:
+		    if (fmPtr->linespace > *heightPtr) {
+			*heightPtr = fmPtr->linespace;
+		    }
+		    if (textWidth > *widthPtr) {
+			*widthPtr = textWidth;
 		    }
-		    case COMPOUND_NONE: {break;}
+		    break;
+		case COMPOUND_NONE:
+		    break;
 		}
-    	} else {
-		/* We don't have an image or we're not compound */
+	    } else {
+		/*
+		 * We don't have an image or we're not compound.
+		 */
+
 		*heightPtr = fmPtr->linespace;
 		*widthPtr = textWidth;
 	    }
 	} else {
-	    /* An empty entry still has this height */
+	    /*
+	     * An empty entry still has this height.
+	     */
+
 	    *heightPtr = fmPtr->linespace;
     	}
     }
@@ -2655,36 +2636,35 @@ GetMenuLabelGeometry(mePtr, tkfont, fmPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
  *
  * DrawMenuEntryBackground --
  *
- *	This procedure draws the background part of a menu.
+ *	This function draws the background part of a menu.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
- *	current mode.
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its current mode.
  *
  *----------------------------------------------------------------------
  */
 
 static void
 DrawMenuEntryBackground(
-    TkMenu *menuPtr,			/* The menu we are drawing. */
-    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,			/* The entry we are drawing. */
-    Drawable d,				/* What we are drawing into */
-    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder,		/* Border for active items */
-    Tk_3DBorder bgBorder,		/* Border for the background */
-    int x,				/* left edge */
-    int y,				/* top edge */
-    int width,				/* width of rectangle to draw */
-    int height)				/* height of rectangle to draw */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr,		/* The menu we are drawing. */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr,		/* The entry we are drawing. */
+    Drawable d,			/* What we are drawing into */
+    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder,	/* Border for active items */
+    Tk_3DBorder bgBorder,	/* Border for the background */
+    int x,			/* left edge */
+    int y,			/* top edge */
+    int width,			/* width of rectangle to draw */
+    int height)			/* height of rectangle to draw */
 {
-    if (mePtr->state == ENTRY_ACTIVE 
+    if (mePtr->state == ENTRY_ACTIVE
 		|| (mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_PLATFORM_FLAG1)!=0 ) {
 	bgBorder = activeBorder;
     }
-    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(menuPtr->tkwin, d, bgBorder,
-    	    x, y, width, height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(menuPtr->tkwin, d, bgBorder, x, y, width, height, 0,
+	    TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
 }
 
 /*
@@ -2692,16 +2672,15 @@ DrawMenuEntryBackground(
  *
  * TkpComputeStandardMenuGeometry --
  *
- *	This procedure is invoked to recompute the size and
- *	layout of a menu that is not a menubar clone.
+ *	This function is invoked to recompute the size and layout of a menu
+ *	that is not a menubar clone.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
  *
  * Side effects:
- *	Fields of menu entries are changed to reflect their
- *	current positions, and the size of the menu window
- *	itself may be changed.
+ *	Fields of menu entries are changed to reflect their current positions,
+ *	and the size of the menu window itself may be changed.
  *
  *--------------------------------------------------------------
  */
@@ -2716,26 +2695,25 @@ TkpComputeStandardMenuGeometry(
     int windowWidth, windowHeight, accelSpace;
     int i, j, lastColumnBreak = 0;
     int activeBorderWidth, borderWidth;
-    
+
     if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
 	return;
     }
 
-    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr->tkwin, 
+    Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(menuPtr->interp, menuPtr->tkwin,
 	    menuPtr->borderWidthPtr, &borderWidth);
     x = y = borderWidth;
     indicatorSpace = labelWidth = accelWidth = 0;
     windowHeight = 0;
 
     /*
-     * On the Mac especially, getting font metrics can be quite slow,
-     * so we want to do it intelligently. We are going to precalculate
-     * them and pass them down to all of the measuring and drawing
-     * routines. We will measure the font metrics of the menu once.
-     * If an entry does not have its own font set, then we give
-     * the geometry/drawing routines the menu's font and metrics.
-     * If an entry has its own font, we will measure that font and
-     * give all of the geometry/drawing the entry's font and metrics.
+     * On the Mac especially, getting font metrics can be quite slow, so we
+     * want to do it intelligently. We are going to precalculate them and pass
+     * them down to all of the measuring and drawing routines. We will measure
+     * the font metrics of the menu once. If an entry does not have its own
+     * font set, then we give the geometry/drawing routines the menu's font
+     * and metrics. If an entry has its own font, we will measure that font
+     * and give all of the geometry/drawing the entry's font and metrics.
      */
 
     menuFont = Tk_GetFontFromObj(menuPtr->tkwin, menuPtr->fontPtr);
@@ -2778,28 +2756,27 @@ TkpComputeStandardMenuGeometry(
 	    	    fmPtr, &width, &height);
 	    menuPtr->entries[i]->height = height;
 	} else if (menuPtr->entries[i]->type == TEAROFF_ENTRY) {
-	    GetTearoffEntryGeometry(menuPtr, menuPtr->entries[i], tkfont, 
+	    GetTearoffEntryGeometry(menuPtr, menuPtr->entries[i], tkfont,
 	    	    fmPtr, &width, &height);
 	    menuPtr->entries[i]->height = height;
+
 	} else {
-	    
 	    /*
-	     * For each entry, compute the height required by that
-	     * particular entry, plus three widths:  the width of the
-	     * label, the width to allow for an indicator to be displayed
-	     * to the left of the label (if any), and the width of the
-	     * accelerator to be displayed to the right of the label
-	     * (if any).  These sizes depend, of course, on the type
-	     * of the entry.
+	     * For each entry, compute the height required by that particular
+	     * entry, plus three widths: the width of the label, the width to
+	     * allow for an indicator to be displayed to the left of the label
+	     * (if any), and the width of the accelerator to be displayed to
+	     * the right of the label (if any). These sizes depend, of course,
+	     * on the type of the entry.
 	     */
-	    
+
 	    GetMenuLabelGeometry(menuPtr->entries[i], tkfont, fmPtr, &width,
 	    	    &height);
 	    menuPtr->entries[i]->height = height;
 	    if (width > labelWidth) {
 	    	labelWidth = width;
 	    }
-	
+
 	    GetMenuAccelGeometry(menuPtr, menuPtr->entries[i], tkfont,
 		    fmPtr, &width, &height);
 	    if (height > menuPtr->entries[i]->height) {
@@ -2809,7 +2786,7 @@ TkpComputeStandardMenuGeometry(
 	    	accelWidth = width;
 	    }
 
-	    GetMenuIndicatorGeometry(menuPtr, menuPtr->entries[i], tkfont, 
+	    GetMenuIndicatorGeometry(menuPtr, menuPtr->entries[i], tkfont,
 	    	    fmPtr, &width, &height);
 	    if (height > menuPtr->entries[i]->height) {
 	    	menuPtr->entries[i]->height = height;
@@ -2820,7 +2797,7 @@ TkpComputeStandardMenuGeometry(
 
 	    menuPtr->entries[i]->height += 2 * activeBorderWidth + 1;
     	}
-        menuPtr->entries[i]->y = y;
+	menuPtr->entries[i]->y = y;
 	y += menuPtr->entries[i]->height;
 	if (y > windowHeight) {
 	    windowHeight = y;
@@ -2843,10 +2820,10 @@ TkpComputeStandardMenuGeometry(
 
 
     windowHeight += borderWidth;
-    
+
     /*
-     * The X server doesn't like zero dimensions, so round up to at least
-     * 1 (a zero-sized menu should never really occur, anyway).
+     * The X server doesn't like zero dimensions, so round up to at least 1 (a
+     * zero-sized menu should never really occur, anyway).
      */
 
     if (windowWidth <= 0) {
@@ -2864,8 +2841,8 @@ TkpComputeStandardMenuGeometry(
  *
  * MenuSelectEvent --
  *
- *	Generates a "MenuSelect" virtual event. This can be used to
- *	do context-sensitive menu help.
+ *	Generates a "MenuSelect" virtual event. This can be used to do
+ *	context-sensitive menu help.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2883,7 +2860,7 @@ MenuSelectEvent(
     XVirtualEvent event;
     POINTS rootPoint;
     DWORD msgPos;
-   
+
     event.type = VirtualEvent;
     event.serial = menuPtr->display->request;
     event.send_event = 0;
@@ -2893,7 +2870,7 @@ MenuSelectEvent(
     event.root = XRootWindow(menuPtr->display, 0);
     event.subwindow = None;
     event.time = TkpGetMS();
-    
+
     msgPos = GetMessagePos();
     rootPoint = MAKEPOINTS(msgPos);
     event.x_root = rootPoint.x;
@@ -2911,8 +2888,8 @@ MenuSelectEvent(
  * TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate --
  *
  *	This routine reconfigures the menu and the clones indicated by
- *	menuName becuase a toplevel has been created and any system
- *	menus need to be created.
+ *	menuName becuase a toplevel has been created and any system menus need
+ *	to be created.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2925,9 +2902,8 @@ MenuSelectEvent(
 
 void
 TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate(
-    Tcl_Interp *interp,			/* The interp the menu lives in. */
-    char *menuName)			/* The name of the menu to 
-					 * reconfigure. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp,		/* The interp the menu lives in. */
+    char *menuName)		/* The name of the menu to reconfigure. */
 {
     TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
     TkMenu *menuPtr;
@@ -2937,10 +2913,10 @@ TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate(
 	if ((menuRefPtr != NULL) && (menuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL)) {
 	    for (menuPtr = menuRefPtr->menuPtr->masterMenuPtr; menuPtr != NULL;
 		    menuPtr = menuPtr->nextInstancePtr) {
-		if ((menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) 
+		if ((menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR)
 			&& !(menuPtr->menuFlags & MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING)) {
 		    menuPtr->menuFlags |= MENU_RECONFIGURE_PENDING;
-		    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ReconfigureWindowsMenu, 
+		    Tcl_DoWhenIdle(ReconfigureWindowsMenu,
 			    (ClientData) menuPtr);
 		}
 	    }
@@ -2953,8 +2929,8 @@ TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate(
  *
  * MenuExitHandler --
  *
- *	Throws away the utility window needed for menus and unregisters
- *	the class.
+ *	Throws away the utility window needed for menus and unregisters the
+ *	class.
  *
  * Results:
  *	None.
@@ -2969,8 +2945,8 @@ static void
 MenuExitHandler(
     ClientData clientData)	    /* Not used */
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     DestroyWindow(tsdPtr->menuHWND);
     UnregisterClass(MENU_CLASS_NAME, Tk_GetHINSTANCE());
@@ -2988,9 +2964,9 @@ MenuExitHandler(
  *	database name.
  *
  * Results:
- *	Returns a Tcl_Obj * with the default value. If there is no
- *	Windows-specific default for this attribute, returns NULL.
- *	This object has a ref count of 0.
+ *	Returns a Tcl_Obj* with the default value. If there is no
+ *	Windows-specific default for this attribute, returns NULL. This object
+ *	has a ref count of 0.
  *
  * Side effects:
  *	Storage is allocated.
@@ -3010,8 +2986,7 @@ TkWinGetMenuSystemDefault(
 	    (strcmp(dbName, "borderWidth") == 0)) {
 	valuePtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(defaultBorderWidth);
     } else if (strcmp(dbName, "font") == 0) {
-	valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tcl_DStringValue(&menuFontDString),
-		-1);
+	valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(Tcl_DStringValue(&menuFontDString), -1);
     }
 
     return valuePtr;
@@ -3036,14 +3011,14 @@ TkWinGetMenuSystemDefault(
 
 void
 SetDefaults(
-    int firstTime)		    /* Is this the first time this
-				     * has been called? */
+    int firstTime)		/* Is this the first time this has been
+				 * called? */
 {
     char sizeString[TCL_INTEGER_SPACE];
     char faceName[LF_FACESIZE];
     HDC scratchDC;
     Tcl_DString boldItalicDString;
-    int bold = 0; 
+    int bold = 0;
     int italic = 0;
     TEXTMETRIC tm;
     int pointSize;
@@ -3051,8 +3026,8 @@ SetDefaults(
     NONCLIENTMETRICS ncMetrics;
 
     /*
-     * Set all of the default options. The loop will terminate when we run 
-     * out of options via a break statement.
+     * Set all of the default options. The loop will terminate when we run out
+     * of options via a break statement.
      */
 
     defaultBorderWidth = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXBORDER);
@@ -3086,7 +3061,7 @@ SetDefaults(
     DeleteDC(scratchDC);
 
     DeleteObject(menuFont);
-    
+
     Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&menuFontDString, faceName);
     sprintf(sizeString, "%d", pointSize);
     Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&menuFontDString, sizeString);
@@ -3099,31 +3074,30 @@ SetDefaults(
 	if (italic == 1) {
 	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&boldItalicDString, "italic");
 	}
-	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&menuFontDString, 
+	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&menuFontDString,
 		Tcl_DStringValue(&boldItalicDString));
     }
 
     /*
      * Now we go ahead and get the dimensions of the check mark and the
-     * appropriate margins. Since this is fairly hairy, we do it here
-     * to save time when traversing large sets of menu items.
+     * appropriate margins. Since this is fairly hairy, we do it here to save
+     * time when traversing large sets of menu items.
      *
-     * The code below was given to me by Microsoft over the phone. It
-     * is the only way to insure menu items lining up, and is not
-     * documented.
+     * The code below was given to me by Microsoft over the phone. It is the
+     * only way to ensure menu items line up, and is not documented.
      */
 
     if (TkWinGetPlatformId() >= VER_PLATFORM_WIN32_WINDOWS) {
 	indicatorDimensions[0] = GetSystemMetrics(SM_CYMENUCHECK);
 	indicatorDimensions[1] = ((GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXFIXEDFRAME) +
-		GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXBORDER) 
+		GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXBORDER)
 		+ GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXMENUCHECK) + 7) & 0xFFF8)
 		- GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXFIXEDFRAME);
     } else {
 	DWORD dimensions = GetMenuCheckMarkDimensions();
 	indicatorDimensions[0] = HIWORD(dimensions);
 	indicatorDimensions[1] = LOWORD(dimensions);
-   }
+    }
 }
 
 /*
@@ -3146,8 +3120,8 @@ void
 TkpMenuInit()
 {
     WNDCLASS wndClass;
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     wndClass.style = CS_OWNDC;
     wndClass.lpfnWndProc = TkWinMenuProc;
@@ -3159,28 +3133,29 @@ TkpMenuInit()
     wndClass.hbrBackground = (HBRUSH)(COLOR_WINDOW + 1);
     wndClass.lpszMenuName = NULL;
     wndClass.lpszClassName = MENU_CLASS_NAME;
-    if(!RegisterClass(&wndClass)) {
-	panic("Failed to register menu window class.");
+    if (!RegisterClass(&wndClass)) {
+	Tcl_Panic("Failed to register menu window class.");
     }
 
     tsdPtr->menuHWND = CreateWindow(MENU_CLASS_NAME, "MenuWindow", WS_POPUP,
-	0, 0, 10, 10, NULL, NULL, Tk_GetHINSTANCE(), NULL);
+	    0, 0, 10, 10, NULL, NULL, Tk_GetHINSTANCE(), NULL);
 
-    if(!tsdPtr->menuHWND) {
-	panic("Failed to create the menu window.");
+    if (!tsdPtr->menuHWND) {
+	Tcl_Panic("Failed to create the menu window.");
     }
 
     wndClass.lpfnWndProc = TkWinEmbeddedMenuProc;
     wndClass.lpszClassName = EMBEDDED_MENU_CLASS_NAME;
-    if(!RegisterClass(&wndClass)) {
-	panic ("Failed to register embedded menu window class.");
+    if (!RegisterClass(&wndClass)) {
+	Tcl_Panic("Failed to register embedded menu window class.");
     }
 
-    tsdPtr->embeddedMenuHWND = CreateWindow(EMBEDDED_MENU_CLASS_NAME, "EmbeddedMenuWindow", WS_POPUP,
-	0, 0, 10, 10, NULL, NULL, Tk_GetHINSTANCE(), NULL);
+    tsdPtr->embeddedMenuHWND =
+	    CreateWindow(EMBEDDED_MENU_CLASS_NAME, "EmbeddedMenuWindow",
+	    WS_POPUP, 0, 0, 10, 10, NULL, NULL, Tk_GetHINSTANCE(), NULL);
 
-    if(!tsdPtr->embeddedMenuHWND) {
-	panic("Failed to create the embedded menu window.");
+    if (!tsdPtr->embeddedMenuHWND) {
+	Tcl_Panic("Failed to create the embedded menu window.");
     }
 
     TkCreateExitHandler(MenuExitHandler, (ClientData) NULL);
@@ -3192,11 +3167,10 @@ TkpMenuInit()
  *
  * Tk_GetMenuHWND --
  *
- *	This function returns the HWND of a hidden menu Window that
- *	processes messages of a popup menu.  This hidden menu window
- *	is used to handle either a dynamic popup menu in the same 
- *	process or a pull-down menu of an embedded window in a 
- *	different process.
+ *	This function returns the HWND of a hidden menu Window that processes
+ *	messages of a popup menu. This hidden menu window is used to handle
+ *	either a dynamic popup menu in the same process or a pull-down menu of
+ *	an embedded window in a different process.
  *
  * Results:
  *	Returns the HWND of the hidden menu Window.
@@ -3211,8 +3185,8 @@ HWND
 Tk_GetMenuHWND(tkwin)
     Tk_Window tkwin;
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
     TkMenuInit();
     return tsdPtr->embeddedMenuHWND;
 }
@@ -3236,9 +3210,17 @@ Tk_GetMenuHWND(tkwin)
 void
 TkpMenuThreadInit()
 {
-    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *) 
-            Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
+    ThreadSpecificData *tsdPtr = (ThreadSpecificData *)
+	    Tcl_GetThreadData(&dataKey, sizeof(ThreadSpecificData));
 
     Tcl_InitHashTable(&tsdPtr->winMenuTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
     Tcl_InitHashTable(&tsdPtr->commandTable, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS);
 }
+
+/*
+ * Local Variables:
+ * mode: c
+ * c-basic-offset: 4
+ * fill-column: 78
+ * End:
+ */